JP7361406B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines have been known.

Patent Document 1 describes that the lens member is moved from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the board to a position outside at least one edge of the board and beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the board. The lens member is formed of a reflective member that extends and is capable of reflecting light, and is located outside of at least one end of the substrate and beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. A gaming machine is disclosed in which a base member is provided at a position where light emitted from an end can be reflected .

JP2019-107322A

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to suppress unevenness in irradiation through the lens member and increase interest. However, gaming machines have a limited space for arranging light emitting means and the like. Even under such circumstances, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can perform a light-emitting effect to further enhance interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest .

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decorative device (for example, a first performance accessory 59E) that can perform a performance that is visible to the player,
The predetermined decorative device is
A substrate (for example, an LED board 5922E) on which a light emitting means (for example, a first front LED 5927E, a second front LED 5928E, a back LED 5929E) is arranged;
The light emitted from the light emitting means can be inputted to a production section (for example, the first light emitting section 59251E, the first light emitting section 59251E, the first light emitting section 59251E, 2 light emitting parts 59252E, the front end surface 59216E of the upright part 59212E) that can emit light (for example, the first lens 5925E, the flat plate part 59211E of the second lens 5921E, the upright part of the second lens 5921E) 59212E, third lens 5926E),
Equipped with
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a first front LED 5927E, a second front LED 5928E) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a back LED 5929E),
The substrate has a first light emitting means arranged on a first surface (for example, a front side surface), and a second light emitting means arranged on a second surface (for example, a rear side surface),
The lens portion is
It is possible to cause the light emitted from the first light emitting means to travel in the predetermined direction to cause a first effect part (for example, a first light emitting part 59251E, a second light emitting part 59252E) that is visible to the player to emit light. a first lens portion (for example, a first lens 5925E, a third lens 5926E),
causing light emitted from the second light emitting means disposed on the second surface, which is a different surface from the first light emitting means, to travel in substantially the same direction as the predetermined direction (for example, forward); a second lens section (for example, an upright section 59212E) that can cause a second effect section (for example, an end surface 59216E) to emit light that is visible to the player;
a third lens section (for example, a flat plate section 59211E) that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting means to travel in a specific direction (for example, to the side) different from the predetermined direction;
has
The second lens part is capable of causing the light that has traveled in the specific direction by the third lens part to travel in the predetermined direction,
The second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected, and the connecting portion (for example, a corner of the second lens 5921E) where the second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected is is formed in a shape that allows light traveling toward the predetermined direction to travel toward the predetermined direction;
The second light emitting means is
Consists of multiple light emitting means,
A first specific direction light emitting means (for example, a backside LED 5929aE) capable of emitting light in a first specific direction (for example, a direction within the range of A to C) among the specific directions; a second specific direction light emitting means (for example, a back side LED5929bE) capable of emitting light in a second specific direction (for example, a direction within the range from N to F) that is different from the first specific direction;
Equipped with
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, and (B) an example of a table showing the concept related to determining the stop mode of decorative symbols in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving counter update processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of ceiling counter update processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving transition determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process in a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving setting processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a pre-read per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a flowchart showing a pre-read performance pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a jackpot type look-ahead performance form changes. FIG. 7 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look ahead performance form. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the machine according to the game state. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in a third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko game machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in a fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then a jackpot type reach is performed. This is an image showing that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a jackpot type reach. It is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win look-ahead performance form to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form, and then a time-saving win type performance is performed. . This is an image showing that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a time-saving winning performance. FIG. 7 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a mode in which an image of an egg hatching is displayed at approximately the center of the display area. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the transition transition of the performance mode. (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the first presentation stage preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first preview performance. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the second preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the third preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th preview performance in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 4th notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the performance content of the notice after an icon stop in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 1st preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 1st preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 1st preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 2nd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 3rd notice performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the 4th preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the notice after an icon stop in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the notice after an icon stop in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining the example of the icon in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 1st performance stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 2nd performance stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 3rd presentation stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 6th preview performance in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice performance and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh preview performance. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of a stage change notice performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a stage change preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after a stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding ball in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding ball in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding ball in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the 1st starting opening prize winning in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change area determination process in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining the pre-read performance in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for explaining the pre-read performance in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the process at the start of the first special symbol variation in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process of determining whether or not a stage change occurs in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing stage count processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence lottery process in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a sub variation pattern selection table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a sub fluctuation pattern replacement table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the first performance stage. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the second presentation stage. (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the third presentation stage. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth preview performance and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of a logo lamp preview performance. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp preview performance. (c) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp preview performance. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-1 logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the second presentation stage logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-1 logo lamp preview content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the variable probability mode of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect determination process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start of a drum variation effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the reserved ball. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing processing when a jackpot occurs during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing at the end of the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball number counter addition processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing a result display process during bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (I) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (II) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (III) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing the remaining ST number adjustment processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the display remaining ST count update process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern pre-read effect processing in the variable probability mode in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol pre-reading performance processing in the variable probability mode in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the first performance stage. (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion preview performance. It is a flowchart which shows the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production block in the 6th specific super reach of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th specific super reach content lottery process in the 5th pachinko game machine. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage in the fifth pachinko game machine. (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview performance for the second performance stage in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview performance for the 2nd performance stage in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview performance for the 2nd performance stage in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the logo effect preview performance for the 2nd performance stage in the 5th pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a time chart showing performance control in a normal pattern related to transition to B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern; (B) A time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second normal pattern. This is an example of a display performance of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is a time chart showing performance control in an irregular pattern related to transition to B time-saving gaming state, the time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first irregular pattern (A) (B) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second irregular pattern; and (C) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the third irregular pattern. This is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 128. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit included in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball sorting device included in the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the game ball sorting device included in the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball sorting device included in the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of the external appearance perspective view when the base member, rotation distribution mechanism, croon, and guide member which the game ball distribution device of the 6th pachinko game machine has are seen from rear upward. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the guide member and the holding member of the game ball sorting device of the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction. It is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the second passage in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the game ball sorting device of the sixth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a diagram showing the flow of game balls distributed to the second passage, the third passage, and the fourth passage. It is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the first passage in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for low start in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time-saving regular figure determination processing in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving game management process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving game counter update process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving game counter determination process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of game mode transition in the sixth pachinko game machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of various probabilities for each game mode excluding the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of the A time saving termination condition determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for low start in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flag processing at the time of the opening of the accessory in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the seventh pachinko game machine. In the seventh pachinko game machine, it is a time chart showing an example of the transition of the game state when a jackpot or a role object release hit is derived to the special symbol display section, (A) A2 role object release in the time-saving game state. (B) A time chart showing the transition of the game state when a win is derived, and (B) a time chart showing the transition of the game state when a win for opening the accessory is derived in the A1 time-saving game state. It is a table showing an example of the relationship between the production mode and the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the production mode in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the production mode in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the A time saving end condition determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. A time chart showing an example of the transition of the gaming state controlled according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, (A) a time chart showing an example when the time saving limit function is activated, (B) the number of limits (C) is a time chart showing an example when the limit number is reset; and (C) is a time chart showing an example when the chance to reset the limit number is missed. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit included in a pachinko game machine according to a second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol hit determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the variable pattern selection state transition condition determination table in the pachinko game machine concerning the 2nd modification of the 7th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to in variation pattern selection state 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to in variation pattern selection state 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to in variation pattern selection state 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection state transition in the pachinko game machine concerning the 2nd modification of the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the normal gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the B time-saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C1 time-saving gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, this is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table A that is referred to in the normal game state or the time-saving game state A. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is an example of the variable pattern table B-1 that is referred to in the B time-saving gaming state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is an example of the variable pattern table B-2 that is referred to in the B time-saving gaming state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is an example of the variable pattern table B-3 that is referred to in the B time-saving gaming state. This is an example of the variable pattern table C-1 that is referred to in the C2 time-saving gaming state or the C3 time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the variable pattern table C-2 that is referred to in the C2 time-saving gaming state or the C3 time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the variable pattern table C-3 that is referred to in the C1 time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the variable pattern table C-4 that is referred to in the C1 time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is an example of the variable pattern table D-1 that is referred to in the high-precision gaming state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is an example of the variable pattern table D-2 that is referred to in the high-precision gaming state. It is a table showing an example of the selection conditions of the variable pattern table in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal symbol determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol type determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process in 1st Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a time saving setting process in the 1st Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the flow of a game in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the normal gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the B time-saving gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the winning type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the hit determination table of the normal symbol of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal symbol determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol type determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a time-saving counter update process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the duplication time saving counter update process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a time-saving counter determination process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time-saving transition processing in the second example of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a time saving setting process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a duplication time saving counter setting process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a duplication time saving counter shift process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a duplication time saving setting process in the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the flow of a game in the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a table summarizing the processing when winning C time saving or when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in each gaming state. It is an example of the front view of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing the rear part of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing a lower base member, a payout unit, a game ball passageway, and a wiring guide member in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing a lower base member, a game ball passageway, and a wiring guide member of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a lower base member, a game ball passageway, and a wiring guide member in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded front view showing a lower base member, a game ball passageway, and a wiring guide member in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the lower base member of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back view which shows the lower base member of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the payout unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the top view which shows the storage tank of the 9th pachinko game machine. 342 is an example of a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 342 showing the payout unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a game ball passageway and a wiring guide member of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the top view which shows the lower path of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the wiring guide member of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a guide part and a cover part. (b) An example of a right side view showing the guide part. It is an example of the back view which shows the board|substrate unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the sub-board case and back cover of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a plane sectional view showing the sub-board case and back cover of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the upper unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a downward perspective view which shows the upper unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear perspective view showing the upper unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back view which shows the upper unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the decoration unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the rear part of the decoration unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear perspective view which shows the frame member, the 1st board|substrate, and the reflective part of the 9th pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a front view showing a frame member. (b) An example of a front view showing the first substrate. (c) An example of a front view showing a reflection section. (d) An example of a front view showing the diffusion section. It is an example of a perspective view showing a diffusion part and a reflection part of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the front part of the decoration unit of the 9th pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a front view showing the first decoration part. (b) An example of a front view showing the second decorative part. It is an example of the front view which shows typically the modification of the spreading|diffusion part of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing a part of the glass door of the gaming machine according to the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a back view showing a part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear view showing the upper part of the unit part of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back view which shows the decoration body of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear enlarged view showing the upper right part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a back enlarged view showing the upper right part of the glass door in a state where the locking member of the tenth pachinko game machine has been moved to the unlocked position. It is an example of an exploded rear perspective view showing the upper right part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front perspective view showing the upper right part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a lock member. (b) An example of a right side view showing the locking member. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a rear view showing the positions of the locking member and the movement regulating member when the locking member is in the locking position. (b) Similarly, it is an example of a schematic plan view. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a rear view showing the positions of the locking member and the movement regulating member when the locking member moves from the locking position to the unlocking position. (b) Similarly, it is an example of a schematic plan view. It is an example of the front view which shows the gaming machine based on the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the tray unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the dish unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a side sectional view showing the tray unit of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the attachment member, the 1st decoration part, etc. of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a mounting member, a first decoration part, etc. of the 11th pachinko game machine. (a) An example of a front view showing a first decorative part, a decorative member, and a ground wire in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. (b) An example of a rear view showing the first decorative part, the decorative member, and the ground wire. It is an example of an enlarged side sectional view showing the first connection part and the second connection part of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded front view showing the second decoration part of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the outer lens of the 2nd decoration part of the 11th pachinko game machine. In the eleventh pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a decorative member. (b) It is a left side view showing a decoration member. It is an example of a schematic cross-sectional view showing how static electricity flows in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view of the whole 12th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view of the entire twelfth pachinko gaming machine seen from diagonally above and from the front right side. It is an example of a front view showing a part of the glass door of the 12th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a part of the glass door of the twelfth pachinko game machine, seen from diagonally above on the right side. It is an example of the front view of the frame of the 12th pachinko game machine. 395 is an example of an enlarged view of section Y shown in FIG. 394. It is an example of the front view of the upper unit and side lens unit of the 12th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit and side lens unit of the twelfth pachinko game machine, viewed from diagonally above on the right rear side. It is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit and the side lens unit in a state of being separated from each other in the twelfth pachinko game machine, viewed from diagonally below on the right rear side. It is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit and the side lens unit in a state of being separated from each other in the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, viewed from diagonally above on the right rear side. An example of a perspective view of the upper unit and side lens unit of the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, viewed diagonally from below on the front right side, (A) a diagram in which the upper unit and side lens unit are separated; (B) FIG. 3 is a diagram in which the upper unit and the side lens unit are connected. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the side lens unit seen diagonally from above on the front left side, (A) a view in which an outer decorative sheet and an inner decorative sheet are housed, (B) an outer decorative sheet and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a part of the inner decorative sheet pulled upward. 402 is an example of a perspective view of the cross section taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 401, viewed diagonally from above on the left front side. It is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit in a state where the opening/closing door is closed in the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, as seen from diagonally below on the left front side. This is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit of the twelfth pachinko game machine with the opening/closing door partially open, viewed diagonally from below on the left front side, in which an upper outer decorative sheet and an upper inner decorative sheet are housed. It is. FIG. 12 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit of the twelfth pachinko game machine, viewed diagonally from below on the front left side, with parts of the upper outer decorative sheet and the upper inner decorative sheet pulled out downward. This is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit of the 12th pachinko game machine with the opening/closing door partially open, viewed from diagonally downward at the rear right side, and shows an upper outer decorative sheet and an upper inner decorative sheet housed therein. It is. It is an example of a perspective view of the frame and the glass unit in a state in which the glass unit is attached to the frame in the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, viewed from diagonally above on the right rear side. It is an example of a perspective view of the frame body and the glass unit in a state of being separated from each other in the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, seen from diagonally above on the right rear side. It is an example of a perspective view of the frame body and the glass unit in a state of being separated from each other in the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, viewed diagonally from above on the right side. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the glass unit of the twelfth pachinko gaming machine, viewed from diagonally above and behind on the right side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit included in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the performance accessory unit is in the standby position. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit included in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the performance accessory unit is in the performance position. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the presentation accessory unit viewed diagonally from above on the front right side, in which (A) the presentation accessory unit is in the standby position, (B) the performance accessory unit is in the production position. FIG. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of a front view showing the performance accessory unit, (A) when the performance accessory unit is in the standby position, (B) when the performance accessory unit is in the production position. FIG. In the 13th pachinko game machine, an example of a right side view showing the performance accessory unit, (A) when the performance accessory unit is in the standby position, (B) when the performance accessory unit is in the production position, FIG. This is an example of a perspective view of the first performance accessory, the second performance accessory, and the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62 in the 13th pachinko game machine, viewed from diagonally above on the right rear side. It is an example of a perspective view of the first performance accessory and the first performance accessory operating mechanism in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, viewed from diagonally above and behind the right side. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a plan view of a first performance accessory, a first performance accessory operating mechanism, and a second performance accessory. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a plan view of the first performance accessory and the first performance accessory operating mechanism. It is an example of the right side view of the 1st performance accessory, the 2nd performance accessory, and the 1st performance accessory operation mechanism in the performance position, seen from the right in the 13th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate-like member and the front lens part in the standby position in the thirteenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the right side view which shows the positional relationship between the plate-shaped member and the front lens part in the performance position in the 13th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view of the front lens section of the thirteenth pachinko gaming machine, seen from diagonally above on the right side. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the front lens part of the 13th pachinko game machine, seen from diagonally above on the right side. This is an example of a partially exploded perspective view of the front lens portion of the 13th pachinko game machine, with the LED board attached to the second lens, as seen diagonally from above on the right side. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is a figure showing an example of the front lens part in a state where the LED board is attached to the second lens, (A) a front view, (B) a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in the front view, It is. It is an example of the perspective view of the front lens part in the state where the LED board is attached to the 2nd lens in the 13th pachinko game machine, seen from the left rear diagonally upper part. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of a back view of the front lens part in a state where the LED board is attached to the second lens. It is an example of a perspective view of the second performance accessory and the accessory lifting unit viewed diagonally from above on the right front in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and the second performance accessory is shown as an exploded perspective view. This is an example of a perspective view of the rear lens with the LED board stacked on the back side of the thirteenth pachinko game machine, viewed from the front and slightly to the right. 430 is an example of a sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 430. It is an example of the back view of the rear lens in the 13th pachinko game machine.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery"), which will be described later, and the hit determination of normal symbols are displayed. The result of the process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is variable. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the display is on hold; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. This is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as not being displayed, and variable display of the first special symbol being suspended. In addition, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. This is true if all certain requirements are met, such as display being withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the game is on hold, and that the first hold is a hold on the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the item is on hold, and that the first hold is the hold on the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. A center accessory 115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 120, a general prize opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting opening 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, Random numbers for judgment, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random numbers for production selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of various data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the first special symbol hit determination process when the first special symbol starting condition (also referred to as "first special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the first special symbol, the first Various random values such as the random number value of the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined number. (For example, up to 4 items) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining the hit of a normal symbol, etc.) ) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a grand prize opening 131, a count switch 132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a special electric accessory 133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

Moreover, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is a prize opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side region 107, for example. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, Random numbers for judgment, random numbers for the second special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the second special symbol, random numbers for production selection of the second special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of various data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side area 106 (more specifically, on the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147 made of a blade member, for example, called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 147. . The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. In addition, the movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the large winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning ports 122, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6, described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 300. The performance accessory group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (for example, see FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time saving notification display section 168.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 It becomes easier for the game ball to enter (pass) the prize.

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 displays the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when normal symbol start information, that is, variable display is pending. It is equipped with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining whether the normal symbols hit) are extracted. This refers to the state from when the starting condition for the normal symbol is met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 Alternatively, a variable display of the first special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishment, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h that constitute the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the second special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 Alternatively, a variable display of the second special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishing, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that constitute the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol pending display section displays the number of variable displays of special symbols that are pending (hereinafter referred to as the "number of pending special symbols") when special symbol start information, that is, variable displays are pending. It includes a first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first special symbol is displayed after the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the second special symbol is displayed after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Probability change notification display section)
The probability change notification display section 167 can be turned on during execution of probability change control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probability variation control is being executed, but, for example, the display unit 167 may be turned on so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probability variation control is being executed. The fact that this is being executed may be kept secret.

However, when the power is cut off while variable probability control is being executed, data indicating that variable probability control is being executed will not be lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the probability change control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the probability change notification display section 167 lights up in such a manner that it can be visually recognized that the probability change control is being performed.

Note that even if it is hidden before the power is turned off whether or not the probability change control is being executed, the probability change notification display section 167 is turned on when the power is turned on. The system is configured so that it can be recognized that variable probability control is being executed.

(Display section for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display section 168 includes, for example, a first time-saving notification display section 168a and a second time-saving notification display section 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display sections 168 is limited to this. Not limited.

Although details will be described later, the time-saving gaming state includes an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state. For example, it is configured such that it is possible to grasp which time-saving game state the game is in by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display section 168a and the second time-saving notification display section 168b.

The time saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time saving control being executed. By lighting or extinguishing the lights in a manner that makes it impossible to visually determine whether or not they are being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or in a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), It may be hidden so that the fact that time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control that is being executed cannot be recognized from the outside. In particular, although it may be possible to determine from the appearance whether or not the time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to determine from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. By keeping the type of time-saving control hidden, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power is cut off while time saving control is being executed, the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later, will prevent data indicating that time saving control is being executed, as well as data indicating the type of time saving control being executed. does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the time saving control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the time saving notification display section 168 is displayed in such a manner that it is possible to visually understand that the time saving control is in progress and the type of time saving control that is being executed. turns on or off.

Note that even if the time-saving control is being executed before the power is turned off, or the type of time-saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In such a case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be visually recognized.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, a time saving notification display section 168, a normal electricity solenoid 148, a special electricity solenoid 135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141, a passage gate switch 127, a count switch 132, and a general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole 120, 140, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state is treated as one special symbol game. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is After the result of the processing is derived, when the small winning game state is controlled, the period until the end of the small winning gaming state is one special symbol game.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 133 is operated to keep the jackpot 131 open for a predetermined period of time (for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning a prize in the jackpot 131 is relatively high. It will be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is carried out when there is a winning (passing) to the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, and the special symbol winning process. This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of the starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol starting winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random number value for determining a special symbol, special symbol Various random numbers such as a random number value for symbols, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting conditions are met, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the special symbol hit determination random number extracted from the special symbol hit determination counter. . After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as voices and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state where there is no jackpot is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving win, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting award process is executed. In addition, special symbol starting information extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 (for example, a random number value for determining a special symbol hit, a random number value for a special symbol symbol, a random number value for determining reach, and production selection) (various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are held until the special symbol starting conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140 between when the special symbol starts winning and until the special symbol's starting conditions are met. A pre-read judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern based on the start information obtained prior to the special symbol winning judgment process. It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140 is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a normal symbol winning, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining a winning normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not the normal symbol hit is a "normal symbol hit." A determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and performs a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute production control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). Becomes an open state where (passage) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)), and is a performance that changes the winning probability of "normal symbol". , the variable display time of the normal symbol, or/and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the normal symbol starting information (for example, a random number value for normal symbol hit determination, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol hit determination random number, the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reach determination random number, the second special symbol hit determination random number, the second special symbol hit determination random number, The extraction method of the special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the random number for normal symbol hit determination, etc. is carried out by executing a program by the main CPU 201 within a predetermined range (width). A soft random number method may be used in which random numbers are generated in a predetermined cycle, or a hard random number method may be used in which random numbers are extracted from a counter in a random number generator that updates random numbers at a predetermined period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot gaming state is divided into a low probability state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be broadly classified.

The high-probability gaming state includes a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Although it is not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. It may also be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state includes an A-time-saving gaming state, a B-time-saving gaming state, and a C-time-saving gaming state.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, when the jackpot gaming state has ended and the variable display of special symbols has started in a non-high probability gaming state (i.e., a gaming state where the probability change flag is off), or when the RAM has been cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the time-saving game state can be entered, and a specified number of special symbol games are executed. , When the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of "time-saving winning" is derived. When the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times determined by winning the "Time-saving win" or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state C ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, if a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the time-saving game state C continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the main CPU 201 controls to internally activate any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally operating the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Operating in parallel is called "executing in parallel." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in a stacked manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even if a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed overlappingly, the player understands that the game is being controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving gaming states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained.

Even when controlled in the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state (A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C working-time saving gaming state), and high-accuracy gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to shift to any of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state (for example, high-precision time-saving gaming state). However, the time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the jackpot gaming state ends is limited to the A-time-saving gaming state.

When controlled to be in a high-precision gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high-precision gaming state to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, there is no transition to the high-precision gaming state unless the game goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it cannot shift to the A time saving gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if the control is in either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, once the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the normal gaming state will be entered. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between time-saving game states will be explained.

When the A time saving gaming state is controlled, the number of times that can be executed in the A time saving gaming state is set to be less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. There is no transition to the time-saving gaming state. Further, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the B working time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", the conditions for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state are met, so the A-time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state may overlap. . However, as mentioned above, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the C time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state.

When controlled in the B time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is established, and the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state are Can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state is established, and the C-time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state are Can overlap.

In addition, details regarding the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

The first pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (eg, firing mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variable flag is on (in this example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variable control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, approximately 1/76 at setting 2, Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

Note that, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values. For example, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/160, and when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/240. There is. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the number of set time saving times) may be varied depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times will be set as the number of time saving times, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times will be set as the number of time saving times. You can also do this.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery targets, but small wins may be included in the lottery targets. When a small win is included in the lottery target, the small win probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the lottery, the small hit will only be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You can also make it wet. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The short-time winning probability and the small winning probability when the lottery includes the above-mentioned short winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, but they are not limited to this, and may vary depending on the setting value. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is shown for example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving" table is based on the random number value for special symbol hit determination extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "hit", "jackpot", or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting opening 120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The special symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number value for special symbol hit determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. The hit determination table for the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship with the judgment value data, the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit that is determined as a “jackpot” and the relationship with the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the special symbol hit that is determined as a “loss” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "time-saving hit", "big hit", or Decided to be a loser. The hit determination table for the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship with the judgment value data, the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit that is determined as a “jackpot” and the relationship with the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the special symbol hit that is determined as a “loss” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 201 The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines the "time-saving hit". It is determined that the judgment value data is "time-saving judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Further, when the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol hit is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 will ”, and the judgment value data is determined to be “time saving judgment value data”. Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose". , the judgment value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines the "time-saving hit". It is determined that the judgment value data is "time-saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose". , the judgment value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

In this way, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for special symbol hit determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process). is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( It becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data) by simply increasing the width of the judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state This will effectively extend the period, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" can be won regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for special symbol hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is determined. Referring to FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, an area of 0 to 7. It consists of a 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. , area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol. corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. , area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the display mode of the LEDs (display mode of time-saving win) led to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the second special symbol and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the display mode of the LEDs (jackpot display mode) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area from among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", the display manner of the LEDs (the display manner of loss) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

FIG. 12(B) is an example of a table showing the concept related to determining the stopping mode of decorative symbols in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 12(B), the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative patterns that is derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped is determined according to the pattern designation command. Ru.

In addition, since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled to display the special symbol being displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display performance in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol being variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 include a left pattern consisting of 9 symbols 1 to 9, and a middle pattern consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern. , the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving win. By stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in this embodiment, odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, a small win symbol is added to the symbols constituting the middle symbol. (a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops displaying the medium symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can understand that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 selects the decorative symbol, for example. , the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol at an odd number symbol. and stop the middle symbol with a time-saving symbol. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as you can see from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case where the symbol command is ``zA1'' or ``zA6'' (when the selected symbol command is ``z0'', ``z1'' or ``z7''), the number of time savings set is greater, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 changes the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol to odd number symbols. Stop at a matching pattern.

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 changes the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol to an even number symbol. Stop at a matching pattern. In addition, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"), There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the even-numbered symbols (matched), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set to ON).

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" '', the expected value of the probability change flag being set on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", it is more advantageous for the player than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lose"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a loose or reach loss. Discrepancies are, for example, stopping patterns in which the first symbol to be stopped (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol to be stopped (for example, the right symbol) are different, or the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are all different from each other. Different stopping modes correspond. Reach loss occurs when the first symbol to be stopped (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol to be stopped (for example, the right symbol) are common, but the last symbol to be stopped (for example, the middle symbol) is different from another symbol (for example, to the left). The pattern and the right pattern) correspond to different stopping modes.

In FIG. 12(B), the stop mode of the decorative symbols according to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is "zA1", the left symbol "2", the middle symbol "Time-saving", and the right symbol "4") is Although shown as an example, the stop mode shown in the column of the stop mode of the decorative pattern in FIG. 12(B) is just an example, and is not limited thereto.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the high-precision gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C-time-saving gaming state. You can also do this.

In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery when the probability change flag is on, and forcibly changes the display mode of a loss to the special symbol display section even if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win". 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for special symbol hit judgment, that is, the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery result (result of special symbol hit judgment processing). A hit determination process may also be performed. In this case, when the probability change flag is off, time saving hit judgment value data is assigned to the random number value for special symbol hit judgment, and when the probability change flag is on, time saving winning judgment value data is not allocated. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is off, the width of the random number assigned to the time-saving hit judgment value data is changed to the loss judgment value data, jackpot judgment value data, or loss judgment value instead of the time-saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both data and jackpot judgment value data.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, control the machine to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

The time-saving performance in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in A-time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 determines the state of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the state of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 13.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Judgment value data is determined based on the random number value for winning judgment (performing winning/losing judgment), and winning/losing ("time-saving winning", "jackpot", or "loss") is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the data, and the type of display mode (time saving type or jackpot type) to be derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot".

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state may be set higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time savings in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 etc. are intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot gaming state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). .

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hits A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in Figure 15 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be either a short-time hit or a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 140. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S96 in FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is extracted, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and does not set the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, if the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the time saving flag is on, regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be made to be different in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming state. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". It is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

The B time-saving gaming state starts, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change starts. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling variation is "lose", the display mode of "lose" is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, changing the decorative pattern to a special symbol) to show the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been met (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or an effect in which both of these are performed. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the transition to the B time-saving game state is not made.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variation flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is controlled unless the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". In a pachinko game machine where the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small win", the small win display mode The B time-saving game state may be started when the is drawn on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small winning game state ends. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small win is displayed on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. , the above-mentioned display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. Note that in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may vary depending on the setting value. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot", the game is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, the ceiling counter is activated by the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). If a switch other than that (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or if the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of winning a normal symbol, a predetermined It is reset when the following conditions are met. Then, if updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko gaming machine instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 Update the ceiling counter (+1). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if a special symbol is displayed variablely, but for example, if it is a ST machine or a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag will not be updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after turning off. In addition, in the case of a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so if the ceiling counter is updated at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a specification in which the main CPU 201 performs a high probability rolling lottery, when the sub CPU 301 receives the command sent from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 produces an effect that suggests winning the high probability rolling lottery or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform a performance that suggests a transition from a state to a low-probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting point of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, and it becomes more interesting. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of gameplay. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, by displaying a countdown effect or a fake countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Additionally, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of special symbols after the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the time or end of the process.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 controls the variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of the process.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') '') is started, or when the B time saving final variation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving winning". In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are that a time-saving win is won (a time-saving win where the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7", or "z8"), and the display mode of the time-saving win is a special symbol. It is to be derived (determined and displayed) on the display sections 163 and 164. Furthermore, even if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the C-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and In the case where the C time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit"), the C time-saving game do not move to the state. In addition, if the condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C-time saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 will not make the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Control is executed to derive the display mode of to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

In addition, the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state are determined in response to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met. The prescribed number of C time savings, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time saving gaming state, starts variable display of the special symbol for the number of time saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving final variation"). It may be set when the C time saving final variation is completed, or when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time saving game state may be any time between the start of the C time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending condition for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending condition for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the fact that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the information may include that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that a time-saving fall lottery has been conducted and that the time-saving fall lottery has been won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the table for determining the normal symbol hit that is extracted when the gaming state and the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This table is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43, which will be described later).

The random number value for normal symbol hit determination is a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the relationship with the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data. , and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that a "normal symbol hit" occurs if the extracted random number value for determining a normal symbol hit is between 0 and 79. , the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" when the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is between 0 and 98, and changes the determination value data to the normal symbol hit determination value. "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" when the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number is between 0 and 79, and changes the determination value data to the normal symbol hit determination value. "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" if the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number is between 0 and 79, and changes the determination value data to the normal symbol hit determination value. "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" if the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

As described above, in this example, among the non-time saving gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A working time saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16) Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the aforementioned determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the symbol. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 will , "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz5" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol randomness of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value, and then , the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, a win or loss of the normal symbol and a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol win may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command that is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a waiting time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. It is decided to be 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessories 146 in the time-saving game state, A-time-saving game state, B-time-saving game state, and C-time-saving game state, the most advantageous mode is the most disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (that is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process that is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later). referenced in the following). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and selects the normal symbol effect based on the gaming state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied]
In the above explanation, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saver win" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You can do it like this.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Duplication of time-saving gaming states]
When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are provided, the time-saving gaming states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving winning", the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state will overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state overlap. If the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed overlappingly, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (that is, the "time-saving winnings" are ignored and the time-saving winnings are invalidated). You can also do this. In addition, so that the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap, the prescribed number of A time saving gaming states, which is the end condition for the A working time saving gaming state, is set to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game states overlap, a mode in which the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode of repeatedly executing time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate.If the time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C. Possible modes include a mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed overlappingly, and a mode in which the B-time saving game state is executed in a layered manner when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which time-saving game state C is superimposed on first time-saving game state]
If you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the time-saving win on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and adopts as the time-saving number the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, and the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving game state is greater than the number of time savings that can be executed based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 201 executes the A time saving win. While maintaining the time-saving performance of the game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-savings in the time-saving game state A is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 200, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of time savers that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case of the number of times, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from here on is as long as a "jackpot" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, the appearance of the number of working hours and the time-saving performance is This is the same as the case where the A time-saving gaming state is continued without winning.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time saving win" is won in the A time saving gaming state and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the A While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled until the number of time-savings set based on the "time-saving win" is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 20, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case that the time saving performance of the time saving game state A is maintained, the number of time saving times from this point on is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the A time-saving gaming state, after that, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two. A variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode of executing B time saving gaming state overlapping C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the following, the case where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be explained. .

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving games in C-time saving game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and if the prescribed number of B-time-saving games is 200, then C-time saving game state While maintaining the time-saving performance of , the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving gaming state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the prescribed number of B time-savings is greater than the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. In this case, while maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state C, the number of time saving times from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small win display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", a loss display format is derived. . When the small win display mode is derived, the small win game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving flag on even during the small win game state.

Next, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final variation, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are different. A case where this holds true will be explained. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being drawn to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

First, if control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when this is done, the control is already in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived, the greater of the prescribed number of time saving times of B and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is used up. Control to a time-saving gaming state.

Next, when control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when the B time-saving game state is not yet controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state while satisfying the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, deriving the display mode of a jackpot, deriving a display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, the time saving game state is controlled until the larger of the prescribed number of time saving times B and the number of time saving times in the time saving game state C is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed are satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be ended.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the sub CPU 301 executes the B time-saving game that is performed when only the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied. A special display performance that is different from the transition display performance and the C time-saving shift display performance that is performed when only the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied may be performed. In addition, instead of this, for example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state is maintained, a B time saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state is maintained, a C time saving transition display effect is performed. Either one of the B time saving transition display performance and the C time saving transition display performance may be performed with priority.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts the B time-saving game. To control a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when executing multiple time-saving gaming states at the same time]
Above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the first time-saving gaming state, and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a superimposed manner on the C time-saving gaming state have been explained.

If the specification is such that a plurality of time-saving gaming states can be executed in parallel, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack may be different, but it is not possible to make the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack to be the same. preferable.

For example, if the specification is such that the C time saving game state can be executed overlapping the first time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the first time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state be the same. In addition, if the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be executed overlapping the C time saving gaming state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state be the same.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in succession, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later on top of the time-saving gaming state that has been executed first is, for example, It may be provided with one time-saving performance that is the same as the current time-saving gaming state and another time-saving performance that is different from this one time-saving performance. Then, when executing a time-saving game state over the time-saving game state that has been executed first, the first time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If you do not want to repeat this, you may activate other time-saving abilities.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow the B time saving gaming state to be executed in the C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state can be set to the same time saving performance as the C time saving gaming state, and this one time saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances are provided with other time-saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time-saving game state, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance is activated. may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. A possible mode (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode") is possible in which a hit determination process is performed and the time-saving gaming states are not executed overlappingly even if the time-saving gaming states overlap. In the latter mode, even if you win a time-saving win in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, you can ignore this and repeat the C-time-saving gaming states. There are two possible modes: a mode in which it is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B-time saver game state is not executed again. Below, the above two modes considered as the latter mode will be explained.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the time-saving game state C is not executed in combination with the time-saving game state 1]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving gaming state based on the "time saving winning" unless the last special symbol in the first time saving gaming state is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "time saving final variation"). Control is performed to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if a "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first time saving gaming state is Different controls can be executed depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends and the case where one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the main CPU 201, after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit, changes the time-saving game state C. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the display mode per time-saving is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, when the display mode per time-saving is derived and the one time-saving gaming state ends. When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed before the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the first time saving gaming state without controlling to the C time saving gaming state. End the time saving gaming state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode per time saver before the end process of one time saver game state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saver game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling to the C-time-saving game state, if the end processing of the first time-saving game state has not been processed at the time when the display mode per time-saving game is derived, If the end processing of the first time-saving game state has already been performed, control is performed to the time-saving game state C.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which B time-saving game state is not executed in combination with C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss", the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of time-saving games in the C-time saving gaming state is exhausted. The time saving game state C is controlled until the game is completed.

However, when the remaining time saving number of the C time saving gaming state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the B time saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving gaming state is performed after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B time saving gaming state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for startup. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, random number counter for special symbol hit determination, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power cutoff process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S74), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S75. Move to.

Returning to S73, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of the variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is withheld (YES in S73), the main CPU 201 executes the process as follows. Move to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0" (when S72 is a YES determination), the special symbol management process is, when S73 is a YES determination, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S74 is a YES determination, the special symbol management process is The first special symbol is the processing target. Further, if the control state number is not "0" (NO determination in S72), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S81), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S83. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S83 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S83 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S84 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S85 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S87 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S88 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to and the special symbol hit determination random value is used to determine the special symbol hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but if it is a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol win is included. If the result of the determination process is a small win, a small win flag is set on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. It should be noted that the time saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that the game is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process to judge or determine the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, time-saving hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S94) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, etc. Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) (see S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S100, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S100), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S111), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S122, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S128), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S129). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S86) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined in S122 that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if NO in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). Note that the special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in a stacked manner when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state. Incidentally, when shifting to the high probability gaming state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in each of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state.

When the transition conditions to the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and/or the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied, a time-saving counter is set for the time-saving gaming state in which the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the time-saving counter reaches 0 ( The time-saving game state may be completed when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, if it is determined that both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process and executes the process as follows. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S164.

Note that the C time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when a B time saving counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with 2 bits, for example, and when the C-time-saving gaming state is executed overlappingly with the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first, it is set to "time-saving mode = 3". Furthermore, when the B time saving game state is executed over the time saving game state which is being executed first, "time saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S163), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S166.

The B time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the C working time saving gaming state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process. , the process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S164, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S166, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when executing a plurality of time-saving gaming states in a stacked manner, it is not limited to just stacking two time-saving gaming states, but may execute three or more time-saving gaming states in a stacking manner. In this case, as mentioned above, the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state do not overlap, so the case where three or more time saving gaming states overlap means that the A working time saving gaming state or the B working time saving gaming state and two This corresponds to the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter updating process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and changes the process to the counter update process ( (see Figure 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process in S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, if the time saving counter is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process in S184, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

Note that if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, they should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some kind of problem may occur when executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time saving counter or the time saving counter is 1 or more even though S183 is YES, , abnormality processing such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. In addition, instead of or in addition to this abnormality processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset. The counter, the B time saving counter, and the C time saving counter may be made consistent.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) for the time saving shift command. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S191), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and replaces the process with the counter determination process ( (see Figure 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability variation flag is off (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

The ceiling reaching flag is a flag that is set on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and is a flag indicating whether or not the B time-saving gaming state has been controlled in the past.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the game can shift to the B time-saving game state from the end of the jackpot game state until the end of the next jackpot game state is one, unless the RAM is cleared, for example. In other words, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the B time saving gaming state is controlled, but the B time saving gaming state ends without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state and shifts to the normal gaming state, for example, RAM clearing etc. Unless it is, the B time-saving gaming state will not be controlled again until the next jackpot gaming state ends.

Therefore, in S192, it is not only determined whether the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, but also whether the ceiling reaching flag is off or not, so that the B time-saving gaming state is temporarily controlled. When the B time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state, the control is made so that the B time-saving game state is not controlled again.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and clears the ceiling counter when the condition device is activated.

However, the process of setting off the ceiling reaching flag and/or clearing the ceiling counter is executed not only when the conditional device is activated, but also when the RAM is cleared due to a setting change (for example, when the setting change in FIG. 47 described below is executed). The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the process, or when clearing the RAM without changing the settings (for example, the first normal game preprocessing that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the startup initial setting process in 1 normal game pre-processing (see S56)).

If it is determined in S192 that both the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process. , the process returns to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). Note that if the ceiling reaching flag is on, a NO determination is made in S192. Further, even if the ceiling reaching flag is off, if the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value, a NO determination is made in S192.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling reaching flag on. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S202), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition processing and converts the processing to the counter determination processing (Fig. 36). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S202), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the B time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 2, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

Note that the number of time saving times set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (if NO in S206), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and transfers the process to the counter determination process. (See Figure 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time saving times to be set in the C time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time saving times set in the C time saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S211).

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

When S211 is YES, the probability change flag is off and, for example, when the time-saving game state B is executed in a state in which the time-saving game state C is executed first (the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value) ), or when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state where the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state has been executed first (if you win the "time saving winning"). do.

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and also sets the time saving gaming state determined in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

If it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S211), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-savings (NO in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of time-savings, the main CPU 201 The setting process is ended and the process returns to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is larger than the new number of time saving times (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, the B time saving gaming state may be executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is executed first. If the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly in the current state, the current time saving counter value (i.e. remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number, whichever is greater, will be reset as the new time saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to manage that two time saving game states are being executed internally in a superimposed manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are being executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is the same as the above two time-saving gaming states that are being executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states is included. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are executed simultaneously without internally managing the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed simultaneously (i.e., without providing a B-time-saving counter and a C-time-saving counter), The current time saving counter value and the new time saving number, whichever is larger, may be reset as the new time saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is executed when S211 is NO, that is, when the non-time-saving gaming state is transferred to the B-time-saving gaming state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is the process that is performed when the game is moved to and executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, the number of time saving times and the time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 executes the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the completion of the small winning gaming state. It's good to do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, B time-saving game It is preferable to perform transition processing to the state. This is because when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made, and while the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation, the other special symbol is variable. This is because when the display is started, the variable display of the other special symbol will no longer be able to benefit from the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of special symbols is not performed in a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in pachinko gaming machines where special symbols can be variably displayed with such long fluctuations, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling fluctuation. As a result, even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation, a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state can be avoided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B-time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B-time-saving gaming state is replaced with the process related to the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state. Although the process is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to this (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is given priority over the B time saving control mode determining process (S205), which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. It may also be done by

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35). I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, even if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving game state may not be made, but the transition to the B time saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving gaming state just when the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter reaches the ceiling value. Processing will be carried out.

Further, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is a transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko game machine such as the first pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above, , the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0), regardless of the setting value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value may be overlooked by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, no matter what setting value is set, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, but by It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the setting value.

[1-6-18. Variations related to time-saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is replaced with the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time-saving gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time-saving gaming state (time-saving hit flag) are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made; When the time saving winning flag is on, the game is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order of transition to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state C The time-saving management process can be performed in various variations without being limited to the above-mentioned decision as to whether the transition flag is separate or common.

For example, the execution timing of the time-saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when fluctuation is stopped, the processing at the time of transition is set to give priority to the B-time-saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C-time-saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of fluctuation stop, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation stops, and when the ceiling is reached, it is confirmed that the "time saving hit" is not won, and then the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made. good.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0, and in other cases, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the time-saving counter. It is best not to subtract .

[1-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning hole is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major prize opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has not elapsed (if the determination is NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process. (See Figure 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. However, in the special symbol game ending process of FIG. 31, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S131) is performed, but strictly speaking, this time saving management process (S131) is the special symbol game ending process of S130. Although it is executed in the symbol game end process (see FIG. 30), it is not executed in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 42) of S283, and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S293 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), random numbers for determining a normal symbol hit are generated in the range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and for example, 0 to 79 is normal. It is used as symbol hit judgment value data (in case of non-time saving gaming state). The probability of winning a normal symbol is determined by the number of judgment value data for a normal symbol relative to the total random number of random numbers for determining a normal symbol, so for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in a non-time-saving gaming state where time-saving control is not executed, whereas in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed, it is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 1,000 msec. It only runs for a short time. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S301). After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port that will be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the settings can be changed; and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Note that details of the setting control process in S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is allowed (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol hit determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S331), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S333), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are used. is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change process (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process at the time of power failure recovery (S371).

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is on (YES in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process in S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 until the normal symbol starting conditions are met. It has a storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). In the ball passage detection process, whether or not there is a free space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is extracted. It is also determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol hit determination random number, the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reach determination random number, and the first special symbol hit determination random number). In addition to extracting various random numbers (such as random numbers for effect selection, etc.), a process is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on winnings in the first starting hole 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting memory that holds various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120 until a starting condition is satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (if NO in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process in S394, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28), the random number value extracted in S392 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, perform the hit determination process, etc. It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the random number value is extracted in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the special symbol hit determination process is started. In view of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform it, for example, around the time before and after the process of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command for the first special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol by 1, variation pattern information for the first special symbol (i.e., variation pattern command for the special symbol), etc. The winning command for the first special symbol that has been reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 detects a game ball.

If it is determined that a game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (if NO in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting port winning detection process and replaces the process with the switch input detection process (Fig. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (YES in S398), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol hit determination random number, the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol reach determination random number, and the second special symbol hit determination random number). In addition to extracting various random numbers (such as random numbers for effect selection, etc.), a process is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winnings. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winnings in the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 140 in a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special memory area (1) for holding various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 140 until starting conditions are met. It has a symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). . In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (NO in S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and replaces the process with the switch input detection process. (See Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the pending number of second special symbols. After executing the process in S401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numerical values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the second special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when a backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the appearance of the display effect that is output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined. The mode of sound production, etc. is determined.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301, as one of the various processes performed in the performance mode determination process, for example, creates a production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "sub variation") of a sub variation production corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "performance pattern"), a pre-read performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern for a pre-read performance (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read performance pattern"), etc. In addition, in the performance mode determination process, for example, the performance mode of a countdown performance that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the performance mode of the B time-saving game state transition performance that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is determined. Processing and the like are also performed to determine various performance aspects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern or a character performance patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation performance, expectations for the result of the special symbol hit determination process change as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the special symbol stops, depending on the sub-variation performance pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, the sub-variable performance patterns include short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc. is included. As mentioned above, time-saving hits A, B, and C are reaches where the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in Figure 28) indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be both a short-time hit and a jackpot.

Note that, for example, if the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 will prioritize execution of one of the effects. good.

The pre-read performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the pre-read determination process. The look-ahead performance is a performance that indicates the level of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is performed when in a pending state (i.e., after winning a prize at the first start opening 120, starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on the winning result). This is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 before the special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead performance, when in the hold state, the look-ahead judgment is performed as time passes (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information that was held in advance), depending on the look-ahead performance pattern that is executed. It is possible to indicate that the level of expectation regarding the outcome of the treatment is maintained or increased.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the special symbol hit judgment process. A look-ahead expected value performance pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process being a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is included. That is, in the look-ahead presentation, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the type of result of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. It is. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process (S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later) (Reference) is carried out. Specific examples of the per-reading type performance pattern, the pre-reading expected value performance pattern, the per-reading type performance pattern determination process, and the pre-reading expected value performance pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table (detailed explanation is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the time saving flag is off (normal gaming state). This sub-variable effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation performance pattern determination table in a gaming state where the time-saving flag is on (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), but the explanation will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A sub-variation effect pattern (indicated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variable performance pattern includes short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E. There is.

The time-saving wins A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving win as described above, and are also reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit-type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15, Figure 54, and (See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. This is a form of reach production that makes it difficult to grasp whether there is a Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but is displayed only if it is a jackpot or "time-saving hit". (See Figure 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the determined sub variation effect pattern to be displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a prefetch per-type performance pattern determination process and a prefetch expected value performance pattern determination process, which are performed as the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes the first special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), and the A first sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3), and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) contain various information related to the extracted random number value. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state). It may be made to be carried out, or it may be made to be carried out for the second special symbol.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 includes a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first holding area as areas for displaying held images. A second reservation area corresponding to the sub-reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. [Table referenced in pre-reading type performance pattern determination processing]
First, a table referred to in the pre-reading type effect pattern determination process will be explained.

By the way, the format of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed with the determined look-ahead effect type effect pattern includes a time-saving look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a jackpot. This includes a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form that shows the possibility of a short-time hit and a jackpot.

The look-ahead hit type performance pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead look to a time-saving win look-ahead look, or from a common win look-ahead look to a jackpot look ahead look. This is a production pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 55 is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table. FIG. 55 shows only the prefetch target variation patterns among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a pre-reading type performance pattern determination table. Note that these tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the per-reading type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the pre-read per type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the pre-read per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table in FIG. 56 and determines the pre-reading type effect pattern. To be more specific, as shown in the pre-read per-type performance pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for convenience, the "pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number" is shown as "SASPT number", and the "pre-reading per type effect pattern" is shown as "SAS effect pattern". The random number value 1 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "55", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "77", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “A” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving win. When a pending image is displayed in the time-saving look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “B” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “C” is , Indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a common winning look-ahead presentation format, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a jackpot.

For example, if the look-ahead performance pattern is determined to be "07H", the common win system look-ahead performance form is displayed in the third holding area, and the common win system is also displayed in the second hold area after shifting from the third holding area. A look-ahead presentation format is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common winning look-ahead presentation form changes to the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form, and in the first holding area, the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form of "A" is displayed. be done.

Furthermore, when the pre-reading per-type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning-type pre-reading performance form of "C" is displayed in the third holding area. When shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common winning look-ahead performance form changes to the jackpot looking look-ahead performance form, the second holding area, and the first hold after being shifted from the second holding area. In the area, the jackpot type look-ahead presentation form of “B” is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the pre-read per type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E). In addition, in this example, for the pattern that changes from the jackpot type look-ahead performance form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form to the long-short hit look-ahead performance form, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern However, these patterns may be included in the per-prefetch type performance pattern.
B) A look-ahead performance pattern for time-saving winnings (for example, a look-ahead performance pattern for a time-saving win) in which a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time it is suspended, and the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter. "09H").
B) A look-ahead jackpot performance pattern in which a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the performance form does not change after that, and the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed (for example, look-ahead winning type performance pattern “17H”) ).
c) At the time of suspension, a common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead win type performance pattern "24H").
d) A look-ahead common winning performance pattern B (for example, a look-ahead winning type performance pattern “12H”) that is displayed in a common win type look-ahead performance form at the time of suspension and then changes to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form.
e) At the time of suspension, the common winning type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and after that the performance form does not change, and the common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed. pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-reading type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. ) to determine. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random value 1 for sub-performance selection, A pre-read per type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form of "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and the look-ahead win type performance pattern that changes to the jackpot type look-ahead performance form of "B" thereafter is not shown. However, in this way, the sub-CPU 301 may determine the pre-read winning type presentation pattern that changes from the time-saving winning pre-read presentation form of "A" to the jackpot-based pre-read presentation form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form of "B" is, as described above, a jackpot-based look-ahead that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be a loss). In addition to this, a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be displayed that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot confirmation. In this case, the pre-reading type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type effect patterns f) to h).
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern A in which a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, "A" time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form, "B" jackpot look-ahead presentation form, "C" common winning look-ahead presentation form, etc.) are displayed. Then, the look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern B changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
h) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, "A" time-saving winning look-ahead showing form, "C" common winning look-ahead showing form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" jackpot winning look-ahead showing form, etc. A pre-reading jackpot confirmation performance pattern C in which a pre-reading presentation form is displayed and then further changed to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving look-ahead presentation form of “A”, the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form of “B”, and the common win-based look-ahead presentation form of “C”, at the time of suspension, “C” Although the common winning look-ahead presentation form is displayed most often, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of "A"'s time-saving look-ahead presentation form may be the highest, and at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of "B"'s jackpot-like look-ahead presentation form may be the highest. It may be made higher. Furthermore, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the common win type look-ahead presentation form of "C" may be the lowest.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all “pre-fetch performance type performance pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but this is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number It may also be possible not to allocate a random number value for sub-performance selection only to (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. [Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process]
Next, a table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be explained.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of a win) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed according to the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot).

When a pending image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is normally represented by a triangle, may be changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the retained image is a square, and the highest when the retained image is a star.

In addition, when a pending image is displayed as a jackpot-type look-ahead effect, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, may be changed to a color such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

Although the details will be described later, in the case where a pending image is displayed as a common winning look-ahead effect that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, the pending image can be used as an expected value for a jackpot, for example. It may be expressed by both the color indicating the level and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving win, or it may be expressed by a dedicated common win system look-ahead presentation form.

A pending image in which look-ahead presentation is performed can change from a presentation form with a relatively low expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value, but the expected value may change from a presentation form with a relatively high expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value. It is preferable not to change to a low performance form. Also, when changing the presentation form of the held image, it is not necessarily necessary to change it one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." , for example, it may be changed to "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Further, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the square or blue, which has the lowest expected value, but may start from a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (reservation correspondence) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, similarly to FIG. 56.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the notes (reservation support) in FIG. ~ "5" indicates a high expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". ”.

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the notes (suspension support) in FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the prefetch per type performance pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. to "5" are referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of win) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the pre-read expected value performance pattern is, for example, the number of reservations, as shown in the pre-read expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection. The random number value 2 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command, for example. Note that in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the case where the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". . For example, if the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area. The expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, if the look-ahead expected value production pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, the expected value level is "2" in the second holding area, and the expected value level is changed from the second holding area to the first holding area. When shifting to the area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the sub CPU 301 selects the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58). ), a look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value performance pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate. It is.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose", the selection rate of look-ahead expected value production patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) will be increased, etc. Although the distribution is biased, the distribution is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, by distributing the distribution evenly.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to a specific "ahead expected value performance pattern". It is also possible to not allocate the random value 2 for sub-effect selection only to `` (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific ``look-ahead expected value effect pattern'' to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending target for pre-reading is not present, that is, whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed for the current pending. If there are a plurality of pending images, the pre-reading effect may be performed on a plurality of pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only on one pending image.

If the pre-read effect is being executed for the current hold (NO in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not executed for the current hold (YES in S3002), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not a prefetch target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In addition, in this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the upper limit number that can be reserved. If it is a prefetch target (YES in S3003), it may be determined whether the number of reservations including the prefetch target is larger than the pending number. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination processing. In this process, the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined by referring to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination processing. In this process, the pre-reading type effect pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined by transmitting winning/losing information of special symbols from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of winning) determination process. In this process, a look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of a win) is determined by referring to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of a win) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when a loss occurs) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when a loss occurs) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading effects, examples of expansion of pre-reading effects]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead presentation, it is not only interesting to see whether the form of the pending image changes to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect or a time-saving look-ahead effect, but also the expected value of a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to increase the interest by performing new performances that have never been seen before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, but may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, regarding the form of the held image performed as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the held image displayed within the range of the first sub-holding area (4) to the first sub-holding area (1)), the first starting port 120 The form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the time of starting the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined to a variation pattern in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead time-saving winning effect pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54), and the variation in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. When compared with the probabilities determined for the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead performance while suppressing a drop in the expected value of a hit, increasing the interest. It is possible to increase it.

Note that the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a gaming state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, normal gaming state, low probability time-saving gaming state), it is possible to win a "time-saving hit" in the special symbol winning determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead performance is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead performance is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when executing the C-time-saving gaming state over the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. In any case where the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the possibility that the number of time saving times will increase is low. Therefore, by making sure that the player does not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving win" in the A-time-saving gaming state, the disappointment caused to the player by winning the "time-saving win" is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and it is necessary to ensure that the look-ahead effect is not performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state and the high-accuracy low time-saving game state. It's okay. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot type reach. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the pre-reading performance using the pre-reading jackpot performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot-based reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-based reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and the look-ahead time short hit performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56) '') and the pre-read common winning effect pattern (for example, the pre-read effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variable effect pattern. A common reach (for example, sub variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed as a common reach.

Further, a production pattern may be provided in which a short-time winning type reach is executed, and after a loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving winning type reaching, a jackpot type reaching is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not a jackpot-type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when common reach E is executed in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the starting information for which the look-ahead effect has been executed, common reach C and After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is performed, there is no transition to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the presentation common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the presentation common to the short time winning reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is executed, the shift to the time-saving hit type reach C does not occur.

By the way, in this embodiment, the prefetch effect is performed only for one pending image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 will Do not perform look-ahead effects. Note that even if the machine is a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of pending images, if a jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect.

For example, an arbitrary hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold whose variable display of special symbols starts after this first hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") ), and if a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H" in Fig. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect in this second suspension will be meaningless. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

Furthermore, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect has not been executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect will not be executed for the second hold. You may or may not need to do so.

Further, even when a fake jackpot look-ahead performance (for example, look-ahead hit type performance pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to perform the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving look-ahead performance (for example, the look-ahead performance pattern "05H" in Figure 56) is being executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It's okay. This is because even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the first pachinko game machine does not include a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Even when the winning look-ahead performance is being executed, the jackpot look-ahead performance or the time-saving win look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when a prize is won in the first starting opening 120 and the starting information is suspended during execution of a jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform a pre-reading performance regarding this suspension.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), when the jackpot display mode is derived, If there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute a pre-reading performance for the specific hold after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this hold is referred to as a "specific hold"), and even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 executes the C time-saving game based on the "time-saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving gaming states are not executed in duplicate when the time-saving gaming states overlap, and if the control is made to the A-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is set to "time-saving winning". ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead performance pattern and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern. Here, first, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 60, in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 stores the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area where the reservation information is stored, as indicated by triangles. A pending image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pending image") is displayed. Furthermore, when no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the reservation image, but displays only the frame of the reservation area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that reservation information has been newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white (expected value level "0"). The color of the held image that is displayed is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 60(b) is changed. This is an image showing that the color changes from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 60(c) is , is an image showing that the color changes from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 60(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(e), and the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 60(e) is changed. , is an image showing that the color changes from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th area 410.

Furthermore, the color of the pending image indicating the expected value for the jackpot (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, the jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance form can be used to change the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a prefetch effect that changes the effect form. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.

[1-10-2. Specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern]
Next, a specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. It should be noted that the look-ahead time saving hit type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. 56. Furthermore, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for time saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shapes of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular (expected value level "0"), and the shapes shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are triangular (expected value level "0"). The shape of the retained image is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 61(b) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 61(c) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 61(d) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 61(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 61(e) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the 0th area 410, the circle changes to a star (expected value level "5").

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) that indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the following look-ahead effect may be used. It may also be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a short-time winning look-ahead look to a jackpot look-ahead look.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win-based look-ahead performance to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead common winning performance pattern]
Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 62, in which a pre-reading effect is performed using a common pre-reading effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading per-type effect pattern.

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits that indicate the possibility of both jackpots and time-saving hits. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a pre-read effect type to a pre-read effect type jackpot type. Changes in the look-ahead production format for common winning systems include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving hit, jackpot), and a change to make it clear whether the type of win is a jackpot or a time-saving hit. is included. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to “43H” in FIG. 57.

In this example, as a common win-based look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is expressed by displaying.

In FIG. 62(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors and shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit). . In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or when the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and the image is displayed as a white triangle. The expected value for a short hit increases in the order of ``star''.

In this example, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is The format of the retained image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 62(b) is , is an image showing that the yellow pentagon has changed to the green hexagon (expected value level "3") when being shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 62(c) is , when shifted to the first holding area 411, from a green hexagon (a common winning look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``3'') to a rainbow triangle (a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``5'') This is an image showing the change.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates the expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that shows the expected value for the jackpot. , a pre-read common winning effect pattern indicating an expected value for a win (big hit or time-saving win). Then, when a look-ahead effect is executed using the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, the player is given an interesting idea of whether the pending image will change into a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Note that the format of the pending image that shows the expected value for time savings does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star." Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → red triangle (jackpot type look-ahead performance form)" or "green hexagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → It may be changed to a triangular star (a time-saving look-ahead production form). Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily have to start from the blue rectangle with the lowest expected value, but may start from the red circle, for example.

Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 62, the common winning system look-ahead performance format is changed to change the expected value from which any winning (jackpot or time-saving hit) is derived, or to change the expected winning from an unknown state to a jackpot. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU 301 may execute the prefetch effect shown below, for example. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common hit-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form, and then further changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-4. Variations of the common winning look-ahead production format]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common winning look-ahead presentation form that indicates the possibility of both jackpot and time-saving winning does not necessarily include the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time-saving winning. It is not limited to the form expressed by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win-based look-ahead performance format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both jackpots and time-saving hits, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for both jackpots and short-time wins, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance format in the future. The player can now play the game with a sense of anticipation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, with pending images changing from the dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to the jackpot look-ahead performance form. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a process in which Note that the look-ahead per-type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

Further, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to “31H” in FIG. 57 or 58.

In FIG. 63(a) and FIG. 64(a), a normal pending image in which no prefetch effect is performed is displayed in the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412, and the third pending area 413 and the second pending area 412 are displayed. No pending image is displayed in the 4 pending area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIGS. 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the pending image shown in the third holding area 413 is a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form, and is, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and the dedicated common winning system that was displayed in the third reservation area 413 in FIG. 63(b) This is an image showing that the prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing the form.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and the dedicated This is an image showing that the common winning look-ahead presentation form has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 in the same form.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 63(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form changes to a red triangle (expected jackpot value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the pending status is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 64(c) is This is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it changes from the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form to a white circle (expected value level of time saving per win "4").

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form, the dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form can be changed to the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form. It is possible to make the player find it interesting to see how the game will change, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs the "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out and the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 120) If a game ball enters the starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4), for example, three prize balls will be paid out, and if a game ball enters the general winning hole 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls will be paid out. The prize ball is paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 67 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 67), and notes.

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large winning opening for small winnings, FIG. 67 also describes an abnormal winning error in the large winning opening for small winnings for convenience. Moreover, in FIG. 67, the big winning hole 131 is described as the big winning hole for jackpot.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole or the big winning hole for small winnings, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the abnormal error in entering and discharging the big winning hole, the vibration sensor will be activated for a predetermined period of time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error when the sensor is on for a long time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot, and the probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In addition, abnormality in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot, will be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure this.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the winning slot, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning slot abnormal prize winning error" from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6 for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output outside the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. Output. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small wins). be done.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). In other words, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) is used to control the execution of the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal that is output during the small winning game control process different from the signal that is output when the small winning game control process is not in progress, the small winning pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information can be It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state by controlling the main CPU (the functions of the A time saving gaming state, B Although the explanation has been made on the assumption that the function of the time-saving gaming state and the function of the C-time saving gaming state are installed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one function (for example, the function of the A time saving gaming state) is installed among the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the functions of the B working time saving gaming state, and the functions of the C time saving gaming state, and the other functions ( For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the function B for the time-saving gaming state and the function for the time-saving gaming state C). In addition, two of the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state (for example, the A working time saving gaming state function, and the B working time saving gaming state function or the C working time saving function) It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is equipped with only the function of the game state) and not equipped with other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the time-saving game state C).

In addition, in a pachinko game machine such as a pachinko game machine called an ST machine, where the probability change flag is set to on with a 100% probability after the end of the jackpot game state, A time saving game state function, B time saving game state function It may be configured such that neither the function of 1 nor the function of the time-saving gaming state C is installed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine will be explained. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

Furthermore, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko game machine, The explanation shall be made using different symbols and step numbers than the machine.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

Note that the various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) are the same as the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 4). Although there are some things in common, I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general winning opening 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric winning opening. It includes an object unit 1145, a small winning unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects winning (passage) of game balls to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 1122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected by the passing gate switch 1127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The suspended normal symbol start information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131, a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. , special electric accessories 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 1115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 1140A and a second starting port 1140B are arranged in the gaming area 1105, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and/or the second starting opening 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later) detect winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131, there are two vertically flowing paths 1107a and 1107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 1131 is sent to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow route 1107a land in the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a. In addition, the game balls that flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but did not enter the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 1145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the downward flow path 1107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 1147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 1140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, such as a blade member, called a so-called electric tulip, may be used. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate this small hit shutter 1153.

By moving the small win shutter 1153 back and forth in the front and back direction, the small win shutter 1153 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small win large win opening 1151 and a game ball can enter the small win large win opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 1151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 1145 in the lower flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 1151, the player enters the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side, so it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 1151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 and the big winning opening for small winning 1151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the jackpot jackpot 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 1122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2. A reservation display section 1166 for special symbols, a display section 1167 for probability change notification, a display section 1168 for short-time notification, a solenoid 1148 for normal electricity, a solenoid 1135 for special electricity, a solenoid 1154 for small hit, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big winning port count switch 1132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 1123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are transferred to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the gaming parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 1082 that makes the game balls fire. A firing device 1006 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. Although the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a probability-variable control but time-saving control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability change control is not executed but the time saving control is executed. It is now possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described below), that is, when a game ball enters the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. This table is referred to when determining a "time saving win", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for special symbol hit determination extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "small win", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The special symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number value for special symbol hit determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines a "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. The hit determination table for the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship with the judgment value data, the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit that is determined as a “jackpot” and the relationship with the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the special symbol hit that is determined as a “loss” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines a “time-saving hit,” “small hit,” “big hit,” or “loss” based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. . The hit determination table for the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a “small hit” and the corresponding small hit determination value data, special symbol determined as a “big hit” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for hit determination and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the range (width) of random numbers for special symbol hit determination determined as a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination A relationship with value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Further, when the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines the "time-saving hit". It is determined that the judgment value data is "time-saving judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 executes the "Time-saving hit". ”, and the judgment value data is determined to be “time saving judgment value data”. In addition, if the variable probability flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "lose". , the judgment value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines the "time-saving hit". It is determined that the judgment value data is "time-saving judgment value data". In addition, if the variable probability flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot". , the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the variable probability flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "lose". , the judgment value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for special symbol hit determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process). is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( or larger), it becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is overlapped, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will actually change. This will make it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving win" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned judgment value data. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" to be determined (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 executes the selected symbol command ``z10'' is selected as the symbol designation command, and ``zA8'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to enable the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this example, the judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for special symbol hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), and then the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is determined. Referring to FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. Further, in the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following (When executing the hit type determination process in S1036 of FIG. 78). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving hit display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the win game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for special symbol hit judgment, that is, the winning judgment process is performed that does not include "time-saving winning" in the lottery result. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to one time as the mode of the small winning gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 1164, and then displays the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it is possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", after the end of the small win game state, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. Among the flags, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag to ON, and it is decided to set the probability variation number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. decided on. In addition, as for the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the jackpot game state. In addition, as for the mode of the subsequent gaming state, in either case, it is decided to set only the time-saving flag of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON. Further, the number of times to save time is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control the time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the mode of time saving control in the high accuracy time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state. .

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the winning game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 73.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Judgment value data is determined based on the random number value for special symbol hit judgment (performing win/loss judgment), and a win/loss (``time-saving hit'', ``small hit'', ``big hit'', or ``loss'') is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the judgment value data, and the type of display mode (for example, time saving type, jackpot type) to be derived to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 74 and 75 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the second special pattern when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S1037 in FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the read-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a prefetch effect if the prefetch flag is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may also make the determination.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or a low-accuracy time-saving game state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the prefetch flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Determined by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in Figure 75, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 74. The expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time is larger than that in the determined case. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection for each set value, the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined can be made different. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 74) for low start, and for example, in the high accuracy time saving game state, the high accuracy In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figures 74 and 75 indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 86), etc.) ), below, the special symbol control process will be explained anew, including the same process as the process performed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more. If the value is "0" for all of the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives a demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a demonstration display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in a normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and a gaming state where right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). , high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1003, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1004, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1006, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S1007, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1009, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1010, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see Figure 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S1011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S1006 or S1009 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S1028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 if the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 if it is called in S1006, and calls it in S1009. If it has been called, the process returns to S1010, and if it has been called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1031), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is determined as YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is determined as NO). ), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1032), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1033, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination process is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) and using the special symbol hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, a jackpot, or a loss. It is determined whether there is. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the small winning flag is turned off at the start of the small winning gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

In the above special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the random value for reach determination or/and the random number for performance selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In game states where right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see FIG. 75) ), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S1037, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. Ru. After executing the process in S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1024) will be performed. After executing the process in S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process in S1040, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1041, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process in S1052, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (if NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1053), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol performance stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1055, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process in S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (YES determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process in S1058, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot (YES determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S1060, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process in S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process in S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1065, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1067, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1068, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the following steps S1075 to S1081 are common when there is a jackpot (when S1072 is determined as YES) and when there is a small hit (when S1073 is determined as YES). Explain with reference to. However, in the case of a big hit, the conditional device operates, but in the case of a small hit, the conditional device does not operate, so strictly speaking, different processes are executed depending on whether it is a big hit or a small hit (for example, , in the case of a jackpot, the number of rounds is set, whereas in the case of a small win, the number of openings is set, etc.).

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process (S1077) of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151), and the external terminal board 1184. jackpot signal setting process (S1078), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting process (S1080), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S1081) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1026) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S1092, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 1151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1028) will be performed. After executing the process in S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S1107, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The big prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process in S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening for the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 1131 for jackpot and the big winning hole 1151 for small winning. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is performed. After executing the process in S1110, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1112, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1121), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1121), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter (for example, big winning hole count switch 1132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70 for both) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole is used. etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is not the maximum winning number (if S1122 is NO), the main CPU 1201 , the process moves to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is determined as YES) , the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is NO), the main CPU 1201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning). After executing the process in S1124, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1125, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1126, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1131), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, you can set or reset the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, number of times the big winning hole is opened). A process is performed to set or reset the values of counters, large winning opening winning counters, ceiling counters, etc.). In addition, both the special symbol suspension flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). Furthermore, when the probability change flag is set on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set on. As a result, the ceiling counter will not be updated in the high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is on. After executing the process in S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 83 is performed. However, in the special symbol game ending process of FIG. 83, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that a time saving management process (S1091) is performed, but strictly speaking, this time saving management process (S1091) is not a small hit. In some cases (YES in S1073 of FIG. 81), the process is executed, but in the case of a jackpot (YES in S1072 of FIG. 81), the process is skipped without being executed. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small win rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the first starting hole is set in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 will not be in the open state, so the frequency with which the second starting port 1140B will be in the open state in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that in the game where the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 1151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the game ball stops showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are executed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts (see Figure 75), so The winning frequency of game balls in the winning hole 1151 is increased compared to other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is in an open state due to the execution of electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning in the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning in the small winning large winning opening 1151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. If a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls will be paid out, but the second starting port 1140A does not contain any balls that are hit to the right and are distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a. Only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered a regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-hit game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is changed. When drawn out, the normal electric accessory 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140B, thereby potentially opening the large winning opening 1151 for small winning. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), so if the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, Even if it does, the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than in the game state in which time saving control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

In addition, the third pachinko gaming machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting slot 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. and a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be used.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2158a that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2159 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( (See FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing prize opening 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 2155 and a game ball in the V-winning hole 2155 due to the operation of a V-shutter solenoid 2158a (see FIG. 88 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2159 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that have entered the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2159 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2159 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2159 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2159 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass through) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that the game balls that have entered the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2159.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2 Special symbol reservation display section 2166, time saving notification display section 2168, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, V shutter solenoid 2158a, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the hit determination process for the first special symbol using the first special symbol hit determination random number. , the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "time-saving hit," a "big hit," or a "loss." In addition, when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the special symbol is a hit based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number. The result of the determination process is determined to be a "time saving win", a "big hit", or a "accessories opening win".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120, such as "time-saving hit" and "jackpot". ” or “Lose” is the range (width) of the random number value for special symbol hit determination, and the corresponding determination value data (“Time-saving hit determination value data”, “Jackpot determination value data”, “Loss determination value data”) ”) is stipulated. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol that is executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, the special The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for symbol hit determination and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "accessory release hit determination value data") is specified. has been done.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit is 65,536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random number value and the second special symbol hit determination random number value are generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 will issue a selection symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows, for example. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the subsequent gaming state (more specifically, (time saving flag and time saving end conditions). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving game state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot game state. "L" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display frequency of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. Note that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the control is made to the jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, it is determined to set the time saving flag to ON, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object released", if the control is not made to the jackpot gaming state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot gaming state. Not only that, but also the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing control based on the opening of the accessory, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the opening of the accessory.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the jackpot gaming state aspect and the subsequent gaming state aspect as described above. Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, It is also possible to use different conditions. For example, all of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state may be different. Only one of the time-saving gaming states, the time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state, may be different. Also, only one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. , only one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C may be different. That is, the ending condition of at least one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" is changed to the ending condition of at least one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It may be made different depending on the game state.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection extracted when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular gaming mode, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly ever land in the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is “time-saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to the second special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number value for performance selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 generates a variation pattern of the second special symbol as an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

Although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is on or If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 2201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 92 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted, but similarly to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S2003), the main CPU 2201 executes the process as follows. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is determined as YES), in the special symbol management process, when S2003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S2004 is determined as YES, the processing target is the second special symbol. Special symbols are to be processed. Further, if the control state number is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processing of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to and the special symbol hit determination random value is used to determine the special symbol hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a jackpot, or a role opening hit. After executing the process in S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S2024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. It happens. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the jackpot game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening the accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and a transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is not performed in the first pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. ~ There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the state of the probability change flag (on (refer to S191, S202, and S211), and then performs the processes from S192, S203, and S212, respectively. However, in the third pachinko machine, as described above, the process is performed with high accuracy. The difference is that the processing from S192, S203, and S212 is performed without checking the state of the probability change flag because it is not controlled by the gaming state. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process. (See Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2159 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (eg, per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91), so the player can understand that the jackpot game control process is executed. As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. That will happen. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. 100 (YES in S2095), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or the V attacker count switch counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. At step 2153 (see FIG. 88), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the end of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. However, in the special symbol game ending process of FIG. 98, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S2071) is performed, but strictly speaking, the time saving management process (S2071) is If it is a hit (YES in S2060 of FIG. 97), it is executed, but if it is a jackpot (YES in S2052 of FIG. 97), it is not executed and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko game machine is a game machine equipped with a small win rush, and like the second pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. It is. However, the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal gaming state even if it is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state when it is controlled to a high probability gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko game machine, descriptions of points common to the second pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of this fourth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the second pachinko game machine.

Further, the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the second pachinko gaming machine. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the second pachinko game machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[4-1. Game board unit configuration]
FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in FIGS. 108 and 109, not only the description but also the illustration of the symbols for the configurations common to the second pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 108, the first starting port 4120, unlike the second pachinko gaming machine, has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B.

The fourth pachinko game machine includes a first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 109) that detects passage of a game ball to a first starting port 4120A, and a first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 109) that detects passage of a game ball to a first starting port 4120B. 1 starting port switch 4121B (see FIG. 109).

When the game balls pass through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When a game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal electric accessory 4146 is arranged, for example, below the first starting opening 4120A. The normal electric accessory 4146 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the first starting port 4120B by operating a movable member 4147 called a so-called electric chew. The game ball is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize. The ordinary electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko game machine is arranged below the first starting port 4120A, and the winning port whose ease of winning is changed by state transition is the first starting port 4120B. Although it differs from the second pachinko game machine in certain respects, the other configurations and functions are similar to the second pachinko game machine, so a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that in FIG. 108, the open state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a dashed line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a solid line.

The passage gate 4126 of the passage gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right area 4107, but is arranged in the left area 4106 so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through.

Note that the passage gate 4126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device in the same way as the second pachinko game machine, but apart from the passage gate 4126, the accessory continuous activation device may be activated. A gate that is a trigger for activating may be placed in the right area 4107.

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the normal electric accessory 4146, and it is possible to win a game ball regardless of whether the ball is hit left-handed or right-handed. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a jackpot jackpot 4131 and an opening/closing member 4134 that can be opened and closed in the front-back direction, and when the opening/closing member 4134 is operated and the jackpot jackpot jackpot 4131 is opened. , the game ball hit to the right can win a prize in the jackpot jackpot jackpot 4131.

In the right side area 4107, two downward flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed, for example, vertically, as downward paths for a game ball hit to the right. In this embodiment, a game ball hit to the right is configured to be distributed to the upper downward flow path 4107a with a probability of approximately 1/3, and to be distributed to the downward downward flow path 4107b with an approximately 2/3 probability. has been done.

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win prizes. Passage of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 109). In addition, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a enter the second starting port 4140.

In the small winning unit 4150, a large winning opening 4151 for small winning is arranged in the right side area 4107, similar to the second pachinko gaming machine. This large winning opening 4151 for small winnings is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 4107b can win, and similarly to the second pachinko game machine, for example, the shutter 4153 for small winnings is arranged in the front and rear direction. The ease of winning a prize can be changed by operating the system. Note that the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning big prize opening 4151 is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening for jackpot 4131 and the large winning opening for small winning 4151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, the fourth pachinko game machine, like the second pachinko game machine, includes a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game, and a sub-control circuit that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It includes a circuit 4300 and the like.

[4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers obtained based on the winning of the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B are used until the variable display of the first special symbol starts (that is, the first special Up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4 symbols) can be held until the symbols are subjected to hit determination processing. Similarly, various random numbers obtained based on the winning of the second starting hole 4140 are used until the variable display of the second special symbol starts (that is, the random numbers are used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol). up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4).

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the special symbol hit determination table that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120A, 4120B or the second starting hole 4140. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "time saving win," "small win," "big win," or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small win" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol's hit determination process, and a "time-saving win" may be included in the lottery format in the second special symbol's hit determination process. .

The special symbol hit determination random number value is a random number value used in the special symbol hit determination process, similar to the second pachinko gaming machine. In this embodiment, the random number value for special symbol hit determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. The hit determination table for the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship with the judgment value data, the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit that is determined as a “jackpot” and the relationship with the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the special symbol hit that is determined as a “loss” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines a "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. The hit determination table for the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for special symbol hit determination determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship with the judgment value data, the range (width) of the random number value for determining a special symbol hit that is determined as a “jackpot” and the relationship with the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the special symbol hit that is determined as a “loss” The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special symbol hit determination process, the probability that jackpot determination value data is extracted when the probability change flag is off (jackpot probability) is 201. The jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is on is 1/200.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 can determine the "time saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, but instead, if the value of the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 4201 determines the "time saving win". may be excluded from the lottery to prevent it from being determined as a "time saving win".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but for example, if the "time-saving win" is won in the high probability low base state, the high probability If the specification is to transition to the base state, by not providing a "time-saving hit" in the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, it will essentially become a "time-saving hit" in the high-accuracy, low-base state. You can choose not to win.

[4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 109) included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120A, 4120B or the second starting hole 4140 and the aforementioned judgment value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a determined "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the first special symbol is a random symbol or not. , select one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" as the selected symbol command, and select "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z3" or "z4" according to the symbol random number value of the first special symbol. ” and select “zA2” or “zA3” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z5" regardless of the symbol random value of the first special symbol. ” and select “zA4” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as " z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 selects, for example, "z7" or "z8" as a selection symbol command according to the symbol random value of the second special symbol. ” and select “zA6” or “zA7” as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 issues a selection symbol command such as "z9" regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. ” and select “zA8” as the symbol designation command.

Although the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, similar to the second pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 stores the first special symbol display when the variable display of special symbols stops. The special symbol stop mode determination table (FIG. 12 (A ) is memorized.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states include a low-probability low base state (normal gaming state), a low-probability high base state (low-probability time-saving gaming state), a high-probability high base state (high-precision time-saving gaming state), and It is controlled to either a high-accuracy low base state (high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). Among these game states, in the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B to win. The game progresses based on this. In the high-accuracy-low base state, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and the game progresses based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 4140.

The winning type determination table determines the winning game state mode or / according to the selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol and the gaming state when the special symbol winning determination process is performed. and the aspect of the subsequent gaming state. The aspect of the winning game state shown in FIG. 112 indicates the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the aspect of the small winning gaming state (more specifically, the number of openings). Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

(In case of time saving)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows.

In the low-probability low base state or the low-probability high base state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag. Decide to set it to . Also, set the time saving number to 1 time (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 6 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 12 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2") decide to. When the display mode per time saving is derived on the first special symbol display section 4163, it becomes possible to shift to the C time saving game state.

In addition, in the high accuracy high base state or the high accuracy low base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy, low-base state or the high-accuracy, low-base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit," the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C-time-saving gaming state, Continuing to be in a certain low base state. In addition, in the high accuracy high base state or the high accuracy low base state, "time saving hit" may not be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

(If the result of the first special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the A time-saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 , As the mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the probability variable flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the number of probability variables is set to 120. Decided to set it at the time. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy, low-base state. Become.

In addition, in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, if the result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high probability jackpot), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the winning gaming state, and determines to set both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on as the subsequent gaming state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time saving number to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be four rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided that neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to a low probability low base state. Become.

In addition, in the low probability high base state, high probability high base state, or high probability low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the winning gaming state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON as the subsequent gaming state. Determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, can be controlled to a low probability high base state. Become.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
In the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 , As the mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the probability variable flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the number of probability variables is set to 120. Decided to set it at the time. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy, low-base state. Become.

In addition, in the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state, if the result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability jackpot), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the winning gaming state, and determines to set both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on as the subsequent gaming state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time saving number to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability jackpot), the main CPU 4201 As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set on. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it can be controlled to a low probability low base state. Become.

In addition, in the low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, or high-probability low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "jackpot", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low-probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the winning gaming state, and sets only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON as the subsequent gaming state. Determine. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, controls the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, can be controlled to a low probability high base state. Become.

(In case of small hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "Small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), the following conditions are selected: low-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, and high-probability low Regardless of the base state, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 4151 (see FIG. 108) to be one time as the mode of the small winning game state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, then controls the small win game state, and after the small win game state ends, is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

(In case of loss)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z9"), the main CPU 4201 determines the winning game state and the subsequent game state. Do not set any of the following aspects. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 4201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state. Incidentally, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose", there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112 originally. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 112.

[4-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 4201 determines a special symbol variation pattern by referring to a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start or a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. The special symbol variation pattern table for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 74, so its explanation will be omitted. Similarly, the special symbol variation pattern table for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 75, so its explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the low-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, and high-probability high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy/low-base state where right-handed play is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start.

That is, in the low-accuracy/high-base state and the high-accuracy/high-base state, the frequency of operation of the normal electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the frequency of winning of game balls into the first starting port 4120B is increased. However, even if it is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball lands in the second starting hole 4140 by hitting right in the low-accuracy high base state or the high-accuracy high base state, the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start (see FIG. 74) ), the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long time of approximately 600,000 msec. In this regard, in the low-accuracy, high-base state and the high-accuracy, high-base state, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 140B is increased, and the variation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see Fig. 75) shows that As shown in FIG.

[4-6. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 113 is an example of the normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, based on the random value for normal symbol hit determination obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). This is a table that is referred to when determining ``normal symbol hit'' or ``loss'' by lottery.

The random number value for normal symbol hit determination is a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. The normal symbol hit determination table contains the range (width) of the random number value for determining a normal symbol hit determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit for each state (on/off) of the time-saving flag. The relationship with the determination value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined as a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

For example, in the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state) where the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 detects that if the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is between 0 and 94. is determined to be a "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is determined to be "normal symbol hit determination value data". Further, the main CPU 4201 determines that it is a "lose" when the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is any one of 95 to 98, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

Also, for example, in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) where the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 selects the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number from 0 to 98. If there is, it is determined that it is a "normal symbol hit" and the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". Further, if the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is 99, the main CPU 4201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

[4-7. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 114 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108) and the aforementioned judgment value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command". "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In this embodiment, there is normally one type per symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 114, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the symbol hit selection command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in the low base state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 4201 Normally, when a symbol hits, "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command.

In addition, in the high base state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, no matter if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 4201 Normally, when a symbol hits, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command.

[4-8. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 115 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Referenced when making decisions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 selects the opening pattern that is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 is two, but it is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example. Further, a plurality of types of selection symbol commands may be provided when a normal symbol hits, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, for example. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state and the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 116 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 changes the normal symbol based on the state of the time saving flag (on/off) and the random value for normal symbol production selection obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). Decide on a pattern. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the low base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500,000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol production selection from 0 to 99.

In addition, in the high base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect from 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the variable display time of the normal symbol is two patterns, it is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of variable display times of normal symbols may be provided, and the pattern of variable display times of normal symbols may be determined depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, for example. Further, a plurality of types of selection symbol commands may be provided when a normal symbol hits, and the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined depending on the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, for example. Furthermore, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined depending on the type of time-saving game state and the type of the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits.
[4-10. Game flow]
FIG. 117 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is a low probability low base state. The flow of the game will be explained assuming that the game is started in this low-probability, low-base state.

[4-10-1. Playing in a low-accuracy, low-base state]
As described above, in the low probability low base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability low base state, the game is played so that the game balls fired toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Since electric support control is not executed in the low probability low base state, most games are based on winnings in the first starting opening 4120A. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then ends the low-probability low-base state. and transitions to the low certainty high base state. The winning probability of "time saving win" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 110, and the variable number of special symbol display times (i.e. time saving number) that can be executed in a low probability/high base state is shown in FIG. 112. 1, 6, or 12 times.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "Jackpot", as shown in Figure 111, 87% are high-probability jackpots (selected symbol command is "z3"), and 13% are low-probability jackpots. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Shift to high-certain low base state.

Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, control to a low-accuracy low base again.

In this way, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, it is configured not to shift to the high-accuracy, high-base state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

[4-10-2. Playing in a low-accuracy, high-base state]
As mentioned above, in the low-probability-high base state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability high base state, the game is played so that the game balls launched toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Particularly in the low-accuracy/high-base state, since electric support control is executed, most games are based on winnings in the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, and then continues the low-probability high base state. do. The type of time-saving game state in this low-probability-high base state is C time-saving game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the "time saving win" is approximately 1/6, as shown in FIG. 110. In addition, if you win the "time saving win" in the low probability high base state, the time saving game state will overlap unless it is a time saving final variation. In this case, the concept of the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability-high base state (namely, the time-saving number of times) is as described above in the column of "duplication of time-saving game states". For example, if the time-saving game state is to be executed in a superimposed manner, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the remaining number of time-saving games in the low-probability-high base state or the number of time-saving games set based on the "time-saving hit" is greater. The low-accuracy/high-base state continues until the number of time-savings on the other side is exhausted. On the other hand, if the time-saving gaming states are not superimposed, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-probability-high base state until the remaining number of time-savings in the low-probability-high base state is exhausted.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "Jackpot", as shown in Figure 111, 87% are high-probability jackpots (selected symbol command is "z3"), and 13% are low-probability jackpots. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Shift to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, control the low-accuracy high base again. The type of time-saving game state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Incidentally, when the set number of time saving times is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the low probability high base state and shifts to the low probability low base state.

Obtained based on the probability of winning the "time saving win" in the first special symbol's hit determination process, the number of time savings set when winning the "time saving win", and the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B. Considering the number of random values that can be held, the stay rate in the low probability high base state is the highest among the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, the high probability high base state, and the high probability low base state. It gets expensive.

[4-10-3. Game with high accuracy and high base condition]
As mentioned above, the high probability high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the game is played so that the game balls launched toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B. Particularly in the high-accuracy, high-base state, since electric support control is executed, most games are based on winnings in the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In the high-accuracy-high base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163; The current high-accuracy, high-base state is continued without activating the new C time-saving game state. Therefore, time-saving game states will not overlap. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 forcibly changes "time-saving win" to a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display section 4163. It is also possible to do so.

When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "Jackpot", as shown in FIG. The selected symbol command is "z4").

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for four rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Control to a high-accuracy, high-base state again. In addition, the type of time-saving game state in this high probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over four rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to low certainty high base state. The type of time-saving game state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving game state.

Incidentally, when the set number of time saving times is exhausted without winning a jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the high probability high base state and shifts to the high probability low base state. In this embodiment, when a high probability jackpot is won in the low probability high base state and when a high probability jackpot is won in the high probability high base state, the control is performed to the high probability high base state. In this case, the number of time saving times set is 50 times. On the other hand, the number of probability variables to be set is 120. Therefore, the number of probability variations remaining after the time saving number is exhausted (for example, 70 in this embodiment) is controlled to be in the high probability/low base state.

[4-10-4. Game with high accuracy and low base condition]
As mentioned above, the high-probability-low base state is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the game is played so that the game balls fired toward the game area 4105 mainly enter the second starting opening 4140. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol hit determination process, as shown in FIG. 110, there is no chance of winning a "time saving win". Also, suppose that the first special symbol hit determination process is performed when a game ball enters the first starting opening 4120A, 4120B, and the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit". Although the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving win" to the first special symbol display section 4163, it continues the previous high accuracy low base state without operating the C time saving game state. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving win", the main CPU 4201 forcibly changes "time-saving win" to a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display section 4163. It is also possible to do so.

Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "Jackpot", as shown in Figure 111, 87% are high-probability jackpots (selected symbol command is "z7"), and 13% are low-probability jackpots. It is a jackpot (selected symbol command is "z8").

If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, Control is performed again to a high-accuracy low base state. That is, it loops through the high-certain low base states.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state for 10 rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to low-accuracy-high base.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "small win", the small win large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 108) is opened once, as shown in FIG. 111. As shown in FIG. 110, the probability of winning a "small win" is approximately 1/1.1, for example. Although not shown, the opening time of the small winning large prize opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start. Therefore, when considering the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see FIG. 108) and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball into the small winning large prize opening 4151 (see FIG. 108), the number of prize balls is high. If the ball is hit to the right in a low-probability base state, there will be a small-hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1. That is, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the number of balls held by the player may increase as the game progresses. In addition, as mentioned above, if the specification is such that when a "time-saving hit" is won in the high-accuracy, low-base state, the system shifts to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the "time-saving win" will be added to the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process. By not providing ", it is possible to substantially prevent winning of the "time saving win" in a high probability/low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, and high-accuracy high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the game value paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time (for example, the prize The expected value of pitch count, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these game states (low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the so-called balls held by the player decrease as the game progresses. In addition, in these gaming states, even if a game is played in an irregular gaming mode (for example, right-handed play) and a game ball enters the second starting hole 4140, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starting is referred to. Since the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined by the game, there is no real benefit to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the so-called ST machine which shifts to the normal gaming state after being controlled to the high-precision gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times) has been explained as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol By controlling the game to be in a high-precision gaming state until the result of the hit determination process becomes a jackpot, it may be possible to further increase the number of balls put out during a rush for a small win.

[4-11. Control by sub control circuit]
The sub CPU 4301 included in the sub control circuit 4300 controls the effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or almost the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state. control so that By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 whether the main CPU 4201 is controlling the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, or the high-accuracy high base state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to understand by appearance from the performance image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the probability of a jackpot when the variable probability flag is off (for example, 201 parts) are approximately the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult for players to realize the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot.

According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state are relatively disadvantageous gaming states for the player, and the high-accuracy low base state is It is possible to create a gaming state that is relatively advantageous for the player. In particular, in a high-accuracy, low-base state, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player increases the so-called balls held by the player due to the rush of small wins.

Furthermore, in the case of a conventional pachinko gaming machine, the stay rate of the most disadvantageous gaming state among the plurality of gaming states is the highest. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko game machine, among the low-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state, and high-accuracy low base state, the probability change flag is OFF and the electric support control is Although the low-probability, low-base state in which the player is not executed is the most disadvantageous for the player, the stay rate is the highest in the low-probability, high-base state, making it possible to realize new game characteristics never seen before.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot in the low probability low base state, and the type of jackpot is a high probability jackpot, the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state , and the high-certainty low base state, the transition is always to the most advantageous high-certainty low base state. Moreover, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the probability that the type of jackpot will be a high-probability jackpot is approximately 87%, so it will not be possible if the jackpot is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. However, it is possible to increase interest.

Furthermore, in the low probability low base state, there is approximately a 1 in 6 chance of winning the "time saving win", and in that case, the number of time savings set is in the range of 1 to 12, so the low probability low base state and the low probability The main focus is on the gameplay of going back and forth between a high base state and a high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that the game will be shifted to the low-probability low-base state, which is always a high-probability low-base state, and it is possible to increase interest. Become.

In addition, also in the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is preferable that the sub CPU 4301 performs a look-ahead effect. An example of the look-ahead performance performed in the fourth pachinko game machine will be described later in association with a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variation.

Note that, like the second pachinko game machine, the above-mentioned fourth pachinko game machine has been described using as an example a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Not limited to. For example, like the first pachinko machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. , similar to the third pachinko game machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine.

[4-12. Example of look-ahead performance and variable pattern performance]
Next, in the fourth pachinko game machine, an example of a look-ahead effect performed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007 will be described in relation to a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variation. Note that the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 1007a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 4301 via the display control circuit 1304 (see FIG. 70).

FIG. 118 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, from a common hit look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image changes and then a jackpot type reach is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 118(a) to 118(f), the prefetching type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. The expected value production pattern corresponds to "48H" in FIG. 57 or 58. Also, if you refer to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), the look-ahead per-type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see Figure 55), and the look-ahead per-type performance pattern determination table (see Figure 56), As can be seen, the look-ahead hit type performance patterns in the case of a jackpot are "15H" and "35H", and the look-ahead hit type performance patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 118(a), the first holding area 4411 and the second holding area 4412 display normal holding images in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 4413 and the fourth holding area 4414 display the normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In addition, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the reserved image is represented by an egg image that resembles an egg in order to be associated with the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of a jackpot, and the density of the pattern of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 118(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 118(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 is in the common win look-ahead presentation form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 118(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 4413 in FIG. 118(b) is , when shifted to the second reservation area 4412, the expected value level is changed to a form of "3" while keeping the common system prefetch effect form.

FIG. 118(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 4412 in FIG. 118(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first reservation area 4411, the common type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level "3" changes to the jackpot type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level "4".

FIG. 118(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118(d), and the form of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 4411 in FIG. 118(d) is This is an image showing that the image has been shifted to the 0th area 4410 without being changed.

FIG. 118(f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 118(f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 hatches, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a jackpot type reach. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a reach, and a losing image is displayed.

119(a) to (e) show that when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 of FIG. 118(f) hatches, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation has developed into a jackpot type reach. This is an image shown.

FIG. 119(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed. FIG. 119(b) is an image showing that the decorative pattern has stopped at the reach pattern. FIG. 119(c) is a reach effect displayed as an image showing a bird hatched from an egg in the 0th area 4410 of FIG. 118(f) growing up and flapping its wings in the sky. In this embodiment, the reach effect shown in FIG. 118(c) is a reach effect with a relatively high expected value for a jackpot among the plurality of reach effects. Therefore, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 118(c) is performed, the player's interest is increased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(d), when a jackpot image indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot is displayed, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118(e), when a loss image indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss is displayed, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 120 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, from a common hit look-ahead performance form showing that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, to a time-saving look-ahead performance. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes in form and then a time-saving winning effect is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 120(a) to 120(f), the prefetching type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. The expected value production pattern corresponds to "42H" in FIG. 57 or 58. Also, if you refer to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), the look-ahead per-type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see Figure 55), and the look-ahead per-type performance pattern determination table (see Figure 56), As can be seen, the pre-read per type performance patterns in the case of a time saving win are "07H" and "27H", and the pre-read per type performance patterns in the case of a loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 120(a), the first holding area 4411 and the second holding area 4412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 4413 and the fourth holding area 4414 display the normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 120(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 120(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 is in the common win look-ahead presentation form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 120(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 4413 in FIG. 120(b) is , when shifted to the second reservation area 4412, the expected value level is changed to a form of "3" while keeping the common system prefetch effect form.

FIG. 120(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 4412 in FIG. 120(c) is This is an image showing that when shifted to the first reservation area 4411, the common system look-ahead performance form with an expected value level "3" changes to the time-saving per-game look ahead performance form with an expected value level "4". Note that the egg image shown in FIG. 120(d) is a crocodile egg image.

FIG. 120(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120(d), and the form of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 4411 in FIG. 120(d) is This is an image showing that the image has been shifted to the 0th area 4410 without being changed.

FIG. 120(f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 120(f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 hatches, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving winning performance. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 does not hatch, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a time-saving winning performance, and a losing image is displayed.

In addition, in the explanation with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (FIG. 74), it was explained that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, a time-saving hit type reach is performed. In this fourth pachinko game machine, instead of the time-saving winning type reach, a time-saving winning performance is performed in which the expected value of the time-saving winning is high although the reach is not displayed so as to be easily distinguished from the jackpot.

121(a) to (e) show that when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 of FIG. 120(f) hatches, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation develops into a time-saving winning performance. This is an image showing what happened.

FIG. 121(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed, and shows an image of three crocodiles walking. FIG. 121(b) is an image showing that the left decorative pattern has stopped at "5". In this example, normally (other than time-saving winning effects) the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, right, and middle, but when the time-saving winning effect develops, the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, center, and right. It shall be. FIG. 121(c) is a diagram showing that the decorative pattern inside has stopped at "0". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(d), when the right decorative symbol stops at "G", it is clearly indicated that the game will shift to the C time-saving gaming state of 50 games. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121(e), when the right decorative symbol stops at "X", it is confirmed that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, and the current special symbol game ends. do.

Note that the images of eggs hatching in FIGS. 118(f) and 120(f) are both displayed in the 0th area 4410, but instead of this, for example, as shown in FIG. If the image in which the hatching is displayed at approximately the center of the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, the fluctuation performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation may develop into a jackpot type reach or time-saving hit type performance. It is possible to clearly inform the players and increase their interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko machine]
The fifth pachinko game machine, like the second pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Therefore, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the time saving management process of S131 (see FIG. 31) described in the second pachinko game machine is also performed. Note that descriptions of the same configuration, functions, etc. as the second pachinko gaming machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals as those of the second pachinko game machine will be used.

Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high probability gaming state until the variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), and the result of the special lottery is determined to be a "jackpot". This is a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine that is controlled to a low probability gaming state after the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined number of times (50 times) without becoming erroneous. In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag is set to ON until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the so-called first hit, and the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). This is a so-called pachinko game machine with a limiter, in which the probability change flag is set to OFF when the game is played.

The fifth pachinko game machine includes a game board unit 1010 (see FIG. 69) similar to the second pachinko game machine. As a result, if the game ball is in the open state where it is possible (or easy) to enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 by opening the special electric accessory 1133 (special electric shutter 1134), the ball flows down the right side area 1107. Almost all of the game balls enter the jackpot jackpot 1131. If the game ball is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, the gaming ball flowing down the right area 1107 will not enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 and will be further downstream. It flows down toward the normal electric accessory 1146 on the side and further toward the second starting port 1140B.

If it is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in an open state in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 1140B, Almost all of the game balls flowing down the right side area 1107 enter the second starting port 1140B. When both the big winning opening 1131 for jackpot and the second starting opening 1140B are in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 1107 will be able to win the big winning opening for small winning if the big winning opening 1151 for small winning is in the open state. Win a prize at mouth 1151. If the big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, the second starting opening 1140B, and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are all closed, most of the game balls flowing down the right side area 1107 (at least half or more) It is configured so that a prize is won at the starting opening 1140A.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, the main CPU 1201 reserves up to four pieces of normal symbol start information (random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits or random numbers for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern). In addition, the main CPU 1201 can of course hold up to four pieces of starting information (random value for jackpot determination and random symbol number) of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120, and Even when a game ball enters the starting hole 1140A or the second starting hole 1140B, the starting information of the second special symbol (random value for jackpot determination and random symbol value) is held for up to four pieces.

[5-1. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machines related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained using FIGS. 123 to 128. Note that each table shown in FIGS. 123 to 128 is stored in the main ROM 1202.

[5-1-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 123 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the first special lottery is held, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". Further, when a second special lottery is held, it is determined as a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202, the value of the probability variable flag (“0 (=off) ” or “1 (=on)”), the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination that are determined as “jackpot” or “loss” and the corresponding determination value data (“jackpot determination value data”, “ The relationship with "loss judgment value data") is defined. In addition, the value of the probability change flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)” is used as data for the second special lottery that is executed based on winnings in the second starting port 1140A or the second starting port 1140B. )"), the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "small hit"). ``judgment value data'' and ``loss determination value data'') are defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data relative to the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data relative to the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers. Note that the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small win probability are shown as selection rates in FIG. 123.

Although not shown in FIG. 123, the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 124 is an example of a special symbol determination table for a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 124, the special symbol determination table is based on the random symbol number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbols. For example, if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, the judgment value data is "jackpot judgment value data", and the symbol random number is "77", the selection symbol command at the time of winning is "z2", The "symbol designation command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 125 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 125, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot (number of rounds, probability variable flag) based on the above-mentioned winning selection symbol command. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10" and the probability change flag is determined to be ON.

Regardless of whether the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z0" to "z2", if the jackpot gaming state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the guaranteed change will occur after the jackpot gaming state ends. The flag is set ON. However, after the first jackpot game state ends, the second special lottery is held because the game is played with right-handed players, but in this second special lottery, when you win the jackpot, there is a 10% probability of 10 rounds. 2 rounds will be decided with a 90% probability.

Further, even if the selected symbol command at the time of winning is any of "z0" to "z2", electric support control is not executed (the electric support number is 0 times). That is, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine is a game machine in which electric support control is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Note that the electric support control is a control that enables (or facilitates) the winning of game balls into the second starting port 1140B. At least one of the following: the time when the game ball is in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to enter the second starting port 1140B), the number of times the normal electric accessory 1146 is opened, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning a normal symbol. This is a control that changes one or more of the winnings to make it possible (or easy) to win a prize to the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of making it possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 1140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 126 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. Determine.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol depends on the status of the variable probability flag (ON or OFF) and the first starting port 1120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins. In addition, if the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the variable probability flag, the random number for reach determination extracted when the game ball enters the first starting opening 1120, and the effect. Determined based on random numbers for selection.

In addition, if the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol depends on the status of the variable flag (ON or OFF) and the game ball in the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when winning a prize. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long period of time, approximately 600,000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation medium reach is determined. One of performances D to F is determined.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will depend on the status of the probability variable flag (ON or OFF) and the game ball entering the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long time, such as approximately 600000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time is A super-fast variation is determined in which the second special symbol is displayed in variation for an extremely short period of 1000 msec.

If the result of the second special lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will depend on the status of the variable probability flag (ON or OFF) and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B. It is determined based on the random number for reach determination (only when the variable probability flag is ON) and the random number for production selection extracted. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long variations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a long time such as approximately 600,000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress. Although it is sometimes determined to be a reach effect, in most cases it is determined to be a super-fast variation in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

In addition, since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 1201 will determine the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the performance content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 1007 (for example, a liquid crystal display device) by the sub control circuit 1300 (sub CPU 1301).

In addition, the "effect contents" column in FIG. 126 is shown for convenience to make it easy to understand, and the effect image displayed on the display device 1007 by the sub CPU 1301 via the display control circuit 1304 (for example, a decorative pattern) The content of the sound outputted from the speaker 1032 by the sub CPU 1301 via the sound control circuit 1305 (for example, the sound of a decorative pattern fluctuating) is shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 126, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different.

The variation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 126 is an example, and any variation time can be appropriately set as the variation time of the special symbol according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON. The configuration may be such that the fluctuation time is the same (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot and the probability variation flag is OFF. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be short (for example, 2000 ms). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol (for example, 4500ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 29500ms) in a certain case is configured to be longer than the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 2000ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot and the probability change flag is ON. You may. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be the shortest (for example, 500 ms).

[5-1-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 127 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the normal lottery is held, it is determined that the winning symbol is normal or a loss. The normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 includes data that is determined to be a "normal symbol win" or "loss" as data used in the normal lottery that is executed based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and the corresponding determination value data ("normal symbol hit determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data for the range of normal symbol hit determination random numbers. Note that the range (width) of the random number for normal symbol hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability of winning a normal symbol is shown as a selection rate in FIG. 127. That is, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the normal lottery is a "lose" approximately once every 43 times. Of course, the selection rate shown in FIG. 127 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the normal lottery results are "losing" about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 128 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of a pachinko game machine related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 determines a normal symbol variation pattern based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126, using the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 128, for example.

As shown in FIG. 128, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be a variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

In addition, if the result of the normal lottery is a "lose", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern will have a different variation time based on the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126. One of a plurality of variation patterns (02H to 05H) is determined. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a "lose" and the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is a specific random number (98, 99), a specific random number in which the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed for an extremely long time of 600,000 msec, for example. determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 128, by changing the random number range for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern for each set value, the probability of determining the above-mentioned specific pattern is higher with a high setting than with a low setting. The variation patterns of the normal symbols determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
The subsequent flow of the game when the game is started in the normal game state where the probability change flag is OFF will be explained. In addition, in the normal gaming state, as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see Figure 126), the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and has a very long fluctuation time. It is determined to be one of variations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a typical player plays the game by hitting left-handed. When a game is played with left-handed hitting, the game ball launched toward the game area 1105 can win in the first starting port 1120 instead of the second starting port 1140A, 1140B.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 1201 performs a first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "jackpot" in the normal gaming state is approximately 1/319, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 123).

In addition, even if the player hits right in the normal game state, if the game ball hit right passes through the passage gate 1126 and a result of the normal symbol is obtained, the normal electric accessory 1146 Although there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the second starting port 1140B when the game ball is opened, only one prize ball will be paid out when the game ball enters the second starting port 1140B. Further, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A without the normal electric accessory 1146 being opened, only one prize ball will be paid out when the game ball enters the second starting port 1140A. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed in one of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, so the small winning large winning opening 1151 is The frequency with which it is opened is extremely low. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, more prize balls (for example, four balls) are paid out than when game balls enter the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. Further, the variation time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a normal symbol (the probability of opening the normal electric accessory 1146) is high (see Figure 127), and when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, Since the variation time of the symbols is relatively short (see FIG. 128), when the player hits right, the normal electric accessory 1146 will be in a considerably open state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 1126 has a high possibility of winning the second starting port 1140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small win, it will be distributed downstream from the second starting port 1140B. A situation in which game balls flow into the small winning jackpot 1151 that is provided is less likely to occur. Furthermore, even if in the normal gaming state, the result of the normal lottery is a loss and the normal electric accessory 1146 is not released, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Since the time is extremely long, it is difficult to get a small hit.

It should be noted that the big winning hole that is opened when a jackpot is won and the big winning hole that is opened when a small hit is won may be different big winning holes or may be the same big winning hole. Further, the arrangement positions of the large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and the large winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs can be designed as appropriate. For example, a large winning opening that opens when a small win is achieved may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146, and a large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory 1146. Further, both the large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and the large winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146. Further, a large winning opening (also used as a large winning opening) that is opened when a jackpot or small winning occurs may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146. In addition, in this embodiment, game balls that did not enter the large winning hole that opens when a small hit, game balls that did not enter the large winning hole that opens when a jackpot hit, and game balls that entered the second starting hole 1140B. A second starting port 1140A (starting port for the special figure 2, which is not provided with an ordinary electric accessory) is provided in which game balls etc. that were not present can be won. The second starting opening 1140A can be placed downstream (downward) of the large winning opening that opens when there is a small hit and is downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146, or when it opens when the normal electric accessory 1146 and a small hit occur. It is possible to imagine the difference between the big winning opening and the like. Even in the case where such a second starting opening 1140A is provided, it may also serve as a large winning opening that opens when a jackpot occurs and a large winning opening that opens when a small winning occurs. In addition, in an embodiment where the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot is won is provided downstream from the big winning hole that opens when a small hit occurs, the big winning hole that opens when a small hit and the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot win It is possible to envisage a case where the second starting port 1140A is arranged between the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot occurs, or a case where the second starting port 1140A is arranged downstream of the big winning hole that opens when a jackpot is achieved. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which a starting port for special figure 2 (second starting port 1140B) is provided as a starting port provided with a normal electric accessory. As the starting port provided with, a starting port for the first special symbol may be provided. For example, a starting port for the first special symbol provided with the normal electric accessory may be provided separately from a starting port for the first special symbol in which the normal electrically powered accessory is not provided.

When the result of the first special lottery conducted in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 124) and determines the winning selection symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 125), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined win selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 69, since the jackpot jackpot 1131 is arranged in the right side area 1107, in the jackpot game state, the game is played by hitting right.

Next, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on the so-called first win ends will be explained.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric support control is not executed and the probability variation flag is always set to ON when the jackpot gaming state based on the so-called first win ends, so the jackpot gaming state based on the first win ends. After that, the main CPU 1201 controls the high accuracy low base state. In this high-accuracy-low base state, when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See FIG. 126), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy, low-base state after the jackpot game state based on the first hit ends, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation with a high probability, and a small win is derived, so the big win for the small hit is generated. The mouth 1151 is repeatedly opened at a much higher frequency than in the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be a variation pattern with a variation time of 500 msec. Moreover, since most of the game balls hit right pass through the passage gate 1126 and hit the normal symbols continuously, the normal electric accessory 1146 and the normal electric shutter 1147 are almost fully open. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-accuracy/low-base state is a normal symbol win, all or almost all of the game balls hit to the right will enter the second starting opening 1140B, so even if the large winning opening for small winning Even if 1151 is opened with high frequency, winning in the small winning large prize opening 1151 is inhibited. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B is one.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10,000 msec, 20,000 msec, 30,000 msec, and 600,000 msec. The main CPU 1201 stops the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, and opens the regular electric accessories 1146 and the shutter 1147 for general electricity based on the derivation of the mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols. The normal electric accessory 1146 is not released while the normal symbol winning is not derived even if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol stops. Therefore, while the normal electric accessory 1146 is closed, winning into the small winning big prize opening 1151 is not hindered, and most of the game balls hit right will enter the small winning big winning opening 1151. Become. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151 is 10 as described above. Therefore, in a high-probability-low base state in which the result of the normal lottery is usually determined to be a loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, as the variation time of the normal symbols becomes longer, the speed of increase in the number of balls produced increases.

In this way, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is capable of distributing regular symbols whose normal lottery result is usually a loss and whose fluctuation time is longer until a predetermined number of jackpot game states (for example, 5 times) are performed. The game is about being able to draw a pattern of fluctuations.

In such a fifth pachinko gaming machine, during one high-accuracy/low-base state, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never a normal loss, or a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss only once. Even if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10,000 msec, or the result of the regular lottery is a loss twice and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times, there are various patterns. may occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the simple configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times of the normal symbols are provided, and it is possible to separate the jackpot game state. To provide an unprecedented new game property that makes it possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high-probability, low-base state) with various patterns of increase in balls as a high-probability, low-base state that is advantageous to players. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Further, when the result of the normal lottery in the high probability/low base state is a normal loss, it is preferable that the sub CPU 1301 which has received the normal symbol variation pattern command execute an effect based on the variation time of the normal symbols. In other words, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be won is different when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20,000 msec, when it is 30,000 msec, and when it is 600,000 msec. Then, an effect may be executed that allows the user to grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained). For example, when the variation time of a normal symbol is 10,000 msec, an effect such as ``Per round!'' is executed, and when the variation time of a normal symbol is 20,000 msec, an effect such as ``Per 2 rounds!'' is executed. When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30,000 msec, a performance such as "3 rounds won!" is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, a performance such as "super win" may be performed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state is executed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , it becomes possible to increase interest.

Note that the effects executed by the sub CPU 1301 include a display effect displayed on the display device 1007 via the display control circuit 1304, a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 via the audio control circuit 1305, and an LED control circuit 1306. This corresponds to at least one or more of the light emitting effects of the LED group 1046 executed via the LED group 1046 and the movement effects of the performance accessory group 1058 executed via the accessory control circuit 1307.

By the way, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, if the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, the second special lottery will be held before the fluctuation of the normal symbols ends. The result may be a "jackpot" and the game may be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, since the time required for the jackpot game state to be controlled is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot game state ends, the fluctuating display of normal symbols with a fluctuating time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. It can occur. As mentioned above, since the normal electric accessory 1146 is not released while the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 does not prevent the winning to the small winning big prize opening 1151, and the player is hit right. Most of the game balls won will be won in the small winning jackpot 1151. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbols ends, when the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal If the fluctuating display of symbols continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become a "normal loss" in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, the advantageous gaming state immediately occurs after the jackpot gaming state ends. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game even while the game is controlled in a jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, and a jackpot game state of 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot game state is for the small hit. You can enter as many prizes as you like into the grand prize opening 1151, increasing your interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is explained that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is consumed even during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, but during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not consumed (the passage of the fluctuation time is stopped). For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, and the jackpot gaming state starts when 300,000 msec has elapsed after the normal symbol fluctuations start, the jackpot gaming state will continue for 300,000 msec after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is also possible to continue the fluctuation of the normal symbols (during the jackpot game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuations does not decrease).

Although the electric support control is not executed in the fifth pachinko game machine, the present invention is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot game state ends. be able to. In particular, if the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is possible to cause most of the game balls hit to the right to win a prize in the small winning large prize opening 1151.

<Production mode transition flow>
FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing the transition transition of the production mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 129(b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions for the production mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the production mode (sub game state) as shown in FIG. 129(a) is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. The performance modes include a normal mode, a first hit mode, a variable probability mode, and a bonus mode.

To explain specifically with reference to FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), when the jackpot game state starts in the normal mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the normal mode to the first winning mode. (See transition condition (1)).

When the jackpot game state ends in the first win mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the first win mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (2)). When the special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probability variation mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the probability variation mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)) .

When the jackpot game state starts in the variable probability mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the performance mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode (see transition condition (4)). In addition, in the variable probability mode, when the variable display of normal symbols (normal symbol loss length variation) with the variation pattern "05H" (see FIG. 128) starts, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode. (See transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the bonus mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the performance mode from the bonus mode to the probability variation mode (see transition condition (5)). Furthermore, when the jackpot gaming state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot gaming states executed from the first winning is less than the predetermined number (5 times) (unless the limiter has been reached), the sub control circuit 1300 , the production mode is shifted from the bonus mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (5)). In addition, if the normal symbol loss length variation is in progress when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode will be maintained, and if the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot game state will be maintained. If so, the bonus mode may be maintained.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first win is a predetermined number (5 times) (if the limiter has been reached), the sub control circuit 1300 controls the bonus mode. to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

Note that the normal mode is an effect mode that is controlled in the normal gaming state. In the normal mode, the production stage is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. The production stages include a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage. Each production stage will be explained in detail later.

Further, although not shown, a special performance mode may be provided as the normal mode (performance mode controlled in the normal gaming state). The special performance mode can be a performance mode that is controlled from the end of the bonus mode until the variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

<First production stage preview content lottery process>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the first performance stage preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first performance stage preview content lottery process shown in FIG. 130, in the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)), after a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, a special symbol change related to the starting prize is This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when starting. In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the first performance stage preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo continuous stage performance summary lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the outline of the performance to be performed during the special symbol variation related to the first starting slot winning based on the sub variation pattern by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Although the details will be described later, before the first performance stage preview content lottery process shown in FIG. It has been decided. The sub-variation pattern includes information regarding pseudo-continuous performance.

Pseudo-continuous display is a display in which decorative symbols are displayed as if they are stopped (temporary stop display) from when the special symbol is displayed variably based on one starting memory until it is finally displayed as a fixed display. . The state of temporary stop display is a state where the decorative pattern is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that it is completely stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, a pseudo-coupling effect may be simply referred to as a "pseudo-coupling", and a production in which no pseudo-coupling occurs may be referred to as "no pseudo-coupling". The pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment includes a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop display occurs once, and a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop display occurs twice. A pseudo-continuous performance in which a temporary stop display occurs once is referred to as "pseudo 2", and a pseudo-continuous performance in which a temporary stop display occurs twice is referred to as "pseudo 3".

In "Pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the decoration The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "Pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, and after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), the second temporary stop display occurs. A temporary stop display occurs, and after the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the third pseudo variable display is performed), the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The stage from when the first temporary stop display occurs is called "Pseudo 1", and the stage from when the second pseudo fluctuation display starts to when the second temporary stop display occurs is called "Pseudo 1". 2", and the stage after the third pseudo fluctuation display starts is sometimes called "pseudo 3". Moreover, in the performance of "no pseudo", the period from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is sometimes referred to as "pseudo 1".

The sub-fluctuation pattern includes, as information regarding the pseudo-continuous effect, information indicating whether the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern (to which stage the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and , contains information indicating the outline of the performance performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous performance. For example, "Pseudo 1" is a 20-second performance, "Pseudo 2" is a 16-second performance, and a sub-variation pattern that includes information that "Pseudo 3" develops after reach is established and leads to the second half of super reach. has been determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 1301 performs what kind of effect in "pseudo 1" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 20 seconds) a "bell" which will be described later. An overview of the effects, such as whether to stop the icon or what kind of effects to use in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern changes for 16 seconds) to stop the "Watermelon" icon, which will be described later. decide. As a result, the outline of the performance at each stage and final variation in the pseudo-run is determined.

As a general outline of the performances performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, for example, [24] 10 seconds reach (bonus) pattern, [24] 6 seconds performance (bonus) pattern, etc. are provided. [24] In the 10 second reach (bonus) pattern, after reaching tenpai after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of the decorative pattern fluctuation, 24 seconds have elapsed from the time 22 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of the decorative design fluctuation. The icon is displayed for a period of time, and then a preview is generated after the icon stops for 4 seconds (for example, see performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 136). [24] In the 6-second performance (bonus) pattern, the performance starts 6 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern fluctuation, and then 22 seconds after the successful performance and the start (resumption) of the decorative design fluctuation. The icon is displayed for 24 seconds after the elapsed time, and a notice is generated after the icon stops for 4 seconds thereafter (for example, see performance number "76" shown in FIG. 142).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a performance strength lottery process (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance strength at each stage of the pseudo series based on the sub variation pattern by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "no pseudo" has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance strength for pseudo 1, and determines the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 2". If the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "Pseudo 3" has been determined, the performance strength for Pseudo 1 and the Pseudo 2 are determined. The effect strength for 2 and the effect intensity for pseudo 3 are determined. The performance strength is an index indicating the degree of expectation of the performance performed at each stage of the pseudo-sequence. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the performance strength, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. The presentation strength (level) for pseudo-2 is set to be higher than the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-1, and the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-3 is set to be higher than the presentation intensity (level) for pseudo-2. is set to .

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9003). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9004). If it is determined that the pseudo continuous performance will progress to “pseudo 3”, the sub CPU 1301 executes a preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 will be explained later using FIG. 131.

If it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo continuous performance will not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process in step S9005, the sub CPU 1301 executes a preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9006). The preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 will be explained later using FIG. 132.

If it is determined in step S9003 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9006, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo 1 preview content lottery process (step S9007). The pseudo-1 preview content lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 133. After executing the process in step S9007, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a pseudo three-variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 131 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 3 variable main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect strength (performance strength for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 130 (step S9011 ). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of jackpot preview performance to be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance and the contents of the jackpot preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot preview performances (first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, fourth preview performance, etc.) are used as jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage. ) is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of performance contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot preview performance. For example, as the contents of the first preview performance, first preview performance content A, first preview performance content B, first preview performance content C, first preview performance content D, etc. are provided. The first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 determines one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo 3-variable main preview content, and also One performance content (for example, first preview performance content A) is determined as the content. Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In addition, in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130), prior to performing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. Good too. In the reach effect, decorative symbols are displayed in a reach mode (decorative symbols located on the left side (left decorative symbol), decorative symbols located on the right side (right decorative symbol), and decorative symbols located in the center (middle decorative symbol). ), two decorative patterns are statically displayed as the same pattern, and the remaining one decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In this case, in the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 may determine the performance content whose performance time is shorter than the time from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started (resumed) until the reach is established. For example, in a case where there is a production content that can be completed within 10 seconds and a production content that requires more than 10 seconds to complete, from the time the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts (resumes) until reaching is established. It may be configured such that when a reach performance is determined such that the duration of is 10 seconds, it is possible to determine the content of the performance that can be completed within 10 seconds as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content. .

<Pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2-variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 132 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative) based on the pseudo 2 effect strength (performance strength for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance and the contents of the jackpot preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. In this embodiment, as jackpot preview performances that can be performed in the "pseudo 2" stage, jackpot preview performances of the same type as the jackpot preview performances that can be performed in the "pseudo 3" stage (first preview performance, second preview performance, A third preview performance, a fourth preview performance, etc.) are provided. Furthermore, the contents of each jackpot preview performance are the same as the contents of the jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 1301 selects one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo two-variable main preview content (tentative), and One performance content (for example, first preview performance content B) is selected as the content of the preview performance. Note that the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 2-variable main notice content may be replaced with another performance content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo two-variable main preview content (tentative) is a specific jackpot preview performance (step S9022). A specific jackpot preview performance is a jackpot preview performance in which the performance performed at each stage of the pseudo-run has a story, and a predetermined story unfolds as the stages of the pseudo-run progress. be. For example, the first preview performance, which is one of the specific jackpot preview performances, is a performance in which characters have a conversation, and the characters' lines uttered at each stage in the pseudo-sequence are associated with each other. For example, the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 3" is based on the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 2", and as a result, the dialogue progresses as the stages of the pseudo series progress. ing. Note that the content of the conversation is set as an index indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In this embodiment, in addition to the first preview performance, a fifth preview performance is provided as a specific jackpot preview performance. On the other hand, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance do not correspond to the specific jackpot preview performance.

When it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) is a specific jackpot notice performance, the sub CPU 1301 executes the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative). It is determined whether the type of performance is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3-variable main preview content (see step S9011 in FIG. 131) (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) and the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content are both the first preview effect. If so, the sub CPU 1301 considers that these types are the same. On the other hand, of the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) and the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, one is the first preview performance. If the other one is the fifth preview effect, the sub CPU 1301 considers that these types are different. In addition, if the pseudo continuous performance does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 executes the jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (tentative). It is determined that the type of is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo three-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (temporary) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 2 variable main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each performance content (conversation content) before replacement, the performance content after replacement (already (conversation contents that can be selected for the determined pseudo-three variable main notice contents) are defined. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first preview effect is determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, if the first preview effect is selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (tentative), the "pseudo 2" The content of the conversation should be similar to the content of the conversation in "Pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation level of the conversation content in "Pseudo 2" will be higher than the expectation level of the conversation content in "Pseudo 3"). It is possible to adjust it so that it does not occur. In addition, in the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot preview effect, or if it is selected as the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9023 If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the jackpot preview effect that has been selected is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 2-variable main notice content (tentative) selected in step S9021. ) is determined as the official pseudo-two-variable main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 133 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) based on the pseudo 1 performance strength (performance strength for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the type of jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous performance or "no pseudo" performance, and the jackpot preview performance. Decide on the content of the performance. In this embodiment, as jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage, jackpot preview performances of the same type as the jackpot preview performances that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first preview performance, second preview performance, A third preview performance, a fourth preview performance, etc.) are provided. Furthermore, the contents of each jackpot preview performance are the same as the contents of the jackpot preview performance that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 1301 selects one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance) from among the plurality of types of jackpot preview performances as the pseudo 1-variable main preview content (tentative), and selects one jackpot preview performance (for example, the first preview performance), and One performance content (for example, first preview performance content C) is selected as the content of the preview performance. Note that the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 1 variable main notice content may be replaced with another production content (see step S9034 and step S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1-variable main preview content (tentative) is a specific jackpot preview performance (step S9032). As described above, in this embodiment, the first preview performance and the fifth preview performance are provided as specific jackpot preview performances.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is a specific jackpot notice performance, the sub CPU 1301 executes the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). It is determined whether the type of performance is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 2-variable main preview content (see steps S9024 and S9025 in FIG. 132) (step S9033). In this process, if a pseudo consecutive effect does not occur (if the process of step S9006 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is , it is determined that the type is not the same as the type of jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 2-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (tentative) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As described above, as the main preview content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined becomes the content of the pseudo two-variable main notice. In addition, in the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 Whether or not the type of jackpot preview performance selected as the pseudo 1st variation main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo 3rd variation main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 131). is determined (step S9035). In this process, if a pseudo continuous effect does not occur or if the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (if the process of step S9005 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 controls the pseudo 1 variable main notice content It is determined that the type of jackpot preview performance selected as (tentative) is not the same as the type of jackpot preview performance determined as the pseudo three-variable main preview content.

If it is determined that the type of the jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) is the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative). The variable main notice content (tentative) is replaced with another performance content, and the replaced performance content is determined as the official pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance content after replacement by referring to the main preview content replacement table. As described above, as the main preview content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined becomes the pseudo three-variable main notice content. In addition, in the process of step S9036, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of jackpot preview performance that was selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) and displays only the content of the jackpot preview performance. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of jackpot preview effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot preview effect, or if it is selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (tentative) in step S9035 If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the jackpot preview effect that has been selected is not the same as the type of the jackpot preview effect determined as the pseudo 3-variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 1-variable main notice content (tentative) selected in step S9031. ) is determined as the official pseudo-two-variable main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the processing in step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Jackpot preview performance (first performance stage only)>
As explained using FIGS. 130 to 133, the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance are each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3". It can occur in For example, the first preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3," the second preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3," and the second preview effect occurs at all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3." The third preview effect occurs in all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", the fourth preview effect occurs in all stages from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and "Pseudo 1" and " The first preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 2" and the second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3", the second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 1" and "Pseudo 2", and the third preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3". The first preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 1", the third preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", the first preview performance occurs in "Pseudo 1" and " A second preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 2", and a third preview effect occurs in "Pseudo 3".

In this way, the type of jackpot preview performances performed in each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3" is determined independently of the types of jackpot preview performances performed in other stages. However, if the first preview performance is carried out over multiple stages, the conversation content that occurs during these first preview performances should be made so that there is no sense of discomfort (as the stage of the pseudo-series progresses, the level of expectation will decrease). (see step S9024 in FIG. 132 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 133).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed as the stage in the pseudo-continuous performance progresses. For example, when a "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1", the mode shifts to "Pseudo 2"; when a "Watermelon" icon is displayed on "Pseudo 2", the mode shifts to "Pseudo 3"; When the "cherry" icon is displayed in "3", the game moves to super reach (reach with relatively high expectation of jackpot). Based on the above, the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance will be described below.

<First preview performance>
FIG. 134(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first preview effect. FIG. 134(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first preview performance.

The first preview performance shown in FIGS. 134(a) and 134(b) is a performance that may occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

The performance corresponding to the performance number "1" is such that the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as the first stage conversation from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern to 6.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect that is displayed at 1007 and then fades out. In the production corresponding to production number "2", from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern variation to 6.5 seconds, the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as a first stage conversation. 1007, and from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 10 seconds have passed, the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 1007 as dialogue for the second stage, and then , it is a performance that fades out. In the production corresponding to production number "3", the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as the first stage conversation from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern to 6.5 seconds. 1007, and from 6.5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 1007 as a second stage conversation, and the decoration A predetermined character's dialogue is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the third stage from 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of symbol fluctuation to 13.5 seconds, after which it fades out. be.

In the production corresponding to production number "4", from 3 seconds to 7.5 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resuming), a predetermined character's line is displayed on the display as a first stage conversation. 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and after that, from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed to the time when 13.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, the second stage conversation or button image is displayed on the display device 1007. This is an effect in which the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 1007 as a third stage conversation, and are faded out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 1054. The button valid time is set from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, a predetermined character will be displayed as a second-stage conversation or a third-stage conversation for 3.5 seconds from the time the production button 1054 is operated. The lines may be displayed on the display device 1007. Further, if the production button 1054 is not operated during the button validity period, the lines of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 1007.

In the production corresponding to production number "5", the predetermined character's lines are displayed on the display as a first stage conversation from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern to 7.5 seconds. 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. It's a performance. The button valid time is set from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button validity period, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 from the time the effect button 1054 is operated. At this time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, regardless of the timing at which the production button 1054 is operated. Furthermore, even if the production button 1054 is not operated during the button validity period, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 10 seconds to 12 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. You can do it like this. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later.

A plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided for each of the first stage conversation, second stage conversation, and third stage conversation, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined font color, and is displayed on the display device 1007 in the corresponding font color. The color of the text is associated with the expected level of jackpot. For example, when a pseudo-association occurs, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a pseudo-association does not occur, and the fact that the conversation content is displayed in purple suggests that a pseudo-association will occur. . Also, when Super Reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when Super Reach does not occur, and the conversation content is displayed in red, indicating that Super Reach occurs (purple). This also suggests that expectations are high. Also, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in gold suggests that there is a very high probability of winning the jackpot (higher expectations than in red). Furthermore, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in rainbow colors suggests that a jackpot (premium SP will occur) has been confirmed (higher expectations than gold). In addition, for the first stage conversation, the conversation content is displayed in one of the default colors, purple, red, and gold, and for the second stage conversation, the conversation content is displayed in the default color, purple, red. The conversation content is displayed in any color among , gold, and gold, and the conversation content for the third row is displayed in any color among red, gold, and rainbow color.

Icons that can be displayed in the first preview presentation include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon ("premium" icon), and a second specific icon. In this embodiment, the "bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 1", and when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", the icon shifts to "pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", the mode shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", the game shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "Pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second preview performance>
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the flow of the second preview effect. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second preview performance. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The second preview performance shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "11", after a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, This is a performance that fades out. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotating to the left for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and 4.5 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern This is an effect in which items are displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when .5 seconds have passed until the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. Items that can be displayed here include items that suggest at least a reach will occur, items that suggest at least a super reach will occur, items that suggest at least a specific super reach will occur, fake items, etc. can be mentioned.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "13" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotating to the left from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, and 6 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007 for 8 seconds after the start of the mission. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the failure of the mission is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the image is displayed on the device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "14" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (resuming), and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotating counterclockwise from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, and 6 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007 for 8 seconds after the start of the mission. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the mission result being a success is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which an icon is displayed on the display device 1007, and then from 22 seconds to 24 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later. Note that while a mission is being executed, a reward (icon) that will be given upon a successful mission is suggested, and the icon will definitely be displayed if the mission is successful.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "15" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a clockwise manner for a period of 4.5 seconds from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which reliability-related items are displayed on the display device 1007 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are displayed in a variable manner from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed. Reliability items include multiple items with different jackpot expectations (for example, a first item with a low jackpot expectation, a second item with a medium jackpot expectation, and a third item with a high jackpot expectation). etc.) are provided. For example, in the case of a loss, the first item is more likely to be selected, and in the case of a jackpot, the third item is more likely to be selected. By displaying one of these items, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "16" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a clockwise manner for a period of 4.5 seconds from 3 seconds after the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. .Icon suggestion type items are displayed on the display device 1007 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are displayed in a changing manner from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, and after that, from the start (resumption) of the change of decorative patterns. This is an effect in which an icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 10 seconds have passed to the time when 12 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notice after the icon stops will be described later.

The icon suggestion items include a "bell" icon stop suggestion item, a "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item, a "cherry" icon stop suggestion item, a first specific icon stop suggestion item, and a second specific icon stop suggestion item. It is being When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately after. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately after. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately after.

Note that the icons that may be displayed in the second preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon. . The "bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, and the second specific icon are icons that can also be displayed in the first preview performance, and these icons are as described above. It is. In the second preview performance, in addition to these icons, a third specific icon may be displayed. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage from "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the third specific super reach.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance. The performance corresponding to the performance number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that the performance is different.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "19" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. This is a performance in which an image corresponding to the failure of the battle performance is displayed on the display device 1007 over a period of time when seconds have elapsed.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 for a period of seconds, and then from the time when 12 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 14 seconds have passed. This is an effect in which the reliability-related items described above are displayed on the display device 1007.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "21" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in an upwardly rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed, an image related to a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 12 seconds. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 for a period of seconds, and from the time 12 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time 14 seconds have elapsed. , the above-mentioned icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, the icon corresponding to the icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the effect displayed in 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notification after the icon stops will be described later.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13". The performance corresponding to the performance number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that this is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14".

The performance corresponding to the performance number "24" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a downward rotating manner from the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start (resume) of the variation of the decorative pattern. .An image related to the start of the continuous hit effect is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 9 seconds have elapsed, and from the time when 9 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 15 seconds have elapsed (the effect button is pressed). 1054), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed since the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern, the result of the repeat hit effect is determined to be a failure. An image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "25" is such that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from 1.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern to 3 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a downward rotating manner for 4.5 seconds after 3 seconds have passed since the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. From the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 9 seconds have elapsed, an image related to the start of the continuous hit effect is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 9 seconds have elapsed from the start (resume) of variation of the decorative pattern to the time when 15 seconds have elapsed (when the effect button is pressed) 1054), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern, the result of the repeat hit effect is determined to be successful. An image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 1007, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 18 seconds to 20 seconds after the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. be. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The notification after the icon stops will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous hit effect, a reward (icon) that will be given when the continuous hit effect is successful is suggested, and the icon will definitely be displayed if the continuous hit effect is successful.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "13", except that this is the same performance. The performance corresponding to the performance number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of variation of the decorative pattern. This is the same performance as the performance corresponding to performance number "14", except that the performance is different.

FIG. 137(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "24" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137(a), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 18 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation, and then 2 seconds thereafter. It stops and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, from the player's perspective, each decorative pattern appears to have stopped when the second preview performance ends and the normal background returns. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "24" is performed.

FIG. 137(b) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "25" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. Figure 137
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 20 seconds have elapsed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "25" is performed.

FIG. 137(c) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137(c), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 22 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation, and then 2 seconds after that. It stops and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, from the player's perspective, each decorative pattern appears to have stopped when the second preview performance ends and the normal background returns. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when performances corresponding to performance numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" are performed.

FIG. 137(d) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137(d), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 24 seconds have passed from the start (resumption) of fluctuation. . Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when performances corresponding to performance numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" are performed.

<3rd preview performance>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the flow of the third preview effect. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third preview performance. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The third preview performance shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "Pseudo 2". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". Icons that may be displayed in the third preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon. The icon displayed in "Pseudo 1" is determined to be the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "Pseudo 2" is determined to be the "Watermelon" icon, which is displayed in "Pseudo 3". The icon is determined to be a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it will develop into a predetermined super reach. Note that in the third preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

In "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", enemy attack effects are performed. In the enemy attack performance, the three numerical symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, and each time the continuous number is stopped and displayed, the ally character attacks the enemy character. Continuous numbers (combinations of three numbers) include "1, 2, 2", "2, 3, 3", "3, 4, 4", "4, 5, 5", "5, 6".・6'', ``6.7.7'', and ``7.1.1'' are provided. When an ally character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's health gauge decreases. The health gauge indicates the possibility of obtaining the icon. If an enemy character falls in conjunction with the instigation as to whether or not the icon will stop (icon stop instigation), situations such as icon acquisition and tenpai (deployment to SP) will be given to the player. . Note that predetermined characters may be displayed upon defeating an enemy character, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the color of the characters.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "41" is a performance that fades out after the image related to the title completion excitement of the third preview performance is displayed on the display device 1007. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" is such that after an image related to the title completion promotion of the third preview performance is displayed on the display device 1007, an image corresponding to the success of the title completion promotion is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the "bell" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. When the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon has been acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

There are four timings at which title completion prompting may occur. Specifically, when the image related to the title completion prompting is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the image related to the title completion prompting is displayed from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. (timing 2), and when an image related to title completion agitation is displayed on the display device 1007 after 9 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3). There is a case (timing 4) in which an image related to title completion prompting is displayed on the display device 1007 from the point in time when 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. Title completion prompting occurs at one of these four timings.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "43", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and after that, the "watermelon" icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. This is a performance that is displayed (stops). If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "44", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, an image corresponding to the failed icon stop prompting is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 displays a wipe display. This is a performance that returns to the normal background.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "45", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the “watermelon” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "46", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the device 1007 and corresponds to a failure in pushing the icon to stop, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "47", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which the "watermelon" icon is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "watermelon" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon has been acquired), then the icon is stopped and the preview is displayed. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "48", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is a performance that is displayed on the device 1007, and then a number pattern is displayed on the display device 1007 in a Tenpai mode, and that progresses to the third specific super reach (first half) through a predetermined connecting performance.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "49", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and after that, the "cherry" icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. This is a performance that is displayed (stops). When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "50", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "51," after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is an effect in which the "cherry" icon is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "52", after the enemy attack performance is performed, an image related to the icon stop incitement (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, the continuous roll is displayed in a stopped state on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuation number is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompting (third time) is displayed. This is a performance that is displayed on the device 1007, and then a number pattern is displayed on the display device 1007 in a Tenpai mode, and that progresses to the third specific super reach (second half) through a predetermined connecting performance.

In addition, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "49" to "52", the images related to the icon stop agitation (first time), the icon stop agitation (second time), or the icon stop agitation (third time) are displayed on the display device 1007. When the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the button image is also displayed on the display device 1007. This allows the operation of the production button 1054 to be accepted. When a button image is displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set (for example, 2 seconds during which the image related to stopping the icon is displayed...see FIG. 139). If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the display following the icon stop prompting will be displayed at the time the effect button 1054 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired). (Display of a "cherry" icon, display of a continuation number, or display of a ten-pai number pattern) is performed. On the other hand, if the production button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop prompting (icon display, continuation) Display of rolled numbers or ten-pai display of numerical symbols). Such a button image is not displayed in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "43" to "48", even if the performance button 1054 is operated while the image related to the icon stop instigation is displayed, this operation will trigger the (icon (Before the 2 seconds in which the image related to the stop motion is displayed), the display following the icon stop motion (the display of the "cherry" icon, the display of the continuation number, or the display of the number symbol) must be performed. There isn't. Furthermore, when the enemy attack performance starts, a predetermined movable accessory moves to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. The relationship between the operating mode of the movable accessory and the jackpot expectation level is the same as the notice after the icon stops, which will be described later.

FIG. 140(a) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" is 12 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, varying at high speed until 2 seconds have passed from the start of variation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates again at high speed. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 140(b) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 16 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 140(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, sways for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 140(c) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 140(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, sways for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 3) is performed.

FIG. 140(d) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 140(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, sways for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "42" (timing 4) is performed.

Note that the decorative pattern "stop" in FIG. 140 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the temporary stop display state is a state in which the decorative pattern is vibrating or the like, and cannot be said to be completely stopped display.

<4th preview performance>
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the flow of the fourth preview performance. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth preview performance. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The fourth preview performance shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "73" to "77" may occur in "Pseudo 2" or "Pseudo 3". Icons that can be displayed in the fourth preview performance include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon. The icon displayed in "Pseudo 1" is determined to be the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "Pseudo 2" is determined to be the "Watermelon" icon, which is displayed in "Pseudo 3". The icon is determined to be a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it will develop into a predetermined super reach. Note that in the fourth preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "71", the "4" symbol stops as the left decorative symbol, and the image related to the incitement as to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai incitement) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 1007, an image corresponding to the failure of the four-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "72", the "4" symbol stops as the left decorative symbol, and an image related to the incitement as to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes Tenpai (4 symbol Tenpai incitement) is displayed on the display device 1007. After being displayed, an image corresponding to the successful 4-symbol Tenpai inciting is displayed on the display device 1007, an image that becomes normal reach in the special background state after success is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device This is the effect displayed in 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

Two timings are provided as timings at which the 4-symbol tenpai incitement can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 1007 after 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. There is a case (timing 2) in which an image related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is displayed on the display device 1007. The 4-symbol tenpai incitement occurs at one of these two timings.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "73" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops. The performance corresponding to the performance number "74" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is the effect displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "75" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed on the display device 1007. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 1007. This is an effect in which an image related to the 7-symbol ten-pai instigation) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "76" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai incitement) after entering the special background state, and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed on the display device 1007. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 1007. An image related to the ``7'' symbol and an image in which the ``7'' symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to the ``activator'' indicating which of the ``4'' symbol and the ``7'' symbol will become the tenpai symbol. is displayed on the display device 1007, and then an icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, the process then shifts to a preview after the icon stops.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "77" is an image related to inciting whether or not the "4" symbol will become tenpai after entering the special background state (4 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (7 symbol tenpai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed on the display device 1007. An image related to inciting whether or not the symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to inciting whether or not the "7" symbol becomes tenpai (4 symbol tenpai inciting) is displayed on the display device 1007. An image related to a 7-symbol ten-pai incitement) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to the instigation as to which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol will become a ten-pai pattern. is displayed on the display device 1007, and then either the “4” symbol or the “7” symbol is displayed on the display device 1007 in Tenpai mode, and after a predetermined connecting effect, the third specific super reach is reached. It is a performance that

In addition, after the preview is given after the icon stops via the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" in "Pseudo 1", the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "73" to "77" are performed in "Pseudo 2". In the case of "Pseudo 2", in the production corresponding to production numbers "73" to "77", the "4" symbol becomes Tenpai as a result of the production in "Pseudo 1" before entering the dedicated background state. The next background will be displayed. In addition, in "Pseudo 2", after a preview is given after the icon stops via any of the productions corresponding to production numbers "73" to "76", in "Pseudo 3", production number "73" is given. ” to “77”, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” in “Pseudo 3” are performed, the effects of the effects in “Pseudo 2” are performed before entering the dedicated background state. As a result, the background after the "4" symbol becomes tenpai is displayed.

FIG. 143(a) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143(a), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it further fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2.5 seconds, the pattern is confirmed. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 18 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then, It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2 seconds, the pattern is finalized. As a result, players can request that after the fourth preview effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, a sub-variation pattern similar to the default variation when a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the variation time of decorative symbols is 8 seconds. Each decorative pattern appears to change depending on the mode. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "71" (timing 1) is performed. Note that the default fluctuation will be described later.

FIG. 143(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and sways for 9 seconds. , furthermore, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2.5 seconds, the pattern is determined. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 22 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, sways for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, After shaking for 2 seconds, it further fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 2 seconds, the pattern is finalized. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "71" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 143(c) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it continues to fluctuate at high speed for 2 seconds. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then moves at a speed of 1 frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, sways for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "72" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 143(d) shows the relationship between the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it continues to fluctuate at high speed for 2 seconds. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at a high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then moves at a speed of 1 frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then continues to fluctuate at a high speed for 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, sways for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the production corresponding to production number "72" (timing 2) is performed.

<Notice after icon stops>
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the content of the presentation of the notice after the icon stops. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing the relationship between the post-icon stop notice and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "91" is a performance performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon stops (is definitely displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "91", after the first transition performance is performed, the predetermined movable accessory moves in the first manner. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92" is a performance performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon stops (is definitely displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92", after the first transition performance is performed, the predetermined movable accessory moves in the second mode.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "93" is a performance performed after the "cherry" icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93", a second transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "94" is a performance performed after the first specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94", a third transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" is a performance performed after the second specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "95", a fourth transition performance is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "96" is a performance performed after the third specific icon has stopped (definitely displayed). In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "96", a fifth transition performance is performed. In the notice after icon stop corresponding to performance numbers "93" to "96", predetermined movable accessories do not operate.

Note that "the icon has stopped (definitely displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative pattern. As described in detail in this embodiment, the icon serves as a mark indicating the development to the next stage in pseudo-reach or super reach. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the jackpot determination result has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol changes. It is now displayed. In addition, when an icon is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that the icon will be displayed provisionally before the display is finalized, so in the above, the expression "definitely displayed" is used to refer to the icon. It is made clear that this is not a temporary indication. "Temporary display" means that an icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that the icon will be displayed permanently (i.e., an action that encourages the icon to be displayed permanently). is carried out).

FIG. 145(a) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "91" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91", after the first transition performance is performed for 4 seconds, the lights are turned on for 1 second, and the specified movement is performed for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first manner, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91" occurs, "Pseudo 2" will be displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, if the "Watermelon" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 2" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "91" occurs, 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops, "Pseudo 3" ”. That is, the movement of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo series.

FIG. 145(b) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the production number "92" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92", after the first transition performance is performed for 4 seconds, the lights are turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined display is performed for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second manner, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "92" occurs, "Pseudo 2" will be displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, if the "Watermelon" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 2" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "92" occurs, 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops, "Pseudo 3" ”. That is, the movement of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo series.

The predetermined movable accessory is configured to be able to be displaced between a first state, a second state, and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, the predetermined movable accessory passes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state by being displaced from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state. Is possible. In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91", a predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (one stage displacement). On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "92", a predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (two-stage displacement). In the first state, the predetermined movable accessory is stored in a predetermined position, and when the preview ends after the icon stops, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

In addition, the time when the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92" is the time when the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91". It's longer than the time I was there. The time period during which the predetermined movable accessory is in operation corresponds to the jackpot expectation level, and the longer the time period, the higher the jackpot expectation level. The jackpot expectation level is the probability that the result of the jackpot judgment regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, and is an index showing how much a jackpot can be expected when the relevant performance occurs. As a result, when a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92" occurs, the player is given a greater chance of winning the jackpot compared to when a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91" occurs. It can create a great sense of expectation.

FIG. 146(a) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "93" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93", a second transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The second connection effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. If the "Cherry" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 3" and a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "93" occurs, the predetermined super reach will be reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. .

FIG. 146(b) shows the relationship between the icon after stop notice and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the production number "94". In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94", a third transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The third connecting effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the first specific icon is displayed and a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "94" is generated, the first specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

FIG. 146(c) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "95", a fourth transition performance is performed for 4 seconds. The fourth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the second specific icon is displayed and a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "95" is generated, the second specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

FIG. 146(d) shows the relationship between the icon post-stop notice corresponding to the production number "96" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "96", a fifth transitional performance is performed for 4 seconds. The fifth connection effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a post-icon stop notice corresponding to the performance number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the post-icon stop notice.

In the first connecting effect, the second connecting effect, the third connecting effect, the fourth connecting effect, and the fifth connecting effect, different background images (first background image to fifth background image) are used. ) is displayed on the display device 1007. Basically, the same transition effect (first transition effect) is performed when the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed. A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (exclusive) are provided. In the notice after the icon stops, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the jackpot notice performance other than the third notice performance, the first connecting performance (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, the first transition performance (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first connection effect (common). In the third preview performance, a different background image than usual is displayed as the background image for the third preview performance, and the background image dedicated to the third preview performance is also used as the background image displayed in the preview after the icon stops. are doing. This makes it possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort caused by the normal background image being displayed in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs following the third preview performance.

Similarly, as the second transition performance, a second transition performance (common) and a second transition performance (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "cherry" icon is displayed in jackpot preview performances other than the third preview performance, a second connecting performance (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon-stop preview that occurs when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, a second transition performance (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second connection effect (common). As mentioned above, in the third preview performance, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed. Concerning the 5th transition performance, there is no special performance for the 3rd preview performance.

In this embodiment, the term "connection effect" refers to an effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when a "bell" icon or a "watermelon" icon is displayed. Further, the second connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the third connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the first specific icon is displayed, and the fourth connecting effect is a special connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively used when the third specific icon is displayed.

Further, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). If the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first transition effect will be performed as a preview after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time will be different from the first transition effect ( The background image displayed is slightly different from the background image displayed in (common). Similarly, if the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, a second transitional effect will be performed as a preview after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time will be the same as the second one. It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the joint effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle is held between an ally character (first ally character) and an enemy character. When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the process shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). When the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the game shifts to a predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can only occur in the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any of the first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the jackpot preview performance, the game moves to the same super reach (predetermined super reach) regardless of the type of the jackpot preview performance. In a predetermined super reach, other ally characters participate in the battle against one ally character. Main ally characters (ally characters that appear frequently) are associated with the first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage, respectively. One ally character appears, a second ally character basically appears in the second production stage, and a third ally character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (ally characters) that appear in the first preview performance, the second preview performance, and the third preview performance described above are all first ally characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, a second ally character participates in the battle against the first ally character. Also, if a predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, the third ally character will participate in the battle against the second ally character, and if a predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third ally character will participate in the battle against the second ally character. A first ally character participates in the battle against three ally characters.

As explained above, when the icon is displayed in the jackpot preview performance, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous presentation progresses from one stage to the next, the decorative symbols may or may not be displayed temporarily. If the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed when the pseudo-continuous performance progresses from one stage to the next stage, displaying an icon is a condition for progressing to the next stage.

<Specific aspects of jackpot preview performance>
147 to 149 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the first preview performance. 150 to 152 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second preview performance. FIGS. 153 to 156 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the third preview performance. 157 to 159 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the fourth preview performance. FIGS. 160 and 161 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon.

FIG. 147 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "3" (see FIG. 134(a)). In the production shown in FIG. 147, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears (see FIG. 147(b)). , Subsequently, the first ally character 9002's line (``Isn't it hot?'') is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 147(c)), and then a conversation for the second stage is displayed. The first ally character 9002's line (``It's hot!'') is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(d)), and then the first ally character 9002's line (``It's hot!'') is displayed as the third stage conversation. "It's too hot!") is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(e)), and then the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 147(f)).

FIG. 148 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "5" (see FIG. 134(a)). In the production shown in FIG. 148, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148(a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears. At the same time, the first ally character 9002's line (“Press the button”) is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 148(b)), and then the button image 9003 is displayed on the display device 1007. (see FIG. 148(c)), then a "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148(d)), and then a pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed. On the display device 1007, the "bell" icon is displayed smaller than the finalized image 9011 (see FIG. 148(e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 148(f)). The “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is an image corresponding to the “bell” icon being displayed definitively. The pseudo-continuation stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-continuation stage being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 149, after the effect shown in FIG. 148 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect corresponding to the effect number "5" (see FIG. 134(a)) is performed in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3". An example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the case of FIG. In the production shown in FIG. 149, after transitioning to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. The icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(a)), the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-linked stage notification is displayed on the display device 1007, and the state shifts to "pseudo 3" (see FIG. 149(b)). )reference). The “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the “watermelon” icon being definitely displayed. The pseudo-continuation stage notification watermelon image 9022 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-continuation stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 3".

After that, through the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "Cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(c)), and the pseudo link stage A notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(d)), and a transition is made to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the “cherry” icon being displayed definitively. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development to super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during super reach. Thereafter, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot (see FIG. 149(e)), resulting in a jackpot (see FIG. 149(f)).

FIG. 150 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "13" (see FIG. 135). In the production shown in FIG. 150, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150(a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150(a)). (see FIG. 150(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 150(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed as if it is rotating to the left. (See FIG. 150(d)). Subsequently, an image related to the explanation and start of the mission is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIGS. 150(e) and (f)), and after that, the mission result becomes failure. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 150(g)).

151 and 152 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" (see FIG. 135). In the effects shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 151(a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 appears on the display device 1007. (see FIG. 151(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 151(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated clockwise. (see Figure 151(d)), followed by multiple items (here, "chance", "chance", "chansu", "gekiatsu", "fierce heat", "teppanyaki", "next"). '', and the "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031), a roulette effect is performed (see FIGS. 151(e) to 152(a)), and then, as a result of the roulette effect, The “bell” icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 152(b) and (c)), and then the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 152(d)). , Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 152(e)), and then the display shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 152 (see (f)).

FIG. 153 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "41" (see FIG. 138). In the production shown in FIG. 153, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 153(a)), and then the title completion inciting image 9004 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 153(a)). b) Subsequently, in response to a failure in title completion inciting, the title completion inciting image 9004 disappears, and the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the failure (FIGS. 153(c) and 153(c)). (see (d)).

FIG. 154 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "42" (see FIG. 138). In the production shown in FIG. 154, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to fluctuate on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(a)), and then the title completion inciting image 9004 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(a)). 1007 (see FIG. 154(b)), and then, in response to the successful title completion prompting, a title completion prompting success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 1007 (FIG. 154(c) ), the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 154(d)), then the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(e)), and then, The pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(f)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 154(g)) ).

In FIG. 155, after the effect shown in FIG. 154 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect shown on the display device 1007 is displayed when the effect corresponding to the effect number "43" (see FIG. 138) is performed in "Pseudo 2". An example of an image is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 155, after transitioning to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 154(g), an enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 155(a)), and then continues to appear. Every time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, a production (enemy attack production) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 is performed (FIGS. 155(b) to 155(d)). ), then icon stop agitation is performed in which the display of the agitation watermelon image 9007 on the display device 1007 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 155(e) and (f)), and then the icon stop agitation is successfully performed. In response to this, the enemy character 9006 falls down, and a "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 155(g)), and then a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the display device 1007. In step 1007, the "watermelon" icon is displayed smaller than the finalized image 9012 (see FIG. 155(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 156, after the effect shown in FIG. 155 is performed in "Pseudo 2", the effect shown on the display device 1007 is displayed when the effect corresponding to the effect number "49" (see FIG. 138) is performed in "Pseudo 3". An example of an image is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 156, after shifting to "pseudo 3", an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 156(a)), and then a continuation roll (for example, "3, 4, 4'') is stopped and displayed, a production (enemy attack production) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 is performed (see FIGS. 156(b) to 156(d)), and then the display device 1007 An icon stop incitement is performed in which the display of the incitement cherry image 9009 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 156(e) and (f)), and then, in response to the successful icon stop incitement, the enemy character 9008 As it falls, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 156(g)), and then the pseudo-linked stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed as the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 on the display device 1007. (see FIG. 156(h)), and then shifts to super reach.

Note that if the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third preview performance, the third preview performance may be performed without fail in the next pseudo-connection stage. In other words, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the productions ("pseudo 1") corresponding to production numbers "41" and "42", the productions corresponding to production numbers "43" to "48" are displayed as "pseudo 2". It is also possible to always perform one of the effects. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the production ("pseudo 2") corresponding to production numbers "43" to "48", it is displayed as "pseudo 3", which corresponds to production numbers "49" to "52". Any one of the performances may be performed without fail.

FIG. 157 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the performance corresponding to the performance number "72" (see FIG. 141). In the production shown in FIG. 157, first, as a production in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to fluctuate on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157(a)), and then "4" is displayed as the left decorative pattern 9001L. The symbols stop (see FIGS. 157(b) and (c)), and then a 4-symbol Tenpai incitement is performed in which the display of the "4" symbol becomes larger and larger as the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 157(d)). , Subsequently, in response to the successful 4-symbol tenpai incitement, it becomes the background (background after 4-symbol tenpai success) that is displayed only when the 4-symbol tenpai incitement is successful (not shown), and the left decoration. The "4" symbol is displayed in a large size as the symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (see FIG. 157(e)), then the middle decorative symbol 9001C becomes a reach in a horizontally rotated state (see FIG. 157(f)), and then Then, the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157(g)), and then the pseudo-continuation stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 from the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011. is also displayed in a small size (see FIG. 157(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2". Note that the normal background is displayed on the display device 1007 before it becomes the background after the 4-symbol Tenpai is successful (at the time when the decorative pattern 9001 starts changing).

In FIG. 158, after the effect shown in FIG. 157 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect shown on the display device 1007 is displayed when the effect corresponding to the effect number "73" (see FIG. 141) is performed in "Pseudo 2". An example of an image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 158 (when moving to "pseudo 2"), a specific background is present. The background may be the same background as the background after the above-mentioned 4-symbol Ten-Pai success, or may be a different background from the background after the above-mentioned 4-symbol Ten-Pai success. Subsequent performances are performed in a dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the above-mentioned 4-symbol Tenpai success, or may be a different background from the background after the above-mentioned 4-symbol Tenpai success, or the same background as the above-mentioned specific background. Alternatively, the background may be different from the above-mentioned specific background. In the dedicated background state, a 4-symbol ten-pai stirring is performed in which the "4" pattern changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIGS. 158(a) and (b)), and the "4" pattern is After the display disappears, the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 158(c)), and then the “watermelon” icon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the display device 1007. It is displayed smaller than the final image 9012 (see FIG. 158(d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 159, after the effect shown in FIG. 158 is performed in "Pseudo 2", the effect that is displayed on the display device 1007 is displayed when the effect corresponding to the effect number "75" (see FIG. 141) is performed in "Pseudo 3". An example of an image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (when moving to "pseudo 3"), the above-mentioned specific background is used. Subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, a 4-symbol Tenpai fanning is performed in which the "4" pattern changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 159(a)), and then the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern A 7-symbol Tenpai stirring is performed in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed as the symbol 9001R (see Figure 159(b)), and then the "4" symbol changes at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R. A 4-symbol Tenpai incitement is performed (see Figure 159(c)), and then a 7-symbol Tenpai incitement is performed in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (Fig. 159(d) ), after the display of the "7" symbol disappears, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 159(e)), and then the cherry image for pseudo-continuous stage notification is displayed. 9023 is displayed smaller than the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 159(f)), and then shifts to super reach.

Note that the mode of the 4-symbol Tenpai inciting to 7-symbol Tenpai inciting is not particularly limited, and as explained above, the "4" to "7" symbols may be changed at high speed, or the "4" It is also possible to vibrate the symbols to "7" symbols.

160(a) and 160(b) show an example of the image and movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91" (see FIG. 144). . FIGS. 160(c) and 160(d) show an example of the image and movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "92" (see FIG. 144). . In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 160(a) and 160(b), after the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 (or "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 160(a)) , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the first manner (see FIG. 160(b)). In the post-icon stop notice shown in FIGS. 160(c) and 160(d), after the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 (or "bell" icon confirmed image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 160(c)) , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the second manner (see FIG. 160(d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory imitating a predetermined character, and can be in a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character lowers its arms...see FIG. 160(b)), and a second state (the state in which the character lowers its arms...see FIG. 160(b)). State 3 (character with arms raised...Figure 160)
(d)).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 during the icon-stop notice (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the performance number "93". In the notice after icon stop shown in FIG. 161, after the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed (see FIG. 161(a)), the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 161(b)). ). After that, a predetermined super reach is reached, and a battle is held between an ally character (for example, the first ally character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 (see FIGS. 161(c) to 161(e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is If it is a jackpot, the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot (see FIG. 161(f)).

A specific example of the jackpot preview performance has been described above using FIGS. 147 to 161. In this example, a case has been described in which a predetermined pattern is adopted as an icon, such as a "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, a "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, a "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, etc. As the icon in this embodiment, an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof can be appropriately employed. For example, FIG. 162(a) shows, as an example of the first specific icon, a first specific icon confirmed image 9014 made up of a pattern including the numbers or letters "7" and "PREMIUM". Furthermore, for example, a character image of "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and the display of "NEXT" may be used as an opportunity to advance to the next stage in the pseudo series.

For example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, an "X" icon as shown in FIGS. 162(b) to (d) may be used. A confirmed image 9051, a “Y” icon confirmed image 9052, and a “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 may be adopted. In this way, as the icon in this embodiment, a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square can be appropriately employed. In this case, instead of the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the X image 9061 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the Y image for pseudo continuous stage notification An image 9062 and a Z image 9063 for pseudo-linkage notification may be employed (see FIGS. 162(e) and (f)). In FIG. 162(e), while the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062 are displayed brightly, the pseudo continuous stage notification Z image 9063 is displayed darkly. It is shown that it is "pseudo 3". By displaying the "Z" icon confirmed image 9053 in this state, in FIG. 162(e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061, the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062, and the All images 9063 are displayed brightly. This will later develop into a super reach.

Furthermore, in the above, an example has been described in which the decorative pattern 9001 is displayed in a large size (in the center of the display device 1007) or in a small size (in the lower right corner of the display device 1007) on the display device 1007. In this embodiment, while the icon is being displayed and before and after the icon is displayed, the larger decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are not displayed. It may be configured such that the symbol 9001 is not displayed. Further, when an icon is displayed, a pattern corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative pattern 9001 (for example, the medium decorative pattern 9001C), or a part of the smaller decorative pattern 9001 may be displayed. The symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol 9001C) may remain displayed in a variable manner (the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are stopped and displayed), or the left decorative symbol 9001L, the middle decorative symbol 9001C, and the right All of the decorative patterns 9001R may be left to be displayed in a variable manner.

<Jackpot preview performance (common to each stage)>
The first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance explained above are the first performance stage, the second performance stage, and the third performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). ) can only occur in the first performance stage. On the other hand, the sixth preview performance and the seventh preview performance described below can occur in any of the first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage. In addition, while the first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, and fourth preview performance are performances that can occur during the pseudo-sequential performance, the sixth preview performance to the seventh preview performance occur. In this case, pseudo-coupling does not occur. Below, after explaining the variation pattern of decorative symbols in each production stage, the sixth preview performance and the seventh preview performance will be explained.

<Variation pattern of decorative designs>
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols on the first presentation stage. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols on the second presentation stage. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols in the third production stage.

FIG. 163(a) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 4 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 1 second, stopping for 1 second, The design is confirmed.

FIG. 163(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and becomes final. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 163(c) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 13 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and shakes for 3.5 seconds before confirming the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes final. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 163(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the first performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the design is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 164(a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 4 seconds in the second presentation stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 3 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 164(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the second performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 164(c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 13 seconds in the second performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 12 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 164(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 16 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 165(a) shows a case where the decorative pattern variation time is 4 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2.5 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 0.5 seconds, and It will stop for a second and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 165(b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 8 seconds in the third performance stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and after shaking for 1 second, the design is finalized.

FIG. 165(c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 13 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 7.5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

FIG. 165(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the design. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 15.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and becomes finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 13.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and swings for 2 seconds before becoming finalized.

The decorative pattern variation patterns shown in FIGS. 163 to 165 are default variation patterns, and in this embodiment, unless otherwise explained (for example, FIG. 137, FIG. 140, FIG. 143, FIG. 168, etc.), The decorative pattern basically changes according to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern.

<6th preview performance>
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the flow of the sixth preview effect. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth preview performance. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth preview performance and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The sixth preview performance shown in FIGS. 166 and 167 occurs when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). It's a performance you can get. In the sixth preview performance, a push to enter the first special zone is performed, and if the push is successful, the player enters the first special zone. The first special zone is a special zone at a stage before developing into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "101" is a performance that fades out after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs. In the production corresponding to the production number "102", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fades out. It's a spectacular performance. In the production corresponding to production number "103", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A foreshadowing of a bullet (effect for the third hit) occurs, and then it fades out.

In the production corresponding to production number "104", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A bullet preview (effect for the third stage) occurs, and then an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 1007, and then corresponds to the failure in the first special zone entry incitement. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 1007. In the production corresponding to production number "105", after the first omen (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second omen (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then the third omen (effect for the second stage) occurs. A bullet prediction (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone entry agitation is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the successful first special zone entry agitation is displayed. This is an effect in which an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the first special zone is entered. When the first special zone ends, the game moves to the fourth special super reach.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "106", a sign of the third stage (effect for the third stage) occurs, then an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 1007, and then, This is an effect in which an image corresponding to a failure in inciting entry into the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "107", a sign of the third stage (effect for the third stage) occurs, then an image related to the first special zone entry incitement is displayed on the display device 1007, and the first An image corresponding to the successful inciting to enter the special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the first special zone is entered. When the first special zone ends, the game moves to the fourth special super reach.

In the first special zone, switching is performed between a screen corresponding to the first character and a screen corresponding to the second character, and decorative patterns are displayed on either screen. After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and the fourth specific super reach is developed, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen where the tenpai occurs is performed. In addition, in the first omen, the second omen, and the third omen, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the incitement to enter the first special zone is used. It may also be displayed on the display device 1007. In this case, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "106" and "107", the rush to enter the first special zone will suddenly occur without passing through the sign. After a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120, if a pre-reading effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the starting winning starts (in the case where the sixth preview effect occurs via the pre-reading effect), , In the sixth preview performance that occurs at the time of the special symbol change, the foreshadowing may always be passed through. On the other hand, when the sixth preview performance occurs without going through the pre-read performance, the sixth preview performance that occurs at the time of the special symbol change may or may not go through the sign.

FIG. 168(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "104" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 168(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "105" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 168(b), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 168(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "106" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The performance corresponding to the performance number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 168(c), the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior, varying at high speed until 15 seconds have passed from the start of variation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 168(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "107" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 168(d), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern each exhibit the same behavior and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106", an image related to the first special zone entry excitement is displayed on the display device 1007 from the point in time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, in the default variation pattern in the first performance stage and the third performance stage (see FIGS. 163(d) and 165(d)), the left decorative pattern is decelerated and stopped at the timing. When the decorative pattern stops, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound that confirms a loss) is output from the speaker 1032, but if the first special zone rush is being performed. In addition, when the stop sound occurs, there is a possibility that the result of the inciting to enter the first special zone may be grasped by the player during the inciting to enter the first special zone. In view of this point, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" to "106" are performed, dedicated fluctuation patterns (for inciting entry into the first special zone) as shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c) are used. The decorative pattern is changed using a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern stops after the end of the pattern. This makes it possible to avoid spoiling the success or failure of inciting the first special zone entry through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the stop sound of the decorative symbol can be a sound specific to a loss (a sound that can be generated only in the case of a loss).

The variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c) are adopted when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the first production stage or the third production stage, When the performances corresponding to the performance numbers “104” and “106” are performed in the second performance stage, the default fluctuation pattern (Fig. 164(d)) is used instead of the fluctuation patterns shown in Figs. ), the decorative pattern may be varied. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 164(d), the timing at which the decorative symbols decelerate and stop is delayed, so when the production corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" is performed, the variation pattern in question is Even if the decorative pattern is varied, there is no concern about spoilers as described above. However, even when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the second performance stage, the decorative patterns may be varied in the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c).

In addition, the variation pattern differs between when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the first production stage and when the performances corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third production stage. It is also possible to make them different. For example, when the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third performance stage, each decorative pattern changes faster than the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c). The time may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Also, the sixth preview performance will not be performed while the look-ahead performance is being executed in one of the first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage (for example, the second performance stage). It may be configured as follows. In this case, in production stages other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), it may be configured such that the sixth preview production can be performed even while the pre-read production is being executed. .

<7th preview performance>
FIG. 169(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh preview performance. FIG. 169(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh preview performance.

The seventh preview performance shown in FIG. 169 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). be. In the seventh preview performance, a push to enter the second special zone is performed, and if the push is successful, the player enters the second special zone. The second special zone is a special zone at a stage before developing into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is such that after the screen becomes dark as if the display device 1007 was turned off (the screen freezes), it returns from the freeze and enters the second special zone. An image related to inciting is displayed on the display device 1007, a button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to failure in inciting to enter the second special zone is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 1007. After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is an image related to inciting entry into the second special zone after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the display device 1007 had turned off, and then returns from the freeze. is displayed on the display device 1007, a button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the operation of the production button 1054 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to the successful inciting of entering the second special zone (an image of inciting the entry into the second special zone is displayed). Success image) is the effect displayed on the display device 1007. When entering the second special zone, after a predetermined ally character appears, a scene of defeating a predetermined enemy character is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the game progresses to the fifth specific super reach, and in the fifth specific super reach, a production corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is a reach with the highest jackpot expectation (other than the first specific super reach where a jackpot is determined).

There are two timings at which the screen may freeze. Specifically, there are two cases: a case where the screen freezes after 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and a case where the screen freezes after 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative pattern (timing 2). It is being The screen freezes at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects following the freeze occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

Further, while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set. If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the moment the effect button 1054 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired), the entry into the second special zone is triggered. A performance corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), it is determined that the second special zone entry incitement has failed or succeeded. A corresponding performance will be performed.

Although not shown, the production corresponding to the successful promotion of entering the second special zone (successful production of promotion of entry into the second special zone) includes an image of successful promotion of entry into the second special zone (for example, an image related to the title of the second special zone). In addition to displaying images (images and images related to predetermined icons), a predetermined decorative lamp (logo lamp) emits light. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (eg, above the display device 1007), and is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of characters (for example, characters displayed as icons) representing a logo or the like according to the model. The logo lamp uses a full-color LED and can emit multiple colors including red, blue, and green, allowing the effect color of the logo cover to be changed.

Note that the second special zone entry success effect (for example, lighting of the logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the effect button 1054 is operated or not. Even if the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the time will not be extended. The timing to enter the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (timing 1 above is when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and timing 2 is when the decorative pattern starts changing). (36 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation), if the production button 1054 is operated during the button validity period, there will be a gap between the end of the second special zone entry incitement success production and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a shaking state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 170(a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice performance. FIG. 170(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change preview performance. FIG. 170(c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after a stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, basically, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is continuously provided with a special symbol variation while a predetermined number of times (20 times) is performed. Stay. After moving to one production stage, when special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), it is possible to shift from the one production stage to another production stage. On the other hand, when the 7th preview performance occurs, even if the number of special symbol fluctuations performed after moving to the first performance stage has not reached the predetermined number (20 times), the performance stage will always be activated. A transition occurs.

In this embodiment, such transition of the production stage will also be referred to as a "stage change." Note that the performance stage after the transition is randomly determined by lottery, and the same performance stage as the performance stage before the transition may be determined as the performance stage after the transition. The concept of transition of the production stage (stage change) includes such cases.

When a stage change is to be performed, a stage change preview effect shown in FIG. 170 is performed. In the production corresponding to production number "131" (stage change preview production), after a background transition image corresponding to the production stage after transition is displayed on the display device 1007, an image indicating the name of the production stage after transition is displayed. This is an effect that is displayed on the display device 1007 and the display contents of the counter image on the display device 1007 are reset (recovered).

As background transition images, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image that suggests the first production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image that suggests the second production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image that suggests the third production stage, and when the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as the counter image after reset. The denominator number (20) indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs. The counter image is basically always displayed at a predetermined location on the display device 1007 while staying at each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). displayed (except while it is being performed). As the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change increases, the counter image changes such as "1/20", "2/20", . . . "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) when a stage change occurs is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, rainbow color, or gold). In this embodiment, as explained in the second pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values (six levels from "1" to "6") that differ from each other are provided for various data related to the pachinko game. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the setting values of "1" to "6", respectively, and are the colors of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. The color corresponds to the setting value. Thereby, the set value is suggested by the counter image (0/20).

Note that the method of suggesting the setting value using a counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the setting value may be displayed. For example, if the set value is "6", a counter image of "0/66" may be displayed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations related to the stage change generation condition is set to the specified value (20 times), but the number of special symbol fluctuations may also be determined by lottery. good. In addition, for example, when the set value is "6", it is also possible to configure so that "66" is relatively easily determined as the number of special symbol variations.

Furthermore, if the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the vehicle will enter the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh preview performance, a performance corresponding to performance number "121" and a performance corresponding to performance number "122" are provided. Regardless of which of these performances occurs, a stage change always occurs. On top of that, only when a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "122", the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change occurrence can be displayed in gold. It is configured as follows.

There are two timings for starting the stage change preview performance. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the background transition image is displayed from the time when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 2). and are provided. The stage change preview performance occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh preview performance, the timing at which the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed is the timing at which the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" is performed. It corresponds to That is, when a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" (timing 1) or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (timing 1), the stage change is performed based on the performance number "131". A performance corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, if a stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" (timing 2) or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (timing 2), the performance number "131" A performance corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations reaching a predetermined number (20 times), basically the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" (timing 1) is It will be done. In this case, the stage change preview performance will be performed immediately after the decorative symbols start changing. Exceptionally, when the 7th preview effect occurs in a special symbol variation (game that reaches the specified number) where a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times). , the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" (timing 2) is performed. In other words, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as conditions for the stage change to occur, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol variation, 6 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol. From the point in time, a stage change preview performance will be performed.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh preview production occurs (production number "121" or "122" is selected)

It is possible for the player to understand through the counter image that the number of special symbol variations has reached the predetermined number (20 times), and when the number of special symbol variations has reached the predetermined number (20 times), It is considered that there is a high probability that the player is aware that a stage change will occur. In this regard, by configuring as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the stage change notice performance is not performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in the game in which the number of players reaches the specified number. In this case, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2 described above. Thereby, after the stage change preview performance is performed, the player can be made to expect that the seventh preview performance will occur (entering the second special zone).

Furthermore, as described above, the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are associated with the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage, respectively. . Although not shown, the game board unit 1010 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration part, and the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration part, The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration part.

The first character decoration section is provided at a first predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, on the right side of the display device 1007), and the second character decoration section is provided at a second predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, on the right side of the display device 1007). The third character decoration section is provided at a third predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the lower left side of the display device 1007). The first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are decorated in the shape of a first ally character, a second ally character, and a third ally character, respectively. . Moreover, the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). The first character lamp, second character lamp, and third character lamp each employ a full-color LED, and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green. This makes it possible to change the effect colors of the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part.

In this embodiment, while staying on the first production stage, the first character lamp is basically lit, and the second character lamp and third character lamp are turned off. While staying on the second production stage, the second character lamp is basically lit, and the first character lamp and third character lamp are turned off. While staying at the third production stage, the third character lamp is basically lit, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are turned off. Although not shown, in the stage change preview production, one of the first character lamp, second character lamp, and third character lamp (the character lamp corresponding to the production stage after transition) flashes.

Specifically, if the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the first character lamp will blink, and if the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the second character lamp will blink. However, if the performance stage after transition is the third performance stage, the third character lamp flashes. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp blinks. The third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 170(c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game in which the specified number of characters was reached, the first character lamp was lit, and the second character lamp and third character lamp were extinguished. When the specified number reaching game starts, the first character lamp switches from a lit state to an off state, the second character lamp switches from an off state to a blinking state, and the third character lamp remains in an off state. Thereafter, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. Thereafter, the second character lamp continues to be lit, and the first and third character lamps continue to be turned off, until the next stage change preview effect occurs.

After the stage change preview performance is performed, a transition is made to the background corresponding to the performance stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage). Note that, as described above, after the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is performed, the screen returns to the normal background. Furthermore, after the performance in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is completed, the screen returns to the normal background. The normal background is a background corresponding to the production stage after the transition (not the production stage before the transition).

The above description has been made assuming that conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for stage change occurrence. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of special symbol fluctuations is when the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display section 1163 (the fluctuation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 1120) is performed. However, it is not counted when a variable display (a variable display corresponding to the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B) is performed in the second special symbol display section 1164. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, even if the variable display on the second special symbol display section 1164 is repeatedly performed by the player playing the game with right-handed hitting, the counting will not be performed, and in this case, the stage change is never done. Note that this counting is performed when the special symbol variation starts.

Further, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that a stage change will be performed other than when the above conditions (I) or (II) are satisfied. Specifically, in a situation where the number of special symbol variations performed after moving to the first production stage has not reached the predetermined number (20 times), as a production performed when the special symbol variation is being performed. , when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs, a performance stage transition lottery is performed before the specified number is reached. Then, the performance stage transition occurs on condition that the lottery for transition to the performance stage before the specified number is reached is won.

Further, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after moving to the first performance stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), there is a possibility that the stage change will not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs in a game in which the specified number is reached, a lottery for suspending the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is performed. If you do not win the performance stage shift pending lottery when the specified number is reached, a transition of the performance stage will occur in the game when the specified number is reached. On the other hand, if you win the lottery to suspend production stage transition when the specified number is reached, the production stage will not shift in the specified number reaching game, and the production stage will not shift in the next special symbol change of the specified number reaching game. occurs.

<Stage change section reserved ball>
FIGS. 171 to 173 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section reserved balls.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120, the sub control circuit 1300 selects a sub fluctuation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the said lottery (sub-variation pattern selection lottery) may vary depending on the production stage stayed during the special symbol fluctuation related to the first starting opening winning, but the first starting opening winning occurs. If a stage change occurs between the time and the special symbol change related to the first starting opening winning, the production stage after the transition will start the special symbol change (stage change game) in which the stage change occurs. It will not be decided until then. Therefore, for such a first starting slot winning, the sub variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game starts. The lottery related to the look-ahead performance is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, but if the sub-variation pattern is not selected, the lottery related to the look-ahead performance cannot be held.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, a concept of "stage change section reserved ball" is provided. The held balls in the stage change section are the held balls that correspond to the first starting hole winnings related to the stage change game, and the special symbol changes related to the stage change game after the first starting hole winnings related to the stage change game occur. It refers to the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting slot winnings that occurred before the start of the game. For such stage change section reserved balls, no look-ahead effect is performed. In addition, among the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings related to the stage change game are also particularly referred to as "stage change section relevant reserved balls."

FIG. 171(a) shows a state where the 16th special symbol variation is being performed after moving to the current performance stage and a state where there are no reserved balls. FIG. 171(b) shows a state in which, after the state shown in FIG. 171(a), four game balls have entered the first starting hole 1120 while the 16th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls become the 17th to 20th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current performance stage. In FIG. 171(c), after the state shown in FIG. 171(b), a state is shown in which the 17th special symbol variation is started after moving to the current production stage. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls become the 18th to 20th special symbol variations after moving to the current performance stage. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 171(d), after the state shown in FIG. 171(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the 17th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after moving to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth held ball is a stage change section held ball (the held ball in the stage change section), and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the fourth held ball.

In FIG. 171(e), after the state shown in FIG. 171(d), a state is shown in which the 18th special symbol variation is started after moving to the current production stage. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st and 2nd held balls become the 19th to 20th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current production stage, and correspond to the 3rd held ball. This special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after moving to the next production stage. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 172(a), after the state shown in FIG. 171(e), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the 18th special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the second special symbol variation after moving to the next performance stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 172(b), after the state shown in FIG. 172(a), the 18th to 20th special symbol variations are performed, during which two game balls enter the first starting hole 1120, and then, This shows a state where a stage change has occurred and the first special symbol variation is being performed after moving to the next production stage. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls become the second to fourth special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The first to third reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first to third reserved balls. Note that the fourth reserved ball does not exist.

In FIG. 172(c), after the state shown in FIG. 172(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the first special symbol variation is being performed. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball that corresponds to the first starting opening winning that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section started. Therefore, the fourth reserved ball is not a stage change section reserved ball, and it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect regarding the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 172(d), after the state shown in FIG. 172(c), the first to second special symbol variations are performed after the stage change occurs, and during that time two game symbols are placed in the first starting port 1120. This shows a state in which the third special symbol change is being performed after a ball enters the prize and a stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first reserved ball. On the other hand, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls are the fifth to seventh special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The second to fourth reserved balls are the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section started. It's a ball. Therefore, the second to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect for the second to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 173(a), after the 20th special symbol variation is started after transitioning to the current production stage with no pending balls, and while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed, , shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting port 1120. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls become the 21st to 24th special symbol fluctuations after moving to the current performance stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol variations are performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls become the first to fourth special symbol fluctuations after moving to the next performance stage. As a result, the first to fourth reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 173(b), after the 20th special symbol variation is started after transitioning to the current performance stage with no pending balls, and while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed, , shows a state in which one game ball has entered the first starting port 1120. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed on the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after moving to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and a look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first reserved ball. Note that the second to fourth reserved balls do not exist.

In FIG. 173(c), after the state shown in FIG. 173(b), the 20th special symbol change is performed, then a stage change occurs, and after moving to the next production stage, the first special symbol change is performed. This shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting hole 1120 while the symbols are changing. In this state, the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls become the second to fifth special symbol fluctuations after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are the reserved balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings that occurred after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section started. It's a ball. Therefore, the first to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect for the first to fourth reserved balls.

As explained above, in the example shown in FIG. 173(a), the number of special symbol variations that cannot be performed in advance is 4, while in the examples shown in FIGS. 173(b) and (c) In this case, the number of special symbol variations that cannot be performed in advance is one. In this way, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol changes that cannot be performed in advance is not fixed uniformly, but is determined based on the timing at which the stage change occurs and the timing at which the game ball enters the first starting port 1120. The number of times changes depending on the context.

<Processing when winning the first starting slot>
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening winning process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a stage change section determination process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIGS. 176 and 177 are diagrams for explaining the prefetch effect.

The first starting hole winning process shown in FIG. 174 is a process that is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120. It is. In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting hole 1120 by receiving the winning command of the first starting hole winning transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the first starting opening winning process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change section determination process (step S9001). The stage change section determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 175.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the held ball in the stage change section exists among the held balls for the upper limit of four times (step S9151). As explained using FIGS. 171 to 173, the held balls in the stage change section are held balls corresponding to the first starting opening winnings related to the stage change game (special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether information indicating the held ball in the stage change section (held ball information in the stage change section) is stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 1303.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 1303 includes the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), the first sub-reservation area (2), the first sub-reservation area (3), and , a first sub-reservation area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reservation area (0), and the information corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to first sub-reservation area (4). Information corresponding to four special symbol variations is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-reservation area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) are the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 1203, respectively. (0) corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. By receiving the winning command for the first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 1301 stores information corresponding to these pieces of information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning.

Further, when a stage change is performed in one special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 stores the reserved ball information in the stage change section in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the special symbol variation (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in any of the first sub holding area (1) to the first sub holding area (3). Note that when one special symbol variation ends and the next special symbol variation starts, the sub CPU 1301 stores the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4) as follows. They are shifted to the first sub-reservation area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (3), respectively. At that time, if the held ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (1), the sub CPU 1301 transfers the information from the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (0). Along with the transfer, the held ball information for the stage change section will be deleted. Therefore, a situation in which the held ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, if it is determined that the held ball for the stage change period exists among the held balls for the upper limit of 4 times, the sub CPU 1301 holds the held ball related to the current first starting opening prize for the stage change period. It is identified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating that the ball is a stage change section reserved ball (stage change section reserved ball information) in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. As a result, for example, in a situation where the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (3), if the first starting opening prize corresponding to the fourth held ball occurs, Stage change section reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-retention area (4) (see FIG. 172(a)).

In step S9151, if it is determined that there is no held ball in the stage change section among the held balls for the upper limit of 4 times, the sub CPU 1301 controls the special symbol variation that has been counted since moving to the current performance stage. It is determined whether the number of times (the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning (step S9153). The post-stage variation count is stored in the work RAM 1303, and its value is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting hole winning, the sub CPU 1301 It is determined whether or not a seventh preview performance occurs in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is the seventh preview production (production corresponding to production number "121" or "122") It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern corresponds to Since the winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, by receiving the winning command for the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. Further, the fluctuation pattern includes information corresponding to the performance performed during the special symbol fluctuation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the seventh preview performance will be performed during the special symbol variation.

In step S9153, if it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting hole winning, or if it is determined that the number of fluctuations counted after the stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times), or it corresponds to the current first starting opening winning. If it is determined that the seventh preview performance will occur in the special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 specifies the held ball related to the current first starting opening winning as the held ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores the stage change section relevant held ball information in the first sub held area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. As a result, for example, if the current special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting slot winning (corresponding to the 4th reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after moving to the current production stage. In this case, the held ball information for the stage change section is stored in the first sub-holding area (4) (see FIG. 171(d)). Although not shown, for example, if the seventh preview effect occurs during the special symbol change corresponding to the first starting hole winning (corresponding to the fourth held ball), the first sub-holding area In (4), the held ball information for the stage change section is stored.

Although not shown, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will similarly occur during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to this first starting opening winning, In addition, when winning the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number, the reserved ball information for the stage change section may be stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the current first starting opening prize. In addition, when the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, a specific super reach (for example, the fifth special If any Super Reach (excluding Super Reach) occurs and you do not win the production stage transition pending lottery when the specified number is reached, you will be entered into the 1st sub pending area corresponding to this 1st starting entrance prize. , the held ball information for the stage change section may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches the predetermined number (20 times), and during the special symbol fluctuation, a specific super reach (for example, the fifth special If a Super Reach (any Super Reach) (excluding Super Reach) occurs, and if you win the production stage transfer pending lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be placed in the first sub pending area corresponding to the next first starting gate prize. It is also possible to store the held ball information in the change section.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or if it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh preview effect will not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 1301 executes this subroutine. finish.

The stage change section determination process performed in step S9101 in FIG. 174 has been described above with reference to FIG. 175. The explanation returns to FIG. 174.

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a stage change section reserved ball (including the stage change section concerned reserved ball) (step S9102). If it is determined that the held ball related to the current first starting gate winning is the stage change section held ball, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the held ball related to the current first starting opening winning is not a stage change section holding ball, the sub CPU 1301 sets the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning to a fixed value. It is determined whether they are compatible (step S9103). Although not shown, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a time saving) is compared to the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player. A disadvantageous second jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds or a jackpot with no time savings) may be provided. Then, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that the predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot are calculated. are the same, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot. The probability may be different from the probability. In this case, the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) may perform special symbol variation using the same variation pattern. In the process of step S9103, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting slot winning is not a variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current first starting hole winning is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fixed value, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the timing at which the current first starting hole winning occurred is It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, a time corresponding to 41 frames) has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). If it is determined that the timing at which the current first starting slot win has occurred is within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing at which the current first starting opening prize has occurred is not within the predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub variation pattern is composed of a first half and a second half, and the main variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is also composed of a first half and a second half. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 1301 uses the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command for the first starting opening winning that is transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, and the current performance. The content of the latter half of the sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on random numbers based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes the sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the first half of the sub variation pattern based on the sub variation pattern (second half) determined in step S9105, the main variation pattern, and the current production stage. Decide on the content. Note that the production stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303 stores information indicating the current production stage, and the sub CPU 1301 can determine the current production stage by referring to the production stage flag storage area. can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S9107). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the second special symbol variation is a loss or a small hit (step S9108 ). If it is determined that the result of the second special lottery is not a loss or a small hit (a big hit), the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. In this embodiment, similarly to the second pachinko game machine, a method (simultaneous variation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously is adopted. Therefore, it is possible that a situation may occur in which a jackpot related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs, but by executing the processing in steps S9107 and S9108, even in such a situation, unintended gameplay can be prevented. There is no such thing.

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a jackpot), the sub CPU 1301 , executes a pre-read effect lottery process (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the current first starting opening prize (for the sub variation pattern) based on the sub variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106. ) It is determined whether or not to generate a look-ahead effect, and if a look-ahead effect is to be generated, the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 183) is determined (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a pre-read effect will be generated for the current first starting opening prize based on the result of the pre-read effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). If it is determined that a pre-read effect will occur regarding the current first starting opening prize, the sub CPU 1301 sets the pre-read flag to ON (step S9111). The pre-reading flag is a flag indicating that a pre-reading performance will occur for one first starting hole winning, and is set to OFF when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. As a result, the result of the 1st special lottery related to the 1st starting opening prize is suggested between the occurrence of the 1st starting opening winning and the start of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 1st starting opening winning. A performance (pre-reading performance) will be performed.

If it is determined in step S9110 that the prefetch effect will not occur for the current first starting slot winning, or after executing the process in step S9111, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the processing in steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. If it is determined that a look-ahead performance will not occur for this first starting gate winning, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a held ball that can perform a look-ahead performance. do. The reserved ball that can perform the look-ahead effect is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 182), and is based on the main variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value. This is a reserved ball on which a performance is performed based on the determined sub-fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that the reserved ball related to the current first starting slot winning is a pending ball that can perform a pre-reading effect, the sub CPU 1301 adds the pre-reading ball to the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning. Possible information (information indicating that a look-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. If it is determined that the reserved ball related to the current first starting slot winning is a pending ball for which a pre-reading effect cannot be performed, the sub CPU 1301 adds the pre-reading ball to the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting slot winning. Disapproval information (information indicating that the prefetch effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 176(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read in advance. This shows a state in which availability information is stored. In FIG. 176(b), after the state shown in FIG. 176(a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second This shows a state in which pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. In FIG. 177(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read in advance. This shows a state in which availability information is stored. In FIG. 177(b), after the state shown in FIG. 177(a), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second This shows a state in which pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. In FIG. 177(c), after the state shown in FIG. 177(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third ball enters the first starting hole 1120. This shows a state in which pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball.

If it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur regarding the current first start-gate prize, the sub CPU 1301 performs a look-ahead effect regarding the first start-gate win in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first start-gate win. The information indicating this (pre-read information) is stored. Then, if pre-readable information is stored in all the first sub-holding areas (excluding the first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the first starting opening winnings before the current first starting opening winning, then the sub The CPU 1301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in these first sub-reservation areas into pre-reading information. The information during pre-reading is information indicating that the pre-reading effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored starts.

In FIG. 176(c), after the state shown in FIG. 176(b), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third ball enters the first starting hole 1120. This shows a state in which the pre-read information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. At this time, pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first and second reserved balls instead of the pre-readable information. As a result, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the first and second reserved balls are being performed, a look-ahead performance that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the third reserved ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 176(d), after the state shown in FIG. 176(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and four This shows a state in which pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the eye-holding ball. In this way, when the pre-read information is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to one reserved ball, the information that cannot be pre-read is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the next reserved ball.

In addition, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for this first starting opening prize, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before this first starting opening winning )), if there is a first sub-reservation area in which the non-readable information is stored, the first sub-reservation area (excluding the first sub-reservation area in which the non-readable information is stored) exists. In this case, the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-reservation area with a larger number than the first sub-reservation area with the largest number is rewritten to the pre-reading information. In FIG. 177(d), after the state shown in FIG. 177(c), one game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the fourth ball enters the first starting hole 1120. This shows a state in which the pre-read information is stored in the first sub-retention area corresponding to the reserved ball. At this time, pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the third reserved ball instead of the pre-readable information. As a result, while the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first and second reserved balls are being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the third reserved balls are not performed. During this period, a look-ahead effect will be performed that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball.

In addition, if the reserved ball related to the current first starting gate winning is a stage change section reserved ball, the information that cannot be read ahead may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting gate winning. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172(d), if it is determined to generate a look-ahead effect for the fourth held ball, the look-ahead effect stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first held ball It is also possible to rewrite the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the second and third reserved balls into pre-reading information while leaving the non-permanent information as is. In this case, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls is While this is being carried out, a look-ahead effect will be carried out that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball.

Alternatively, if the held ball related to the current first starting opening winning is the holding ball in the stage change section, while storing the information that cannot be read ahead in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning, If the held ball related to the current 1st starting gate winning is a stage change section held ball other than the stage change section relevant held ball, pre-readable information is placed in the 1st sub-holding area corresponding to the current 1st starting gate winning. It is also possible to memorize it. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172(d), if it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect for the fourth held ball, it is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first to third held balls. The currently read ahead information may be rewritten to read ahead information. In this case, while the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls are being performed, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the jackpot determination regarding the fourth reserved ball will be performed. Become.

As described above, the first sub-reservation area is provided in the work RAM 1303 and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 1203. Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-reservation area of the work RAM 1303 can be configured to also be stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. In this case, the information stored in the first sub reservation area of the work RAM 1303 is controlled to be generated by the sub control circuit 1300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. is possible. Further, the main control circuit 1200 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the prefetch effect based on information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. Further, regarding the information stored in the first sub-reservation area of the work RAM 1303, it may be configured such that a suggestive effect is performed in accordance with the information to such an extent that the player can recognize the information.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol variation>
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence/non-occurrence determining process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing stage count processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the stage change occurrence lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a sub variation pattern selection table. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a sub variation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 178, after a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 in the normal mode (see FIG. 129(a)), the special symbol variation related to the starting prize starts. This is a process that is sometimes performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200. Furthermore, before executing the process shown in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 transfers the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4) to the first sub reservation area, respectively. (0), and shifted to the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (3).

In the first special symbol variation start process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change occurrence determination process (step S9201). The stage change occurrence/non-occurrence determining process will be described below with reference to FIG. 179.

In the stage change occurrence determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode (step S9251). If it is determined that the current special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that a condition for generating a stage change is satisfied, and when the stage change flag is set on, a stage change is performed. After executing the process in step S9252, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9251 that the current special symbol variation is not the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage count processing (step S9253). The stage count process will be explained below using FIG. 180.

In the stage count process, the sub CPU 1301 first adds 1 to the value of the post-stage change variation counter (step S9261). The value of the post-stage variation count counter indicates the number of first special symbol variations counted after the transition to the current production stage (post-stage variation count), and is stored in the work RAM 1303. The sub CPU 1301 adds the value of the post-stage variation counter every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display section 1163) is performed, while adding the value of the variation counter after the stage transition. Even if the change display in section 1164 is performed, the value of the change number counter after stage transition is not incremented.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the value of the post-stage change variation counter is 20 (step S9262). If it is determined that the value of the post-stage change variation counter is not 20, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the value of the post-stage variation number counter is 20, the sub CPU 1301 sets the specified number reaching flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number reaching flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. If the specified number reaching flag is set to on when the first special symbol variation starts, basically (unless you win the production stage transition pending lottery when the specified number is reached (see step S9273 in Figure 181)) , a stage change will be performed in the special symbol variation.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 1301 sets the post-stage change variation counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage shift variation counter) (step S9264). Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The stage count process performed in step S9253 in FIG. 179 has been described above using FIG. 180. The explanation returns to FIG. 179.

After executing the process in step S9253, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 174) is set on (step S9254). If it is determined that the prefetch flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change occurrence lottery process (step S9255). The stage change occurrence lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 181.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the next change change flag is set to on (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change indicates that in one special symbol change, the number of changes after the stage transition has reached the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition, but the occurrence of the stage change is the next special symbol. This is a flag indicating that the change has been carried over to the change (see step S9279). If it is determined that the next change change flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag on (step S9272). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9272, the sub CPU 1301 sets the next change change flag to OFF (step S9273), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9271 that the next change change flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the specified number reaching flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 180) is set on (step S9274). If it is determined that the specified number reaching flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will occur during this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the variation pattern in the current special symbol variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command for the first starting slot winning that is sent from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 1301 determines the current special symbol based on the information. It is possible to recognize effects that may occur during fluctuations.

If it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 executes a production stage transfer pending lottery when a specified number is reached (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the lottery with effect stage transition pending when the specified number is reached is won (step S9277).

If it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during the current special symbol variation, or if it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery with effect stage transition pending upon reaching the specified number has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 The stage change flag is set on (step S9278). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9278, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for suspending production stage transition upon reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the next change change flag to ON (step S9279). As a result, a stage change will be performed in the next special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9279, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9274 that the specified number reaching flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a seventh preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the process result of step S9154 in FIG. 175. In the process of step S9154, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh preview performance will occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting hole winning, the sub CPU 1301 will place a Information (seventh preview performance occurrence information) indicating that a seventh preview performance will occur during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting slot winning is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-reservation area has been shifted to the first sub-reservation area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation when the seventh preview performance occurrence information is stored in the first sub reservation area (0).

If it is determined that the seventh preview performance will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. After executing the process in step S9281, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 7th preview performance will not occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 will execute a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol variation. ) occurs (step S9282). This process is similar to the process in step S9275. If it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 executes a performance stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. At this time, the sub CPU 1301 changes the winning probability of the performance stage transition lottery before the specified number is reached, depending on the value of the post-stage change variation counter.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pre-specified number pre-representation stage transition lottery has been won (step S9284). If it is determined that the lottery for moving to the performance stage before reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, a stage change will occur in this special symbol change. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, or if it is determined in step S9284 that the lottery to move to the stage before reaching the specified number has been won, or the process of step S9285 is After executing, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The stage change occurrence lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 179 has been described above with reference to FIG. 181. The explanation returns to FIG. 179.

If it is determined in step S9254 that the prefetch flag is set on, or after executing the process in step S9255, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. In addition, in the case where the seventh preview performance occurs during the current special symbol variation, all the reserved balls that exist at the time the current special symbol variation starts are stage change section reserved balls (see FIG. 175). Since the look-ahead effect is not performed for the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 174), if the seventh preview effect occurs during the current special symbol change, the determination result in step S9254 will always be "NO".

The stage change occurrence determination process performed in step S9201 in FIG. 178 has been described above with reference to FIG. 179. The explanation returns to FIG. 178.

After executing the process in step S9201, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to ON (step S9202). ).

If it is determined that the stage change flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change destination lottery process (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the production stage after the transition due to the stage change. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can become a production stage after transition is associated with a random value range and defined. has been done. As the stage change destination lottery table, there are provided a stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. In the stage change destination lottery tables, the random number ranges are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. The lottery is performed by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the lottery is performed by referring to the stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the performance stage after transition is determined, the sub CPU 1301 performs control to cause the transition to the determined performance stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 updates the information stored in the production stage flag storage area to information corresponding to the production stage after the transition. Then, the sub CPU 1301 sets the post-stage variation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage variation number counter) (step S9204).

If it is determined in step S9202 that the stage change flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 controls the sub variation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 174 and (see step S9106) is determined (step S9205). If it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first starting hole winning corresponding to the current special symbol variation occurs, the sub CPU 1301 determines that when the first starting opening winning corresponding to the current special symbol variation occurs. It is determined whether the presentation stage (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) and the current presentation stage are the same (step S9206).

If it is determined in step S9205 that the sub-variation pattern (see step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 174) has not been determined when the first starting slot winning corresponding to the current special symbol variation occurs, or in step S9206 It was determined that the production stage when the first starting slot winning corresponding to this special symbol change occurred (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) and the current production stage were not the same. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 executes the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes the sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). The processing in step S9207 and step S9208 is similar to the processing in step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 174, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In step S9206, when the first starting slot winning corresponding to the current special symbol change occurs, the production stage (at the time when the processes of step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 174 are executed) is the same as the current production stage. If it is determined that this is the case, or after executing the process in step S9208, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 174) is set on (step S9209).

If it is determined that the prefetch flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 executes sub variation pattern replacement processing (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub variation pattern with another sub variation pattern as necessary. This will be explained in detail below using FIGS. 182 and 183.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 182, main variation patterns and sub-variation patterns are defined in association with each other. The main variation patterns include main variation pattern "1", main variation pattern "2", main variation pattern "3", and so on. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" becomes the main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 175) corresponding to the seventh preview effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). There is. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with one main variation pattern, and when the one main variation pattern is selected, any one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is selected. It is now selected. For example, in the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174, if the sub CPU 1301 receives information indicating that the main variation pattern is "1" as a variation pattern command from the main control circuit 1200, the sub CPU 1301 One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation patterns include a sub-variation pattern that can perform a look-ahead effect (a sub-variation pattern that can be read ahead) and a sub-variation pattern that cannot perform a look-ahead effect (a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead). FIG. 182 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a sub-variation pattern that can be read ahead or a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead. For example, sub variation patterns "1" to "20" are sub variation patterns that can be read ahead, and sub variation patterns "21" to "30" are sub variation patterns that cannot be read ahead. For example, if it is determined in step S9110 of FIG. 174 that no prefetch effect will occur for the current first starting slot winning, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the sub fluctuation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a prefetchable sub fluctuation pattern. For example, pre-reading information (information indicating that a pre-reading performance can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106 is a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read ahead, information that cannot be read ahead (that cannot perform a look-ahead effect (information indicating that it is not possible) is stored.

After that, when a first starting slot winning occurs and a pre-reading effect occurs for the first starting opening winning (when the pre-reading flag is set to on in step S9111), an explanation will be given using FIGS. 176 and 177. As described above, the sub CPU 1301 rewrites the pre-reading information stored in the first sub-reservation area to the pre-reading information. In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178, if the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (first sub-reservation area (0)) corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S9105 and If the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a pre-readable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, if the pre-reading impossible information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (first sub-reservation area (0)) corresponding to the current special symbol change (the sub-CPU 1301 determines that the If the variation pattern is a sub-variation pattern that cannot be read in advance), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 183, for each sub-variation pattern before replacement, a sub-variation pattern after replacement is defined in association with a look-ahead effect pattern. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is defined between the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. The pre-read effect pattern indicates the type of pre-read effect, and is determined in the pre-read effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern for pre-reading) that corresponds to the pre-reading performance. In FIG. 183, as examples of the sub-variation patterns for pre-reading, sub-variation patterns for pre-reading "31" to "50" corresponding to the main variation pattern "1" are shown. The look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “31” to “35” are associated with the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “1” to “5”, and the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “36” to “40” are the look-ahead sub fluctuation patterns “36” to “40”. They are associated with variation patterns "6" to "10", and look-ahead sub variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with look-ahead sub variation patterns "11" to "15", The sub-variation patterns "46" to "50" are associated with the pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 creates a new prefetch sub variation pattern in place of the already determined sub variation pattern (prefetchable sub variation pattern) by referring to the sub variation pattern replacement table. This is determined as a sub-fluctuation pattern. For example, the sub variation pattern determined in step S9105 and step S9106 of FIG. 174 is the sub variation pattern "1", and the prefetch effect pattern determined in the prefetch effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 174) is the prefetch effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub variation pattern "31" as the sub variation pattern after replacement. Further, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the pre-read effect pattern determined in the pre-read effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174) is the pre-read effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub variation pattern "37" as the sub variation pattern after replacement.

In this way, for example, when the main variation pattern "1" is selected, any sub variation pattern among the sub variation patterns "1" to "50" may be selected, but the sub variation pattern selection table In , pre-reading sub variation patterns "31" to "50" are not defined. As a result, it is possible to select a sub variation pattern using a common method in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. It is possible to improve the efficiency of processing related to determining a fluctuation pattern. On top of that, when a look-ahead effect is performed, the sub-variation pattern replacement table is referred to, and by replacing it with a sub-variation pattern for look-ahead that corresponds to the look-ahead effect pattern, a sub-variation pattern that matches the look-ahead effect is created. It is now possible to change the decorative design. Note that the sub variation pattern selection table and the sub variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 1302.

Although not shown, the sub-variation pattern selection table includes a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third production stage. It is being In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value ranges assigned to each sub-variation pattern are different from each other, and there are sub-variation patterns that can only be selected in the first production stage, and only in the second production stage. A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third performance stage are each set. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 selects the sub variation pattern by referring to the sub variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and selects the sub variation pattern when the current production stage is the second production stage. If so, select the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, select the sub-variation pattern for the third production stage. A sub variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, the sub-fluctuation pattern replacement tables include a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. It is provided. In these sub-fluctuation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence between the pre-replacement sub-fluctuation patterns and the post-replacement sub-fluctuation patterns are different from each other, and some of the types of pre-read effect patterns are also different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 replaces the sub variation pattern by referring to the sub variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and changes the current production stage to the second production stage. If so, replace the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, replace the sub-variation pattern for the third production stage. The sub variation pattern is replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set to on, or after executing the process in step S9210, the sub CPU 1301 converts the already determined sub fluctuation pattern into a sub fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scale. A replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, if the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 163 to 165), the sub-CPU 1301 changes the sub-variation pattern as necessary. Change the time. For example, at the time when the first starting hole winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the first starting opening winning corresponds to the 4th reserved ball, and the sub-variation corresponding to the 4 second variation When a pattern has been selected, but all the reservations are subsequently exhausted and the special symbol variation is reached, processing is performed to replace it with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to ON (step S9212). If it is determined that the stage change flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change wipe color lottery process (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As mentioned above, when a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes (number of changes counted after stage transition) reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (Fig. 170) is performed. After the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed, the display device 1007 displays a wipe display, and the stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. Furthermore, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh preview performance, the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" (see FIG. 169) is performed. After the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" is performed, the display device 1007 displays a wipe display, and the stage after transition (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. In addition, after the performance in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is completed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display, and the performance stage after the transition (the first performance stage , the second presentation stage, or the third presentation stage).

In this way, when transitioning to the background corresponding to the transition stage, a predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 1007. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold color, or special color). Specifically, if the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in a special color. wipe image is displayed. If the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the wipe image for the second production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the second production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the second production stage in a special color is Is displayed. If the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the wipe image for the third production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the third production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the third production stage in a special color is Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change wipe color lottery table and determines the color of the wipe image by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default color , gold, and special colors) and random value ranges are defined in association with each other.

In addition, the stage change wipe color lottery tables include the 1st stage change wipe color lottery table, the 2nd stage change wipe color lottery table, the 3rd stage change wipe color lottery table, the 4th stage change wipe color lottery table, and the 5th stage change wipe color lottery table. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and the random number ranges of these stage change wipe color lottery tables are different from each other. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table correspond to setting values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the sub CPU 1301 selects the stage change that corresponds to the current setting value. It is supposed to refer to the wipe color lottery table. In each stage change wipe color lottery table, the random value range for the special color is set so that the probability that the special color will be selected increases as the set value increases. For example, the probability that a special color wipe image will be displayed is higher when the setting value is "4" than when the setting value is "2", and when the setting value is "6" than when the setting value is "4". In this case, the probability that a special color wipe image will be displayed is higher. As a result, the setting value is suggested through the appearance frequency of special color wipe images.

In addition, in the above, as an example, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the 7th preview performance (including the case where the 7th preview performance occurs in a game that reaches the specified number), the stage change is set to the performance number "121". It has been explained that the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" is performed before the corresponding performance or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" may be performed, and the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" may not be performed. In addition, while it is assumed that both the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or the performance corresponding to the performance number "122" and the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" will be performed, the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" The wipe image may not be displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, but the wipe image may be displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. If such a configuration is adopted, the wipe image will be displayed only once during one stage change. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the wipe image.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game when a variation pattern corresponding to the seventh preview performance is determined as the main variation pattern in the stage change game. In the pre-reading performance, the game freezes with a predetermined image displayed, and moves to the stage change game in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processes of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (the wipe image is ). Furthermore, the predetermined look-ahead performance may be configured to occur only in one performance stage (for example, the second performance stage).

If it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process in step S9213, the sub CPU 1301 executes a production lottery process according to the production stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the final sub variation pattern (the sub variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211) and the current performance stage. Based on this, processing is performed to determine the specific content of the performance. For example, when the current performance stage is the first performance stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first performance stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 130). Further, when the current performance stage is the second performance stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the second performance stage preview content lottery process, and when the current performance stage is the third performance stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the second performance stage preview content lottery process. A production stage preview content lottery process is executed. Also in the second performance stage preview content lottery process and the third performance stage preview content lottery process, special symbol fluctuations related to the first starting opening prize are based on the sub-variation pattern, similar to the first performance stage preview content lottery process. The content of the performance to be performed during the event is determined. After executing the process in step S9214, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Basic screen display at each production stage>
FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the first presentation stage. FIG. 184(b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the second presentation stage. FIG. 184(c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device at the third presentation stage.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), in the first performance stage, a first performance stage name image 9101 indicating the name of the first performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. As shown in FIG. 184(b), in the second performance stage, a second performance stage name image 9102 indicating the name of the second performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. As shown in FIG. 184(c), in the third performance stage, a third performance stage name image 9103 indicating the name of the third performance stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. The first performance stage name image 9101, the second performance stage name image 9102, and the third performance stage name image 9103 are each displayed at the same position on the display device 1007.

Further, at each production stage, a counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 1007. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the stage change occurs (number of variations counted after stage transition). The denominator number (20) indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change generation condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184(a), in the first production stage, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. ing. As described above, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are each in either a dark mode or a bright mode. (See FIG. 162). In addition, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are always displayed while staying at the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when a pseudo continuous effect has not occurred, and when a pseudo continuous effect has occurred and the pseudo continuous stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification The watermelon image 9022 and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo-continuation stage notification are displayed darkly. When a pseudo-continuation effect is occurring and the pseudo-continuation stage is "pseudo 2," the bell image 9021 for pseudo-continuation stage notification is displayed brightly, and the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuation stage notification and the bell image 9022 for pseudo-continuation stage notification are displayed brightly. The cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When a pseudo continuous effect is occurring and the pseudo continuous stage is "pseudo 3", the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are brightly displayed, and the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9022 are displayed brightly. The cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When a super reach develops through a pseudo-continuous effect, during the super reach, a bell image 9021 for pseudo-continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo-continuous stage notification are displayed. Displayed brightly.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 184(b), a stock timer image 9110 is displayed on the second production stage. Stock timer image 9110 is an image that corresponds to any numerical value ("PLAY TIME") from "00:00" to "99:99". "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which the super reach is performed, and the performance in the super reach will be performed for the time corresponding to the "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the performance (time stock preview) performed during the second performance stage.

Although not shown, the time stock notice includes a first time stock notice, a second time stock notice, and a third time stock notice. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp emits light, a predetermined item decoration part (movable accessory) moves rattling, and at the same time the item decoration part jumps forward and at the same time the value shown as "PLAY TIME" is displayed. increases. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration section. The item decoration section is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, as a part of the second character decoration section), and is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the item decoration section is decorated in the shape of a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, unlike the first time stock notice, the item lamp does not emit light and the item decoration part rattles, and the value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock preview, after a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, an image is displayed in which the effect is absorbed into the item decoration part, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Further, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in a default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 1 pattern. When any value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with two patterns of effect levels. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in three effect level patterns. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in an effect level MAX pattern. Note that the stock timer images 9110 include "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", and "95:01" to The numerical value "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation compared to the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation compared to the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest expectation of a jackpot. In the effect level 1 pattern to the effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and as the effect level becomes higher, the display mode becomes more flashy. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 184(c), a character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed in the third production stage. The character appearance meter image 9120 includes a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images imitating meters, respectively.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R have an initial display mode (meter not filled up), a level 1 display mode (meter filled up to one level), Level 2 display mode (meter filled to 2 levels), Level 3 display mode (meter filled to 3 levels), and Level MAX display mode (meter filled to capacity) It can be displayed in any format.

The meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 accumulates according to the performance (meter UP notice) performed during the third performance stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meter accumulates to one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 1007 (becomes in a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 1007 (becomes in a standby state).

When only the left character 9121L among the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R becomes a standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L. When only the right character 9121R among the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, a super reach (super reach for right character) corresponding to the right character 9121R develops. When both the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enter the standby state, a super reach (super reach for both characters) is developed according to both characters.

In the super reach for the left character, when the right character 9121R appears on the display device 1007, the transition shifts to the super reach for both characters, and in the super reach for the right character, when the left character 9121L appears on the display device 1007, the super reach for both characters occurs. to move to. Furthermore, in the super reach for the left character, when the first ally character appears on the display device 1007, the super reach develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, in the super reach for the right character, when the first ally character appears on the display device 1007, it develops into a predetermined super reach. In addition, in the super reach for both characters, if the button press effect is successful, it will develop into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reaches are the same super reaches as the super reach (see FIG. 146(a)) that transitions when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first performance stage.

Note that even when the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 1007. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed on the display device 1007 in the default state, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 1007 in a default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed blinking in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed blinking in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed lit in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed lit in red. In this way, as the level of the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 increases, the expectation level of a jackpot increases.

Note that even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to right character 9121R may be in a standby state. Specifically, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a rotating manner, and after the rotation ends, various icons may be stopped and displayed. Icons that can be stopped and displayed in this manner include a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to the super reach for the left character. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to the super reach for the right character. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the predetermined super reach.

<8th preview performance>
FIG. 185(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth preview performance. FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth preview performance. FIG. 185(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth preview performance and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The eighth preview performance shown in FIG. 185 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the second performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The eighth preview performance can occur only in the second performance stage.

In the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative pattern is at full strength (becomes a reach mode) occurs. The sign indicates that the second character lamp (see FIG. 170(c)) will blink, indicating that the player will become over-tempered. Note that the above description has been made assuming that the corresponding character lamp is always lit while staying at each performance stage. However, in games other than games in which the specified number of characters is reached, the corresponding character lamp may be basically turned off. In this case, the lighting of the second character lamp may be used as the above-mentioned sign.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "151" is a performance that fades out after the above-mentioned sign occurs. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "152", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the failure of tenpai agitation (a tenpai agitation failure image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "153", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 1007. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to a successful tenpai incitement (a successful tenpai incitement image) is displayed on the display device 1007. When the tenpai incitement success image is displayed, the process then shifts to a notice after the tenpai success.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "154", after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to a successful tenpai incitement (a successful tenpai incitement image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the Tenpai incitement success image is displayed, the transition to a notice after the Tenpai success occurs. In the performance corresponding to the performance number "155," after the above-mentioned foreshadowing occurs, a predetermined movable accessory moves, and an image related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation) is displayed on the display device 1007. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to a successful tenpai incitement (a successful tenpai incitement image) is displayed on the display device 1007. When the image of successful tempai incitement is displayed, it will then shift to a super hot notice.

The predetermined movable accessories that operate in the performances corresponding to the production numbers "152" to "155" are the same movable accessories as the movable accessories that operate in the preview after the icon stops (see FIG. 145). Further, when a tenpai inciting success image is displayed in a performance corresponding to the performance numbers "153" to "155", the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode. In addition, after the performances corresponding to the production numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the transition to a notice after tenpai is successful, and when the notice ends after tenpai is successful, the 6th specific super reach, the 7th specific super reach, and Develops into any super reach among the first specific super reaches. In the preview after the success of Tenpai, a transitional performance corresponding to the development destination Super Reach will be performed.

Particularly, when developing into the 6th specific super reach, an image showing the title of the 6th specific super reach is displayed on the display device 1007 in a preview after the Tenpai success. In the sixth specific super reach, a predetermined slot game is played. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including the "cherry" icon are displayed in a variable manner in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and then are stopped and displayed. In a slot game, when "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), a predetermined super reach develops. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 146(a)) that transitions when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first performance stage. Therefore, the slot game can be said to be a mission to move to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (a value greater than 0), the slot game is played repeatedly. Then, when "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played for a period of time corresponding to "PLAY TIME." If you get three "cherry" icons within that time, you will have cleared the mission and will develop into a predetermined super reach. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

Note that, as described above, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "154", "PLAY TIME" is stocked, but this stock is due to the above-mentioned second time stock preview being performed. In the second presentation stage, both a time stock notice and a jackpot notice presentation (for example, the eighth notice presentation) may occur during one special symbol variation.

In the intense preview that transitions after the performance corresponding to the performance number "155" is performed, one or more of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the display device 1007. Appears in. Then, it develops into a super reach depending on the combination of characters that appear. A super hot notice can also occur at the first performance stage and the third performance stage.

There are four timings at which the above-mentioned sign may occur. Specifically, there is a case where the sign occurs from the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and a case where the sign occurs from the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 2). , a case in which the sign occurs after 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 3), and a case in which the sign occurs after 16.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change in the decorative pattern (timing 4), is provided. The sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all effects following the omen occur with a 4 second delay compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a 4 second delay compared to timing 2. However, at timing 4, compared to timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds. In FIG. 185(b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185(c), in the performance (timing 1) corresponding to the performance number "152", each decorative pattern (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern) changes from the start of variation. It is designed to stop when 11 seconds have elapsed (the time when the display of the tempai failure image ends). As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative pattern has stopped when the wipe display returns to the normal background after failing to increase the tenpai. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the excitement during the excitement. Regarding timings 2 to 4, from the same viewpoint, the stop timings of each decorative pattern are respectively 15 seconds after the start of variation, 19 seconds after the start of variation, and 23 seconds after the start of variation.

<Logo lamp preview performance>
FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp preview effect. FIGS. 186(b) and 186(c) are diagrams showing time charts of the logo lamp preview performance.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, above the display device 1007), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo lamp will be explained in more detail below.

The logo cover includes a first logo section, a second logo section, and a third logo section. The first logo part is decorated with a shape representing the first word, the second logo part is decorated with a shape representing the second word, and the third logo part is decorated with a shape representing the second word. The logo section is decorated in the shape of the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are each a predetermined word (character string), and in this embodiment, for convenience, the first word is "X", the second word is "Y", The third word is sometimes called "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the center portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side of the logo cover. .

The logo lamp includes a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo part, and the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo part, The third logo lamp includes a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo section. As a result, the letter "X" lights up by lighting the first logo lamp, the letter "Y" lights up by lighting the second logo lamp, and the letter "Z" lights up by lighting the third logo lamp. You can create an appearance that looks like it's lit up.

In this embodiment, a logo lamp preview effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp preview performance shown in FIG. 186 is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). . The logo lamp preview performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during the first special symbol change.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is such that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined period of time (1 second), the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up. This is a performance in which the lights go out. The performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is such that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (letter "Y") lights up for a predetermined time (1 second). seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to be lit), then the first logo lamp (letter "X") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y") This is a performance in which the lights go out.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "163" is that after the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up for a predetermined time (one second), the second logo lamp (letter "Y") lights up for a predetermined time (one second). seconds) (during which time, the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to be lit), and then the third logo lamp (letter "Z") lights up (the first logo lamp (letter "X") This is an effect in which the lighting of the second logo lamp (the letter "Y") and the second logo lamp (the letter "Y" continue). The lighting of the first logo lamp (letter "X"), the second logo lamp (letter "Y"), and the third logo lamp (letter "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol variation.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" are performances related to inciting whether or not the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (tenpai agitation). As the letters light up sequentially like "X" → "Y" → "Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern will become Tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern will be Tenpai (it will always be in the reach mode). That is, the logo lamp preview performance is such that the expectation of a jackpot increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 186(b) shows a time chart when a logo lamp preview performance is performed on the first performance stage or the third performance stage. Here, two timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds Tenpai), and when 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. There is a case in which the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from this point on (for 14 seconds tenpai). In the first production stage and the third production stage, when the decorative pattern fluctuates in the default variation pattern, it becomes a ready-to-reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation (10 seconds tenpai) and a ready-to-reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation. There are times when (14 seconds tenpai) (see FIGS. 163 and 165).

The two timings in FIG. 186(b) correspond to these two types of tenpai timings. As a result, when the decorative pattern enters the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing indicated by "10 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 186(b). Further, when the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation, the logo lamp can be lit at the timing shown in "14 seconds for tenpai" in FIG. 186(b).

When a logo lamp preview performance is performed on the second performance stage, four timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, the first logo lamp (the letter "X") lights up from 6 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (timing 1), and the first logo lamp (the "X" character) lights up from 10 seconds after the decorative pattern starts changing (timing 1). (timing 2) when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from 14 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and when the There is a case (timing 4) in which the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 186(c), only timing 1 is illustrated. These four timings respectively correspond to the four timings at which the eighth preview performance described above is performed. This makes it possible to light up the logo lamp at the timing when the Tenpai fanning is being performed in the eighth preview performance.

The logo lamp preview performance described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo continuous performance. That is, in each of "Pseudo 1", "Pseudo 2", and "Pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous performance, any of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" may occur. For example, in "Pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and in "Pseudo 2", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from the point when the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation of the decorative pattern has resumed. The logo lamp (letter "X") lights up, and the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variation of the decorative pattern resumed in "Pseudo 3". At this time, for example, if a performance corresponding to the performance number "161" or "162" is performed in "Pseudo 1", it will not shift to "Pseudo 2", but it will correspond to the performance number "163" in "Pseudo 1". If such an effect is performed, the transition may be made to "pseudo 2". In addition, if the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in "Pseudo 2", the transition to "Pseudo 3" is not performed, while in "Pseudo 2" the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed. If this occurs, the transition may be made to "pseudo 3". In addition, if the effects corresponding to the effects number "161" and "162" are performed in "Pseudo 3", the transition to Super Reach will not occur, but the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" will be performed in "Pseudo 3". In such a case, it may be possible to shift to super reach.

<First production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the first performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first presentation stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. 187 is performed in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the production stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 130).

In the first production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a pseudo continuous production will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9301). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9302). If it is determined that the pseudo continuous performance will progress to “pseudo 3”, the sub CPU 1301 executes a logo lamp preview content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9303). The pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 188.

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance (step S9321). In this process, the sub-CPU 1301 sets the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation to be a sub-variation pattern (10-second ten-pai variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 3". ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 3". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 displays the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines not to perform the logo lamp preview performance in "pseudo 3" (step S9323). . After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9303 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. 188. The explanation returns to FIG. 187.

If it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo continuous effect will not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9303, the sub CPU 1301 executes a logo lamp preview content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9304). The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 189.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation to be a sub variation pattern (10 second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 2". ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 2". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the content of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 3 has been determined (step S9342). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the preview content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp has been determined if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 is being executed; (or when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3"), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9344). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9345 ). After executing the processing in step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9304 in FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. 189. The explanation returns to FIG. 187.

If it is determined in step S9301 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9304, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9305). The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 190.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub-CPU 1301 sets the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation to be a sub-variation pattern (10-second ten-pai variation pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 1". ) and a sub-variation pattern in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "Pseudo 1" (14-second Tenpai variation pattern). do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the content of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 2 has been determined. A judgment is made (step S9362). In this process, if the process of step S9343 or step S9344 in FIG. If the process of step S9345 is being executed (or if the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo second logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has been determined (step S9364). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the preview content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp has been determined if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 is being executed; (in the case where the process of (1) is executed, the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9366). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither 10-second ten-pai nor 14-second ten-pai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous presentation or "no pseudo" presentation, the sub CPU 1301 performs a logo lamp preview presentation in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such information (step S9367). After executing the processing in step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9305 in FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. 190. The explanation returns to FIG. 187.

After executing the process in step S9305, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<2nd production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the second performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the production stage preview content lottery process.

In the second production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the eighth preview performance (see FIG. 185) will occur during the current special symbol variation (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, in the second production stage preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the production to be performed during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. It has been decided. In the process of step S9401, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the eighth preview performance has been determined as the performance to be performed during the current special symbol variation.

If it is determined that the eighth preview performance will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines the logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the eighth preview performance will not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp preview performance will not be performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<3rd production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process>
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the third performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The third production stage logo lamp preview content lottery process shown in FIG. This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the production stage preview content lottery process.

In the third performance stage logo lamp preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a pseudo continuous performance will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9452). In the third performance stage, the stage in the pseudo continuous performance is supposed to progress only up to "pseudo 2". The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 193.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines, based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation, what pattern to use for the decorative symbols at the "pseudo 2" stage during the special symbol variation. It is determined whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9461, the sub CPU 1301 sets the decorative symbol stopping pattern to be a decorative symbol stopping pattern (10 second tenpai stopping pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 2", In "Pseudo 2", it is determined whether the decorative pattern is in any of the decorative pattern stop patterns (14 second Tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo-continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 displays the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines not to perform the logo lamp preview performance in "pseudo 2" (step S9463). . After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9452 of FIG. 192 has been described above with reference to FIG. 193. The explanation returns to FIG. 192.

If it is determined in step S9451 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9452, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process (step S9453). The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 194.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a 10 second tenpai or a 14 second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance. (Step S9471). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines, based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation, what pattern to use for the decorative symbols at the "pseudo 1" stage during the special symbol variation. It is determined whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9471, the sub CPU 1301 sets the decorative symbol stopping pattern to be a decorative symbol stopping pattern (10 second tenpai stopping pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 1", In "Pseudo 1", it is determined whether the decorative pattern is in any of the decorative pattern stop patterns (14 second Tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in a pseudo continuous performance or a "no pseudo" performance, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the content of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 2 has been determined. A judgment is made (step S9472). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has been determined if the process of step S9462 in FIG. 193 is being executed; (or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo second logo lamp notice has not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, if the sub CPU 1301 determines the performance corresponding to the performance number "163" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". ~Determine one of the performances corresponding to "163". Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "162" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". One of the performances corresponding to "162" is determined. Furthermore, if the performance corresponding to the performance number "161" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects the performance number "161" as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1". Determine the performance corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp preview content has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation (step S9474). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp preview performance to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9471 that neither 10-second tenpai nor 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or "no pseudo" production, the sub CPU 1301 performs a logo lamp preview production in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such information (step S9475). After executing the processing in step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp preview content lottery process performed in step S9453 of FIG. 192 has been described above with reference to FIG. 194. The explanation returns to FIG. 192.

After executing the process in step S9453, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Screen display in variable mode>
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in variable probability mode.

As described above, in the probability change mode, when the normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129(a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit right enter the small winning big prize opening 1151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game while expecting that a variation pattern with a variation time of 600000 msec (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128) will be determined as the normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probability variation mode, every time a normal symbol variation is performed, a production (drum variation production) corresponding to the pattern of the normal symbol variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195, in the variable probability mode, drum images 9201 (left drum image 9201L, middle drum image 9201C, and right drum image 9201R) are displayed on the display device 1007. The drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). In the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, it is possible to perform variable display and static display of drum symbols 9202 (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R).

In the example shown in FIG. 195(a), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a manner that they are each changing. In the example shown in FIG. 195(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped as a "bell" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, and a "cherry" symbol, respectively. It is displayed in this manner. In this way, in the probability variation mode, every time a normal symbol variation is performed, a performance (drum variation performance) imitating the fluctuating display and stop display of the reels (slot game) is performed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 195, in the probability variable mode, the remaining ST number image 9203 and the prize ball number image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 1007. The remaining ST number image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (remaining ST number) performed in the variable probability mode. When the probability variation mode starts, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, each time a special symbol variation is performed, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 decreases by 1. When the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 becomes "0", the variable probability mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The prize ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first winning mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the bonus mode to which the player shifts upon the start of the normal symbol loss length variation will be referred to as the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, the value indicating the number of remaining STs is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol variation is performed once, as in the probability variation mode. Then, when the value indicating the number of remaining STs becomes 0, the first bonus mode shifts to the normal mode. Therefore, the variable probability mode and the first bonus mode are collectively referred to as the remaining ST count subtraction mode. In addition, when shifting from the probability variable mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probability variable mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is carried over in the first bonus mode as well. In this embodiment, the remaining ST count subtraction mode is sometimes referred to as the variable probability mode.

On the other hand, even when the starting conditions for the jackpot game state are satisfied in the variable probability mode, the game shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129(a)). In this embodiment, the bonus mode to which the player shifts upon the start of the jackpot gaming state will be referred to as the second bonus mode. When shifting to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST number is reset, and the remaining ST number is not updated (managed) in the second bonus mode. When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining ST number.

<Drum fluctuation effect determination process>
FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating a drum variation effect determination process related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The drum fluctuation performance determination process shown in FIG. 196 is a process that is performed in the performance mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub-control circuit 1300, triggered by the game ball passing through the passage gate 1126 (gate passage). It is. Note that the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126 by receiving a ball passage detector passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126. The ball passing detector passage detection command is set by the main control circuit 1200 in the ball passing detector passage detection process, and is sent to the sub control circuit 1300.

In the drum variation performance determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the current performance mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 129(a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the performance mode is stored in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the current performance mode by referring to the performance mode flag storage area. Can be done.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the current performance mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current production mode is the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (the variation shown in FIG. 128). pattern "05H") (step S9502). Since the ball passing detector passing detection command includes information indicating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, by receiving the ball passing detector passing detection command, the sub CPU 1301 detects the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining ST number is a predetermined number (10 times) or more. (Step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is less than the predetermined number (10 times), the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not ST recovery has been confirmed (it has been decided to shift to the jackpot gaming state) (step S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that ST recovery is confirmed if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the currently being performed special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot. (it has been decided to move to a jackpot gaming state). As described above, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability flag is set to ON (see FIG. 125), and the variable probability mode is returned (ST is recovered). However, if the number of jackpot gaming states that have been executed since the first hit reaches a predetermined number (5 times) by executing the jackpot gaming state (reaching the limiter), the game will not return to the variable probability mode. , transition to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that ST recovery has not been determined.

In step S9502, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, or in step S9504, ST recovery has not been determined (Jackpot game state If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the drum fluctuation effect pattern is a losing pattern (step S9505). As loss patterns, there are provided a total loss pattern and a partial loss pattern. The all lose pattern is a drum fluctuation performance pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R. In the partial loss pattern, two of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are the same symbol, and the remaining symbol is a symbol different from the two symbols. This is a drum fluctuation effect pattern in which the is displayed in a stopped state.

As an all-lose pattern, for example, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A pattern in which a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided. As a partial loss pattern, for example, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. For example, a "watermelon" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided.

In the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 selects one losing pattern from among the plurality of loss patterns (the plurality of all loss patterns and the plurality of partial loss patterns) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. This is determined as the pattern of the drum fluctuation performance performed during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current gate passage. After executing the process in step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9503 that the number of remaining STs is the predetermined number (10 times) or more, or if it is determined in step S9504 that ST recovery has been determined (it has been determined to transition to a jackpot gaming state) If so, the sub CPU 1301 determines the drum fluctuation effect pattern as the winning pattern (step S9506). The winning pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which all the same symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R. Examples of winning patterns include, for example, a pattern in which "bell" symbols are stopped and displayed for the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R, a pattern in which "watermelon" symbols are all stopped and displayed, and all. A plurality of patterns are provided, such as a pattern in which the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed. In the process of step S9506, the sub CPU 1301 selects one winning pattern from among the plurality of winning patterns during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current gate passage by performing a lottery based on random numbers. This is determined as a pattern for the drum variation performance.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a loss length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the loss length variable look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9508). If it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the loss length change look-ahead flag on (step S9509). As a result, in the subsequent drum variation performance, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation has been determined (the loss length variation look-ahead performance is performed) (see FIG. 197). The loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to OFF when the normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the current gate passage starts.

If it is determined in step S9508 that the loss length variable look-ahead lottery has not been won, or after executing the process in step S9509, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation effect>
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of the drum fluctuation performance according to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The process at the start of drum fluctuation performance shown in FIG. 197 is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 to determine the performance mode (FIG. This is the process performed in step S504). In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts in the variable display start process of the normal symbol (see step S293 in FIG. 43). Ru.

In the process at the start of the drum fluctuation performance, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the current performance mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 129(a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the performance mode is stored in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the current performance mode by referring to the performance mode flag storage area. Can be done.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the current performance mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current performance mode is the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the drum fluctuation performance pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is a loss pattern (steps in FIG. 196). (see S9505) (step S9522).

If it is determined that the drum fluctuation performance pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is not a losing pattern, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drum fluctuation performance pattern determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is a losing pattern, the sub CPU 1301 sets the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 196). ) is set on (step S9523).

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 changes the drum variation effect pattern to the look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the partial loss pattern described above.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 determines the random number value if all the drum fluctuation effect patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 196) determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs are loss patterns. By conducting a lottery based on the above, one partial loss pattern is selected from among the plurality of partial loss patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during this normal symbol change is applied to the selected partial loss pattern. Replace with pattern. In addition, if the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passing corresponding to the current normal symbol fluctuation occurs is a partial losing pattern, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform such replacement processing and replaces the pattern that has already been determined. Maintain the drum fluctuation performance pattern. After executing the process in step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum variation production>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. FIGS. 199 to 201 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the drum fluctuation effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, up to four pieces of starting information for normal symbols (random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits or random numbers for determining a normal symbol variation pattern) are retained. In Figure 198(a), there are three reserved balls in a situation where one normal symbol variation is being performed, 500ms is determined as the variation time of the current normal symbol variation, and the first reserved ball 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, and 500ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the third reserved ball. This shows a state where 500 ms is determined as the variation time of symbol variation.

In FIG. 198(b), after the state shown in FIG. 198(a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 while the normal symbol variation is being performed, and the normal lottery ( This shows a state in which 600000 ms has been determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 4th reserved ball). FIG. 198(c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(b) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(c) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(d) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(e) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (600000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 199(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 199(b) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 199(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, it is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

FIG. 199(c) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 199(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(c) being 500 ms, in FIG. 199(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 199(e), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(d). FIG. 199(f) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(d) being 500 ms, in FIG. 199(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 199(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(e). FIG. 199(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(e) being 500 ms, in FIG. 199(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

In FIG. 199(i), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 199(j) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(i) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(f) is 600,000 ms, in FIG. 199(j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 199(k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

As described above, one drum fluctuation performance includes the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol. It is configured by the stop display of 9202R. The variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation, continues for 500 ms, and each drum symbol 9202 stops at the same time. Here, if the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500ms, so the stop timing of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is as follows. It matches the stop timing of normal symbols.

Further, the stop display of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is performed for 1500 ms. Therefore, after 1500 ms has passed since the fluctuations of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R have stopped in the first drum fluctuation performance, it is possible to start the fluctuation display of the next drum fluctuation performance. be. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal symbol, the time from the end of the normal symbol variation (after the normal symbol stops) to the end of the release of the normal electric accessory 1146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol variation after 1500 ms has passed since the normal symbol stopped in one normal symbol variation. This makes it possible to match the cycle of the drum variation effect with the cycle of normal symbol variation.

FIG. 199 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, but the player does not win the loss length variation pre-read lottery. On the other hand, FIG. 200 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, and the winning lottery for the loss length variation is won.

FIG. 200(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 200(b) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 200(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 200(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, the display is stopped in a losing pattern.

FIG. 200(c) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 200(d) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 200(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(c) is 500 ms and the loss length fluctuation pre-read lottery is won, in FIG. 200(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol A part of the symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 200(e), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(d). FIG. 200(f) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 200(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(d) is 500 ms and the loss length fluctuation pre-read lottery is won, in FIG. 200(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol A part of the symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 200(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(e). FIG. 200(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 200(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(e) is 500 ms and that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has been won, in FIG. 200(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 200(i), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 200(j) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 200(i) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation time shown in FIG. 198(f) being 600,000 ms, in FIG. 200(j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 200(k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 200, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed on the left drum before they are stopped and displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 200(j)). The drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a losing pattern (see FIG. 200(d), FIG. 200(f), and FIG. 200(h)), This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation has been determined (the normal symbol loss length variation has been won). In addition, even if the normal symbol loss length variation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be stopped and displayed as a partial loss pattern ( (See step S9505 in FIG. 196). If a partial loss pattern appears even though the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the stop display of the partial loss pattern can be said to be a fake performance.

Above, an example has been described in which some losing patterns are stopped and displayed as a loss length variation look-ahead effect. The loss length variation look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, a loss length change look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 201 may be adopted.

FIG. 201(a) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 201(b) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 201(a) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b) is 500 ms, in FIG. 201(b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, it is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern.

FIG. 201(c) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 201(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(c) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(c) being 500 ms, in FIG. 201(d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lose patterns. It is displayed stopped at.

FIG. 201(e) shows how a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the states shown in FIGS. 198(d) and (e). As described above, the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R is normally performed for 500 ms. On the other hand, the variable display shown in FIG. 201(e) is performed for 4500 ms. FIG. 201(f) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(e) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 198(d) and (e) is 500 ms, in FIG. 201(f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R However, the display is stopped in a losing pattern.

In FIG. 201(g), a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 201(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(g) has ended and the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(f) being 600,000 ms, in FIG. 201(h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a winning pattern. It is displayed stopped at. In FIG. 201(i), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

In the example shown in FIG. 201, one drum fluctuation effect is performed while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(d) and the normal symbol fluctuation (two normal symbol fluctuations) shown in FIG. 198(e) are performed. It is said that it will be done. This suggests that you have won the normal symbol loss length variation. In this way, the loss length variation look-ahead performance may be configured such that one drum variation performance is performed while a plurality of normal symbol fluctuations are performed. In addition, it is desirable that such a drum fluctuation performance that is longer than usual (long-time drum fluctuation performance) be performed when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won. It may also be done in some cases. In a form where a long drum variation effect can be performed in both cases where the normal symbol loss length variation is won and when the normal symbol loss length variation is not won, the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is preferable to configure the system so that when the player is playing, the long-duration drum variation effect can be performed with a higher probability than when the normal symbol loss length variation is not won.

As described above, in FIGS. 199 to 201, a gate passage occurs in a situation where the remaining ST number is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage corresponds to the normal symbol loss length variation. An example in which a pattern has been determined has been explained. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern. On the other hand, a gate passage occurs in a situation where the number of remaining STs is less than a predetermined number (10 times), and a pattern corresponding to a normal symbol loss length variation is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a losing pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 196).

Normal symbol loss length fluctuations are performed over a long period of time (600,000ms), so if the normal symbol loss length fluctuations occur after the remaining number of STs decreases, the normal symbol loss length fluctuations occur while the normal symbol loss length fluctuations are being performed. Then, the probability variable mode (probability variable gaming state) ends. When the variable probability game state ends, if the result of the second special lottery is a small win, the variation time of the second special symbol will be very long (see Fig. 126), so the game ball is placed in the small win big prize opening 1151. It becomes almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, the significance of winning the normal symbol loss length variation is lost, so we refrain from making the winning pattern appear.

Although the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation is described as being 600000 ms, it is not limited to this example. For example, multiple fluctuation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are set as fluctuation times for normal symbol loss length fluctuations. It may also be possible to do so. In this case, the remaining number of STs for which a winning pattern can appear may be varied depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. For example, if T1 seconds (e.g., 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (e.g., 120 seconds) (T1<T2) are provided as the fluctuation times of normal symbol loss length fluctuations, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T1 seconds When it is determined, a winning pattern appears on the condition that the remaining number of STs is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, while when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T2 seconds is determined, the remaining number of STs is N2 times (for example, 10 times) or more. For example, a winning pattern may be made to appear on the condition that the winning pattern is 20 times or more (N1<N2).

Further, the aspect of the winning pattern may be changed depending on the remaining number of STs when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. For example, if the remaining number of STs is 40 or more when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. If the number of remaining STs is 20 or more and less than 40, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and if the number of remaining STs is less than 20 when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. In this case, a “bell” symbol may be stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the normal symbol variation starts. The start timing of the variable display of the drum symbol 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variable display of the drum symbol 9202 may be started during normal symbol variation. For example, the variable display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be started from the point in time when 1000 ms has elapsed since the normal symbol variation was started. In this case, for example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner from 1000 ms to 1500 ms after the start of one normal symbol variation. , the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R stop from the time when 1500 ms has passed since the start of the normal symbol variation to the time when 1000 ms has passed since the next normal symbol variation has started. It is possible to configure so that the display is performed.

In this way, by performing the variable display and stop display of the drum symbol 9202 so as to span two normal symbol variations, for example, while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(e) is being performed ( For example, after 1500 ms have passed since the start of the normal symbol variation), the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern (see FIG. 199(j)). becomes possible. As a result, the stop display shown in Figure 199 (j) will be performed before the normal symbol loss length variation shown in Figure 198 (f) starts, and as a result, the normal symbol loss length variation will start. Immediately after that, an image as shown in FIG. 199(k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) may end before the normal symbol loss length variation starts, or at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length variation.

In addition, the above description has been made assuming that after the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) is performed, an image as shown in FIG. 199(k) is displayed, and then or at the same time, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts. When the normal symbol loss length variation starts, it may be configured so that either the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) or the image display as shown in FIG. 199(k) is not performed. However, the configuration may be such that neither display is performed. In addition, instead of (or in addition to) the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) and the image display shown in FIG. 199(k), small symbols are displayed to reduce the normal symbol loss length. It may be configured to indicate that a fluctuation has started.

<Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion effect>
202 and 203 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance.

As explained above, when normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts in the probability variation mode (see FIG. 129(a)), the transition to the first bonus mode occurs. . In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion effect is performed. In the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time suggestion performance, a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 1007. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is an image that shows the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is suggested through the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image. .

In FIG. 202(a), a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the display device 1007. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is displayed after the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a winning pattern (see FIG. 199(j)). Displayed when the display has finished. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 199(k)) corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to the first bonus mode). In this example, as the normal symbol loss length variation of 600000 ms has started, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 202(a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is changed to normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b→normal symbol loss length fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 202(b) to (j). Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation The remaining time image 9210h→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210i→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j, and the images are gradually switched. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a to 9210j are each sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the number indicated by the image decreases over time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a to 9210j have different color densities, and the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j As the number indicated by the image changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. It's becoming. The color of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j has become considerably lighter, and after the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image disappears. There is.

Above, we have explained an example in which the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode, but the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. .

In the first bonus mode, a battle performance may be performed during the first bonus mode as a performance suggesting the possibility that the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot. In the battle performance during the first bonus mode, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the display device 1007. When an ally character defeats an enemy character in such a battle performance during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where there is a relatively high expectation that the result of the second special lottery will be a jackpot.

In FIG. 203(a), a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211a is displayed on the display device 1007. In this example, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211a corresponds to the fact that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the time when the friendly character defeats the enemy character in the battle performance during the first bonus mode is approximately 30000 ms. is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 203(a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is changed to normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → normal symbol loss length fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 203(b) to (j). Remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation The remaining time image 9211h→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211i→the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j, and are gradually switched. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9211a to 9211j are each sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the number indicated by the image decreases over time.

Similar to the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9210a to 9210j, although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color densities; Long variation remaining time image 9211a → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211b → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss Long variation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss long variation remaining time image 9211j, and the image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j has become considerably lighter, and after the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image disappears. There is.

Note that the number shown by the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image does not necessarily strictly correspond to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. Normal symbol loss length variation remaining time images include multiple remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds). , and 600 seconds) are provided. When the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image is displayed, the image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the relevant time is selected, and the selected normal symbol loss length is displayed. A variable remaining time image is displayed. The normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 202 is a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 203 corresponds to 30 seconds. This is a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image as explained above is displayed on the display device 1007, the drum variation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum symbol 9202R is not displayed on the display device 1007).

<1st bonus mode jackpot processing>
FIG. 204 is a flowchart illustrating the jackpot processing during the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The processing at the time of jackpot in the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 53)). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode that is normally transitioned to when the symbol loss length starts to fluctuate. In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts by receiving the jackpot start command.

In the first bonus mode jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes prize ball number counter addition processing (step S9601). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 207.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the production mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that is transitioned to when the start condition for the jackpot game state is satisfied in the probability variable mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in the production mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of 2nd bonus mode>
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 205 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when the jackpot game state ends in the second bonus mode. . In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state ends by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 1200 when the jackpot flag is cleared, for example, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether the limiter number of times has been reached based on the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the number of times the jackpot game state has been executed since the first win is a predetermined number (5 times) (the jackpot game state to be ended this time is the fifth jackpot after the first win (including the first win)). (in a gaming state).

If it is determined that the limiter count has not been reached based on the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length is being changed (the normal symbol loss length is currently being changed). A judgment is made (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the normal symbol variation has expired after the normal symbol variation display related to the normal symbol loss length variation has started. The sub CPU 1301 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the above-mentioned normal symbol variation start command. In addition, since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 128), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 1301 It is possible to recognize the variation time of the pattern. While the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. The remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed at a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the normal symbol loss length is being varied when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is greater than 0.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the performance mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the performance mode from the second bonus mode to the probability variable mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the pending normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 during the jackpot game state, the normal lottery is held (the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined) in the same way as during the non-jackpot game state. It is said that The normal symbol variation corresponding to passing through the gate may be performed during the jackpot game state, or may be performed after the jackpot game state ends.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the pending special symbol variations is a jackpot.

After executing the process of step S9623, if it is determined in step S9625 that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, or if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in step S9626, the sub CPU 1301 determines the number of prize balls. Counter addition processing is executed (step S9627). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 207. After executing the process in step S9627, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9621 that the current jackpot game state has reached the limiter count, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the performance mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the normal mode in a production mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process in step S9628, the sub CPU 1301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9629). The bonus mode result display process will be explained later using FIG. 208. After executing the process in step S9629, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 206 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the first bonus mode. It is. As mentioned above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 1300, and the sub-control circuit 1300 controls the normal symbol loss length variation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length variation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that at least one of the pending normal symbol variations has a variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the pending special symbol variations is a jackpot.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes prize ball number counter addition processing (step S9643 ). The prize ball number counter addition process will be explained later using FIG. 207.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9644). The bonus mode result display process will be explained later using FIG. 208.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the production mode from the first bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in a performance mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Prize ball number counter addition process>
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing prize ball number counter addition processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The prize ball counter addition process shown in FIG. 207 is a process at the time of jackpot during the first bonus mode (see step S9601 in FIG. 204), a process at the end of the second bonus mode (see step S9627 in FIG. 205), or a process at the end of the second bonus mode (see step S9627 in FIG. 205). This is the process performed in the mode end process (see step S9643 in FIG. 205).

In the prize ball counter addition process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether the extra game flag is set on (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, when transitioning from the variable rate mode to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and staying in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode ends, There is. In this case, it is assumed that the bonus mode continues (consecutive games). Hereinafter, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode to which the game first shifts from the variable probability mode will be referred to as the initial game. Furthermore, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode in which the player continues to stay after the end of the initial game will be referred to as an extra game.

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set on, the sub CPU 1301 sets an initial game prize ball counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode is managed in the work RAM 1303 at any time. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 1301 stores the total number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 1303 as the value of the initial game prize ball counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag on (step S9663).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the extra game flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 adds the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game) to the value of the extra game prize ball counter. The total number of game balls paid out during the game is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 1303. In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 1301 adds the game balls paid out during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode) to the value of the extra game prize ball counter stored in the work RAM 1303. The value obtained by adding the total number of is stored in the work RAM 1303 as the value of a new extra game prize ball counter.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a bonus mode result display process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 208 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 205) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 206). be.

In the bonus mode result display process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 207) is set on (step S9681).

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 1301 calculates the total number of game balls ( The value of the initial game prize ball counter) is displayed on the display device 1007 (step S9682).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the extra game flag is set on, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display the total value of the initial game award ball number counter value and the value of the extra game award ball number counter ( Step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out from the transition from the fixed variable mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive game section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag to OFF (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the performance processing at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 205 that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. This is done by

In the performance processing at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. can do.

If it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 sets performance data for returning to the probability variation mode (step S9702). The effect data for returning to the variable probability mode is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating returning to the variable probability mode (return effect to the variable probability mode), and is stored in the program ROM 1302. By executing the process of step S9702, a variable probability mode return effect is performed. For example, a variable probability mode return image (an image indicating returning to variable probability mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 sets performance data for entering the extra game (step S9703). The extra game entry effect data is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating entering an extra game (extra game entry effect), and is stored in the program ROM 1302. By executing the process of step S9703, an extra game entry effect is performed. For example, an extra game entry image (an image indicating entry into an extra game) is displayed on the display device 1007.

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that when the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 may proceed to the process of step S9625 in FIG. 205. In addition, if it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 205 that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 1301 uses the same production data for returning to the probability variable mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). Performance data (different from the performance data) may be set, or performance data different from the performance data for returning to the fixed variable mode (different from performance data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<Processing during 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing processing during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 210 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 at a predetermined timing in the performance mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) in the first bonus mode. For example, the process during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol variation starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. can do.

If it is determined that the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 executes the process (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9722). The process (I) during the first bonus mode will be explained later using FIG. 211.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that at least one of the pending normal symbol variations has a variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode process (II) (step S9724). The first bonus mode process (II) will be explained later using FIG. 212.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode process (III) (step S9725). The first bonus mode process (III) will be explained later using FIG. 213.

After executing the processing in step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (I)>
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the process (I) during the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (I) shown in FIG. 211 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9722 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the performance (A) during the first bonus mode (step S9743). Performance (A) in the first bonus mode is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, and the jackpot has been won in the first bonus mode. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 1301 executes a first bonus mode end promotion lottery, and when the lottery is won, causes the display device 1007 to display a first bonus mode end promotion image. The first bonus mode termination promotion image is an image that promotes termination of the first bonus mode. After executing the process in step S9743, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (B) (step S9744). Performance (B) in the 1st bonus mode is when, in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 or more, and the player has not won a jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9744, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9741 that the remaining number of STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (C) (step S9746). The performance (C) in the 1st bonus mode is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining number of STs is less than 5, and the player wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the ST recovery is confirmed although the ST count is running low. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9746, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (D) (step S9747). The first bonus mode performance (D) is when the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is 15 seconds or more in the first bonus mode, the remaining number of STs is less than 5, and the player has not won a jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9747, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (II)>
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode process (II) related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (II) shown in FIG. 212 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9724 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (II), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (E) (step S9763). Performance (E) during the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining number of STs is 5. This is the performance that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9763, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (F) (step S9764). Performance (F) in the 1st bonus mode is when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds in the 1st bonus mode, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is 5. This is the performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9764, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9761 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (G) (step S9766). In the first bonus mode performance (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is less than 5, and This is a performance that is performed when a jackpot has been won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs remaining is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9766, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (H) (step S9767). The performance (H) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, and the remaining number of STs is 5. This is an effect that is performed when the winning amount is less than 1, and the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (D), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9767, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (III)>
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode process (III) related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (III) shown in FIG. 213 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9725 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode process (III), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated every time a special symbol variation is performed.

If it is determined that the remaining number of STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (I) (step S9783). Performance (I) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 or more. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is short, but that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (J) (step S9784). The performance (J) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 or more. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is short, but that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (I) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9781 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations to be performed this time and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. I judge that.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (K) (step S9786). In the first bonus mode performance (K), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, the number of remaining STs is less than 5, and it is a jackpot. This is a performance that will be performed if the winner is selected. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs remaining is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode performance (L) (step S9787). The performance (L) in the 1st bonus mode means that in the 1st bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length variation is won, and the number of remaining STs is less than 5. This is a performance that is performed when the jackpot has not been won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the number of STs remaining is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Moreover, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

After executing the process of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 1301 extends the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets the variation time (for example, 600000 ms) of the winning normal symbol variation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. The winning normal symbol variation is the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol loss length variation among the pending normal symbol variations. In addition, if a plurality of winning ordinary symbol variations are included in the pending ordinary symbol variations, the sub CPU 1301 selects the winning ordinary symbol variation that is to start changing first among the plurality of winning ordinary symbol variations. Set the fluctuation time as the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation set in this way is not updated by the timer update process until the winning normal symbol variation starts, and is subtracted after the start of the winning normal symbol variation.

After executing the process in step S9788, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. As a result, from now on, a performance will be performed according to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation. In other words, when the production content is determined, it is treated as if the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation has been extended. For example, in this second special symbol variation, any of the effects (I) to (L) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 213 is On the other hand, in the next second special symbol variation, the process of step S9722 in FIG. 210 is performed, and any of the effects (A) to (D) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 211 is performed. It turns out.

The processing during the first bonus mode described above using FIGS. 210 to 213 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or may be performed in the first bonus mode as an extra game (see FIG. 207). mode, or both of these first bonus modes. As explained above, in the first bonus mode, a plurality of information including the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation, whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the number of remaining STs, and whether or not the jackpot has been won. A performance can be performed according to one or more arbitrary elements among the elements.

In addition, in the first bonus mode, the above-mentioned drum fluctuation performance may be performed as a performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a winning pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). If the result of the jackpot determination regarding one special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). It may also be done. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination regarding one special symbol variation is a jackpot, a look-ahead performance (for example, a performance similar to the loss length variation look-ahead performance described above) is performed before the special symbol fluctuation starts. It is also possible to be exposed. As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or may be performed depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 5 or more and when it is less than 5). It is also possible that different effects may be performed (in some cases).

Further, when a drum fluctuation performance is performed as a performance corresponding to a special symbol variation, a plurality of drum fluctuation performances may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a drum variation performance may be performed a plurality of times as a performance suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. Furthermore, before one special symbol variation is started, a drum variation performance may be performed a plurality of times as a performance that suggests the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. One drum fluctuation effect is completed in about 2 seconds as described above, and it is possible to configure the drum fluctuation effect to be repeated a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST number adjustment process>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the remaining ST number adjustment process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The above description has been made assuming that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 1007 in the variable probability mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 195). The remaining ST number image 9203 may indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggesting the remaining ST number). In the following description, it is assumed that the remaining ST number image 9203 indicates the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 214 is a process that is performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST number adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST number adjustment process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number (step S9801). The value of the actual remaining ST number is an accurate value of the remaining ST number, and as explained above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a special symbol variation is performed. The value of the number of remaining STs for display is an approximate value of the number of remaining STs, and the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST number for display. The value of the actual remaining ST number and the value of the remaining ST number for display are each stored in the work RAM 1303.

If it is determined that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number, the sub CPU 1301 sets the value of the actual remaining ST number for the value of the remaining ST number for display (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the remaining ST number image 9203 is corrected to show the correct value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length variation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length variation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. .

If it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the display remaining ST count and the actual remaining ST count, or after executing the process of step S9802, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 214. For example, in normal times, the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) passes, but the value of the remaining ST count for display is actually the remaining ST count. If it is larger (smaller) than the number of times, it is possible to configure the update frequency to be increased (decreased) or to increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. .

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the number of remaining STs for display according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The above description has been made assuming that the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated every time the drum variation effect is performed (when the drum symbol 9202 starts to vary), or the value of the number of STs remaining for display may be updated each time the drum variation effect is performed (the first special symbol variation). The value of the number of remaining STs for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation starts. Below, an example will be described in which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts.

The display remaining ST count update process shown in FIG. 215 is performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode after a game ball wins in the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, when a special symbol change related to the starting winning starts, This is a process performed by the control circuit 1300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the display remaining ST count update process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot (step S9821). If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot (see FIG. 125) (step S9822). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the jackpot determination result and the type of jackpot, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 1301 It is possible to make such judgments.

If it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol change is not a jackpot (it is a loss or a small hit), or if it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is not a 10R jackpot (it is a 2R jackpot) If so, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the error in the number of STs remaining for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error in the number of remaining STs for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the number of remaining STs for display from the value of the actual number of remaining STs. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 50 is set as the value of the actual remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error in the remaining number of STs for display is 10.

If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9824). Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether the error in the number of remaining STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 adds 1 to the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines which process to perform by performing a lottery: adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. It is also possible to decide. After executing the process in step S9826, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined that the error in the number of remaining STs for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 2 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 3 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). Here, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 10R jackpot is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 1301 may subtract 1 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 1303 every 5 seconds while the special symbol variation is being performed (3 subtractions in total). . After executing the process in step S9827, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In addition, the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 2R jackpot (see Figure 125) and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is 10 seconds. It has become. In addition, the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the small win and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening of the small win large prize opening 1151 is 5 seconds. Further, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to a loss is 5 seconds. Furthermore, when a jackpot game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST number for display may or may not be reset, but in the form in which the remaining ST number for display update processing shown in FIG. 215 is performed. , it is preferable to configure it so that it is not reset (after the end of the second bonus mode, the value of the number of remaining STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

The above description has been made on the assumption that the remaining ST number is suggested by the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203. In this embodiment, instead of the remaining ST number image 9203, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 1007 as an image suggesting the remaining ST number. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to a character such as "A", "B", "C", "D", etc., and the remaining ST number is suggested by the character (rank). For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST count for display managed in the process of FIG. 215, and if the remaining ST count for display is 60 or more, the rank image is " is displayed, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 40 or more and less than 60, "B" is displayed as the rank image, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 20 or more and less than 40, "B" is displayed as the rank image. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which "C" is displayed and "D" is displayed as the rank image when the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20. When the number of remaining STs for display becomes less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

In addition, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed so that when the value of the actual remaining ST number becomes a predetermined value (for example, 5), the value of the remaining ST number for display always becomes a specific value (for example, 0). It is also possible to control the update (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, the remaining ST count for display is set to 100, and then each time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining ST count for display is increased by 5. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, control is performed so that the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if a special symbol change is performed. . As a result, when the value of the actual remaining ST number becomes 11 and the value of the remaining ST number for display becomes 30, each time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining number of ST for display is The number of STs is subtracted by 5, and when the value of the actual number of remaining STs reaches 5, the value of the remaining number of STs for display becomes 0. It is possible to adopt such a configuration. Note that if the value of the actual remaining ST count is less than a predetermined value (for example, 5) (if the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes a specific value (for example, 0)), the actual remaining ST count will be It is also possible to shift to a mode in which a different background is displayed than when the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 5).

In addition, although it has been explained above that the number of remaining STs for display (rank) is updated based on the result of jackpot determination or the type of jackpot, the number of ST remaining for display (rank) is updated based on the result of normal lottery or the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern. The remaining ST count (rank) may be configured to be updated. For example, if you have won the normal symbol loss length variation, you can make the value subtracted or added in one update larger (smaller) compared to the case where you have not won the normal symbol loss length variation. good. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be made larger (smaller) than when the result of the jackpot judgment is not a jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to suggest whether or not a jackpot has been won or whether a normal symbol loss length variation has been won or not through the remaining ST count image 9203 and the rank image.

<Pre-reading effect processing of common map in fixed variable mode>
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern pre-reading performance processing in the variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal pattern pre-reading production process in the probability variable mode shown in FIG. 216 is performed by the sub control circuit when a special symbol variation related to the starting prize starts after a game ball wins in the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B in the variable probability mode. 1300 in the presentation mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol production start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the normal pattern pre-reading effect processing in the variable probability mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal pattern pre-reading lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the general symbol pre-read lottery has been won (step S9842). If it is determined that the player has not won the general map pre-read lottery, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the general symbol pre-read lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot (step S9843). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 1301 can make the determination. is possible.

If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that at least one of the pending normal symbol variations has a variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (A) (step S9845). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (A) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol variation is a jackpot, and you win the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests winning both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation. The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process in step S9845, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (B) (step S9846). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (B) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed variation mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol variation is a jackpot, and you have not won the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the player has won the jackpot. The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9846, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is a small hit ( Step S9847). Since the special symbol production start command sent from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, by receiving the special symbol production start command, the sub CPU 1301 can make the determination. is possible.

If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the regular symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that at least one of the pending normal symbol variations has a variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (C) (step S9849). In the normal pattern look-ahead effect (C), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot determination regarding this special symbol variation is a small hit, and the player wins the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that both the small win and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary figure pre-read effects (A) to (B). After executing the process in step S9849, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (D) (step S9850). In the normal symbol pre-reading performance (D), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the common symbol pre-read lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment regarding this special symbol variation is a small hit, and the player does not win the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the small win has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is not a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that at least one of the pending normal symbol variations has a variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). If so, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won.

If it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (E) (step S9852). The normal pattern look-ahead performance (E) is in the fixed variation mode, when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol change is a loss, and you win the normal symbol loss length change. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (D). After executing the process in step S9852, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol pre-read effect (F) (step S9853). The normal pattern look-ahead effect (F) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed variation mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special symbol variation is a loss, and you have not won the normal symbol loss length variation. This is a performance that takes place on In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image that suggests that neither a jackpot or small hit nor a normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the ordinary symbol pre-read effects (A) to (E). After executing the process in step S9853, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In the Fuu-zu pre-reading performance (A), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (C), and Fu-zu pre-reading performance (E), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (B), Fu-zu pre-reading performance (D), and Fu-zu pre-reading performance A specific image (an image that suggests winning the normal symbol loss length variation) is displayed with a higher probability than in (F). As a result, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation was won during the special symbol variation. Images that can be displayed in the normal pattern look-ahead effect (A), the normal pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the normal pattern look-ahead effect (E) include images that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal pattern loss length variation winning). It is also possible to provide an image that confirms what has happened.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds) are used as the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation. , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds). In this case, different images are displayed depending on the fluctuation time of the winning ordinary symbol loss length variation in the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (A), the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (C), and the ordinary symbol pre-reading effect (E). It may also be displayed on the device 1007.

In addition, although the explanation has been made above on the assumption that the normal/universal symbol pre-read effect processing in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. It may also be a thing.

<Special figure pre-reading production processing in fixed change mode>
FIG. 217 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol pre-read performance processing in the variable probability mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol pre-reading performance processing in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. 217 is performed by the sub control circuit 1300 when the game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 in the variable probability mode, and when the normal symbol variation related to passing through the gate starts. This is a process performed in the determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts in the variable display start process of the normal symbol (see step S293 in FIG. 43). Ru.

In the special symbol pre-reading performance process in variable probability mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special symbol pre-reading lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the special symbol pre-read lottery has been won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure pre-read lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pre-read lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the current variation pattern of the normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). It is determined whether or not (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 128), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 1301 can make the determination. It is possible.

If it is determined that the current variation pattern of the normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (A) (step S9865). In the special pattern look-ahead effect (A), in the fixed variation mode, the player wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery, the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the player wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 in FIG. 216) that suggests winning both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation. The information is displayed on the device 1007. The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process in step S9865, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9864 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (B) (step S9866). The special pattern look-ahead effect (B) is a player who wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed-variable mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the current normal symbol fluctuation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the player has not won the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays on the display device 1007 an image that suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 216). let The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9866, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9863 that the current variation pattern of normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination regarding at least one of the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a jackpot.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (C) (step S9868). The special pattern look-ahead effect (C) is in the fixed variation mode, when the player wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and he wins the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 in FIG. 216). The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9868, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9867 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special symbol pre-read effect (D) (step S9869). The special pattern look-ahead effect (D) is a player who wins the special pattern look-ahead lottery in the fixed variation mode, and the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the player has not won the jackpot. This is a performance performed on occasion. In the process of step S9869, for example, the sub CPU 1301 generates an image that suggests that neither the jackpot nor the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 216). is displayed on the display device 1007. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process in step S9869, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In the special figure pre-reading effect (A) and the special figure pre-reading effect (C), compared to the special figure pre-reading effect (B) and the special figure pre-reading effect (D), there is a higher probability that a specific image (that you have won the jackpot) (images that suggest the following) are displayed. This suggests that a jackpot has been won during normal symbol fluctuations. As the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effect (A) and the special figure pre-reading effect (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (an image that confirms that a jackpot has been won) may be provided. In addition, in special figure pre-reading performances (A) to (D), depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, if the number of remaining STs is 10 or more, if it is 5 or more but less than 10, and 5) It may also be configured such that different images are displayed depending on whether the number is less than or equal to the number of characters. Moreover, the special figure pre-read effects (A) to (D) may be configured so that the above-mentioned drum fluctuation effect is performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds) are used as the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation. , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds). In this case, in the special symbol pre-reading effect (A) and the special symbol pre-reading effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 1007 depending on the variation time of the winning normal symbol loss length variation.

In addition, although the above explanation has been made assuming that the special symbol pre-reading effect process in the variable probability mode shown in FIG. It may also be a thing.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, basically the effects corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (Fig. 199 (j) and ( k) will be performed, but if the jackpot has been won (for example, when the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, shortly after the normal symbol loss length variation (first bonus mode) starts, the jackpot gaming state (second bonus mode) is entered, and until the start of the jackpot gaming state, the "BONUS" ” may be suspended from being performed. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed as a losing pattern (despite winning the normal symbol losing length variation), or the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed as a losing pattern. The winning pattern may be stopped and displayed, but the winning notification performance (see FIG. 199(k)) may not be performed at that time. Thereafter, when transitioning to the jackpot game state, it is possible to perform a performance (win notification performance) to excite the start of "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion preview performance>
FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device on the first presentation stage. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion preview effect.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first production stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 (the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the " Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 1007. The "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are images imitating meters, respectively.

Specifically, the meter image 9301a for suggesting stopping the "bell" icon, the meter image 9301b for suggesting stopping the "watermelon" icon, and the meter image 9301c for suggesting stopping the "cherry" icon each have an initial display mode (meter is accumulated level 1 display mode (meter is filled to 1 level), level 2 display mode (meter is filled to 2 levels), and level MAX display mode (meter is full) ) can be displayed in any of the following formats.

The meter indicated by the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 accumulates according to the performance (icon stop suggestion preview performance) performed during the first performance stage. The icon stop suggestion preview performance shown in FIG. 218(b) is a performance that may occur when a special symbol variation is performed in the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The icon stop suggestion preview performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change. Note that the icon stop suggestion preview performance is a performance that can be performed only on the first performance stage.

Specifically, the performance corresponding to the performance number "171" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "172" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "173" is a performance in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "bell" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is more The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is displayed in a level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is displayed in a level 2 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the process will proceed to "pseudo 2".

The performance corresponding to the performance number "174" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "175" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "176" is a performance in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "174" to "176" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "watermelon" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the "Watermelon" The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is displayed in a level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b has a "Watermelon" ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the transition to "Pseudo 3" occurs.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "177" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level 1 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "178" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level 2 display mode. The performance corresponding to the performance number "179" is a performance in which the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is a level MAX display mode.

The performances corresponding to the performance numbers "177" to "179" are performances that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "cherry" icon will be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the "cherry" The icon is likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "Cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode. ” icon (stopped) is likely to be displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is determined that the transition to a predetermined super reach is made.

Basically, the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "179" are performed after a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, and when a special symbol change related to the starting prize is performed, the special It is performed as a performance to suggest to which stage the pseudo continuous performance performed during symbol fluctuation will progress. That is, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. Similarly, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "watermelon" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. In addition, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "cherry" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173", a pre-reading performance is performed after the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 and before the special symbol variation related to the starting prize starts. In some cases, the pre-reading performance may be performed as a performance to suggest to which stage the pseudo-continuous performance performed during the special symbol variation will progress. In this case, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation is based on the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the next special symbol variation (which is subject to pre-reading). This suggests that Therefore, in the look-ahead performance for the first starting prize, if the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a becomes the level MAX display mode, the pseudo In the continuous performance, it is confirmed that at least up to "Pseudo 2" will be transitioned.

<Icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 219 is performed when the current production stage is the first production stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 178). This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 130).

In the icon stop suggestion preview content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the sub variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a pre-read sub variation pattern (see FIG. 183).

If it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a pseudo continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9902). If it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the pseudo continuous effect will progress to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9903).

If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to “pseudo 3”, the sub CPU 1301 executes a drawing process for icon stop suggestion preview content for pseudo 3 (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 3". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "Pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c may change.

If it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect will not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process in step S9904, the sub CPU 1301 executes the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs the icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 2". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "Pseudo 2". As a result, in "pseudo 2", the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b may change.

If it is determined in step S9903 that a pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process in step S9905, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo 1 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and also performs an icon stop suggestion preview performance in "pseudo 1". If so, the content of the performance will be determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in "pseudo 1". As a result, in "Pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a may change.

If it is determined in step S9901 that a prefetch effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 executes a prefetch icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion preview performance in the prefetch performance by performing a lottery based on random numbers, and when performing the icon stop suggestion preview performance in the prefetch performance, Determine the content of the performance. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion preview performance performed in the pre-reading performance. As a result, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed in the look-ahead effect.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<The pending change production lottery process>
FIGS. 220 and 221 are flowcharts showing the pending change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first production stage, the held ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 1007. The held ball image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently being performed) special symbol variation (the held ball). Also, depending on the number of reserved special symbol variations, one or more of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d. image is displayed. The first held ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first held ball, the second held ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second held ball, and the third held ball image 9303c is an image corresponding to the first held ball. This is an image corresponding to the third held ball, and the fourth held ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth held ball.

In this embodiment, an effect that changes the color of the held ball image 9302 (the held change effect) is performed. The result of the jackpot determination regarding the current special symbol variation is suggested through the color of the reserved ball image 9302. The pending change performance is a performance that can occur when a special symbol change is performed on the first performance stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The pending change performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change. Note that the colors of the first held ball image 9303a, the second held ball image 9303b, the third held ball image 9303c, and the fourth held ball image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The pending change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is performed when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start time process (see FIG. 178). This process is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the stage preview content lottery process (see FIG. 130). Note that the pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the pending change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pending change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change performance (at what timing and how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. The content of the pending change performance is defined by a combination of pending change patterns. The pending change patterns include pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern (6), and pending change. A pattern (7), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Examples of combinations of pending change patterns include pending change pattern (1) and pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), and pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), and The combination of change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (7), pending change pattern (8), and a combination called pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern ( 6), a pending variation pattern (8), and a pending variation pattern (9). The combination of pending change patterns always includes the pending change pattern (9). Moreover, when the pending variation pattern (7) is included in a combination of pending variation patterns, the pending variation pattern (8) is also necessarily included in the combination. In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 1301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). The pending change pattern (1) changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous production or "no pseudo" production starts (when the current special symbol variation starts). It is a pattern that makes you

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous effect or the "no pseudo" effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of Thereby, at the start of the "pseudo 1", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a immediately before the current special symbol variation is started. When the color of the reserved ball image 9303 is changing due to the pre-read effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines the color change mode of the reserved ball image 9302 based on the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a.

If it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9923, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination (step S9924). The holding change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 1” stage in the pseudo continuous performance or the “no pseudo” performance. A combination including the pending variation pattern (2) can be selected only when a sub variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-reach mode has been determined in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo continuous presentation or the "no pseudo" presentation. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense at the "pseudo 1" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9924 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9923 when the process of step S9923 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9923 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9925, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination (step S9926). The holding change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 2", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9926 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9925 when the process of step S9925 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9925 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9924 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9927, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination (step S9928). The holding change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and a sub-variation pattern in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode in "pseudo 2" is determined. It has become.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense in the "pseudo 2" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9927 when the process of step S9927 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9927 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9926 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9929, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination (step S9930). The holding change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the "pseudo 3" stage.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of Thereby, at the start of the "pseudo 3", the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9930 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9929 when the process of step S9929 is performed. If yes, and the process of step S9929 is not performed, this is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9931, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination (step S9932). The holding change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the holding ball image 9302 when tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. A combination including the hold change pattern (6) is such that a pseudo continuous effect occurs, the pseudo continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode in "pseudo 3". It can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern has been determined.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when a tenpai occurs at the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo continuous performance. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when the ball becomes tense at the "pseudo 3" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9932 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9931 when the process of step S9931 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9931 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9930 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9933, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination (step S9934). The pending change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the pending ball image 9302 reaches its final color. . The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (7) can be, for example, the first half of the super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the held ball image 9302 reaches its final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where two more color changes remain. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9934 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9933 when the process of step S9933 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9933 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9932 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9935, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination (step S9936). The pending change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the pending ball image 9302 reaches its final color. . The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (8) may be, for example, the first half or the second half of the super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the held ball image 9302 reaches its final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where one more color change remains. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 that has been determined before the process of step S9936 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9935 when the process of step S9935 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9935 is not performed, it is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9934 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9937, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. It is determined whether the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination (step S9938). The hold change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the hold ball image 9302 to the final color. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, before the holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is performed, the color of the holding ball image 9302 is finally changed to which color by a lottery based on random numbers. (the final color of the held ball image 9302) has been determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 1301 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (9) is, for example, when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1", at the start of "pseudo 2", when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2", and when tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3". At the beginning of ``, when tenpai occurs in the ``pseudo 3'' stage, and during the first and second half of super reach.

If it is determined that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the pending change based on the pending change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 in order to change the color of the held ball image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 1301 selects "no color change", "flashing → blue", "blinking → green", "blue → green,” “blinking → purple,” “blue → purple,” “green → purple,” “flashing → red,” “blue → red,” “green → red,” or “purple → red.” Determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner, and the color of the held ball image 9302 is the same as that of the lottery performed before the held change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221. This will be the final color determined by the (original lottery). Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9938 is performed is the changed color determined by the process of step S9937 when the process of step S9937 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9937 is not performed, this is the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9936 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process in step S9939, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that if the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 1301 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. Good too. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 may display the held ball image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). If the color of the held ball image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the held ball image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the held change effect is a false effect.

<6th Specific Super Reach Medium Slot Game>
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the contents of the production block in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, in the second stage (see FIG. 129(a)), the eighth preview performance (see FIG. 185) may be performed, and when the eighth preview performance is performed, the sixth stage There is a possibility that it will develop into a specific super reach. In the 6th specific super reach, a game (slot game during the 6th specific super reach) is played in which multiple types of icons are displayed in a variable manner in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007 and then stopped. . In the 6th specific super reach slot game, when the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), a predetermined super reach develops. The sixth specific super reach slot game is composed of a plurality of production blocks. FIG. 222 shows an example of the contents of the effect block.

In production block "1", an image corresponding to the explanation of the sixth specific super reach slot game is displayed on the display device 1007. In production block "2", an image (for example, an image showing a title of a predetermined super reach) indicating that the slot game was successful in the sixth specific super reach (development into a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 1007. will be displayed. In production block "3", an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (that the sixth specific super reach slot game ends) is displayed on the display device 1007.

In production block "4", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and an image that encourages the "additional" icons to be aligned is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "additional" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to performance block "4" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production block "5", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and an image that encourages the "additional" icons to be aligned is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007, "Additional" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "Additional" icons are aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "5" is performed, the value of the above-mentioned "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 184(b)) is added by a predetermined number, and the 6th specific super reach slot game continues. .

In production block "6", multiple types of icons are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007 in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the "mission" icons to be aligned is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "Mission" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to performance block "6" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production blocks "7" and "8", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and the "mission" icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds. After such an image is displayed on the display device 1007, "Mission" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "Mission" icons are aligned), and the user enters a predetermined mission. Thereafter, in production block "7" the mission fails, and in production block "8" the mission succeeds. If the production corresponding to production block "7" is performed, the slot game continues during the 6th specific super reach, and if the production corresponding to production block "8" is performed, the slot game continues during the specified super reach. develops into

In production block "9", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and an image that encourages the "cherry" icons to line up is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "cherry" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "9" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game continues. In the production block "10", multiple types of icons are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 8 seconds in three rows on the left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and an image that encourages the "cherry" icons to line up is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the performance corresponding to the performance block "10" is performed, a predetermined super reach is developed.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process shown in FIG. 223, in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 178), if the current production stage is the second production stage, the production number "153" is selected. ” or “154” is performed by the sub control circuit 1300 when it is determined that the effect corresponding to “154” will be performed. By performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the content of each production block will be determined.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the final production block (step S9941). In this process, if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 1301 determines production block "2" as the final production block. . On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 1301 determines performance block "3" as the final performance block.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the effect block at the stage immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, if production block "2" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 1301 selects the production block as the production block immediately before the final production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the production block "3" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 1301 selects production block "4" as the production block immediately before the final production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. ” or “6”.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets a new stock timer value by subtracting a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the production block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts. is stored in the work RAM 1303 as the value. The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game during the 6th specific super reach starts during this special symbol change. are doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to the effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "6". The time corresponding to production block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding missions) corresponding to production block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". Note that the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the value of the stock timer is greater than 0 (step S9944). If it is determined that the value of the stock timer is greater than 0, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the last effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 selects one of the production block "5", production block "7", and production block "9" as the last production block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Decide on the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the production block determined in step S9945 from the stock timer value stored in the work RAM 1303 as a new stock timer value. It is stored in the work RAM 1303. Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to production block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding missions) corresponding to production block "7". The time corresponding to the effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "9". Note that when the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds the value of the stock timer by a predetermined number (additional time). The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process in step S9946, the sub CPU 1301 moves the process to step S9944. If it is determined in step S9944 that the value of the stock timer is 0, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines production block "1" as the first production block. After executing the process in step S9947, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

By executing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process described above, the content of the sixth specific super reach slot game is determined. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the effect block "2" is determined in step S9941, the effect block "10" is determined in step S9942, the effect block "9" is determined in step S9945, and In the case where the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the production block "7" is further determined in step S9945, and the production block "1" is determined in step S9947, the production block "1" is determined in the sixth specific super reach. Order of block "1" → production block "7" → production block "5" → production block "9" → production block "10" → production block "2" (order determined in the 6th specific super reach content lottery process) (in the reverse order), the effects corresponding to each effect block will be performed.

<Effects and logo lamp on the LCD screen>
FIG. 224(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview presentation for the first presentation stage. FIG. 224(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage. 225 to 227 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, above the display device 1007), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As a performance using such a logo lamp, a logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage and a logo effect preview performance for the second performance stage may be performed.

The logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage shown in FIG. 224(a) is a performance that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the first performance stage. The logo effect preview performance for the first production stage can occur only on the first production stage. In addition, the logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change.

Although not shown, before the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "181" to "184" are performed, first, the decorative pattern becomes ten-pai 10 seconds after the start of variation. Thereafter, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "181" to "184", button images are displayed on the display device 1007, and operation of the performance button 1054 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image is displayed such that the effect is absorbed into the logo cover. Thereafter, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "181", nothing special happens and the performance ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner after a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Furthermore, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively.

In the performance corresponding to the performance number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which a predetermined word (for example, "CHANCE") lights up in white on the entire logo cover. On the back side of the logo cover, a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix (lattice), and by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light, any word can be formed.

The performance corresponding to the performance number "182" has a higher jackpot expectation compared to the performance corresponding to the performance number "181", and the performance corresponding to the performance number "183" has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the performance corresponding to the performance number "182". The expectation level of jackpot is high compared to the performance number "184", and the performance corresponding to the performance number "184" has the highest expectation level of jackpot.

The logo effect preview performance for the second production stage shown in FIG. 224(b) is a production that can occur when a special symbol variation is performed on the second production stage. The logo effect preview performance for the second production stage can occur only in the second production stage. In addition, the logo effect preview performance for the second performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other jackpot preview performances during one special symbol change.

In the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "191" to "193", after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate (see FIG. 225(a)), the screen (monitor) of the display device 1007 becomes an image display that shrinks. (See FIG. 225(b)). Then, the image is displayed in such a way that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the left (see Figure 225(c)), and multiple icons are displayed instead of the decorative pattern, and each icon lights up in turn. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 225(d)), a button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted (see FIG. 225(e)). Thereafter, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image indicating the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, "CHANCE" shown in FIG. 225(f)) is displayed on the display device 1007. "CHANCE" indicates the title of a production in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed into the logo cover (for example, the production shown in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that while the button image is displayed, a predetermined button valid time is set. If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, " CHANCE" is selected). On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, when "CHANCE" is selected) will be displayed at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends). screen).

Thereafter, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "191" to "193", a performance in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed into the logo cover (effect absorption performance) is performed. In the effect absorption production, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image is displayed as if the effect was absorbed into the logo cover. Thereafter, in the performance corresponding to the performance number "191", the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined manner, and an image corresponding to the failure of the effect absorption performance is displayed on the display device 1007. becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the performances corresponding to the performance numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Note that the predetermined effects may include multiple types of effects with different colors (such as a white effect and a red effect), and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the effect that appears. . After the logo lamp lights up, the decorative pattern becomes Tenpai. At this time, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the performance corresponding to the performance number "193". After that, the preview will be released after Tenpai is successful. As described above, in the preview after the tenpai is successful, a transitional effect corresponding to the development target super reach is performed (see FIG. 185(b)).

FIG. 226 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption performance in the performance corresponding to the performance number “192”. As shown in FIG. 226, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 226(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. The first effect image 9402 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 226(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed into the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "X" 9410L is formed (see FIG. 226(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 226(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed into the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 226(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 226(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Z" 9410R is formed (see FIG. 226(e)). Thereafter, the image is displayed such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 226(e)), and the decorative pattern 9001 becomes in the reach mode (see FIG. 226(f)).

FIG. 227 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption performance in the performance corresponding to the performance number “191”. As shown in FIG. 227, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 227(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. The first effect image 9402 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 227(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed into the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "X" 9410L is formed (see FIG. 227(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 227(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed into the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 227(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced in size (see FIG. 227(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, but the letter "Z" 9410R is not formed. After that, the logo lamp goes out (the character "X" 9410L and the character "Y" 9410C disappear), and an image is displayed in which the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see Figure 227(e)). , the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 227(f)).

As described above using FIGS. 226 and 227, in the logo effect preview presentation for the second presentation stage, a presentation is performed in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed into the logo cover (effect absorption presentation). Although not shown, a similar effect absorption performance is performed in the logo effect preview performance for the first performance stage. Effect absorption effect is a effect in which the image displayed near the logo cover becomes smaller or disappears, giving the appearance that the image is acting on the logo cover (being absorbed by the logo cover). It is.

In addition, in FIGS. 226 and 227, the first logo section 9401L, the second logo section 9401C, and the third logo section 9401R are divided (adjacent logo sections are not formed continuously, and there is a gap between them). Although the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be formed integrally. Particularly, when displaying an arbitrary word on the entire logo cover, such as the effect corresponding to the effect number "184," it is preferable that the entire logo cover is formed in one piece.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine as well, there is not only a possibility that the machine is controlled to the time-saving gaming state A after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but also shifts to the time-saving gaming state B when the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state B are satisfied. However, when the conditions for transition to the C time-saving game state are satisfied, the game shifts to the C time-saving game state.
[5-3. B Performance control related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
In a fifth pachinko gaming machine in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, in a gaming state where left-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode (for example, a normal gaming state), the sub CPU 1301 In the display device 1007, the display of the first display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is performed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is started. do not have. In addition, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the sub CPU 1301 displays the second While the display of the second display performance is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display of the first display performance is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Note that the display device 1007 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display performance that starts displaying in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, a display performance that is performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, This includes variable display of decorative patterns, display effects using characters, etc.). A symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which is displayed blinking in one corner of the display device 1007 regardless of the gaming state, is not included in the first display performance.

Similarly, the second display performance that starts displaying in conjunction with the variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, a display performance that is performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effects using characters, etc.) A symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, which is displayed blinking in one corner of the display device 1007 regardless of the gaming state, is not included in the second display performance.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is caused by the ceiling final variation. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one special symbol, the display effect may become unnatural and the interest may be reduced.

For example, at any timing from when the variable display of one special symbol starts as the final ceiling fluctuation until the variable display ends (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol starts), the B time-saving game state is activated. In the case of transition, a situation may occur in which the first display effect is performed on the display device 1007, while internally transitioning to the B time-saving game state. In particular, if the variable display of one special symbol starts as the final ceiling variation and the variable display of the other special symbol starts before this variable display ends, the first display effect to the second display effect The switch to can be unnatural.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the display performance performed when transitioning to the B time-saving game state in the final ceiling fluctuation is performed in a natural manner as described below, thereby making it possible to suppress the decline in interest. . Below, the effect control related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state performed by the sub CPU 1301 will be explained.

[5-3-1. B Performance control in normal pattern related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 228 is a time chart showing performance control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first normal pattern; 2 is a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in a normal pattern.

First, with reference mainly to FIG. 228(A) and supplementary reference to FIG. 229, the effect control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 229 is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 228(A), the variable display immediately before the final ceiling variation (hereinafter referred to as "pre-ceiling final variation") is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling variation is the first variable display. This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and the final variation of the ceiling. Note that the "liquid crystal effect" shown in FIG. 228 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 1007. In addition, "Special 1_ Loss fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_ Jackpot fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot. It shows the fluctuation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "Special 2_ Loss fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "Special 2_ Small hit fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss. It represents a fluctuation pattern when it is a small hit, and "special 1_jackpot fluctuation" represents a fluctuation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot.

When the first special symbol is variably displayed as the final pre-ceiling variation, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the decorative symbol in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007, as shown in FIG. 229(a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation is completed and the display mode of the loss is derived to the 1 special symbol display section 163, as shown in FIG. 229(b), the sub CPU 1301 Confirm and display the image showing the image.

As shown in FIG. 228(A), in the first normal pattern, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 performs the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, a shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing performance functions as a performance indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, a transition performance to the B time-saving game state.

The shutter closing effect is an image shown in FIG. 229(c). In this shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-hitting navigation performance that instructs right-handed hitting. In addition, in the shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 1301 performs, instead of or in addition to the right-handed navigation performance, for example, a performance that suggests the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, a performance related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , performances related to the progress of the game may be performed. In addition, in this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In this embodiment, the night mode is a display effect that suggests that control is being performed to the B time-saving gaming state, and the night mode preparation is a display effect that suggests that the B time-saving gaming state is being prepared. be.

By the way, when the first special symbol is variably displayed as the final variation of the ceiling, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be a jackpot or a time-saving hit.

For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol whose variable display has started as a ceiling final variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 executes a normal jackpot variation effect without executing the shutter closing effect. .

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol whose variable display has started as the ceiling final variation is a time-saving hit, the sub CPU 1301 executes B-time-saving game according to the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap. When transitioning to state B, it is recommended to perform a transition effect (for example, a shutter closing effect) to the time-saving game state B, and when transitioning to the time-saving game state C, it is recommended to perform a transition effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving game state C. . In this case, the effect of transition to the B time-saving game state and the effect of transition to the time-saving game state C may be the same or almost the same effect in appearance, or may be different effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, a small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, but if a small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the first When variable display of special symbols is performed, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be a small hit. In this case, the main CPU 1201 controls the small winning gaming state and then shifts it to the B time saving gaming state, so the sub CPU 1301 performs the small winning winning performance that suggests that the small winning gaming state has been won in the B time saving gaming state. It is preferable to give priority to the transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time-saving gaming state over the small hit winning effect.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol may be a jackpot or a time-saving win.

For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display was started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 ends the shutter closing effect and It is preferable to perform a jackpot fluctuation effect. That is, it is preferable that the irregular jackpot fluctuation performance is executed with priority over the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state.

Also. If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol whose variable display was started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 performs a transition effect to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, For example, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect that suggests that the B time-saving gaming state is being controlled. It is better to perform a performance that suggests a hit. That is, it is preferable to give priority to the small hit suggestion performance over the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may give priority to the transition performance to the B time-saving gaming state over the small hit suggestion performance.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot variation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time saving game state, the main special symbol The first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding jackpot fluctuations) starts, the sub CPU 1301, for example, opens the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect) and displays the second special symbol. A night mode display effect is started as a second display effect accompanying the variable display (see FIG. 229(d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, the sub CPU 1301 accordingly changes from the first display performance to the second display performance. Switch to Therefore, the night mode display performance functions as a performance indicating that the game has shifted to the B time-saving game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 228(A), even if the sub CPU 1301 internally transitions to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is started, the sub CPU 1301 2. Until the variable display of special symbols is started (until the night mode display effect is started), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an unnatural situation in which the display performance associated with the variable display of the special symbol does not start even though the variable display of the first special symbol has started at the final ceiling fluctuation, thereby reducing interest. It becomes possible to suppress the

When the sub CPU 1301 finishes the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect thereafter at least while being controlled to the B time saving game state.

The sub CPU 1301 performs night mode display performance (see FIG. 229(d)), game explanation performance ( 229(e)), a bullet landing effect (see FIG. 229(f)), a right hit instruction display effect (see FIG. 229(g)), and a count-up effect, which will be described later.

As described above, the night mode display effect is a display effect indicating that the game has shifted to the B time-saving game state, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image becomes night. The game explanation (see FIG. 229(e)) corresponds to a display effect in which an explanation related to the game is displayed, such as information indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. The landing effect (see FIG. 229(f)) not only displays the words "Count Up" but also shows whether, for example, a ball of light will land toward the 7-segment display 1071 provided at the lower right of the display device 1007. This corresponds to a display effect like this. Although it is difficult to understand from the illustration in FIG. 229, when the impact effect is performed, the sub CPU 1301 starts a high-speed fluctuation in the 7-segment display 1071. Thereafter, the sub CPU 1301 performs a right-handed hitting instruction display effect that instructs right-handed hitting (see FIG. 229(g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which information displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 (for example, the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving game state, etc.) appears to be increasing. The sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the timing of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display performances from the night mode display performance to the count-up performance, and starts the B time-saving game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 229(h)). Thereafter, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, a second display effect accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007.

In this way, in the first normal pattern, the display performance can be switched in a natural manner from the first display performance to the second display performance that is performed in conjunction with the transition to the B time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228(B), effect control in the second normal pattern will be described. In the second normal pattern, the final fluctuation before the ceiling is a variable display of the first special symbol, the final fluctuation of the ceiling is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first time in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the first special symbol, B time-saving game This is a pattern when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the state.

As shown in FIG. 228(B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 1301, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (loss variation) which is the final variation of the ceiling, As the display performance, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing performance is started. In this shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-hitting navigation performance that instructs right-handed hitting. In addition, in the shutter closing performance, the sub CPU 1301 performs, instead of or in addition to the right-handed navigation performance, for example, a performance that suggests the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, a performance related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , performances related to the progress of the game may be performed.

If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started before the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the sub CPU 1301 starts the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation. Even if it ends, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol will not be displayed in the shutter performance, which is the first display performance, until the first variable display of the second special symbol starts in the B time-saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol as the final variation of the ceiling ends and before the variable display of the second special symbol is started, this first A new first display effect accompanying the variable display of special symbols will not be performed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the B time saving gaming state (the second special symbol is the first variable display after shifting to the B time saving gaming state), the sub CPU 1301 The first display performance started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the second display performance accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be displayed. B Even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 1301 will cause the sub CPU 1301 to Start display production.

After shifting to the B time-saving game state, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 1301 starts the night mode display performance, and then the game explanation performance, the landing performance, and the count-up performance. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, if the variable display time of the second special symbol performed first after transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state is short, the above series of display performances may be performed until the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There may be cases where you cannot finish. In such a case, the sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the timing of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above series of display effects, performs a count-up effect, B Displays information indicating the end timing of the time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving times). In other words, if the second special symbol is being variably displayed when the above-described series of display effects can be ended, the sub CPU 1301 will display the second special symbol in accordance with the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol. , ends the above series of display effects. However, there are cases where the second special symbol is not being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display effects. In such a case, the sub CPU 1301 may receive a demo display command from the main CPU 1201, for example. When received, a count-up effect is performed, information indicating the end timing of the B time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving times) is displayed, and the above series of display effects is ended.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed in the night mode display performance (i.e., the remaining number of times to save time) is displayed. During this period, a variable display using the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining time saving number may change, so in order to absorb and display the variable display number, the second special symbol is displayed. A count-up effect is performed after waiting for the end of the variable display.

When the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs the second display performance, When the display is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. . However, when the first variable display in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the first special symbol, the frequency at which the first display effect is performed is that the first variable display in the B time-saving game state is a variable display of the second special symbol. It is preferable that the frequency is less than the frequency at which the second display effect is performed in the case of variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the secondary special symbol, while right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In a game state that is a game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is that when the game is played with left-handed players, the second special symbol is mainly displayed variablely, and when the game is played with right-handed players, the first special symbol is mainly displayed variablely. , in a game state where left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the first special symbol corresponds to a secondary special symbol, and a game state where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In this case, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. B Performance control using irregular patterns related to transition to time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 230 is a time chart showing performance control in an irregular pattern related to transition to the B time-saving gaming state, in which (A) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B ) A time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of performance control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 230(A), presentation control using the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 230(A), when the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol and the final ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final pre-ceiling variation, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. That is, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final pre-ceiling variation, even though the variable display of the first special symbol has not started as the final ceiling variation, the first special symbol is displayed in the above-mentioned normal pattern. A shutter closing effect is displayed that functions as the first display effect accompanying the variable display.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 1301 ends the shutter closing performance described above and starts the night mode display performance. Start. That is, the sub CPU 1301 continues to display the shutter performance that started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation until the variable display of the second special symbol starts after the B time saving game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 230(A), the "ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" illustrated in the columns of "Special 2_Loss fluctuation" and "Special 2_Small winning fluctuation" are both caused by a long period of about 600,000 msec. 2. This is a long variation in which a variation display of special symbols is performed, but for convenience, it is shown in a narrow width. Note that the variable display time of the second special symbol, which is performed over a long variation, is not limited to approximately 600,000 msec, but may be within the range of 360,000 msec to 600,000 msec, for example.

Furthermore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the first special symbol is being variably displayed as the final ceiling variation, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to , performs a right-click small navigation effect (displays right-click instructions in small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during a reach effect), the right hit small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even if the transition to the B time-saving gaming state occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation starts, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game mode (right-handed hitting) at an appropriate timing. It is possible to suppress unnecessary consumption of game balls and, in turn, to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation) Even if a ready-to-reach presentation is performed as a first display presentation accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned right-hit small navigation presentation is performed in this ready-to-reach presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(B), effect control using the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol before the final ceiling fluctuation, a variable display of the first special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, and a variable display of the first special symbol whose final fluctuation is the ceiling fluctuation. , B This is a pattern when variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after transition to the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 230(B), when the final pre-ceiling variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol and the final ceiling variation is a variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect, for example, is started as a first display effect accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final ceiling fluctuation, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after transitioning to the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 1301 controls the final ceiling fluctuation. Even if the variable display of a certain first special symbol has not been completed, the above-mentioned shutter closing performance is ended and the night mode display performance is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the sub CPU 1301 ends the night mode display performance and performs a series of display performances including a game explanation performance, a landing performance, and a count-up performance. After that, perform a right-handed hitting instruction display performance.

In addition, after the end of the ceiling final variation, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display performance accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol until at least the B time saving game state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(C), effect control using the third irregular pattern will be described. In the third irregular pattern, the final fluctuation before the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first variable display after the transition to the B time-saving game state is the 2 This is a pattern for variable display of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 230(C), the final fluctuation before the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first fluctuation after transitioning to the B time-saving game state. When the variable display is a variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the above-mentioned shutter closing effect, and suddenly switches to night mode at the start of the first variable display of the second special symbol after transitioning to the B time-saving game state. Perform display effects. In addition, when the night mode display performance is performed, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display performance associated with the variable display of the first special symbol from now on until at least the B time saving game state ends.

Further, after performing the night mode display performance for a predetermined period of time, the sub CPU 1301 performs a series of display performances including a game explanation performance, a bullet landing performance, and a count-up performance, and then performs a right hit instruction display performance.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, when the normal symbol loss length variation (variable display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts in the fixed variation mode, the game shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 129(a)). In the bonus mode, while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit right enter the small winning big prize opening 1151, and a large number game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in a pachinko gaming machine like the fifth pachinko gaming machine, which shifts from the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state The probability of determining the loss length variation as the normal symbol variation pattern may be different between before and after the transition. In this case, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win the loss length variation as a normal symbol variation pattern, and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is not possible to win the loss length variation as a normal symbol variation pattern. It is preferable to make it possible (probability 0).

After the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the frequency of being controlled to the small winning gaming state will be increased, but after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, by making it impossible to win the long variation as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, B After the transition to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the winning of game balls to the small winning large prize opening and further suppress the increase in the number of balls put out.

In addition, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, instead of making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of the losing length fluctuation is reduced compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. You may also do so. Even in such a case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the entry of game balls into the small winning large prize opening and, by extension, suppressing the increase in the number of balls put out. .

Note that in the fifth pachinko game machine, the passage gate 1126 is arranged in the right area 1107, but it may be arranged in the left area 1106. However, when the passage gate 1126 is placed in the left side area 1106, it is preferable to lower the probability of hitting a normal symbol, for example, so that the frequency of operation of the normal electric accessory 1146 does not become high.

FIG. 231 is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 128. The time saving flag is off before the transition to the B time saving game state, and is on after the transition to the B time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 1201 determines the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing this, before the transition to the B time-saving game state, compared to after the transition to the B time-saving game state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small winning large prize opening 1151. On the other hand, after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible to suppress the payout of game balls by the small winning large prize opening 1151.

In addition, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 1201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is off. In this case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before the transition to the B-time saving gaming state, you can expect a payout of game balls by winning the small winning large prize opening 1151, so the B time-saving gaming state is more It becomes possible to create a more interesting gaming state.

By the way, the main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74) before transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state. After the transition to , it is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75). Therefore, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is higher after the transition to the B time-saving game state than before the transition. That is, the average variable display time after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state is shorter than the average variable display time before shifting to the B time-saving gaming state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process for special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be a jackpot (jackpot probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process for normal symbols will be a normal symbol hit (normal symbol The winning probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the sub CPU 1301 displays, for example, on the 7-segment display, the conditions for transition to the B time saving gaming state (for example, the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before transitioning to the B time saving gaming state) before transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. A ceiling counter, etc.) may be displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving gaming state, the conditions for ending the B time saving gaming state (for example, the remaining number of time saving games in the B time saving gaming state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the content of the display effect displayed on the display device 1007 changes due to the transition of the gaming state, the sub CPU 1301 forcibly changes the display content displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 to 0. It is better to make it .

[6. 6th pachinko game machine]
Next, an example of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This sixth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and the start condition for the second special symbol is higher than the start condition for the first special symbol. This is a priority variable machine in which conditions are satisfied preferentially.

Hereinafter, in explaining the sixth pachinko game machine, descriptions of points common to the third pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of this sixth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, regarding the time saving management process (see S131 in FIG. 31), basically, the process performed in the third pachinko game machine and the process performed in the third pachinko game machine because it is common to the first pachinko game machine This process is the same as the one whose explanation is omitted in the machine. Therefore, in the explanation of this sixth pachinko game machine, among the time saving management processes explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, different processes will be mainly explained, and common processes will be explained as much as possible. Explanation shall be omitted.

Further, the configuration and processing having the same functions as the third pachinko game machine will be explained using the same reference numerals and step numbers as the third pachinko game machine. However, new symbols and step numbers will be given to points that are different from the third pachinko game machine, that is, the configuration and processing that will be newly explained in the description of the sixth pachinko game machine.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 232, the differences between the game board unit 5010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine will be mainly described.

FIG. 232 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine. Among the configurations of the game board unit 5010 of this sixth pachinko game machine, the major difference from the configuration of the game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine (see FIG. 87) is the first This is a different point to a fourth different point.

First, the first difference is that when a game ball enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the activation of the attacker 2152, the probability that this game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 (hereinafter simply referred to as "V winning probability") ). Although this V winning probability is not specifically mentioned in the third pachinko game machine, it is a probability close to 100% (for example, 99.9%) in the sixth pachinko game machine. For example, by changing the opening time and closing time of the V-shutter 2158, which was explained in the description of the third pachinko game machine as always performing a constant operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed", the V winning probability can be increased. It is possible to increase it.

In addition, in this specification, the game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the activation of the attacker 2152 and passes through the V winning hole 2155 is referred to as "V winning".

The second difference is that the sixth pachinko game machine includes a first start port 5120 instead of the first start port 2120 provided in the third pachinko game machine. When the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. This first starting port 5120 will be explained in the game ball sorting device 5400 described later.

The third difference is that in addition to the passage gate 2126 provided in the third pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine is provided with passage gates 5125A and 5125B. The passage gates 5125A and 5125B will be explained in the game ball sorting device 5400 described later.

The fourth difference is that the third pachinko game machine is not equipped with a game ball distribution device 5400, but this sixth pachinko game machine is equipped with a game ball distribution device 5400. This game ball sorting device 5400 includes the above-described first starting port 5120 and passing gates 5125A, 5125B.

[6-2. Game ball sorting device]
The game ball sorting device 5400 will be explained below. The game ball sorting device 5400 has a first starting port 5120 and passing gates 5125A, 5125B as passage ports through which game balls can pass, and the game balls flowing into the game ball sorting device 5400 are passed through these gates. This is a device that appropriately allocates to any one of the passage ports (first starting port 5120, passage gates 5125A, 5125B). The game ball sorting device 5400 is disposed approximately at the lower center of the game area 2105, and allows game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 to enter, while game balls flowing down the right side area 2107 cannot enter. It has become extremely difficult.

Although the first starting port 5120 is different in location from the first starting port 2120 provided in the third pachinko game machine, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out, and the first starting port 5120 This is similar to the first starting port 2120 in that the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In addition, the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B is similar to the above-described passing gate 2126 in that when a game ball passes through, normal symbol hit determination processing is performed, but when a game ball passes through, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. It differs from the above-mentioned passage gate 2126 in that it is The number of prize balls paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B is, for example, equal to or greater than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120. The number of prize balls is small. However, it is not essential that the prize ball be paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B.

In this embodiment, when comparing the number of first starting ports that the game ball sorting device 5400 has and the number of passing gates, the number of first starting ports (one first starting port 5120) is larger than the number of passing gates. (two passing gates 5125A and 5125B), but the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of first starting ports and the number of passing gates may be the same, or the number of first starting ports may be greater than the number of passing gates. Furthermore, in addition to the first starting port and the passage gate, an out port may be provided, and a return port for returning game balls to the gaming area 2105 may be provided. Although the details will be described later, during the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the execution frequency of the variable display of the normal symbol is higher than the execution frequency of the variable display of the first special symbol. Preferably, the frequency is higher.

[6-2-1. Configuration of game ball sorting device]
The configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 233 to 240.

First, the overall configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 233 to 235. FIG. 233 is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball sorting device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. Further, FIG. 234 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the game ball sorting device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. Furthermore, FIG. 235 is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball sorting device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko game machine, when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

The game ball sorting device 5400 is for sorting game balls A (see FIG. 238 described later) into a plurality of paths. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410, a rotary distribution mechanism 5420, a plate member 5430, a croon 5440, a guide member 5450, a pressing member 5460, and a sensor group 5470.

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A into the inside of the game ball sorting device 5400. The base member 5410 is formed into a substantially box shape with an open rear side. The right portion of the base member 5410 protrudes upward more than the other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inlet 5411, an introduction path 5412, a left guide path 5413, a right guide path 5414, an installation space 5415, and an opening 5416.

The inlet 5411 is a hole (entrance) through which the game ball A enters. The inlet 5411 is formed at the upper right end (projecting portion) of the base member 5410. The inlet 5411 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The inlet 5411 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The inlet 5411 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007. The inlet 5411 is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from above.

Note that the third pachinko game machine is configured so that the game ball that enters the chance entrance 2119 is released directly above the first starting opening 2120. Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. I explained that I was supposed to win (pass) the prize at 2120. Instead, the sixth pachinko game machine is configured so that the game ball that enters the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the inlet 5411. Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of entering the inlet 5419 than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. The ball enters the game ball sorting device 5400 from there.

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the introduction path 5412 is a path for guiding the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed to extend downward from the inlet 5411. Note that FIG. 236 is an example of an external perspective view of the base member 5410, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, the croon 5440, and the guide member 5450 when viewed from the rear.

The left guide path 5413 is a path for guiding the game ball A that has been guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed to extend downward to the left from the lower end of the introduction path 5412.

The right guide path 5414 is a path for guiding the game ball A that has been guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower right. The right guide path 5414 is formed to extend downward to the right from the lower end of the introduction path 5412, and is formed such that the extended end thereof extends downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portions of the base member 5410 to the lower end portion. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A that has been guided to the lower end of the right guide path 5414 in the rear direction. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end of the right guide path 5414 and has a generally arcuate shape when viewed from the side.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 in which a crew member 5440 and the like, which will be described later, are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the left and right middle part of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the left end part. The right end of the installation space 5415 communicates with the left guide path 5413.

The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side of the base member 5410 and passes through the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The opening 5416 is formed from the left and right midway portions of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to near the left end. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415. The opening 5416 is formed so that its vertical width is wide enough to allow the game ball A to enter, and is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from the front over the entire area. The opening 5416 is closed by the glass door 4 (for example, see FIG. 1) when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot enter the opening 5416.

The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is for distributing the game balls A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotating body 5421, a pin 5422, a metal plate 5423, and a magnet 5424.

The rotating body 5421 is formed into a substantially inverted T-shape when viewed from the rear, having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending upward. As shown in FIG. 236, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a protrusion portion 5421b, a left side receiving portion 5421c, and a right side receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion of the rotating body 5421 that extends in the left-right direction. The base portion 5421a is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is approximately the same as the width in the left-right direction of the introduction path 5412.

The protrusion 5421b is a portion of the rotating body 5421 that extends upward. The protruding portion 5421b is formed to extend from the left and right center portions of the base portion 5421a.

The left side receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A on the left side of the rotating body 5421. The left side receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left side of the upper side of the base 5421a and the left side of the protrusion 5421b.

The right side receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A on the right side of the rotating body 5421. The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right side of the upper surface of the base portion 5421a and the right side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted into the base 5421a of the rotating body 5421. Further, the front end of the pin 5422 is fixed to the base member 5410, and the rear end thereof is fixed to a plate member 5430 (see FIG. 235), which will be described later. Thereby, the pin 5422 supports the rotating body 5421 so that it can rotate relative to the base member 5410.

The metal plate 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base 5421a of the rotating body 5421. The sheet metal 5423 is formed so that its left end and right end are larger than other parts. The sheet metal 5423 is made of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by magnetic force.

The magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 235 is formed into a substantially disk shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a holding member 5460, which will be described later, and is arranged behind the metal plate 5423. The magnet 5424 attracts the left end of the sheet metal 5423 to hold the rotating body 5421 with the right side receiving part 5421d facing upward and the left side receiving part 5421c facing left as shown in FIG.

Note that a notch (not shown) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the cutout. The rotating body 5421 is prevented from rotating beyond a predetermined angular range by appropriately abutting the notch with the protrusion. The predetermined angle range is a range from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (a state shown in FIG. 240, which will be described later). The rotating body 5421 can rotate counterclockwise in rear view from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. Furthermore, the rotating body 5421 can rotate clockwise in rear view from a state in which the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward until a state in which the right side receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 configured as described above allows the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to be transferred to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414 by rotating the rotating body 5421 in an appropriate direction. Sort it out. Note that the distribution operation of the game balls A by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, the plate member 5430 is for closing the right rear portion of the base member 5410. The plate member 5430 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate member 5430 is formed so that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and the horizontal width of the base member 5410. The plate member 5430 includes a left side through hole 5431 and a right side through hole 5432.

The left-side through hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the left side of the plate-like member 5430. The left side through hole 5431 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 when viewed from the front.

The right side through hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front and back direction at the lower right portion of the plate member 5430. The right side through hole 5432 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The right side through hole 5432 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to pass through.

Plate member 5430 is placed behind base member 5410 and fixed to base member 5410 with screws. Thereby, the left side through hole 5431 is communicated with the installation space 5415. The right through hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414.

As shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the croon 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing game balls A. The croon 5440 is formed into a substantially circular shape in plan view, and the game ball A is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the croon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually slopes downward toward the center thereof. That is, the upper surface of the croon 5440 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball A to the center. The croon 5440 includes a connecting portion 5441, a first starting port 5120, passage gates 5125A and 5125B, and a protruding portion 5445.

The connecting portion 5441 is a portion formed to extend rightward from the front end of the upper surface (approximately circular portion in plan view) of the croon 5440. The connecting portion 5441 is configured such that the game ball A can enter from the right end thereof. Further, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5120 is a hole formed in the front part of the croon 5440 and having a substantially circular shape in plan view. The first starting port 5120 passes through the croon 5440 in the vertical direction. The first starting port 5120 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

The passage gate 5125A is a substantially circular hole formed in the left rear of the croon 5440 (left rear of the first starting port 5120). The passage gate 5125B is a hole formed in the right rear part of the croon 5440 (to the right of the passage gate 5125A) and has a substantially circular shape in plan view. The passage gates 5125A and 5125B are formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5120.

The protruding portion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed at the center of the croon 5440. The protrusion 5445 is formed to protrude upward from the upper surface of the croon 5440. The protruding portion 5445 appropriately flicks the game ball A guided by the croon 5440, thereby causing the game ball A to enter the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A, 5125B. Thereby, game balls A guided by the croon 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

The croon 5440 configured in this manner is fixed to the plate member 5430 with screws. The front end of the croon 5440 protrudes forward from the left through hole 5431 and is disposed above the installation space 5415. The right end of the connecting portion 5441 is connected to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413, and is configured to be able to guide the game ball A guided to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413 to the left. Further, the croon 5440 is disposed at the rear and lower part of the opening 5416.

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A, 5125B to a holding member 5460, which will be described later. The guide member 5450 is formed in the shape of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member whose upper surface is appropriately depressed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the croon 5440. The guide member 5450 includes a protrusion 5451, a mounting portion 5452, a front guide path 5453, and a rear guide path 5454.

The protrusion 5451 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the left rear end of the upper surface of the guide member 5450. The protrusion 5451 is formed into a substantially flat plate shape.

The attachment portion 5452 is a recess formed at the front end of the upper surface of the guide member 5450. The attachment portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface that are substantially U-shaped in plan view. A first starting port switch 5121, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment portion 5452.

The front guide path 5453 is a recess formed on the upper side of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 to the holding member 5460. The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, extending rightward and having the extended end extending rearward. The front part of the front guide path 5453 is arranged below the attachment part 5452.

The rear guide path 5454 is a recess formed in the rear part of the upper surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the passage gates 5125A, 5125B to the holding member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 is formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, extending rightward and having the extended end extending rearward. The rear guide path 5454 is formed between the protruding portion 5451 and the attachment portion 5452. The rear guide path 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guide path 5453.

The guide member 5450 configured in this manner is fixed to the lower part of the croon 5440 with a screw. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-like member 5430 via the croon 5440 and is arranged at the lower part of the installation space 5415. The mounting portion 5452 and the front guide path 5453 are arranged below the first starting port 5120 of the croon 5440 and are connected to the left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first starting port 5120. Further, the rear guide path 5454 has its left end and right front end disposed below the passage gates 5125A, 5125B, and is connected to the left side guide path 5413 via the passage gates 5125A, 5125B.

As shown in FIGS. 234, 235, and 237, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate member 5430 from behind. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 from the rear direction. The pressing member 5460 is formed in such a shape that its front side surface is appropriately recessed in the rearward direction. The holding member 5460 includes a placing portion 5461, a right side discharge passage 5462, a front side discharge passage 5463, and a rear side discharge passage 5464. Note that FIG. 237 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the guide member 5450 and the pressing member 5460 when viewed diagonally from above and to the left in the front direction.

The mounting portion 5461 is a depression formed in the upper left portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460. The mounting portion 5461 is formed into a substantially arcuate shape in plan view, following the shape of the rear portion of the croon 5440. The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end of the holding member 5460 to the middle of the left and right sides. The placing portion 5461 is recessed downward from the vicinity of the left end of the lower surface to the middle portion on the left and right sides with respect to other portions.

The right side discharge path 5462 is a passage for discharging the game balls A that have passed through the right side through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400. The right side discharge passage 5462 is formed in such a shape that it extends in the rear direction and that the lower surface of the extended end thereof opens to the outside. The right side discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the holding member 5460.

The front discharge path 5463 is a depression formed in the lower part of the front side surface of the holding member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 is discharged from the game ball sorting device 5400. This is a passageway for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5463 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The front discharge passage 5463 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge passage 5462. The front discharge path 5463 is formed to extend downward from below the placing portion 5461 to the lower end of the pressing member 5460.

The rear discharge path 5464 is a depression formed in the lower left part of the front side surface of the holding member 5460, and also serves to distribute game balls A that have been guided to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. This is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear discharge path 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge path 5463. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed to extend downward from below the placing portion 5461 to the lower end of the pressing member 5460.

The holding member 5460 configured in this manner is fixed to the rear side of the plate member 5430 with screws, and closes the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 (front guide path 5453 and rear guide path 5454) from the rear direction. do. The rear part of the croon 5440 is placed on the placement part 5461. Furthermore, a protruding portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is placed in the downwardly recessed portion of the placing portion 5461. The front end of the right discharge passage 5462 is connected to the right through hole 5432. The upper end of the front discharge path 5463 is connected to the rear end of the front guide path 5453. The upper end of the rear discharge path 5464 is connected to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454.

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414, the front guide path 5453, and the rear guide path 5454. The sensor group 5470 includes various switches such as a first starting port switch 5121 and a passage gate switch 5126B.

The first starting port switch 5121 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front guide path 5453. That is, the game ball A that has passed through the first starting port 5121 is detected by the first starting port switch 5121.

The switch 5126A is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. The switch 5126A is formed into a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The switch 5126A includes a through hole 5127A.

The through hole 5127A is a generally circular hole when viewed from the front, passing through the switch 5126A in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5127A has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to pass through. The through hole 5127A is formed at the bottom of the switch 5126A.

The switch 5126A configured in this manner is attached to the right front end of the holding member 5460. Thereby, the through hole 5127A is arranged behind the right side through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430. The switch 5126A is configured to, for example, form a magnetic field in the through hole 5127A and detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through hole 5127A). The switch 5126A detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The passage gate switch 5126B is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454. The passage gate switch 5126B is configured in the same manner as the first starting port switch 5121 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the holding member 5460. The through hole 5127B is arranged at the lower part of the rear discharge passage 5464.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the game ball sorting device 5400 configured in this way has a first passage 5501 and a second passage 5502 as passages for sorting the game balls A that have flowed in from the inflow port 5411. Be prepared.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding game balls A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. The first passage 5501 includes a left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, a connecting portion 5441 of the clone 5440, a first starting port 5120 and passage gates 5125A, 5125B, a front guide path 5453 and a rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, It is also constituted by a front side discharge passage 5463 and a rear side discharge passage 5464 of the holding member 5460. The first passage 5501 branches into two passages at a clone 5440. The first passage 5501 includes a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as branched passages.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 of the croon 5440. The third passage 5503 is constituted by the first starting port 5120 of the croon 5440, the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450, and the front discharge path 5463 of the pressing member 5460.

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the passing gates 5125A and 5125B of the clone 5440. The fourth passage 5504 is configured by the passage gates 5125A and 5125B of the croon 5440, the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge path 5464 of the holding member 5460.

In this embodiment, the game balls A distributed to the first passage 5501 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 will pass through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately one-third, and will pass through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately two-thirds. It is configured to pass through the passage gate 5125A or passage gate 5125B with probability.

The second passage 5502 is a passage for guiding the game balls A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. The second passage 5502 is constituted by a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410, a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 235) of the plate member 5430, and a right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460.

Next, the operation mode of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be explained. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inlet 5411 with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward, as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 238 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are sorted into the second passage.

First, the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate counterclockwise in rear view. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes it to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). Note that when the sheet metal 5423 is rotated until the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward, the right end portion thereof is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235). As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left side receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 240 described later).

Game balls A (hereinafter referred to as "game balls A2") sorted to the second passage 5502 are guided downward along the right guide path 5414, and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes through the right side through hole 5432 (see FIG. 234) of the plate member 5430 in the rear direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end of the right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460. At this time, the game ball A2 passes backward through the through hole 5127A of the switch 5126A. Thereby, the switch 5126A detects that the game ball A2 has been sorted to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5127A is guided backward through the right side discharge path 5462 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400. Note that FIG. 239 is an example of a diagram showing the flow of game balls distributed to the second passage, the third passage, and the fourth passage.

In this way, in the second passage 5502, a right guide path 5414, a right through hole 5432, and a right discharge path 5462 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the second passage 5502 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, and a switch 5126A is provided in the middle thereof.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240, when the game ball A enters the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410 with the left side receiving part 5421c facing upward, the game ball A is placed on the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving part 5421c. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate clockwise in rear view. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes it to the first path 5501 (left guide path 5413). Note that when the sheet metal 5423 is rotated until the right side receiving portion 5421d faces upward, the left end thereof is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235). As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right side receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 238). Note that FIG. 240 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are sorted into the first passage.

The game balls A sorted into the first passage 5501 are guided in the lower left direction along the left guide path 5413, and then guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5120 through the connecting part 5441 of the croon 5440. The game ball A is guided along the upper surface of the croon 5440 in a clockwise direction in plan view, and is gradually guided to the center of the croon 5440. At this time, the protrusion 5445 of the croon 5440 flicks the game ball A as appropriate. Thereby, the clone 5440 causes the game ball A to enter either the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B. In this way, the clone 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504.

In this way, the first passage 5501 includes, in order from the upstream side, the left guide passage 5413, the connecting part 5441, the upper surface of the croon 5440 (approximately circular portion in plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage. A passage 5504 is arranged. The opening 5416 is formed to open to the upper side of the connecting portion 5441 and the crown 5440. That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the crown 5440 (downstream of the left guide path 5413 and upstream of the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Further, the first passage 5501 is arranged downstream of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420.

As shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A3") that has been sorted to the third passage 5503 (entered the first starting port 5120) is It passes downward through the through hole 5121A (see FIGS. 234, 235, 236, and 238) of the mouth switch 5121. Thereby, the first starting port switch 5121 detects that the game ball A3 has been sorted to the third path 5503 (front guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5121A is guided to the left front end of the front guide path 5453. Then, the game ball A3 is guided in the right direction along the front guide path 5453, then guided in the rear direction, and guided to the upper end of the front discharge path 5463. The game ball A3 is guided downward through the front discharge path 5463 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400.

In this way, the first starting port 5120, the front guide path 5453, and the front discharge path 5463 are arranged in the third passage 5503 in this order from the upstream side. Further, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first starting port switch 5121 in the middle thereof.

On the other hand, game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A4") that has been sorted to the fourth passage 5504 (entered the passing gates 5125A and 5125B) is guided to the left front end of the rear guide path 5454. be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided rightward along the rear guide path 5454, and then guided rearward, and guided to the upper end of the rear discharge path 5464. The game ball A4 is guided downward through the rear discharge path 5464 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400. At this time, the game ball A4 passes downward through the through hole 5127B of the passage gate switch 5126B. Thereby, the passage gate switch 5126B detects that the game ball A4 has been sorted to the fourth passage 5504 (rear guide passage 5454).

In this way, in the fourth passage 5504, passage gates 5125A, 5125B, a rear guide path 5454, and a rear discharge path 5464 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the fourth passage 5504 is provided with a passage gate switch 5126B in the middle thereof. That is, the game ball A4 that has passed through the passage gates 5125A and 5125B is detected by the passage gate switch 5126B.

As described above, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 sequentially distributes the game balls A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (with a probability of 1/2). In addition, the clone 5440 distributes the game balls A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/3, and to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of 2/3. . That is, the rotary sorting mechanism 5420 and the clone 5440 sort the game balls A that entered the inlet 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6, and to the fourth passage 5503 with a probability of 2/6. Sort to aisle 5504.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, although the game ball sorting device 5400 according to the present embodiment is provided with two means for distributing game balls A (including a rotary sorting mechanism 5420 and a croon 5440), the present invention is not limited to this. Any device may be used as long as it includes at least one means for distributing the game balls A (for example, the clone 5440).

In particular, in this embodiment, a game ball A that enters the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inlet 5411 is placed in the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 by the rotary sorting mechanism 5420. Sorted by probability. Then, the game balls A distributed to the first passage 5501 pass through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately one-third, and pass through the passage gates 5125A and 5125B with a probability of approximately two-thirds. That is, of the game balls A that entered the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inflow port 5411, approximately one-sixth of the game balls A that pass through the first starting port 5120.

On the other hand, in the third pachinko game machine, a first starting port 2120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the inlet port 5411 described above. Therefore, if you think about it simply, the probability that the game ball A will pass through the first starting port 5120 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is approximately the probability that the gaming ball will pass through the first starting port 2120 in the third pachinko gaming machine. It becomes one-sixth.

Therefore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, all or almost all of the game balls A that enter the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inlet 5411 head toward the first path 5501 without providing the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. It is preferable to increase the probability that the game ball A passes through the first starting port 5120 by doing so. However, it is not essential to not provide a distribution mechanism such as the rotation distribution mechanism 5420; for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes more game balls to the first passage 5501 than to the second passage 5502 is provided. Therefore, more of the game balls A entering the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inlet 5411 may be directed to the first passage 5501.

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to directing more of the game balls A that entered the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inlet 5411 to the first passage 5501, the left side area 2106 (see FIG. 232) For example, due to the gauge configuration, the game ball fired toward the player can easily enter the inflow port 5411 compared to the ease with which the ball can pass through the first starting port 2120 in the third pachinko game machine. preferable.

In the game ball distribution device 5400, the configurations of the means for distributing the game balls A (rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the clone 5440) do not necessarily have to be different from each other, and even if the means for distributing the game balls A have the same configuration. good. Specifically, the game ball sorting device 5400 may include two croons 5440 or two rotary sorting mechanisms 5420.

Further, although the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game balls A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), it is not limited to this, and it distributes the game balls A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages). Alternatively, the game balls A may be distributed to the players.

In addition, although the clone 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls A are distributed to three or more passages. It may be something that allocates A.

Further, the base member 5410 may include an opening into which the game ball A can enter at the lower right portion of the front side surface thereof (a position overlapping with the right guide path 5414 in front view). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly entered into the second passage 5502 from the opening. Thereby, the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 can be efficiently inspected. In this case, the opening 5416 and the opening formed at the lower right side of the front side of the base member 5410 function as openings that can individually flow into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. do. Further, the switch 5126A functions as a second detection means capable of detecting the game balls A distributed to the second passage 5502.

Further, the configurations of the switch 5126A, the first starting port switch 5121, and the passage gate switch 5126B are not limited to this embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by appropriate means.

In addition, as another example of the game ball sorting device 5400, unlike the above-mentioned game ball sorting device 5400, the positions of the first starting port 5120 and the passage gates 5125A, 5125B may be reversed. By providing the inlet of the first starting port 5120 on the back side of the clone 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts through the opening 5416. Furthermore, the passage in which the sensors are provided (more specifically, the passage for guiding the game balls that have flowed into the inlet) is provided at the back of the clone 5440 (that is, placed far from the opening 5416), and the sensor A passageway (a passageway for guiding game balls that have flowed into the inflow port) without a similar structure may be arranged at a position close to the opening 5416. For example, a first starting port switch is provided at the back inlet (passing gate 5125A), an out port switch is provided at the other back inlet (passing gate 5125A), and the front inlet (passing gate 5125A) is provided with an out port switch. Similarly, no sensor is provided at the first starting port 5120). With this configuration, even if the opening 5416 is provided, tampering with the sensor can be suppressed.

[6-3. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 241 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of this sixth pachinko game machine differs greatly from the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine in the following two points.

First, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine was equipped with a first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88) that detects passage of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 (winning). However, in the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine, instead of this, a first starting port switch 5121 is provided that detects passage of a game ball to the first starting port 5120 (winning).

Next, the second point is that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine was equipped with a passage gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88) that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126; In addition to this, the control circuit of the pachinko game machine is provided with a passage gate switch 5126B that detects passage of game balls to passage gates 5125A and 5126B. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 5126B even if it passes through either the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, but this is not necessarily the case, and the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 5125A is detected. A passage gate switch for detection and a passage gate switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 5125B may be provided separately.

[6-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 242 to 250. Note that the sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that, in the sixth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, probability change control is not executed. In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 performs time-saving control as a gaming state (a gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state) in which a variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed. The normal game state that is not executed, the A time-saving game state that can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state that can be executed on the condition that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It is configured to be controllable to any one of the C time-saving game states that can be executed on the condition that it is a "time-saving win".

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state and C time-saving game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the A time-saving gaming state and B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 can be controlled to any one of the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It is not essential that it be controllable; for example, it may be controllable to any one of the normal gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state can be executed in parallel. When configured so that the C time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state can be executed overlappingly, the time saving performance of the B working time saving gaming state is the same first time saving performance as the time saving performance of the C working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state. The first method of providing a second time-saving performance different from the time-saving performance may be adopted. In this first method, when the C time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state are executed at the same time (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value before the end of the C time-saving gaming state), the first time-saving performance and when executing the B time saving game state without overlapping with the C time saving game state (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state), the second time saving performance is activated.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the C time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state can be executed at the same time, as a method different from the first method described above, the time saving performance of the B working time saving gaming state can be compared to the time saving performance of the C working time saving gaming state. A second method may be adopted in which only the same time-saving performance as the time-saving performance is used. In this second method, the first time-saving performance is activated both when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state.

In addition, in the case where the C time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state are configured to be executed at the same time, no matter which of the above-mentioned first method and the above-mentioned second method is adopted, before the C-time saving gaming state ends. If the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the number of time saving times will be added without changing the time saving performance.

[6-4-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 242 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 242, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 5120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol hit determination random value. Based on this, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "time-saving hit," a "big hit," or a "loss." In addition, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the special symbol is a hit based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving win", "big hit", "accessories opening win", or "loss".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed.

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes "time-saving hit" and "jackpot" as data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 5120. ” or “Lose” is the range (width) of the first special symbol hit determination random number value and the corresponding determination value data (“Time-saving hit determination value data”, “Jackpot determination value data”, “Loss determination ``value data'') is specified. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, "time saving hit", "jackpot", "accessory opening hit", or "loss" can be used. The range (width) of the random number value for second special symbol hit determination to be determined and the corresponding determination value data (“time-saving hit determination value data”, “jackpot determination value data”, “accessories release hit determination value data”) , "loss determination value data") is defined.

In addition, when the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, for example. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that, for example, the time saving winning probability and the accessory opening winning probability are common to all settings.

In addition, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine, conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player (for example, jackpot probability, probability of opening a role object, opening frequency of the V prize opening 2155 (i.e. operating frequency of the V attacker 2152) ), opening time, number of time-saving continuations, etc.), the expected value controlled by the jackpot gaming state is configured to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. It's okay.

[6-4-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 243 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 243, when time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is between 0 and 99. In either case, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is either 0 to 6 or 8 to 99 (that is, a symbol random number value other than 7), the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects the symbol. Select "zA2" as the specified command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 7, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 Select "z3" as the command and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" is selected as the symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z5" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 ``z6'' is selected as the command, and ``zA6'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 Select "z7" as the command and select "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Note that, similarly to the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "first pachinko game machine, etc."), the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a special symbol stop mode determination table. A special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to (see FIG. 12(A)) is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 241) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru.

[6-4-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 244 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table is used to determine the number of rounds, the destination game state, and the time-saving end conditions according to the hit type (selected symbol command determined according to the random number of symbols of the special symbol). Referenced. The destination gaming state indicates the gaming state to be shifted to after the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the gaming state to be shifted to after the time-saving winning display mode is derived as a result of the winning determination process in the normal gaming state. In addition, "A" shown in the column of the destination gaming state in FIG. 244 indicates that the game state will be shifted to A time saving gaming state, "B" indicates that it will be shifted to B time saving gaming state, and "C" indicates that it will be shifted to B time saving gaming state. Indicates transition to time-saving gaming state.

Further, "Special 1" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 244 indicates the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed as one of the time-saving end conditions. Similarly, "Special 2" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed as one of the time-saving end conditions. Moreover, "normal electricity" indicates the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol as one of the time saving end conditions. Furthermore, if the time-saving end conditions include a condition defined by the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol, the "Special 1" column of the time-saving end conditions in FIG. 244 "Special 1 + Special 2" is shown across the "Special 2" and "Special 2" columns. For example, if the time-saving end conditions include the condition "sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol = 12", the "Special 1" column and the "Special 2" column It is shown as "Special 1 + Special 2 = 12" across both. Then, if any one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions shown in the column of time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 244 is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state ends. Note that the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is defined as the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is released based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process. Therefore, for example, in a mode in which the normal electric accessory 2146 opens twice based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process (for example, a mode in which "first opening ⇒ closing ⇒ second opening ⇒ closing") Even if there is, the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process is one.

When the time saving end condition includes the condition "Special 1 + Special 2 = 12", the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol (1 or more times) and the variable display number of the second special symbol (1 or more times) is 12 Not only times, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is 12 times and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 0 times, and the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is 0 times and the variable display number of the second special symbol is variable. Even if the number of times is 12, the time-saving termination condition is satisfied.

Although not shown in FIG. 244, regardless of the type of hit (that is, regardless of the "selected symbol command"), the operation of the condition device is also one of the time-saving end conditions.

Next, the number of rounds determined according to the winning type, the destination gaming state, and the time-saving ending conditions will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the normal gaming state, when the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"), the main CPU 2201 For example, the destination gaming state is determined to be the time-saving gaming state C, and the time-saving end conditions (the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state C) are set to 20 variable display times for the first special symbol and 1 variable display number for the second special symbol. The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened is determined to be 12 times.

However, in the time-saving gaming state (A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, C-time-saving gaming state), if the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"). Even if there is, the main CPU 2201 ignores the "time saving win" result and prevents the C time saving gaming state from being executed overlappingly with any of the time saving gaming states. In this case, the main CPU 2201 derives the display mode of a loss to the special symbol display sections 2163, 2164 (see FIG. 232) even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" (display of "time-saving hit"). The mode may not be derived), or the display mode of the time saving win may be derived to the special symbol display sections 2163, 2164, and then the result of the "time saving win" may be ignored.

Note that the method for preventing the C time saving gaming state from being executed overlappingly with the time saving gaming state is not limited to the above method. For example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in the normal gaming state is The result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in the time-saving gaming state may include the "hit" (time-saving winning determination value data) and not include the "time-saving winning".

In the normal gaming state, if the selected symbol command is "z1" (if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "3R jackpot"), the main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 3 rounds and shifts to The previous gaming state is determined to be A time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving end conditions are determined as special 1=5, special 2=1, and general electricity=10000. The condition of Special 1 = 5 is stipulated so that the condition of Special 2 = 1 will not be satisfied before the condition of Special 2 = 1 as long as the right hand is played in the A time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state. be. In other words, even if the number of pending starting information of the first special symbol at the time of ending the jackpot gaming state is the upper limit of 4 pieces, by hitting right, the condition of special 2 = 1 will be satisfied first. It is made to be moisturized. Therefore, the condition of special 1=5 may be a number (5 or more in this embodiment) that is larger than the upper limit of reservation of the starting information of the first special symbol. Further, the condition of general electricity = 10,000 may be any condition as long as it is almost impossible to hold in theory.

In the time saving gaming state (A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, C working time saving gaming state), if the selected symbol command is "z1" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "3R jackpot"), The main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 3 rounds, determines the destination game state to be A time-saving game state, and determines the time-saving end conditions to special 1 + special 2 = 12, general electricity = 10000.

Regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (A-time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, C-time-saving gaming state), if the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6" (special symbol (If the result of the hit determination process is "10R jackpot"), the main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines the destination gaming state to be the time-saving gaming state A, and sets the time-saving end condition to a special 1 + special 2 = 12, general electricity = 10000.

Also, regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (A-time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, C-time-saving gaming state), the selected symbol command is "z5" (the result of the special symbol hit determination process). is "per role opening") and V is won, the main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines the destination game state to be the time-saving game state A, and sets the time-saving end condition. , special 1 + special 2 = 12, general electricity = 10000. However, even if the selected symbol command is "z5", if there is no V-win, the main CPU 2201 will not be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds, the destination gaming state, and the time-saving ending conditions. There's no need. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z5" and V is won, one operation of the V attacker 2152 executed based on the opening of the accessory is considered as one round, so it will be executed after the V is won. The number of rounds actually executed in the jackpot game state is 9 rounds.

In addition, according to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 244), in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the special symbol hit determination process As one of the time-saving termination conditions when the result is a jackpot or an accessory release hit, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened is set based on the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Not limited to. For example, in all A time-saving game states or a specific A time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot or a role release hit, the time-saving end condition may be set to the time-saving end condition when the result of the normal symbol's hit determination process is It is also possible to include only the variable display number of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) without including the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened.

[6-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 245 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the sixth pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 246 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the sixth pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 245 and 246 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 5120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 245 and 246 is a table that is referred to, for example, when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process (see S1037 in FIG. 78) described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In the normal game state or C time-saving game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 245, for example.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state A or the time-saving game state B, in which right-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts shown in FIG. 246, for example. be done.

Note that in this sixth pachinko game machine as well, a prefetch flag is set so that a prefetch effect is executed, as in the first to fifth pachinko gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 246), the look-ahead flag is not set, but the invention is not limited to this. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in both the normal game state and the C time-saving game state. Not limited. For example, a variation pattern table A of special symbols for a low start used in the normal gaming state and a variation pattern table B of special symbols for a low start used in the C time-saving gaming state are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main CPU 2201. It may be configured as follows.

[6-4-4. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 247 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As can be seen from FIG. 247, in this embodiment, regardless of which gaming state is in the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 When the normal symbol hit determination process is performed, it is determined with a probability of 100% that it is a "normal symbol win", and the determination value data is determined to be the "normal symbol hit determination value data". That is, the probability of being determined to be a "loss", that is, the determination value data, is never determined as the "loss determination value data". However, the winning probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning "per normal symbol" can be set as appropriate.

[6-4-5. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 248 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the gaming state, the determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted based on the game ball passing through the passing gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B (see FIG. 232). , This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 248, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the symbol hit selection command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 determines that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is 0. ~2, 4-6, 8-65535 (that is, a symbol random number other than 3 and 7), select "fz0" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and the symbol random number of the normal symbol is 3. Or, if it is 7, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 determines that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is If it is between 0 and 5955, select "fz0" as the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, and if the random number of the normal symbol is between 5956 and 65535, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when there is a normal symbol hit. ”.

In the B time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state (indicated as "Normal ⇒ B time-saving gaming state" in FIG. 248), and the B time-saving gaming state is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving gaming state. In the B time-saving game state (indicated as "C⇒B time-saving game state" in FIG. 248), the time-saving performance, that is, the release of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 described later The patterns are different.

Specifically, in the B time-saving game state which is shifted to when the ceiling is reached in the normal game state, as in the A time-saving game state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, The main CPU 2201 selects "fz0" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits if the random number of the normal symbol is between 0 and 5955, and when the random number of the normal symbol is between 5956 and 65535. For example, "fz2" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving gaming state which is transferred to when the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination processing, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal symbol symbol randomness. If the numerical value is between 0 and 5955, select "fz0" as the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, and if the random number of the normal symbol is between 5956 and 65535, select it as the selection symbol command when there is a normal symbol hit. Select "fz1".

In addition, in the C time-saving game state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 determines that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is If it is between 0 and 64170, select "fz0" as the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, and if the random number of the normal symbol is between 64171 and 65535, select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when it hits a normal symbol. ”.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state to which the transition was made by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance, that is, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 (described later) are the same.

In this way, in the B time-saving gaming state, multiple time-saving performances are provided, and the B time-saving gaming state is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state, and the B time-saving gaming state is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving gaming state. Different time-saving performance is activated depending on the state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the same time-saving performance can be activated without distinguishing between the B time-saving gaming state that transitions to when the ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state that transitions to when the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving gaming state. It's okay.

[6-4-6. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 249 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described in the first pachinko game machine). .

The "interval before release" shown in the column of the normal electric accessory opening pattern in FIG. (see) corresponds to the wait time until the first opening is executed. The "first opening time" is, for example, the first opening time of the normal electric accessory 2146 that is executed after the pre-opening interval time has elapsed (i.e., from the time when the normal electric accessory 2146 starts operating until it is closed). time) is equivalent. The "opening interval" corresponds to, for example, the wait time after the first opening time of the normal electric accessory 2146 has elapsed until the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is executed. The "second opening time" corresponds to, for example, the second opening time of the normal electric accessory 2146, which is executed after the opening interval time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, the number of times that the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released is only once when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0" and "fz2", and when the normal symbol hits When the selected symbol command is "fz1", it is twice.

In this specification, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol hits is "fz0" is referred to as "normal power short release", and the selected symbol command when a normal symbol hits is "fz0". The operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 in the case of “fz1” and “fz2” is referred to as “ordinary electric long open”. In addition, when the normal electric accessory 2146 operates with "Fuden long open" (when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1" and "fz2"), the result of the hit judgment process of the normal symbol is "Fuden long open". When the normal electric accessory 2146 operates with "normal power short release" (when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz0"), the result of the hit judgment process of the normal symbol is called "long open hit". It is called "per electric short opening".

In addition, when the player is playing right-handed, even if the normal electric accessory 2146 operates with "Public power short release", the game ball flowing down the right side area 2107 will hit the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). The expected value of passing (winning) is extremely low.

In addition, the number of times the normal electrically powered accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in the column of "Normal power", which is one of the time saving end conditions shown in FIG. This is the sum of the number of "general electric power long releases", but is not limited to this. Note that, as described above, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is released is one based on the result of the hit determination process of one normal symbol. For example, as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 249), if the normal symbol per selection symbol command is "fz1", the normal electric accessory 2146 will be released twice, but in such a case Even so, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened is one based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process.

By the way, as can be seen from FIG. 249, the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 is different between when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" and when it is "fz2". In particular, the time of the "pre-opening interval" differs greatly between the two.

As mentioned above, the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" can be selected in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular game mode or the C time saving game state, and the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz2" can be selected in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state in which right-handed playing is the normal game mode. When hitting to the left, the game ball hit to the right will reach the normal electric accessory 2146 even if it is changed to hitting to the right immediately after the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161. It takes time. Therefore, taking this time into consideration, the time of the "before release interval" when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", and the "before release interval" when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2" The time is longer than the "Interval".

However, for example, before the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241) (that is, while the normal symbol is being displayed variably), a command indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process may be issued. When a right-hitting instruction performance that instructs right-handed hitting is executed under the control of the sub CPU 2301 that receives this from the main CPU 2201, the time of the "pre-opening interval" when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", It is not necessarily necessary to make the time longer than the "pre-opening interval" when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2".

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) is that approximately 4 (5 if the timing is good) game balls are activated by the second start. The operating mode is such that it can pass through the opening 2140 (see FIG. 232) (win a prize). That is, in this embodiment, when it is a "Fuden long open hit" (when the selected symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit is "fz1"), the "Fuden long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 is The number of prizes that can be expected to enter the second starting slot 2140 is, for example, approximately four. However, it is not limited to this.

On the other hand, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) is that approximately two (three if the timing is good) game balls are activated for the second start. The operating mode is such that it can pass through the opening 2140 (win a prize). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is a "Fuden long open hit" (when the selected symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit is "fz2"), the "Full power long open" per time of the normal electric accessory 2146 The number of prizes that can be expected to be won in the second starting slot 2140 is, for example, approximately two. However, it is not limited to this.

[6-4-7. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 250 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 2201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and generates a random number value for normal symbol performance selection extracted based on the gaming state and the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gates 2126, 5125A, and 5125B (see FIG. 232). Based on this, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, since the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols determined is the same regardless of whether the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 0 to 99, it is substantially the same in the gaming state. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

As shown in FIG. 250, in the normal game state, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol production selection from 0 to 99, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is "01H", and the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10000 msec. determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state and the B-time saving game state, even if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is from 0 to 99, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is "02H", and the variable display time of the normal symbol is 1000 msec, for example. determined. Furthermore, in the C time-saving game state, even if the random number value for normal symbol performance selection is any of 0 to 99, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be "03H" and the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 8000 msec.

In addition, in this example, the B time-saving game state that transitioned to when the ceiling was reached in the normal gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state that transitioned to when the ceiling was reached in the C time-saving gaming state have the same normal symbol fluctuation pattern. Although it is set to be determined, it is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of a different normal symbol may be determined.

[6-4-8. Summary of basic specifications]
Based on the above explanation, the variable display time (for example, 1000 mec) of the normal symbols in the A time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state B is the same as the variable display time (for example, 10000 msec) of the normal symbols in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state C. 8000 msec). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 248, the winning probability (for example, the selection symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" when hitting a normal symbol) of "normal electric long opening hit" (select symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" when hitting a normal symbol) in the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state Approximately 1/1) is relatively high compared to the winning probability of "normal power long open hit" (select symbol command "fz1" when winning normal symbol) in the normal game state or C time-saving game state.

In this way, in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, the "normal electric long release" of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is performed with high frequency (in this example, as shown in FIG. 248, for example) This is a game state that is executed with a probability of 1/1. In this case, in the "normal electric long opening", approximately two winnings can be expected in the second starting opening 2140 for opening the normal electric accessory 2146 based on the result of the hit determination process of one normal symbol. Therefore, it is assumed that as long as the game is played with the right hand, the number of pending starting information of the second special symbol will not be interrupted. In other words, the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state are gaming states in which the game is played with the expectation that a "big hit" or "accessory release hit" will be derived as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process. be. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state B, the expected value of the number of prize balls (or prize data) for the number of balls fired per unit time is higher than in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state C, The rate of decrease is slow.

On the other hand, in the C time-saving game state, the "normal electric long release" of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is performed with medium frequency (in this embodiment, for example, the probability is 1/48 as shown in FIG. 248). This is the gaming state that is executed. In this case, in the "normal electric long release", approximately 4 prizes can be expected in the second starting port 2140 for the release of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on the result of the hit determination process of one normal symbol. In other words, in the C time-saving game state, it is necessary to win the "Fuden Long Opening" before the end conditions of the C-time saving gaming state are met, and furthermore, if the player wins the opening of the accessory in the second special symbol game and the V This is a gaming state in which a game is played in hopes of winning a prize.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 244, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state C include "20 variable display times of the first special symbol" and "the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released". Includes 12 times. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state where the game is played in the hope of becoming a "Public Electric Long Opening Hit" before the end conditions of the C time-saving game state are met, the It is preferable that variable display of normal symbols is promoted. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the variable display time of the normal symbol the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. In this embodiment, in the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the first special symbol is 8000 msec or more (see Figure 245), and the variable display time of the normal symbol is 8000 msec (see Figure 250).

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, instead of or in addition to making the variable display time of the normal symbol the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, for example, passing gates 5125A, 5125B ( By making the passing rate to the first starting port 5120 (see FIG. 232) higher than the winning rate to the first starting port 5120 (see FIG. 232), the variable display of the normal symbol is promoted more than the variable display of the first special symbol. Good too. In this embodiment, the number of passing gates 5125A, 5125B through which the game ball can pass when the ball is hit to the left is greater than the number of first starting ports 5120 through which the game ball can win when the game ball is hit to the left.

Furthermore, in the C time-saving game state, it is not essential that the variable display time of the normal symbol is always the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol. For example, even if the average value of the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter than the average value of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the variable display of the regular symbol is promoted more than the variable display of the first special symbol. Is possible.

In addition, in the normal game state, if the "normal electric long release" of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) is executed, approximately 4 prizes can be expected in the second starting port 2140 per operation. However, it is a gaming state in which it is almost impossible to expect to win a "Public Power Long Open" (in this embodiment, the probability of winning is only 1/32768, for example, as shown in FIG. 248). That is, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a game is played in the expectation that a "big hit" or "time-saving win" will be derived as a result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in any of the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, if it is not a "normal electric long open hit", it is almost impossible to win at the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). This is an unexpected ``opening of a general power short''.

Further, the conditions for ending each of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C working time saving gaming state are as described above. However, in this embodiment, in the time saving game state C, the fulfillment of the specific condition is also included in the time saving end conditions. This specific condition is, for example, when the normal symbol display section 2161 has a display mode that indicates that the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" (that is, "Permanent long open hit"). It is made to hold true when it is derived. In this embodiment, if you win even once in the "Full power long opening" in the C time saving game state, the time saving end condition of the C time saving game state is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. The time-saving end condition of the time-saving game state C may be satisfied if the player wins the "long opening win" a specified number of times. In addition, instead of the time saving termination condition being satisfied based on "when a long electric power line is opened", the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the completion of the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on "when a long electric power line is opened". The time saving end condition of the C time saving game state may be satisfied. Furthermore, it is not essential to make the "hit on the opening of the long line" as the time saving termination condition of the C time-saving gaming state, and even if you win the "hit on the opening of the long line", the C time saving gaming state should not be ended. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, the establishment of the above-mentioned specific condition is set as the termination condition for the C time-saving gaming state, but instead of or in addition to the establishment of the above-mentioned specific condition as the terminating condition for the C time-saving gaming state, the completion condition for the B time-saving gaming state is You can also use it as

[6-5. Main control processing]
Below, different processes among the time saving management processes explained in the first pachinko game machine etc. will be mainly explained.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, etc., the time saving counter is decremented when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, but in this sixth pachinko game In the machine, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first time saving counter is subtracted, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the second time saving counter is subtracted. There is a case where the end condition of the time saving game state is that the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol becomes a specified value, and This is to make it possible to deal with both cases where the condition for ending the time-saving game state is that one of the variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified value. However, in the first pachinko gaming machine, etc., instead of setting the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol to a specified value as the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state. In addition or in addition, it goes without saying that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state may be set when either one of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol reaches a specified value.

[6-5-1. Time-saving counter update processing]
First, the time-saving counter update process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter updating process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S2151).

If it is determined in S2151 that the time-saving flag is not on, that is, the time-saving flag is off (NO in S2151), the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving counter update process and replaces the process with the counter update process (Fig. 33).

If it is determined in S2151 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S2151), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2152.

In S2152, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the first time saving counter is greater than zero.

In S2152, if it is determined that the first special symbol is variable display and the first time saving counter is larger than 0 (YES in S2152), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2153.

On the other hand, in S2152, if it is determined that the first special symbol is variable display and the first time saving counter is not determined to be greater than 0 (NO determination in S2152), that is, the first special symbol is variable display. If either of the following conditions is not satisfied: the first time saving counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2154.

In S2153, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the first time saving counter. After executing the process in S2153, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2154.

In S2154, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the second time saving counter is greater than zero.

In S2154, if it is determined that the second special symbol is variable display and the second time saving counter is larger than 0 (YES determination in S2154), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2155.

On the other hand, in S2154, if it is determined that the second special symbol is variable display and the second time saving counter is not determined to be greater than 0 (NO determination in S2154), that is, the second special symbol is variable display. If either of the conditions of 1 and 2 and that the second time-saving counter is greater than 0 is not satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

In S2155, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the second time saving counter. After executing the process of S2155, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[6-5-2. Counter judgment processing]
Next, counter determination processing, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S2161). Details of this time saving transition determination will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. After executing the process in S2161, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2162.

In S2162, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving transition processing. Details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 254. After executing the process in S2162, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2163.

In S2163, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the time saving mode is 2 or 4. Note that, as explained in the first pachinko game machine and the like, the time saving mode is set to 2 when transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 2 is the B time saving gaming state.

In addition, in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z1", for example, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end process, The main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 1. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving gaming state.

Further, in the following case, for example, in the special symbol game end setting process in the jackpot end process (see S282 in FIG. 42), the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 4.
- If you win a jackpot in A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state or C working time saving gaming state and the selected symbol command (see FIG. 244) is "z1".
- If you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state or C time saving gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6".
- If you win by opening the accessory in the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state (the selected symbol command is "z5") and win a V prize.

That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 4 is also the A time saving gaming state. However, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state A are different depending on whether the time-saving mode is 1 or 4.

In S2163, if it is determined that the time saving mode is 2 or 4 (YES in S2163), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2164.

In S2164, the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, whether the requirements expressed by the following equation (1) are satisfied.
H-(first time saving counter + second time saving counter)≦K...Formula (1)

In addition, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 2201 determines the end of the A-time saving gaming state in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot ending process. Set conditions. In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 2201 determines the B time saving game state, which is related to the variable display number of special symbols, in the B time saving control mode determination process (see S2182 in FIG. 254 described later), which will be described in detail later. Decide on the termination conditions, etc. In addition, if the time-saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 determines the C-time-saving game state, which is related to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed, in the C-time-saving control mode determination process (see S2185 in FIG. 254 described below), which will be described in detail later. Decide on termination conditions, etc. In each of the above processes (S282, S2182, S2185), when setting the end condition of the time-saving game state related to the variable display number of special symbols, the main CPU 2201 sets both the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter, and , set the values of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1). "H" is the sum of the value set in the first time saving counter and the value set in the second time saving counter, and "K" is the value for ending the time saving game state.

For example, if the selected symbol command (see FIG. 244) is "z5" when the accessory is released and a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 sets 12 to the first time-saving counter as a condition for ending the A-time saving game state. Set the second time saving counter to 12, set "H" to 24, and set "K" to 12. Also, if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 sets 5 in the first time saving counter, 1 in the second time saving counter, and 24 in "H". and set 12 to "K".

In S2164, if the requirements expressed by the above equation (1) are not satisfied (NO in S2164), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2164, if the requirements expressed by the above equation (1) are satisfied (YES in S2164), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2165.

In S2165, the main CPU 2201 executes flag etc. reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 executes the variable display of the time saving flag, the time saving mode, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the values of "H" and "K" shown in the above formula (1), and the normal symbol. Reset the time-saving general counter, etc., which is decremented when After executing the process in S2165, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2168.

Returning to S2163, if it is determined that the time saving mode is not 2 or 4 (NO determination in S2163), that is, if the time saving mode is 1 or 3, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2166. In addition, as mentioned above, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving gaming state. Further, as explained in the first pachinko game machine and the like, the time saving mode is set to 3 when transitioning to the C time saving gaming state. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 3 is the C time saving gaming state.

In S2166, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first time saving counter is smaller than 1 or the second time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S2166, if the first time-saving counter is not less than 1 and the second time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO determination in S2166), that is, both the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter are 1 or more. If so, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2166, if the first time-saving counter is smaller than 1 or the second time-saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2166), that is, at least one of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter If either is smaller than 1, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2167.

In S2167, the main CPU 2201 executes flag etc. reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, the time-saving mode, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the time-saving general counter, etc. If any values have been set, these values will also be reset. After executing the process in S2167, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2168.

In S2168, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing (S2169) for the time saving shift command. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the production control command sending process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . After the process of S2169, the main CPU 2201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[6-5-3. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time saving transition determination process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine, etc., will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 253 differs from the time saving transition process determination process in FIG. 37 in that the process of S191 executed in FIG. 37 is not executed. This is because in this sixth pachinko game machine, the probability change flag is never set on.

In the time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 253, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (S2171), turning on the ceiling count prohibition flag (S2172), The processes of turning on the flag (S2173) and turning on the ceiling reaching flag (S2174) are executed. These processes are executed in FIG. 37, respectively: determining whether the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (S192), turning on the ceiling count prohibition flag (S193), and turning on the ceiling flag (S193). Since these processes are the same as those of S194) and ceiling reaching flag ON (S196), their explanation will be omitted.

Further, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and clears the ceiling counter when the condition device is activated. However, the process of setting the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and/or clearing the ceiling counter is executed not only when the conditional device is activated, but also when clearing the RAM due to a setting change (for example, in the setting change process of FIG. 47). The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) that is called as a subroutine during execution, or when clearing the RAM without changing settings (for example, the first normal pre-game processing that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the startup initial setting process in FIG. 24). It may also be executed during the game pre-processing (see S56).

[6-5-4. Time-saving migration process]
Next, the time saving transition process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the ceiling flag is on (S2181).

If it is determined in S2181 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S2181), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2182.

In S2182, the main CPU 2201 executes B time saving control mode determination processing as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the end conditions of the B time saving game state, the time saving mode, the type of the B time saving gaming state, etc. are set.

The end conditions of the B time-saving game state determined in the B time-saving control mode determination process (S2182) are, for example, the end condition related to the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed, and the end condition related to the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed. , each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above-mentioned formula (1), and an end condition related to the variable display number of normal symbols. In addition, the termination conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (for example, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times "Permanent Electric Long Open" is derived, etc.) are included in the termination condition of the B time-saving game state. You can do it like this.

Further, the time saving mode determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) is 2, for example.

Further, the types of the B time saving gaming state determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) are, for example, the B time saving gaming state in which the ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state, and the B time saving gaming state in which the ceiling is reached in the C time saving gaming state. This information is used to distinguish between It should be noted that the B time-saving gaming state in which the ceiling has been reached in the normal gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state in which the ceiling has been reached in the C time-saving gaming state may be distinguished by differentiating the determined time-saving modes. .

Returning to S2181, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S2181), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2183.

In S2183, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S2183, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S2183), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving transition process and transfers the process to the counter determination process. (See Figure 252).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2183 that the time saving flag is on (YES determination in S2183), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2184.

In S2184, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the time saving flag is off.

If it is determined in S2184 that the time saving flag is not off (NO determination in S2184), that is, if the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving transition process and converts the process to the counter determination process (Fig. 252).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2184 that the time saving flag is off (YES in S2184), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2185.

In S2185, the main CPU 2201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, the time-saving mode, etc. are determined. After executing the process in S2185, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2186.

The end conditions of the C time-saving game state determined in the C time-saving control mode determination process (S2185) are, for example, the end condition related to the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed, and the end condition related to the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed. and termination conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (for example, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times "normal electric long opening hit" is derived, etc.).

Further, the time saving mode determined in the C time saving control mode determination process (S2185) is, for example, 3.

In S2186, the main CPU 2201 executes time saving setting processing. This time saving setting process will be explained below.

[6-5-5. Time-saving setting process]
Next, time saving setting processing, which is one of the processing different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S2191).

If it is determined in S2191 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S2191), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2192. In addition, in this embodiment, the YES determination in S2191 is made only when the ceiling is reached in the time-saving gaming state C, since the ceiling is not reached in the time-saving gaming state A. In this respect, for example, not only when the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving game state, but also when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state in which the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. This is different from the first pachinko game machine etc. that can play the game.

In S2192, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving counter resetting processing. This process is executed when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first. It is determined which of the number of time reductions is greater, and the larger number of time reductions between the remaining number of time reductions and the new number of time reductions is reset as a new time reduction counter. In this case, the time saving performance to be executed is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the B time saving game state is executed in a state in which the C time saving game state is executed first, the remaining number of time savings in the C time saving game state is greater than the time saving number in the B time saving game state. The number of time savings in the B time saving gaming state is always greater than the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In such a case, in the time-saving counter resetting process (see S2192), it is not necessary to determine which of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-savings) and the new number of time-savings (i.e., the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving game state). There is no need to judge whether there are many. Therefore, in such a case, the main CPU 2201 resets the number of time savings in the B time-saving game state as a new time-saving counter without determining which of the remaining number of time-savings and the new number of time-savings is greater. You can also do this.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 2140 (see FIG. 232)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, or/and opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 2146, etc.

Returning to S2191, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S2191), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2193.

In S2193, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving mode setting processing. In this process, the time saving end conditions determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S2185) (ending conditions related to the variable display number of the first special symbol, variable display number of the second special symbol, Termination conditions related to the number of times of display, each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above-mentioned formula (1), termination conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146, etc.) and the time saving mode are set. After executing the process in S2193, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2194.

In S2194, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S2194, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 254).

[6-5-6. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving game determination process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time-saving normal figure determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving normal symbol determination process shown in FIG. 256 is executed, for example, in the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) of the normal symbol control process described in the first pachinko game machine. Although the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is not shown as a subroutine in FIG. 43, in this sixth pachinko game machine, the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is called as a subroutine. It should be noted that this time-saving normal figure determination process may be performed before the normal electric accessory release process (see S296 in FIG. 43) is completed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving mode is 3, that is, whether or not the C time saving game state is in progress (S2201).

In S2201, if it is determined that the time saving mode is not 3 (if NO is determined in S2201), that is, if it is determined that the C time saving game state is not in progress, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal map determination process and returns to the process. is returned to the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the time saving mode is 3 (YES in S2201), that is, if it is determined that the C time saving gaming state is in progress, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2202. .

In S2202, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a "Public Electric Power Long Opening Hit", that is, whether or not the stopped normal symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a "Public Electric Power Long Opening Hit".

If it is determined in S2202 that it is not a "normal power long open hit" (NO determination in S2202), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2204. In this embodiment, since the probability of winning the "normal symbol" is 100%, if the "normal power short circuit opening" is won, S2202 is determined as NO. However, if the pachinko game machine has a specification in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is not 100%, a NO determination is made in S2202 even if the player does not win (losing) a winning symbol.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2202 that it is a "normal power long open hit" (YES determination in S2202), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2203.

In S2203, the main CPU 2201 executes flag etc. reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, the time-saving mode, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the time-saving general counter, etc. If any values have been set, these values will also be reset. After executing the process in S2203, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2204.

In S2204, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 performs a time-saving shift command transmission reservation process (S2205). In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the production control command sending process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . After the process of S2205, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal symbol determination process and returns the process to the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43).

In this way, the main CPU 2201 terminates the C time-saving game state when the "normal electric long open hit" is derived in the C time-saving game state.

Incidentally, when the "Fuden Long Opening Win" is derived and a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to a jackpot game state. On the other hand, if the V winning is not made even though the "Fuden Long Opening Win" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal gaming state.

In addition, as described above, when the "normal electric long open hit" is derived in the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be ended. In this case, the "normal electric long opening hit" is derived, and the game ball is placed in the second starting hole at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated, and the accessory opening hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol game. When the V attacker 2152 releases the ball, the probability of winning a V prize is close to 100% as long as the right hand is played, so the B time-saving gaming state is originally a blissful gaming state for the player. However, in such a B time-saving gaming state, if a V prize is not won even though the "Fuden Long Opening Hit" is derived, the game It is possible to maintain a sense of tension among the participants, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Furthermore, when the normal gaming state is entered in this way, the above-mentioned ceiling reaching flag is on, so in this normal gaming state, unless the jackpot gaming state is once controlled, the B time-saving gaming state cannot be controlled. do not have.

[6-5-7. Time-saving general map management process]
Next, the time-saving game management process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving game management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, since the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol will not be a loss (it is a hit on the short opening of the regular symbol or a hit on the long opening of the regular symbol), the time-saving regular symbol management process is performed in the first pachinko game machine. It is executed in the normal symbol per end processing (see S297 in FIG. 43) of the normal symbol control processing described in . In FIG. 43, the normal symbol winning end processing in S297 is not shown as a subroutine, but in this sixth pachinko game machine, the normal symbol winning ending processing in S297 is called as a subroutine. In addition, in a pachinko game machine whose specification includes a loss in the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a loss, the time-saving win management process is performed by the first pachinko game machine, etc. This is executed in the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) described in .

The main CPU 2201 first performs a time-saving general map counter update process (S2211). Details of this time-saving general map counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the process in S2211, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2212.

In S2212, the main CPU 2201 performs time-saving general map counter determination processing. Details of the time-saving general map counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. After executing the process of S2212, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal symbol management process and returns the process to the normal symbol per end process (see FIG. 43).

[6-5-8. Time-saving general map counter update process]
Next, the time-saving game counter update process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving game counter update process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko game machine. In addition, in this sixth pachinko game machine, when variable display of normal symbols is executed in the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time saving gaming state, or the C-time saving gaming state, the time-saving normal symbol counter is decremented.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving general map counter is greater than 0 (S2221). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving general counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state.

The time-saving normal symbol counter indicates the variable number of display times of normal symbols that can be executed in each of the A-time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, or C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving normal pattern counter is subtracted when the variable display of the normal symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving normal pattern counter reaches 0. , but the invention is not limited to this, and an addition method is adopted in which the time-saving normal figure counter is added when the variable display of the normal symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving normal figure counter reaches the set time saving number. It's okay. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving general pattern counter when the variable display of the normal symbol ends, the time-saving general pattern counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the time-saving general pattern counter is updated. The time-saving gaming state may be ended when the time-saving game state reaches 0 (in the case of subtraction method) or when the time-saving normal figure counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of addition method).

If it is determined in S2221 that both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving general counter is larger than 0 (NO determination in S2221), the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving general counter updating process. , the process returns to the time-saving map management process (FIG. 257).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2221 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving general map counter is larger than 0 (YES in S2221), the main CPU 2201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving general map counter (S2222). After executing the process of S2222, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving regular map counter update process and returns the process to the time-saving regular map management process (FIG. 257).

[6-5-9. Time-saving general map counter determination process]
Next, the time-saving game counter determination process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine, will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving game counter determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S2231).

If it is determined in S2231 that the time-saving flag is not on (NO in S2231), that is, if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving general counter determination process and continues the process with the time-saving flag. Return to the general map management process (see Figure 257).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2231 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S2231), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2232.

In S2232, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the time saving map counter is smaller than 1 or not.

In S2232, if it is determined that the time-saving general map counter is not smaller than 1 (NO in S2232), that is, if the time-saving general map counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2234. .

On the other hand, in S2232, if it is determined that the time saving general map counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2232), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2233.

In S2233, the main CPU 2201 executes flag etc. reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, the time-saving mode, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the time-saving general counter, etc. If any values have been set, these values will also be reset. After executing the process in S2233, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2234.

In S2234, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 performs a time-saving shift command transmission reservation process (S2235). In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the production control command sending process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . After the processing in S2235, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving general map counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving general map management process (see FIG. 257).

[6-6. Game mode]
Next, a gaming mode performed on the display device 2007, which is constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of game mode transition controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in the sixth pachinko game machine. FIG. 261 shows various probabilities for each game mode except the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode (various probabilities in the special symbol game, probability of "Fuden long opening hit" in the normal symbol game) in the sixth pachinko game machine. ) is a table showing an example.

The game mode is a game state that the player can grasp from the outside, and is called the game mode to distinguish it from the internal game state controlled by the main CPU 2201, for example. The sub CPU 2301 controls so that an effect image corresponding to the game mode is displayed in the display area of the display device 2007, which is constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display.

In this embodiment, the above game modes include the first jackpot mode, the second jackpot mode, the normal mode, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), and high-accuracy mode B (false). , challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), special mode, remaining pending mode, and bliss mode. The sub CPU 2301 is configured to be able to control one of the plurality of game modes.

Although the fifth pachinko game machine also uses the term "normal mode," the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko game machine. different.

The normal mode, high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), and high-accuracy mode B (false) correspond to the "normal game mode" of the present invention. Further, the special mode corresponds to the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention. In addition, since the bliss mode is not essential in this embodiment, the bliss mode is not included in the "advantageous gaming mode" of the present invention, but the bliss mode may be included in the "advantageous gaming mode" of the present invention.

By the way, in the description of the first pachinko game machine, etc., the decorative symbols include the left symbol consisting of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example, and the middle symbol consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol, for example. It was explained that the right symbol consists of nine symbols numbered 1 to 9, for example. However, in this sixth pachinko game machine, when the second special symbol game is executed, it is possible to win when the accessory is released, so the medium symbols are 11, for example, 1 to 9, time saving symbols, and chance symbols. It shall consist of the following designs. When the result of the second special symbol game is a winning of the opening of the accessory, the player can understand that he has won the opening of the accessory by stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a chance symbol.

The details of each game mode will be explained below.

[6-6-1. 1st jackpot mode]
In the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to a 3R jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the first jackpot mode is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is normal.

The starting condition for the first jackpot mode is, for example, that the condition device is activated based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal gaming state being "3R jackpot" (selected symbol command is "z1"). It is.

Further, the condition for ending the first jackpot mode is, for example, that the 3R jackpot game state ends.

During the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state, so when the game ball passes through the starting opening (first starting opening 5120, second starting opening 2140) (wins), a special Although the start information of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended, variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, even during the first jackpot mode, the variable display of normal symbols is executed.

(Game in the first jackpot mode)
In the first jackpot mode, since right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the player plays the game with right-handed hitting. In addition, the sub CPU 2301 performs a right hit instruction performance when shifting the gaming mode to the first jackpot mode.

When the player plays a game with his right hand, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. In the first jackpot mode, a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 (see FIG. 232) shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 10 game balls can be won per round) is played, for example, for three rounds. carried out over a period of time. Therefore, in the first jackpot mode, the game ball flowing down the right side area 2107 is likely to win the jackpot 2131. Then, when the game balls flowing down the right side area 2107 enter the big prize opening 2131 (see FIG. 232), for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls per one prize.

In the first jackpot mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot gaming state (3R jackpot gaming state) has ended, it ends the first jackpot mode and changes the gaming mode to the first challenge mode. Migrate.

In addition, when shifting to the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a zone preview effect image that foretells that a zone effect, which will be described later, will be performed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

[6-6-2. 2nd jackpot mode]
In the second jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to a 3R jackpot gaming state or a 10R jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the second jackpot mode is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is normal.

The starting conditions for the second jackpot mode are, for example, as follows.
・Based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the time-saving gaming state (A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, C time-saving gaming state) is "3R jackpot" (selected symbol command is "z1"), Conditional device is activated.
- Regardless of the gaming state, the conditional device operates based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "10R jackpot" (selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6").
・Regardless of the game state, the condition device is activated based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "Accessory object opening hit" (selected symbol command is "z5") and that a V prize is won.

Further, the condition for ending the second jackpot mode is, for example, that the jackpot gaming state (3R jackpot gaming state, 10R jackpot gaming state) ends.

During the second jackpot mode, since the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot gaming state or the 10R jackpot gaming state, the game ball passes through the starting opening (first starting opening 5120, second starting opening 2140) ( When winning), the start information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended, but variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, even during the second jackpot mode, the variable display of normal symbols is executed.

(Game in the second jackpot mode)
In the second jackpot mode, since right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the player plays the game with right-handed hitting. In addition, the sub CPU 2301 performs a right hit instruction performance when shifting to the second jackpot mode.

When the player plays a game with his right hand, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. In the second jackpot mode, the above-described round game may be played over, for example, 10 rounds. Therefore, in the second jackpot mode, the expected value of a large amount of game balls being awarded to the player as prize balls is higher than in the first jackpot mode.

In the second jackpot mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot gaming state (3R or 10R jackpot gaming state) has ended, it ends the second jackpot mode and changes the gaming mode to the special mode. Migrate.

[6-6-3. Normal mode]
In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the normal mode is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities when special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in the normal mode are as follows, for example. The various probabilities shown below are probabilities based on the special symbol hit determination table (see Figure 242), the special symbol determination table (see Figure 243), and the hit type determination table (see Figure 244). The reference table is the same for the game modes.)

(1) When the first special symbol game is executed (1-1) Various probabilities/jackpot... 1/319
・Per role release...0
・Time saving...1/64
(1-2) Distribution rate in case of winning the jackpot ・3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z1")...99/100
・10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z2")...1/100

(2) When the second special symbol game is executed (2-1) Various probabilities/jackpot... 1/319
・Per role release... 1/10.5
・Time saving: 1/10.5
(1-2) Distribution rate when winning the jackpot ・10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6")...100/100

Various probabilities when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the normal mode are as follows, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed, as described above, the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained with a 100% probability, and when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained, , with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 248), and is assigned to a normal power long open hit or a regular power short open hit (the same applies to other game modes to be described later).

(3) When the normal symbol game is executed ・When the long electric power is opened (Select symbol command “fz1” when hitting the normal symbol)... 1/32768
- Normal power short opening (select symbol command "fz0" when hitting normal symbol)...32767/32768

(Transition conditions and destination)
In the normal mode, for example, if any one of the following conditions is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to another mode. Furthermore, the destination to which the game mode will be transferred based on the establishment of the transfer conditions is also shown. In addition, the "winning time saving win" shown below may mean that the display mode indicating the time saving win is derived to the special symbol display sections 2163, 2164, or the display mode indicating the time saving win may be derived from the special symbol display section 2163, It may also be the start time of the next game derived in 2164 (the same applies to other game modes).
・Win the 3R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the first jackpot mode ・Win the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z2”, “z6”) (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・Win a short time hit (selected symbol command “z0”, “z4”) ⇒ Shift to high-precision mode A ・“Permanent long open hit” is derived ⇒ Shift to 2nd challenge mode・Ceiling counter reaches ceiling value ⇒ Transition to bliss mode

Although the frequency of occurrence is extremely low, a game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) opens based on "normal power short circuit opening". , If the result of the second special symbol game is an opening of the accessory (the selected symbol command is "z5") and a V win, the game shifts to the second jackpot mode.

(Direction)
In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays on the display device 2007 a normal performance image that allows the player to understand that the game mode is not advantageous.

Although not particularly illustrated, the display device 2007 includes, for example, a main area that occupies most of the display area, and a small, inconspicuous sub-area, for example, at one corner of the display area. The sub CPU 2301 performs variable display effects using decorative patterns in this main area. Further, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display effects using mini symbols in the sub area. Note that the main area is the area that the player pays the most attention to and visually recognizes, while the sub area is the area that the player is less likely to pay attention to.

In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the main area, and a variable display effect of a mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Display in sub area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to a normal pattern may be displayed in the main area, and a variable display effect of a mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be displayed in the sub area. It may be displayed. Also, for example, mini symbol A and mini symbol B may be displayed in the sub-area, the variable display performance of mini symbol A is performed in correspondence with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variable display performance of mini symbol B is performed normally. It may also be done in correspondence with the pattern.

(Games in normal mode)
In the normal mode, since left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the player plays the game with left-handed hitting. Note that when the game is played with right-handed players, the sub CPU 2301 issues a warning or a left-handed player instruction performance that instructs left-handed players, for example. Specifically, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image and an effect image instructing left-handed hitting in the display area of the display device 2007, and also outputs a warning sound and a sound instructing left-handed hitting from, for example, the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). output (hereinafter simply referred to as "left-handed hitting instruction performance" or "right-handed hitting instruction performance", and specific explanation will be omitted).

When a player plays a game by hitting left-handed, the fired game ball mainly flows down the left side area 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B (both see FIG. 232). Enter one of them. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side area 2106, the game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) enter the general winning hole 2122 or are ejected from the machine from the out port 2178. be done.

When a game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first starting port 5120 (wins a prize), the main CPU 2201 holds the starting information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). However, when the starting condition for the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, for example, a performance image showing a jackpot with a probability of 1/319 is displayed, and a performance image showing a time-saving win with a probability of 1/64, for example, is displayed.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that a display mode indicating a jackpot has been derived, the sub CPU 2301 ends the normal mode and, for example, shifts to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, and enters the first jackpot mode with a probability of 1%. Shift to the second jackpot mode. Further, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the display mode indicating the time saving hit has been derived from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the normal mode and shifts to the high accuracy mode A.

On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or passage gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 holds the starting information of the normal symbols up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). , When the starting condition for the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, Control is performed to cause the payout device 82 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out is, for example, the same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, or a number of prize balls smaller than that. However, as described above, it is not essential that the prize ball be paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B.

When the normal symbol game starts, in the normal mode, the probability of winning the ``Fuden long open hit'' is, for example, 1/32768, so the player almost never expects to win the ``Fuden long open hit''. I can't wait.

Therefore, in the normal mode, a game is played in hopes of winning a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/319, or a time-saving win with a probability of, for example, 1/64. However, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without winning a jackpot (that is, without shifting to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the bliss mode.

Note that when the normal symbol game is executed in the normal mode and the player wins the "Fuden Long Opening" with a probability of, for example, 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the sub CPU 2301 wins the "Fuden long open hit" in the normal symbol game in high accuracy mode A or high accuracy mode B (true), the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second challenge mode, and in the normal mode In the normal symbol game, if the player wins the ``Fuden Long Opening'', the normal mode may be continued without transitioning to the second challenge mode.

Further, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 performs variable display on the normal symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301 controls the main A variable display performance of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is performed in the area, and a variable display performance using a decorative pattern, mini pattern, etc. corresponding to the normal pattern is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using a decorative pattern or a mini pattern corresponding to a normal pattern may be performed using, for example, the display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when a game is played with a right-handed player, a warning and a left-handed player instruction performance are performed. However, for example, if the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released as a result of the player hitting the right hand in spite of the warning sound or the left-hand hitting instruction, or if a malicious person releases the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) ) may be released using illegal means, thereby causing an unintended second special symbol game to be executed. Even in such a case, the probability of winning the opening of the accessory is, for example, 1/10.5, and if the player wins a V prize, the game mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. Therefore, there are two cases where the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "Fuden long open hit" as a result of playing the left-handed game, which is a regular game mode, and two cases where the second special symbol game is executed in an unintended manner. It is preferable that, for example, hall personnel be able to distinguish between cases in which a game is being played. For example, if the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not being executed, or if the normal electric accessory 2146 is hit to the right even though it is in the normal mode, the hole computer is connected to the hall computer via the external terminal board 2184. It is preferable that a fraudulent signal is output to 2186 (see FIG. 241).

[6-6-4. High accuracy mode]
The high accuracy modes include high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true). In the high-accuracy mode, both the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true) are internally controlled to the C time-saving gaming state by the main CPU 2201. In this embodiment, the high-accuracy modes, high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true), are both game modes in which left-handed hitting is normal.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (jackpot probability, per-accessory release probability) when special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)) The probability and time saving probability) are the same as in the normal mode, so they will be omitted.

However, in the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), even if the time-saving win is won, it is ignored by the main CPU 2201, and the time-saving win is invalidated. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high certainty mode (C time saving gaming state) when the time saving winning is won.

Various probabilities when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)) are as follows, for example.
・Per normal long release (select symbol command "fz1" when hitting normal symbol)...approximately 1/48
・Per normal short circuit release (select symbol command "fz0" when hitting normal symbol)...about 47/48

In this way, in the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), it is possible to win the ``Public Electric Long Open'' with a higher probability than in the normal mode. That is, the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)) is a game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode, although left-handed playing is the regular game mode like the normal mode.

(Initiation condition)
The starting conditions for high accuracy mode A are, for example, as follows.
- Winning a "time saving win" in the normal mode and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the case of winning the "time saving win" in the normal mode, although the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 immediately switches to the high accuracy mode A after winning the "time saving win". The normal mode may be continued, or the normal mode may be continued until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a predetermined number of special symbol games are executed). If you win a "time saving win" in the normal mode, but do not immediately shift to high-accuracy mode A, but instead continue the normal mode until a predetermined condition is met, the sub CPU 2301 will, for example, not shift to high-accuracy mode A. It is possible to perform a suggestive and inciting performance, and it is possible to increase interest.

The starting conditions for high certainty mode B (true) are, for example, as follows.
- Winning the "time saving win" in the remaining hold mode and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving gaming state.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The ending conditions are the same for high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true) (same as the ending conditions for the above-mentioned C time-saving gaming state). Specifically, for example, any one of the following conditions must be satisfied. It also shows the destination of the game mode based on the fulfillment of the termination condition.
- 20 variable display times of the 1st special symbol ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・ 1 variable display frequency of the 2nd special symbol based on winning the 2nd starting slot by "hitting a short circuit open" ⇒ Shift to normal mode (If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss)
・Number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・3R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) won (when conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) z2", "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the 2nd jackpot mode - Won the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5") and win a V prize (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ 2nd Shift to jackpot mode ・“Permanent long open hit” is derived ⇒ Shift to 2nd challenge mode ・ Ceiling counter reaches ceiling value ⇒ Shift to bliss mode

In this embodiment, since the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (true), there is no case where the high accuracy mode B (true) shifts to the bliss mode. However, if the pachinko game machine has specifications that allow the ceiling counter to reach the ceiling value in high accuracy mode B (true), the game may shift from high accuracy mode B (true) to bliss mode.

In addition, if you do not win a V prize even though you win the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5"), the condition "that the "Public Electric Long Opening" is derived" is satisfied, and you can win with high accuracy. The modes (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)) are ended.

The end conditions of the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)) include ``one variable display number of the second special symbol'', which means, for example, ``Public power short This is an end condition that is satisfied when a prize is won in the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released due to the derivation of "open hit". It should be noted that if the "normal electric power long open hit" is derived, the end condition is satisfied at this point.

In the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)), the distribution rate to the 3R jackpot or 10R jackpot is the same as in the normal mode. However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), even if you win either the 3R jackpot or the 10R jackpot, you will move to the second jackpot mode, and in this respect, This is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the first jackpot mode when the 3R jackpot is won.

(Direction)
In high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true), for example, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image on the display device 2007 (FIG. 232 (see FIG. 241) and outputs effect sound from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241) that allows the player to understand that the mode may be more advantageous to the player than the normal mode.

Note that although the above description is based on the fact that the sub CPU 2301 simply displays the effect image on the display device 2007, in reality, as described above, this is performed as follows. That is, the display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, and stores the image data in the frame buffer at a predetermined timing. The generated image data is supplied to the D/A converter. The D/A converter supplied with the image data converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In the following, description of these processes will be omitted, and the explanation will simply be that the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image.

Similarly, in the above description, the sub CPU 2301 simply outputs the output from the speaker 2032, but in reality, as described above, the following is performed. That is, first, the audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC, an audio data ROM, an AMP, and the like. Then, the sound source IC selects one sound data from the plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM of the sound control circuit 2305 in response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, Data is read from the audio data ROM, the audio data is converted into a predetermined audio signal, and the converted audio signal is supplied to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects, and outputs them from the speaker 2032. In the following, a description of these processes will be omitted, and the explanation will simply be that the sub CPU 2301 outputs a sound effect.

In addition, high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true) are internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving gaming state, but the sub CPU 2301 controls high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true). ) so that different effect images are displayed in both modes.

In addition, in this high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the main area, and displays the first special symbol. and a variable display effect of mini symbols corresponding to each of the second special symbols is displayed in the sub-area. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern may be displayed in the main area, and a variable display effect of a mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be displayed as a sub. It may also be displayed in an area.

(Games in high accuracy mode)
Although the effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 are different between the high accuracy mode A and the high accuracy mode B (true), the same control is executed internally by the main CPU 2201. That is, the same game is played in high certainty mode A and high certainty mode B (true).

In the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, so the player plays the game using left-handed hitting. As described above, in this embodiment, in both the normal mode and the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)) which have different degrees of advantage for the player, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode. .

Note that when the game is played with right-handed play in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 performs a left-handed instruction performance as in the normal mode.

In the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the game proceeds in the same manner as the normal mode, so the points that are different from the normal mode will be mainly explained.

When the player hits left, the first special symbol game is executed, and the player wins the short-time win, this triggers the sub CPU 2301 to shift to the high-accuracy mode A in the normal mode (that is, the normal gaming state); In the sure mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), that is, C time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 2201 ignores winnings in the time-saving winnings, and the sub CPU 2301 selects the high-accuracy mode without shifting to other gaming modes. Continue in sure mode.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100%, for example. However, in this case, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a 100% probability; for example, the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) In order to be advantageous to the player, the probability of transition to the second jackpot mode should be higher in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)) than in the normal mode.

However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), if the first special symbol game is executed 20 times without winning the jackpot, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high-accuracy mode. , to shift the gaming mode to the normal mode.

Also, when the player hits left-handed and the normal symbol game is executed, in the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), unlike the normal mode, for example, the probability is 1/48. I won the ``Fuden Long Opening''. In this respect, the high-precision mode A is greatly different from the normal mode in which it is almost impossible to expect to win the "Public Electric Long Opening".

When the player wins the "Public Electric Long Opening" in the high-precision modes (high-precision mode A, high-precision mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the second challenge mode. In transitioning to the second challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed hitting instruction performance and various performances (for example, a chance performance indicating that there is a high expectation that a zone performance to be described later will be performed).

In this way, in the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the game is played in hopes of winning with a 1/48 probability of winning the "Public Electric Long Open". Become. However, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without shifting to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the bliss mode.

On the other hand, if you win "Public power short circuit opening" in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), you cannot enter the game ball into the second starting port 2140 (see Figure 232). Although it is difficult, there are rare cases where a game ball enters the second starting port 2140 and the second special symbol game is executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode and shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode. However, if the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") or a hit to the release of an accessory (selected symbol command "z5") and a V win, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode. Then, the game mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. If the opening of the accessory is successful (selected symbol command "z5") and V is not won (so-called, the opening of the accessory is punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode (i.e., Even if the number of openings per accessory is short, the C time-saving gaming state may be continued), or the high-accuracy mode may be ended and the game mode is shifted to the normal mode (in other words, the number of openings per accessory may be reduced). A blowout may also be used as a condition for ending the C time-saving game state.)

In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the main CPU 2201 controls the normal symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241) to At the same time as displaying, the sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to a normal pattern in the main area of the display device 2007, for example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the normal mode, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern may be performed in the main area of the display device 2007.

In addition, as in the normal mode, there are two cases in which the second special symbol game is executed due to the winning of the "Fuden long open hit" as a result of playing left-handed, which is the regular game mode, and cases in which the second special symbol game is executed due to an unintended left-handed game. It is preferable to make it possible to distinguish between cases where two special symbol games are executed, and to prevent fraud or play in an unauthorized game mode.

[6-6-5. High accuracy mode B (false)]
In high certainty mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, high accuracy mode B (false) is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (jackpot probability, accessory release probability, time-saving probability) when special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in high accuracy mode B (false) are normal mode It is omitted because it is the same as .

In addition, in high-accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the normal gaming state, so if the time-saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. .

Various probabilities when a normal symbol game is executed in high certainty mode B (false) are also the same as in the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning when the normal long line is opened (selected symbol command "fz1" when the symbol is hit normally) is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

(Initiation condition)
The starting conditions for high certainty mode B (false) are, for example, as follows.
- The results of the special symbol game in the remaining hold mode are all losses and the predetermined performance conditions are satisfied.

Note that the predetermined performance condition may be, for example, that at the end of the remaining hold mode, a lottery for transition to high certainty mode B (false) is performed under the control of the sub CPU 2301, and that the lottery for transition to such a transition lottery is won. In this case, if the transition lottery is won, the sub CPU 2301 may transition from the remaining hold mode to the high certainty mode B (false). Further, for example, in the last special symbol game in the remaining reservation mode, it may be determined whether to shift to the high accuracy mode B (false) according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the remaining hold mode ends, the mode may always be shifted to high certainty mode B (false).

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The termination condition for high certainty mode B (false) is, for example, that any one of the following conditions is satisfied. It also shows the destination of the game mode based on the fulfillment of the termination condition.
- 20 variable display times of the 1st special symbol ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・ 1 variable display frequency of the 2nd special symbol based on winning the 2nd starting slot by "hitting a short circuit open" ⇒ Shift to normal mode (If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss)
・Number of openings of the normal electric accessory 2146 12 times ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・3R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) won (when conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 1st jackpot mode ・10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) z2", "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the 2nd jackpot mode - Won the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5") and win a V prize (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ 2nd Shift to jackpot mode ・Win time saving hit (selected symbol command “z0”, “z4”) ⇒ Shift to high-accuracy mode A or high-accuracy mode B (true) ・“Public power long open hit” is derived ⇒ Move to second challenge mode

Although the frequency of occurrence is extremely low, a game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) opens based on "normal power short circuit opening". , a second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is an opening of the accessory (the selected symbol command is "z5") and a V win, the game shifts to the second jackpot mode. If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the mode shifts to the normal mode as described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in high-accuracy mode B (false), there is no case of transition from high-accuracy mode B (false) to bliss mode. However, if the pachinko game machine has specifications that allow the ceiling counter to reach the ceiling value in high accuracy mode B (false), the game may shift from high accuracy mode B (false) to bliss mode.

The above-mentioned termination conditions and destination of the game mode are the same as, for example, the high probability mode B (true), except for the case where a jackpot is won. By doing this, when high-accuracy mode B (false) ends, it becomes difficult to grasp whether it was high-accuracy mode B (true) or high-accuracy mode B (false), which makes it less interesting. It is possible to increase Note that if you win a jackpot, the destination you will move to is the same as in the normal mode.

However, the conditions for ending high-accuracy mode B (false) are not limited to the above, and include, for example, playing the special symbol game for a specified number of times (e.g., a predetermined number of times, a number of times determined at the end of the remaining reservation mode, etc.) may also be executed. In addition, if the specification is such that the mode is always shifted to high accuracy mode B (false) when the remaining hold mode ends, for example, when the remaining hold mode ends, the stay period of high accuracy mode B (false) (for example, the number of games played) ) may be determined by the sub CPU 2301, and the sub CPU 2301 may end the high accuracy mode B (false) and shift to the normal mode when the determined stay period has elapsed.

(Direction)
High certainty mode B (false) is internally controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201 in the same way as the normal mode, so as mentioned above, the probability of "hitting the long open" is, for example, 1/32768. This is extremely low, and in this respect it is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)).

However, in the high accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 performs the same effect as in the case of the high accuracy mode B (true), for example. That is, in high-accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, the same effect image as in high-accuracy mode B (true) in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), and The same effect sound as in the case of certainty mode B (true) is output from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). Therefore, even if the remaining balance mode ends, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to continue playing the game, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In this way, in this embodiment, similar effects are performed in high-accuracy mode B (true) and high-accuracy mode B (false). By making the displayed background images the same, etc., the appearance is made such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between high-accuracy mode B (true) and high-accuracy mode B (false). Similar performances are equivalent.

In addition, if the winning time is won in high-accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 may shift the gaming mode to high-accuracy mode A, or perform the same effect as in high-accuracy mode B (true). Alternatively, high-accuracy mode B (false) may be continued.

In addition, in this high-accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the main area, and a miniaturized display effect corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. A variable display effect of a symbol is displayed in a sub-area. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern may be displayed in the main area, and a variable display effect of a mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be displayed as a sub. It may also be displayed in an area.

(Game in high accuracy mode B (false))
In high accuracy mode B (false), since left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the player plays the game with left-handed hitting. Note that when the game is played with right-handed players, the sub CPU 2301 issues a warning or a left-handed player instruction performance that instructs left-handed players, for example.

When a player plays a game by hitting left-handed, the fired game ball mainly flows down the left side area 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B (both see FIG. 232). Enter one of them. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side area 2106, the game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) enter the general winning hole 2122 or are ejected from the machine from the out port 2178. be done.

When a game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first starting port 5120 (wins a prize), the main CPU 2201 holds the starting information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). However, when the starting condition for the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, for example, a performance image showing a jackpot with a probability of 1/319 is displayed, and a performance image showing a time-saving win with a probability of 1/64, for example, is displayed.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that a display mode indicating a jackpot has been derived, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the high certainty mode B (false) and shifts to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, for example. Shift to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 1%.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 receives from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that a display mode indicating time saving has been derived, the sub CPU 2301 outputs a high accuracy mode B (true) that is visually the same as a high accuracy mode B (false) or is difficult to distinguish. ). In other words, from the perspective of the player, it is difficult or difficult to distinguish between high accuracy mode B (high accuracy mode B (true) and high accuracy mode B (false) in terms of appearance, so here we intentionally refer to it as ``high accuracy mode B''). ) appears to be continuing. However, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state. In other words, if you win a time-saving win in high-accuracy mode B (false), internally the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state C, but externally it appears that the same mode continues. That will happen.

Furthermore, when a game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or passage gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 holds the starting information of the normal symbols up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). , When the starting condition for the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, Control is performed to cause the payout device 82 to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out is, for example, the same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, or a number of prize balls smaller than that.

When the normal symbol game starts, in high-accuracy mode B (false), the winning probability of "hitting Fuden long open" is, for example, 1/32768, so originally it would be "hit hitting Fuden long opening". Although there is little expectation that the player will win, there is a possibility that the player is playing the game believing that the game is in a high certainty mode (true), so it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Further, in high accuracy mode B (false), when the first special symbol game is played 20 times, the sub CPU 2301 ends high accuracy mode B (false) and shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in high-accuracy mode B (false), if the normal symbol game is executed and you win the "Public power short opening hit", it is difficult to place the game ball in the second starting hole 2140 (see Figure 232). However, on rare occasions, a game ball may enter the second starting port 2140 and the second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode B (false) and shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode. However, if the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot (selected symbol command "z6"), or a role is released (selected symbol command "z5"), and a V prize is won, the sub CPU 2301 will execute high accuracy mode B ( False), and for example, the mode is shifted to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, and the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 1%. If the opening of the accessory is successful (selected symbol command “z5”) and V is not won (so-called, the opening of the accessory is punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode B (false). However, the high accuracy mode B (false) may be ended and the gaming mode may be shifted to the normal mode.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in high accuracy mode B (false) and the "Fuden long opening hit" is won with a probability of, for example, 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. let

Further, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 performs variable display in the normal symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301, for example, In the main area of the display device 2007, a variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is performed, and a variable display effect using the decorative pattern, mini pattern, etc. corresponding to the normal pattern is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using a decorative pattern or a mini pattern corresponding to a normal pattern may be performed using, for example, the display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when a game is played with a right-handed player, a warning and a left-handed player instruction performance are performed. However, for example, if the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released as a result of the player hitting the right hand in spite of the warning sound or the left-hand hitting instruction, or if a malicious person releases the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) ) may be released using illegal means, thereby causing an unintended second special symbol game to be executed. Even in such a case, the probability of winning the opening of the accessory is, for example, 1/10.5, and if the player wins a V prize, the game mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. Therefore, there are two cases where the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "Fuden long open hit" as a result of playing the left-handed game, which is a regular game mode, and two cases where the second special symbol game is executed in an unintended manner. It is preferable that, for example, hall personnel be able to distinguish between cases in which a game is being played. For example, if the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not being executed, or if it is hit right even though the high accuracy mode B (false) is in progress, the external terminal board 2184 It is preferable that a fraudulent signal is outputted to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 241 for both) via.

[6-6-6. Challenge mode]
The challenge mode includes the first challenge mode that is transferred after the first jackpot mode ends, and the "Fuden long open hit" in normal symbol games such as high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) There is a second challenge mode that is entered upon winning.

In this specification, the period from when the starting conditions for the challenge mode described later are satisfied until the second special symbol game is executed (until it ends) regarding the starting information of all the suspended second special symbols is defined as the challenge mode. Define mode.

As mentioned above, the sixth pachinko game machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions for the first special symbol, so if the challenge mode does not end, (That is, unless the second special symbol game is executed for the start information of all the suspended second special symbols), the first special symbol game is not executed. Therefore, even if the game ball hit to the left enters the first starting hole 5120, the first special symbol game will not be executed until the challenge mode ends.

(Starting conditions for 1st challenge mode)
The starting conditions for the first challenge mode are, for example, as follows.
- The first jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) is finished.

(Starting conditions for 2nd challenge mode)
The starting conditions for the second challenge mode are, for example, as follows.
- In the normal symbol game in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), a display mode indicating "Fuden long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display section 2161.
- In the normal symbol game in the normal mode, a display mode indicating "Fuden long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display section 2161.
- In the normal symbol game of high accuracy mode B (false), a display mode indicating "Fuden long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display section 2161.

Note that the starting condition for the second challenge mode is not limited to the display mode indicating "Fuden Long Open Hit" being displayed on the normal symbol display section 2161, but the result indicating "Fuden Long Open Hit" being the normal symbol. It may be set at a predetermined timing before being displayed on the display section 2161 (see FIG. 241) (that is, during variable display of normal symbols). The predetermined opportunity corresponds to, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts (when the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed), or when the right hit instruction performance is performed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbol.

(Termination conditions for 1st challenge mode and 2nd challenge mode)
The conditions for ending the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) and the transition destination of the game mode are, for example, as follows.
・Win the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the second jackpot mode ) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・The 2nd special symbol game regarding the start information of all the suspended 2nd special symbols is executed (at the end) ⇒ Shift to high accuracy mode A or normal mode ・ Ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value ⇒ Shifts to bliss mode

However, regarding the second challenge mode, in addition to the above termination conditions, if the game ball cannot be placed in the second starting port 2140 (see Figure 232) during the first activation of the normal electric accessory ( The so-called second challenge mode is punctured) is also a termination condition.

In addition, if you do not win a V prize even though you win the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 will check the remaining reservation (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reservation") for the start information of the second special symbol. ”), the second challenge mode is continued (apparently), and if there is no remaining pending information regarding the start of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is ended.

In addition, when the second special symbol game is executed for the start information of all the suspended second special symbols, the destination of the game mode is the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode as described above. will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, unless the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the challenge mode is continued until the second special symbol game for all the suspended second special symbol start information is completed.

Therefore, if a time saving win is won in one or more of the second special symbol games played during the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 After the second special symbol game regarding the starting information of all the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is shifted from the challenge mode to the high accuracy mode A.

In addition, the results of the second special symbol game played once or multiple times during the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) are all losers (even though it was a hit on the opening of a role model, a V prize was won) (including the case where the player did not do so), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode from the challenge mode to the normal mode.

(Internal gaming state)
As described above, the first challenge mode is started when the first jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends. When the first jackpot mode ends, the main CPU 2201 internally transitions to the A time-saving game state in which "special 2 = 1" (the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed once) is included in the time-saving end condition (FIG. 244) reference). That is, after the end of the first jackpot mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is executed (until it ends), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state. Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol ends and the A time saving game state ends, the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol ends, and the first variable display of the second special symbol is controlled internally by the main CPU 2201. After the game ends, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode from the start of the first challenge mode until the variable display of the second special symbol ends for the first time, but the second special symbol for the first time After the variable display ends, left-handed hitting becomes the regular game mode.

In the second challenge mode, as described above, in the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the display mode indicating "Permanent long open hit" is the normal symbol display section 2161. is started when it is derived. Further, when the display mode indicating "Permanent Long Opening Win" is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal gaming state, and the sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction.

In the second challenge mode, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode until the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on winning the "Fuden long open hit" ends, but when the "Fuden long open win" After the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on the winning is completed, left-handed playing becomes the regular game mode.

By the way, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time-saving win, the game internally shifts to the C time-saving game state. Even if the sub CPU 2301 internally transitions to the C time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the challenge mode until the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the suspended second special symbols ends (internally In other words, the mode is shifted to the high accuracy mode A after the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the suspended second special symbols is completed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may terminate the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the second special symbols that have been put on hold, for example, if a result indicating that the time-saving hit has been derived. Even if not, the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) may be shifted to high accuracy mode A.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if you win the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") and when the accessory is released (selected symbol command "z5") If you win and win a V prize, the sub CPU 2301 ends the challenge mode and enters the second jackpot mode even if the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the suspended second special symbols has not ended. Migrate. In this case, if the starting information of the second special symbol remains pending at the end of the challenge mode, the second special symbol game regarding the starting information of this second special symbol will be played in the special mode after the end of the second jackpot mode. executed.

By the way, as described above, even if a time saving win is won in the A time saving game state, the time saving winning is ignored by the main CPU 2201 and the time saving winning is invalidated. Therefore, in the case of the first challenge mode, even if a time saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores the time saving win and does not shift to the C time saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is finished.

However, in the 1st challenge mode, it is essential to ignore the time saver and not shift to the C time saver game state even if you win the time saver until the variable display of the 2nd special symbol ends for the first time. do not have. For example, the main CPU 2201 may determine the result of the second special symbol game after executing the end processing of the A time-saving game state. In other words, in this case, even if the result of the second special symbol game for the first time in the first challenge mode is a time-saving win, the time-saving game state A has ended when the result of the second special symbol game is determined. That will happen. Therefore, when the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a time-saving win, the time-saving win is not ignored and the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the C time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the first challenge mode.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (jackpot probability, probability of opening accessories, time saving probability) when special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) (probability) is omitted because it is the same as in normal mode.

Further, when the normal symbol game is executed in the first challenge mode, the winning probability of "Public Electric Long Opening" is as shown below, for example. In addition, until the variable display of the second special symbol ends for the first time (internally in the A time saving gaming state) and after the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time ends (internally in the normal game state) ) and

(1) Until the variable display of the second special symbol ends for the first time ・Probability of winning when the regular symbol is opened (select symbol command “fz2” when hitting a regular symbol)…approximately 1/1.1
(2) After the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time is finished - Probability of winning when the regular symbol is opened (select symbol command "fz1" when hitting a regular symbol)... 1/32768

That is, in the first challenge mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the winning probability of "Fuden long open hit" (select symbol command "fz2" when hitting normal symbol) in the normal symbol game is approximately 1/1.1. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated for the first time after the end of the first jackpot mode, it is not possible to win a prize at the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) until the second starting information is suspended at the upper limit. However, even after the normal electric accessory 2146 is closed, it is possible to expect to win the ``normal electric long opening hit'' in the normal symbol game, so it is possible to increase the interest.

However, after the first variable display of the second special symbol in the first challenge mode ends, the winning probability of "Fuden long open hit" (select symbol command "fz1" when hitting normal symbol) is, for example, 1/32768. The probability is extremely low.

In addition, in the second challenge mode, unless a short time hit or a jackpot is won, the main CPU 2201 will internally control the normal gaming state, so in the normal symbol game "Fuden long open hit" (selected symbol at the time of normal symbol win) The winning probability of the command "fz1" is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

However, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time-saving hit, the second special symbol game for all pending second special symbol starting information will end. If the specification is such that the challenge mode continues until the time is reached, the main CPU 2201 may internally control the C time-saving gaming state. In this way, when the challenge mode is internally in the C time-saving game state, the probability of winning the "normal power long open hit" (select symbol command "fz1" when the normal symbol hits) is, for example, 1 in 48.

(Direction)
In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 performs a zone effect in the main area of the display device 2007 indicating that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot mode. This zone effect is a effect performed while the second special symbol game is being executed, and for example, the background image of the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 composed of a liquid crystal display is made black, and the decorative symbols are This is an effect that makes players expect the game to stop after a double.

However, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the maximum number of times the second special symbol game is expected to be played is, for example, five times (one time of the variation + the maximum number of times that can be held, hereinafter referred to as the "specified number of times"). ”), the sub CPU 2301 does not execute the zone effect more than the specified number of times. However, it cannot be said that there are exceptional cases in which the second special symbol game is executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode. For example, when the player continues to play right-handed during the challenge mode and wins the "Fuden long open hit" in the normal symbol game, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) opens, and the second starting port 2140 (See FIG. 232), if the game ball wins, the second special symbol game can be executed more than the prescribed number of times in the challenge mode. In particular, if the player wins the "time saving win" in the second special symbol game played during the challenge mode, the probability of winning the "general electric long open win" is increased, so the probability of winning is high. Further, even if the normal electric accessory 2146 is illegally released, the second special symbol game can be executed more than the prescribed number of times in the challenge mode. Therefore, the sub CPU 2301 ends the zone performance when the prescribed number of second special symbol games are completed, and if the second special symbol is executed more than the prescribed number of times in the challenge mode, separately conducts a production lottery. An individual performance is executed based on the result of this performance lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 executes a predetermined effect that is not executed during the normal mode or is executed infrequently, for example, as a single effect to be executed. By doing this, the player can easily understand that the second special symbol has been executed more than the prescribed number of times in the challenge mode, making it possible to increase the interest when the predetermined effect is executed. .

In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display performance of mini symbols corresponding to each symbol is displayed in the sub-area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped). In this case, the sub CPU 2301 may also create a performance image that allows you to grasp the remaining number of times in the challenge mode (that is, the remaining number of pending start information of the second special symbol), a countdown performance until the end of the challenge mode, etc. .

Further, for example, when transitioning from high-accuracy mode A to the second challenge mode (that is, for example, when winning a "Fuden long open hit" in a normal symbol game in high-accuracy mode A), the sub CPU 2301 performs the above-mentioned zone production. It is a good idea to create a chance to show that there is a high expectation that the event will take place.

(Game in the first challenge mode)
In transitioning to the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction performance.

When the player plays a game with his right hand, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

In the first challenge mode, for example, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is finished, so when the normal symbol game is executed, approximately 1.1 There is a 1 in 1 chance of winning the ``Fuden Long Opening''. If the player wins the "Fuden Long Release", the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Figure 232) operates in the manner of "Fuden Long Release", and when the player hits the right hand, approximately two game objects are won. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232).

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the “normal electric long open” mode, if a game ball can be won in the second starting port 2140 (see Fig. 232), the second starting The second special symbol game is executed for the number of prizes won in the opening 2140 (maximum 5 (the fluctuation + 4 pending)).

Note that even if it is not possible to enter the upper limit (for example, 5 balls) of game balls into the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate until the first variable display of the second special symbol is finished. Since it is internally controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, after that, by winning the "Fuden long open hit" again, the game balls are placed in the second starting port 2140 (see Fig. 232) up to the upper limit (for example, 5 balls). It is possible to win a prize.

Therefore, for example, if the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time in the first challenge mode is not completed (when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the A time-saving gaming state), the variable display time of the second special symbol is It is preferable to set the time period such that the variable display of the normal symbol can be performed at least once, more preferably multiple times, during the variable display of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is 1000 msec (see FIG. 250). In addition, considering the time it takes for the game ball launched toward the right area to reach the passing gate 2126, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the second special symbol in the A time-saving game state can be changed. The display time is 7000 msec (see FIG. 246).

When the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/10.5.

When the first variable display of the second special symbol ends, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed batting instruction performance.

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first challenge mode even if the start information of the second special symbol is pending. Shift to the second jackpot mode with 100% probability. However, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with 100% probability in the first challenge mode.

In addition, the above-mentioned "even if there is a remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol" means "the main CPU 2201 sends a command indicating that there is a remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol". (The same applies below).

Furthermore, in the first challenge mode, if the player wins by opening the accessory, as long as the player plays right-handed, he or she can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that a V winning has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first challenge mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if the start information of the second special symbol remains pending. let

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player did not win the V prize even though he or she won the opening of the accessory, the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the start information of the second special symbol is pending. If the first challenge mode is continued, and if there is no starting information for the second special symbol remaining, the first challenge mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state.

In the first challenge mode, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends for the first time, the A time saving game state ends internally and the main CPU 2201 controls the normal game state, so the second special symbol In the game, in addition to winning the jackpot and winning the opening of accessories, it is also possible to win the time saving winning with a probability of, for example, 1/10.5.

However, in this embodiment, even if you win a short time win in the first challenge mode, if there is any remaining start information for the second special symbol, the first challenge mode will continue, and the start information for the second special symbol will be continued. If there is no remaining reservation, the first challenge mode ends. In other words, even if you win a short time win in the first challenge mode, the game will shift to high accuracy mode A until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all of the pending starting information of the second special symbol. Without this, the first challenge mode continues.

In addition, the first challenge mode is made to continue even though the player wins the short time win in the first challenge mode, and after that, before the first challenge mode ends, the player wins the jackpot or wins the accessory release. When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won a V prize, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 not make it clear to the player that he has won the time saving prize. In addition, as mentioned above, after the end of the second jackpot mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts from the second jackpot mode to the special mode.

When the first challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to high accuracy mode A or normal mode.

The sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A when the winning time is won in one or more of the second special symbol games executed before the end of the first challenge mode. .

In addition, the reason why the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode is that all of the second special symbol games executed once or multiple times until the end of the first challenge mode are lost (even if the game is a hit when the accessory is released). (including the case where the player did not win the prize regardless of the winning result). However, if all of the second special symbol games executed one or more times before the first challenge mode ends are losers, it is not necessary to shift to the normal mode, and if the predetermined conditions are met, For example, the mode may be shifted to high-accuracy mode A (false) which is visually indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from high-accuracy mode A.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a time-saving win is won in the first challenge mode, the first challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game ends for all of the pending starting information of the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if you win a short time win in the first challenge mode, the first challenge mode may be ended and the transition to high accuracy mode A may be made, regardless of whether or not there is any remaining information regarding the start of the second special symbol. good.

(Game in the second challenge mode)
Since the second challenge mode starts when the display mode indicating "Public power long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display section 2161, the sub CPU 2301 first performs, for example, a right hit instruction performance.

Then, when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the “normal electric long open” mode, if the game ball can be placed in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) The second special symbol game is executed for the number of prizes entered into the second starting slot 2140 (maximum 5 (the fluctuation + 4 pending)).

Note that when receiving a command indicating the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed play instruction performance.

If the game ball cannot be placed in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is activated (so-called, when the second challenge mode is punctured), The second challenge mode ends.

When the second special symbol game is executed, similarly to the first challenge mode, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/10.5.

In the second challenge mode, when a command indicating that the jackpot has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301, as in the first challenge mode, even if there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol. The second challenge mode is ended, and a transition is made to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100%, for example. However, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a 100% probability in the high probability mode A.

Furthermore, as in the first challenge mode, if the player wins by opening the accessory in the second challenge mode, as long as the player plays right-handed, he or she can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating that a V-winning has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the second challenge mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol. let

In the second challenge mode, when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player did not win the V prize even though he or she won the opening of the accessory, the sub CPU 2301 controls the second special symbol as in the first challenge mode. If there is any remaining reservation regarding the starting information, the second challenge mode is continued, and if there is no remaining reservation regarding the starting information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is ended and a transition is made to the normal mode. In addition, in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state.

Since the second challenge mode is internally controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, in the second special symbol game, the probability of winning in the short time is, for example, 1/10.5.

However, in this embodiment, as in the first challenge mode, even if you win in the second challenge mode in a short time, if there is a remaining hold on the starting information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is continued, If there is no remaining start information for the second special symbol, the second challenge mode ends. In other words, even if you win a short time win in the second challenge mode, the game will shift to high accuracy mode A until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all of the pending starting information of the second special symbol. The second challenge mode continues without this.

In addition, the second challenge mode is made to continue even if the player wins the short time win in the second challenge mode, and after that, before the second challenge mode ends, the player wins the jackpot or wins the accessory release win. When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won a V prize, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 not make it clear to the player that he has won the time saving prize.

When the second challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to high accuracy mode A or normal mode, similarly to the first challenge mode.

The reason why the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A is as in the first challenge mode, when the second special symbol game is executed once or multiple times before the second challenge mode ends. This is if he had been elected.

In addition, the reason why the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode is that, as in the first challenge mode, all of the second special symbol games executed one or more times until the end of the second challenge mode are lost (accessories). This is the case (including the case where the player did not win the V prize even though he won the opening prize).

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the winning time is won in the second challenge mode, the second challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game for all of the pending starting information of the second special symbol ends. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if you win a short time win in the 2nd challenge mode, the 2nd challenge mode is ended and the transition is made to the high accuracy mode A, regardless of whether there is any remaining hold on the start information of the 2nd special symbol. good.

[6-6-7. Special mode]
In the special mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, the special mode is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is the normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
When special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in special mode, various probabilities (jackpot probability, probability of opening accessories, probability of shortening time) are the same as in normal mode. Omitted.

However, in the special mode, as in the high-precision mode, even if the time-saving win is won, the time-saving win is ignored by the main CPU 2201, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the special mode. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high certainty mode (C time saving gaming state by the main CPU 2201) when the time saving winning is won.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the special mode, the probability of winning the normal symbol long open hit (select symbol command "fz2" when hitting the normal symbol) is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the special mode are, for example, as follows.
- The second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state, 10R jackpot gaming state) ends.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The conditions for ending the special mode are the same as those for the above-mentioned A time-saving game state. Specifically, for example, any one of the following conditions must be satisfied. It also shows the destination of the game mode based on the fulfillment of the termination condition.
・Number of variable display times of the special symbol is 12 times (sum of variable display frequency of the first special symbol and variable display frequency of the second special symbol is 12 times) ⇒Remaining hold mode ・Number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is released 10,000 times Shift to remaining hold mode ・Win a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z6”) (when the condition device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・Win the accessory release hit (selected symbol command “z5”) and win a V prize (When the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode

In this way, the special mode continues until, for example, the variable display of special symbols is executed 12 times. Moreover, as mentioned above, the probability of winning for the "Normal Electric Long Opening Hit" (select symbol command "fz2" when hitting a normal symbol) is high, approximately 1/1.1. Furthermore, the probability of winning per opening of the accessory is, for example, 1/10.5. Therefore, the special mode is a gaming mode that is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false), challenge mode, and remaining balance mode. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special mode, if a prize is won when an accessory is released (selected symbol command “z5”) but the V prize is not won (so-called puncture when the accessory is released), the main CPU 2201 executes the A time-saving game. Continue the state. In addition, in the special mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that a prize has been won in the opening of the accessory, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or a command indicating that the V prize has been won. If not received, the special mode continues.

However, this is not limited to this, and in the special mode, if a prize is won when an accessory is released (selected symbol command "z5") but the V prize is not won (so-called puncture when the accessory is released), the main CPU 2201 performs A time reduction. The gaming state may be ended and the normal gaming state may be entered. In addition, in the special mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that a prize has been won in the opening of the accessory, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or a command indicating that the V prize has been won. If the message is not received, the special mode may be ended and the game mode may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode, or the normal mode or the remaining game mode may be changed depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold regarding the start information of the second special symbol. Shift to hold mode (for example, if there is no remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, move to normal mode; if there is remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, move to remaining hold mode) ).

(Direction)
In the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs operations that are advantageous to the player compared to, for example, the normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false), challenge mode, and remaining hold mode. A special performance is executed that makes it possible to understand that the game mode is a game mode (excluding the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode). Specifically, in the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a special effect image in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), and outputs a special effect sound from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the special mode.

In addition, in this special mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern in the main area, and a variable display effect of the mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Display the display effect in the sub area. In addition, in the special mode, since there is a small possibility that the suspension of the start information of the second special symbol will be interrupted, it is considered that the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is almost stopped.

(Games in special mode)
In the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed hitting instruction performance. When a game is played with left-handed players, the sub CPU 2301 issues a warning or a right-handed player instruction effect, for example.

When the player plays a game with his right hand, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

The special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A time-saving gaming state, so when the normal symbol game is executed, there is a probability of approximately 1/1/1 of winning the "Fuden long open hit". do. Then, each time the player wins the "Fuden Long Release", the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Figure 232) operates in the manner of "Fuden Long Open", and when the player hits the right hand, he or she wins approximately two pieces. It becomes possible to enter a game ball of about 100% into the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Such operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 continues until the special mode ends.

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the “normal electric long open” mode, if a game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see Fig. 232), the starting information of the second special symbol is suspended. When the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/10.5.

In the special mode, if a command indicating that the jackpot has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode even if there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol, for example, 100% Shift to the second jackpot mode with probability.

Furthermore, in the special mode, if the player wins by opening the accessory, as long as the player plays right-handed, he or she can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating that a V winning has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol.

In the special mode, if the player does not win a V prize even though he or she wins when the accessory is released, the special mode continues unless the special mode termination condition is satisfied. However, as mentioned above, if you do not win a V prize even though you win by opening the accessory in the special mode, you may end the special mode and move to another game mode such as the normal mode. You may make it shift to normal mode or remaining reservation mode according to the presence or absence of remaining reservation regarding the start information of the 2nd special symbol.

Since the special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A time-saving game state, even if the time-saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores this and invalidates the time-saving win.

In the special mode, except when shifting to the second jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 sends a command indicating that the end conditions (for example, the number of variable display times of special symbols 12 times, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 10,000 times) are satisfied. When the sub CPU 2301 receives the request from the sub CPU 2301, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and shifts to the remaining hold mode. However, if the start information of the second special symbol is not pending when the special mode ends, it is preferable to shift to a mode different from the remaining pending mode (for example, normal mode or high accuracy mode B (false)) . Furthermore, even if the start information of the second special symbol is pending when the special mode ends, it is not limited to always shifting to the remaining pending mode, and when the special mode ends, the remaining pending information If the conditions for transitioning to the mode are met, the mode is shifted to the remaining hold mode, and if the conditions for transitioning to the remaining hold mode are not satisfied, the mode is changed to a mode different from the remaining hold mode (for example, normal mode or high-accuracy mode B). False)).

In other words, the special mode is a game in which the number of times a special symbol game is limited is how to win by opening the accessory and win a V prize.

In addition, in the special mode, although right-handed hitting is the normal game mode, if the player hits left-handed, or if the player hits right-handed but the game ball flows down the left side area 2106, the first There are cases where a prize is won in the starting slot 5120. In this case, there is a possibility that the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied and the first special symbol game is executed because the starting information for the second special symbol is not reserved or the like. When the first special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the time saving jack is, for example, 1/64. When receiving a command indicating that a jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode from the special mode to the second jackpot mode without shifting to the first jackpot mode. However, when winning a jackpot, the winning type is determined by the main CPU 2201 with reference to the winning type determination table (see Figure 244), so the number of rounds is divided (i.e., the selected symbol commands "z1" and "z2" ratio) is the same as in normal mode. On the other hand, if the time saving win is won, the time saving winning is ignored by the main CPU 2201.

[6-6-8. Remaining hold mode]
In this specification, the period from when the starting conditions for the remaining pending mode, which will be described later, are satisfied until the second special symbol game is executed (until it ends) for the start information of all the second special symbols that are pending. , is defined as remaining hold mode.

As mentioned above, this sixth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions for the first special symbol, so the remaining hold mode ends. If not (that is, if the second special symbol game for all the suspended second special symbol starting information is not executed), the first special symbol game is not executed. Therefore, even if the game ball hit to the left enters the first starting hole 5120, the first special symbol game is not executed in the remaining hold mode.

(Initiation condition)
The starting conditions for the remaining hold mode are, for example, as follows.
・The special mode (A time-saving gaming state) ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special mode, if you win the prize when the accessory is released (selected symbol command "z5") but do not win the V prize (so-called blowout per the release of the accessory), the special mode (A time-saving game condition) continues. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the mode may be shifted to the remaining hold mode. That is, in the special mode, the condition for starting the remaining hold mode may be that the player wins when the accessory is released but does not win the V prize and there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The conditions for ending the remaining hold mode and the destination of the game mode are as follows, for example.
・Win the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the second jackpot mode ) ⇒ The 2nd special symbol game regarding the starting information of all the 2nd special symbols that have been transferred to and suspended from the 2nd jackpot mode will be executed (at the end) ⇒ High accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false) or go to normal mode

In addition, when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that a V prize was not won despite winning the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 receives information regarding the start information of the second special symbol. If there is any remaining reservation, the remaining reservation mode is continued, and if there is no remaining reservation regarding the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

In addition, when the second special symbol game is executed for the start information of all the second special symbols that have been suspended, the destination of the game mode is High Accuracy Mode B (True), High Accuracy Mode B (false) or normal mode, which will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, unless the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot or an opening of an accessory and a V prize, the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the suspended second special symbols is The remaining hold mode continues until the process is completed.

Therefore, when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won a short time win in one or more second special symbol games played during the remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 can After the second special symbol game regarding the starting information of all the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is shifted from the remaining reservation mode to the high certainty mode B (true).

Further, as described above, if all the results of the special symbol games in the remaining hold mode are losses and the predetermined performance conditions are met, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to high accuracy mode B (false). On the other hand, if all the results of the special symbol games in the remaining hold mode are losses and the predetermined performance conditions are not satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, even though all the results of the second special symbol game were the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5"), if you never won a V prize, you would win the time saving prize. It is clear that they have not. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 2301 always changes the gaming mode to the normal mode without changing it to the high accuracy mode B (false). However, this is not essential, and even if it is clear that the winning time has not been won in the remaining hold mode, if the predetermined performance conditions are met, the sub CPU 2301 changes the gaming mode to high accuracy mode B (false ).

(Internal gaming state)
As mentioned above, the remaining hold mode is started when the special mode (A time-saving gaming state) ends. Therefore, the remaining hold mode is internally controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201 unless a time saving win is won.

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, similarly to the challenge mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving win, the game internally shifts to the C time saving game state. Even if it receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the state has internally shifted to the C time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 will not be able to update the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the second special symbols that have been put on hold. The remaining hold mode continues until the game ends (internally in the C time saving game state), and after the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the held second special symbols ends, the high accuracy mode B (true ).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may terminate the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the second special symbols that have been put on hold, for example, if a result indicating that the time-saving hit has been derived. Even if it is not, the remaining hold mode may be shifted to the high certainty mode B (true).

As mentioned above, in the remaining hold mode, if a command indicating that a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") has been received is received from the main CPU 2201, and if a command has been received from the main CPU 2201, and a role item release hit (selected symbol command "z5") is received. When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won a prize and has won a V prize, the sub CPU 2301 determines whether or not the second special symbol game has been completed regarding the start information of all the suspended second special symbols. The hold mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. In this case, if the start information of the second special symbol remains pending at the end of the remaining reserve mode, the second special symbol game regarding the start information of this second special symbol will be played in the special mode after the end of the second jackpot mode. It is executed in

(Various probabilities)
When special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in remaining hold mode, the various probabilities (jackpot probability, probability of opening accessories, probability of shortening time) are the same as in normal mode. Therefore, it is omitted.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the remaining hold mode, the winning probability of "Public Electric Long Release" is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

However, in the remaining hold mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a short-time hit, the remaining hold mode will continue until the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the second special symbols that have been put on hold ends. If there is, there may be a case where the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time-saving gaming state. In this way, when the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time-saving gaming state in the remaining hold mode, the probability of winning the "Fuden long open hit" (select symbol command "fz1" when the normal symbol hits) is, for example, 48. 1.

(Direction)
In this remaining reservation mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs a zone effect in the main area of the display device 2007 in the same manner as in the challenge mode.

In addition, in this remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern in the main area, and displays the mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. A variable display effect is displayed in the sub area (however, the mini pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is always stopped).

(Games in remaining hold mode)
In the remaining reserve mode, when the second special symbol game of the remaining reserve is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/10.5.

When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that a jackpot has been won in the remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 ends the remaining hold mode even if there is a remaining hold regarding the start information of the second special symbol, and, for example, the remaining hold is 100%. Shift to the second jackpot mode with a probability of .

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, if the player wins when the accessory is released, as long as the player plays right, it is possible to win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating that a V-winning has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the remaining holding mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining holding for the start information of the second special symbol. .

Even if a player does not win a V prize even though he or she wins when an accessory is released in the remaining reservation mode, the remaining reservation mode continues as long as the remaining reservation of the second special symbol remains.

Note that the remaining hold mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal gaming state, so in the second special symbol game, the probability of winning the short time win is, for example, 1/10.5.

However, in this embodiment, even if you win a short time win in the remaining hold mode, if there is a remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, the remaining hold mode will continue, and the remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol will continue. If there is no hold, the remaining hold mode is ended. In other words, even if you win a short time win in the remaining pending mode, the high accuracy mode B (true) will continue until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all of the starting information of the second special symbol that is pending. The remaining hold mode continues without transitioning to .

In addition, even if you win the short time win in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode will continue, and after that, before the remaining hold mode ends, if you win the jackpot or win the opening of the accessory and win the V prize. When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the sub CPU 2301 has done so, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable not to make it clear to the player that he or she has won the time-saving prize.

When the remaining hold mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to high certainty mode B (true), high certainty mode B (false), or normal mode.

The mode shifts to the high certainty mode B (true) when the winning time is won in any of the second special symbol games executed a plurality of times before the remaining hold mode ends.

In addition, the reason why the transition to high-accuracy mode B (false) is because all of the second special symbol games executed multiple times until the remaining hold mode ends are losses (even though the game was a hit when the accessory was released). This is a case where the above-mentioned predetermined performance conditions are satisfied (including the case where the player does not win the prize).

In addition, the reason for switching to normal mode is that all of the second special symbol games executed multiple times before the end of remaining hold mode are losers (even though the game was a hit on the opening of a role model, no V prize was won). ), and the above-described predetermined performance conditions are not satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the winning time is won in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode continues until the second special symbol game for all of the start information of the second special symbol that is on hold ends. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if you win a short time win in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is ended and the transition to high accuracy mode B (true) is made, regardless of whether or not there is a remaining hold regarding the start information of the second special symbol. Good too.

[6-6-9. Bliss mode]
In the bliss mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the B time saving gaming state. In this embodiment, the bliss mode is a game mode in which right-handed hitting is the normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
When special symbol games (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) are executed in bliss mode, various probabilities (jackpot probability, probability of opening accessories, probability of shortening time) are the same as in normal mode. Omitted.

In addition, in the bliss mode, even if the main CPU 2201 wins a time-saving prize, this is ignored, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the bliss mode. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high certainty mode (C time saving gaming state) when the time saving winning is won.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the bliss mode, the probability of winning the "Fuden Long Opening Hit" (select symbol command "fz2" when hitting the normal symbol) is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
For example, the conditions for starting the bliss mode are as follows.
- Normal mode, high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), or high-accuracy mode B (false) (i.e., when controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state) ), the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The condition for ending the bliss mode is, for example, that any one of the following conditions is satisfied. It also shows the destination of the game mode based on the fulfillment of the termination condition.
- 500 variable display times for special symbols (the sum of the variable display frequency for the 1st special symbol and the variable display frequency for the 2nd special symbol is 500 times) ⇒ Normal mode (however, the ceiling counter is not updated)
・Win the jackpot (selected symbol commands “z1”, “z2”, “z6”) (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the 1st jackpot mode or 2nd jackpot mode ・Win the jackpot (selected symbol command “z5”) ) and win a V prize (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode

In the Bliss mode, the winning probability of "Fuden long open hit" (select symbol command "fz2" when hitting normal symbol) in the normal symbol game is as high as approximately 1/1.1. Moreover, the probability of winning per opening of an accessory in the special symbol game is, for example, 1/10.5. Therefore, the condition of "the number of variable display times of the special symbol 500 times" is a condition that is not normally met. Therefore, the bliss mode is a gaming mode in which transition to the second jackpot mode is almost confirmed.

Note that the conditions for ending the bliss mode are not limited to the above. For example, "per common electric long opening" is derived, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened reaches a specified number (for example, 10,000 times as a condition that is not usually met), and the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened is determined. (Selected symbol command "z5") but not winning the V prize (so-called puncture when the accessory is released) may also be included in the conditions for ending the bliss mode. By including such conditions in the conditions for ending the bliss mode, it is possible to create a sense of tension even in the bliss mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Direction)
In the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes, for example, a bliss effect that allows the player to understand that the game mode is a game mode in which transition to the second jackpot mode is almost confirmed. Specifically, in the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays the bliss effect image in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), and outputs the bliss effect sound from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the bliss mode.

Bliss mode is a gaming mode when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), or high accuracy mode B (false), i.e. This is a game mode in the B-time saving game state. Therefore, in a pachinko game machine that is not equipped with the B time-saving gaming state, there is no need to provide the bliss mode.

In addition, in this bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern in the main area, and a variable display effect of a mini pattern corresponding to each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. A display effect is displayed in the sub area (however, the mini pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is always stopped).

(Game in bliss mode)
In the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed hitting instruction performance. When a game is played with left-handed players, the sub CPU 2301 issues a warning or a right-handed player instruction effect, for example.

When the player plays a game with his right hand, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

Bliss mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the B time-saving game state, so when the normal symbol game is executed, there is a probability of approximately 1/1/1 of winning the "Fuden long open hit". do. Then, each time the player wins the "Fuden Long Release", the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Figure 232) operates in the manner of "Fuden Long Open", and when the player hits the right hand, he or she wins approximately two pieces. It becomes possible to enter a game ball of about 100% into the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Such operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 continues until the bliss mode ends.

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the “normal electric long open” mode, if a game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see Fig. 232), the starting information of the second special symbol is suspended. When the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/10.5.

In the Bliss mode, when receiving a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the Bliss mode even if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, and for example, the 100% Shift to the second jackpot mode with probability.

In addition, in the bliss mode, if the player wins by opening the accessory, as long as the player plays right, he can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating that a V winning has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the bliss mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if the start information of the second special symbol remains pending.

In the bliss mode, if the player does not win a V prize even though he/she wins the prize when the accessory is released (so-called, when the prize is broken when the accessory is released), the bliss mode continues. However, as described above, if the player does not win the V prize even though he or she wins the prize when the accessory is released, the sub CPU 2301 may end the bliss mode and shift to the normal mode.

In the bliss mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the B time-saving game state, so even if the main CPU 2201 wins the time-saving win, it is ignored and the time-saving win is invalidated.

In addition, Bliss Mode ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, 500 times, but for example, it is possible to win a prize at 1/10.5 when the accessory is released, and as long as you hit the right hand, you can win a V prize. Therefore, there are almost no cases in which the bliss mode ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, 500 times.

In this way, it can be said that the bliss mode is a game mode in which the transition to the second jackpot mode is almost guaranteed as long as the player hits right, and the player can enjoy the best feeling.

Note that when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 related to the condition for ending the bliss mode, such as that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed 500 times, the sub CPU 2301 ends the bliss mode and shifts to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state, so it is possible to win in a short time in the special symbol game. However, in the normal mode that has transitioned from bliss mode (i.e., the normal gaming state that has transitioned from B-time-saving gaming state), the ceiling counter is not updated by the main CPU 2201 until the jackpot is won, so the mode is switched back to bliss mode (i.e., B-time-saving gaming state). There is no transition to

In addition, in Bliss mode, although right-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the player hits left-handed, or the player hits right-handed but the game ball flows down the left side area 2106 and the first There are cases where a prize is won in the starting slot 5120. In this case, there is a possibility that the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied and the first special symbol game is executed because the starting information for the second special symbol is not reserved or the like. When the first special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is, for example, 1/319, and the probability of winning the time saving jack is, for example, 1/64. When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the gaming mode to the second jackpot mode. However, if the time saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores this and invalidates the time saving win.

[6-6-10. Overall flow of the game]
Next, the overall flow of the game from the player's perspective will be explained with reference to FIGS. 232 and 260. The flow of the game explained below assumes that the game is started in the normal mode. Furthermore, internal control is executed by the main CPU 2201, and control of decorative patterns and effect images displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 is executed by the sub CPU 2301. In order to focus the explanation on the flow, descriptions of the main CPU 2201 and sub CPU 2301 will be omitted.

(Normal mode)
In the normal mode, when a player plays a game by hitting left-handed, the fired game ball mainly flows down the left side area 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400, the game ball enters one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side area 2106, the game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 enter the general prize winning port 2122 or are discharged out of the machine from the out port 2178.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 passes through the first starting port 5120 (wins a prize), the starting information of the first special symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting condition for the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that a stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that a stop mode indicating a time-saving win is displayed is, for example, 1/64. When neither the stop mode indicating a jackpot nor the stop mode indicating a time-saving win is displayed, a stop mode indicating a loss is displayed.

When a stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the jackpot mode. In this case, for example, the game will transition to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, and will transition to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 1%. When the game shifts to the first jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state, and when it moves to the second jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, a 10R jackpot gaming state.

When the stop mode indicating the time saving is displayed, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the high accuracy mode A.

When the stop mode indicating a loss is displayed, the normal mode continues.

In this way, in the normal mode, the probability of transitioning to the high probability mode A is higher than the probability of transitioning to the jackpot mode, so it is possible to increase the player's interest without making the player bored for a long time.

In addition, when the game ball that entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the start information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are established, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the winning probability of "Fuden Long Open" is extremely low (for example, 1 in 32,768), and the normal symbol is only variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 2161. Therefore, it is thought that the player is hardly aware of the result of the normal symbol game.

However, if the normal symbol game is executed and the player wins the ``Fuden Long Opening'', the game shifts to the second challenge mode. In the normal mode, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the ``Fuden Long Open'' is extremely low, so if you win the ``Fuden Long Open'', you can move to the second challenge mode to surprise the player. This makes it possible to increase interest.

(High accuracy mode A)
When transitioning from normal mode to high-accuracy mode A, the point that the player plays the game with the left hand is the same as in normal mode, but compared to the normal mode, the winning probability of "Fuden long open hit" in the normal symbol game is lower. dramatically increased.

When a game ball fired by left-handed hitting enters the game ball sorting device 5400 and enters the passage gates 5125A, 5125B, starting information of normal symbols is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls). Then, when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are established, the normal symbol game is started.

In addition, in high accuracy mode A, in the main area of the display device 2007, instead of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the results of the normal symbol game are displayed. However, in high-accuracy mode A, it is not essential that a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern be displayed in the main area of the display device 2007, but a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed. You may.

As a result of the normal symbol game, the probability that a stop mode indicating "Public power long open hit" is displayed is, for example, 1/48, and the probability that a stop mode indicating "Public power short opens hit" is displayed, for example. It is 47/48.

It is preferable that the stopping mode indicating "Permanent long open hit" is a stopping mode that allows the player to understand that the result is advantageous, such as a double or a chance. In addition, if the result of the normal symbol game is "Fuden long open hit", a reach effect is performed on the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, and then a stop indicating "Fuden long open hit" is performed. It is preferable to display the aspect.

It is preferable that the stopping mode indicating "normal power short circuit opening hit" is a stopping mode that allows the player to understand that the result is not advantageous to the player, such as a missed win or a missed reach.

When the stop mode indicating "Public power line long open hit" is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, the mode shifts to the second challenge mode.

On the other hand, in high-accuracy mode A, if the first special symbol game is played 20 times without displaying the stop mode indicating "Permanent electric long opening hit", or if the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times (i.e., normal After the symbol game has been played 12 times), the high accuracy mode A is shifted to the normal mode.

(Second challenge mode)
When transitioning to the second challenge mode, the normal electric accessory 2146 opens in a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" in FIG. 249). In addition, the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 displays a right-handed batting instruction performance that instructs the player to bat right-handed, and a chance performance that indicates that there is a high expectation that a zone performance will be performed.

When the player hits the ball to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, and the game ball hit to the right enters the second starting slot 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is set to a maximum of a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). will be suspended until That is, in the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to five times. While the second special symbol game is being executed, a zone effect is performed in the main area of the display device 2007 indicating that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot mode. This zone performance is one of the performance modes in the second challenge mode.

On the other hand, if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is being opened, the zone effect will not be performed, the second special symbol game will not be executed, and the second challenge mode ends.

When the second challenge mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode. However, this is not essential; for example, if the first special symbol game is played less than 20 times and the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened less than 12 times (that is, the normal symbol game is played less than 12 times), a high probability It is also possible to return to mode A.

While the zone performance is being performed, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the second special symbol game, the probability that a stop mode indicating a jackpot will be displayed is, for example, 1/319, but the probability that a stop mode indicating a hit to open the accessory will be displayed is an extremely higher probability than a jackpot. (for example, 1/10.5).

When the stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed, the second challenge mode is ended and the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode.

On the other hand, even if the stopping mode indicating a jackpot is not displayed, when the stopping mode indicating a jackpot release hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern and allows the game ball to enter the V attacker 2152. An effect image or the like that prompts the user to do so is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

Then, when the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. In this embodiment, as described above, if the player wins by opening the accessory, as long as the player plays right, he can win the V prize with a probability close to 100%.

Note that it is preferable that the stop mode indicating that the accessory has been released is a stop mode that indicates an advantageous result for the player (for example, a double). In this case, a stopping mode may be used in which it is possible to distinguish between a mode indicative of a hit in the opening of the accessory and a mode indicative of a jackpot, or a stopping mode in which it is difficult or impossible to distinguish between a mode indicative of a hit in the opening of the accessory and a mode indicative of a jackpot. You can also use it as

If the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is being released does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, the second challenge mode is continued if there is any remaining hold regarding the start information of the second special symbol. , the second challenge mode is ended if there is no remaining start information for the second special symbol.

After the end of the second challenge mode, if you win a short time win in the second special symbol game played once or multiple times (up to 5 times) in the second challenge mode, you will move to high accuracy mode A. , if all are unsuccessful, it shifts to normal mode.

In addition, even if you win the short time win in the second challenge mode, in order to hide whether you won the short time win or not, if you win the short time win, the same stopping pattern as the one that indicates a loss will be displayed. It is preferable that it be displayed. This gives players a sense of anticipation that even if the second challenge mode ends without winning a jackpot or a prize opening hit, there is a possibility of moving to high-precision mode A. It is possible to increase interest by giving

Further, in this embodiment, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a hit in which an accessory is released, a long-time performance such as a reach-for-win performance is not performed. As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec, regardless of the result of the second special symbol game. It is.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see Figure 245), in the second challenge mode, if the variable display time of the second special symbol or the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is relatively long ( For example, when the variable display time is 13,000 msec), the expected value for displaying the stop mode indicating a jackpot or the stop mode indicating an opening of the accessory is higher than when the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 8000 msec). However, the variable display time does not vary greatly depending on the result of the second special symbol game, and for example, a simpler effect image is displayed than in the first special symbol game in the normal mode.

In addition, if the first stopped symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second stopped symbol (for example, the right symbol) are the same symbol (in other words, if it is a reach), for example, "Kakeen" or "Keene" It is preferable that a special performance sound such as "" be outputted from the speaker 2032 to increase interest.

In this way, in the second special symbol game that can be played up to five times, the second challenge mode shifts to the second jackpot mode by winning the opening of the accessory rather than hoping to win the jackpot. This is a mode in which the game is played with the expectation that it will happen.

(Second jackpot mode)
The second jackpot mode continues until the 3R jackpot gaming state or the 12R jackpot gaming state ends. Then, when these jackpot game states end, the second jackpot mode ends and the game shifts to the special mode.

(special mode)
In the special mode, the time saving function of the A time saving game state is activated, and the game is played by hitting right. In this special mode, when the player plays a game by hitting right, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. When the game balls flowing down the right side area 2107 pass through the passage gate 2126, the start information of normal symbols is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are established, the normal symbol game is started.

In addition, in the special mode, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the special mode, the probability of winning the "Fuden long opening" as a result of the normal symbol game is, for example, 1/1.1 (see Figure 248), so when the normal symbol game is played, it is almost every game. Then, the normal electric accessory 2146 opens in a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" in FIG. 249).

When the player hits the ball to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open and the game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is held. Note that even if it is not possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is being opened, the special mode is continued.

When the second special symbol game is played, the probability that a stop pattern indicating a jackpot will be displayed is, for example, 1 in 319, but the probability that a stop pattern indicating a hit to open the accessory will be displayed is extremely higher than that of a jackpot. The probability is (for example, 1/10.5).

Then, when a stop mode indicating that the accessory has been released is displayed, the V attacker 2152 releases it in a predetermined release pattern, and an effect image or the like that prompts the V attacker 2152 to enter the game ball is displayed on the display device 2007. It is displayed in area 2007a.

When the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, including when winning a jackpot, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. As described above, if the player wins when the accessory is released, as long as the player plays right-handed, he or she can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. However, in this embodiment, the special mode continues even if you do not win a V prize when you win when an accessory is released, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if you win when an accessory is released but do not win a V prize, For example, the game may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode, or it may be shifted to the normal mode or the remaining reserve mode depending on whether or not there is a remaining reserve regarding the start information of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this special mode, the variation pattern and variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 246) of special symbols for high start.

In the special mode, if you do not win either the jackpot or the opening of the accessory, for example, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 12 times (to be exact, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the number of variable displays of the second special symbol). 12 times), the special mode ends.

When the special mode ends, if the starting information of the second special symbol is held, the mode shifts to the remaining pending mode, and if the starting information of the second special symbol is not pending, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

(remaining hold mode)
In the remaining hold mode, the second special symbol game is executed up to four times. Further, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, while the second special symbol game is being executed, the zone effect described in the second challenge mode is performed.

In this remaining reservation mode, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed. Note that the remaining hold mode is a normal gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate internally.

In the remaining hold mode, as in the special mode, the probability that a stop mode indicating a jackpot will be displayed as a result of the second special symbol game is, for example, 1/319. On the other hand, the probability that the stop mode indicating a winning of the opening of the accessory is displayed is extremely higher than that of a jackpot (for example, 1/10.5).

When the stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed, the remaining hold mode is ended and the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. At this time, if there is any remaining reservation regarding the starting information of the second special symbol, this remaining reservation is used in the special mode after the second jackpot mode ends, and is executed as a second special symbol game.

On the other hand, even if the stopping mode indicating a jackpot is not displayed, when the stopping mode indicating a jackpot release hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern and allows the game ball to enter the V attacker 2152. An effect image or the like that prompts the user to do so is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

Also, when a game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. In this embodiment, as described above, if the player wins by opening the accessory, as long as the player plays right, he can win the V prize with a probability close to 100%.

It is preferable that the stopping pattern indicating that the accessory has been released is a stopping pattern (for example, a double) that indicates an advantageous result for the player, similarly to the second challenge mode. In this case, a stopping mode may be used in which it is possible to distinguish between a mode indicative of a hit in the opening of the accessory and a mode indicative of a jackpot, or a stopping mode in which it is difficult or impossible to distinguish between a mode indicative of a hit in the opening of the accessory and a mode indicative of a jackpot. You can also use it as

If the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 during the release of the V attacker 2152 does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, if there is any remaining reservation regarding the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is continued; If there is no remaining reservation regarding the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is ended.

After the end of the remaining hold mode, if the winning time is won in any of the second special symbol games in the remaining hold mode held up to four times, the system shifts to a high certainty mode B (true). Therefore, when shifting to the high certainty mode B (true), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the end of the remaining reservation mode. Since the game in high certainty mode B (true) is similar to the game in high certainty mode A described above, the explanation will be omitted.

After the remaining hold mode ends, if all the results of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold mode, which have been played up to 4 times, are losses, the game will shift to high accuracy mode B (false) at a certain rate. Otherwise, the mode will shift to normal mode.

When shifting to High Accuracy Mode B (False), although the game itself is the same as the normal mode, the same effect as High Accuracy Mode B (True) is performed to the extent that it cannot be distinguished from the outside, so the remaining It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to termination of the hold mode.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold mode, which was played up to 4 times, was all the winnings for the opening of accessories, but you never won a V prize, you did not win the time saving winning. Since this is clear, we will switch to normal mode.

As described above, the remaining hold mode is a mode in which the game is played in the second special symbol game that can be played up to four times in the hope that the second jackpot mode will be pulled back by winning when the accessory is released.

In addition, even if you have won a short time win in the remaining hold mode, in order to hide the winning of a short time win, in the variable display of the second special symbol when you win a short time win, there will be a stop mode that indicates a loss. It is preferable to display the same stopping mode. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as can be seen from the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (FIG. 245), the normal variation occurs depending on whether the result of the second special symbol game is a short-time hit or a loss. The selectivity of A and normal variation B is the same. As a result, in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to 4 times in the remaining hold mode, it is possible to better understand whether or not you have won in a short time. Even if the game does occur, it becomes difficult to detect that the game is in a normal gaming state internally, making it possible to increase interest.

Further, in this embodiment, similarly to the second challenge mode, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a role release hit, a long-time performance such as a reach performance is not performed. As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec, regardless of the result of the second special symbol game. It is.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see Figure 245), in the remaining hold mode, the variable display time of the second special symbol (that is, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol) is relatively long. (for example, when it is 13,000 msec), compared to when the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 8,000 msec), the expected value of the display of the stop mode indicating a jackpot or the stop mode indicating a hit of opening a role object is expensive. However, the variable display time does not vary greatly depending on the result of the second special symbol game, and for example, a simpler effect image is displayed than in the first special symbol game in the normal mode.

(High accuracy mode B (false))
In high accuracy mode B (false), when the player plays a game by hitting left-handed, the fired game ball mainly flows down the left side area 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400, the game ball enters one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side area 2106, the game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 enter the general prize winning port 2122 or are discharged out of the machine from the out port 2178.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 passes through the first starting port 5120 (wins a prize), the starting information of the first special symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting condition for the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that a stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that a stop mode indicating a time-saving win is displayed is, for example, 1/64. When neither the stop mode indicating a jackpot nor the stop mode indicating a time-saving win is displayed, a stop mode indicating a loss is displayed.

When the stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed, the mode shifts from high certainty mode B (false) to the jackpot mode. In this case, for example, the game will transition to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, and will transition to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 1%. When the game shifts to the first jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state, and when it moves to the second jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, a 10R jackpot gaming state.

When the stop mode indicating the time saving is displayed, the mode shifts from high accuracy mode B (false) to high accuracy mode B (true). However, since high-accuracy mode B (false) and high-accuracy mode B (true) are the same or difficult to distinguish in appearance, players may (True) and high-certainty mode B (false) are difficult or impossible to distinguish, so it appears that the "high-certainty mode B" here is continuing.

In addition, if the first special symbol game is played, for example, 20 times without displaying the stop mode indicated by a jackpot or time-saving hit, it is preferable that the high accuracy mode B (false) ends and the transition to the normal mode occurs. This is not required.

In addition, when the game ball that entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the start information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are established, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the probability of winning the "Fuden long open hit" is extremely low (for example, 1/32768). However, in terms of appearance, it is difficult or impossible to distinguish it from the high-accuracy mode B (true), which has a relatively high winning probability (for example, 1 in 48) of "Public Electric Long Open", so it is difficult to increase the interest. It becomes possible.

However, as described above, although the probability of winning the ``Public Electric Long Opening'' is extremely low, if the winning ``Public Electric Long Opening'' is won as a result of executing the normal symbol game, the game shifts to the second challenge mode. In this case, it is possible to increase interest by making the player believe that the game was in high-accuracy mode B (true) (internally in C time-saving gaming state) even though it was internally in normal gaming state. becomes.

It should be noted that when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times (that is, when the normal symbol game is played 12 times), it is preferable to shift to the normal mode, but this is not essential.

(1st jackpot mode)
As described above, in the normal mode or high accuracy mode B (false), when a stop mode indicating a jackpot is displayed as a result of the first special symbol game, the mode shifts to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%. This first jackpot mode continues until the 3R jackpot gaming state ends. Then, when the 3R jackpot game state ends, the first jackpot mode ends and the game shifts to the first challenge mode.

(1st challenge mode)
When shifting to the first challenge mode, the normal electric accessory 2146 is released in a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz2" in FIG. 249). Further, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, an effect image that instructs the player to hit to the right, and a zone preview effect image that foretells that a zone effect will be performed are displayed.

When the player hits the ball to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, and the game ball hit to the right enters the second starting slot 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is set to a maximum of a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). will be suspended until That is, in the first challenge mode, similarly to the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to five times. Further, while the second special symbol game is being executed, the above-mentioned zone effect is performed in the main area of the display device 2007, similarly to the second challenge mode.

However, even if it is not possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is being opened, the first challenge mode will not end and the second special symbol game will be executed at least once. This mode differs from the second challenge mode in that it is different from the second challenge mode.

In addition, in the first challenge mode, in the first second special symbol game, the fluctuation pattern and variable display time are determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see Figure 246), and the variable display time is determined for the second and subsequent games. In the second special symbol game, the variation pattern and variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 245) of special symbols for low start. Therefore, if the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a loss, the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 7000 msec, so during that time, the start information of the second special symbol It is possible to accumulate reserves.

Except for the above points, the game in the first challenge mode is externally similar to the game in the second challenge mode described above, except for the control by the main CPU 2201 and sub CPU 2301, so other explanations will be omitted. .

(Bliss mode)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal mode or high accuracy mode A, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times (reaches the ceiling value), the transition to bliss mode occurs. do. However, as mentioned above, this bliss mode is not essential, so unless you win a jackpot in normal mode or high-accuracy mode A, or win a role-opening hit and win a V prize, normal mode or high-accuracy mode A will continue. You may also do so.

In the bliss mode, the time-saving function of the B-time-saving game state is activated, and the game is played with the right hand. However, as mentioned above, when the number of variable displays of special symbols reaches the ceiling value in normal mode and when the number of variable displays of special symbols reaches the ceiling value in high accuracy mode A, the time-saving function, that is, normal electric The opening pattern of object 2146 is different (see FIGS. 248 and 249). That is, when the variable display frequency of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in high accuracy mode A, the same time saving function as in high accuracy mode A is activated.

However, the time-saving function in the bliss mode may be the same when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value in the normal mode and when the variable display frequency of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode A. In this case, since there is no need to install multiple time-saving functions, it is possible to suppress the control load.

When the game balls flowing down the right side area 2107 pass through the passage gate 2126, the start information of normal symbols is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are established, the normal symbol game is started.

In the bliss mode, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the Bliss Mode, the probability of winning the "Fuden Long Open" as a result of the normal symbol game is, for example, 1/1.1 (see FIG. 248). Therefore, when a normal symbol game is played, the normal electric accessory 2146 is released in a predetermined release pattern almost every game (see the column of the selection symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" when a normal symbol hits in FIG. 249). It is possible to open the game ball by opening the second starting port 2140 and placing a game ball into the second starting port 2140.

When the player hits the ball to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open and the game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is held. Note that even if it is not possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is being opened, the bliss mode is continued. However, as described above, if the player wins the "Public Electric Long Opening" as a result of the normal symbol game, the bliss mode may be ended.

When the second special symbol game is played, the probability that a stop pattern indicating a jackpot will be displayed is, for example, 1 in 319, but the probability that a stop pattern indicating a hit to open the accessory will be displayed is extremely higher than that of a jackpot. The probability is (for example, 1/10.5).

Then, when a stop mode indicating that the accessory has been released is displayed, the V attacker 2152 releases it in a predetermined release pattern, and an effect image or the like that prompts the V attacker 2152 to enter the game ball is displayed on the display device 2007. It is displayed in area 2007a.

In addition to winning a jackpot, the game also shifts to the second jackpot mode when a game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155. As described above, if the player wins when the accessory is released, as long as the player plays right-handed, he or she can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%.

If the V attacker 2152 does not win a V prize even though the V attacker 2152 is released in a predetermined release pattern due to the display of the stop mode indicating that the accessory has been released, the bliss mode continues. However, as mentioned above, if the V attacker 2152 is released in a predetermined release pattern but does not win a V prize, the bliss mode is terminated (so-called bliss mode is punctured) and the transition is made to the normal mode. You can also do this. However, the normal mode shifted in this way is a normal mode that can no longer be expected to shift to bliss mode.

In this way, in the Bliss mode, when the normal symbol game is played, the normal electric accessory 2146 is released by winning the "Public Electric Long Opening" at 1/1/1, for example. Then, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened and a prize is entered in the second starting opening 2140, a second special symbol game is executed. In this second special symbol game, for example, the probability of winning when the accessory is released is 1/10.5, and the player can move to the second jackpot mode after winning the V prize. Therefore, once the game shifts to the bliss mode, the transition to the second jackpot mode is almost confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur when the game does not shift to the jackpot mode for a long time in the normal mode or the high accuracy mode A.

As mentioned above, it is not essential to provide a bliss mode, but in addition to the bliss mode, there is also a first jackpot mode, a second jackpot mode, a normal mode, a high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, a high accuracy mode B (true )), high accuracy mode B (false), challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), special mode, and balance hold mode are not all required; any one or A plurality of modes may not be provided.

[7. 7th pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This seventh pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and is based on the starting condition of the first special symbol. This is also a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of the second special symbol are established preferentially.

Hereinafter, in explaining the seventh pachinko game machine, descriptions of points common to the third pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the explanation of this seventh pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine described below, the C time-saving hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the specification is such that it is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the C time-saving hit may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, in the seventh pachinko game machine described below, the specification is such that when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value (for example, 300 times), the control is controlled to the B time saving gaming state, but the specification is not limited to this, and the B time saving gaming state It may be a specification that is not controlled by

In addition, in the following description of the seventh pachinko game machine, the configuration and processing having the same functions as the third pachinko game machine will be described using the same symbols and step numbers as the third pachinko game machine. However, new symbols and step numbers will be given to points that are different from the third pachinko game machine, that is, the configuration and processing that will be newly explained in the description of the seventh pachinko game machine.

[7-1. Game board unit]
Since the game board unit 2010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine is similar to the third pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 87, explanations of various members arranged in the game area 2105 will be omitted.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Various members such as various control circuits and various switches included in the seventh pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 88, and therefore explanations of these various members will be omitted.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications different from the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 262 to 265. Note that the seventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine described below, the probability change control is not executed as in the third pachinko game machine, and the main CPU 2201 performs variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The game states (game states that are not jackpot game states) that can be executed include a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed, A time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed from the next game after the jackpot game state ends, and a ceiling counter. It is possible to control the game state to any one of the B time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed when the time-saving control reaches the ceiling value. The normal game mode in the normal gaming state is left-handed hitting, and the normal gaming mode in A time-saving gaming state and B time-saving gaming state is right-handed hitting.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 can control the A time saving gaming state to any one of the A1 working time saving gaming state, the A2 working time saving gaming state, and the A3 working time saving gaming state.

The gaming states that can be controlled by the main CPU 2201 are not limited to the above. For example, it may be a specification that can control any one of the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state (a specification including all of the time saving gaming states A to C). However, even if it is a specification that can be controlled to any one of the normal gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state (a specification that does not include only B time-saving gaming state among each of the time-saving gaming states A to C). Alternatively, it may be a specification that can be controlled to either the normal gaming state or the A time-saving gaming state (a specification that includes only the A time-saving gaming state among the time-saving gaming states A to C).

[7-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 262 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

When a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing based on the first special symbol hit determination processing using the first special symbol hit determination random number value. The result is determined as a "jackpot", "accessory object opening hit", or "loss". In addition, when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the special symbol is a hit based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number. The result of the determination process is determined to be a "big hit", "accessory object opening hit", or "loss".

Note that the "hit on the opening of the accessory object" is generally referred to as the "small hit" in some cases, but in the description of the seventh pachinko game machine, it is referred to as the "hit on the opening of the accessory object".

Further, among the "jackpot", "accessory object release hit" and "loss" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, only the "jackpot" is the result that is accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object opening hit", the display mode indicating "accessory object opening hit" is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section The conditional device does not operate just by being derived (sometimes referred to as "confirmed display" in this specification) on the display section 2164), but the conditional device operates based on the V winning. Therefore, if the display mode indicating "accessory object opening hit" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) but the V winning is not achieved, the conditions The device does not work.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 performs the jackpot opening control process (see FIG. 94), as described in the third pachinko gaming machine. In this seventh pachinko gaming machine, the gaming state when the big winning opening control process is being executed is referred to as the jackpot gaming state. In this jackpot game state, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 operates the special electric shutter 2134 by the special electric solenoid 2135 to play a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. If the number of game balls that can be won in the grand prize opening 2131 in one round of round games is, for example, 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2131 is, for example, 10, then 1. For example, 100 game balls are paid out as prize balls per round.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object opening hit", as explained in the third pachinko game machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94). )I do. In this seventh pachinko gaming machine, the gaming state when the V winning device opening control process is being executed is referred to as the accessory opening game state. Then, the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning hole 2155 by being controlled to the gaming state when the accessory is opened (that is, the V attacker 2152 is activated and the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened). If so (if V is won), the main CPU 2201 controls to a jackpot gaming state. This embodiment is configured so that as long as the player hits right in the game state for opening the accessory, he or she will win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object release hit" but no V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 will control the jackpot game state after the end of the accessory release hit game state. Instead, the game state is returned to the state when the prize was won when the accessory was released.

In the V winning device opening control process, the main CPU 2201 operates the V attacker 2152 to control the opening/closing winning opening 2151 from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time, into the accessory opening game state. If the number of game balls that can be won in the opening/closing prize opening 2151 in the game state per opening of the accessory is, for example, nine, and the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is, for example, nine. For example, 81 game balls will be paid out as prize balls in the game state per opening of the accessory object once.

In addition, when a V prize is won in the accessory opening game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the jackpot game state in which a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. In this jackpot game state, the V winning device release control process (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) executed in the accessory release per game state is the first round game, and after that, the round game is performed over multiple rounds. It is a jackpot game state. In this case, the first round game is a game in which the V attacker 2152 is activated and the V winning device 2150 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time, and for the second and subsequent round games, the V attacker 2152 This is a game in which the V prize winning device 2150 shifts from a closed state to open information over a predetermined period of time by operating the V winning prize device 2150. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for round games from the second round onwards, the special electric shutter 2134 may be operated to keep the big prize opening 2131 open for a predetermined period of time.

Therefore, the expected value of the number of prize balls that will be paid out to the player as a prize ball in one game state per opening of the accessory (for example, 81 balls), and the number of game balls that will be paid out as a prize ball to the player in one jackpot game state. When compared with the expected value, the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out to the player as prize balls in one jackpot game state (for example, 100 balls per round game x number of rounds) is larger.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 operates the special electric shutter 2134 in the jackpot game state to keep the jackpot 2131 from the closed state for a predetermined period of time. A round game that shifts to an open state over a plurality of rounds is played. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object opening hit" and a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 activates the V attacker 2152 in the jackpot game state to switch the V winning device 2150 from the closed state. A round game that shifts to an open state over a predetermined period is played over a plurality of rounds. That is, in this embodiment, the accessory that operates as a round game is different between the jackpot game state that is controlled based on the jackpot win and the jackpot game state that is controlled based on the jackpot win and the V prize. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, there may be a jackpot game state that does not include the special electric accessory unit 2130 and is controlled based on a jackpot win, and a jackpot game state that is controlled based on a jackpot win and a V-win. A round game may be executed by activating a common role object (for example, V attacker 2152).

In the seventh pachinko game machine, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, the main CPU 2201 may determine that it is a "accessory object release hit", but this is not essential. For example, the main CPU 2201 does not determine "Accessory object opening hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but only when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. It may also be possible to determine a "win".

As shown in FIG. 262, the special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes special symbols that are executed based on winnings in the starting openings (first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140). (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) as the data used for the hit determination process, depending on each of the 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol, "jackpot", "accessory opening hit", or "loss" The range (width) of the random number value for special symbol hit determination determined in The relationship is defined.

In addition, in this seventh pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the special symbol hit determination random number value is 65,536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random number value and the second special symbol hit determination random number value are generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 262, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, when the main CPU 2201 executes the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, a jackpot is determined with a probability of approximately 1/100.05, It is determined that the probability of opening the accessory is 1/65536, and it is determined that the other items are a loss. On the other hand, when the main CPU 2201 executes the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/100.05, and the probability of a jackpot being released is approximately 1/34.5. , and the others are decided as losers.

In this way, the jackpot probability is the same when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, the probability of winning the accessory is higher when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed than when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed.

[7-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 263 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 2120, second starting hole 2140) and the above-mentioned judgment value data. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol. The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or an opening hit. ” is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 263, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201, for example, transmits the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command, Select "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the second starting port 2140 is one of 30 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command, Select "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z2" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 Select "z3" as the command and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 40 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 53, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 54 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 Select "z8" as the command and select "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) displays the jackpot based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The display mode of the game, the display mode of the opening of the accessory, or the display mode of the loss is derived. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or an opening hit, for example, display modes corresponding to the selected symbol commands “z0” to “z2” and “z4” to “z7” are displayed. . Therefore, the player can determine the type of win by checking the display mode derived on the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164.

[7-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 264 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is based on the gaming state at a predetermined timing (normal gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state) and the selected symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random number of the special symbol. Referenced when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "gaming state at a predetermined timing" is, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"). In some cases, this corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols, that is, the time of execution of special symbol variable display start processing (see S2013 in FIG. 94). In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the accessory release. The gaming state at the time of V winning after the fact is derived corresponds to the "gaming state at a predetermined timing". If a V prize is not won even though it has been derived as a result of the special symbol hit determination process that it is a win for the opening of the accessory, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the jackpot game state.

The jackpot type determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) is, for example, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (i.e., the jackpot game This is the type of A time saving flag that is set when the state ends. In this embodiment, there are three types of A time saving flags: an A1 time saving flag, an A2 time saving flag, and an A3 time saving flag, which will be described later.

The main CPU 2201 sets the determined number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game state (that is, the jackpot opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94)). Further, the main CPU 2201 sets the determined A time saving flag at the end of the jackpot gaming state (that is, jackpot end processing (S2020 in FIG. 94)).

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot (for example, selection symbol command "z1") and the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 executes the round The number is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A3 time saving flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "3" in the jackpot opening preparation process, and sets the A3 time saving flag in the jackpot end process.

Further, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when the special symbol is released (for example, the selected symbol command "z6") and the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 controls the round The number is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "10" in the big winning opening preparation process, and sets the A2 time saving flag in the jackpot ending process.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory (for example, the selected symbol command "z6") and the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize is the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "10" in the jackpot opening preparation process, and sets the A1 time saving flag in the jackpot end process.

In addition, in this example, in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264), the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (for example, the selected symbol command "z7") and the A time-saving game state. The number of rounds and the time saving flag A, which is set at the end of the jackpot game state, are not set in the column. Details will be described later, but in the A time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory (for example, the selected symbol command "z7"), the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize will be the normal gaming state. This is because it is impossible for the player to be in the A time-saving gaming state. Similarly, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (for example, selected symbol commands "z6", "z7"), and the B time-saving game state column indicates the number of rounds and the jackpot game. The A time saving flag, which is set when the state ends, is not set. Details will be described later, but in the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit on the opening of the accessory (for example, selected symbol commands "z6", "z7"), the game state at the time of V winning is This is because it is impossible for the player to be in the normal gaming state and in the B time-saving gaming state. However, in the above case, although not referred to in the jackpot type determination process, the number of rounds and the A time saving flag that is set at the end of the jackpot gaming state may be set.

Hereinafter, in the description of this seventh pachinko gaming machine, there will be a jackpot in which the number of rounds is determined to be "3" according to the gaming state at the start of the variable display of special symbols (selection symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z5") is called "3R jackpot". Similarly, a jackpot in which the number of rounds is determined to be "10" (selected symbol command "z4") according to the gaming state at the start of the variable display of special symbols is referred to as a 10R jackpot.

In addition, in the description of this seventh pachinko gaming machine, the number of rounds is determined to be "10" according to the game state at the time of winning V (the role of the role object with the selection symbol commands "z2" and "z6") The number of rounds is determined to be 3 depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. ) is referred to as "3R compatible accessory release hit".

Furthermore, when the 3R jackpot is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164), or when the 3R corresponding accessory is released, the special symbol display section (in this example, The jackpot gaming state that is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164) and is controlled when a V prize is won is referred to as a 3R jackpot gaming state. Similarly, when the 10R jackpot is derived to the special symbol display section (second special symbol display section 2164 in this embodiment), or when the 10R corresponding accessory opening hit is displayed on the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163) , the second special symbol display section 2164), and which is controlled when a V prize is won, is referred to as a 10R jackpot gaming state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 264, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or an opening hit, A1 The A time saving flag is determined to be one of the time saving flag, the A2 time saving flag, and the A3 time saving flag. That is, after the end of the jackpot game state, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state in which any one of the A1 time-saving flag, the A2 time-saving flag, and the A3 time-saving flag is set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a type of jackpot may be provided in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, none of the A time saving flags are set and the state is controlled to be the normal gaming state.

Further, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 265, in this embodiment, there are three cases in which the A1 time saving flag is set, the A2 time saving flag is set, and the A3 time saving flag is set. , the termination conditions for the A time-saving gaming state (hereinafter simply referred to as "A time-saving termination conditions") are different.

[7-3-3. A time-saving termination condition determination table]
FIG. 265 is an example of the A time saving termination condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The A time saving end condition determination table is based on the jackpot type being determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264), and determines the determined jackpot type (i.e., the A time saving end condition set after the end of the jackpot gaming state). Depending on the type of flag), it is referred to when determining the A time saving termination condition.

The main CPU 2201 sets the determined A time saving end condition at the end of the jackpot gaming state (that is, jackpot end processing (S2020 in FIG. 94)).

As shown in FIG. 265, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions and the number of derivations per opening of accessory items are determined as the A time reduction end condition. When either one of the number of time saving times and the number of derivation times per accessory release determined as the A time saving end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state and controls to the normal game state. In addition, the number of times of derivation per accessory release is determined for each type of accessory object released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7"), but for selected symbol commands "z2" and "z6" and "z7" are all determined as the A time saving end condition, when the opening of any one of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6" and "z7" is derived, the main CPU 2201 , ends the A time-saving gaming state and controls to the normal gaming state. Note that the main CPU 2201 also ends the A time saving game state when the conditional device is activated.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition differs depending on the type of the A time reduction flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in this example, the number of time-savings determined as the A time-saving game condition corresponds to the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol The sum of the variable display count and the variable display count of the second special symbol is simply referred to as "the variable display count of the special symbol"). However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or in place of determining the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed as the A time saving end condition, each of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the number of variable times the second special symbol is displayed is determined as A. It may be determined as a time saving end condition, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the A time saving gaming state is ended.

In addition, the number of derivations per accessory release determined as the A time saving end condition is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) per accessory release (selected symbol command " z2'', ``z6'', and ``z7'').

(If determined to be A1 time saving flag)
In this embodiment, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times to be 296, for example, as the A time saving end condition, and also releases the accessory. The number of times a hit (selected symbol command ``z7'') is derived is determined to be, for example, once, while the number of times a win (selected symbol command ``z2'', ``z6'') is derived is not determined as the A time saving end condition.

If the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time saving flag on at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and from the next game after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is controlled to an A1 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed up to, for example, 296 times. Considering that the start information of the second special symbol can be held up to a maximum of four, if the A1 time saving flag is set to on, the main CPU 2201 can execute variable display of the second special symbol up to 300 times. Become.

Then, in the A1 time-saving game state, when the variable display of special symbols is executed, for example, 296 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

However, in the A1 time saving game state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 296 times, the display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (selected symbol command "z7") is displayed in the second special symbol display section 2164. For example, if the confirmation display is made once, the main CPU 2201 immediately changes the A1 time-saving game state (at least before the game ball can pass through the V prize opening 2155 by executing the game state for opening the accessory). , and control is returned to the normal gaming state. That is, when the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z7") is confirmed and displayed on the second special symbol display section 2164, the gaming state when the variable display of the second special symbol starts is the A time saving gaming state. Even if there is, if the display mode indicating that the accessory is released (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the gaming state at the time of V winning becomes the normal gaming state. .

On the other hand, in the A1 time-saving game state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 296 times, the display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") is special. When the symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) is confirmed, the A1 time saving game state is continued under the control of the main CPU 2201. That is, in this case, the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize becomes the A1 time saving gaming state.

(If determined to be A2 time saving flag)
When the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times to be 26, for example, as the A time saving end condition, and also determines the number of time saving times per accessory release (selected symbol command The number of times "z2", "z6", "z7") are derived is determined to be, for example, once.

If the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag on at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and from the next game after the jackpot gaming state ends, Control is performed to an A2 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed up to, for example, 26 times. Considering that the start information of the second special symbol can be held up to a maximum of four times, if the A2 time saving flag is set to on, the main CPU 2201 can execute the variable display of the second special symbol up to 30 times. Become.

Then, when the variable display of special symbols is executed 26 times in the A2 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

However, in the A2 time-saving game state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 26 times, the special symbol will be released when the accessory is released (any one of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7"). When the display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164) is confirmed, the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, enters the V winning hole 2155 by executing the game state per opening of the accessory) (before the game ball can pass), the A2 time-saving game state is ended and the normal game state is controlled.

(If determined to be A3 time saving flag)
When the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A3 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times to be 4 times, for example, as the A time saving end condition, and also determines the number of time saving times per accessory release (selected symbol command The number of times "z2", "z6", "z7") are derived is determined to be, for example, once.

If the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be the A3 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A3 time saving flag on at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and from the next game after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is controlled to an A3 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed up to, for example, four times. Considering that the start information of the second special symbol can be held up to a maximum of four times, if the A3 time saving flag is set to on, the main CPU 2201 can execute variable display of the second special symbol up to eight times. Become.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, four times in the A3 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A3 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

However, in the A3 time-saving game state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, four times, the special symbol will be released per accessory (any of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7"). When the symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164), the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, enters the V winning hole 2155 by executing the game state per opening of the accessory) (before the game ball can pass), the A3 time-saving game state is ended and the control is returned to the normal game state.

The time saving performance may be the same in the A1 time saving gaming state, the A2 working time saving gaming state and the A3 working time saving gaming state, or may be different between the A1 working time saving gaming state, the A2 working time saving gaming state and the A3 working time saving gaming state. Alternatively, only the time-saving performance of any one of the A1 time-saving game state, the A2 time-saving game state, and the A3 time-saving game state may be different from the other two time-saving performances. When only the time-saving performance of at least one of the A1 time-saving gaming state, the A2 time-saving gaming state, and the A3 time-saving gaming state is made different from the other time-saving performance, the A1 time-saving gaming state may be the time-saving performance that is most advantageous to the player. , the A2 time-saving gaming state may be set as the time-saving performance most advantageous to the player, or the A3 time-saving gaming state may be set as the time-saving performance most advantageous to the player. As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball enters the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 87)), It refers to the winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbols, or/and opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is the A1 time saving flag, in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), when the accessory is released (selected symbol command "z2") , "z6") is not determined as the A time saving termination condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of times the accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2" and "z6") may be determined to be multiple times (for example, twice).

That is, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is the A1 time saving flag, and when the number of derivations of the accessory opening (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") is not determined as the A time saving end condition, In the A1 time-saving game state, regardless of the number of times the accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6"), the main CPU 2201 calculates the number of times the accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6"). The A1 time-saving game state is not ended based on what has been derived.

On the other hand, if the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is the A1 time saving flag, if the number of times the accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") is determined to be two times, for example. , in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 continues the A1 time-saving gaming state without ending the A1 time-saving gaming state based on the derivation of the first role object opening (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6"). Therefore, the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize becomes the A1 time-saving gaming state.

Then, if it is not possible to win a V prize when the first role object is released (selected symbol commands "z2" and "z6"), the game continues in the A1 time saving gaming state, and this A1 In the time-saving game state, there may be a case where the second prize is derived. When this second accessory opening hit is derived, not only when the derived accessory opening hit is the selected symbol command "z7", but also when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6". , the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving gaming state and controls the normal gaming state based on the derivation of the second opening of the accessory (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"). Therefore, in this case, the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize becomes the normal gaming state.

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 266 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 267 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 266 and 267 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

The special symbol variation pattern tables in FIGS. 266 and 267 are tables that are referred to, for example, when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process (see S1037 in FIG. 78) described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 266, for example.

On the other hand, in A time-saving game state or B time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start shown in FIG. 267, for example. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is in the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. 267, for example. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the special symbols may be determined by referring to different variation pattern tables in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state. Furthermore, the variation patterns of the special symbols may be determined by referring to different variation pattern tables in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the A2 time-saving gaming state, and the A3 time-saving gaming state, or the A1 time-saving gaming state and the A2 The variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to a different variation pattern table between any one of the A3 time-saving gaming state and the other A time-saving gaming state. .

Further, in this seventh pachinko game machine as well, it is preferable that a pre-reading effect is executed in the same manner as in the first to sixth pachinko gaming machines, but a description of the pre-reading effect will be omitted here. .

[7-4. Main control processing]
As described above, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include the C time-saving win, and the specification is such that it is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, although the main CPU 2201 does not execute processing (control) related to the C time-saving gaming state, other processing, except for the processing described below, is basically performed by the third Executes the same processing as a pachinko machine. Hereinafter, among the processes executed by the main CPU 2201 of the seventh pachinko game machine, processes that are different from those of the third pachinko game machine will be explained.

[7-4-1. Special symbol variable display start process]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol variable display start process shown in FIG. 268 instead of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95). FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, after executing the special symbol determination process (S2024), the main CPU 2201 determines that the result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in S2023 is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1") , "z4", "z5") (S2024A).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5") (if S2024A is YES), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot. With reference to the type determination table (see FIG. 264), a jackpot type determination process (S2025) is executed to determine the type of jackpot. As described above, what is determined in the jackpot type determination process is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state and the type of the A time saving flag that is set after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, the above jackpot type determination process (S2025) may be executed even when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is a loss.

On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is not a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"), that is, it is a hit to open the accessory (selected symbol command "z2", "z6", "z7") (NO in S2024A), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In this way, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, only when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5") , the special symbol variable display start process (see S2013 in FIG. 94), that is, the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is executed at the start of the special symbol variable display, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is determined as the opening of the accessory. (selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6”, “z7”), the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is not executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In this regard, after the special symbol determination process (S2024) is executed, the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is executed regardless of whether it is a jackpot or an opening hit. different from.

[7-4-2. Special symbol game judgment processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol game determination process shown in FIG. 269 instead of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97). FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 269, if it is determined in the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) that the accessory is released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 Flag processing (S2060A) is executed. This accessory opening hit flag processing (S2060A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270.

Then, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the flag process (S2026A) when the accessory is released, and then moves the process to S2061. In this regard, when it is determined in the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) that the accessory is released (YES in S2060), the accessory release hit flag process (S2060A) is executed. This is different from the third pachinko game machine which moves the process to S2061 without any delay.

[7-4-3. Flag processing when a role item is released]
Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the accessory opening hit flag process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2060A during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory opening hit flag process (S2060A) executed during the special symbol game determination process of the seventh pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the A3 time saving flag is on (S2251).

If it is determined in S2251 that the A3 time saving flag is on (YES in S2251), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2252.

In S2252, the main CPU 2201 executes the corresponding accessory release counter subtraction process. To be more specific, the main CPU 2201 has an accessory release counter (z2) that counts the number of times a 10R compatible accessory object is released (selected symbol command "z2") as an accessory release counter, and a 10R compatible accessory release counter (z2). An accessory opening counter (z6) that counts the number of wins (selected symbol command "z6") and a accessory opening counter that counts the number of 3R compatible accessory releases (selected symbol command "z7"). (z7). Then, when a prize is won at the opening of the accessory object (YES in S2060), a process of subtracting the counter for the opening of the accessory object corresponding to the winning opening of the accessory object is executed. For example, when winning a 10R corresponding accessory opening (selected symbol command "z2"), subtracting the accessory opening counter (z2) is performed as the corresponding accessory opening counter. After executing the process in S2252, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2253.

In S2253, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the corresponding accessory release counter, that is, the accessory release counter subtracted in S2252, is smaller than 1.

In addition, in S2253, it may be determined whether not only the corresponding accessory object opening counter but all the accessory object opening counters are smaller than 1.

In S2253, when it is determined that the corresponding accessory opening counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2253), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2254.

On the other hand, in S2253, if it is determined that the corresponding accessory release hit counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S2253), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag processing and transfers the processing to the special symbol game. The process returns to the determination process (see FIG. 269).

In S2254, the main CPU 2201 sets the A3 time saving flag to OFF. Although not shown, it is preferable here not only to set the A3 time saving flag to OFF but also to reset flags and counters related to time saving control such as the accessory opening counter and the A time saving flag. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), when the A3 time saving flag is set, the "1 time" is set as the number of times each) is derived. Therefore, when the process of S2252 is executed, it is never determined in S2253 that it is not smaller than 1 (NO in S2253), and it is always determined in S2253 that it is smaller than 1 (YES in S2253). Therefore, if the determination is NO in S2253, error processing may be executed.

Returning to S2251, if it is determined that the A3 time saving flag is not on (NO in S2251), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2255.

In S2255, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the A2 time saving flag is on.

If it is determined in S2255 that the A2 time saving flag is on (YES in S2255), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2256.

In S2256, the main CPU 2201 executes the corresponding accessory release counter subtraction process. This process is similar to the process in S2252. For example, when winning a 10R corresponding accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6"), subtracting the accessory opening counter (z6) is performed as the corresponding opening counter. After executing the process of S2256, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2257.

In S2257, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the corresponding accessory release counter, that is, the accessory release counter subtracted in S2252, is smaller than 1. This process is similar to the process in S2253. Therefore, in this S2257 as well, it may be determined whether not only the corresponding accessory object release counter but also all accessory object release counters are smaller than 1.

In S2257, if it is determined that the corresponding accessory opening counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S2257), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2258.

On the other hand, in S2257, if it is determined that the corresponding accessory release hit counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S2257), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag processing and transfers the processing to the special symbol game. The process returns to the determination process (see FIG. 269).

In S2258, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag to OFF. Although not shown, it is preferable to not only set the A2 time saving flag to OFF, but also to reset flags and counters related to time saving control, such as the accessory opening counter and the A time saving flag. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, in the same way as when the A3 time saving flag is set, when the A2 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), per accessory release ("z2", " "1 time" is set as the derivation count of "z6" and "z7" respectively). Therefore, when the process of S2256 is executed, it is never determined in S2257 that it is not smaller than 1 (NO in S2257), and it is always determined in S2257 that it is smaller than 1 (YES in S2257). Therefore, even if the determination in S2257 is NO, error processing may be executed.

Returning to S2255, if it is determined that the A2 time saving flag is not on (NO in S2255), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2259.

In S2259, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the A1 time saving flag is on.

If it is determined in S2259 that the A1 time saving flag is on (YES in S2259), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2260.

In S2260, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the winning accessory is released as a 3R compatible accessory of the selected symbol command "z7".

In S2260, the winning accessory opening is not the 3R compatible accessory opening of the selected symbol command "z7", that is, the 10R corresponding accessory opening (selected symbol command "z2") or the 10R corresponding accessory opening (selected symbol command “z6”) (NO in S2260), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory opening hit flag process and executes the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269). Return to This is because when the A1 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), the number of derivations per 10R compatible accessory release ("z2", "z6") is not set. be.

On the other hand, in S2260, if it is determined that the winning accessory is released as a 3R compatible accessory of the selected symbol command "z7" (YES in S2260), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2261. Move to.

In S2261, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting the accessory release counter (z7). After executing the process in S2261, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2262.

In S2262, if it is determined that the accessory release counter (z7) is smaller than 1 (YES in S2262), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2263.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2262 that the accessory object opening counter (z7) is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S2262), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory object opening flag processing and continues the processing with the special symbol. The process returns to the game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In S2263, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time saving flag to OFF. Although not shown, it is preferable here not only to set the A1 time saving flag to OFF but also to reset flags and counters related to time saving control such as the accessory opening counter and the A time saving flag. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, when the A1 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), "1 time" is set as the number of times the 3R compatible accessory is released ("z7"). Ru. Therefore, when the process of S2261 is executed, it is never determined in S2262 that it is not smaller than 1 (NO in S2262), and it is always determined in S2262 that it is smaller than 1 (YES in S2262). Therefore, if the determination in S2262 is NO, error processing may be executed.

In this manner, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the A2 time-saving game state or the A3 time-saving game state, the display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the hit of the opening of the accessory is the special symbol display section (the 1 special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164), whether the derived accessory object opening hit is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z7") or a 10R compatible accessory object. Regardless of whether it is a release hit (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6"), the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time-saving game state or the A3 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. That is, at the time when the V winning device release control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) as the game state for opening the accessory is executed, the normal game state is controlled.

On the other hand, in the A1 time-saving game state, the display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to the opening of the accessory is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) Even if it is derived, the A1 time saving flag is set to OFF only if the derived accessory opening per is the display mode that indicates that the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7"). (See S2260 to S2263). Then, the display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, Even if it is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164), the main CPU 2201 does not set the A1 time saving flag to OFF (see the case of NO determination in S2260). That is, at the time when the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is executed as the gaming state for opening the accessory, the control continues to be in the A1 time saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, first, the A time saving flag that is established is determined (S2251, S2255, S2259), and the accessory release counter subtraction process is performed according to the established A time saving flag (S2252, S2256, S2261). ), but it is not limited to this. For example, first, it is determined whether or not the selected symbol command "z7" is a hit to the opening of the accessory, and if the selection symbol command "z7" is the hit to the opening of the accessory, the winning symbol is released regardless of the established A time saving flag. Execute the object release counter (z7) subtraction process, and if the selected symbol command "z2" or "z6" hits the accessory release, end the accessory release hit flag processing and turn on the A2 time saving flag or A3 time saving flag. If so, subtraction processing may be performed on the accessory release counter (z2) or the accessory release counter (z6).

[7-4-4. V winning device opening control process]
In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the V winning device opening control process shown in FIG. 271 instead of the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 100). FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, when it is determined in the V winning device opening control process that a V winning is detected, that is, when a V winning has occurred (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). Execute. In this jackpot type determination process (S2095A), similar to the jackpot type determination process executed in S2025 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 268), the number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the jackpot game state, and The type of A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined.

After executing the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In this manner, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, if the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a hit of the opening of the accessory (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"), When the V prize winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is executed as a gaming state for object opening and a V prize is won, a jackpot type determination process (S2095A) is executed.

As mentioned above, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"), the jackpot type determination The process (see S2025 in FIG. 268) is executed at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[7-5. Game state transition when controlled to jackpot game state]
Next, the gaming state transition when controlled to the jackpot gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 shows an example of the transition of the gaming state when a jackpot or a role release hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164). A time chart showing the transition of the game state when the hit to release the accessory is derived in the A2 time-saving gaming state, (B) when the hit to release the accessory is derived in the A1 time-saving gaming state. It is a time chart showing the transition of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 272, for convenience, only the normal gaming state, the A1 time saving gaming state, the A2 working time saving gaming state, the A3 working time saving gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state are shown as the gaming states, but the gaming states controlled by the main CPU 2201 is not limited to these gaming states.

In addition, while it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols in the normal game state, A1 time-saving game state, A2 time-saving game state, and A3 time-saving game state, the variable display of special symbols is not performed in the jackpot game state. If so, it is not preferable to illustrate the normal gaming state, the A1 time saving gaming state, the A2 working time saving gaming state, the A3 working time saving gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state in the same line as shown in FIG. 272. For example, in FIG. 272, it is shown that if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state with the time saving flag off, or win the opening of the accessory and win a V prize, the normal gaming state will end and you will move to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, it can be interpreted as if the time saving flag is on. However, since various flags and various counters including the time saving flag are reset at the start of the jackpot gaming state, the time saving flag is never turned on in the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 272, for convenience, the derivation of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z0"), the derivation of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), the derivation of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), and the release of the 10R corresponding accessory The derivation of (selected symbol command "z6") and the derivation of the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") are simply "z0", "z4", "z5", "z6", respectively. , and "z7".

In addition, below, in order to understand which jackpot gaming state is being explained, jackpot gaming state (first time), jackpot gaming state (second time), jackpot gaming state (third time), and jackpot gaming state ( 4th time). However, the number of jackpot game states is merely for convenience of explanation, and there is no meaning in the description of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 272, the jackpot game state (first time) is simply shown as "first time", the jackpot game state (second time) is simply shown as "second time", and the jackpot game state (third time) is simply shown as " The jackpot game state (fourth time) is simply shown as "the fourth time".

First, as shown in FIGS. 272(A) and 272(B), in the normal gaming state, when a display mode indicating a jackpot (selected symbol command "z0") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the main The CPU 2201 controls the jackpot game state (first time).

If a jackpot (selected symbol command "z0") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 in the normal gaming state, the gaming state at the start of variable display of the first special symbol is the normal gaming state, so the main CPU 2201 For example, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state (first round) is determined to be, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is set to, for example, 26 times as the A time saving end condition. At the same time, the number of times each accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7") is determined to be once. When the jackpot gaming state (first time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and controls the A2 time saving gaming state.

(When the hit to release the accessory is derived in the A2 time-saving game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 272(A), the transition of the game state when the winning role is derived in the A2 time-saving game state will be described, including the prerequisite game flow.

For example, when a jackpot (selection symbol command "z5") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (first time) ends, the main CPU 2201 displays the jackpot gaming state (2 (th) control.

If a jackpot (selected symbol command "z5") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is the A2 time-saving gaming state. The main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, "3", determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (second time) to, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times to, for example, 26 as the A time saving end condition. At the same time, the number of times each accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7") is determined to be once. When the jackpot gaming state (second time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and controls the A2 time saving gaming state.

In the A2 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (second time) ends, for example, when a 10R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 A2 End the time-saving gaming state and control to the normal gaming state. When the opening hit of the accessory is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. Therefore, here, the type of jackpot is determined based on the normal gaming state which is the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be "10", for example, determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (third time) to the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivations of each of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7" per opening of the accessory is determined to be once. When the jackpot gaming state (third time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and controls the A2 time saving gaming state.

In the A2 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (third time) ends, for example, when a 3R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 A2 End the time-saving gaming state and control to the normal gaming state. When the opening hit of the accessory is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. Therefore, here, the type of jackpot is determined based on the normal gaming state which is the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be "3", for example, determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) to the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be four times, and the number of derivations of each of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7" per release of the accessory is determined to be once. When the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and controls the A2 time saving gaming state. In addition, FIG. 272(A) shows a mode in which the variable display of special symbols is executed, for example, 26 times in this A2 time-saving game state, the A2 time-saving game state is ended, and the control is returned to the normal game state.

In this way, in the A2 time-saving game state, when the number of openings per accessory is derived on the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164), the amount per opening of the derived accessory Regardless of the type (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"), the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time saving gaming state and controls the normal gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot based on the normal gaming state which is the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize after the opening of the accessory is derived.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a jackpot or an accessory opening hit is derived in the A2 time-saving gaming state, but the main CPU 2201 also operates when a jackpot or an accessory opening hit is derived in the A3 time-saving gaming state. A2 The same process as when a jackpot or an accessory opening hit is derived in the time saving game state is executed.

(When the hit to release the accessory is derived in the A1 time-saving game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 272(B), the transition of the game state when the winning role is derived in the A1 time-saving game state will be described, including the prerequisite game flow.

For example, when a jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (first time) has ended, the main CPU 2201 displays the jackpot gaming state (2 (th) control.

If a jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is the A2 time-saving gaming state. The main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, "10", determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (second time) to, for example, the A1 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times to, for example, 296 as the A time saving end condition. At the same time, the number of times the 3R corresponding accessory is released (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be once. In addition, the number of times the 10R corresponding accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2" and "z6") is not determined. Then, when the jackpot gaming state (second time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time saving flag and controls the A1 time saving gaming state.

For example, in the A1 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (second time) has ended, if a hit to release the accessory (selected symbol command “z6”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 The A1 time saving game state is continued without controlling the state. When the opening hit of the accessory is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. Therefore, here, the jackpot type is determined based on the A1 time-saving gaming state, which is the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, "10", determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (third time) to, for example, the A1 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 296 times, and the number of times the selected symbol command "z7" is derived per opening of the 3R compatible accessory is determined to be once. Note that the number of times the selected symbol command "z2" or "z6" is derived per opening of the 10R corresponding accessory is not determined. When the jackpot gaming state (third time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time saving flag and controls the A1 time saving gaming state again. In this way, the A1 time saving game state is looped.

For example, in the A1 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (third time) ends, if a 3R-compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the 3R-compatible accessory Since the number of derivations per release (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be one, the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time saving gaming state and controls the normal gaming state. When the opening hit of the accessory is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. Therefore, here, the type of jackpot is determined based on the normal gaming state which is the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be "3", for example, determines the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) to the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivations of each of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7" per opening of the accessory is determined to be once. When the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and controls the A2 time saving gaming state.

In this way, in the A1 time-saving game state, when the number of openings per accessory object is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164), the number of the derived accessory object opening per opening is Depending on the type, the A1 time-saving gaming state is maintained, or the A1 time-saving gaming state is ended and controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize after the opening hit of the accessory is derived.

[7-6. Production mode]
Next, the presentation mode performed on the display device 2007, which is configured with, for example, a liquid crystal display, will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a table showing an example of the relationship between the production mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 and the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 2201 in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The performance mode is a game state that the player can grasp from the outside, and is called the performance mode to distinguish it from, for example, an internal game state controlled by the main CPU 2201. The sub CPU 2301 controls so that an effect image according to the effect mode is displayed in the display area of the display device 2007, which is constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display.

In this embodiment, the above performance modes include a normal mode, a super special mode, a special mode, a chance mode, a blissful time mode, a first jackpot mode, and a second jackpot mode. The sub CPU 2301 is configured to be able to control one of the plurality of gaming modes described above based on the current gaming state information commanded from the main CPU 2201.

As shown in FIG. 273, the normal mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the normal gaming state.

In addition, the super special mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is a performance mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the A1 time saving gaming state, and is more effective than the normal mode, special mode, or chance mode. This is a production mode that is advantageous for people.

In addition, the special mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode that is controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the A2 time saving gaming state, and is more advantageous for the player than either the normal mode or the chance mode. It is in production mode.

Further, the chance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is a production mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the A3 time saving gaming state, and is a production mode more advantageous for the player than the normal mode.

Further, the bliss time mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the B time saving gaming state.

Further, the first jackpot mode (10R) controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode that is controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the 10R jackpot gaming state.

Further, the second jackpot mode (3R) controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode that is controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the 3R jackpot game state.

In addition, in the normal mode, super special mode, special mode, chance mode, and bliss time mode, it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, while in the first jackpot mode (10R) and second jackpot mode (3R) ), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not executed.

In addition, the display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when the accessory is released (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section). 2163, the second special symbol display section 2164), the sub CPU 2301 controls to the role object release winning mode in the role object release winning game state, and when V wins, ends the role object release winning mode, and Control to jackpot mode or second jackpot mode. However, in the description of this seventh pachinko game machine, for the sake of convenience, the description of the accessory opening mode will be omitted.

[7-7. Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIGS. 87, 274, and 275. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010, as described in the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 274 and FIG. 275 are diagrams showing an example of the transition of the production mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Note that, as described above, the performance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 and the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 2201 are in a corresponding relationship. Therefore, in FIGS. 274 and 275, the game state controlled by the main CPU 2201 is written in parentheses in addition to the production mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301. However, regarding the gaming states that are also written in parentheses, for convenience, the normal gaming state is written together with "Normal", the A1 time-saving gaming state is also written with "A1", the A2 time-saving gaming state is also written with "A2", and A3 The time-saving gaming state will be written together with "A3", the B time-saving gaming state will be written together with "B", the 10R jackpot gaming state will be written together with "10R", and the 3R jackpot gaming state will be written together with "3R".

Also, in the following explanation, unless it is clear that the control is by the main CPU 2201 or sub CPU 2301, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 2201 is shown in parentheses for the production mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301. shall be listed together.

In addition, in FIGS. 274 and 275, transitions between performance modes that may occur when a game is executed in a regular gaming mode are illustrated by solid line arrows, and transitions that may occur when a game is not executed in a normal gaming mode are illustrated by solid line arrows. The transition of the production mode is illustrated by a dashed arrow.

For example, in the normal mode (normal game state), left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, so in the normal mode, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. . Therefore, in Fig. 274, when the current production mode is the normal mode, there are two cases in which a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0" and "z1") is won, and a role model release hit (selected symbol command "z3") is won. In this case, the transition of the presentation mode is shown by a solid arrow.

On the other hand, in the normal mode (normal game state), if the player is hit right in a non-regular game mode, a variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. Therefore, in FIG. 274, when the current game mode is the normal mode, there is a case where a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z4", "z5") is won, and a case where a 10R compatible accessory is released (selected symbol command "z6", In the case of winning "z7"), the transition of the production mode is illustrated by a broken line arrow.

In addition, super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), special mode (A2 time-saving game state), chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), and bliss time mode (B time-saving game state) are all game modes in which right-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in these production modes (gaming states), variable display of the second special symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is mainly executed. Therefore, in FIGS. 274 and 275, the current production modes are super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state), special mode (A2 working time saving gaming state), chance mode (A3 working time saving gaming state) and bliss time mode (B working time saving gaming state). ), if you win the jackpot (selected symbol commands "z4", "z5") or if you win the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol commands "z6", "z7") Regarding , the transition of the production mode is illustrated by a solid line arrow.

On the other hand, any performance mode (game state) among super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), special mode (A2 time-saving game state), chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), and blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) If the game is played to the left, which is not a normal game mode, a variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. Therefore, in FIGS. 274 and 275, the current production modes are super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state), special mode (A2 working time saving gaming state), chance mode (A3 working time saving gaming state) and bliss time mode (B working time saving gaming state). ), in the case of winning the jackpot (selected symbol command "z0", "z1") and in the case of winning the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z2"), The transition of the production mode is illustrated by a dashed arrow.

[7-7-1. Game flow when the current production mode is normal mode]
When the current performance mode is the normal mode (normal game state) and the player plays the game in a normal left-handed manner, the fired game ball mainly flows down the left side area 2106. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can win a prize in the first starting hole 2120, and when it wins in the first starting hole 2120, the starting information of the first special symbol is held and the starting condition of the first special symbol is established. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the first special symbol game. In this first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a first special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 262), for example, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, and the The probability is 1/65536. In this way, in the normal mode (normal game state), the probability of winning a jackpot is extremely low, so the player plays the game in the hope of winning a jackpot.

(If the result of the first special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z0", "z1"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and changes the variable display of the first special symbol. Start. Then, when a display mode indicating a jackpot (3R jackpot) is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won and a production image instructing to hit the ball to the right; Furthermore, the normal mode is ended and control is performed to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the won jackpot is the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z0", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) ends, the game shifts to the special mode (A2 time-saving game state). The special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) is an A time saving gaming state in which the number of time saving times is 26 at most.

On the other hand, when the won jackpot is the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z1", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) ends, the game shifts to the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state). The chance mode (A3 time saving game state) is an A time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is a maximum of 4 times.

(If the result of the first special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit)
Although the probability is extremely low, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z2"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). , starts variable display of the first special symbol.

In the normal mode (normal game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a 10R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z2"), the sub CPU 2301 gives the player a high sense of anticipation. It is preferable to perform a premiere performance.

In the normal mode (normal game state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and a display mode indicating the opening of the 10R compatible accessory (selection symbol command "z2") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the V prize winning device release control process, that is, controls the game state to be in a game state when the accessory is released. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z2") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the prize is won per opening of the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the accessory opening game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and controls to the 10R jackpot game state (that is, the big winning opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) ). On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and further ends the normal mode. and control to the first jackpot mode.

Note that when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the game shifts to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state). The super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state) is an A time saving gaming state in which the maximum number of time saving times is 296.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a 10R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z2") but no V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 continues the normal mode.

(When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value)
When the current production mode is the normal mode (normal gaming state), when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 2201 controls to the B time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the ceiling has been reached, displays a performance image instructing to hit the ball to the right, and then ends the normal performance mode to complete the blissful time. control mode. Blissful time mode (B time saving game state) is a production mode (game state) in which the number of time saving times is set to, for example, 296 times, and the variable display of special symbols is maximized on the condition that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. For example, it can be executed 296 times.

(others)
When the current performance mode is normal mode (normal gaming state), the player plays the game by hitting the right hand in an incorrect manner, or the game ball unintentionally hits the right area 2107 even though the player is not hitting the right hand. When it flows down, the normal electric accessories 2146 (see Figure 87) may be activated by chance, the game ball may enter the second starting port 2140, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. . In this case, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), after the 10R jackpot game state ends, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 274, A transition is made to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), after the 3R jackpot game state ends, the chance mode is activated as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. (A3 time-saving game state). In other words, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the effect is more advantageous for the player if he wins the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") than if he wins the 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"). mode.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the current production mode is the normal mode (normal game state), the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") and a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"). z5''), the transition may be made to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), the transition to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), or the chance mode ( A3 time saving game state) may be made.

In addition, if the current production mode is normal mode (normal gaming state) and the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release (selected symbol command "z6") and a V prize, After the end of the 10R jackpot game state, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 274, a transition is made to a special mode (A2 time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") and a V win, after the 3R jackpot game state ends, the broken line arrow in FIG. 274 As shown, a transition is made to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state). In other words, it is better to win the jackpot game if you win the 10R compatible accessory (selected symbol command "z6") and win the V prize than if you win the 3R compatible accessory release (selected symbol command "z7") and win the V prize. After the state ends, the game shifts to a performance mode that is advantageous to the player.

However, this is not limited to this, and when the current performance mode is normal mode (normal game state), the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is the 10R corresponding role opening hit (selected symbol command "z6") and the 3R corresponding role. Regardless of whether the item is released (selected symbol command "z7"), it may be configured to shift to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) or to a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state). Alternatively, the game may be shifted to a chance mode (A3 time saving gaming state).

[7-7-2. Game flow when the current performance mode is super special mode]
When the current performance mode is a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), when the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes the normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. When a normal symbol game is executed in the super special mode (A1 time saving game state), the probability of winning per normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, for example. In addition, not only the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), but also the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) and chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), in the A time-saving game state, there are more normal symbols than in the normal game state. variable display time is short. Therefore, in the A time saving game state, the frequency in which the display mode indicating the normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161 is higher than in the normal gaming state.

When the display mode indicating a normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) is activated, and when the player hits right, the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) is activated. 87)), it becomes possible to win a game ball.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 2140 (see FIG. 87), the starting information for the second special symbol is suspended, and when the starting conditions for the second special symbol are met, the main CPU 2201 executes the second special symbol game. do.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a second special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 262), for example, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/100.05. The probability is 1/34.5.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won, and displays a production image instructing to hit right, Furthermore, the super special mode is ended and the control is changed to the first jackpot mode.

If the won jackpot is a 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 again activates the super special mode (A1 time saver) with a maximum of 296 time savers. (gaming state).

Furthermore, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won and a production image instructing to hit the ball to the right; Furthermore, the super special mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is controlled.

If the won jackpot is a 3R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will run a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) where the maximum number of time savings is 26 times. to control.

In this example, as can be seen from the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 263), if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot selection rate and selection of the selection symbol command "z4" For example, the ratio of the jackpot selection rate of the symbol command "z5" to the jackpot selection rate is 4 to 6, and the probability (expected value) that the jackpot of the selection symbol command "z5" is selected is the probability that the jackpot of the selection symbol command "z4" is selected. higher than the probability (expected value).

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead executes the second special symbol's hit determination process (S2095A). Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the release of the 10R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z6”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A1 time-saving game. While the state is continued, the V winning device release control process is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the access point release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is achieved by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A1 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the A time-saving gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. . Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be 10, and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A1 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 296 times, and the number of derivation times per opening of the 3R compatible accessory (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, and also displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and also displays a performance image that instructs a player to hit right. When the game ends, the control is switched to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R compatible accessory release (selected symbol command "z6") and winning the V prize ends, the time saving number will exceed the maximum of 296 times. Shift to special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") but no V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 continues the super special mode. .

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the opening of the 3R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z7”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A1 time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is won by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, and also displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and also displays a performance image that instructs a player to hit right. When the game ends, the control is switched to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") and winning the V prize ends, a special mode (with a maximum time saving of 26 times) ( Shift to A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z7") but no V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 then ends the super special mode and controls the game to the normal mode.

In this example, as can be seen from the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 263), if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a hit in the opening of the accessory, the 10R corresponding combination of the selected symbol command "z6" The ratio of the selection rate per object release and the selection rate per 3R corresponding accessory object release of the selection symbol command "z7" is, for example, 54 to 46, and the selection rate per 10R correspondence accessory object release of the selection symbol command "z6" is selected. The probability (expected value) is slightly higher than the probability (expected value) that the 3R corresponding accessory opening of the selection symbol command "z7" is selected.

Also, as can be seen from the special symbol hit determination table (see Figure 262), when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the jackpot probability (for example, 1/100.5) and the accessory release hit probability (For example, 1/34.5) is approximately 1:3, and the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot is higher than the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot.

(When a special symbol with a time saving number is executed)
When the current production mode is the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) and the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the time-saving number (for example, 296 times) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the A1 The time-saving gaming state is ended and control is returned to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the time saving number without being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 ends the super special mode and controls the normal mode. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 is not limited to ending the super special mode and controlling to the normal mode when the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the time saving number. For example, when the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the time saving number, if there is any remaining reservation (that is, remaining reservation) for the start information of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol for this remaining reservation amount After this is executed, the super special mode may be terminated and control may be returned to the normal mode.

(others)
When the current production mode is the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), the player plays the game with the left hand, which is not the normal mode, or unintentionally plays the left side area 2106 even though he is not playing the left hand. When the ball falls down, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game will switch to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state). The game does not shift to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) as a rescue measure, as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 274. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the current performance mode is the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol command "z0", "z1") , it may be possible to shift to a chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) or a normal mode (normal gaming state).

Furthermore, if the current production mode is super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a role release hit (selected symbol command "z2") and a V prize, the jackpot game state After the end of , it is not essential to be controlled to the super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state), and it may be possible to shift to another production mode.

In addition, since the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) is a production mode (game state) in which the number of time-savings is set to, for example, 296 times, the second special symbol game is executed up to, for example, 300 times, including the pending portion. Is possible. Therefore, in the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), considering the probability of opening the accessory when the second special symbol game is executed (for example, 1 in 34.5), the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) There is a high possibility that you will win a jackpot or a prize opening before the end of the state).

In addition, in the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), as long as the player plays the game with the right hand, which is the normal mode (in case the game ball unintentionally hits the first starting hole 2120), ), when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, the probability that the super special mode will loop (it will be controlled to the A1 time-saving game state again after the jackpot game state ends) is approximately 50%. Furthermore, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 50%. On the other hand, as long as the player plays the game by right-handed hitting, which is the normal game mode, after the jackpot game state ends (excluding cases where the game ball unintentionally hits the first starting hole 2120), there is a chance The mode (A3 time-saving game state) is not controlled.

In this way, the super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state) is the most advantageous for the player among the super special mode (A1 working time saving gaming state), the special mode (A2 working time saving gaming state) and the chance mode (A3 working time saving gaming state). It can be said that this is the production mode (gaming state) with the highest level of performance.

[7-7-3. Game flow when the current performance mode is special mode]
When the current production mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) and the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes the normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. When a normal symbol game is executed in the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the probability of winning per normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, for example.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established, the main CPU 2201 2 Execute the special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a second special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, similarly to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), for example, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, and the probability of hitting an accessory is 34.05. It is one-fifth.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won, and displays a production image instructing to hit right, Furthermore, the special mode is ended and control is performed to the first jackpot mode.

If the won jackpot is a 10R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state) in which the maximum number of time savings is 296 times. ).

Furthermore, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won and a production image instructing to hit the ball to the right; Furthermore, the special mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is controlled.

If the won jackpot is a 3R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will run a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) where the maximum number of time savings is 26 times. to control.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead executes the second special symbol's hit determination process (S2095A). Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the opening of the 10R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z6”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A2 time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is achieved by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and further ends the special mode. and control to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") and winning the V prize ends, the main CPU 2201 returns to the maximum time saving number. Control is performed in the 26th special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the opening of the 3R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z7”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A2 time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is won by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and further ends the special mode. and control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") and winning the V prize ends, a special mode (with a maximum time saving of 26 times) ( Shift to A2 time-saving game state).

In this way, when the current performance mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), as long as the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner, the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z6", Even if you win the jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), you will not be controlled by the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot gaming state ends, and only if you win the jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") after the jackpot gaming state ends. It can be controlled in a super special mode. In addition, if the player plays the game with the left hand, which is not a regular mode, if the player wins the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z2") and wins the V prize, the player will enter the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state). Although the game is controlled to be in the super special mode after the game ends, the probability of winning per opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z2") when the first special symbol game is executed is extremely low, for example, 1/65,536.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(When a special symbol with a time saving number is executed)
When the current performance mode is a special mode (A2 time saving game state), when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the time saving number (for example, 26 times) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the A2 time saving game state. The gaming state is ended and control is returned to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the time saving number without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and controls the game to the normal mode.

(others)
When the current performance mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand which is not a regular mode, or unintentionally hits the left side area 2106 of the game ball even though he is not hitting the left hand. If, for example, the first special symbol flows down, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), the jackpot game state will continue as in the case where the current production mode is the super special mode. After the end of , the game does not shift to the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), but shifts to the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) as a relief measure, as shown by the broken arrow in FIG. 274. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the current production mode is the special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), It may be possible to shift to a chance mode (A3 time saving gaming state) or a normal mode (normal gaming state).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), if the current performance mode is super special mode, the special will be executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), and in the case of the current performance mode super special mode, the transition to chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) or normal mode (normal gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Good too.

Furthermore, if the current performance mode is the special mode (A2 time saving game state) and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit on the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z2") and a V prize, the jackpot game state will be changed. After the end, it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), and you may shift to another performance mode.

In addition, since the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) is a performance mode (game state) in which the number of time-savings is set to, for example, 26 times, the second special symbol game can be executed up to, for example, 30 times, including the pending portion. is possible. Therefore, in the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), considering the probability of opening the accessory when the second special symbol game is executed (for example, 1/34.5), the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) There is a possibility that you will win a jackpot or a prize opening before the end of the game.

In addition, in the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), as long as the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner (excluding cases where the game ball unintentionally hits the first starting port 2120) ), when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the probability of being controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot gaming state ends is approximately 10%. Furthermore, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 56%. Furthermore, the probability of being controlled to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 34%.

In this way, the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) is not as advantageous to the player as the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), but it is relatively more advantageous to the player (than the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state)). It can be said that it is a high production mode (gaming state).

[7-7-4. Game flow when the current performance mode is chance mode]
In this embodiment, when the current production mode is the chance mode, the only difference is the number of time reductions compared to when the current production mode is the special mode, and the other game flows are the same as the special mode. For now, the flow of the game when the current performance mode is chance mode will be explained below.

When the current performance mode is the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), when the player plays the game by right-handed hitting, which is the normal mode, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes the normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. When a normal symbol game is executed in the chance mode (A3 time saving game state), the probability of winning per normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, for example.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established, the main CPU 2201 2 Execute the special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a second special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, for example, as in the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) and special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state). , the probability of opening the accessory is 1/34.5.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won, and displays a production image instructing to hit right, Furthermore, the chance mode is ended and the first jackpot mode is controlled.

If the won jackpot is a 10R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state) in which the maximum number of time savings is 296 times. ).

Furthermore, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won and a production image instructing to hit the ball to the right; Furthermore, the chance mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is controlled.

If the won jackpot is a 3R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will run a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) where the maximum number of time savings is 26 times. to control.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead executes the second special symbol's hit determination process (S2095A). Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the release of the 10R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z6”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A3 time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is achieved by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and further ends the chance mode. and control to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") and winning the V prize ends, the main CPU 2201 saves time up to 26 times. control to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the release of the 3R compatible accessory (selection symbol command “z7”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the A3 time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is won by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and further ends the chance mode. and control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") and winning the V prize ends, a special mode (with a maximum time saving of 26 times) ( Shift to A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(When a special symbol with a time saving number is executed)
When the current performance mode is chance mode (A3 time saving game state), if the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the time saving number (for example, 4 times) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the A3 time saving game state. The gaming state is ended and control is returned to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the time saving number without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 2301 ends the chance mode and controls the normal mode.

(others)
When the current production mode is chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand, which is not the normal mode, or unintentionally hits the left side area 2106 of the game ball even though he is not hitting the left hand. If, for example, the first special symbol flows down, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol command "z0"), the game will not shift to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. , as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 275, a transition is made to a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) as a rescue measure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selection symbol command "z1"), after the jackpot game state ends, the chance mode (A3 The game mode is set to a time-saving gaming state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the current production mode is chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot of either the selected symbol command "z0" or "z1", Alternatively, the game may be shifted to a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) or a chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state). Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot for the selected symbol command "z0" or/and "z1", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the system shifts to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state). You may also do so.

Furthermore, when the current performance mode is chance mode (A3 time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit on the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z2") and a V prize, the jackpot game state will be changed. After the end, it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), and you may shift to another production mode.

In addition, since the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is a production mode (game state) in which the number of time-savings is set to, for example, 4 times, the second special symbol game can only be executed a maximum of 8 times, including the pending portion. Can not. Further, as described above, when the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of opening the accessory is, for example, 1/34.5. The probability of winning a jackpot or an accessory opening before the end of the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is lower than in both the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) and the special mode (A2 time-saving game state).

However, in the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state), once the jackpot gaming state is controlled, as long as the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner, the jackpot game will not be possible in the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state). The probability of being controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 10%, as in the case where the game is controlled by the state. Furthermore, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 56%. Furthermore, the probability of being controlled to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is approximately 34%.

In this way, once the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) or the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state). However, the probability (expected value) of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state during the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) is relatively low. Therefore, the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is the most advantageous for the player among the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), and the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state). It can be said that this is a low performance mode (gaming state).

[7-7-5. Game flow when the current performance mode is bliss time mode]
When the current performance mode is bliss time mode (B time-saving game state), when the player plays the game in the normal right-handed manner, the fired game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes the normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. When a normal symbol game is executed in the Bliss Time Mode (B Time Saving Game State), the probability of winning per normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, for example. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the normal game state. Therefore, in the B time saving game state, the frequency in which the display mode indicating the normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161 is higher than in the normal gaming state.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol win is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established, the main CPU 2201 2 Execute the special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes a second special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot probability, for example, is It is approximately 1/100.05, and the probability of opening the accessory is 1/34.5.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won, and displays a production image instructing to hit right, Furthermore, the bliss time mode is ended and the control is switched to the first jackpot mode.

If the won jackpot is a 10R jackpot with the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will start a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) where the maximum number of time savings is 26 times. to control. In this way, in the bliss time mode (B time saving gaming state), even if you win the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4", unlike the A time saving gaming state, it will not be controlled to the super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state) .

Furthermore, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) and displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the jackpot has been won and a production image instructing to hit the ball to the right; Furthermore, the bliss time mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is controlled.

If the won jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will run a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) where the maximum number of time savings is 296 times. to control. However, this is not limited to this, and if the won jackpot is a 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will give you a chance to save time up to 4 times. The mode (A3 time saving gaming state) may be controlled.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead executes the second special symbol's hit determination process (S2095A). Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the release of the 10R compatible accessory (selected symbol command “z6”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the B time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is achieved by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one time. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls the game to a 10R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, and also displays a performance image instructing a right hit, and also displays a performance image instructing the player to hit the right hand. When the game ends, the control is switched to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z6") and winning the V prize ends, the main CPU 2201 saves time up to 26 times. control to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory opening hit)
If the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and instead Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the release of the 3R compatible accessory (selected symbol command “z7”) is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 executes the B time-saving game. After the state is ended and the state is controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the control is controlled to the accessory release per game state. On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the winning of the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays a production image indicating that the winning is won by opening the accessory. is displayed, and an effect image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is also displayed.

Then, when a V prize is won in the game state of opening the accessory, the main CPU 2201 executes a jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal gaming state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) and determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Further, as the A time saving end condition, the number of special symbol variable display times is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times per accessory release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once each. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 controls to a 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the opening game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, and also displays a performance image instructing a player to hit right, and also displays a performance image that instructs him to hit the ball to the right. When the game ends, the control is switched to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R compatible accessory opening (selected symbol command "z7") and winning the V prize ends, a special mode (with a maximum time saving of 26 times) ( Shift to A2 time-saving gaming state).

In this way, in this embodiment, when the current performance mode is the Blissful Time mode (B time saving gaming state), the jackpot gaming state The production mode to which the game transitions after the game ends may be different. Particularly, when the current performance mode is a special mode (A2 time-saving game state), if the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4" is won, the game shifts to the super special mode after the jackpot game state ends. On the other hand, if the current performance mode is bliss time mode (B time saving game state), no matter which jackpot (selected symbol command "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"), Furthermore, even if you win any of the opening prizes (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") and win a V prize, the game will enter the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) after the jackpot game state ends. It's out of control. However, this is not limited to this, and if the current production mode is Blissful Time Mode (B time-saving gaming state), the distribution of the production mode that will be transferred after the end of the jackpot gaming state will be changed to the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state). ). In this case, if the current production mode is bliss time mode (B time saving gaming state), if a specific jackpot (for example, selected symbol command "z4") is won, the super special mode will be activated after the jackpot gaming state ends. (A1 time-saving gaming state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") but no V win, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal mode.

(When the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the time saving number)
When the current production mode is bliss time mode (B time saving game state) and the number of variable displays of special symbols reaches the time saving number (for example, 296 times) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 The time-saving gaming state is ended and control is returned to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the time saving number without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 2301 ends the blissful time mode and controls the mode to the normal mode.

(others)
When the current production mode is Blissful Time mode (B time-saving gaming state), the player plays the game with the left hand, which is not a regular mode, and unintentionally hits the left side area 2106 even though he is not playing the left hand. When the ball falls down, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selected symbol command "z0"), the game will not shift to the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. , as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 275, a transition is made to a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) as a rescue measure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot (selection symbol command "z1"), after the jackpot game state ends, the chance mode (A3 The game mode is set to a time-saving gaming state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the current performance mode is Blissful Time Mode (B Time Saving Game State), the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot for either the selected symbol command "z0" or "z1". However, the game may be shifted to a special mode (A2 time-saving game state) or a chance mode (A3 time-saving game state). Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot for the selected symbol command "z0" or/and "z1", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the system shifts to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state). You may also do so.

Furthermore, if the current performance mode is Blissful Time Mode (B Time Saving Game State) and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a role release hit (selected symbol command "z2") and a V prize, the jackpot game state After the end of , it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), and it may be possible to shift to another performance mode.

In this way, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"). The type of jackpot is determined at different timings depending on the case where the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) results in an opening hit of the accessory (selection symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7)". A determination process (S2025 in FIG. 268, S2095A in FIG. 271) is executed.However, this is not limited to this, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the main CPU 2201 starts variable display of the special symbol. If the jackpot type is determined according to the gaming state at the time, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit on the opening of the accessory, the jackpot type is determined according to the gaming state when the V prize is won. The jackpot type determination process may be executed at the same timing when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is an accessory opening hit.

[7-8. Modified example]
Next, as a modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine, a first modification and a second modification will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine will be simply referred to as "the pachinko game machine according to the first modification", and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine The machine will be simply referred to as "the pachinko game machine according to the second modification."

Hereinafter, when explaining the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, descriptions of points in common with the seventh pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification are the same as the seventh pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the following description of the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, regarding the configuration and processing that have the same functions as the seventh pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine The explanation will be given using the same symbols and step numbers as the machine. However, new symbols and step numbers will be given to points that are different from the seventh pachinko game machine, that is, to the configuration and processing that will be newly explained in the description of the seventh pachinko game machine.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modified example may be pachinko gaming machines with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

[7-8-1. 1st modification]
First, a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification will be explained. The pachinko game machine according to the first modification, like the seventh pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and the second special symbol has a starting condition that is higher than the starting condition of the first special symbol. This is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of

[7-8-1-1. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification will be explained.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification, the main CPU 2201 can control the A4 time saving gaming state or the A5 working time saving gaming state as the A time saving gaming state.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the first modification is equipped with a time-saving limit function. The time-saving limit function, for example, sets an upper limit on the number of times the jackpot gaming state is controlled again (i.e., the number of consecutive games) in the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state before transitioning to the normal gaming state. This is a function to prevent the jackpot game state from being controlled by consecutive games exceeding a predetermined number of times.

In the pachinko game machine according to the first modification, when a jackpot game state occurs in the normal game state or the time-saving game state B, the main CPU 2201 sets the limit number to "5 times", for example, and in the time-saving game state A. When a jackpot gaming state occurs, 1 is subtracted from the limit number 1. Then, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the limit number after subtraction is greater than 0, it is possible to control to the A time saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and if the limit number after subtraction is 0, the jackpot gaming state ends. After that, control is performed to the normal gaming state without controlling to the A time-saving gaming state. Further, in the time-saving game state A after the end of the jackpot game state, when the time-saving game state A ends without being controlled by the jackpot game state (when it shifts to the normal game state), the main CPU 2201 resets the limit number.

[7-8-1-1-1. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 276 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 276, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z11" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA12" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 "z12" is selected as the command, and "zA13" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 "z13" is selected as the command, and "zA14" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 2201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA15" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 20 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z16" as the selection symbol command and "zA15" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 "z16" is selected as the command, and "zA16" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[7-8-1-1-2. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 277 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification. The jackpot type determination table is based on the gaming state at a predetermined timing (normal gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state) and the selected symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random number of the special symbol. Referenced when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "gaming state at a predetermined timing" is the same as that of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z10", "z13"), the gaming state at the time of execution of the special symbol hit determination process, that is, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. This corresponds to the "gaming state at a predetermined timing." In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the accessory release (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the accessory release. The gaming state at the time of V winning after the fact is derived corresponds to the "gaming state at a predetermined timing". If a V prize is not won even though it is derived as a result of the special symbol hit determination process that it is an opening hit of the accessory, the main CPU 2201 does not control the jackpot game state and does not determine the jackpot type.

The jackpot type determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277) is, for example, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (i.e., the jackpot game This is the type of A time saving flag that is set when the state ends. In this embodiment, there are two types of A time saving flags, an A4 time saving flag and an A5 time saving flag, which will be described later.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot (for example, selected symbol command "z10") and the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 executes the round The number is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A4 time saving flag.

Further, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory (for example, the selected symbol command "z14") and the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize is the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory (for example, the selected symbol command "z15") and the gaming state at the time of winning the V prize is the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag.

[7-8-1-1-3. A time-saving termination condition determination table]
FIG. 278 is an example of the A time saving termination condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification. After the jackpot type is determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the A time saving end condition determination table is used to determine the conditions according to the jackpot type (that is, the type of the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot gaming state). This is referred to when determining the A time saving termination conditions.

As shown in FIG. 278, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions and the number of derivations per accessory object release are determined as the A time reduction end condition. When either one of the number of time saving times and the number of derivation times per accessory release determined as the A time saving end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state and controls to the normal game state. In addition, the number of derivations per accessory release is determined for each type of accessory object released (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15"), but the selection symbol commands "z11", "z14" If all of "z15" and "z15" are determined as the A time saving end condition, the main CPU 2201 , ends the A time-saving gaming state and controls to the normal gaming state. Note that the main CPU 2201 also ends the A time saving game state when the conditional device is activated.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition differs depending on the type of the A time reduction flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in this example, the number of time-savings determined as the A time-saving game condition corresponds to the variable display number of special symbols (the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol). . However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or in place of determining the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed as the A time saving end condition, each of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the number of variable times the second special symbol is displayed is determined as A. It may be determined as a time saving end condition, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the A time saving gaming state is ended.

In addition, the number of derivations per accessory release determined as the A time saving end condition is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, second special symbol display section 2164) per accessory release (selected symbol command " z11'', ``z14'', and ``z16'').

In this embodiment, when the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A4 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times to be 99, for example, as the A time saving end condition, while releasing the accessory. The number of times a hit (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") is derived is not determined. That is, in this case, the number of derivations per accessory release is not included in the A time saving termination condition. If the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be the A4 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time saving flag on at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and from the next game after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is controlled to an A4 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed up to, for example, 99 times. Considering that the start information of the second special symbol can be held up to a maximum of four, if the A4 time saving flag is set to on, the main CPU 2201 can execute variable display of the second special symbol up to 103 times. Become. Then, when the variable display of special symbols is executed 99 times in the A4 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A4 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

In addition, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times to be 99, for example, as the A time saving end condition, and also determines the number of time saving times (selected The number of times the symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") are derived is determined to be, for example, once. If the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A5 time saving flag on at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and from the next game after the jackpot gaming state ends, It is controlled to an A5 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed up to, for example, 99 times. Considering that the start information of the second special symbol can be held up to a maximum of four times, if the A5 time saving flag is set to on, the main CPU 2201 can execute variable display of the second special symbol up to 103 times. Become. Then, when the variable display of special symbols is executed 99 times in the A5 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A5 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. However, in the A5 time-saving game state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times, the special symbol will be released when the accessory is released (any of the selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", and "z15") When the display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164) is confirmed, the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, enters the V winning hole 2155 by executing the game state per opening of the accessory) Before the game ball can pass), the A5 time-saving game state is ended and the game is controlled to the normal game state.

Note that the time saving performance may be the same in the A4 time saving gaming state and the A5 working time saving gaming state, or may be different between the A4 working time saving gaming state and the A5 working time saving gaming state. As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball enters the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 87)), It refers to the winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbols, or/and opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87).

[7-8-1-2. Time saving limit function]
Next, processing related to the operating mode of the time saving limit function will be explained with reference to FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a time chart showing an example of the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 2201 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and (A) a time chart showing an example when the time saving limit function is activated. (B) a time chart showing an example of a case where the limit number is reset; and (C) a time chart showing an example of a case where a chance to reset the limit number is missed.

In addition, in FIG. 279, for convenience, only the normal gaming state, A4 time saving gaming state, A5 working time saving gaming state, and jackpot gaming state are shown as gaming states, but the gaming states controlled by the main CPU 2201 are these gaming states. It is not limited to.

In addition, in FIG. 279, for convenience, the winning of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z10") is simply illustrated as "z10", the winning of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z13") is illustrated simply as "z13", and the winning of the jackpot (selected symbol command "z13") is illustrated simply as "z13". Winning and V-winning by opening (selected symbol command "z14") is simply illustrated as "z14", and winning and V-winning by opening of accessory (selected symbol command "z15") is simply illustrated as "z15". There is.

In addition, in FIG. 279(B), for convenience, the confirmed display of the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z14") is illustrated as "z14 derivation", and the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is simply referred to as "V winning prize". ” is illustrated.

Further, the operation of the time saving limit function is simply shown as "limit operation", and the reset of the limit number is shown as "limit reset".

In addition, the first jackpot gaming state is simply illustrated as “first time”, and the second jackpot gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot gaming state and before transitioning to the normal gaming state is simply illustrated as “second time”, The third jackpot gaming state that occurred after the end of the jackpot gaming state and before transitioning to the normal gaming state is simply referred to as "third time," and the fourth jackpot gaming state that occurred after the end of the jackpot gaming state and before shifting to the normal gaming state. The jackpot game state is simply shown as "fourth time", and the fifth jackpot game state that occurs before shifting to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state is simply shown as "fifth time".

(Example when the time saving limit function is activated)
As shown in FIG. 279(A), for example, when a jackpot (selected symbol command "z10") is delivered to the first special symbol display section 2163 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 returns to the first jackpot gaming state. Control. When a jackpot (selected symbol command "z10") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 in the normal gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be "3", for example, and enters the jackpot gaming state. The A time saving flag to be set after the end is determined to be, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined to be 99, for example, as the A time saving end condition (the number of times of derivation per opening of accessory is not determined). Therefore, after the first jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A4 time saving game state.

For example, in the A4 time-saving game state after the first jackpot game state has ended, when a role item release hit (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and you win a V prize, the main CPU 2201 executes a game according to the game state when you win a V prize. The type of jackpot is determined, and the second jackpot game state is controlled. When the winning role of the accessory is derived in the A4 time-saving game state, the game state remains in the A4 time-saving game state, so as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 controls For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined to be, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition. (The number of derivations is not determined.) When the second jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time saving flag and controls the A4 time saving gaming state.

For example, when a jackpot (selection symbol command "z13") is derived in the A4 time-saving gaming state after the second jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 2201 returns to the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. The type of jackpot is determined accordingly, and the game is controlled to a third jackpot game state. In this case, as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, for example, and changes the A time saving flag, which is set after the end of the jackpot game state, to the A4 time saving flag, for example. The number of time reductions is determined to be, for example, 99 times as the A time reduction end condition (the number of times of derivation per opening of the accessory is not determined). When the third jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time saving flag and controls the A4 time saving game state.

For example, in the A4 time-saving game state after the third jackpot game state has ended, when a role item release hit (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and you win a V prize, the main CPU 2201 executes a game according to the game state when you win a V prize. The type of jackpot is determined, and the game is controlled to the fourth jackpot game state. When the winning role of the accessory is derived in the A4 time-saving game state, the game state remains in the A4 time-saving game state, so as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 controls For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined to be, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition. (The number of derivations is not determined.) Then, when the fourth jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time saving flag and controls the A4 time saving gaming state.

For example, in the A4 time-saving game state after the fourth jackpot game state has ended, when a winning role (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 executes a game according to the game state when the V prize is won. The type of jackpot is determined, and the game is controlled to the fifth jackpot game state. When the winning role of the accessory is derived in the A4 time-saving game state, the game state remains in the A4 time-saving game state, so as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 controls For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined to be, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition. (The number of derivations is not determined.) However, in this case, the main CPU 2201 activates the time saving limit because the jackpot gaming state has occurred five times in a row before shifting to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. When the time saving limit is activated, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the A4 time saving gaming state but controls to the normal gaming state even if it has been decided to set the A4 time saving flag after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the jackpot game state is prevented from being controlled in consecutive games more than a predetermined number of times (for example, five times).

(Example when the limit number is reset)
As shown in FIG. 279(B), the process is the same as that in FIG. 279(A) until the end of the second jackpot game state, so the explanation will be omitted.

In the A4 time-saving game state after the second jackpot game state ends, for example, when a hit to open a role object (selected symbol command "z15") is derived, the main CPU 2201 generates a jackpot according to the game state when the V prize is won. The type is determined and the game is controlled to a third jackpot game state. When the winning role of the accessory is derived in the A4 time-saving game state, the game state remains in the A4 time-saving game state, so as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 controls For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag that is set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be, for example, the A5 time saving flag, the number of time saving times is determined to be 99, for example, as the A time saving end condition, and the accessory is released. The number of times each hit (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") is derived is determined to be one. When the third jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A5 time saving flag and controls the A5 time saving gaming state.

For example, when a role item release hit (selected symbol command "z14") is derived in the A5 time-saving game state after the third jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 immediately ends the A5 time-saving game state and returns to the normal game. state and reset the limit number based on this. That is, although the number of successive games in the jackpot gaming state continued up to three consecutive games, by resetting the limit number, the number of consecutive games in the jackpot gaming state is reset to zero. Thereafter, when a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot according to the gaming state at the time of the V winning (here, the normal gaming state), and controls to the first jackpot gaming state. After the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z14") is derived, if a V prize is won in the normal gaming state, as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds, for example. The A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined to be, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition. not decided). Then, when the first jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time saving flag and controls the A4 time saving gaming state.

In this way, in a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving limit function, by making it possible to reset the limit number, it is possible to prevent unnecessary successive jackpot gaming states and to set an upper limit on the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest that may occur due to being exposed to such events.

(Example of missing the chance to reset the limit number)
By the way, in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification, even though there was a chance to reset the limit number, there are cases where the player misses the chance to reset the limit number. An example of a case where a chance to reset the limit number is missed will be described below with reference to FIG. 279(C).

As shown in FIG. 279(C), the process is the same as that in FIG. 279(B) until the end of the third jackpot game state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 279(B), in the A5 time-saving game state after the third jackpot game state ends, for example, an accessory opening hit (selected symbol command "z14") is derived. However, as shown in FIG. 279(C), in the A5 time-saving game state after the third jackpot game state ends, a jackpot (for example, selected symbol command "z13") is derived instead of the opening of the accessory. If this happens, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot according to the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (in this case, the A5 time-saving gaming state), and wins the fourth jackpot without resetting the limit number. Control to gaming state. In this case, even though there was a chance to reset the limit number, the chance to reset the limit number is missed.

In this way, in a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving limit function, even if there is a chance to reset the limit number, it is possible to miss that chance, which can create a sense of tension among players and prevent a drop in interest. becomes possible. Moreover, since the chance to reset the limit number can be missed, it is possible to further suppress unnecessary successive jackpot gaming states.

[7-8-2. Second modification]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a second modification will be explained. The pachinko game machine according to the second modification is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, like the 7th pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko game machine according to the second modification differs from the seventh pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Control by the main CPU 2201 to variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel is performed by the main CPU 1201 of the second pachinko gaming machine that variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Similar to control.

[7-8-2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification. The game board unit 2010 included in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification is different from the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine (that is, the seventh pachinko game machine) illustrated in FIG. 87 in the following points. is very different.
- If the special electric accessory 2133 is not provided and you win a jackpot, the V attacker 2152 will operate in the same way as when you win by opening the accessory and win a V prize.
- The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is arranged at almost the same position as the special electric accessory unit 2130 in the third pachinko game machine.
- The small winning electric accessory unit 2190 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 2145.
- In addition to the second starting port 2140, a second starting port 2140A is provided.

The electric accessory unit 2190 for small winnings includes a small winning opening 2191 from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a small winning opening 2191 for winning a game ball into this small winning winning opening 2191. A small win that has a small win count switch (not shown) that detects (passage), a small win shutter 2193, and a small win solenoid (not shown) that can operate the small win shutter 2193. It is a unit body that integrates a power accessory (no reference numeral).

The small winning electric accessory unit 2190 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 2145, and a game ball hit right can enter the small winning prize opening 2191. The small winning opening 2191 is configured such that the ease of winning can be changed by operating the small winning shutter 2193 in the front and rear directions, for example. Note that the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the small winning prize opening 2191 is, for example, five, but is not limited to this.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, it is possible to win a prize inside the V winning prize device 2150 based on the result of the winning determination process of the second special symbol being a winning of the opening of the accessory. Here, the opening of the accessory is sometimes referred to as a small hit. However, in the description of the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the opening of the V-winning accessory, which is an opportunity to enter the inside of the V-winning device 2150, and the inside of the V-winning device 2150 are explained below. This includes V-winnings and idle object openings that do not lead to winnings. When the player wins the V-winning accessory release, the V attacker 2152 is activated, and when the player wins the V-win, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. On the other hand, if you win the V-winning idle object release, the electric accessory for the small win (that is, the shutter 2193 for the small win) will operate, but even if the game ball enters the small win opening 2191, it will not be in the jackpot game state. Not controlled. That is, the release of a V-winning accessory with a prize can be a trigger for the generation of a jackpot gaming state, but the opening of a V-winning non-accessible object cannot be a trigger for the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the opening of a V-winning accessory with a prize will be referred to as the "accessory object opening", and the opening of a V-winning non-accessory object will be referred to as a "small hit".

In addition to the second starting port 2140, the second starting port 2140A is provided in the right side area 2107 so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). , is arranged on the downstream side of the small winning electric accessory unit 2190. The second starting opening 2140A is configured to enter a V winning prize in the right area 2107 so that a game ball that does not win in any of the inside of the V winning device 2150, the second starting opening 2140, and the small hit winning opening 2191 can win a prize. It is arranged downstream of any of the device 2150, the normal electric accessory 2146, and the small winning electric accessory unit 2190.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140A, it triggers the second special symbol hit determination process, similarly to when a game ball enters the second starting port 2140. However, the second starting opening 2140A does not change the winning rate of the game ball, unlike the second starting opening 2140 in which winning is facilitated by the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out, whereas when a game ball enters the second starting port 2140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

In this embodiment, among the game balls that did not win in either the V winning device 2150 or the second starting port 2140, approximately one-fifth to one-tenth of the game balls entered the second starting port 2140A, for example. Although it is possible to win a prize, this is just an example and is not limited to this. However, it is preferable that the rate at which game balls hit to the left win a prize is the same as or more likely to win a prize than the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric accessory 2133 is not provided, and when a jackpot is won, the V attacker 2152 is activated and a round game is executed in the same way as when the player wins the opening of the accessory and wins the V prize. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the main CPU 2201 is equipped with a special electric accessory 2133 and wins a jackpot, it operates a special electric shutter 2134 to execute a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 changes from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. If the player wins by opening an object and wins a V prize, the V attacker 2152 may be activated to execute a round game in which the V winning device 2150 shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

[7-8-2-2. Electrical configuration]
The control circuit provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification is basically the same as the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine (seventh pachinko game machine) shown in FIG. do not. However, the control circuit provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification includes a switch that detects winning of a game ball to the small winning opening 2191, a small winning solenoid that can operate the small winning shutter 2193, Switches that detect winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140A are connected to the main control circuit 2200, and when these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit via the I/O port 2205. It differs from the control circuit shown in FIG. 88 in that it is output to circuit 2200. Furthermore, the control circuit included in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification does not include the special electric solenoid 2135 and the big winning opening count switch 2132 (it is not connected to the main control circuit 2200); , which is different from the control circuit shown in FIG.

[7-8-2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications different from the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 281 to 286.

In the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the main CPU 2201 can be controlled to a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

When controlling to the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variable pattern selection state 1 or the variable pattern selection state 2. The normal game mode in variable pattern selection state 1 is left-handed hitting, and the normal gaming mode in variable pattern selection state 2 is right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the variable pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is mainly executed, and in the variable pattern selection state 2, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern selection state 1 and the fluctuation pattern selection state 2 differ in the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when executing the variable display of special symbols, and the fluctuation pattern selection state 2 has a higher The expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol is larger than that in the variable pattern selection state 1. The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables referred to in each of the fluctuation pattern selection state 1 and the fluctuation pattern selection state 2 will be described later.

In addition, it is not essential for the main CPU 2201 to control to the variable pattern selection state 1 or the variable pattern selection state 2 in the non-time saving gaming state, and it is not necessary to control the main CPU 2201 to the variable pattern selection state 1 or the variable pattern selection state 2. It may be possible to control the pattern selection state.

When controlling to the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variable pattern selection state 3. The normal game mode in variable pattern selection state 3 is right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the variable pattern selection state 3, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In the variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern table referred to when executing the variable display of special symbols is the variation pattern table referenced in the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern table referenced in the variation pattern selection state 2. It is different from any of the following. In the variable pattern selection state 3, the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened, and the expected value of the number of variable display times of the special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern selection state 3 is the same as that of the special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern selection state 1. It is large compared to the expected value of variable display count. In addition, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time in the variable pattern selection state 3 is the same as or greater than the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time in the variable pattern selection state 2. big. The special symbol variation pattern table referred to in variation pattern selection state 3 will be described later.

In addition, it is not essential for the main CPU 2201 to control the variable pattern selection state 3 in the time saving gaming state, and it may be possible to control the main CPU 2201 to another variable pattern selection state different from the variable pattern selection state 3. In addition, it is not essential that the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the fluctuation pattern selection state 3 is different from either of the fluctuation pattern selection state 1 and the fluctuation pattern selection state 2; for example, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation pattern selection state It may be the same as the symbol variation pattern table.

[7-8-2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 281 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification. Various probabilities such as jackpot probability, small hit probability, and accessory opening probability are as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 281).

According to the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 281, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, there is approximately a 1/10 probability of winning a small hit. However, while the first starting opening 2120 allows the game ball to win by hitting to the left, the electric accessory unit 2190 for small winnings is arranged in the right area 2107. Furthermore, when the display mode indicating a small hit is derived, the main CPU 2201 immediately operates the small hit shutter 2193, so even if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a small hit, It is difficult to win a game ball into the small winning prize opening 2191.

[7-8-2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 282 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification.

When the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, as shown in FIG. , 2140A), the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball wins.

[7-8-2-3-3. Fluctuation pattern selection state transition condition determination table]
FIG. 283 is an example of a variable pattern selection state transition condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, when the current gaming state (the jackpot (selected symbol commands "z20", "z23", "z24") or the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5") is won After the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variable pattern selection state 2 or the variable pattern selection state 3 is controlled depending on the gaming state). In addition, in the case of winning the opening of the accessory, the gaming state when winning the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z5") and winning the V prize may be set as the current gaming state.

In the variable pattern selection state transition condition determination table of FIG. 283, the variable pattern selection state listed at the top is the current gaming state. Further, the variable pattern selection state listed in the second row from the top is the variable pattern selection state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. Then, the number specified according to the selected symbol command is controlled from the variable pattern selection state (variable pattern selection state 2 or variable pattern selection state 3) controlled after the end of the jackpot game state to the variable pattern selection state 1. This is the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed.

For example, if the current gaming state is variable pattern selection state 1 and you win the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z25") and win a V prize, the main CPU 2201 changes the variable pattern selection state to the variable pattern selection state after the jackpot gaming state ends. 2, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the variable pattern selection state 1 is controlled.

Further, for example, if the current gaming state is variable pattern selection state 2 and a jackpot (selected symbol command “z24”) is won, the main CPU 2201 controls the variable pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot gaming state ends, When the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, the variable pattern selection state 1 is controlled.

Furthermore, if the current gaming state is variable pattern selection state 3 and a jackpot (selected symbol command “z24”) is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to variable pattern selection state 3 after the jackpot gaming state ends, and selects the special symbol. When the variable display of is executed 100 times, the variable pattern selection state 1 is controlled.

In this way, in order to transition from the variable pattern selection state after the jackpot gaming state and the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state 2, variation pattern selection state 3) after the jackpot gaming state ends to the variation pattern selection state 1. The variable display number of special symbols, which is a condition of the above, is determined by the main CPU 2201 based on the current gaming state and the selected symbol command. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit (selected symbol command "z21") or a loss (selected symbol commands "z22", "z26"), no determination is made.

[7-8-2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
284 to 286 are examples of variation pattern tables stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification. To be more specific, FIG. 284 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in variation pattern selection state 1. FIG. 285 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in variation pattern selection state 2. FIG. 286 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in variation pattern selection state 3.

As described above, in the variable pattern selection state 1, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, so in the variable pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is normally executed. Even if the game ball is hit to the right as an unauthorized game mode and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, 2140A, as shown in FIG. 284, compared to the case where the game ball enters the first starting port 2120, The variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a long time (for example, about 600000 ms).

Further, in the variable pattern selection state 2, since right-handed play is the normal game mode as described above, the second special symbol game is normally executed in the variable pattern selection state 2. As shown in FIG. 285, in the variable pattern selection state 2, the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is larger than in the variation pattern selection state 1. That is, the average time of the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter in the variable pattern selection state 2 than in the variable pattern selection state 1. Therefore, in the variable pattern selection state 2, the special symbol game is promoted and the time until the jackpot game state is controlled is relatively short compared to the variable pattern selection state 1. Furthermore, if the first special symbol game is executed, there will be no chance of winning the opening of the accessory that can trigger the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, but if the second special symbol game is executed, the trigger for the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state will not be won. You can win when the next role item is released. Therefore, it can be said that the variation pattern selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is more advantageous to the player than the variation pattern selection state 1.

Further, in the variable pattern selection state 3, since right-handed hitting is the normal game mode as described above, the second special symbol is normally executed in the variable pattern selection state 3. As shown in FIG. 286, in the variable pattern selection state 3, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is greater than in the variation pattern selection state 2. That is, the average time of the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter in the variable pattern selection state 3 than in both the variable pattern selection state 1 and the variable pattern selection state 2. Therefore, in the variable pattern selection state 3, the special symbol game is promoted compared to the variable pattern selection state 1 and the variable pattern selection state 2, and the time until the jackpot game state is controlled is the shortest.

Furthermore, time saving control is not executed in the variation pattern selection state 1 and variation pattern selection state 2, but time saving control is executed in the variation pattern selection state 3. When the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is increased. In this way, among the variation pattern selection state 1, variation pattern selection state 2, and variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern selection state 3 has the highest degree of advantage for the player, and the variation pattern selection state 1 has the highest degree of advantage for the player. It can be said that the degree of advantage is the lowest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, different variable pattern tables are referred to in variable pattern selection state 2 and variable pattern selection state 3 when performing variable display of special symbols, but as described above. , the same variation pattern table may be referred to in the variation pattern selection state 2 and variation pattern selection state 3. For example, in both the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern table in FIG. 285 or the variation pattern table in FIG. 286 may be referred to.

[7-8-2-4. Production mode]
Next, a presentation mode performed on the display device 2007, which is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display, will be briefly described.

In the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the sub CPU 2301 controls the state 1 performance mode, state 2 performance mode, state 3 performance mode, and jackpot mode based on the current game state information transmitted by the command from the main CPU 2201. It is configured to be able to control either one of them.

The state 1 performance mode is a performance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the variable pattern selection state 1.

The state 2 performance mode is a performance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the variable pattern selection state 2, and is a performance mode that is more advantageous for the player than the state 1 performance mode.

The state 3 production mode is a production mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the variable pattern selection state 3, and is more convenient for the player than either the state 1 production mode or the state 2 production mode. This is an advantageous production mode.

The jackpot mode is an effect mode that is controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the jackpot game state.

[7-8-2-5. Transition of fluctuation pattern selection state]
Next, the transition of the variation pattern selection state will be explained with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection state transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification. Although a plurality of jackpot game states are illustrated in FIG. 287, this is for convenience of explanation.

(If the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 1)
As shown in FIG. 287, when a jackpot (selected symbol command "z20") is won in variable pattern selection state 1, the main CPU 2201 ends variable pattern selection state 1 and controls to the jackpot gaming state. When this jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the variable pattern selection state 2.

In addition, in the variable pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is mainly executed, so it usually does not occur, but exceptionally, if you win a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z23", "z24") or if you win the release of an accessory. (Selected symbol command “z25”) and when a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 also controls to the variable pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot game state ends. That is, when a jackpot gaming state occurs in the variable pattern selection state 1, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game always shifts to the variable pattern selection state 2.

In the variable pattern selection state 2, which has transitioned from the variable pattern selection state 1 through the jackpot game state, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable pattern selection state 2 and returns to the variable pattern selection state. Control to 1.

In addition, in FIG. 287, the transition destination and the specified number of times when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times in the variable pattern selection state 2 that has transitioned from the variable pattern selection state 1 through the jackpot game state are shown in the variable pattern selection state 2. It is illustrated by the arrow coming out from below.

As shown in Figure 287 and the fluctuation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see Figure 283), the above specified number of times is determined by winning the jackpot (selection symbol command "z20") in fluctuation pattern selection state 1 and selecting the fluctuation pattern. In the case of transition to state 2, it is 10 times. As an exception, if you win the jackpot (selection symbol commands "z23", "z24") in variable pattern selection state 1 and move to variable pattern selection state 2, you will receive the accessory 20 times in variable pattern selection state 1. The number of times is 100 if the state shifts to the variable pattern selection state 2 due to winning in the opening (selected symbol command "z25") and V winning.

(If the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 2)
As shown in FIG. 287, when a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z23", "z24") is won in variable pattern selection state 2, the main CPU 2201 returns to variable pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot gaming state ends. Control.

Further, when the player wins the opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z25") and wins the V prize in the variable pattern selection state 2, the main CPU 2201 controls the variable pattern selection state 3 after the jackpot game state ends.

In this way, in the variable pattern selection state 2, when a jackpot gaming state occurs, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable pattern selection state 3 is controlled at a certain rate (approximately one-third in this embodiment), Others will be controlled to variable pattern selection state 2.

In addition, in variable pattern selection state 2, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, so this does not normally occur, but in the case of exceptionally winning a jackpot (selection symbol command "z20"), the main CPU 2201 changes the state of the jackpot game state. After completion, control is performed to change pattern selection state 2.

In the variable pattern selection state 3, which has transitioned from the variable pattern selection state 2 through the jackpot game state, when the variable display of special symbols is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable pattern selection state 3 and returns to the variable pattern selection state. Control to 1. Note that the prescribed number of times and the transition destination in this case are, for example, 100 times, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283).

In the variable pattern selection state 2, which is controlled again from the variable pattern selection state 2 through the jackpot game state, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable pattern selection state 2, and the variable pattern selection state 2 is controlled again. Control to selection state 1. Note that the prescribed number of times and the transition destination in this case are as shown by the arrow coming out from below the variation pattern selection state 2.

That is, the above-mentioned specified number of times is 20 when a jackpot (selection symbol commands "z23", "z24") is won in the variable pattern selection state 2 and the control is returned to the variable pattern selection state 2. In addition, as an exception, if a jackpot (selection symbol command "z20") is won in the variable pattern selection state 2 and the control is returned to the variable pattern selection state 2, the number of times is 10.

(When the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 3)
As shown in FIG. 287, in the variable pattern selection state 3, if you win the jackpot (selected symbol command "z24"), or if you win the accessory opening (selected symbol command "z25") and win a V prize. In this case, the main CPU 2201 controls the variable pattern selection state 3 again after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if a jackpot (selected symbol command "z23") is won in the variable pattern selection state 3, the main CPU 2201 controls the variable pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot game state ends.

When controlled from variable pattern selection state 3 to variable pattern selection state 3 again through the jackpot game state, when the variable display of special symbols is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 ends variable pattern selection state 3 and returns to variable pattern selection state 3. Control to pattern selection state 1. Note that the prescribed number of times and the transition destination in this case are, for example, 100 times, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283).

In this way, the variable pattern selection state 3 does not shift to the variable pattern selection state 1 until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, and as long as the second special symbol game is executed, the jackpot (selected symbol command The variable pattern selection state 3 continues until the player wins "z23", which can be said to be a state that increases the player's interest.

In addition, in variable pattern selection state 3, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, so this does not normally occur, but if an exceptional jackpot (selected symbol command "z20") is won, the main CPU 2201 will change the state of the jackpot game state. After completion, control is performed to change pattern selection state 2.

If you win a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z20", "z3") in variable pattern selection state 3 and move to variable pattern selection state 2 after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variable display of the special symbol will be executed a specified number of times. Then, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable pattern selection state 2 and returns to the variable pattern selection state 1. Note that the prescribed number of times and the transition destination in this case are illustrated by the arrow coming out from above the variation pattern selection state 2. That is, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variable pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times in the variable pattern selection state 2 in this case, the main CPU 2201 The variable pattern selection state 2 is ended and control is returned to the variable pattern selection state 1.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, by providing a plurality of variable pattern selection states with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to provide a new game experience never seen before. becomes. Moreover, based on the selected symbol command and the current fluctuating pattern selection state, not only the transition destination fluctuating pattern selection state but also the staying period of the transition destination fluctuating pattern selection state is determined. It becomes possible to provide a game experience.

[8. 8th pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. Like the first pachinko game machine, this eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol It is assumed that this is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of . However, the invention described in the eighth pachinko game machine can be applied not only to the first pachinko game machine, but also to any of the first to seventh pachinko game machines. Further, the number of special symbols is not limited to two (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the number of special symbols may be one.

Hereinafter, in explaining the eighth pachinko game machine, we will omit as much as possible the points that are common to the first pachinko game machine in terms of external configuration, electrical configuration, function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We will mainly explain the differences from pachinko gaming machines.

Furthermore, when explaining the eighth pachinko game machine with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine will be used for the description. .

Note that the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described below as the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

[8-1. Pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment]
First, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be explained below.

[8-1-1. basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 288 to 309.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 201 operates in a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time saving control is executed, and in which both the probability variable control and the time saving control are executed in order to proceed with the game in which special symbols are displayed variably. A game is played in either a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state that is executed, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed although probability variable control is not executed (hereinafter simply referred to as "time-saving gaming state"). It is possible to proceed. Furthermore, it may be possible to proceed with the game in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed but probability-varying control is executed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this. Note that the time-saving game state executed in the high-accuracy time-saving game state is the A time-saving game state, but in the description of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment described later, “A time-saving game “State” means the A time-saving game state executed in the low-probability time-saving game state.

Further, the time-saving gaming state includes the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In the following, when simply referred to as "time-saving gaming state", unless there is a description in parentheses, it shall mean a general term for A-time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state.

A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state are as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that it is not essential for a pachinko game machine to be equipped with all of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, and it is not necessary to install only some of these time-saving gaming states. It can also be used as a thing. For example, the A time saving gaming state and the C working time saving gaming state may be installed as the time saving gaming state, but the B working time saving gaming state may not be installed.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the C time saving gaming state includes the C1 working time saving gaming state, the C2 working time saving gaming state, the C3 working time saving gaming state and the C4 working time saving gaming state. There is. In the following, when simply referred to as "C time saving gaming state", unless stated in parentheses, it is a general term for C1 working time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state and C4 working time saving gaming state (see below). In the second embodiment, the C3 time saving gaming state, the C4 working time saving gaming state, and the C5 working time saving gaming state (generic name) shall be meant.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the C time saving gaming state includes all of the C1 working time saving gaming state, the C2 working time saving gaming state, the C3 working time saving gaming state, and the C4 working time saving gaming state, but only some of these C working time saving gaming states. may be included.

In the C1 time saving gaming state, the C2 working time saving gaming state and the C3 working time saving gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit), and corresponds to these time saving hits. When the display mode to be displayed is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, it is a time-saving game state that is controlled by switching from the current game state to a time-saving game state. Even if the display mode corresponding to the time-saving win is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 in the time-saving gaming state, the current time-saving gaming state is ended and controlled by switching to the new C-time-saving gaming state. .

In the C4 time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal gaming state is a C4 time saving win and the display mode corresponding to the C4 time saving win is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the normal game is executed. This is a time-saving game state that is controlled by switching from the state to the C4 time-saving game state. However, if the current gaming state is a time-saving game state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C4 time-saving hit, and the display mode corresponding to the C4 time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. Even if it happens, this will be ignored and the current normal gaming state will continue without being switched to the C4 time saving gaming state. In addition, in the above, as a result of determining that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C4 time saving hit, this result is ignored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C4. The determination itself as to whether or not it is time saving may not be performed.

That is, the C1 time-saving game state, the C2 time-saving game state, and the C3 time-saving game state are C time-saving game states that can be newly controlled by switching from the time-saving game state that is currently being controlled, even if they are controlled to other time-saving game states. On the other hand, the C4 time-saving game state is a C-time-saving game state that does not operate when the time-saving game state is controlled.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state in which the electric support control is not executed, and in the high accuracy time saving game state and the low accuracy time saving game state in which the electric support control is executed. In this case, right-handed playing is considered to be a regular gaming mode, including all C time-saving gaming states. However, whether left-handed or right-handed batting is the normal game mode in each game state can be arbitrarily designed depending on the game nature, for example. Although it is not installed in this embodiment, in a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state in which electric support control is not executed, left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode.

[8-1-1-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process, for example, based on the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of setting 1, but the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as settings 1 to 6. The pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function that allows the setting function, or the pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine without a setting function.

In addition, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values, and is the same whether the probability change flag is "1" (on) or "0" (off). be. For example, regardless of the setting value, regardless of whether the probability change flag is "1" or "0", the time-saving hit probability when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed is 160%. The time-saving hit probability when the hit determination process for the first and second special symbols is executed is 1/240. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, the probability of time saving may be different depending on the setting value, or if the probability of time saving is a common probability for all setting values, the set number of time saving times and time saving performance may be different depending on the setting value. You can also let As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, small wins are not included in the results of the special symbol hit determination process, but small wins may be included in the results of the special symbol hit determination process. When a small hit is included in the hit determination target, the small hit probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the hit determination target, the small hit will be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. It may be possible to do so. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The above-mentioned short-time winning probability and small winning probability when the small winning is included in the hit determination target may be a common probability for all setting values as described above, but are not limited to this, and may be different probabilities depending on the setting value. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as the jackpot probability or the common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6, or the jackpot probability may be the same for all setting values.

[8-1-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 288 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 288, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 4, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 5 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 10 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 40 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z7" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

When time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 4, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 5 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 10 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 40 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z15" and select "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for special symbol hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is determined. Referring to FIG. 288), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the determination value data, selection symbol command, and symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value.

In addition, for some judgment value data (for example, jackpot judgment value data) out of the judgment value data, random numbers for special symbol hit judgment are extracted by referring to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 10). Determine the judgment value data based on , and then refer to the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 288) to determine the selection symbol command and symbol designation command based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, while determining the remaining judgments. Regarding the value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data), the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value. As a specific example of the latter (remaining judgment value data), for example, when the random value for judgment per first special symbol is one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 sends "z0" as the selection symbol command. ” and select “zA1” as the symbol designation command. Further, when the first special symbol hit determination random number is, for example, one of 20 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Since the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are similarly selected when the first special symbol hit determination random number value is other than the value, the explanation will be omitted here.

Note that, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 201 controls the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, similar to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 12(A), for example. (See FIG. 5), a stopping mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (ie, selected symbol command) is derived.

[8-1-1-3. Hit type determination table]
289 to 295 are examples of winning type determination tables stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit or a jackpot, the display mode indicating the time-saving hit or the display mode indicating the jackpot is the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 163, the second The winning type determination table that the main CPU 201 refers to when determining the winning type differs depending on the gaming state when the game is displayed on the special symbol display section 164).

In FIGS. 289 to 295, the number shown in the round number column is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a short hit, the round game will not be executed, so "-" will be placed in the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11". It is shown.

In addition, the number "1" shown in the column of each flag (variable flag, time saving flag, A working time saving flag, B working time saving flag, C1 working time saving flag, C2 working time saving flag, C3 working time saving flag, C4 working time saving flag) indicates that the flag is on. It shows that it is set.

Note that the time saving flag is a flag that manages whether the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state or not. Further, the A time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the C1 time saving flag, the C2 time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag are flags that manage the types of time saving gaming states.

The number shown in the column of time saving times indicates the number of time saving times to be set. For example, "300" indicates that the number of time saving times is set to 300 times.

Note that the number of time saving times is one of multiple time saving end conditions. The time saving termination conditions other than the number of time saving times include, for example, being controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the time saving number in this embodiment is the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol, but the variable display frequency of the first special symbol and the variable number of variable display times of the second special symbol The number of times of display may be included in the time-saving termination conditions.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit (that is, if the selected symbol command is one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11"), the main CPU 201 executes C In the time-saving control mode determination process (see S207 in FIG. 38), the mode of the C-time-saving game state (for example, the type of time-saving game, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146, etc.) is determined, and the mode of the C-time-saving game state is determined. Depending on the mode, various data related to the control of the C time-saving game state (time-saving flag, number of working hours, etc.) are processed in a time-saving mode setting process (see S514 in FIG. 311, described later) or a time-saving mode resetting process (see FIG. 311, described later). is set in step S513). In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol (S293 in FIG. 43). However, it may be performed in the time saving mode setting process (see S514 in FIG. 311 described later) or the time saving mode resetting process (S513 in FIG. 311 described later).

As described above, in this embodiment, the timing to set various data related to the control of the time-saving game state is when the special symbol game end process is executed (see S130 in FIG. 30), that is, the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is the special symbol display. (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), but is not limited to this, when the display mode indicating the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. It may be when the variable display of the next special symbol is started (that is, when the special symbol variable display start process is executed (see S83 in FIG. 27)).

[8-1-1-3-1. Winning type determination table in normal gaming state]
FIG. 289 shows the winning type determination table in the normal gaming state, that is, in the normal gaming state, the display mode indicating a time-saving hit or the display mode indicating a jackpot is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived on the display unit 164).

As shown in FIG. 289, in the normal gaming state, as a display mode indicating a time saving win, a display mode in which the selected symbol command corresponds to one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11" is used. is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to "1" and performs the time saving mode setting process (described later). In (see S514 in FIG. 311, which will be described later), various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state are set. Various data related to the control of the C time saving gaming state set in the time saving mode setting process (see S514 in FIG. 311 described later) are, for example, the type of time saving flag and the number of time saving times according to the selected symbol command.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z0" is derived to the first special symbol display section 163, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving flag to 300 times. Set. Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z11" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving number as the number of time saving times. Set 50 times.

As shown in FIG. 289, if the result of the hit determination process in the specific gaming state is a time-saving hit, the selected symbol command corresponds to one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11". Depending on whether the display mode to be displayed is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the number of time saving times, which is one of the multiple time saving end conditions, differs. . The same applies to FIGS. 290 to 295 and FIGS. 314 to 319, which will be described later.

In addition, if the selected symbol command is one of "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14" and the display mode indicating the jackpot is in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, first special symbol display section 163, 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various flags (probability variable flag, time saving flag) in the jackpot game control start setting process (see S123 in FIG. 30) (that is, at the start of the jackpot game state). , A time saving flag, B time saving flag, C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag, C4 time saving flag) are initialized (cleared) and the number of rounds is set according to the selected symbol command. In addition, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) (that is, at the end of the jackpot game state), the main CPU 201 sets the flag corresponding to the selected symbol command among the probability change flag, time saving flag, and A time saving flag as " 1" and set the number of time reductions corresponding to the selected symbol command.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is derived to the first special symbol display section 163, the main CPU 201 sets "3" as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state. '', and at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag and the A time saving flag are set to ``1'' (the probability variable flag is not set to ``1''), and the number of time saving times is set to ``30''.

Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z14" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201, at the start of the jackpot gaming state, sets the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state. "10" is set, and at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability change flag, time saving flag and A time saving flag are set to "1", allowing the continuation of the A time saving gaming state until the next jackpot gaming state is controlled. For example, set the time saving number to "10,000" as the number of times to do so.

The winning type determination table in the normal gaming state in FIG. 289 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 289, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 289. , it is not necessary to have some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 289.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving number (for example, 300 times) corresponding to the B time saving gaming state. Set.

[8-1-1-3-2. A hit type determination table in time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 290 shows the winning type determination table in the A time saving gaming state, that is, in the A time saving gaming state, the display mode showing the time saving win or the display mode showing the jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 290 will be described below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the A time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is displayed in the special symbol display section (first When the information is output to the special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 performs various functions related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later). Set data.

As shown in FIG. 290, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. Set.

That is, in the A time saving game state, the display mode indicating a specific time saving per time saving (in this embodiment, for example, per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol). display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ends the A time-saving gaming state under control, and displays the selected symbol command (i.e., time-saving A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the type of winning is started.

For example, in the A time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the A time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". and set the number of time saving times to "50".

On the other hand, in the A time saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current A time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the type of time-saving hit, this is not executed. Although ignored, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the A time saving game state.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state of FIG. 290 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 290, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 290. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 290 may not be included.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the A time saving game state. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the A time-saving gaming state.

[8-1-1-3-3. Winning type determination table in B time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 291 shows the winning type determination table in the B time-saving game state, that is, in the B time-saving game state, the display mode indicating a time-saving win or the display mode indicating a jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the B time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 291 will be described below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the B time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is displayed in the special symbol display section (first When the information is output to the special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 performs various functions related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later). Set data.

As shown in FIG. 291, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. Set.

That is, in the B time saving game state, the display mode indicating a specific time saving per time saving (in this embodiment, for example, per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol). display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ends the current B time-saving gaming state and displays the selected symbol command (i.e., A new C time-saving gaming state corresponding to the type of game is started.

For example, in the B time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z9" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag to "1". , set the time saving number to "300".

By the way, as mentioned above, in the normal game state and A time-saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, if it is a C2 time-saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), As shown in FIGS. 289 and 290, the number of time reductions set is only "5". However, in the time-saving game state B, which is relatively advantageous for the player among the time-saving game states, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C2 time-saving hit, as shown in FIG. The number of time saving times is "300". Even though the game is controlled to the B time saving game state by reaching the ceiling, if "5" is set as the number of time reductions when winning the C2 time reduction win, the player's interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, if you win the C2 time saver in the B time saver game state, just like when you reach the ceiling or win the C1 time saver, "300" is set as the number of time savers to increase your interest. We are trying to suppress the decline.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C3 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), as shown in FIG. 291, the set time saving number is "200". Even in this case, even though the ceiling has been reached and the game is controlled to the B time saving game state, if the player wins the C3 time saving win, the player may become less interested depending on the remaining number of time savings in the B time saving game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of winning the C3 time saving prize in the B time saving game state, although it is smaller than when winning the C2 time saving prize, by setting "200" as the number of time saving times, the decrease in interest is suppressed. I'm trying to do what I can.

However, the number of time reductions set when winning the C2 time saver or C3 time saver in the B time saver gaming state is the same as the number of time savers set when winning the C2 time saver or C3 time saver in other time saver gaming states (excluding the C1 time saver gaming state). It is not essential to set the number of times to be shortened more than the number of times set in the case. For example, even if the player wins the C2 time saver or the C3 time saver in any time saver game state, the set number of time savers may be the same or approximately the same.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current B time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the type of time-saving hit, this is not executed. Although ignored, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the B time saving game state.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the B time-saving game state of FIG. 291 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 291, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 291. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 291 may not be included.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of ceiling values set as the starting condition for the B time-saving game state is one, the value of the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a specification may be adopted in which a plurality of ceiling values are provided and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state.

[8-1-1-3-4. Winning type determination table in C1 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 292 shows a winning type determination table in the C1 time-saving gaming state, that is, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, the display mode indicating a time-saving hit or the display mode indicating a jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the C1 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 292 will be explained below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the C1 time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z0" or "z8" as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in a time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, described later).

As shown in FIG. 292, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times is set to "300". That is, the C1 time-saving game state under control ends, and a new C1 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C1 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any of the selected symbol commands "z1", "z2", "z9" and "z10" is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, When derived to the second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to control of the time-saving gaming state in a time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, described later). Specifically, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C1 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". , set the time saving number to "50".

In this way, in the C1 time saving game state, the display mode indicating a specific time saving per time saving (per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is shown in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, first special symbol display section 163, 2 special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ends the C1 time saving gaming state under control, including the case where the derived time saving hit is the C1 time saving win, and the special symbol display section 163, A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command (that is, the type of time-saving win) derived in step 164 is started.

By the way, as mentioned above, in the normal game state and A time-saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, if it is a C2 time-saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), As shown in FIGS. 289 and 290, the number of time reductions set is only "5". However, in the C1 time saving gaming state which is relatively advantageous for the player among the C time saving gaming states, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C2 time saving winning, as shown in FIG. 292, The set time saving number is "200". This is because, even though the C1 time saving gaming state has been controlled, if "5" is set as the number of time saving times when winning the C2 time saving winning, the interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, if you win the C2 time saver in the C1 time saver game state, the number of time savers is ``200'', which is smaller than when you win the C1 time saver, but is the second highest after winning the C1 time saver. By setting this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C3 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), as shown in FIG. 292, the set time saving number is "100". Even in this case, even though the C1 time saving game state is controlled, if the C3 time saving win is won, the player's interest may decrease depending on the remaining number of time reductions in the C1 time saving gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning the C3 time saver in the C1 time saver game state, the number of wins is smaller than when winning the C2 time saver, but by setting "100" as the number of time savers, the decrease in interest is suppressed. I'm trying to do what I can.

On the other hand, in the C1 time saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current B time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the C1 time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the type of time-saving hit, this is not executed. Although ignored, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the C1 time saving game state.

Furthermore, the winning type determination table in the C1 time-saving gaming state in FIG. 292 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 292, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 292. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 292 may not be included.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C1 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C1 time-saving game state under control may be ended and the B time-saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C1 time-saving game state under control ends. Good too.

[8-1-1-3-5. Winning type determination table in C2 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 293 shows the winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving gaming state, that is, in the C2 time-saving gaming state, the display mode indicating a time-saving hit or the display mode indicating a jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 293 will be described below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the C2 time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z1" or "z9" as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in a time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, described later).

As shown in FIG. 293, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times is set to "5". That is, the C1 time-saving game state under control ends, and a new C2 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C2 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any of the selected symbol commands "z0", "z2", "z8" and "z10" is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, When derived to the second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to control of the time-saving gaming state in a time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, described later). Specifically, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C2 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". , set the time saving number to "50".

In this way, in the C2 time saving game state, the display mode showing specific time saving hits (C1 time saving per, C2 time saving per, C3 time saving per) is shown in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, first special symbol display section 163, 2 special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ends the C2 time saving gaming state under control, including the case where the derived time saving hit is the C2 time saving win, and the special symbol display section 163, A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command (that is, the type of time-saving win) derived in step 164 is started.

On the other hand, in the C2 time saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C2 time-saving gaming state under control without executing the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the C2 time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the type of time-saving hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the C2 time saving gaming state.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving gaming state in FIG. 293 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 293, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 293. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 293 may not be included.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C2 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C2 time-saving gaming state being controlled may be ended and the B-time saving gaming state may be executed, or the B time-saving gaming state may be executed after the C2 time-saving gaming state being executed ends. Good too.

[8-1-1-3-6. Winning type determination table in C3 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 294 shows the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state, that is, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, the display mode indicating a time-saving hit or the display mode indicating a jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 294 will be described below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In addition, since the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 294 is the same as the winning type determining table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 290 in this embodiment, A common winning type determination table may be used. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state because there is room for expanding the range of game characteristics.

In the C3 time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z2" or "z10" as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in a time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, described later).

As shown in FIG. 294, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times is set to "50". That is, the C3 time-saving game state being executed ends, and a new C3 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C3 time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any of the selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z8", and "z9" as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit is displayed in the special symbol display section ( When the information is output to the first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later). Set various related data. Specifically, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C3 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z8" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag to "1". , set the time saving number to "300".

In this way, in the C3 time saving game state, the display mode indicating a specific time saving per time saving (per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is shown in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 163, the first special symbol display section 163, the first special symbol display section 163, 2 special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ends the C3 time-saving gaming state under control, including the case of C3 time-saving winning, and selects the selection derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164. A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the symbol command (that is, the type of time-saving win) is started.

On the other hand, in the C3 time saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C3 time-saving gaming state under control without executing the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the C3 time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the type of time-saving hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the C3 time saving game state.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 294 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 294, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 294. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 294 may not be included.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C3 time-saving gaming state under control may be ended and the B-time saving gaming state may be executed, or the B time-saving gaming state may be executed after the C3 time-saving gaming state under control ends. Good too.

[8-1-1-3-7. Winning type determination table in C4 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 295 shows the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state, that is, in the C4 time-saving gaming state, the display mode indicating a time-saving hit or the display mode indicating a jackpot is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 163, This is an example of a winning type determination table when derived in the special symbol display section 164).

The winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 295 will be described below, but the description of the points common to the winning type determining table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning type determination table in the C4 time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 295 is the winning type determining table in the A time saving gaming state shown in FIG. Since the table is similar to the type determination table, a common winning type determination table may be used for these. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state because there is room for expanding the range of game characteristics.

In the C4 time-saving game state, the display mode corresponding to any one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is displayed in the special symbol display section (first When the information is output to the special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 performs various functions related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later). Set data.

As shown in FIG. 295, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. Set.

For example, in the C4 time-saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and then displays the time-saving flag and the C3 Set the time saving flag to "1" and set the number of time saving times to "50".

In this way, in the C4 time saving game state, the display mode indicating a specific time saving per time saving (per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is shown in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, first special symbol display section 163, 2 special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ends the C4 time-saving gaming state under control, and displays the selected symbol command (i.e., the type of time-saving hit) derived on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. A new corresponding C time-saving game state is started.

On the other hand, in the C4 time saving game state, if the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C4 time-saving gaming state under control without executing a new C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the C4 time-saving gaming state is a time-saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the type of time-saving hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the C4 time saving gaming state.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C4 time saving game state in FIG. 295 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 295, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 295. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 295 may not be included.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C4 time-saving game state being controlled may be ended and the B-time saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C4 time-saving game state being controlled is ended. Good too.

[8-1-1-3-8. Expansion example of hit type determination table]
In this embodiment, regardless of which time saving game state is controlled, a specific time saving per time saving (in this embodiment, for example, per C1 time saving, per C2 time saving, per C3 time saving) is performed. When the display mode shown is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the time saving gaming state under control is ended and the display mode is guided to the special symbol display section 163, 164. A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command (namely, the type of time-saving hit) is started, but it is not limited to this.

For example, if a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in the C time saving gaming state, the C time saving gaming state being controlled is ended and a new C time saving gaming state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is started. If a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in the A time saving gaming state or B time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state being controlled is continued and the derived A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command may not be started.

For example, if a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, the derived selection is completed after the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state being controlled. A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the symbol command is started, and if a display mode indicating a specific time-saving win is derived in the B time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state under control is continued and the derivation is performed. A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command may not be started.

Furthermore, for example, in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state, when a display mode indicating a C time saving hit that can be executed by switching from the time saving gaming state under control is derived, the derived C time saving When the win is per a specific C time saver (for example, per C1 time saver), the A time saver gaming state, B time saver gaming state, or C time saver gaming state under control is ended, and the winning is per the derived specific C time saver. When the corresponding specific C time saving game state is newly started, and the derived C time saving per is a non-specific C time saving per (for example, C2 time saving per, C3 time saving per), the A under control The time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, or the C-time-saving gaming state may be continued, and a new C-time-saving gaming state corresponding to the derived non-specific C time-saving game state may not be started.

Also, for example, in the C time saving gaming state (i.e., C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state) other than the C working time saving gaming state (for example, C1 working time saving gaming state) which is most advantageous to the player among the C working time saving gaming states, a specific When a display mode indicating a time saving win is derived, a new C time saving game state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is started, and a C time saving game which is most advantageous to the player among the C time saving gaming states is started. If a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in a state (for example, C1 time saving gaming state), the C time saving gaming state being controlled (for example, C1 time saving gaming state) is continued, and the derived selection symbol command A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the above may not be started.

For example, if a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in the C time saving gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C time saving gaming states (for example, the C2 time saving gaming state), the derived selection symbol command A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the C time-saving game state is started, and a C time-saving game state other than the C time-saving game state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states (for example, C1 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state) ), if a display mode indicating a specific time saving hit is derived, the C time saving game state being controlled (for example, C1 time saving gaming state) is continued, and a new C time saving game corresponding to the derived selection symbol command is started. The state may not be initiated.

For example, if a display mode indicating a specific time saving win is derived in the C time saving gaming state, the new C time saving gaming state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is better than the C time saving gaming state being controlled. is advantageous to the player or equivalent, a new C time-saving gaming state is started, and the new C time-saving gaming state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is disadvantageous to the player. In this case, the C time-saving gaming state being controlled may be continued. For example, in the C3 time-saving game state, if a display mode indicating a C1 time-saving win is derived, the C3 time-saving game state is ended, a C1 time-saving game state is newly started, and a display mode indicating a C2 time-saving win is derived. In this case, the C3 time-saving gaming state under control is continued without starting the C2 time-saving gaming state anew. However, in the C3 time-saving game state, if a display mode indicating a C2 time-saving game is derived, the C3 time-saving game state may be continued or the C3 time-saving game state may be terminated, depending on the number of remaining time savings in the C3 time-saving game state. The C2 time-saving game state is not newly started. To the last, consistency is required such that when a display mode indicating a C2 time saving win is derived in the C3 time saving gaming state, the C3 time saving gaming state is continued regardless of the remaining time saving number.

[8-1-1-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Next, an example of the variation pattern table that the main CPU 201 refers to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol will be explained with reference to FIGS. 296 to 306. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects a variation pattern table to refer to depending on the gaming state and selection conditions described later, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol using the selected variation pattern table. The "Remarks" column shown in FIGS. 296 to 306 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. Further, the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 296 to 306 are all stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "variation pattern" of the present invention may be interpreted as a "variation pattern table" described below, or, for example, as any one "variation pattern" selected from the variation pattern table. Good too.

[8-1-1-4-1. Fluctuation pattern table in normal gaming state or A time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 296 is an example of the variation pattern table A that is referred to in the normal gaming state or the A time-saving gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to in the normal gaming state and the A time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern table may be different between the normal gaming state and the A time-saving gaming state. good.

The variation pattern table A is a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable displays of the second special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variable pattern table A is selected, the game progresses faster when the player plays left-handed than when he plays right-handed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern table in the normal gaming state and the variation pattern table in the A time-saving gaming state are shared, but these may be separate tables. In this case, in the table referenced in the normal gaming state, the expected value of the variable display number of the first special symbol per unit time is set to a higher fluctuation pattern than the expected value of the variable display number of the second special symbol per unit time. In the table referred to in the A time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed per unit time is higher than the expected value of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed per unit time. Preferably, it is a pattern table.

[8-1-1-4-2. B Variation pattern table in time-saving gaming state]
FIGS. 297 to 299 are examples of variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3 that are referred to in the B time-saving game state.

In the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, the expected value of the number of variable displays of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable displays of the first special symbol per unit time. This is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when variable pattern table B-1 to variable pattern table B-3 are selected, the game progresses faster if the player hits right than left.

In this embodiment, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game, the main CPU 201 selects the fluctuation pattern table B-1 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols using any of the variable patterns selected from the variable pattern table B-1.

The main CPU 201 counts the variable display number of special symbols starting from the time of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, and this counted value (hereinafter referred to as "the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state") is between 1 and 150. maintains the state in which the variation pattern table B-1 is selected.

However, if the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds, for example, 150, the main CPU 201 switches from the variable pattern table B-1 to the variable pattern table B-2 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol with any of the variable patterns selected from -2.

Here, when comparing the variable pattern table B-1 and the variable pattern table B-2 (especially refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in variation pattern table B-2 than in variation pattern table B-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when variable pattern table B-2 is selected than when variable pattern table B-1 is selected.

By the way, if the B time-saving gaming state continues for a long period of time without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that the player's interest will decrease. Therefore, when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number of times (for example, 150 times), the speed of progress of the game is increased to shorten the time until the jackpot is derived, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It made it possible to do so.

Further, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 selects the fluctuation pattern table B-3 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols with this variable pattern.

The variable pattern table B-3 has the largest expected value of the number of variable displays of special symbols per unit time among the variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3 that can be selected in the B-time saving game state. In this way, by increasing the game progress speed when moving from the C time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state than when moving from the normal gaming state to the B time saving gaming state, the player can It becomes possible to increase the interest of

In addition, in this embodiment, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the variable pattern table B-3 is selected, but instead of this, the variable pattern table B-2 is selected. You can do it like this. In this case, there is no need to provide the variation pattern table B-3, and only two tables, the variation pattern table B-1 and the variation pattern table B-2, need to be provided, so the data stored in the main ROM 202 (see FIG. 6) It becomes possible to suppress the capacity from increasing unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the value of the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the A time-saving gaming state, the value of the ceiling counter may reach the ceiling value in the A-time saving gaming state. If there is, select variable pattern table B-3 (or variable pattern table B-2) when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in A time-saving gaming state, and select this variable pattern table B-3 (or variable pattern table The special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner using one of the variable patterns selected from B-2).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table selected when transitioning from the C time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state has the fastest game progress speed among the variable pattern tables that can be selected in the B time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving game state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) may be the variable pattern table with the fastest game progress speed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) is the variable pattern table with the fastest game progress speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving game state exceeds a specified number, a variable pattern table in which the progress speed of the game is relatively slow may be selected. In this case, by slowing down the progress of the game when the end of the time-saving game state B approaches, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[8-1-1-4-3. Fluctuation pattern table in C2 time-saving gaming state and C3 time-saving gaming state]
300 and 301 are examples of the variation pattern table C-1 and the variation pattern table C-2 that are referred to in the C2 time-saving gaming state or the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In the variation pattern table C-1 and the variation pattern table C-2, the expected value of the number of variable displays of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable displays of the first special symbol per unit time. This is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when the variable pattern table C-1 or the variable pattern table C-2 is selected, the game progresses faster if the player hits the right hand rather than the left hand.

In this embodiment, in a normal game, when a display mode indicating a C2 time saving hit or a C3 time saving hit is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, , the main CPU 201 selects the variable pattern table C-1 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol using any of the above variation patterns.

On the other hand, in any of the time-saving game states, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, a display mode indicating a C2 time-saving hit or a C3 time-saving hit is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Then, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-2 shown in FIG. 296, and performs the variation display of the special symbol using any of the variation patterns selected from this variation pattern table C-2. It is possible.

Here, when comparing the variable pattern table C-1 and the variable pattern table C-2 (in particular, refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table C-2 than in the variation pattern table C-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variable pattern table C-2 is selected than when the variable pattern table C-1 is selected.

In this way, if you win in any of the time-saving gaming states, you can end the current time-saving gaming state and move to a new time-saving gaming state.If you win in the C2 time saving winnings or C3 time saving winnings, you can enter the normal game. By increasing the game progress speed when transitioning from any of the time saving gaming states to the C2 working time saving gaming state or the C working time saving gaming state, than when moving from the state to the C2 working time saving gaming state or the C3 working time saving gaming state, It becomes possible to increase the player's interest in the game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, even if the C4 time saving win is won in any of the time saving gaming states, it is ignored and does not shift to a new time saving gaming state. Then, when winning the C4 time saving game in the normal gaming state and moving to the C4 time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 selects the variable pattern table C-1, and selects the selected variable pattern table C-2 from the variable pattern table C-2. It is made possible to perform a variable display of special symbols with this variable pattern. However, the variable pattern table selected in the C4 time saving game state is not limited to this.

[8-1-1-4-4. Fluctuation pattern table in C1 time-saving gaming state]
FIGS. 302 and 303 are examples of variation pattern tables C-3 and C-4 that are referred to in the C1 time-saving gaming state.

In the variation pattern table C-3 and the variation pattern table C-4, the expected value of the number of variable displays of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable displays of the first special symbol per unit time. This is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when the variable pattern table C-3 or the variable pattern table C-4 is selected, the game progresses faster if the player hits the right hand rather than the left hand.

In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, when the display mode indicating C1 time saving hit is derived as a result of the special symbol hit determination process to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, the main In the subsequent gaming state (that is, the C1 time saving gaming state), the CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-3 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform variable display of special symbols.

The main CPU 201 counts the variable display number of special symbols starting from the time of transition to the C1 time-saving gaming state, and this counted value (hereinafter referred to as "the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state") is between 1 and 150. maintains the state in which the variation pattern table C-1 is selected.

However, if the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds, for example, 150, the main CPU 201 switches from the variable pattern table C-1 to the variable pattern table C-4 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol with any of the variable patterns selected from -4.

Here, when comparing the variable pattern table C-3 and the variable pattern table C-4 (in particular, refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table C-4 than in the variation pattern table C-3. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variable pattern table C-4 is selected than when the variable pattern table C-3 is selected.

By the way, if the C1 time-saving gaming state continues for a long period of time without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that interest will decrease. Therefore, when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number of times (for example, 150 times), the speed of progress of the game is increased to shorten the time until a jackpot is derived, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It made it possible to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving game state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) is set such that the game progresses faster than before the specified number is exceeded. Although the variable pattern table is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number, a variable pattern table with a relatively slow game progress speed may be selected. In this case, by slowing down the progress of the game when the end of the C1 time-saving game state approaches, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the C1 time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table C-3 or C-4, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the B-time-saving game state, The variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to the referenced variation pattern table B-1 or variation pattern table B-2.

[8-1-1-4-5. Fluctuation pattern table in high-accuracy time-saving gaming state]
FIGS. 304 and 305 are examples of the fluctuation pattern table D-1 and the fluctuation pattern table D-2 that are referred to in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. That is, the display mode corresponding to the variable probability jackpot (any of the selected symbol commands "z5", "z6", "13", or "14") is displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. If derived, the variable pattern table D-1 or the variable pattern table D-2 is selected in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The fluctuation pattern table D-1 is a fluctuation pattern table in which the expected value of the variable display number of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display number of the second special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variable pattern table D-1 is selected, the game progresses faster if the player plays left-handed than by right-handed. However, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, electric support control is executed, so right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode.

The variation pattern table D-2 is a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the variable display frequency of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the variable display frequency of the first special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variable pattern table D-1 or the variable pattern table D-2 is selected, the game progresses faster when the player hits the right hand rather than the left hand.

Furthermore, the expected value of the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed per unit time in the variable pattern table D-2 is higher than the expected value of the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed per unit time in the variable pattern table D-1. big.

In this embodiment, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process when the variable pattern table A is selected, a display mode indicating a jackpot is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. , when the jackpot game state performed based on the derivation of this jackpot ends, the main CPU 201 selects the fluctuation pattern table D-1 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol using any of the selected variation patterns.

As described above, the variable pattern table A is a variable pattern table that can be selected in the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state A. Therefore, when a display mode indicating a jackpot is derived in the normal gaming state or the A time-saving gaming state, and the high-precision time-saving gaming state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state based on this jackpot ends, the main CPU 201 displays the fluctuation pattern table A. Select.

On the other hand, when any one of the fluctuation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, fluctuation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, fluctuation pattern table D-1, and fluctuation pattern table D-2 is selected, the special symbol As a result of the hit determination process, a display mode indicating a jackpot is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or second special symbol display section 164, and the jackpot game state performed based on this jackpot is derived. When the process is finished, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table D-2 shown in FIG. It is possible.

That is, when a display mode indicating a jackpot is derived as a result of the first special symbol game that is mainly played in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state A, the fluctuation pattern table D-1 shows the pattern of the jackpot gaming state based on this jackpot. This is a table that can be selected in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state after the game ends.

On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern table D-2 shows that when a display mode indicating a jackpot is derived as a result of the second special symbol that is mainly performed in the B time-saving gaming state, the C-time saving gaming state, or the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, this jackpot This is a table that can be selected in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on.

Here, when comparing the variable pattern table D-1 and the variable pattern table D-2 (especially refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is found. The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table D-2 than in the variation pattern table D-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variable pattern table D-2 is selected than when the variable pattern table D-1 is selected.

In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 switches the selected variable pattern table between the variable pattern table D-1 and the variable pattern table D-2, depending on the number of executions of the special symbol, for example. You can do it like this.

For example, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 selects the variable pattern table D-2 so that the game progresses relatively quickly until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times). However, when the special symbol game exceeds the predetermined number of times, the variation pattern table D-1 may be selected so that the progress of the game becomes relatively slow, or until the special symbol is played a predetermined number of times. The variable pattern table D-2 may be selected, and the variable pattern table D-1 may be selected when the special symbol game exceeds a predetermined number of times.

As a specific example, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine where the high-accuracy time-saving game state ends when the special symbol game is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 70 times) and is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state. , the main CPU 201 selects the variable pattern table D-2 until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) smaller than the above-mentioned specified number of times, and when the special symbol game exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined number of times. , it is preferable to select the variation pattern table D-1. Until the special symbol is executed the predetermined number of times in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is possible to shorten the time until winning the jackpot by making the game progress relatively faster, but it is also possible to shorten the time until the jackpot is won by making the game progress relatively faster. This is because, after the game is executed, the progress of the game is relatively slowed down, thereby making it possible to delay the end of the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and thereby making it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can continue the highly accurate time-saving gaming state until the next jackpot is won, the main CPU 201 uses the variable pattern table D- 1 is selected, and when the special symbol exceeds the specified number of times, it is preferable to select the variable pattern table D-2. By doing this, after the end of the jackpot game state, until the special symbol is executed a specific number of times, the time until the next jackpot is won is relatively lengthened, thereby suppressing the balls that come out in a short time. On the one hand, it is possible to suppress unnecessary increases in gambling, and on the other hand, when the number of executions of special symbols exceeds a certain number of times, the time until the next jackpot is relatively shortened, thereby increasing the interest in a high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display mode corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot (selection symbol command "z4" or "12") is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 , the display mode corresponding to the probability-variable jackpot (selected symbol command "z5", "z6", "13" or "14") is displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. The selected variation pattern table is different depending on the derived case. By doing so, it is possible to further increase interest.

In this embodiment, the variable pattern table D-1 is selected when the jackpot game state that was performed based on the derived jackpot while the variable pattern table A was selected ends. Also, when any one of the fluctuation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, fluctuation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, fluctuation pattern table D-1, and fluctuation pattern table D-2 is selected, the jackpot is won. The variable pattern table D-2 is selected when the jackpot game state performed based on the derived pattern ends. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot is derived when any one of fluctuation pattern table A, fluctuation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, and fluctuation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 is selected. When the jackpot game state has ended, the variable pattern table D-1 is selected, and the jackpot is derived when the variable pattern table D-1 or the variable pattern table D-2 is selected. The variable pattern table D-2 may be selected when the jackpot gaming state ends.

[8-1-1-4-6. Summary of special symbol variation pattern table]
In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects a variation pattern table according to the above-mentioned selection conditions, and a table summarizing the above-mentioned selection conditions is shown in FIG. 306. FIG. 306 is a table showing a variable pattern table selected according to the gaming state and selection conditions.

In this embodiment, when comparing the variable pattern table A and the variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3, the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3 The expected value of is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern table A.

Also, when comparing the variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3 and the variable pattern tables C-1 to C-4, it is found that the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern tables B-1 to B-3 The expected value of the number of executions is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern tables C-1 to C-4.

Furthermore, when comparing the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the variable pattern table A.

That is, among the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state is the fastest, followed by the C working time saving gaming state. The slowest game progress is in the normal game state or the time-saving game state A.

By the way, the time-saving game state A shifts to the normal game state when the time-saving game state A ends, so if the time-saving game state A is controlled for a longer period of time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the progress speed of the game in the A time saving gaming state is made to be relatively slower than in the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state (particularly the B working time saving gaming state), it is often expected to win a jackpot while being controlled in the B working time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the B-time saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state and the A-time saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is increased and the game progresses faster. By speeding up the process, we aim to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the magnitude relationship of the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is ``normal game State=A time-saving game state<C time-saving game state=B time-saving game state". Focusing only on the time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is "A time-saving game state < C time-saving game state = B time-saving game state". However, this is not limited to this, and on the premise that the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time in the normal gaming state is the smallest, the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is calculated. , "A time-saving game state < C time-saving game state < B time-saving game state", "A time-saving game state = C time-saving game state < B time-saving game state", or "A time-saving game state = C" It is also possible to set the time-saving gaming state to the "B time-saving gaming state".

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is made to differ depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this. Regardless of the type, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time may be made to be the same or approximately the same in any C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the C time saving gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C working time saving gaming states (for example, C2 working time saving gaming state), other C working time saving gaming states (for example, C1 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state) The progress speed of the game may be relatively slowed down by making the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time smaller than in the case where the state is (state). Furthermore, for example, in the C time-saving game state that is most advantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states (for example, the C1 time-saving game state), the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is the largest. At the same time, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is set to be the smallest in the C time saving gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C time saving gaming states (for example, the C2 time saving gaming state). , In the remaining C time-saving game states (for example, C3 time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state), the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is smaller than the C1 time-saving game state, and the C2 time-saving game state It may be made larger than that.

In addition, when the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is varied depending on the type of C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time, for example, It may be set as "C2 time saving gaming state < A working time saving gaming state < C3 working time saving gaming state < B working time saving gaming state = C1 working time saving gaming state" or "A working time saving gaming state < C2 working time saving gaming state = C3 working time saving gaming state < B working time saving gaming state" The state may be set as "C1 time saving gaming state" or "A working time saving gaming state < C2 working time saving gaming state < C3 working time saving gaming state < C1 working time saving gaming state <B working time saving gaming state". It should be noted that the magnitude relationship of the expected values of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time mentioned above is just an example, and it goes without saying that it is not limited to this.

[8-1-1-4-7. Expansion example 1 of special symbol variation pattern table]
In this embodiment, as described above, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table B-1 shown in FIG. 297 in the subsequent game state. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the display mode indicating the C1 time saving hit is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 As mentioned above, in the subsequent gaming state, the variation pattern table C-3 shown in FIG. 302 is selected.

However, for example, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state, there is a case where a time saving win (for example, C3 time saving winning) is won in the variable display of the same special symbol (that is, within the same interrupt process). In this case, the main CPU 201 can determine the destination time-saving gaming state according to the processing order of the program.

For example, if the process of deriving the display mode per C3 time saving (determined display) is performed before the ceiling counter update process, the main CPU 201 performs the process of deriving the display mode per C3 time saving (determined display). As a result of this, a process of shifting to the C3 time-saving gaming state is performed, but thereafter, a process of shifting to the B-time-saving gaming state can be performed as a result of the ceiling counter update process. That is, the result is the same as when the ceiling is reached in the C3 time saving game state. Therefore, in this case, the main CPU 201 will select the variable pattern table (for example, variable pattern table B-1) selected in the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, for example, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode per C3 time saving is performed after the ceiling counter update process, the main CPU 201 will perform the process of temporarily transitioning to the B time saving gaming state as a result of the ceiling counter update process. However, after that, as a result of the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode per C3 time saving, it is possible to perform the process of shifting to the C3 time saving gaming state. That is, the result is the same as when the C3 time saving win is derived in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, in this case, the main CPU 201 will select the variable pattern table (for example, variable pattern table C-1) selected in the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, above, we have explained the case where reaching the ceiling and winning the time saving hit (for example, C3 time saving winning) occur in the variable display of the same special symbol in the normal gaming state (i.e. within the same interrupt process), but the time saving game The same holds true when a ceiling is reached and a time saving win (for example, C3 time saving win) occurs in the variable display of the same special symbol in the state.

In addition, in the above, if a ceiling is reached and a time saving hit (for example, C3 time saving win) occurs in the variable display of the same special symbol (that is, within the same interrupt process), the time saving of the destination will be changed depending on the processing order of the program. Instead of determining the gaming state, the destination time-saving gaming state may be determined to be a specific time-saving gaming state (for example, B-time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player) regardless of the processing order of the program. good. When the specific time-saving gaming state is the B-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 selects a variable pattern table (for example, variable pattern table B-1) selected in the B-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the specific time-saving gaming state is the C-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 will select the variable pattern table (for example, variable pattern table C-1) selected in the C3 time-saving gaming state.

[8-1-1-4-8. Expansion example 2 of special symbol fluctuation pattern table]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table C-3 or C-4 is selected in the C1 time-saving game state, and the variable pattern table C-1 or C-2 is selected in the C2 time-saving game state and the C3 time-saving game state, Although it has been described above that the variable pattern table C-1 is selected in the C4 time saving game state, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 selects a specific fluctuation pattern table (for example, fluctuation pattern table C-4) in the special symbol game before reaching the ceiling. You can also do this. By doing this, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the change in the variation pattern of the special symbols will lead to a transition to the B time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

Note that the main CPU 201 may select the above-mentioned specific variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C-4) in the last special symbol game before reaching the ceiling, or select it during a predetermined period before reaching the ceiling. (For example, the selection may be made during a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times).

[8-1-1-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 307 is an example of the normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 307, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol hit is a "normal symbol win" if the extracted random number value for determining a normal symbol win is between 0 and 79. Then, the judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol per judgment value data". In addition, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" if the extracted random number value for determining a normal symbol hit is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decide.

In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, and the B-time-saving gaming state, if the extracted random number value for determining a normal symbol hit is between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit". It is determined and the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data". In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" when the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination is 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

In the C time-saving gaming state, the probability that the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data" differs depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, for example, in the C1 time-saving game state that is most advantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states, the probability that the judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol per judgment value data" is higher than in other C time-saving game states ( For example, it is higher than C2 time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state).

In this embodiment, for example, the probability of being determined as the "normal symbol hit judgment value data" in the C1 time saving gaming state which is most advantageous to the player among the C time saving gaming states is determined as the "normal symbol winning judgment value data" in the B time saving gaming state. '', but it is not essential to do so and is just an example.

Also, for example, the probability of being determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data" in the C2 time-saving game state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states, may be set to be the lowest among the C time-saving game states. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability that the judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol per judgment value data" differs depending on the type of C time-saving gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the type of C time-saving gaming state The probability that the determination value data is determined as the "normal symbol per determination value data" may be the same or approximately the same regardless of the determination value data.

[8-1-1-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 308 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 308, in the normal game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, it is assumed that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99. Also, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state and the A-time saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, for example, if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99. Even if there is, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99, the main The CPU 201 selects "fz2" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In the C time-saving game state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits is different depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state. There is.

Specifically, for example, in the C1 time-saving game state that is most advantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, Regardless of the symbol random number value from 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "fz2" as the selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits.

In this embodiment, for example, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the C1 time saving gaming state which is most advantageous to the player among the C time saving gaming states, the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained in the B time saving gaming state. The same normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of symbol hit determination processing, but it is not essential to do so. This is just an example.

In addition, for example, in the C2 time-saving game state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, for example, the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Regardless of whether it is from 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the C3 time saving game state or the C4 time saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, for example, if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99. Even if this is the case, the main CPU 201 selects "fz3" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 307), determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value, and then , the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 308) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for normal symbol hit determination and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, a win or loss of the normal symbol and a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol win may be determined together.

[8-1-1-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 309 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, with a first opening time of 1000 msec and a wait time. It is decided that there will be no second release. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz0" is the most disadvantageous opening pattern for the player among the types of normal symbol winning.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, with a first opening time of 3000 msec and a wait time. 200 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1" is the most advantageous opening pattern for the player among the types of normal symbol winning.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command when hitting a normal symbol is "fz2" is second to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the selecting symbol command when hitting a normal symbol is "fz1". This is an open pattern that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, a wait time of 300 msec, and a waiting time of 300 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3" is second to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2". This is an open pattern that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz4", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, with a first opening time of 1000 msec and a wait time. It is decided that there will be no second release. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command when hitting a normal symbol is “fz4” is better than the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selecting symbol command when hitting a normal symbol is “fz0”. Although it is advantageous to the player, this opening pattern is more disadvantageous to the player than the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3".

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the state, the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state, the most advantageous degree becomes the unfavorable mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is set in the normal gaming state, A Although this is the most advantageous mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time-saving game state, B-time-saving game state, and C-time-saving game state, this is not essential and is just an example.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit" and the opening pattern in the C1 time-saving gaming state The degree of advantage is the same (including substantially the same) with the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is different from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the C1 time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit". It may be more advantageous than the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 in the case of "normal symbol hit", or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal electric accessory 146 (Fig. 4) is the most advantageous mode, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the C2 time-saving gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving gaming states, is "normal symbol hit". Although the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) in a certain case is set as the most advantageous or disadvantageous mode, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is released when the result of the hit determination process for a normal symbol in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player among the C time-saving gaming states, is "normal symbol hit". Normal electric mode when the pattern is the most advantageous and unfavorable mode, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the C2 time-saving gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving gaming states, is "normal symbol hit". The opening pattern of the accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) may be set to the most advantageous mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the type of the C time-saving game state, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) (i.e. Although the time-saving performance) is different, the time-saving performance is not limited to this, and the time-saving performance may be the same or substantially the same regardless of the type of C time-saving game state.

For example, if the time saving performance is the same or approximately the same regardless of the type of C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance in C time saving gaming state may be the same as or different from the time saving performance in B time saving gaming state. good.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table may be the same as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 19, for example, or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the type of C time-saving gaming state. .

[8-1-2. Main control processing]
In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as the various processes described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 52 in the first pachinko game machine. Common for the most part. Below, the time saving counter update process (see FIG. 34) and the time saving setting process (see FIG. 39), which are processes different from the process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, respectively. explain. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 of the counter updating process (see FIG. 33) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 in the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[8-1-2-1. Time-saving counter update processing]
The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 310 performs only the processes of S161 and S162 of the time saving counter update process shown in FIG.

Specifically, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

If it is not determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is not larger than 0 (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33). return.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). The main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[8-1-2-2. Time-saving setting process]
As shown in FIG. 311, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S511).

In S511, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S511), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S511 that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S511), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S514.

In S512, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not C4 time saving has been achieved.

If it is determined in S512 that the C4 time saving is not achieved (NO determination in S512), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S513.

In S513, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode resetting processing. The time saving mode resetting process is a process of resetting the current time saving mode to a newly started time saving mode. In this embodiment, as described above, in this time saving mode resetting process (S513), various flags are initialized, and then various data related to the control of the C time saving gaming state correspond to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command. A process of setting the C time saving flag (C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag) to "1" and setting the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is performed. Further, in addition to these processes, as described above, a process for setting the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 may be performed. After performing the time saving mode resetting process in S513, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, in the time saving mode resetting process (S513), various flags are initialized and the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1". However, without initializing the time saving flag, the A time saving flag, B time saving flag, C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag and C4 time saving flag are initialized, and then responding to the selected symbol command. The C time saving flag may be set to "1". In addition, without initializing the time saving flag, A time saving flag and B time saving flag, the C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag and C4 time saving flag are initialized, and then the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command is The flag may be set to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in S512 that the C4 time saving is appropriate (YES in S512), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38). In this way, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164) in the time-saving gaming state, However, the main CPU 201 ignores this and ends the time saving setting process without performing the time saving mode resetting process (S513).

Further, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing in S514. The time saving mode setting process is a process of setting a newly started time saving mode in an area where nothing has been set. In this embodiment, as described above, in this time saving mode setting process (S514), various data related to the control of the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the C time saving flag (C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag) corresponding to the selected symbol command. , C3 time saving flag) to "1", processing to set the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command, etc. are performed. Further, in addition to these processes, as described above, a process for setting the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 may be performed. After performing the time saving mode setting process in S514, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S515.

In S515, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning on the time saving flag, that is, setting the time saving flag to "1". After performing the process of S515, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

[8-1-3. Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game.

Note that in FIG. 312, the game state that can be enjoyed is the current game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. "Jackpot" shown in the column of game states that can be enjoyed is the jackpot gaming state, "A time saving" is the A time saving gaming state, "B time saving" is the B working time saving gaming state, "C1 time saving" is the C1 working time saving gaming state, "C2 "Save time" means the C2 time saving game state, "C3 time saver" means the C3 time saver game state, "C4 time saver" means the C4 time saver game state, and "normal" means the normal game state.

In addition, in FIG. 312, "per C4," "per C1," and "per C3" respectively indicate winning in C4 time saving, winning in C1 time saving, and winning in C3 time saving. There is.

Further, in FIG. 312, the display effect is a display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is configured of, for example, a liquid crystal display. Each stage effect shown in this display effect column indicates, for example, an external state displayed as a background image. Specifically, the "normal stage" which is a stage production is a background image indicating that the gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is the normal gaming state, and the "A stage" is also a background image that can be enjoyed by the player. The background image shows that the gaming state controlled in the manner is the A time-saving gaming state, and the "B stage" also shows that the gaming state controlled in the manner that the player can enjoy is the B time-saving gaming state. The background images, also "C1 stage" to "C4 stage", are background images showing that the gaming states controlled in a manner that players can enjoy are C1 time-saving gaming state to C4 time-saving gaming state, respectively, and also "Jackpot stage". ” is a background image indicating that the gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is a jackpot gaming state.

Further, the "remaining number of times" shown in FIG. 312 is the remaining time shortening number, and when the special symbol is variable displayed once, 1 is subtracted and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 312, the internal state indicates the state of the time saving flag and various time saving flags controlled by the main CPU 201, for example. When each flag is set to "1", it turns ON, and when it is initialized (cleared), it turns OFF.

In addition, in FIG. 312, a case will be explained in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state or the time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the high-accuracy time-saving game state is a time-saving hit. I won't explain if it's a hit. This means that in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is a time-saving hit, the main CPU 201 will automatically control the time-saving hit regardless of the type of the time-saving hit. This is because this is ignored and the C time-saving game state is not performed (that is, does not operate).

[8-1-3-1. (a) If you win the C4 time saving win in the normal gaming state]
First, in the normal gaming state, for example, if you win a C4 time saver (that is, if a display mode indicating a C4 time saver (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 ( An example of the internal state, display effects, and the game state that can be enjoyed (the game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy) of (see (a) in FIG. 312) will be explained.

The main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and these flags are turned from OFF to ON. As a result, the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of time reductions.

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C4 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11") or that the C4 time saver has been won. The display area of the display device 7 performs a C4 time-saving transition suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the time reduction has occurred. This C4 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, between the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C4 time short hit and the time when the display mode indicating a C4 time short hit is derived. It's good to do.

In addition, the C4 time shortening transition suggestion effect that indicates that the selected symbol command is ``z3'' or ``z11'' means a confirmed effect of winning the C4 time shortening, and indicates that ``there is a possibility that you have won the C4 time saving win.'' The "C4 time reduction transition suggestion performance" includes not only the case where the C4 time reduction win is won, but also the so-called false effect that makes the user expect that the C4 time reduction win has been won even though the C4 time reduction win has not been won. The same applies to the C1 time-saving shift suggestion performance, the C2 time-shortening shift suggestion performance, the C3 time-shortening shift suggestion performance, and the C5 time-saving shift suggestion performance, which will be described later.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the normal stage to the C4 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, "50" in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 as the remaining time reduction number of times in the C4 time reduction game state.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the normal gaming state to the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is a C4 time-saving transition suggestion effect performed, and the background image of the effect shifts from the normal stage to the C4 stage, but also, for example, the audio effect indicates that the normal gaming state has transitioned to the C4 time-saving gaming state. I can understand things. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it is possible to understand that the normal game state has shifted to the C3 time-saving game state or the C4 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309). ). In addition, by making the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory different between the C3 time-saving game state and the C4 time-saving game state, it may be possible to understand that the C4 time-saving game state is from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146. .

In addition, in the normal gaming state, if you win the C1 time saver, C2 time saver, or C3 time saver, or if you reach the ceiling, the same processing as when you win the C4 time saver in the normal game state will be performed. It is better to make it .

[8-1-3-2. (b) If you win the C1 time saving win in the C4 time saving gaming state]
Next, in the C4 time saving game state, for example, if a winning is won on C1 time saving (that is, a display mode is derived for the special symbol display sections 163, 164 to indicate C1 time saving (selected symbol command "z0" or "z8"). An example of the internal state of the case (see FIG. 312(b)), the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "300" is set as the number of time reductions.

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C1 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z8") or that the C1 time saver has been won. A C1 time reduction shift suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the C1 time reduction shift is possible is performed in the display area of the display device 7. This C1 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, from the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C1 time saving hit until the display mode indicating a C1 time saving hit is derived. It's good to do.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C4 stage to the C1 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform, for example, an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions increases.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C4 time-saving gaming state to the C1 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C1 time-saving winning effect confirmed, and the background image shifts from the C4 stage to the C1 stage, but also, for example, from the audio production, the C4 time-saving game state changes to the C1 time-saving game state. I can understand things. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the C4 time-saving game state has shifted to the C1 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, even if you win the C2 time saver or C3 time saver, or if you reach the ceiling, the same process as when you win the C1 time saver in the C4 time saver game state will be performed. good. However, if you win a C4 time saver in the C4 time saver gaming state, the C4 time saver win will be ignored, so the originally controlled C4 time saver game state will continue as it is, and the remaining time saver count will continue to be displayed without updating. It is a good idea to do so.

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, if the C2 time saving win is won, the remaining time saving number may decrease depending on the remaining time saving number in the C4 time saving gaming state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions has decreased, but by hiding the remaining number of time reductions or displaying a display different from the actual number of remaining time reductions, A decrease in interest due to a decrease in the number of remaining time reductions may be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the C4 time-saving game state, if a time-saving win that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the C2 time-saving win) is won, this may be ignored and the C4 time-saving game state may be continued.

[8-1-3-3. (c) If you win the C4 time saver in the C1 time saver gaming state]
Next, when winning a C4 time saver in the C1 time saver gaming state (that is, when a display mode indicating a C4 time saver (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 (See FIG. 312(c))) An example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

As mentioned above, even if the C4 time saving win is won in the C1 time saving game state, it will be ignored. That is, the main CPU 201 maintains the current state of each time saving flag without changing it, and does not set the number of time saving times. In addition, the sub CPU 301 not only does not perform the C4 time saving transition suggestion effect or the confirmation effect of winning the C4 time saving prize, but also does not change the effect content such as the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. Maintain the current state.

The C1 time-saving gaming state is maintained as the gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. Also, from the appearance, it is possible to understand that the C1 time saving game state is in effect. That is, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C1 stage, but also the audio performance is maintained at the C1 time-saving game state, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is maintained. Also, the open pattern in the C1 time-saving gaming state is maintained.

By the way, when the C4 time saver win is won in the C1 time saver gaming state, the main CPU 201 changes the display mode indicating the C4 time saver win (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") to the corresponding special symbol display section (first special symbol command). It is led out to the symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164).

On the other hand, even if the C4 time saving win is won in the C1 time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 controls the variable display effects and character effects of the decorative symbols performed in the display area of the display device 7 based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process. It is preferable to perform the same effect as in the case of a loss. By doing this, there is a lower possibility that the player will notice that the winning in the C4 time saving win has been ignored, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In addition, the sub CPU 301 performs an expectation effect that makes the advantageous person expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is an advantageous result (for example, a jackpot, a C1 time short hit, etc.), and then performs a special symbol hit determination process. A loss stop image that is displayed when the result is a loss may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when winning the C4 time saver in the C1 time saver gaming state, the main CPU 201 changes the display mode indicating the C4 time saver (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") to the corresponding special symbol display. (first special symbol display section 163 or second special symbol display section 164), but instead of this, a display mode is derived that shows that even if it is a C4 time short hit, it is a loss. You can also do this.

Also, if you win C4 time saving in other time saving gaming states (i.e. A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state), the C1 working time saving gaming state will be applied. It is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning the C4 time saving win is performed.

[8-1-3-4. (d) When the ceiling is reached in the C1 time-saving gaming state]
Next, an example will be described in which the ceiling is reached in the C1 time saving game state.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag and the B time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "300" is set as the number of time reductions.

The sub CPU 301 performs a ceiling reaching effect on the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. This ceiling reaching effect is not limited to the period from when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling is reached until it is stopped, such as when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops when the ceiling is reached. , and may be performed at any timing, including until the variable display of the next special symbol starts. Further, the sub CPU 301 may perform a performance suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, such as a precursory performance indicating that the ceiling is almost reached, before the ceiling is reached.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C1 stage to the B stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions increases.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C1 time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the ceiling reaching effect performed and the background image shifts from the C1 stage to the B stage, but also, for example, the audio effect indicates that the transition from the C1 time saving game state to the B time saving game state has occurred. I can understand it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C1 time-saving game state and the B-time saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309), but in the C1 time-saving game state and The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the B time-saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C1 time-saving game state to the B-time saving game state. It may be possible to make it possible to understand that the migration has been made.

In addition, when the ceiling is reached in the C2 time-saving game state, when the ceiling is reached in the C3 time-saving game state, and when the ceiling is reached in the C4 time-saving game state, the same processing as when the ceiling is reached in the C1 time-saving game state is performed. It is a good idea to make sure that it is done.

[8-1-3-5. (e) If you win the C2 time saving win in the B time saving gaming state]
Next, when winning a C2 time saver in the B1 time saver gaming state (that is, when a display mode indicating a C1 time saver (selected symbol command "z1" or "z9") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 (See FIG. 312(e))))'s internal state, display effects, and an example of the game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "5" is set as the number of time reductions.

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C2 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z9") or that the C2 time saver has been won. A C2 time reduction shift suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the C2 time reduction shift is possible is performed in the display area of the display device 7. This C2 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, from the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C2 time short hit until the display mode indicating a C2 time short hit is derived. It's good to do.

The sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the B stage to the C2 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions has decreased. Further, by hiding the number of remaining time reductions or displaying a display different from the actual number of remaining time reductions, a decrease in interest due to a decrease in the number of remaining time reductions may be suppressed.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the B time-saving gaming state to the C2 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C2 time-saving winning effect confirmed, and the background image shifts from the B stage to the C2 stage, but also, for example, from the audio production, the transition from the B time-saving game state to the C2 time-saving game state is performed. I can understand things. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the B time-saving game state has shifted to the C2 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

In addition, if the player wins C2 time saving in the B time saving gaming state, the remaining time saving number decreases, so the time saving gaming state which is advantageous for the player shifts to the disadvantageous time saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the player wins the C2 time saving win in the B time saving gaming state, this may be ignored and the B time saving gaming state may be continued.

Even if you win C3 time saving in the B time saving game state, the remaining time saving number may decrease, so even if you win C3 time saving in the B time saving gaming state, this will be ignored and the B time saving gaming state will continue. You may also do so.

In addition, if in the B time saving gaming state, for example, if you win the C2 time saving win or the C3 time saving win, for example, the control by the main CPU 201 is changed from the B time saving gaming state to the C2 time saving win or the C3 time saving win, but the control by the sub CPU 301 does not change. B. The time-saving gaming state may be continued. For example, the main CPU 201 changes all or a part of the referenced hit type determination table, the referenced special symbol variation pattern table, the normal symbol hit determination table, and the normal symbol determination table, while the sub CPU 301 changes the display. The background image, audio effects, etc. displayed in the display area of the device 7 may be continued without being changed. By doing this, although the time-saving gaming state B is internally changed to the time-saving gaming state C2 or the time-saving gaming state C3, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the time-saving gaming state B is continuing. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the transition from the B time-saving gaming state to the C2 time-saving gaming state or the C3 time-saving gaming state.

If you win the C1 time saver in the B time saver game state, there is a high possibility that the remaining time saver number will increase. Therefore, in the case of winning the C1 time saving game in the B time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state may be shifted to the C1 time saving gaming state. That is, in this case, since it is the B time saving game state, YES is determined in S511 of the time setting process (see FIG. 311), and if the C1 time saving win is won, the time saving mode resetting process (S513) is performed. In this time-saving mode resetting process, for example, after initializing various flags, the time-saving flag and the C1 time-saving flag are set to "1", and for example, "300" is set as the number of time-saving C1 times. .

Furthermore, if a time saving win is won in the B time saving gaming state, this may be uniformly ignored regardless of the type of winning time saving winning, and the B time saving gaming state may be continued.

[8-1-3-6. (f) If you win a jackpot in the C2 time-saving gaming state]
Next, if you win a jackpot in the C2 time-saving game state (that is, if you win a jackpot (one of the selected symbol commands "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14" in the special symbol display areas 163 and 164) ) is derived (see (f) in FIG. 312)), an example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

At the start of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the jackpot flag (not shown) to "1", and refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 289 to 295). Set the number of rounds determined according to the selected symbol command. As a result, internally, the game becomes neither a variable probability game state nor a time-saving game state, but a jackpot game state.

The sub CPU 301 indicates that the jackpot has been won (that is, the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 indicate that the jackpot (selection symbol command is one of "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14")). A jackpot winning performance shown in the figure is performed in the display area of the display device 7.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C2 stage to the jackpot stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 hides the remaining time shortening count displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7, for example. In this case, instead of hiding the remaining time reduction number, the sub CPU 301 keeps displaying the remaining time reduction number of the C2 time reduction gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends. , the remaining time reduction count displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 may be updated. For example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, when moving to the A time saving gaming state, the remaining number of time reductions in the A time saving gaming state is displayed, and when moving to the variable probability gaming state or the normal gaming state, the remaining number of time reductions is hidden, for example. Good too.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C2 time-saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, visually, not only does a jackpot confirmation performance occur and the background image shifts from the C2 stage to the jackpot stage, but also, for example, from the audio performance, it is understood that the transition from the C2 time-saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state has occurred. can. In addition, in the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period is also executed, so that it is possible to transition from the C2 time-saving game state to the jackpot game state. can be understood.

In addition, not only when winning the jackpot in the C2 time saving gaming state, but also when winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, C1 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, or C4 working time saving gaming state. , C2 It is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning a jackpot in the time-saving gaming state is performed.

[8-1-3-7. (g) When the jackpot gaming state ends]
Next, an example of an internal state, a display effect, and a game state that can be enjoyed when the jackpot game state ends will be explained.

At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 clears the jackpot flag, refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 289 to 295), and changes the probability according to the jackpot type determined according to the selection symbol command. The flag, the time saving flag, and the A time saving flag are set to "1", and when controlling to the A time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times is also set. In (g) of FIG. 312, a case is illustrated in which the A time saving gaming state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state (that is, the case where the time saving flag is set to "1" and the A time saving flag is set to "1"). .

At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end effect on the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the jackpot gaming state has ended.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the jackpot stage to the A stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays the number of time reductions set by the main CPU 201, that is, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state, as the remaining number of time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the A time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the jackpot end effect performed and the background image moves from the jackpot stage to the A stage, but also, for example, the audio effect indicates that the jackpot game state has ended and the transition has been made to the A time-saving game state. I can understand things. In addition, when the round game is no longer executed, it can be understood from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) that the jackpot game state has transitioned to the C3 time-saving game state (FIGS. 308 and 309). reference).

[8-1-3-8. (h) If you win the C3 time saving win in the A time saving gaming state]
Next, in the A time saving gaming state, for example, if a C3 time saving win is won (that is, a display mode is derived that indicates a C3 time saving win (selected symbol command "z2" or "z10") in the special symbol display sections 163, 164. An example of the internal state of the case (see (h) in FIG. 312), the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of time reductions.

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C3 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z10") or that the C3 time saver has been won. A C3 time-saving transition suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of a change in time is performed in the display area of the display device 7. This C3 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, from the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C3 time saving hit until the display mode indicating a C3 time saving win is derived. It's good to do.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the A stage to the C3 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect when the number of remaining time reductions increases, and may perform an effect indicating a decrease when the number of remaining time reductions decreases. However, if the number of remaining time reductions decreases, interest may decrease, so by hiding the number of remaining time reductions or displaying them separately from the actual number of remaining time reductions, it is possible to increase the interest due to a decrease in the number of remaining time reductions. It may also be possible to suppress the decrease in .

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the A time-saving gaming state to the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time-saving winning effect confirmed, and the background image shifts from the A stage to the C3 stage, but also, for example, from the audio performance, the transition from the A time-saving game state to the C3 time-saving game state is performed. I can understand things. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the A time-saving game state has shifted to the C3 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

In addition, not only if you win the C3 time saver in the A time saver gaming state, but also if you win the C1 time saver or C2 time saver in the A time saver gaming state, it is the same as winning the C3 time saver in the A time saver gaming state. It is recommended that the following processing be performed.

Also, if you win the C3 time saver in the B time saver game state, if you win the C3 time saver in the C1 time saver game state, if you win the C3 time saver in the C2 time saver game state, if you win the C3 time saver in the C4 time saver game state. Even in the case of winning, it is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning the C3 time saving win in the A time saving game state is performed.

[8-1-3-9. If you win the same type of time saving win as the current gaming state]
Although not shown in FIG. 312, if you win the C1 time saver in the C1 time saver game state, if you win the C2 time saver in the C2 time saver game state, if you win the C3 time saver in the C3 time saver game state, The main CPU 201 and sub CPU 301 perform the following processing.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time-saving flag and the type of time-saving flag corresponding to the time-saving hit derived on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 to "1". For example, when winning a C1 time saving win in the C1 time saving game state, various flags are initialized and the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are set to "1". Further, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, "300" as the number of time reductions, and starts managing the remaining number of time reductions in the C1 time reduction gaming state. That is, for example, even if the remaining number of time reductions is less than 300 because the number of time reductions in the C1 time-saving game state under control has been exhausted, the number of time reductions will be reset to "300".

The sub CPU 301 performs, in the display area of the display device 7, a time-saving shift suggestion performance corresponding to the type of time-saving winnings corresponding to the time-saving winnings derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164. Note that the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional performance indicating that the number of remaining time reductions will increase, instead of or in addition to the time reduction shift suggestion performance.

Further, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 on the stage of the type corresponding to the time saving hit derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

The gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is controlled to the type of time-saving gaming state that corresponds to the time-saving win derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, the previous time-saving gaming state is maintained.

In addition, from the appearance, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C1 stage, but also from, for example, the audio performance, it can be understood that the C1 time-saving game state is maintained. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) does not change, it can be understood that the C1 time-saving game state may be maintained (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

[8-1-4. Expansion example of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, special features in a high-accuracy gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, but in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state include a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the main CPU 201 ignores this regardless of the type of time-saving hit, but the invention is not limited to this. In the first place, a time-saving hit may not be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. For example, if you change the "time-saving hit judgment value data" shown in the probability change flag "1" column of the special symbol hit judgment table (Fig. 10) to "loss judgment value data," the special symbol hit judgment in a high-probability gaming state The result of processing will not be time-saving.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, if a winning is achieved in C1 time saving, C2 time saving, or C3 time saving in the A time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state is ended and the transition is made to the C time saving gaming state corresponding to the winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition from the A time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state may not be performed. In this case, the A time saving gaming state may not transition to any C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state may be changed to a specific C time saving gaming state (for example, the C1 time saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player). It may be arranged so that the transition is not made to a non-specific C time saving gaming state (for example, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the B time saving gaming state, if a winning is achieved in C1 time saving, C2 time saving, or C3 time saving, the B time saving gaming state is ended, and the C time saving gaming state corresponding to the winning is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state B may not be changed to the time-saving game state C. In this case, it may be arranged not to shift from the B time saving gaming state to all the C time saving gaming states, or from the B working time saving gaming state to a specific C time saving gaming state (for example, C1 time saving which is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of times the player can save time). It may be arranged so that the state does not shift to a non-specific C time-saving game state (for example, C2 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, if a winning is achieved in the C1 time saving, C2 time saving, or C3 time saving in the C1 time saving gaming state, the current C1 time saving gaming state is terminated and the C time saving corresponding to the winning is completed. Although the system shifts to the gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a time saving win is won in the C1 time saving gaming state, the state may not shift to the C time saving gaming state corresponding to the winning. In this case, the C1 time-saving gaming state may not transition to all C-time saving gaming states, or if a specific time-saving win (for example, C1 time-saving winning) is won, the C time-saving gaming state under control may be terminated. Although a new C1 time-saving game state is started, if a non-specific time-saving win (for example, a C2 time-saving win, a C3 time-saving win) is won, the C time-saving game state under control may be continued. .

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, different stage effects are displayed in the C1 time-saving gaming state, the C2 time-saving gaming state, the C3 time-saving gaming state, and the C4 time-saving gaming state, so that in any of the C time-saving gaming states, Although it is possible to determine whether or not there is one by looking at the appearance, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a common stage effect may be displayed in the C1 time saving gaming state, the C2 working time saving gaming state, the C3 working time saving gaming state, and the C4 working time saving gaming state. Also, although the C1 time-saving game state, C2 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state, and C4 time-saving game state are different stages, the difference is slight, so which C time-saving game state does it appear to be? Stage effects that are difficult or difficult to understand may be displayed.

If a common stage or a stage production that cannot be grasped or is difficult to grasp is displayed in the C1 time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, and C4 working time saving gaming state, at a predetermined timing (for example, when the player At the timing when the number of time savings in the C time saving gaming state other than the C1 time saving gaming state which is most advantageous for the game is exhausted, it is possible to increase interest by performing an effect that encourages whether the C time saving gaming state will continue or end. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, if it is determined that the C1 time-saving gaming state is the most advantageous to the player, it is preferable to perform a performance to increase the player's interest.

In addition, the stage displayed in the C time-saving gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, the C2 time-saving gaming state) and the stage that is displayed in the C time-saving gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, the C1 time-saving gaming state, C3 In addition to making the stages displayed different in the time-saving gaming state and C4 working-time-saving gaming state), in the C-time-saving gaming state that is not relatively disadvantageous to the player, it is not possible to tell from the appearance which C-time-saving gaming state it is, or it is difficult to understand which C-time saving gaming state it is. A difficult stage performance may be displayed. In a stage indicating that the C time saving gaming state is not relatively disadvantageous to the player, the C time saving gaming state continues or ends at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the number of time saving times in the C3 time saving gaming state is exhausted). By creating a performance that stirs excitement, it is possible to increase interest. Then, if the C time-saving gaming state continues beyond a predetermined timing and, for example, it is determined that the C time-saving gaming state is the most advantageous to the player, it is preferable to perform a performance to increase the player's interest. .

In addition, the stage displayed in the C time-saving gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, the C1 time-saving gaming state) and the stage that is displayed in the C time-saving gaming state that is relatively not advantageous to the player (for example, the C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 In addition to making the stages displayed different in the time-saving gaming state and C4 working-time-saving gaming state), in the C-time-saving gaming state that is relatively less advantageous to the player, it is not possible to tell from the appearance which C-time-saving gaming state it is, or it is difficult to understand which C-time saving gaming state it is. A difficult stage performance may be displayed.

Furthermore, the C time saving gaming state is relatively advantageous or most advantageous for the player (for example, C1 time saving gaming state), or the C time saving gaming state is relatively disadvantageous or most disadvantageous for the player (for example, C2 time saving gaming state). It is also possible to display a stage effect in which it is impossible or difficult to determine whether the player is in a gaming state or not by looking at the appearance. In this case, for example, after discouraging the player by displaying a stage effect indicating that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous or most disadvantageous C2 time reduction gaming state, a predetermined timing (for example, C2 time reduction The player's interest may be increased by displaying a stage production indicating that the C1 time-saving gaming state is relatively advantageous or most advantageous for the player at the timing when the number of time-saving games in the gaming state is exhausted. good.

[8-2. Pachinko gaming machine of second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be explained below. In explaining the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, we will omit the explanation of the points that are common to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment as much as possible, and mainly explain the points that are different from the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. shall be taken as a thing. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in that it is equipped with the C5 time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. Since the other time-saving gaming states mentioned above are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, explanations thereof will be omitted as much as possible.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the first example, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state where electric support control is not executed, and in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low In the definite time-saving game state, including all C time-saving game states, right-handed playing is the regular game mode. However, as with the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, it is possible to arbitrarily design whether left-handed or right-handed playing is the normal playing mode in each game state depending on, for example, the nature of the game. It is possible. Also, like the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, although it is not installed in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in a high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state where electric support control is not executed.

[8-2-1. basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 313 to 319.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 201, like the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, plays a game in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. It is now possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

Further, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the low-probability time-saving gaming state includes the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the C time saving gaming state includes a C3 working time saving gaming state, a C4 working time saving gaming state, and a C5 working time saving gaming state. The C3 time saving gaming state and the C4 working time saving gaming state are similar to the C3 working time saving gaming state and the C4 working time saving gaming state described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The C5 time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled to the C5 time-saving gaming state when the result of the winning determination process in the normal gaming state is a C5 time-saving winning. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is a C5 time saving win, while continuing the current time saving gaming state being controlled, the C5 It is possible to operate the time saver. In this case, the time-saving gaming state that can be grasped from the outside, that is, the time-saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, is the only time-saving gaming state that is actually controlled, and the C5 that is being operated internally is superimposed. Regarding time saving, it is difficult or impossible to visually grasp that internal operations are overlapping.

In addition, in the following, time-saving gaming states that are controlled in a manner that players can enjoy are described with the words "time-saving gaming state" attached to them, such as the C5 time-saving gaming state, and are internally overlapped. If it is not the C5 time saving game state that the player can enjoy just by playing the game, it is simply referred to as "C5 time saving". Therefore, in the following, when "in the time-saving gaming state" is described, for example, "in the time-saving gaming state A" or "in the time-saving gaming state B", "the time-saving gaming state is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy." It means "in a gaming state."

It should be noted that it is not essential that the C time saving gaming state includes all of the C3 working time saving gaming state, the C4 working time saving gaming state, and the C5 working time saving gaming state, but only a part of these C working time saving gaming states should be included. Alternatively, other C time-saving gaming states may be included. For example, in addition to any one or more (including all) of the C3 time saving gaming state, the C4 working time saving gaming state, and the C5 working time saving gaming state, the C time saving gaming state explained in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment The C1 time-saving game state and/or the C2 time-saving game state may be included in the C time-saving game state.
[8-2-1-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 201 operates based on the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Then, special symbol hit determination processing is performed.

[8-2-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 313 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 313, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z20" as the selection symbol command and "zA21" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 selects "z21" as the selection symbol command and "zA22" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z22" as the selection symbol command and "zA23" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z23" as the selection symbol command and "zA24" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 40 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z24" as the selection symbol command and "zA24" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z25" as the selection symbol command and "zA24" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z26" and select "zA25" as the symbol designation command.

When time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z27" as the selection symbol command and "zA26" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 selects "z28" as the selection symbol command and "zA27" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z29" as the selection symbol command and "zA28" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z30" as the selection symbol command and "zA29" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 40 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z31" as the selection symbol command and "zA29" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z32" as the selection symbol command and "zA29" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z33" and select "zA30" as the symbol designation command.

[8-2-1-3. Hit type determination table]
314 to 319 are examples of winning type determination tables stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[8-2-1-3-1. Winning type determination table in normal gaming state]
FIG. 314 is an example of the winning type determination table in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 314, in the normal gaming state, the display mode in which the selected symbol command corresponds to one of "z20" to "z22" and "z27" to "z29" is used as a display mode to indicate the time saving win. is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to "1" and performs the time saving mode setting process (described later). In (see S568 in FIG. 327, which will be described later), various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state are set. Various data related to the control of the C time saving gaming state set in the time saving mode setting process (see S568 in FIG. 327 described later) are, for example, the type of time saving flag and the number of time saving times according to the selected symbol command.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" is derived to the first special symbol display section 163, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and sets "50" as the number of time saving times. ”. For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z28" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving number as the number of time saving times. Set "50".

In addition, if the selected symbol command is one of "z23" to "z25" and "z30" to "z32" and the display mode indicating the jackpot is in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, first special symbol display section 163, 2), the main CPU 201 initializes various flags in the jackpot game control start setting process (see S123 in FIG. 30) (that is, at the start of the jackpot game state). , the jackpot flag (not shown) is set to "1", and the number of rounds is set according to the selected symbol command. In addition, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) (that is, at the end of the jackpot game state), the main CPU 201 sets the probability variable flag, time saving flag, etc. according to the type of jackpot determined according to the selected symbol command. The A time saving flag is set to "1", and when controlling to the A time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times is also set.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selection symbol command "z23" is derived to the first special symbol display section 163, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags at the start of the jackpot game state, and then displays the jackpot flag ( (not shown) is set to "1", and "3" is set as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state. Further, at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag and the A time saving flag are set to "1" (the probability variable flag is not set to "1"), and the number of time saving times is set to "30".

Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z32" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags at the start of the jackpot game state, and then displays the jackpot. A flag (not shown) is set to "1" and "10" is set as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state. In addition, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability change flag, time saving flag, and A time saving flag are set to "1", and the time saving number is set as the number of times that the A time saving gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot gaming state is controlled. For example, set it to "10000".

The winning type determination table in the normal gaming state in FIG. 314 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 314, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 314. , it is not necessary to have some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 314.

[8-2-1-3-2. A hit type determination table in time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 315 is an example of the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state.

In the A time saving game state, as the display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving win) is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163 and second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 described later). do.

As shown in FIG. 315, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. Set.

That is, in the A time saving game state, for example, when the display mode indicating C3 time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 The A time saving gaming state is ended and the C3 working time saving gaming state is newly started. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z27" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and then displays the time-saving flag and C3. Set the time saving flag to "1" and set the number of time saving times to "50".

In addition, in the A time saving game state, as the display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (the display mode indicating the C4 time saving hit) is the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, does not execute the new C4 time-saving gaming state, and continues the A time-saving gaming state under control. is possible.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating C5 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 continues the A time saving gaming state as long as there is a remaining time saving number of the A time saving gaming state under control, and internally controls the C5 time saving. Activate it by overlapping it with . In this case, as long as the time-saving gaming state A continues, the player can enjoy the time-saving gaming state A. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and displays the duplicate flag and C5. Set the time saving flag to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the A time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are established. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of time reductions of the C5 time reduction which are internally operated repeatedly. Note that the remaining number of time reductions in the A time-saving game state is continuously managed.

Note that the "duplicate flag" is a flag indicating that the time savers (C5 time savers in this embodiment) are internally operating in duplicate. For example, if you win the C5 time saver in any one of the time saver game states and the remaining number of times in the first time saver game state is greater than 0, the C5 time savers operate internally, so the main CPU 201 sets the overlap flag to " 1”. On the other hand, if you win the C5 time saver in the normal gaming state, or if you win the C5 time saver in any one of the time saver game states and the remaining number of times in the first time saver game state is 0, based on the C5 time saver, In this case, the main CPU 201 does not set the duplication flag to "1" because the C5 time-saving gaming state is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. In addition, if the C5 time saver is won in a state where the C5 time saver is already operating internally in any one of the time saver game states, the main CPU 201 keeps the overlap flag in the state "1". Then, in any one of the time-saving game states, one time-saving game state ends with two C5 time-savers operating internally in a stacked manner, and one of the two C5 time-savers that were internally operating in a stacked manner ends. When control of one C5 time saver is started in a manner that the player can enjoy, the main CPU 201 continues to keep the overlap flag in the state "1" as long as the other C5 time savers operate internally in a superimposed manner. In this way, if even one C5 time saver operates internally in duplicate, the overlap flag is set to "1", and the state of the overlap flag continues to be "1" until there are no more C5 time savers that operate internally. , when the C5 time saver that operates internally in duplicate is no longer present, the duplication flag is initialized or cleared. Note that the number of C5 time savers that operate internally in duplicate is managed by a C5 time saver counter that will be described later. That is, when the value of the C5 time saving counter is greater than 0, the state of the duplication flag becomes "1".

In the following, the number of times in the time-saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is referred to as the "time-saving number" or "remaining time-saving number", whereas the number of times that are not controlled in the manner that the player can enjoy is referred to as the "time-saving number" or "remaining time-saving number". The number of times the C5 time saver is activated overlappingly is referred to as the "overlapping time saver number".

In addition, the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state in FIG. 315 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 315, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 315. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 315 may not be included.

[8-2-1-3-3. Winning type determination table in B time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 316 is an example of the winning type determination table in the B time saving game state.

In the B time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating C3 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display). section 163 and second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 described later). do.

As shown in FIG. 316, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. Set.

That is, in the B time-saving game state, for example, when the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 is under control. The B time-saving game state is ended, and the C3 time-saving game state is newly started. For example, in the B time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z27" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and then displays the time saving flag and C3. Set the time saving flag to "1" and set the number of time saving times to "300".

By the way, as mentioned above, in the normal game state and the A time-saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, it is a C3 time-saving hit (selected symbol commands "z20", "z27"). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 314 and 315, the number of time saving times set is "50". However, in the time-saving game state B, which is relatively advantageous for the player among the time-saving game states, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C3 time-saving hit, as shown in FIG. The number of time saving times is "300". This is because even though the game has been controlled to the B time-saving gaming state by reaching the ceiling, if "50" is set as the number of time-savings when winning C3 time-saving, there is a risk that the game will lose interest. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning C3 time saving in the B time saving game state, the decrease in interest can be suppressed by setting "300" as the number of time saving times, just as when the ceiling is reached. There is.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C5 time saving hit (selected symbol commands "z22", "z29"), the number of time saving times set is "100" as shown in FIG. 316. In this case, even if the player wins the C5 time saver in the B time saver game state, if the set number of time savers is small, there is a risk that there will be fewer opportunities to enjoy winning the C5 time saver. Therefore, in this embodiment, if you win the C5 time saver in the B time saver game state, although it is smaller than the case where you win the C3 time saver, by setting "100" as the number of time savers, you will win the C5 time saver. By increasing the number of machines that allow people to enjoy what they have done, we are trying to suppress a decline in interest.

However, the number of time reductions that will be set if you win the C3 time saver or C5 time saver in the B time saver game state is the same as the number of time savers that will be set if you win the C3 time saver or C5 time saver in other time saver game states (excluding the C1 time saver game state). It is not essential to set the number of times to be shortened more than the number of times set in the case. For example, even if the player wins the C3 time saver or the C5 time saver in any time saver game state, the set number of time savers may be the same or approximately the same.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating C4 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, does not execute the new C4 time-saving gaming state, and continues the B time-saving gaming state under control. is possible.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, as the display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (the display mode indicating the C5 time saving hit) is the display mode in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 continues the B time saving gaming state as long as there is a remaining number of time saving times in the B time saving gaming state under control, and internally controls the C5 time saving. Activate it by overlapping it with . In this case, as long as the B time saving gaming state continues, the player can enjoy the B time saving gaming state. For example, in the BA time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 displays the duplicate flag and C5 time saving without initializing various flags. Set the flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag, B time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5 time saving flag are established internally. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of times the C5 time reduction is repeated internally. Note that the remaining number of time reductions in the B time-saving game state is continuously managed.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the B time-saving game state in FIG. 316 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 316, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 316. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 316 may not be present.

[8-2-1-3-4. Winning type determination table in C3 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 317 is an example of the winning type determination table in the C3 time saving game state.

In addition, since the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 317 is the same as the winning type determining table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 315 in this embodiment, A common winning type determination table may be used. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state because there is room for expanding the range of game characteristics.

In the C3 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display). section 163 and second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 described later). do.

As shown in FIG. 317, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. That is, the C3 time-saving game state under control ends, and a new C3 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C3 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (the display mode indicating the C4 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, does not execute a new C4 time-saving gaming state, and continues the C3 time-saving gaming state under control. is possible.

In addition, in the C3 time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating C5 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special When the symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the C3 time saving gaming state as long as there is a remaining time saving number of times in the C3 time saving gaming state under control, and internally controls the C5 time saving. Activate it by overlapping it with . In this case, as long as the C3 time-saving gaming state continues, the player can enjoy the C3 time-saving gaming state. For example, in the C3 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and displays the duplicate flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are established. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of times the C5 time reduction is repeated internally. Note that the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the current C3 time-saving gaming state may be terminated and the B-time-saving gaming state may be executed, or the B-time-saving gaming state may be executed after the C3 time-saving gaming state being controlled ends. good.

In addition, when the C5 time saver is internally operating while the C3 time saver game state is being controlled (the player can enjoy the C3 time saver game state) and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 , initialize various flags except the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag, set the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and set the number of time saving times (for example, 300 times) corresponding to the B time saving gaming state. . That is, the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy becomes the B-time-saving gaming state, the internally overlapping C5 time-saving operation continues, and the number of overlapping time-savings of C5 time-saving is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, B time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5 time saving flag are established.

However, if the C5 time saver is internally overlapping and operating during the control of the C3 time saver gaming state and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 will control the C5 time saver that is internally overlapping and operating. Instead of continuing the operation, the C5 time saving operation may be ended. In this case, the number of times C5 time saving overlaps is cleared.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 317 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 317, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 317. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 317 may not be included.

[8-2-1-3-5. Winning type determination table in C4 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 318 is an example of the winning type determination table in the C4 time saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning type determination table in the C4 time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 318 is the winning type determining table in the A time saving gaming state shown in FIG. Since the table is similar to the type determination table, a common winning type determination table may be used for these. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state because there is room for expanding the range of game characteristics.

In the C4 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display). section 163 and second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 described later). do.

As shown in FIG. 318, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times is set to "50". That is, the C4 time-saving game state under control ends, and a new C3 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C4 time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating a C4 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, does not execute a new C4 time-saving gaming state, and continues the C4 time-saving gaming state under control. is possible.

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating C5 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special When the symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164) are derived, the main CPU 201 continues the C4 time saving gaming state as long as there is a remaining number of time saving times in the C4 time saving gaming state under control, and internally controls the C5 time saving. Activate it by overlapping it with . In this case, the player can enjoy the C4 time-saving gaming state as long as the C4 time-saving gaming state continues. For example, in the C4 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and displays the duplicate flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C4 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are established. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of times the C5 time reduction is repeated internally. Note that the remaining number of time reductions in the C4 time reduction gaming state is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C4 time-saving game state being controlled may be ended and the B-time saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C4 time-saving game state being controlled is ended. Good too.

In addition, when the C5 time saver is internally operating while the C4 time saver game state is being controlled (the player can enjoy the C4 time saver game state) and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 , after initializing various flags except for the duplication flag and the C4 time-saving flag, set the time-saving flag and the B-time-saving flag to "1", and set the number of time-savings (for example, 300 times) corresponding to the B-time-saving gaming state. . That is, the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy becomes the B-time-saving gaming state, the internally overlapping C5 time-saving operation continues, and the number of overlapping time-savings of C5 time-saving is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, B time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5 time saving flag are established.

However, if the C5 time saver is operating internally and the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling value while controlling the C4 time saver game state, the main CPU 201 will control the C5 time saver that is internally operating in an overlap manner. Instead of continuing the operation, the C5 time saving operation may be ended. In this case, the number of times C5 time saving overlaps is cleared.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state in FIG. 318 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 318, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 318. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 318 may not be included.

[8-2-1-3-6. C5 Hit type determination table in time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 319 is an example of the winning type determination table in the C5 time saving game state.

Note that the winning type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 319 is the same as the winning type determining table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. may use a common hit type determination table. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state because there is room for expanding the range of game characteristics.

In the C5 time saving game state, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving win) is the display mode indicating the time saving hit in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display). section 163 and second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 described later). do.

As shown in FIG. 319, specifically, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. That is, the control of the C5 time-saving game state ends, and a new C3 time-saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C5 time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating C4 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, does not execute a new C4 time-saving gaming state, and continues the C5 time-saving gaming state under control. is possible.

In addition, in the C5 time-saving game state, as a display mode indicating a time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating a C5 time-saving hit) is displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the main CPU 201 continues the C5 time-saving gaming state as long as there is a remaining number of time-savings in the C5 time-saving gaming state under control, and further internally controls the C5 time-saving gaming state. Operate overlapping targets. In this case, what the player can enjoy is the C5 time-saving game state that was originally activated. For example, in the C5 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display section 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and displays the duplicate flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are internally established. Further, for example, "50" is set as the number of times the C5 time reduction is repeated internally. Note that the remaining number of time reductions in the originally activated C5 time reduction game state is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag to "1", and enters the B-time saving gaming state. Set the corresponding time saving number (for example, 300 times). In this case, internally, the time saving flag and the B time saving flag are established. In this case, the C5 time-saving gaming state under control may be ended and the B-time saving gaming state may be executed, or the B time-saving gaming state may be executed after the C5 time-saving gaming state under control ends. You can also do this.

In addition, while the C5 time-saving game state is being controlled, the C5 time-saving game is being activated internally (the player can enjoy the C5 time-saving game state that is originally activated), and the value of the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags except the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving number (for example, 300) corresponding to the B time saving gaming state. times). That is, the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy becomes the B-time-saving gaming state, the internally overlapping C5 time-saving operation continues, and the number of overlapping time-savings of C5 time-saving is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, B time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5 time saving flag are established.

In addition, the winning type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state in FIG. 319 is just an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 319, and may have different winning types from the winning types shown in FIG. 319. Alternatively, some or all of the winning types shown in FIG. 319 may not be present.

[8-2-1-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Since the special symbol variation pattern table is the same as that of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the explanation will be omitted.

[8-2-1-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 320 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

Since the winning/losing judgment value data determined based on the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol winning judgment is as shown in FIG. 320, the explanation will be omitted here.

[8-2-1-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 321 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

If the judgment value data determined with reference to FIG. 321, so the explanation will be omitted here.

[8-2-1-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 322 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory determined based on the normal symbol winning selection symbol command determined with reference to FIG. 321 is as shown in FIG. 322, so the explanation will be omitted here.

[8-2-2. Main control processing]
In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as the various processes described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 52 in the first pachinko game machine. Common for the most part. Below, processes that are different from those executed in the first pachinko game machine will be mainly explained, and explanations of processes that are similar to those executed in the first pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible.

[8-2-2-1. Time-saving counter update processing]
FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 in the counter updating process (see FIG. 33) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the time-saving counter process shown in FIG. 323 is executed instead of the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 described in the first pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the time-saving counter corresponds to the remaining time-saving number of time-saving gaming states that are controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, and the overlapping time-saving counter is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. This corresponds to the number of repeated time reductions of time reductions that are not repeated but are operated internally (C5 time reduction in this embodiment).

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S521). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S521 that both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (NO in S521), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process, and executes the process as follows. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S521 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (YES in S521), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S522). After executing the process of S522, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S523.

In S523, the main CPU 201 performs a redundant time saving counter update process. This overlapping time saving counter update process is a process of subtracting 1 from the overlapping time saving counter of the C5 time saving, which is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but is internally operating overlappingly, and will be described in detail later. After performing the duplication time saving counter update process, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[8-2-2-2. Duplicate time saving counter update process]
FIG. 324 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the duplication time saving counter update process by the main CPU 201. The duplication time saving counter update process is called as a subroutine during execution of the time saving counter update process (see FIG. 323) described above.

In this overlapping time saving counter updating process, a process is performed in which 1 is subtracted from the number of times of overlapping time saving (that is, the value of the overlapping time saving counter) of the internally operating C5 time saving.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of assigning the C5 time saving counter to the variable X (S531). The C5 time saver counter indicates the number of C5 time savers that are not controlled in a manner that can be enjoyed by the player but are internally operated in duplicate. After performing the process in S531, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S532.

In S532, the main CPU 201 determines whether the variable X is greater than zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not there is one or more games in which the C5 time-saving game state is operating internally, although it is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy.

In S532, if the variable X is not larger than 0 (NO in S532), that is, if the variable (see Figure 323). It should be noted that if the C5 time saver is not internally operating in duplicate, or if the subtraction of the number of overlapped time savers has been completed, a NO determination is made in S532.

On the other hand, in S532, if the variable , the process moves to S533.

In S533, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the overlap time saving counter (X). For example, if the number of C5 time savers that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but that are internally operating one after another is two, the second C5 time saver (i.e., the second C5 time saver) The number of time reductions (that is, the number of overlapped time reductions) of C5 time reduction, which is won and is internally operated repeatedly, corresponds to the overlapping time reduction counter (X). In addition, if the number of C5 time savers that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but is internally activated in a stack is one, the first C5 time saver (i.e., the first C5 time saver is activated per C5 time saver) The number of times C5 (time saving) which is won and is internally operated repeatedly corresponds to the overlapping time saving counter (X). That is, the number of time reductions of C5 time reduction, which are internally operated repeatedly, is also subtracted every time a special symbol is variably displayed. After performing the process in S533, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S534.

In S534, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from variable X. After performing the process in S534, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S532, and repeatedly performs the processes in S532 to S534 until it is determined that the variable X is 0 (until NO is determined in S532). This makes it possible to subtract 1 from the number of repeated time reductions for all C5 time reductions that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally operated in duplicate.

[8-2-2-3. Counter judgment processing]
FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S142 in the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the counter determination process shown in FIG. 325 is executed instead of the counter determination process shown in FIG. 36 described in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S541). This time-saving transition determination process (S541) is the same as the time-saving transition determination process described with reference to FIG. 37 in the first pachinko gaming machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After performing the time saving transition determination process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S542.

In S542, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. This time-saving transition process (S542) will be described later. After performing the time saving transition process (S542), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S543.

In S543, the main CPU 201 performs overlap time saving counter shift processing. This overlap time saving counter shift process (S543) will be described later. After the main CPU 201 performs the overlap time saving counter shift process (S543), the process moves to S544.

In S544, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

If it is determined in S544 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S544), that is, if the time saving counter is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S548. Note that since the value of the time saving counter is the remaining time saving number, if the remaining time saving number of times in the time saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is greater than 0, a NO determination is made in S544.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S544 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (NO determination in S544), that is, if the time saving counter is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S545. It should be noted that if the remaining time saving number of times in the time saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is 0, a YES determination is made in S544.

In S545, the main CPU 201 determines whether the C5 time saving counter is 0 or not. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the number of C5 time savers that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but that are being operated internally and repeatedly is zero.

If it is determined in S545 that the C5 time saver counter is not 0 (NO determination in S545), that is, if there is a C5 time saver that is internally operating in duplicate, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S547.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S545 that the C5 time saving counter is 0 (YES determination in S545), that is, if there is no C5 time saving that is being operated internally, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S546. .

In S546, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning off the time saving flag, that is, turning off (clearing) the time saving flag. That is, if the remaining time saving number of times in the time saving game state, which is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, is exhausted, and the C5 time saving is not being operated internally, the time saving game state ends. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S548.

Further, in S547, the main CPU 201 performs overlap time saving setting processing. This overlap time saving setting process will be described later. After performing the overlapped time saving setting process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S548.

In S548, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S549) for the time saving shift command. Note that the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S549, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[8-2-2-4. Time-saving migration process]
FIG. 326 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S542 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 325). In this embodiment, the time saving transition process shown in FIG. 326 is executed instead of the time saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Note that the processes S551, S552, S553, S556, and S557 executed in the time-saving transition process in FIG. 326 are the same as the processes S202, S203, S205, S206, and S207 executed in the time-saving transition process in FIG. 38, respectively. Since it is the same as , the explanation will be omitted.

After performing the process in S553, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S554.

In S554, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not C5 time saving has been achieved.

In S554, if it is determined that the C5 time saving has been achieved (YES in S554), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S555.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S554 that the C5 time saving is not achieved (NO determination in S554), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S558.

In S555, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the simultaneous winning flag is on. The simultaneous winning flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the C5 time saving winning is won at the same timing as the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S558.

In S558, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Since this time saving setting process is different from the time saving setting process described with reference to FIG. 39 in the first pachinko game machine, details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 327. After executing the time saving setting process (S558), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

[8-2-2-5. Time-saving setting process]
FIG. 327 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S558 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326). In this embodiment, the time saving setting process shown in FIG. 327 is executed instead of the time saving setting process shown in FIG. 39 described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S561).

In S561, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S561), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S562.

In S562, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not C4 time saving has been achieved. As described above in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the C4 time-saving game state corresponding to the C4 time-saving game is a C4 time-saving game state that does not operate when the time-saving game state is controlled.

If it is determined in S562 that C4 time saving is appropriate (YES in S562), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S562 that the C4 time saving is not achieved (NO determination in S562), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S563.

In S563, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not C5 time saving has been achieved. As mentioned above, the C5 time saving win is a C time saving win that can be internally operated repeatedly when the time saving game state is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. In other words, if there is a remaining number of time reductions in the current time-saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, the C5 time-saving game cannot be controlled by switching from the current time-saving gaming state to the C5 time-saving gaming state. It can be said that it is a time saver.

In S563, if it is determined that the C5 time saving has been achieved (YES in S563), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S564. If the determination is YES in S563, the won C5 time saving win is the C5 time saving win during the time saving game state, so the operation is internally overlapped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S563 that it is not a C5 time saving win (if S563 is NO), that is, it is a time saving win that can end the current time saving gaming state and switch to and start a new time saving gaming state. (corresponding to C3 time saving in this embodiment), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S567.

In S564, the main CPU 201 performs overlap time saving counter setting processing. In this overlapping time saving counter setting process, the overlapping flag and C5 time saving flag are set to "1" without initializing various flags, and the number of times of overlapping time saving per C5 time saving that is internally activated is set. set. The specific process of this overlap time saving counter setting process (S564) will be explained with reference to FIG. 328, which will be described later. After the main CPU 201 performs the overlap time saving counter setting process (S564), the process moves to S565.

In S565, the main CPU 201 determines whether the simultaneous winning flag is off. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the C5 time saving win.

If it is determined in S565 that the simultaneous winning flag is off (YES in S565), that is, if the value of the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the C5 time saving winning, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S565 that the simultaneous winning flag is not off (if NO in S565), that is, if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value at the same timing as the C5 time saving winning, the main CPU 201 , the process moves to S566.

In S566, the main CPU 201 sets the simultaneous winning flag to OFF. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to time saving mode resetting process (S567).

In S567, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode resetting processing. In this time-saving mode resetting process, for example, after initializing various flags except the duplication flag and the C5 time-saving flag, the time-saving flag and the B-time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time-savings corresponding to the B-time-saving gaming state is set. For example, set "300". In this way, the current time-saving gaming state is ended, and control of a new B-time-saving gaming state, for example, is started. After performing the time saving mode resetting process (S567), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

Returning to S561, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO in S561), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S568.

In S568, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. In this time-saving mode setting process, as described above, after initializing various flags, the time-saving flag and the C time-saving flags (C3 time-saving flag, C4 time-saving flag, C5 time-saving flag) corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1". The process of setting the time saving number corresponding to the selected symbol command is performed. After performing the time saving mode setting process (S568), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S569.

In S569, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning on the time saving flag, that is, setting the time saving flag to "1". After performing the process of S569, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S570.

In S570, the main CPU 201 determines whether the simultaneous winning flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the C5 time saving win.

If it is determined in S570 that the simultaneous winning flag is not on (NO in S570), that is, if the simultaneous winning flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and transfers the process to the time saving transition process. (See Figure 326).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S570 that the simultaneous winning flag is on (YES in S570), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S571.

In S571, the main CPU 201 performs overlap time saving counter setting processing. This overlapping time saving counter setting process (S571) is the same process as the overlapping time saving counter setting process of S564, and will be explained with reference to FIG. 328, which will be described later. After the main CPU 201 performs the overlap time saving counter setting process (S571), the process moves to S572.

In S572, the main CPU 201 sets the simultaneous winning flag to OFF. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

In addition, in this embodiment, if the C5 time saving win is won at the same timing as the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, control of the B time saving gaming state is started in a manner that the player can enjoy, and the C5 time saving is won. Although these are operated by overlapping them internally, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control of the B time saving game state may be started in a manner that the player can enjoy, and the C5 time saving game state may not be operated internally. Alternatively, control of the C5 time-saving game state may be started in a manner that the player can enjoy, and control of the B time-saving game state may not be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. In this case, B time saving may be operated internally in the C5 time saving gaming state, and after the C5 time saving gaming state ends, control of the B time saving gaming state may be started in a manner that the player can enjoy. , B time saving may not be operated internally in the C5 time saving game state, and control of the B time saving game state may not be started in a manner that the player can enjoy even if the C5 time saving game state ends.

[8-2-2-6. Duplicate time saving counter setting process]
FIG. 328 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the duplication time saving counter setting process by the main CPU 201. The overlapping time saving counter setting process is a process that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned time saving transition process (see FIG. 326) or the above-mentioned time saving setting process (see FIG. 327) (S555 in FIG. 326 and S564 in FIG. 327). reference). In this process, if you win a time reduction that can be activated internally (in this example, C5 time reduction), the overlap time reduction that can be activated internally (in this example, C5 time reduction) is selected. The number of times is set. Note that in this overlap time saving counter setting process, processing is also performed in which the overlap flag and the C5 time saving flag are set to "1" without initializing the various flags, but illustration of these processes is omitted.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the C5 time saving has been achieved (S581).

In S581, if it is determined that the C5 time saving is not achieved (NO in S581), the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time saving counter setting process and returns the process to the original process called as a subroutine (time saving transition process). (see FIG. 326) or return to the time saving setting process (see FIG. 327).

In S582, the main CPU 201 determines whether the C5 time saving counter is smaller than 2 or not. That is, in this embodiment, the number of C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is limited to two. However, the number of C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is not limited to two.

In S582, if it is determined that the C5 time-saving counter is not smaller than 2 (NO in S582), that is, if the C5 time-saving counter is 2, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time-saving counter setting process, and executes the process as follows. The process returns to the original process called as a subroutine (time saving transition process (see FIG. 326) or time saving setting process (see FIG. 327)).

If it is determined in S582 that the C5 time saver counter is smaller than 2 (YES in S582), that is, if the number of C5 time savers that are internally operating in duplicate is less than the upper limit (for example, 2), The main CPU 201 moves the process to S583.

In S583, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the C5 time saving counter. After performing the process in S583, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S584.

In S584, the main CPU 201 sets the number of time reductions per winning C5 time reduction in the overlapping time reduction counter (C5 time reduction counter). That is, when the result of the current special symbol hit determination process is a C5 time saving hit, for example "50" is set as the number of time saving times corresponding to this C5 time saving hit (see FIGS. 315 to 319). After performing the process of S584, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time saving counter setting process, and returns the process to the original process called as a subroutine (time saving transition process (see FIG. 326) or time saving setting process (see FIG. 327)) Return to

[8-2-2-7. Duplicate time saving counter shift processing]
FIG. 329 is a flowchart illustrating an example of overlapping time saving counter shift processing by the main CPU 201. The overlap time saving counter shift process is a process that is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described counter determination process (see FIG. 325). This process is performed when, for example, the overlapping time saving counter of the first C5 time saving game state becomes 0 among the multiple C5 time saving games that are activated internally, This is a process of shifting the value of the overlapping time saving counter (namely, the number of times of overlapping time saving) to the storage area of the overlapping time saving counter of the first C5 time saving game state, for example. Note that in this embodiment, the shift processing is performed using an array as a structure, but the structure is not limited to this, and each region may be set and shifted processing may be performed respectively.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of assigning the C5 time saving counter to the variable X (S591). After performing the process in S581, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S592.

In S592, the main CPU 201 determines whether the variable X is greater than zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the C5 time saver is internally operating in duplicate.

If it is determined in S592 that the variable X is not greater than 0 (NO in S592), that is, if the variable The process returns to the determination process (see FIG. 325). Note that if the C5 time saver is not operating internally, a NO determination is made in S592.

If it is determined in S592 that the variable X is greater than 0 (YES in S592), that is, if the variable X is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S593. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the C5 time savings that can be operated internally in duplicate is two, so if the variable X is 1 or 2, a YES determination is made in S592.

In S593, the main CPU 201 determines whether the overlap time saving counter (X) is 0 or not. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the number of times the X-th C5 time savings that are internally operated in duplicate is 0.

In S593, if it is determined that the overlapping time saving counter (X) is not 0 (NO determination in S593), that is, if it is determined that the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving which is internally operating repeatedly is not 0, the main The CPU 201 moves the process to S598.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S593 that the overlapping time saving counter (X) is 0 (YES determination in S593), that is, it is determined that the number of times of overlapping time saving of the C5 working time saving which is repeatedly activated internally has become 0. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S594.

In S594, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the variable X from the C5 time saving counter and assigning it to the variable W. After performing the process in S594, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S595. Note that, as shown in FIG. 329, steps S596 to S612 are looped, and "0" is assigned to the variable W in the first loop and the second loop.

In S595, the main CPU 201 performs a process of assigning variable X to variable Y. After performing the process in S595, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S596.

In S596, the main CPU 201 determines whether the variable W is greater than zero.

If it is determined in S596 that the variable W is not greater than 0 (NO in S596), that is, if the variable W is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S597.

In S597, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the C5 time saving counter. After performing the process in S597, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S598.

In S598, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the current value of variable X. After performing the process in S598, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S592, and continues the process in S592 until the variable Repeat the following process.

If a NO determination is made in S592, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time saving counter shift process, as described above, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

Returning to S596, if it is determined that the variable W is greater than 0 (YES in S596), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S599. If there are a plurality of C5 time savers that are internally operating in a stacked manner and the overlapping time saver counter of the first C time saver game state reaches 0, a YES determination is made in S596.

In S599, the main CPU 201 performs processing to shift the (Y+1)th overlapping time saving counter to the current Yth overlapping time saving counter, which is 0. For example, among multiple C5 time savers that are operating internally, the value of the overlap time saver counter of the second C5 time saver is changed to the value of the overlap time saver counter of the first C5 time saver that is 0. shift. After performing the process in S599, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S600.

In S600, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the variable Y. After performing the process in S600, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S601.

In S601, the main CPU 201 sets a redundant time saving counter (Y) to 0. That is, this process is a process of setting the last (for example, second) C5 time saving overlapping time saving counter to 0 as the value of the overlapping time saving counter for the C5 time saving is shifted. After performing the process in S601, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S602.

In S602, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the variable W. After performing the process in S602, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S596. In this embodiment, the number of C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is only two, but even if this number is larger, the variable W is not greater than 0, that is, it is 0. By repeating the processes of S596 to S602 until it is determined that It becomes possible to shift the number of overlapping time reductions for all.

[8-2-2-8. Overlapping time saving setting process]
FIG. 330 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the overlap time saving setting process by the main CPU 201. The overlap time saving setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the counter determination process (see FIG. 325) described above. This process ends the time-saving gaming state that was controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, and ends the time-saving gaming state that is controlled in a manner that allows the player to enjoy the time-saving that is being operated internally (C5 time-saving in this example). This is the process performed when control is started.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of assigning 1 to the variable X (S611). After performing the process in S611, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S612.

In S612, the main CPU 201 assigns the value of the overlapping time saving counter (X) to the time saving counter. In other words, in this process, the remaining time reduction of the C5 time reduction game state starts to be controlled in such a manner that the player can enjoy the number of overlapping time reductions of the X-th (i.e., the first) C5 time reduction that has been operated internally. Processing to set the number of times is performed. After performing the process in S612, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S613.

In S613, the main CPU 201 determines whether the variable X is smaller than the C5 time saving counter.

If it is determined in S613 that the variable Therefore, if the C5 time saver counter is 2 (that is, if there is still a C5 time saver operating internally), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S614 in order to perform shift processing for that amount.

In S614, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the variable X from the C5 time saving counter and assigning it to the variable W. The value of this variable W determines the number of loops from S615 to S619. After performing the process in S614, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S615. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the C5 time savings that can be internally overlapped is two, so the number of loops from S615 to S619 is one at most.

In S615, the main CPU 201 determines whether the variable W is greater than 0.

If it is determined in S615 that the variable W is greater than 0 (YES in S615), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S615 that the variable W is not greater than 0 (NO in S615), that is, if the variable W is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S621.

In S616, the main CPU 201 performs processing to shift the overlapping time saving counter (X+1) to the overlapping time saving counter (X). In this process, for example, among the multiple C5 time savings that are operating internally, the value of the overlapping time saving counter of the second C5 time saving is shifted to the value of the overlapping time saving counter of the first C5 time saving, for example. do. After performing the process in S616, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S617.

In S617, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to variable X. After performing the process in S617, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S618.

In S618, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the overlap time saving counter (X) to 0. That is, this process is a process in which the value of the overlapping time saving counter of the C5 time saving game state is shifted, and the overlapping time saving counter of the last (for example, second) C5 time saving is set to 0. After performing the process in S618, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S619.

In S619, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the variable W. After performing the process in S619, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S615. In this embodiment, the number of C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is only two, but even if this number is larger, the variable W is not greater than 0, that is, it is 0. By repeatedly performing the processes of S615 to S619 until it is determined that It becomes possible to shift the number of overlapping time reductions for all.

Returning to S613, if it is determined that the variable X is not smaller than the C5 time-saving counter (NO in S613), that is, if the variable Since the upper limit of the C5 time savings that can be activated in parallel is two, if the C5 time savings counter is 1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S620.

In S620, the main CPU 201 sets a redundant time saving counter (X) to 0. In other words, this process is a process of setting the overlapping time saving counter of the C5 time saving which can be operated internally to 0 because the C5 time saving which is being operated internally overlaps. After performing the process in S620, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S621.

In S621, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the C5 time saving counter. After performing the process of S621, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapped time saving setting process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

The processing executed by the main CPU 201 when the time saver (C5 time saver in this embodiment) that can be operated internally in duplicate has been described above with reference to FIGS. 323 to 330. By performing various processes by the main CPU 201 described above, it is possible to install a time saver (in this embodiment, C5 time saver) that can be operated internally, making it possible to expand the range of game characteristics. . That is, the time saving counter (i.e., the number of remaining time savings in the time saving gaming state being controlled), the overlapping time saving counter (i.e., the number of overlapping time savings in the time saving that is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but is internally operated in duplicate) and, it is possible to suitably manage the number of C5 time-savers that are not controlled in a manner that players can enjoy, but are internally activated, and to provide a pachinko game machine that further enhances interest. It becomes possible.

[8-2-3. Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 331. FIG. 331 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game.

Note that in FIG. 331, the game state that can be enjoyed is the current game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. "Jackpot" shown in the column of gaming states that can be enjoyed is the jackpot gaming state, "A time saving" is the A time saving gaming state, "B time saving" is the B working time saving gaming state, "C3 working time" is the C3 working time saving gaming state, "C4 "Time saving" means the C4 time saving game state, "C5 time saving" means the C5 time saving gaming state, and "normal" means the normal gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 331, "C3 win" and "C5 win" respectively indicate winning in C4 time saver and winning in C5 time saver. Further, "C3 end" and "A end" respectively indicate the end of the C3 time saving gaming state and the end of the A time saving gaming state. Furthermore, "C5 start" means that the C5 time saving, which is being operated internally but was not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, starts controlling the C5 time saving gaming state in a manner that the player can enjoy. It shows that it will be done.

Further, in FIG. 331, the display effect is a display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is configured of, for example, a liquid crystal display. Each stage performance shown in this display performance column indicates, for example, an external state displayed as a background image, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 312.

Further, the "remaining number of times" shown in FIG. 331 is the number of remaining time reductions, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 312, and when the special symbol is variable displayed once, 1 subtraction is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 331, the internal state shows the states of the time saving flag and various time saving flags controlled by the main CPU 201, for example, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 312.

In addition, in FIG. 331, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the normal game state or the time-saving game state is a C5 time-saving hit will be explained, In a pachinko game machine equipped with a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (including a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C5 time-saving win will not be explained. This is because in the pachinko gaming machine of this second embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a C5 time-saving hit, the main CPU 201 ignores this and the C5 time-saving gaming state is executed. This is because the system is designed so that it does not occur (that is, it does not operate).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if the C5 time saver is won in the time saver gaming state, up to two C5 time savers can be activated internally, for example, up to two times. , "C5-1 time saving flag" and "C5-2 time saving flag" will be used for explanation. In addition, as mentioned above, it is not necessary to manage using a plurality of flags corresponding to each of the plurality of C5 time-saving gaming states. However, if both "C5-1 time saving flag" and "C5-2 time saving flag" are set to "1" and both are operating internally, the above-mentioned overlapping time saving counter shift As described in the process (see FIG. 329), the main CPU 201 can manage which C5 time-saving flag corresponds to which C5 time-saving gaming state should be started in a manner that allows the player to enjoy it first.

[8-2-3-1. (a) If you win C3 time saving in normal gaming state]
First, in the normal gaming state, for example, if you win a C3 time saver (that is, if a display mode indicating a C3 time saver (selected symbol command "z20" or "z27") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 ( An example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed in (see (a) of FIG. 331) will be explained.

The main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and these flags are turned from OFF to ON. As a result, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are internally established. Further, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, "50" as the number of time reductions, and starts managing the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state.

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C3 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z20" or "z27") or that the C3 time saver has been won. A C3 time-saving transition suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of a change in time is performed in the display area of the display device 7. This C3 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, from the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C3 time saving hit until the display mode indicating a C3 time saving win is derived. It's good to do.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the normal stage to the C3 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, "50" in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 as the remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction game state.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the normal gaming state to the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time-saving winning guaranteed performance performed, and the performance background image shifts from the normal stage to the C3 stage, but also, for example, the audio performance also changes from the normal gaming state to the C3 time-saving gaming state. I can understand things. Furthermore, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the normal gaming state is changed to the C3 time-saving gaming state, the C4 time-saving gaming state, or the C5 time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 321 and 4). 322). In addition, by making the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory different between the C3 time-saving game state, the C4 time-saving game state, and the C5 time-saving game state, it is possible to understand that the C3 time-saving game state is from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, even if the player wins the C4 time saver or the C5 time saver or reaches the ceiling, it is preferable to perform the same process as when the player wins the C3 time saver in the normal game state.

[8-2-3-2. (b) If you win the C3 time saver in the C3 time saver gaming state]
Next, in the C3 time saving game state, for example, if a C3 time saving win is won (that is, a display mode is derived that indicates a C3 time saving win (selected symbol command "z20" or "z27") in the special symbol display sections 163, 164. An example of the internal state, display effect, and external state of the case (see (b) in FIG. 331) will be described.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". As a result, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are internally established. Further, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, "50" as the number of time reductions, and starts managing the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state. That is, for example, even if the remaining number of time reductions is less than 50 because the number of time reductions in the C3 time-saving game state under control has been exhausted, the number of time reductions will be reset to "50".

The sub CPU 301 performs a C3 time saving transition suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7. In addition, instead of or in addition to the C3 time reduction shift suggestion effect, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions will increase.

Further, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage.

The C3 time-saving gaming state is maintained as the gaming state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy.

In addition, from the appearance, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C3 stage, but also from, for example, the audio performance, it can be understood that the C3 time-saving game state is maintained. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the C3 time-saving game state may be maintained (see FIGS. 321 and 322).

In addition, when the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is equipped with the C1 time-saving gaming state and the C2 time-saving gaming state described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, if the winning is won in the C1 time-saving game state in the C1 time-saving gaming state, , It is preferable that the same process is performed when winning the C2 time saving win in the C2 time saving gaming state as in the case of winning the C3 time saving winning in the C3 working time saving gaming state.

[8-2-3-3. (c) If you win the C5 time saver in the C3 time saver gaming state]
Next, when winning a C5 time saver in the C3 time saver gaming state (that is, when a display mode indicating a C5 time saver (selected symbol command "z22" or "z29") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 (See FIG. 331(c))) An example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 sets the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag to "1" without initializing the various flags. As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are established. In FIG. 331, for convenience of explanation, of the C5-1 time-saving flag and the C5-2 time-saving flag, which are C5 time-saving flags, the C5-1 time-saving flag is established.

In addition, the main CPU 201, while continuing to manage the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state, sets, for example, "50" as the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reduction that operates internally, and sets the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reduction. Start managing. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, both the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state and the number of overlapped time reductions in the C5 time reduction are subtracted by 1.

Furthermore, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 201 executes the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

The sub CPU 301 determines that the C5 time saver has been won (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saver and the selected symbol command is "z22" or "z29") or that the C5 time saver has been won. It is possible to perform a C5 time saving transition suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7, which indicates that there is a possibility that the change in time has occurred.

Whether or not to perform the above-mentioned C5 time-saving shift suggestion performance is determined based on, for example, a random value for performance selection extracted based on the game ball winning in the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140. You may. That is, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 201 extracts various random numbers including the random number for performance selection. Then, if the extracted random value for effect selection is a specific random value, the main CPU 201 sends a command to the sub CPU 301 to instruct the execution of the C5 time saving shift suggestion effect, and the sub CPU 301 receives the command, and the sub CPU 301 receives the C5 time saving shift suggestion effect. It is also possible to perform a performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine whether or not to perform the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect using a predetermined random number for effect.

In addition, the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect is derived, for example, when a player wins a C5 time saving hit (that is, a display mode is derived that indicates a C5 time saving win (selected symbol command "z22" or "z29") on the special symbol display sections 163, 164. ) and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. "When a predetermined condition is met" is, for example, a case where the sub CPU 301 determines that the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction is larger than the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state. be. In other words, when there is a possibility that the C5 time reduction that is being operated internally will be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy after the end of the C3 time reduction gaming state, a C5 time reduction transition suggestion performance is performed, and the player If there is no possibility of being controlled in a manner that allows the user to enjoy the C5 time reduction shift, it is preferable not to perform the C5 time reduction shift suggestion effect. However, even if the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state, the C5 time reduction gaming state will always be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. is not limited. For example, if the conditions for ending the C5 time saving operation other than the number of overlapped time reductions are satisfied, such as when the jackpot gaming state is controlled before the end of the C3 time reduction gaming state, the number of time reductions remaining in the C3 time reduction gaming state Even if the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction is larger, the C5 time reduction game state is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy.

When performing the C5 time saving transition suggestion performance, the player can enjoy the C5 time saving transition suggestion performance without being limited to performing it when the display mode indicating the C5 time saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164. It suffices as long as it is until the control of the C5 time-saving gaming state in the mode is started.

In addition, even if the C5 time saver is won in the C3 time saver game state, if the C5 time saver transition suggestion effect is not performed, the sub CPU 301 will control the variable display effect of decorative symbols and the character effect performed in the display area of the display device 7. It is preferable to perform the same effect as when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to realize that he has won the C5 time saving prize, and it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily losing interest.

Note that "a performance similar to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss" may be any performance that allows the player to recognize that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss; The present invention is not limited to the same performance as the performance performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

Further, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage, and does not display the C5 stage indicating that the C5 time saving gaming state is controlled. Further, the sub CPU 301 performs audio performance according to the C3 time-saving game state, and does not perform audio performance according to the C5 time-saving game state.

By doing this, even if the C5 time saving flag (C5-1 time saving flag shown in FIG. 331) is internally set to "1", the gaming state that the player can enjoy is the C3 working time saving gaming state. Therefore, from the display performance, audio performance, and opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) displayed in the display area of the display device 7, it is clear that the C5 time-saving game state is internally overlapping and operating. are unable or difficult to understand.

By the way, in a time-saving game state where the game state that the player can enjoy is other than the C5 time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving game is internally activated, and when the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy ends, the C5 time-saving game state is internally activated. If the number of times of overlapping time saving of the C5 time saving that is being operated in duplicate remains, the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 perform the following control.

That is, when the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags including the duplicate flag, sets the time-saving flag and the C5-1 time-saving flag to "1", and performs normal electric winnings. The object 146 (see FIG. 4) is activated, for example, in an opening pattern corresponding to the normal symbol winning selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322 (an opening pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state is the same as the opening pattern in the B-time-saving game state, the C3 time-saving game state, and the C4 time-saving game state. However, by making the opening pattern different from these opening patterns, it may be easy or possible to understand that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is being controlled to the C5 time-saving game state.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays a C5 time saving start effect indicating that the C5 time saving gaming state is started as a gaming state that can be enjoyed by the player in the display area of the display device 7, and updates the remaining time saving number of times. In updating the remaining time reduction number, the remaining time reduction number in the C5 time reduction gaming state is displayed.

Note that the number of remaining time reductions is not limited to being updated when the time-saving game state under control (C3 time-saving game state in FIG. 331) ends; for example, when the number of time-savings remaining in the time-saving game state under control In this state, an additional performance may be performed in which the number of times of overlapping time reduction of the C5 time reduction at the time when the time reduction game state that the player can enjoy is added to the remaining number of time reductions.

In addition, in a time saving gaming state where the gaming state that the player can enjoy is other than the C5 working time saving gaming state (for example, the C3 working time saving gaming state), the C5 working time saving gaming state is internally overlapped and operating, and the player can enjoy it. If the number of overlapping time reductions in C5 time saving becomes 0 before the remaining time reduction number in the time saving gaming state controlled by becomes 0, the main CPU 201 determines whether another C5 time saving gaming state is If it is not operating, clear the duplication flag and C5 time saving flag. Therefore, unless another C5 time saver is internally operating in the time saver game state that the player can enjoy, when the time saver game state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags and Control to gaming state. Further, the sub CPU 301 shifts from a stage of a type corresponding to a time-saving gaming state that can be enjoyed by the player to a normal stage.

In addition, even if the game state that the player can enjoy is other time-saving gaming states (i.e., A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C4 working-time saving gaming state, C5 working-time saving gaming state), if the player wins the C5 time-saving game state, C3 It is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning the C5 time saving win in the time saving gaming state is performed. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is equipped with the C1 time-saving gaming state and the C2 time-saving gaming state, even if the player wins the C5 time-saving win in the C1 time-saving gaming state or the C2 time-saving gaming state, It is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning the C5 time saving win in the C3 time saving gaming state is performed.

[8-2-3-4. (d) If the C5 time saver is activated internally in the C3 time saver game state and the C5 time saver is further won]
Next, in the C3 time saving game state, if the C5 time saving is activated internally and the C5 time saving is further won (that is, the C5 time saving is shown in the special symbol display areas 163, 164 (selection symbol command "z22"). ” or “z29”) is derived (see (d) in FIG. 331)), an example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the C5 time saving flag to "1" without initializing various flags. In FIG. 331, for convenience of explanation, of the C5-1 time-saving flag and the C5-2 time-saving flag, which are C5 time-saving flags, the C5-1 time-saving flag is already set to "1", so the C5-2 time-saving flag is It is set to "1". As a result, the time saving flag, C3 time saving flag, duplication flag, C5-1 time saving flag and C5-2 time saving flag are established internally. In this case, since the C5-1 time saving flag is set to "1" earlier than the C5-2 time saving flag, the main CPU 201 executes the C5 time saving flag (hereinafter referred to as "1" for convenience of explanation) that corresponds to the C5-2 working time saving flag. The C5 time reduction corresponding to the C5-1 time reduction flag (hereinafter referred to as the "first C5 time reduction" for convenience of explanation) is controlled in a manner that allows the player to enjoy the C5 time reduction corresponding to the C5-1 time reduction flag (hereinafter referred to as "first C5 time reduction"). Manage it as a C5 time reduction that should be started.

In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state that the player can enjoy and the number of overlapping time reductions in the first C5 time reduction, and sets the number of overlapping time reductions in the second C5 time reduction to, for example, "50". is set, and management of the number of overlapping time reductions of the second C5 time reduction is started. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state, the number of overlapped time reductions in the first C5 time reduction, and the number of overlapped time reductions in the second C5 time reduction are all subtracted by 1. becomes.

Furthermore, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 201 executes the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

The sub CPU 301 may perform a C5 time saving shift suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7, but in this embodiment, in the same way as when winning the C5 time saving win in the C3 time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 may perform a C5 time saving shift suggestion effect. Instead of performing the C5 time-saving shift suggestion performance that can suggest that the player has won or has won, the variable display performance and character performance of the decorative symbols performed in the display area of the display device 7 are replaced by special symbol hit determination processing. We are trying to perform the same effect as if the result was a loss.

Further, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage in the same way as when winning the C5 time saving win in the C3 time saving gaming state, and is controlled to the C5 time saving gaming state. Do not display the C5 stage indicating that the Further, the sub CPU 301 performs audio performance according to the C3 time-saving game state, and does not perform audio performance according to the C5 time-saving game state.

By doing this, even if the C5 time saving flag (both the C5-1 working time saving flag and the C5-2 working time saving flag shown in FIG. 331) is set to "1" internally, the player can enjoy the game. The possible game state is the C3 time-saving game state, and from the display effects, audio effects, and opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) displayed in the display area of the display device 7, the C5 time-saving game state is internally displayed. It is difficult or impossible to understand that the system is operating in parallel with the system.

By the way, in a time-saving game state where the game state that the player can enjoy is other than the C5 time-saving game state, both the first C5 time-saver and the second C5 time-saver are internally overlapping and operating, and the player cannot enjoy the game. When the possible time saving game state ends, if both the number of times of overlapping time saving of the first C5 time saving and the number of times of overlapping time saving of the second C5 time saving remain, the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 perform the following control. .

That is, when the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags except for the duplication flag and the C5-2 time-saving flag, and then sets the time-saving flag and the C5-1 time-saving flag to "1". set, and operate the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) in the opening pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322 (the opening pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state), for example. . In this embodiment, as described above, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state is the same as the opening pattern in the B-time-saving game state, the C3 time-saving game state, and the C4 time-saving game state (Fig. 322), by making the opening pattern different from these opening patterns, it may be made easy or possible to understand that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is being controlled to the C5 time-saving game state.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays a C5 time saving start effect indicating that the C5 time saving gaming state is started in the display area of the display device 7, and updates the remaining time saving number of times. In updating the remaining time reduction number, the remaining time reduction number in the C5 time reduction gaming state is displayed.

Note that the number of remaining time reductions is not limited to being updated when the time-saving game state under control (C3 time-saving game state in FIG. 331) ends; for example, when the number of time-savings remaining in the time-saving game state under control In this state, the remaining number of time reductions is added to the number of overlapping time reductions of the first C5 time reduction at the time when the time reduction game state under control ends (i.e., the number of overlapping time reductions of the first C5 time reduction and the time reduction game under control) An additional effect may be performed in which the difference between the remaining time and the number of shortened times in the state is added.

In addition, in a time saving game state where the game state that the player can enjoy is other than the first C5 time saving game state, the second C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating, and the number of overlapping time saving times of the first C5 time saving is If the number of overlapping time reductions in the second C5 time reduction reaches 0 before reaching 0, the main CPU 201 clears the C5-2 time reduction flag. Therefore, unless the second C5 time saving game state is internally overlapping with the first C5 time saving game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, when the first C5 time saving game state ends, the main The CPU 201 initializes various flags and controls the game to a normal gaming state. Further, the sub CPU 301 shifts from the type of stage production corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being controlled to the normal stage.

In addition, if the game state that the player can enjoy is in other time-saving gaming states (i.e., A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C4 working-time saving gaming state), and C5 working time-saving is being operated internally, C5 Even in the case where the player wins the time saver, the same processing as when the player wins the C5 time saver while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C3 time saver gaming state is carried out. It is a good idea to In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the C5 time savings that can be activated internally is set at two, but if more C5 time savings are activated internally in a stack, the game state that the player can enjoy. is in the C5 time-saving gaming state, and even if the C5 time-saving win is won in a state where the C5 time-saving is being operated internally, the gaming state that the player can enjoy is the C3 time-saving gaming state, It is preferable that the same process as in the case where the C5 time saver is won in a state where the C5 time saver is being operated internally and overlapped, be performed. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is equipped with the C1 time saving gaming state and the C2 working time saving gaming state, the C5 working time saving is activated internally in the C1 working time saving gaming state and the C2 working time saving gaming state. Even if you win the C5 time saver while in the C3 time saver game state, the same process will be performed as if you further win the C5 time saver while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C3 time saver game state. It's good to do that.

[8-2-3-5. (e) If the first C5 time saver ends in a state where the first C5 time saver and the second C5 time saver are operating internally in the C3 time saver game state]
Next, when the first C5 time saver ends in a state where the first C5 time saver and the second C5 time saver are operating internally in the C3 time saver game state (see (e) in FIG. 331). An example of the internal state, display effects, and game states that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 clears the C5-1 time saving flag without initializing various flags. As a result, the time saving flag, C3 time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5-2 time saving flag are established internally. In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state and the number of overlapping time reductions in the second C5 time reduction. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state and the number of overlapped time reductions in the second C5 time reduction.

Furthermore, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 201 controls the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

Although the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect in the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the first C5 time reduction that has been internally operated repeatedly has ended, in this embodiment, such effect is not performed. The variable display performance and character performance of decorative symbols are performed in the same way as when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a loss.

Further, the sub CPU 301 continues the C3 stage for, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and continues the audio performance corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state.

Further, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state that the player can enjoy as the remaining number of time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

By doing this, the player can only enjoy the C3 time-saving gaming state, and the first C5 time-saving that was being operated internally has ended, and the internally operating It is difficult or impossible to understand whether the second C5 time saver will continue to operate.

In addition, in other time-saving game states (for example, A time-saving game state, B-time saving game state, C4 time-saving game state), the first C5 time-saving game and the second C5 time-saving game are operating internally in a superimposed manner. Even when the first C5 time saver ends, it is the same as when the first C5 time saver ends in a state where the first C5 time saver and the second C5 time saver are internally operating overlappingly in the C3 time saver game state. It is recommended that the following processing be performed. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is two, but if more C5 time savers are operated internally in a stack, the first C5 time saver in the C5 time saver game state Even if the first C5 time saver ends in a state where multiple C5 time savers, including the C5 time saver and the second C5 time saver, are operating internally, the first C5 time saver and It is preferable to perform the same process as when the first C5 time saver ends while the second C5 time saver is internally operating in a superimposed manner. In addition, when the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is equipped with the C1 time-saving game state and the C2 time-saving game state, the first C5 time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are set in the C1 time-saving game state and the C2 time-saving game state. Even if the first C5 time saver ends in a state where the C5 time savers are operating in a stacked manner internally, the first C5 time saver and the second C5 time saver operate internally in a stacked manner in the C3 time saver gaming state. It is preferable to perform the same process as when the first C5 time saving ends in a state where the

[8-2-3-6. (f) If the C3 time saving game state ends while the C5 time saving is internally operating in the C3 time saving game state]
Next, when the C3 time saving game state ends while the C5 time saving is internally operating in the C3 time saving game state (see (f) in FIG. 331), the internal state, display effects, and the game state that can be enjoyed. An example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 331, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag to "1", and sets the number of overlapping time reductions of C5-2 time reduction to the remaining number of time reductions. set. As a result, the time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag are established internally, and the gaming state that the player can enjoy becomes the C5 time saving gaming state.

In addition, the main CPU 201 controls the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) in the release pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state (that is, in the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command “fz2” shown in FIG. 322). ). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322, since the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state is the same as the opening pattern in the C5 time-saving game state, it is assumed that the C3 time-saving game state has ended. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 does not change, but by making it different from these opening patterns, it is possible to understand from the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 that the C3 time-saving game state has changed to the C5 time-saving game state. It may also be possible to make it easier or possible to do so.

The sub CPU 301 changes the display of the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the display of the number of remaining time reductions corresponding to the C3 time reduction game state to the second C5 time reduction which was being operated in an overlapping manner internally. The display is updated to show the number of overlapping time reductions (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the C5 time-saving gaming state in which control is started in a manner that the player can enjoy).

By the way, for example, in the C3 time saving gaming state, if the C3 working time saving game state ends while the second C5 working time saving is operating in an overlapping manner internally, the second C5 working time saving is only working internally in an overlapping manner. , it is impossible or difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the second C5 time reduction overlaps. Therefore, for example, when the C3 time saving game state ends, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs a remaining time saving expectation effect that can make the player look forward to the remaining time saving number of times.

The expected effect of shortening the remaining time corresponds to, for example, an effect that counts up the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7, an effect in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation, etc. .

In addition, when the C3 time saving game state ends while the C5 time saving game state is internally overlappingly operating in the C3 time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 displays a message indicating that the C3 time saving game state has ended in the display area of the display device 7. At the same time, a C3 time-saving end effect indicating that the time-saving game state C5 is started is displayed in a manner that the player can enjoy.

In addition, instead of performing the C3 time reduction end effect and the C5 time reduction start effect described above, the sub CPU 301 may, for example, perform a C5 time reduction transition suggestion effect that suggests that the C5 time reduction win has been won or may have been won. An effect suggesting that the player has won or may have won a result advantageous to the player, or an effect suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state may be performed. In other words, the C5 time saver is determined by the timing when the C3 time saver game state ends while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C3 time saver game state (that is, the last variable display of the special symbol in the C3 time saver game state is Instead of the timing when the winning occurs, the player performs as if the player has won an advantageous result such as a C5 time saving win at the timing mentioned above, even though the winning is actually before the timing mentioned above. You can do it like this. In this case, at the timing when the C5 time saving win is won (for example, the timing of (c) or (e) in FIG. 331), the C5 time saving game state is activated internally by not performing the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect. It is preferable to make it difficult for the player to notice that the player is playing the game.

Further, the sub CPU 301 changes, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C3 stage to the C5 stage, and also changes the audio performance from the audio performance corresponding to the C3 time saving game state to the C5 time saving gaming state. Change the audio performance.

By doing this, the C3 time saving game state that was controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is ended, and the second C5 time saving that was being operated internally is started. Then, the sub CPU 301 can make the game more interesting by performing an effect as if the player had won the C5 time saving win at the timing when the second C5 time saving game state is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the C5 time saver that is internally activated in the C3 time saver gaming state is the second C5 time saver, but it may be the first C5 time saver instead of the second C5 time saver. The same is true.

In addition, in other time-saving game states (for example, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state, C5 time-saving game state), in a state where C5 time-saving game state is internally overlapping, other time-saving game states can be activated. Even when the C3 time-saving game state ends, it is preferable that the same process as when the C3 time-saving game state ends while the C5 time-saving game is being operated internally in the C3 time-saving game state is performed.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is equipped with the C1 time saving gaming state and the C2 working time saving gaming state, the C5 working time saving is activated internally in the C1 working time saving gaming state and the C2 working time saving gaming state. Even if the C1 time-saving game state or the C2 time-saving game state ends while the C3 time-saving game state ends, the same process as when the C3 time-saving game state ends while the C5 time-saving game is internally operating in the C3 time-saving game state. It is a good idea to make sure that this is done.

[8-2-3-7. (g) If you win the C5 time saver in the C5 time saver gaming state]
Next, when winning a C5 time saver in the C5 time saver gaming state (that is, when a display mode indicating a C5 time saver (selected symbol command "z22" or "z29") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 (See (g) in FIG. 331))), an example of the internal state, display effect, and game state that can be enjoyed will be explained. In addition, below, as shown in FIG. 331, an example will be described in which the C5 time-saving game state is won in the second C5 time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 sets the duplication flag and the C5-1 time saving flag to "1" without initializing the various flags. As a result, the time saving flag, C5-2 time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5-1 time saving flag are established internally.

In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the second C5 time reduction gaming state, which is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, while the first C5 time reduction operation is started internally. For example, "50" is set as the number of times of overlapping time saving in C5, and management of the number of times of overlapping time saving of the first C5 time saving is started. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the remaining number of time reductions in the first C5 time reduction game state and the number of overlapped time reductions in the second C5 time reduction are both subtracted by 1.

In addition, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 201 executes the release pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

Although the sub CPU 301 may perform a C5 time reduction suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7, in this embodiment, a C5 time reduction that can suggest that the C5 time reduction has been won or that there is a possibility of winning. Instead of performing the transition suggestion performance, the variable display performance of the decorative symbols and the character performance performed in the display area of the display device 7 are performed in the same way as when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss. There is.

In addition, if the sub CPU 301 wins the C5 time saving win in the C5 time saving game state, and the number of repeated time savings set based on the C5 time saving win is greater than the remaining time saving number in the C5 time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 wins the C5 time saving win. If the shift suggestion performance is performed and the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction is smaller, the C5 time reduction shift suggestion performance may not be performed.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a C5 stage indicating that the C5 time saving game state is being controlled, and changes the audio performance to a C5 time saving game state according to the C5 time saving game state. Perform audio production.

Further, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the remaining time reduction number of the second C5 time reduction game state under control as the remaining time reduction number displayed in the display area of the display device 7. However, if the number of overlapping time reductions in the first C5 time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the second C5 time reduction gaming state, the main CPU 201 will An effect (for example, an additional effect) may be performed that adds and displays the number of overlapping time reductions of time reduction (that is, the difference between the remaining number of time reductions in the second C5 time reduction game state and the number of overlap time reductions in the first C5 time reduction). .

[8-2-3-8. (h) If you win the C3 time saver in the C5 time saver gaming state]
Next, when winning a C3 time saver in the C5 time saver gaming state (that is, when a display mode indicating a C3 time saver (selected symbol command "z20" or "z27") is derived in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 (See FIG. 331 (h))))'s internal state, display effect, and an example of the game state that can be enjoyed will be explained.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and sets, for example, "50" as the number of time saving times. As a result, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are internally established.

The sub CPU 301 performs a C3 time saving transition suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7. This C3 time saving shift suggestion production is performed, for example, from the start of the variable display of special symbols that may lead to a display mode indicating a C3 time saving hit until the display mode indicating a C3 time saving win is derived. It's good to do.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C5 stage to the C3 stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 displays a C3 time saving start effect indicating that the C3 time saving game state is started in a predetermined display area of the display device 7, and updates the remaining time saving number of times. In updating the remaining time reduction number, for example, "30", which is the remaining time reduction number in the C3 time reduction gaming state, is displayed.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C5 time-saving gaming state to the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time-saving winning effect performed, and the effect background image shifts from the C5 stage to the C3 stage, but also, for example, from the audio production, the C5 time-saving game state shifts from the C3 time-saving game state to the C3 time-saving game state. I can understand what I did.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C3 time-saving game state and the C5 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 321 and 322); The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the C5 time-saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C5 time-saving game state to the C3 time-saving game state. It may be possible to make it possible to understand that the migration has been made.

Also, if you win C3 time saving in other time saving gaming states (i.e. A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state), or if you reach the ceiling in C5 working time saving gaming state. Also, it is preferable that the same process as in the case of winning the C3 time saving win in the C5 time saving gaming state is performed.

[8-2-3-9. (i) When the ceiling is reached in the C3 time saving game state while the C5 time saving is operating internally]
Next, we will discuss the internal state, display effects, and an example of the game state that can be enjoyed when the C5 time saver reaches the ceiling in the C3 time saver game state with the C5 time saver operating internally (see (i) in Figure 331). explain. In addition, in FIG. 331, after winning the C3 time saver in the C5 time saver game state (see (h) in the figure), the C5 time saver win is won. This is the same as the case where the C5 time saver is further won in a state where the time savers are internally operating in duplicate (see (d) in FIG. 331), so the explanation will be omitted.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags except for the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and sets the number of time saving times (for example, 300 times) corresponding to the B time saving gaming state. Set. That is, the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy becomes the B-time-saving gaming state, the internally overlapping C5 time-saving operation continues, and the number of overlapping time-savings of C5 time-saving is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, B time saving flag, duplication flag, and C5 time saving flag are established.

In addition, the main CPU 201 ends the management of the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time-saving gaming state, sets the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state to, for example, "50", and sets the number of remaining time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state to "50", for example. Start managing. Note that the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reductions that are internally operated in duplicate. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the remaining number of time reductions in the B time saving game state and the number of overlapping time reductions in the internally overlapping C5 time reduction are subtracted by 1.

Furthermore, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 201 controls the release pattern corresponding to the B time-saving game state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C3 time-saving game state and the B-time saving game state (see FIGS. 321 and 322), but in the C3 time-saving game state and The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the B time-saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C3 time-saving game state to the B-time saving game state. It may be possible to make it possible to understand that the migration has been made.

The sub CPU 301 performs a ceiling reaching effect on the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. This ceiling reaching effect is not limited to the period from when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling is reached until it is stopped, such as when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops when the ceiling is reached. , and may be performed at any timing, including until the variable display of the next special symbol starts. Further, the sub CPU 301 may perform a performance suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, such as a precursory performance indicating that the ceiling is almost reached, before the ceiling is reached.

Further, the sub CPU 301 moves, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C3 stage to the B stage.

Further, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions increases.

The gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C3 time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the ceiling reaching effect performed and the background image shifts from stage C3 to stage B, but also, for example, the audio effect indicates that the transition from the C3 time-saving game state to the B time-saving game state has been made. I can understand it.

In addition, if the ceiling is reached in the C4 time saving game state with the C5 time saver operating internally, or if the ceiling is reached with the C5 time saver operating internally in the C5 time saver game state. In this case, it is preferable to perform the same process as when the C5 time saver reaches the ceiling in the C3 time saver game state while the C5 time saver is being operated internally.

[8-2-3-10. (j) If you win a jackpot while C5 time saver is internally operating in the B time saver gaming state]
Next, in the B time saving game state, a jackpot (one of the selected symbol commands "z23" to "z25" and "z30" to "z32") is indicated with the C5 time saver operating internally. An example of the internal state, display effect, and external state when the display mode is derived (see (j) in FIG. 331) will be described. In addition, in Figure 331, in the C3 time saving game state, after reaching the ceiling (see (i) in the same figure) with C5 time saving operating internally, the player wins C5 time saving. The process in this case is the same as the case where the C5 time saver is internally activated in the C3 time saver game state and the C5 time saver is further won (see (d) in FIG. 331), so the explanation will be omitted. do.

At the start of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags and sets the number of rounds determined according to the selection symbol command with reference to the win type determination table (see FIGS. 314 to 319). , sets the jackpot flag (not shown) to "1". As a result, internally, the game enters a jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot flag is established, rather than a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

The control performed by the sub CPU 301 and the game state in appearance are similar to "(f) When a jackpot is won in the C2 time-saving game state" described with reference to FIG. 312 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

[8-2-3-11. In the case of (k), (l) and (m) shown in FIG. 331]
In the case (k) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when the jackpot game state ends, the internal state (controlled by the main CPU 201), display effect (controlled by the sub CPU 301), and the game state that can be enjoyed are the pachinko game of the first embodiment. Since this is the same as "(g) When the jackpot gaming state ends" described with reference to FIG. 312 in the machine, the explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the case (l) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when winning the C5 time saving win in the A time saving gaming state, the internal state (controlled by the main CPU 201), display effect (controlled by the sub CPU 301), and the game state that can be enjoyed are as follows. Since it is the same as the case where the C5 time saving win is won in the C3 time saving gaming state (see (c) of FIG. 331), the explanation will be omitted.

In the case of (m) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when the A time saving game state ends with C5 time saving operating internally in the A time saving game state, the internal state (control by the main CPU 201), The display effect (controlled by the sub CPU 301) and the game state that can be enjoyed are when the C3 time saving game state ends while the C5 time saving is internally overlapping in the C3 time saving game state (see (f) in FIG. 331). ), so the explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, even if you win any of the C3 time saving winnings, C4 working time saving winnings, and C5 working time saving winnings, you will be able to change from the normal gaming state to the C working time saving gaming state (C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state, C5 working time saving winnings). (gaming state). If the result of the hit determination process in the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state is a time-saving win, the sub CPU 301 performs a first C time-saving transition that can suggest that there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to the C1 time-saving gaming state. Perform a suggestive performance.

On the other hand, in the time saving gaming state (A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, C working time saving gaming state), if you win the C3 time saving winning, you will move to the C3 working time saving gaming state, but even if you win the C4 working time saving, you will move to the C4 working saving gaming state. Does not shift to gaming state. Furthermore, even if the player wins the C5 time saving win, the player cannot immediately shift to the C5 time saving gaming state. That is, when there is a possibility of transitioning from any one of the time-saving gaming states to the C-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 performs the second C2 working-time-saving shift suggestion performance, In the case of a time reduction hit that does not shift to the state or may not shift immediately (for example, a C4 time reduction hit, a C5 time reduction hit), the sub CPU 301 preferably does not perform the second 2 time reduction transition suggestion performance.

Then, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal gaming state is a time-saving hit, the first ratio at which the first C time-saving transition suggestion performance is performed, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the time-saving gaming state When compared with the second ratio at which the second C time-saving shift suggestion effect is performed when the time-saving effect is appropriate, the first ratio is higher than the second ratio. This makes it possible to relatively suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state.

[8-2-3-12. Summary of winnings in C time saving in each gaming state]
The processing in the case where the C time saving win is won or the ceiling count value reaches the ceiling value in each gaming state has been described above, and below, a summary of these cases will be explained with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is an example of a table summarizing the processing when winning C time saving or when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in each gaming state.

In FIG. 332, the gaming state shown in the horizontal direction at the top row indicates the current gaming state (that is, the gaming state that can be enjoyed by the player). Further, the items shown in the vertical direction in the leftmost column (C3 time saving per, C4 time saving per, C5 time saving per and reaching the ceiling) indicate items that can trigger a shift to the time saving gaming state. Further, the items shown in the vertical direction in the second column from the left indicate the outcome when the transition trigger shown in the items shown in the vertical direction in the leftmost column occurs. For example, if the current gaming state is the C3 time saving gaming state and you win the C5 time saving winnings, the current gaming state, the C5 working time saving gaming state, will continue, and the C5 working time saving based on the C5 working time saving winnings will be accumulated internally. It shows that it is working. Also, for example, if the current gaming state is the C5 time saving gaming state and you win the C3 time saving winnings, the current gaming state, the C5 working time saving gaming state, ends and the C3 working time saving operation based on the C3 working time saving winnings starts. This indicates that the game is controlled to the C3 time-saving gaming state.

(If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal gaming state, regardless of whether the C3 time saver win, the C4 time saver win, or the C5 time saver win, the main CPU 201 plays the special symbol game (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as "the special symbol game"), the normal game state is ended and control of the C time-saving game state corresponding to the winning type is started.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 ends the normal gaming state when the special symbol game ends, and starts controlling the B time saving gaming state.

(If the current gaming state is A time saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game in the A time saving gaming state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the A time saving gaming state and starts controlling the C3 time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player wins the C3 time saving win in the A time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state may be continued without operating the C3 working time saving gaming state. In addition, if "Remaining number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state>C3 number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state", continue the A-time saving gaming state, and if "Remaining number of time reductions in the A-time saving gaming state<C3 number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state". If so, it may be possible to shift to the C3 time-saving gaming state. In addition, if you win the C3 time saver with C5 time saver operating internally in the A time saver game state, the control of the A time saver game state will end and the control of the C3 time saver game state will start. In the C3 time saving game state, it is preferable that the C5 time saving function is overlapped internally and continuously operated.

If the C4 time saving win is won in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the A time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the A time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends, The C4 time saving win is ignored and the C4 time saving gaming state is not controlled. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the remaining number of time reductions in the A time-saving game state is 0, the control of the A time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving game state C4 is controlled.

If the C5 time saving win is won in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the A time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the A time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends, Activate C5 time saving internally. However, when the remaining time saving number of times in the A time saving game state is 0, the A time saving game state is ended and control of the C5 time saving game state is started without repeatedly operating the C5 time saving game state. In addition, if you win the C5 time saver in the A time saver game state with the C5 time saver operating internally, when the control of the A time saver game state ends, the C5 time saver game state is based on the C5 time saver won earlier. It is preferable that the control of C5 is started, and then the winning C5 time saver is operated internally.

In addition, in this example, although there is no case where the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the A time saving gaming state, if the specification is such that the value of the ceiling counter can reach the ceiling value in the A time saving gaming state, When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the gaming state, the main CPU 201 may end the A time saving gaming state and start controlling the B time saving gaming state when the special symbol game ends, or may start controlling the A time saving gaming state. Control of the B time saving gaming state may be started after the gaming state ends.

(If the current gaming state is B time saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game in the B time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving gaming state and starts controlling the C3 time saving game state. However, the invention is not limited to this, and if the C3 time saving win is won in the B time saving gaming state, the C3 working time saving gaming state may not be activated and the B working time saving gaming state may be continued. Also, if "Remaining number of time reductions in the B time-saving gaming state > C3 number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state", continue the B-time saving gaming state, and if "Remaining number of time reductions in the B-time saving gaming state < C3 number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state" If so, it may be possible to shift to the C3 time-saving gaming state. In addition, if you win the C3 time saver with C5 time saver operating internally in the B time saver game state, the control of the B time saver game state will end and the control of the C3 time saver game state will start. In the C3 time saving game state, it is preferable that the C5 time saving function is overlapped internally and continuously operated.

If the C4 time saving win is won in the B time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the B time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the B time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends, The C4 time saving win is ignored and the C4 time saving gaming state is not controlled. However, if the remaining time saving number of times in the B time saving game state is 0 when the special symbol game ends, the control of the B time saving game state is ended and control is performed to the C4 time saving game state.

If the C5 time saving win is won in the B time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the B time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the B time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends, Activate C5 time saving internally. However, when the remaining time saving number of times in the B time saving game state is 0, the B time saving game state is ended and control of the C5 time saving game state is started without repeatedly operating the C5 time saving game state. In addition, if you win the C5 time saver in the B time saver game state with the C5 time saver operating internally, when the control of the B time saver game state ends, the C5 time saver game state will be changed based on the C5 time saver won earlier. It is preferable that the control of C5 is started, and then the winning C5 time saver is operated internally.

In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one ceiling value, there is no case where the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state, but if multiple ceiling values are provided, the value of the ceiling counter in the B time-saving game state does not reach the ceiling value. can reach the ceiling value, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current B time-saving game state and starts a new The control of the B time-saving game state may be started, or the control of a new B time-saving game state may be started after the current B time-saving game state ends.

(If the current gaming state is C3 time saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the C3 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current C3 time saving gaming state and starts controlling a new C3 time saving gaming state based on the C3 time saving winning state. do. However, this is not limited to this, and if you win a C3 time saving win in the C3 time saving gaming state, you may continue the current C3 working time saving gaming state without activating a new C3 time saving gaming state based on the C3 time saving winning. good. In addition, if a new C3 time saving win is won while the C5 time saving is internally operating in the C3 time saving game state, when the control of the current C3 time saving gaming state is ended, a new C3 time saving game based on the C3 time saving win will be created. State control is started, but in this new C3 time saving game state, it is preferable that the C5 time saving is internally overlapped and continuously operated.

If the C4 time saving win is won in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues to control the C3 time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the C3 time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C4 time saving win is ignored and the C4 time saving gaming state is not controlled. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time-saving game state is 0, the control of the C3 time-saving game state is ended and the control is changed to the C4 time-saving game state.

If the C5 time saving win is won in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues to control the C3 time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the C3 time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Activate C5 time saving internally. However, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C3 time-saving game state is 0, the C3 time-saving game state is ended, and control of the C5 time-saving game state is started without repeatedly operating the C5 time-saving game state. In addition, if you win a C5 time saver in the C3 time saver gaming state while the C5 time saver is operating internally, when you end the control of the C3 time saver game state, the C5 time saver game state is based on the previously won C5 time saver. It is preferable that the control of C5 is started, and then the winning C5 time saver is operated internally.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C3 time-saving game state and starts controlling the B time-saving game state when the special symbol game ends. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start controlling the B-time saving game state after the C3 time-saving game state ends. In this case, until the C3 time-saving game state ends, if the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time-saving number of the B-time-saving game state may be subtracted, or even if the special symbol is executed, the B-time-saving game state The number of remaining time shortening times may be maintained. In addition, if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C3 time saver game state, the control of the C3 time saver game state is ended and the control of the B time saver game state is started, In this B time-saving game state, C5 time-saving may be internally overlapped and continuously operated, or after the C3 time-saving game state ends, control of the C5 time-saving game state is started, and this C5 time-saving game state is ended. It may be possible to control to the B time-saving game state later.

(If the current gaming state is C4 time saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the current C4 time saving gaming state and starts controlling the C3 time saving gaming state when the special symbol game ends. In addition, if you win the C3 time saver while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C4 time saver game state, the control of the C4 time saver game state ends and the control of the C3 time saver game state based on the C3 time saver win starts. However, in this C3 time saving game state, it is preferable that the C5 time saving is internally overlapped and continuously operated.

If you win the C4 time saving game in the C4 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 controls the current C4 time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the current C4 time saving gaming state is greater than 0. continues, ignores the C4 time saving win, and does not control to a new C4 time saving gaming state. However, if the remaining time reduction number of the current C4 time saving game state is 0 when the special symbol game ends, the control of the current C4 time saving gaming state is ended, and a new C4 time saving game state is created based on the C4 time saving game state. to control. However, this is not limited to this, and even if you win the C4 time saver in any other time saver gaming state except the C4 time saver gaming state, this will be ignored, but if you win the C4 time saver in the C4 time saver gaming state, the current The C4 time saving game state may be ended and the control may be controlled to a new C4 time saving gaming state based on the C4 time saving win.

If the C5 time saving win is won in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the C4 time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of the C4 time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Activate C5 time saving internally. However, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C4 time-saving game state is 0, the C4 time-saving game state is ended, and control of the C5 time-saving game state is started without repeatedly operating the C5 time-saving game state. In addition, if you win a C5 time saver in the C4 time saver gaming state while the C5 time saver is operating internally, when you end the control of the C4 time saver game state, the C5 time saver game state is based on the previously won C5 time saver. It is preferable that the control of C5 is started, and then the winning C5 time saver is operated internally.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C4 time-saving game state and starts controlling the B time-saving game state when the special symbol game ends. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start controlling the B-time saving game state after the C4 time-saving game state ends. In this case, until the C4 time-saving game state ends, if the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time-saving number of the B-time-saving game state may be subtracted, or even if the special symbol is executed, the B-time-saving game state The number of remaining time shortening times may be maintained. In addition, if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value while the C5 time saver is internally operating in the C4 time saver game state, the control of the C4 time saver game state is ended and the control of the B time saver game state is started, In this B time-saving game state, C5 time-saving may be internally overlapped and continuously operated, or after the C4 time-saving game state ends, control of the C5 time-saving game state is started, and this C5 time-saving game state is ended. It may be possible to control to the B time-saving game state later.

(If the current gaming state is C5 time saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the current C5 time saving gaming state and starts controlling the C5 time saving gaming state when the special symbol game ends.

If the C4 time saving win is won in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 will continue to control the C5 time saving gaming state if the remaining time saving number of times in the C5 time saving gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C4 time saving win is ignored and the C4 time saving gaming state is not controlled. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the remaining number of time reductions in the C5 time-saving game state is 0, the control of the C5 time-saving game state is ended and the control is changed to the C4 time-saving game state. In addition, if you win a C5 time saver in the C4 time saver gaming state while the C5 time saver is operating internally, when you end the control of the C4 time saver game state, the C5 time saver game state is based on the previously won C5 time saver. It is preferable that the control of C5 is started, and then the winning C5 time saver is operated internally.

If you win the C5 time saving game in the C5 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, if the remaining time saving number of the current C5 time saving game state is greater than 0, the main CPU 201 will change the current C5 time saving game state. The control is continued, and a new C5 time reduction based on the C5 time reduction is internally overlapped and activated. However, if the remaining number of time reductions in the current C5 time-saving game state is 0, the current C5 time-saving game state is ended, and control of a new C5 time-saving game state based on the C5 time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the C5 time saving game state, if another C5 time saver is operating internally and you win another C5 time saver, after the current C5 time saver game state ends, the C5 based on the previously won C5 time saver will be awarded. Control of the time-saving game state is started, but in this C5 time-saving game state, it is preferable that the later winning C5 time-saving game be internally overlapped and continuously operated.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time-saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the C5 time-saving game state and starts controlling the B time-saving game state. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start controlling the B-time saving game state after the C5 time-saving game state ends. In this case, until the C5 time-saving game state ends, if the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time-saving number of the B-time-saving game state may be subtracted, or even if the special symbol is executed, the B-time-saving game state The number of remaining time shortening times may be maintained. In addition, if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value while another C5 time saver is operating internally in the C5 time saver game state, the control of the current C5 time saver game state is ended and the control of the B time saver game state is started. may be started, and in this B time-saving game state, the above-mentioned other C5 time-saver may be overlapped internally and continue to operate, or after the C4 time-saving game state ends, the C5 based on the above-mentioned another C5 time-saver may be activated. Control of the time-saving game state may be started, and control may be controlled to the B-time-saving game state after the end of this C5 time-saving game state.

[8-2-4. Expansion example of pachinko gaming machine of second embodiment]
In this embodiment, special symbol hit determination processing in a high-accuracy gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, but in a pachinko game machine equipped with a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, it includes a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) If the result is a C5 time-saving hit, the main CPU 201 ignores this regardless of the type of time-saving hit. The result of the hit determination process may not include time-saving hits. For example, if you change the "time-saving hit judgment value data" shown in the probability change flag "1" column of the special symbol hit judgment table (Fig. 10) to "loss judgment value data," the special symbol hit judgment in a high-probability gaming state The result of processing will not be time-saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the C5 time saver is won in any time saver game state, the C5 time saver is internally overlapped and operated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the specific time saver game state If you win the C5 time saver, the C5 time saver may be internally overlapped so that it does not operate. For example, if you win the C5 time saver in the C time saver game state, the C5 time saver will be activated internally, but if you win the C5 time saver game state in the A time saver game state or the B time saver game state, the C5 time saver will be activated. For example, the C5 time saving hit may be ignored without being activated internally.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the C5 time-saving game state which is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, the C5 time-saving game state is ended and the B time-saving game state is started. However, the B time saving game state may be started after the C5 time saving game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the C5 time saver is internally overlapping and operating during the control of any time saver game state, and if the C3 time saver is won or the ceiling is reached, the C5 time saver game state or The B time saving gaming state is started, and the C5 working time saving operation, which has been internally overlapping, is continued; however, the overlap flag and the C5 working time saving flag are initialized, and the C5 working time saving gaming state is activated. may be terminated.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of C5 time savers that can be operated internally in a stack is up to two, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be three or more, or it may be up to one. When the number of C5 time saving game states that can be activated internally is limited to one, if the C5 time saving game state is won in the C5 time saving game state, the C5 time saving game state may be internally activated in a stacked manner, The C5 time saver may be ignored without being activated internally (that is, in the C5 time saver game state, the C5 time saver cannot be activated internally).

In addition, in this embodiment, different stage effects are displayed in the C3 time-saving game state, the C4 time-saving game state, and the C5 time-saving game state, so it is possible to understand from the appearance which C time-saving game state it is in. , but not limited to this. For example, a common stage effect may be displayed in the C3 time-saving game state, the C4 time-saving game state, and the C5 time-saving game state. In addition, although the C3 time-saving game state, the C4 time-saving game state, and the C5 time-saving game state are at different stages, the difference is so slight that it is impossible to understand or understand which C time-saving game state is in the external appearance. A difficult stage performance may be displayed. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is equipped with a C1 time-saving gaming state and a C2 time-saving gaming state, it is necessary to determine whether it is the C1 time-saving gaming state, the C2 time-saving gaming state, or the C3 time-saving gaming state. A stage effect may be displayed in which it is impossible or difficult to determine from the appearance whether the game is in the C4 time-saving game state or the C5 time-saving game state.

In addition, if the C5 time saver is internally overlapping and operating in any time saver game state, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect that suggests that the C5 time saver is internally overlapping. good. In addition, even if the C5 time saver is not operating internally in any of the time saver game states, the sub CPU 301 creates a fake effect that suggests that the C5 time saver is internally operating in an overlap manner. You may also do so.

In addition, if the number of C5 time savers that are internally operating in a stacked manner in any time saving gaming state is multiple, the sub CPU 301 suggests that multiple C5 time savers are operating internally in a stacked manner. A presentation or a presentation indicating the number of C5 time savers that are internally operating in a stacked manner may be performed. Also, if the number of C5 time-saving game states that are internally operating in a stacked manner in any of the time-saving gaming states is not plural (in other words, the number of C5 time-saving gaming states that are internally operating in a stack is 0 or 1). In some cases), the sub CPU 301 may perform false effects suggesting that a plurality of C5 time savers are internally operating overlappingly. Furthermore, if the C5 time savers are internally operating in duplicate in any time saver game state, the sub CPU 301 suggests a different number from the number of C5 time savers that are actually internally operating in duplicate. A fake performance may be performed.

[8-3. Expansion example of the 8th pachinko game machine]
Below, among the eighth pachinko gaming machines, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as "the first embodiment") and the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as "the second embodiment") will be described. An example of expansion that can be applied to any of the following will be explained. Further, in the following, when the "eighth pachinko game machine" is referred to, it shall include both the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

The number of time savings set when being controlled to the A time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "A time saving number") and the number of time saving times set when being controlled to the B time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "B time saving number") ) and the number of time saving times (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving number") that is set when the C time saving gaming state is controlled or when the C working time saving gaming state is activated internally. It is not limited to the number of time reductions described for the pachinko game machine, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, if multiple types of C time saving gaming states with different C time saving times are installed, as in the first embodiment, the first C time saving gaming state (for example, equivalent to the C1 time saving gaming state of the first embodiment) The number of times C for time saving is set to be greater than the number of time saving A, and the number of time saving C for the second C time saving (for example, corresponding to the C2 time saving game state of the first embodiment) is set to be less than the number of time saving A. Good too. Further, the C time saving number for the first C time saving gaming state may be greater than the B time saving number, and the C time saving number for the second C time saving gaming state may be less than the B time saving number. Further, the A number of times of time saving, the number of C time reductions for the first C time saving gaming state, and the number of C time saving times of the second C time saving gaming state may be the same number of times.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state (for example, the mode in which the game progresses by winning the first starting hole 120), and the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game are In this state, including all C time-saving game states, right-handed playing is the normal game mode (for example, a mode in which the game progresses by winning in the second starting opening 140), but it is not limited to this. For example, if multiple types of C time-saving game states with different opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) are installed, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the first C time-saving game state, and the second In the C time-saving game state, right-handed hitting may be the regular game mode.

When multiple types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, number of C-time saving, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the main CPU 201 determines the time-saving performance (hereinafter referred to as "C-time saving performance") in the first C time-saving gaming state. The time-saving performance in the second C time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "second C time-saving performance") is more advantageous to the player (for example, the normal electric game The opening time of the object 146 (see FIG. 4) may be extended. In this case, either the first C time saving performance and the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "A time saving performance") are the same, or the A time saving performance is more advantageous than the first C time saving performance. In addition, the A time saving performance and the second C time saving performance may be the same, or the second C time saving performance may be more advantageous to the player than the A time saving performance. .

If multiple types of C time saving game states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, number of C time savings, time saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the player won the first C time saving win or not. It may be difficult or impossible to ascertain whether the winner has won the C time saving prize from the display effects, audio effects, etc. displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In this case, when a specific condition is met (for example, when the symbol random number of the special symbol is a specific symbol random number, etc.), a display that makes it possible or easy to understand which type of C time-saving win has been won is displayed. It may also be possible to provide a performance or audio performance. Furthermore, if you win the first C time saver or the second C time saver out of multiple types of C time saver game states, the display makes it difficult or impossible to understand which C time saver you won. If a specific C time saving win is won (for example, a C time saving win corresponding to the C time saving gaming state that is most advantageous to the player) by performing a performance or audio performance, it is possible to know that the player has won a specific C time saving win. Display effects and audio effects that are easy to understand may be provided.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, the probability that the result of the winning judgment process of the first special symbol that is performed when a winning is won in the first starting opening 120 is a time-saving hit is calculated when the winning is won in the second starting opening 140. Although the probability that the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit is made higher, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol that is performed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 140 is a time-saving hit is determined by the probability that the result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol that is performed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 140 is a hit for the first special symbol that is performed when a prize is won in the first starting hole 120. The result of the determination process may be higher than the probability that the result will be a time-saving hit, or the probability that the result of the winning determination process of the first special symbol performed when the first starting opening 120 is won is a time-saving hit and the probability that the result of the determination process will be a time-saving hit and The probability that the result of the winning judgment process of the second special symbol that is performed when winning the second starting opening 140 is a time-saving winning may be set to be the same probability.

In addition, if multiple types of C time saving game states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of C time savings, time saving performance, etc.) are installed, the first C time saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, , corresponding to the C1 time saving win in the first embodiment) and the second C time saving win that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, corresponding to the C2 time saving win in the first embodiment) with the same probability. It is not necessary to do this, and the winning probability for the first C time saver may be set higher than the winning probability for the second C time saver, or the winning probability for the second C time saver may be set higher than the winning probability for the second C time saver. It may be made higher than the probability of winning per time saving C.

A look-ahead effect may be performed to make the player expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be a jackpot or a time-saving hit. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform the look-ahead performance in a manner in which it is possible to grasp or understand the look-ahead performance of a jackpot and the look-ahead performance of a time-saving hit, or it is difficult to grasp the look-ahead performance of a jackpot and the look-ahead performance of a time-saving win. Alternatively, a look-ahead effect may be performed in a manner that cannot be grasped. "Making the player expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be a jackpot or a time-saving hit" means not only to perform a look-ahead effect when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, but also to make a special Even if the result of the symbol hit determination process is a loss, if a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to perform a pre-read effect using a predetermined random number for effect), by performing a pre-read effect. , it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a time-saving hit.

Furthermore, if multiple types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, number of C time savings, time saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 selects the first C time saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player. A look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning a time-saving win (for example, equivalent to the C1 time-saving win in the first embodiment) and a second C-time saving win that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, the C1 time-saving win in the first embodiment). The look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning (corresponding to the example C2 time saving win or C3 time saving winning) may be performed in a manner that can be grasped or grasped, or in a manner that is difficult or impossible to grasp. You may go.

Furthermore, the first C time saving per unit which is most advantageous to the player (for example, corresponds to the C1 time saving per unit in the first embodiment) and the second C time saving per unit which is most disadvantageous to the player (for example, corresponding to the C1 time saving per unit in the first embodiment). If the sub CPU 301 is equipped with a C2 time saving win), the sub CPU 301 provides a look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning the first C time saving win, and a look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning the second C time saving win. By performing a pre-reading effect that shows , in a manner that is difficult or impossible to grasp, it is possible to increase interest in the pre-reading effect.

In addition, if multiple types of C time-saving game states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of C time-savings, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 determines, for example, the most advantageous to the player as a result of the pre-read determination. Even if it is determined that there is a possibility of winning the first C time-saving prize (e.g., equivalent to the C1 time-saving prize of the first embodiment), there is a possibility that the player may have won the other second C time-saving prize. It is possible to increase interest in the pre-reading effect by performing a pre-reading effect to show that the player has won the first C time saving prize. In this case, if the second C time-saving hit is the second C time-saving hit that is most disadvantageous to the player (e.g., corresponds to the C2 time-saving hit of the first embodiment), it is possible to further increase the interest.

In addition, if a C time saver that can be internally activated repeatedly (for example, C5 time saver in the second embodiment) is installed, the sub CPU 301 may have won the C5 time saver in the normal gaming state. While it is possible to carry out a look-ahead effect showing that there is a prize, in any of the time-saving game states, a look-ahead effect showing that there is a possibility of winning the C5 time-save win may not be performed. Even if the player wins the C5 time saver in any of the time saving gaming states, the C5 time saver will only be activated internally, and the player may not be able to immediately realize that he or she has won the C5 time saver. .

In addition, in a state in which the C5 time-saving game state is internally activated in any time-saving game state, before the end of the time-saving game state being controlled (for example, when the remaining time-saving number is 1 to 4). , if the number of overlapping time reductions in the internally overlapping operation is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state under control, the sub CPU 301 controls the C5 time-saving gaming state in a manner that the player can enjoy. An effect may be performed to indicate that control may be started. In this case, for example, if the start information is on hold, an effect indicating that the C5 time-saving game state may be started is performed before the time-saving game state being controlled ends. This makes it possible to perform something similar to a look-ahead performance. For example, if the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time-saving game state described in the eighth pachinko game machine is 3, and the number of pending start information of the second special symbol is 3, then the third symbol of the second special symbol Targeting the suspension of C5, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the C5 time-saving gaming state may be started. In this case, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed for the third pending second special symbol is a loss, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding this third pending symbol will start. When the game is played, the C time reduction that has been operating internally will begin to be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, making it possible to provide a new game experience that has never been seen before, and increase interest. becomes possible. Note that the mode of the look-ahead effect is, for example, a mode that changes the display mode of the target's pending image, or a so-called zone look-ahead effect mode that changes the background image in a look-ahead effect section that targets multiple holds. You can do this or all of them.

In addition, if a time-saving win is won during the control of any time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state that can end the time-saving game state being controlled and start a time-saving game state corresponding to the winning time-saving game is provided. The C time saving win (for example, the C1 time saving win, the C2 time saving win, and the C3 time saving win of the 8th pachinko game machine) and the second C time saving win in which the time saving gaming state under control is continued and the winning time saving win is ignored. A third machine that can internally operate the time saving corresponding to the winning time saving win while continuing the time saving gaming state under control (for example, the C4 time saving winning of the 8th pachinko game machine) If a plurality of time-saving prizes are installed among the C time-saving prizes (for example, the C5 time-saving prize of the second embodiment), the sub CPU 301 executes a specific time-saving prize (for example, the first C5 time-saving prize) in the time-saving gaming state. If you win a time saving win), perform a look-ahead effect, and if you win a non-specific time saver win (for example, 2nd C time saver win, 3rd C time saver win), you may not perform a look-ahead effect. . In other words, if the time-saving gaming state under control is ended due to winning and the time-saving gaming state based on the winning is started, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving winning, so in such a case, the pre-reading effect is not used. conduct. On the other hand, if the player wins a time-save game that corresponds to a time-save game state that is not executed or does not start immediately even if the player wins, it is difficult for the player to grasp that he or she has won the time-save game. The purpose is to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, if you win a time-saving win in the first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state), the time-saving gaming state is executed, but in the second gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state or B time-saving gaming state), the time-saving gaming state is executed. If the specification is such that even if there is a winning in the time saving winning state in the first gaming state, the time saving gaming state is ignored without being executed, a look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility that the time saving winning has been won is performed in the first gaming state, and It is advisable not to do this in the gaming state 2.

In addition, in any of the time-saving gaming states (B working-time saving gaming state, C1 working-time saving gaming state, C2 working-time saving gaming state, C3 working-time saving gaming state, C4 working-time saving gaming state), if you win the C5 working-time saving game in a manner that satisfies the predetermined conditions, The main CPU 201 may select a specific variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table D-2) for a predetermined period of time, for example. That is, if the C5 time saver is won in any time saver gaming state, the C5 time saver will operate internally while the control of the current time saver game state continues. Therefore, if the player is unable or difficult to understand that he or she has won the C5 time saver or that the C5 time saver is operating internally, a specific change pattern table may be selected. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by implicitly informing the player that he has won the C5 time saver and that the C5 time saver is operating internally. In addition, "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a case where the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reduction that operates internally is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the controlled time saving gaming state. . If the number of overlapping time reductions of C5 time reduction that operates internally is smaller than the remaining number of time reductions in the controlled time saving game state, it is possible that the C5 time reduction has been won or that C5 time reduction is internally operating repeatedly. This is because informing the players of what they are doing may actually reduce their interest, which is not desirable. Furthermore, if the C5 time saving win is won in any of the time saving game states, the main CPU 201 may uniformly select a specific variation pattern table; however, for example, if the remaining time saving number of the current time saving game state is If you select a specific fluctuation pattern table when the number is less than the specified number (i.e., the end of the current time-saving game state is near), even if the current time-saving game state ends, the control will continue to the C5 time-saving game state. It is possible to give the player a sense of security that he will be played, and it is possible to increase his interest.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine equipped with multiple types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of C-time savings, time-saving performance, etc.), for example, multiple pieces of starting information for the first special symbol are held. , if the plurality of reservations include the first C time saving per and the second C time saving per which was put on hold after the first C time saving per, the sub CPU 301 first Although it is possible to perform a look-ahead performance for the first C time-saving hit that was put on hold, it is preferable not to perform a look-ahead performance for the second C time-save win that was put on hold later.

In addition, if a time-saving win is won during the control of any time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state that can end the time-saving game state being controlled and start a time-saving game state corresponding to the winning time-saving game is provided. The C time saving win (for example, the C1 time saving win, the C2 time saving win, and the C3 time saving win of the 8th pachinko game machine) and the second C time saving win in which the time saving gaming state under control is continued and the winning time saving win is ignored. If a winning (for example, C4 time saving winning of the 8th pachinko game machine) is installed, in the time saving gaming state, for example, multiple start information of the second special symbol is pending, and among these multiple pending , if the second C time saver and the first C time saver that was put on hold after this second C time saver are included, the sub CPU 301 saves the second C time saver that was put on hold first. It is preferable to make it possible to perform a look-ahead performance regarding the first C time-saving win that was suspended later without performing a look-ahead performance regarding the winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the third C time-saving win that can be activated internally in duplicate and the first C time-saving win that is held after this third C time-saving win are included in the pending. Even in the case where the sub-CPU 301 does not perform the look-ahead performance for the third C time-saving hit that was put on hold first, it is possible to perform the look-ahead performance for the first C time-save win that was put on hold later. It is preferable to

In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, although no particular mention was made of the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may vary depending on the gaming state. The times may be different. In the latter case, for example, in the A time saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the normal gaming state, while in the C time saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be the same or almost the same as in the normal gaming state. . In addition, in the A time saving gaming state, if you want to slow down the progress of the game compared to the B working time saving gaming state and the C working time saving gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is made longer compared to the B working time saving gaming state and the C working time saving gaming state. It is preferable. In addition, when controlled to a time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings to be set is relatively large (for example, the C1 time-saving game state and the B-time-saving game state in the first embodiment), the number of time-savings to be set is relatively large. Compared to the case where the time saving game state is controlled to a small number (for example, the C2 time saving game state and the C3 time saving game state of the first embodiment), when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the number of time savings set is relatively large. Even so, it becomes possible to relatively speed up the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

Also, during the control of any of the time-saving gaming states, it is possible to end the time-saving gaming state being controlled and start the time-saving gaming state corresponding to the won time-saving winning C time-saving winnings (for example, the eighth pachinko game). If you win C1 time saving per, C2 time saving per, C3 time saving per) of the gaming machine, the remaining time saving number of the time saving gaming state under control and the remaining time saving of the C time saving gaming state corresponding to the newly started C time saving winning. It is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs different display effects depending on which of the number of times is greater. For example, if the remaining number of time reductions in the C time-saving game state corresponding to the newly started C time-saving game is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the time-saving game state being controlled, the sub CPU 301 may perform a bonus performance to excite the players. , and if the remaining number of time reductions in the C time-saving game state corresponding to the newly started C time-saving game is smaller than the remaining number of time-savings in the time-saving game state under control, a performance different from the above bonus performance will be performed. It is preferable to suppress a decline in interest by doing so. Performances different from the above-mentioned bonus performances may be, for example, performances that make it impossible or difficult to understand that the number of shortened remaining times will decrease, or performances that once make players look forward to it, such as a reach loss performance, but the players' expectations It may also be used as an expression to show that the results were not in line with the above.

In addition, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbol at a predetermined timing such as when a jackpot game state ends or when a backup clear process is performed, and calculates the number of variable display times of the special symbol that has been counted. Accordingly, it may be possible to switch the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, the main CPU 201 can switch the variable pattern table to be referred to depending on the gaming state when the conditional device operates and the selected symbol command (that is, the special symbol when winning the jackpot (jackpot symbol)). good.

In addition, when the special electric accessory is activated even though the conditional device is not activated (for example, when a small winning game is executed), the main CPU 201 uses the activation of the special electric accessory as a trigger to display the special symbol. It may be possible to count the number of variable displays and to switch the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the number of variable displays of the special symbol. Also, in this case, the main CPU 201 selects the variable pattern table to be referenced according to the gaming state when the special electric accessory is activated and the selected symbol command (i.e., the special symbol (small prize symbol) when a small prize is won). Switching may be made executable.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least A time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state, there are a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when determining a variation pattern of special symbols. The main CPU 201 may be able to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols according to at least the gaming state.

In addition, a plurality of variation pattern tables are stored that are referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and when winning the B time saver, the main CPU 201 executes the processing according to the gaming state at the time of winning the B time saver. , B It may be possible to determine a variation pattern table that is referred to when determining a variation pattern of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the starting condition for the B time-saving game state is satisfied by reaching the ceiling, the main CPU 201 starts counting in the game state when the start condition for the B time-saving game state is satisfied and with the start of the B time-saving game state as a trigger. It may be possible to switch the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of being controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least A time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state, and a variation pattern table is referred to when determining a variation pattern of special symbols. Preferably, a plurality of variable pattern tables are stored, and the plurality of variable pattern tables include a specific variable pattern table that is referred to only in the C time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the C time saving game state is started, the main CPU 201 generates a variation pattern to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the special symbol when winning the C time saving winning (C time saving winning symbol). It may also be possible to switch tables.

In addition, the main CPU 201 generates a variable pattern table that is referred to when determining a variation pattern of the special symbol in the C time-saving gaming state, depending on the variable display number of special symbols whose counting has started with the start of the C time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to perform switching.

In addition, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different variation times are stored as variation pattern tables referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols, and these multiple variation pattern tables include special symbol patterns in the normal gaming state. A first fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and a second fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state are included. is preferred.

In addition, the invention described in the eighth pachinko game machine is not only applicable to the first pachinko game machine, but can also be applied to any of the first to sixth pachinko game machines. As mentioned above. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine such as the third pachinko game machine, after the end of the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is variablely displayed a specified number of times (for example, once ), the main CPU refers to the variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is relatively small (that is, the expected value of the variable display time is relatively long). It is preferable that the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by the following. In this case, the variable display time of the special symbol is preferably longer than the average time of the variable display time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, and is the longest among the variable display times of the special symbol in the normal gaming state. It may be a long time. In addition, the main CPU 201 normally displays the first special symbol variably in a variable pattern determined based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, but after the end of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 displays the first special symbol. Until the variable display is performed a specified number of times (for example, once), regardless of the result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol, it will be performed with a specific variation pattern set for a relatively long time compared to normal. It may be determined in advance. In the 1st type 2nd type mixing machine, even if the time-saving game state ends after the end of the jackpot game state, starting information of the second special symbol may remain pending. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed for the remaining reservation is a small hit and a further V prize is won, the player may The player will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state again without playing the game in the normal gaming state, and the player may be able to obtain a large amount of balls in a short period of time. If a large number of balls are promoted in a short period of time, it will arouse the gambling spirit of the players, which is not desirable. Therefore, as mentioned above, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display time of the special symbol becomes relatively long (for example, 200 to 600 seconds) until the variable display of the first special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, once). ), it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a large number of balls in a short period of time, and in turn, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in interest. The prescribed number of times mentioned above may be one time, but is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the number of pending times in the start memory of the first special symbol stored when the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, the main CPU 201 manages gaming value information (for example, number of jackpots) related to balls put out per unit time at a predetermined timing (for example, first hit), and when controlled to a jackpot gaming state, gaming value information It may also be possible to perform the stretching process based on. Furthermore, the degree of stretching may be varied based on the gaming value information. In addition, the extension process includes, for example, the variable display time of special symbols and the time related to the jackpot gaming state (for example, the start interval time when the jackpot gaming state is started, the interval time between round games, and the time when the jackpot gaming state ends). This corresponds to a process of delaying the progress of the game compared to the normal time by making the end interval time, etc. of the game longer than the normal time.

Further, the main CPU 201 may be able to execute any one of a plurality of stretching processes having different degrees of stretching in the jackpot game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed with the start of the A time-saving gaming state as a trigger, and when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the main CPU 201 counts the number of times the special symbols are displayed as a variable, and when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the main CPU 201 counts the number of times the special symbols are displayed. Depending on the variable number of times of display, extension processing may be executed in this jackpot game state. Further, the degree of stretching may be varied depending on the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed until the jackpot game state is controlled.

In addition, in the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of stretching processes having different degrees of stretching, and after the control is controlled to a predetermined jackpot game state, the time saving function A is activated, and after that, 1 When the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a jackpot gaming state once or multiple times, the main CPU 201 can execute extension processing in the current jackpot gaming state according to the number of controlled jackpot gaming states, including a predetermined jackpot gaming state. You can also use it as Furthermore, the main CPU 201 may vary the degree of extension depending on the number of controlled jackpot gaming states, including predetermined jackpot gaming states. In addition, instead of directly counting the number of jackpot gaming states, for example, the number of jackpot gaming states is counted when the jackpot gaming state is controlled again within a predetermined time after the jackpot gaming state ends, and as a result, the number of jackpot gaming states is counted. The number of times may be grasped (the same applies below).

Further, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different aspects (for example, number of rounds, etc.), and in the jackpot game state, select one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching. It may also be possible to perform stretching processing. In this case, if the A time saving gaming state is started after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and then being controlled to a jackpot gaming state one or more times, multiple jackpots including the predetermined jackpot gaming state Depending on the number of jackpot gaming states that are controlled to be a specific jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state with a relatively large number of rounds) among the gaming states, it may be possible to execute extension processing in the current jackpot gaming state. . Furthermore, the degree of extension may be varied depending on the number of jackpot gaming states controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state among a plurality of jackpot gaming states, including a predetermined jackpot gaming state.

Further, the main CPU 201 may be able to execute any one of a plurality of stretching processes having different degrees of stretching in the jackpot game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbol with the start of the A time saving gaming state as a trigger, starts the A time saving gaming state after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and then once or multiple times. When the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of Accordingly, the extension process may be made executable in the current jackpot game state. Furthermore, the degree of extension is made to vary depending on the variable display number of special symbols executed before the jackpot gaming state is controlled and the number of controlled jackpot gaming states including the predetermined jackpot gaming state. You can also do this.

Further, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different aspects (for example, number of rounds, etc.), and in the jackpot game state, select one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching. It may also be possible to perform stretching processing. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbol with the start of the A time-saving gaming state as a trigger, and after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state starts, and then a plurality of jackpot games. When the state is controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state with a relatively large number of rounds), the variable display number of special symbols executed until the specific jackpot gaming state is controlled, Depending on the number of controlled specific jackpot gaming states including a predetermined jackpot gaming state, the extension process may be executable in the current specific jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the degree of extension is determined according to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before being controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state, and the number of times the specific jackpot gaming state is controlled including the predetermined jackpot gaming state. may be made to be different.

Further, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different aspects (for example, number of rounds, etc.), and in the jackpot game state, select one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching. The time saving function A is activated after the extension process is executed and the control is controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and then a specific jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds) is activated. If the specified jackpot gaming state is controlled one or more times (including a predetermined jackpot gaming state), the current specified The extension process may be executable in the jackpot game state. Further, the degree of extension may be varied depending on the number of controlled jackpot gaming states including a predetermined jackpot gaming state and the number of controlled specific jackpot gaming states.

In addition, in the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 enables execution of any one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching, and counts the number of variable display times of the special symbol with the start of the A time-saving game state as an opportunity. , A time-saving gaming state is started after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state with a relatively large number of rounds) one or more times. In this case, the number of variable display times of special symbols executed before being controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state, the number of controlled jackpot gaming states including a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and the specific controlled jackpot gaming state The extension process may be executed in the current specific jackpot game state depending on the number of times. Furthermore, the number of variable display times of special symbols executed before being controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state, the number of controlled jackpot gaming states including a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and the specific controlled jackpot gaming state The degree of stretching may be varied depending on the number of times.

Further, the main CPU 201 may be able to control the progress of the game to be relatively delayed when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition for executing the extension process) regarding the ball output rate per unit time is satisfied.

In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when winning a jackpot), the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state in which round games are executed over multiple rounds, and when controlled to the jackpot game state, after the opening time has elapsed. After starting a round game, after a predetermined interval time has elapsed after the end of the round game, the next round game can be started, and after the end of the last round game, the jackpot game state can be ended after a predetermined ending time has elapsed, and the unit Even if at least one of the opening time, interval time, and ending time is made relatively longer if a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per hour (for example, a condition for executing the extension process) is satisfied, good.

In addition, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, a condition for executing the extension process) is satisfied, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time required for one game (for example, the variation pattern of special symbols) is relatively It may be possible to control the length so that it becomes longer.

Further, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, a condition for executing the stretching process) is satisfied, the main CPU 201 determines a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time as a variation pattern of the special symbol. The probability of doing or deciding may be increased.

In addition, if a predetermined condition related to the payout rate per unit time (for example, the execution condition of the extension process) is satisfied, and further a specific condition is satisfied (for example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a specific result) (For example, in the case of a 10R jackpot), the main CPU 201 may determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol such that the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, or the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern is high.

In addition, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, a condition for executing the stretching process) is satisfied, the main CPU 201 determines that the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively The variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to a variation pattern table that is relatively small (that is, the expected value of the variable display time is relatively long).

In addition, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, a condition for executing the extension process) is satisfied, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a specific result (for example, a specific jackpot), The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display per unit time is relatively small (that is, the expected value of the variable display time is relatively long). You may also do so.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 establishes a predetermined flag according to the variable display of special symbols until the next jackpot game state is controlled, and determines whether the predetermined flag is established (ON/OFF). ) and the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the previous jackpot gaming state until it is controlled to the current jackpot gaming state, the degree of stretching in the stretching process executed in the current jackpot gaming state varies. You can also make it wet.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 adds or subtracts a predetermined count value according to the variable display number of special symbols until the next jackpot gaming state is controlled. In this case, the extension process may be executed in the current jackpot game state according to a predetermined count value. Furthermore, the main CPU 201 may vary the degree of stretching depending on the above-mentioned predetermined count value.

Also, in the explanation of the time chart (see FIGS. 312 and 331) showing the flow of the game (for example, (b), (d), (h) in FIG. 312, (b) to (d) in FIG. 331, g) and (i), etc.), the additional presentation has been described, but the form of this additional presentation is not limited to a specific presentation form. For example, the entire increasing number of time savings may be displayed in one additional effect, or the entire increasing number of time saving times may be displayed in multiple additional effects. "Displaying the entire number of increased time savings in multiple additional effects" means, for example, in the first additional effect, an additional effect indicating that only a part of the increased number of time savings increases, and in the second The additional performance corresponds to a mode in which an additional performance is performed that shows the entire remaining number of time reductions to be increased. As a specific example, for example, if the number of time savings to be increased is 100, the first additional performance may display "Get 30 time savings!", and the second additional performance may display "Get 70 time savings!" This corresponds to a performance mode that indicates the number of time saving times that are added by multiple additional performances at different timings. Note that the number of times the additional effects are performed at different timings is not limited to two, but may be performed three or more times. Furthermore, for example, if the number of time savings to be increased is 100, the first additional performance will display, for example, "Get 30 time savings!", and the second additional performance will display, for example, "Unfortunate!", indicating that no additional time savings will be made. A fake performance may be performed, and in the third additional performance, for example, "Get 70 time savings!" may be displayed.

In any of the time saving game states, for example, if you win on the C3 time saver, it is preferable that the above-mentioned multiple addition performances are performed until the special symbol game where you win on the C3 time saver ends. On the other hand, if you win, for example, on the C5 time saver in any of the time saving game states, for example, the first additional performance will be performed until the special symbol game in which you won on the C5 time saver ends, and the second and subsequent additions will be performed. The performance may be performed until the control of the current time-saving game state ends (that is, until the control of the C5 time-saving game state is started in a manner that the player can enjoy).

[9. 9th pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the ninth pachinko game machine will be described below. This ninth pachinko game machine relates to another embodiment of the base door 3 of the first pachinko game machine. However, the invention described in the ninth pachinko game machine is not only applicable to the first pachinko game machine, but can also be applied to any of the first to eighth pachinko game machines.

Below, in explaining the ninth pachinko game machine, we will omit as much as possible the points that are common to the first to eighth pachinko game machines in external configuration, electrical configuration, etc., functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. The points that are different from the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines will be mainly explained. Therefore, matters not mentioned below regarding the ninth pachinko gaming machine are common to all or any of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines.

Furthermore, in explaining the ninth pachinko game machine, those having the same configuration and functions as the first pachinko game machine will be described using the same symbols as the first pachinko game machine.

The base door C4000 shown in FIG. 334 is related to another embodiment of the base door 3 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The base door C4000 is provided approximately inside the outer frame 2 when viewed from the front, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. 333, a glass door 4 provided with a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the front side of the base door C4000. The base door C4000 is formed into a frame shape that surrounds the upper, lower, left, and right sides when viewed from the front, by an upper base member C4010, a side plate C4020, and a lower base member C4100. Further, as shown in FIGS. 334, 335, and 347(b), the base door C4000 is provided with a binding wiring member C4180, a back cover C4190, a payout unit C4200, a game ball passage C4230, and a wiring guide member C4300. .

The upper base member C4010 shown in FIG. 334 constitutes the upper part of the base door C4000. The upper base member C4010 is formed in a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The upper base member C4010 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The upper base member C4010 includes a recess C4011.

The recessed portion C4011 is a portion recessed forward on the rear surface of the upper base member C4010. The recess C4011 is provided on the right side of the upper base member C4010. A storage tank C4210 of a dispensing unit C4200, which will be described later, is provided in the recess C4011.

The side plate C4020 constitutes a side portion of the base door C4000. The side plate C4020 is formed in a vertically elongated shape. The side plate C4020 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. A pair of side plates C4020 are provided on the left and right. The upper end portion of the side plate C4020 is fixed to the left and right end portions of the upper base member C4010.

The lower base member C4100 shown in FIGS. 334, 335 to 340 constitutes the lower part of the base door C4000. The lower base member C4100 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The lower base member C4100 is formed into a substantially inverted L shape when viewed from the side. Further, the lower base member C4100 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. Further, the lower base member C4100 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The lower end portions of the side plates C4020 are fixed to the left and right end portions of the lower base member C4100.

As shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, a game ball passageway C4230, a wiring guide member C4300, and a binding wiring member C4180, which will be described later, are attached to the lower base member C4100. The lower base member C4100 includes a first portion C4110, a second portion C4120, a right side portion C4130, a left side portion C4140, a housing space C4150, a first substrate C4160, and a second substrate C4170.

The first portion C4110 shown in FIGS. 339 and 340 is a portion that constitutes the upper part of the lower base member C4100. The first portion C4110 is formed to extend in the horizontal direction. The first portion C4110 includes a horizontal portion C4111, a rear wall portion C4112, and a holding portion C4113.

The horizontal portion C4111 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. The horizontal portion C4111 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above.

The rear wall portion C4112 is a portion that projects upward at the rear end portion of the horizontal portion C4111. The rear wall portion C4112 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The rear wall portion C4112 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear wall portion C4112 is provided over the entire horizontal portion C4111 in the left and right direction. As shown in FIG. 336, a first wiring member C4181 and a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later, are wired on the front surface of the rear wall portion C4112. The rear wall portion C4112 includes a locking portion C4112a.

A locking portion C4112a shown in FIGS. 336 and 339 locks a first wiring member C4181 and a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later. The locking portion C4112a is provided on the front surface of the rear wall portion C4112. The locking portion C4112a locks each wiring member by inserting the wiring member into the opening that penetrates in the left-right direction and sandwiching the wiring member. A plurality of locking portions C4112a are provided along the left-right direction.

The holding portion C4113 is a portion provided to protrude rearward from the right side portion of the rear wall portion C4112. The holding portion C4113 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens upward. A suitable connector (not shown) is held in the holding portion C4113.

The second portion C4120 is a portion that constitutes the lower part of the lower base member C4100. The second portion C4120 is formed to extend downward from the front end of the first portion C4110. The second portion C4120 includes a vertical portion C4121 and a lower wall portion C4122.

The vertical portion C4121 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The vertical portion C4121 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The upper end of the vertical portion C4121 is connected to the front end of the horizontal portion C4111. As shown in FIG. 340, an opening C4121a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the upper left part of the vertical portion C4121. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 339, the opening C4121a is formed such that the front portion thereof passes through the vertical portion C4121 in the front-back direction, and the rear portion thereof passes through the horizontal portion C4111 in the vertical direction.

The lower wall portion C4122 shown in FIG. 339 is a portion that projects forward at the lower end of the vertical portion C4121. The lower wall portion C4122 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the up-down direction. The lower wall portion C4122 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The lower wall portion C4122 is provided over the entire vertical portion C4121 in the left and right direction.

The right side portion C4130 is a portion that constitutes the right end portion of the lower base member C4100. The right side portion C4130 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The right side portion C4130 is formed in a shape (approximately inverted L-shape) that generally corresponds to the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 when viewed from the right side. The right side portion C4130 is provided at the right end of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120. The right side C4130 includes a recess C4131.

A recessed portion C4131 shown in FIG. 340 is a portion recessed to the left in the right side portion C4130. The recessed portion C4131 is provided so as to overlap the first portion C4110 when viewed from the right side. An opening C4131a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on a surface of the recess C4131 facing in the left-right direction.

A left side portion C4140 shown in FIG. 339 is a portion that constitutes the left end portion of the lower base member C4100. The left side portion C4140 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The left side portion C4140 is formed in a shape (approximately inverted L-shape) that generally corresponds to the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 when viewed from the left side. The left side portion C4140 is provided on the left side of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 with an accommodation space C4150 described later in between.

The accommodation space C4150 shown in FIGS. 337 to 339 is a space that accommodates a game ball passing path C4230 and a wiring guide member C4300, which will be described later. The accommodation space C4150 is located between the left end portions of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 and the left side portion C4140. The accommodation space C4150 includes a first recess C4151 and a second recess C4152.

The first recess C4151 constitutes the upper part of the accommodation space C4150. The first recess C4151 is formed to be recessed downward on the left side of the first portion C4110. The first recess C4151 accommodates the lower part of a game ball passage C4230, which will be described later. A locking portion C4151a is provided on the front facing surface of the first recessed portion C4151. The locking portion C4151a is formed in substantially the same shape as the locking portion C4112a of the rear wall portion C4112.

The second recess C4152 constitutes a lower portion of the accommodation space C4150. The second recess C4152 is formed to be recessed rearward on the left side of the second portion C4120. A wiring guide member C4300, which will be described later, is accommodated in the second recess C4152.

The first board C4160 shown in FIGS. 337, 339, and 340 is a board (relay board) provided on the right side of the lower base member C4100. The first board C4160 relays signals related to the operation (control) of the gaming machine. The first substrate C4160 is provided on the right side of the rear surface of the vertical portion C4121 of the second portion C4120 via an appropriate member (not shown). The first substrate C4160 is provided so that its upper portion is located within the recess C4131 of the right side C4130. The first substrate C4160 is arranged with the thickness direction facing the left-right direction. The first board C4160 includes a first connector C4161 and a second connector C4162.

A first connector C4161 shown in FIGS. 337 and 340 connects a first board C4160 and a first wiring member C4181 described later. An insertion portion C4181a of a first wiring member C4181, which will be described later, is inserted into the first connector C4161. The first connector C4161 is provided on the upper left side of the first board C4160.

The second connector C4162 connects the first board C4160 and a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later. An insertion portion C4182a of a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later, is inserted into the second connector C4162. The second connector C4162 is provided on the upper left side of the first board C4160. The second connector C4162 is provided in front of the first connector C4161.

A second board C4170 shown in FIG. 340 is a board (relay board) provided on the left side of the lower base member C4100. The second board C4170 relays signals related to the operation (control) of the gaming machine. The second substrate C4170 is provided on the left side of the rear surface of the vertical portion C4121 of the second portion C4120. The second substrate C4170 is arranged with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The second board C4170 includes a third connector C4171.

A third connector C4171 shown in FIGS. 337 and 340 connects the second board C4170 and a third wiring member C4183, which will be described later. An insertion portion C4183a of a third wiring member C4183, which will be described later, is inserted into the third connector C4171. The third connector C4171 is provided on the front surface of the second board C4170.

The bundled wiring member C4180 shown in FIGS. 336, 337, and 340 connects the first board C4160 and the second board C4170 to a board (for example, a relay board) provided on the glass door 4 side. be. The bundled wiring member C4180 is formed by binding a plurality of wiring members (first wiring member C4181, second wiring member C4182, and third wiring member C4183). The bundled wiring member C4180 includes a first wiring member C4181, a second wiring member C4182, a third wiring member C4183, and a binding member C4184.

The first wiring member C4181 is connectable to the first connector C4161 of the first board C4160. An insertion portion C4181a that can be inserted into (connected to) the first connector C4161 is provided at one end of the first wiring member C4181. The other end (not shown) of the first wiring member C4181 is connected to an appropriate connector on a board provided on the glass door 4 side.

The second wiring member C4182 is connectable to the second connector C4162 of the first board C4160. An insertion portion C4182a that can be inserted into (connected to) the second connector C4162 is provided at one end of the second wiring member C4182. The other end (not shown) of the second wiring member C4182 is connected to an appropriate connector on a board provided on the glass door 4 side.

The third wiring member C4183 is connectable to the third connector C4171 of the second board C4170. An insertion portion C4183a that can be inserted into (connected to) the third connector C4171 is provided at one end of the third wiring member C4183. The other end (not shown) of the third wiring member C4183 is connected to an appropriate connector on a board provided on the glass door 4 side. The third wiring member C4183 is formed shorter than the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182.

The lengths of the first wiring member C4181, second wiring member C4182, and third wiring member C4183 as described above are set according to the distance between the connectors to be connected. Therefore, each wiring member is formed to have a different length. Note that the length of each wiring member is not limited to such an embodiment, and a part or all of each wiring member may be set to the same length.

A binding member C4184 shown in FIG. 347(b) is capable of binding a first wiring member C4181, a second wiring member C4182, and a third wiring member C4183. The binding member C4184 is a band-shaped member that can be bundled by tightening each wiring. The binding member C4184 is arranged at an appropriate position where each wiring can be bound. Note that a plurality of binding members C4184 may be provided when forming the wiring binding member C4180, or only one binding member C4184 may be provided.

In addition, although the example mentioned above showed the example which formed the bundled wiring member C4180 by bundling three wiring members, it is not restricted to such an aspect. The number of wiring members included in the bundled wiring member C4180 may be more than three or less than three. The bundled wiring member C4180 is wired along the lower base member C4100, and is guided toward the glass door 4 by a wiring guide member C4300, which will be described later. Note that a detailed explanation of the wiring manner of the bundled wiring member C4180 will be given later.

A rear cover C4190 shown in FIGS. 334 and 349 is provided at the rear of the base door C4000. Specifically, the back cover C4190 is provided so as to cover the rear portions of the upper base member C4010, the side plate C4020, and the lower base member C4100, which are provided in a square frame shape as shown in FIG. 334. The back cover C4190 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally directed in the front-rear direction. The back cover C4190 includes a first hole C4191 and a second hole C4192.

A first hole C4191 shown in FIG. 349 penetrates the back cover C4190 in the front-rear direction. The first hole C4191 is formed in the shape of a long hole that is elongated in the vertical direction. A plurality of first holes C4191 are formed at intervals in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The second hole C4192 penetrates the back cover C4190 in the front-rear direction at a portion different from the first hole C4191. The second hole C4192 is formed at a position that overlaps with a hole 98a of a sub-board case 98, which will be described later, in rear view. The second hole C4192 is formed in an arc shape. A plurality of second holes C4192 are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and are arranged in a circular shape. Further, a plurality of second holes C4192 are formed in the radial direction so as to be arranged in a plurality of concentric circles.

The payout unit C4200 shown in FIGS. 335 and 341 to 343 pays out game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to the tray unit 5 side. The dispensing unit C4200 is provided at the rear of the upper base member C4010 and the lower base member C4100. The dispensing unit C4200 includes a storage tank C4210 and a ball passage C4220.

The storage tank C4210 stores game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown). The storage tank C4210 is formed in a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The storage tank C4210 is provided in the recess C4011 of the upper base member C4010 (see FIG. 334). The storage tank C4210 includes a storage section C4211, an alignment section C4212, and a passage section C4213.

The storage part C4211 is a part that stores game balls. The storage section C4211 constitutes the right part of the storage tank C4210. The storage portion C4211 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. The storage portion C4211 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above.

The alignment section C4212 shown in FIGS. 341 and 342 is capable of aligning game balls flowing down from the storage section C4211 to the ball passage C4220. The alignment section C4212 includes an alignment path C4212a and a cover section C4212b.

The alignment path C4212a constitutes a path through which the game balls in the storage section C4211 can pass to the left. The right end of the alignment path C4212a is connected to the left end of the storage section C4211. The alignment path C4212a is inclined so as to roll the game balls to the left. Further, the alignment path C4212a is formed so that the width dimension (front and back dimension) gradually decreases toward the left. The left end of the alignment path C4212a is formed to have a width that allows one game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game balls rolling on the alignment path C4212a can be aligned in a line.

The cover portion C4212b covers the alignment path C4212a from above. The cover portion C4212b is formed in a shape corresponding to the alignment path C4212a in plan view. The cover portion C4212b has a contact surface C4212c facing toward the alignment path C4212a (lower side). A plurality of game balls stacked up in the storage section C4211 come into contact with the contact surface C4212c of the cover section C4212b during the process of moving toward the alignment path C4212a, so that the height becomes approximately constant (i.e., All the game balls are leveled so that they roll directly on the floor of the alignment path C4212a. Thereby, the game balls rolling on the alignment path C4212a can be aligned.

The passage section C4213 shown in FIGS. 341 to 343 allows the game balls aligned by the alignment section C4212 to flow down into the ball passage C4220. The passage portion C4213 constitutes a passage that is elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension of the passage portion C4213 is formed to be the same as the width dimension of the left end portion of the alignment portion C4212. The passage section C4213 includes a horizontal section C4213a, a curved section C4213b, and a cover section C4213c.

The horizontal portion C4213a is a portion extending generally in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and the right end portion of the horizontal portion C4213a is connected to the left end portion of the alignment portion C4212. The horizontal portion C4213a is inclined toward the lower left so that the game ball rolls to the left.

The curved portion C4213b is a portion that curves downward. The curved portion C4213b is provided at the left end of the horizontal portion C4213a. The lower end of the curved portion C4213b is connected to the upper end connecting portion C4221a of the ball passage C4220.

The cover portion C4213c covers the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b from above. The cover portion C4213c is formed in a shape corresponding to the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b in plan view. The game ball that falls over the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b is restricted from moving upward by the cover portion C4213c.

The ball passage C4220 shown in FIGS. 341 and 343 allows the game balls from the storage tank C4210 to flow down to the game ball passage C4230, which will be described later. Ball passageway C4220 is attached to left side plate C4020. The ball passage C4220 includes a main passage C4221 and a branch passage C4222.

The main passage C4221 is the main structure of the ball passage C4220. The main passage C4221 constitutes a vertically elongated passage. The main passage C4221 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The main passage C4221 includes an upper end connecting portion C4221a and a first lower end connecting portion C4221b.

The upper end connecting portion C4221a is connected to the lower end portion of the curved portion C4213b of the storage tank C4210. The upper end connecting portion C4221a is provided at the upper end of the main passage C4221. The upper end connecting portion C4221a opens upward.

The first lower end connecting portion C4221b shown in FIG. 341 is connected to an upper passageway C4231 of a game ball passageway C4230, which will be described later. The first lower end connecting portion C4221b is provided at the lower end of the main passage C4221. The first lower end connecting portion C4221b opens toward the front.

Branch passage C4222 is a passage branching from main passage C4221. The branch passage C4222 is formed in a vertically elongated shape. The branch passage C4222 is provided at the lower end of the main passage C4221 to the left of the first lower end connecting portion C4221b. Branch passage C4222 is formed so as to protrude forward from the front surface of main passage C4221. The branch passage C4222 includes a second lower end connecting portion C4222a.

The second lower end connecting portion C4222a is connected to a lower passage C4232 of a game ball passage C4230, which will be described later. The second lower end connecting portion C4222a is provided at the lower end of the branch passage C4222. The second lower end connecting portion C4222a opens downward.

The above-described payout unit C4200 includes a predetermined payout device (not shown) that pays out the game balls in the storage tank C4210. When a predetermined payout condition is met, the payout device transfers a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage tank C4210 to the ball passage C4220 from the first lower end connection portion C4221b or the second lower end connection portion C4222a. Discharge. This makes it possible to pay out the balls to the tray unit 5 side via the game ball passing path C4230, which will be described later.

The game ball passage C4230 shown in FIGS. 335 to 338, 344, and 345 allows the game medium from the ball passage C4220 to pass when a predetermined condition (for example, payout condition) is satisfied. . The game ball passageway C4230 is composed of two upper and lower passageways, and constitutes a long passageway in the front and back direction as a whole. The game ball passage C4230 is provided in the lower base member C4100 so that the lower part thereof is located in the first recess C4151 of the accommodation space C4150. The game ball passageway C4230 is arranged so as to be inclined forward and downward. The game ball passage C4230 allows the game medium from the ball passage C4220 to pass to the tray unit 5 side. The game ball passage C4230 includes an upper passage C4231 and a lower passage C4232.

The upper passageway C4231 shown in FIG. 344 constitutes the upper part of the game ball passageway C4230. The upper passage C4231 allows the game ball from the branch passage C4222 of the ball passage C4220 to pass to the upper tray 51 side of the tray unit 5. In addition, the upper passage C4231 guides the game balls from the main passage C4221 (game balls that did not pass through the branch passage C4222) to the lower passage C4232, which will be described later. The upper passage C4231 includes a first passage part C4231a and a second passage part C4231d.

The first passage section C4231a guides the game ball from the main passage C4221 to a lower passage C4232 which will be described later. The first passage portion C4231a is formed from the rear end portion of the upper passageway C4231 to a midway portion in the front-rear direction. The first passage C4231a includes a first supply port C4231b and an opening C4231c.

The first supply port C4231b is a portion connected to the first lower end connecting portion C4221b of the main passage C4221. The first supply port C4231b is provided at the rear end of the first passage portion C4231a. The first supply port C4231b opens toward the rear.

The opening C4231c is a portion that opens downward at the front end of the first passage C4231a. By passing through the opening C4231c, the game ball rolling in the first passage C4231a moves (falls) downward.

The second passage portion C4231d allows the game ball from the branch passage C4222 to pass to the upper tray 51 side of the tray unit 5. The second passage portion C4231d is formed over the entire upper passageway C4231 in the front-rear direction. The second passage portion C4231d is formed to the left of the first passage portion C4231a. In addition, since there is nothing that prevents the rolling of the game ball between the second passage part C4231d and the first passage part C4231a, the second passage part C4231d and the first passage part C4231a are in communication with each other. has been done. The second passage section C4231d includes a second supply port C4231e and a discharge port C4231f.

The second supply port C4231e is a portion connected to the second lower end connecting portion C4222a of the branch passage C4222. The second supply port C4231e is provided at the rear end of the second passage portion C4231d. The second supply port C4231e opens upward.

The discharge port C4231f is a part that discharges the game balls rolling in the second passage portion C4231d to the upper tray 51 side of the tray unit 5. The discharge port C4231f is provided at the front end of the second passage portion C4231d. The discharge port C4231f opens toward the front. The discharge port C4231f is connected to an appropriate path (not shown) that communicates with the discharge port 53 of the upper tray 51.

The lower passage C4232 shown in FIGS. 344 and 345 constitutes the lower part of the game ball passage C4230. The lower passage C4232 allows the game balls from the main passage C4221 supplied through the opening C4231c to pass to the lower tray 52 side of the tray unit 5. The lower passage C4232 includes a passage portion C4232a and a discharge port C4232b.

The passage portion C4232a allows the game ball from the opening portion C4231c to pass toward the lower tray 52 side. The passage portion C4232a is formed over the entire lower passage C4232 in the front-rear direction. The rear portion of the passage portion C4232a overlaps with the opening portion C4231c in plan view. The game ball that has fallen from the opening C4231c rolls forward on the passage C4232a. The passage portion C4232a includes a discharge port C4232b.

The discharge port C4232b is a part that discharges the game ball rolling in the passage portion C4232a to the lower tray 52 side of the tray unit 5. The discharge port C4232b is provided at the front end of the passage portion C4232a. The discharge port C4232b opens toward the front. The passage portion C4232a is connected to an appropriate path (not shown) that communicates with the dispensing port 55 of the lower tray 52.

In addition, if the upper tray 51 is full, the game balls cannot be discharged from the discharge port C4231f of the second passage section C4231d to the upper tray 51 side, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the second passage section C4231d. The ball will hold out. In such a case, the game ball rolls from the second passage part C4231d to the first passage part C4231a, and is supplied to the passage part C4232a via the opening part C4231c. That is, when the upper tray 51 is full, game balls are paid out to the lower tray 52 instead of the upper tray 51.

The wiring guide member C4300 shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, 344, 346, and 347 is capable of guiding the wiring direction (passing direction) of the bundled wiring member C4180. The wiring guide member C4300 is provided on the lower base member C4100 so as to be located within the second recess C4152 of the accommodation space C4150 (accommodated in the second recess C4152).

As shown in FIG. 336, the wiring guide member C4300 is provided below the game ball passage C4230. The wiring guide member C4300 is arranged so that the upper part is close to the lower part of the game ball passage C4230. The wiring guide member C4300 includes a guide case portion C4310, a guide portion C4320, and a cover portion C4330.

A guide case portion C4310 shown in FIGS. 344 and 346 holds a guide portion C4320 and a cover portion C4330, which will be described later. The guide case portion C4310 is provided on the front facing surface of the second recessed portion C4152 (see FIG. 338). A housing space C4310a is formed in the guide case portion C4310, which opens downward and accommodates the upper portions of the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330. The guide case portion C4310 includes a front portion C4311 and a rear portion C4312.

The front portion C4311 shown in FIG. 346 constitutes the front portion of the guide case portion C4310. The front portion C4311 includes a housing portion C4311a.

The housing portion C4311a constitutes the front portion of the housing space C4310a. The housing portion C4311a opens rearward and downward.

The rear portion C4312 constitutes the rear portion of the guide case portion C4310. A front portion C4311 is fixed to the front surface of the rear portion C4312. The rear portion C4312 is fixed to the front facing surface of the second recess C4152. The rear portion C4312 includes a housing portion C4312a and a bearing portion C4312b.

The housing portion C4312a constitutes the rear portion of the housing space C4310a. The housing portion C4312a opens forward and downward.

The bearing portion C4312b pivotally supports a shaft portion C4321a of a guide portion C4320 and a shaft portion C4331a of a cover portion C4330, which will be described later. The bearing portion C4312b is formed so as to be recessed rearward on the front surface of the rear portion C4312. The bearing portions C4312b are provided on both left and right sides of the housing portion C4312a.

The guide portion C4320 shown in FIGS. 344, 346, and 347 guides the bundled wiring member C4180 by changing the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180. The guide portion C4320 is formed in a shape that opens upward and to the right. As shown in FIG. 347, a binding wiring member C4180 passing from the rear to the front is introduced into the guide portion C4320 from the upper opening. As shown in FIG. 346, the guide portion C4320 guides the bundled wiring member C4180 introduced from the top downward, then forward, and then guides it to the right. Further, the guide portion C4320 guides the bundled wiring member C4180 led out to the right further forward. Note that a detailed explanation of how the guide portion C4320 guides the bundled wiring member C4180 will be described later. The guide portion C4320 includes a side portion C4321, an upper conversion portion C4322, a lower conversion portion C4323, a first wall portion C4324, a second wall portion C4325, and a third wall portion C4326.

The side portion C4321 constitutes the left portion of the guide portion C4320. The side portion C4321 is formed into a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated in one direction (in the illustrated example, diagonally up and down) when viewed from the side. The side portion C4321 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The side portion C4321 includes a shaft portion C4321a.

The shaft portion C4321a shown in FIG. 346 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the left bearing portion C4312b. The shaft portion C4321a projects leftward from the left surface of the side portion C4321. The shaft portion C4321a is provided at the top of the side portion C4321.

The upper converter C4322 shown in FIG. 347(b) is capable of converting the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 introduced from the upper part from the front to the lower part. The upper conversion portion C4322 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The upper conversion portion C4322 is formed at the rear of the side portion C4321 above the center portion in the vertical direction. The passage direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 is changed from the front to the downward direction when a part of the bundled wiring member C4180 comes into contact with the upper conversion portion C4322. Note that the conversion of the passing direction by the upper converting part C4322 is not limited to the manner in which the passing direction is changed by the binding wiring member C4180 directly contacting (abutting) the upper converting part C4322. For example, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the wiring bundle C4180 approaches the upper conversion portion C4322 without directly contacting it, and the passage direction is changed. The upper conversion part C4322 has a screw hole C4322a.

A suitable screw for fixing a cover portion C4330, which will be described later, is inserted through the screw hole C4322a. The screw hole C4322a is formed on the right side of the upper conversion part C4322.

The lower converter C4323 is capable of converting the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180, which has been converted downward by the upper converter C4322, to the front. The lower conversion portion C4323 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The lower conversion portion C4323 is formed below the upper conversion portion C4322. Further, the lower conversion portion C4323 is formed forward of the upper conversion portion C4322. More specifically, the lower conversion portion C4323 is formed at a midway point in the front-rear direction of the side portion C4321, below the center portion in the up-down direction. The passage direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 is changed from below to the front when a part of the bundled wiring member C4180 approaches the lower conversion portion C4323. The lower conversion part C4323 has a screw hole C4323a.

A suitable screw for fixing a cover portion C4330, which will be described later, is inserted through the screw hole C4323a. The screw hole C4323a is formed on the right side of the lower conversion portion C4323.

The first wall portion C4324 is a wall formed at the rear and lower portion of the guide portion C4320. The first wall portion C4324 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The first wall portion C4324 is formed approximately along the circumference of the side portion C4321. More specifically, the first wall portion C4324 is formed generally along the circumference of the side portion C4321 from the lower end of the upper conversion portion C4322 to the lower part of the guide portion C4320 (below the lower conversion portion C4323). Ru.

The second wall portion C4325 is a wall formed on the front side of the first wall portion C4324. The second wall portion C4325 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The second wall portion C4325 is formed to extend from the front end of the first wall portion C4324 to the lower end of the lower conversion portion C4323.

The third wall portion C4326 is a wall formed at the front portion of the guide portion C4320. The third wall portion C4326 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The third wall portion C4326 is formed to extend from the upper end of the second wall portion C4325 to the front upper part of the circumference of the side portion C4321. The third wall portion C4326 can suppress the binding wiring member C4180 from moving forward and upward.

The cover portion C4330 shown in FIGS. 344, 346, and 347(a) covers the right opening of the guide portion C4320. The cover portion C4330 is formed in a shape that generally corresponds to the guide portion C4320 (side portion C4321) when viewed from the side. The cover portion C4330 includes a shaft portion C4331, a notch portion C4332, and a hole portion C4333.

The shaft portion C4331 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the right bearing portion C4312b (see FIG. 344). The shaft portion C4331 protrudes rightward from the right surface of the cover portion C4330. The shaft portion C4331 is provided at the top of the cover portion C4330.

The cutout portion C4332 shown in FIGS. 346 and 347(a) exposes the lower part of the guide portion C4320 (below the lower conversion portion C4323) when viewed from the right side. The cutout portion C4332 is formed by cutting out the lower portion of the cover portion C4330.

A suitable screw for fixing the cover part C4330 to the guide part C4320 is inserted through the hole C4333. The hole C4333 passes through the cover C4330 in the left-right direction. The hole C4333 is formed at a position overlapping the screw hole C4322a and the screw hole C4323a in side view.

The guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330, which are fixed to each other, are attached to the guide case portion C4310 by having the shaft portion C4321a and the shaft portion C4331a being pivotally supported by the bearing portion C4312b of the guide case portion C4310. In this state, the upper parts of the guide part C4320 and the cover part C4330 are accommodated in the accommodation space C4310a of the guide case part C4310 (see FIG. 344). Further, as shown in FIG. 347(b), the guide part C4320 and the cover part C4330 are provided so as to be swingable around the axes of the shaft part C4321a and the shaft part C4331a with respect to the guide case part C4310.

Below, a procedure for wiring the bundled wiring member C4180 in the base door C4000 as described above will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 346 and 347(b), the bundle wiring member C4180 is attached to the guide portion C4320. In this case, as shown in FIG. 347(b), the passing direction (for example, the front-back direction) of the bundled wiring member C4180 introduced from the upper part of the guide part C4320 should come into contact with (close to) the upper conversion part C4322. Convert downward with . Further, the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180, which has been converted downward by the upper converter C4322, is changed to the front by bringing it into contact with (adjacent to) the lower converter C4323. That is, the bundled wiring member C4180 is guided in a substantially S-shape by the guide portion C4320.

Further, the bundled wiring member C4180 whose passage direction has been converted so as to go forward by the lower conversion part C4323 is guided to the right by coming into contact with (adjacent to) the rear surface of the second wall part C4325.

Next, the cover part C4330 is fixed to the guide part C4320 using appropriate screws. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the bundled wiring member C4180 from coming off the guide portion C4320. In this state, the bundled wiring member C4180 is led out to the right from the rightward opening defined by the first wall C4324, the second wall C4325, and the notch C4332. Further, the bundle wiring member C4180 led out to the right is guided further forward by coming into contact with (adjacent to) the right end portion of the second wall portion C4325 (see FIG. 346).

Next, as shown in FIG. 346, the guide section C4320 and the cover section C4330 are attached to the guide case section C4310 to form a wiring guide member C4300.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the wiring guide member C4300 is attached to the second recess C4152 of the lower base member C4100.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 336 and 337, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 of the bundled wiring member C4180 on the upper side of the guide part C4320 are connected to the rear wall of the lower base member C4100. Pass along C4112. At this time, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are locked by the locking part C4112a of the first recess C4151 and the locking part C4112a of the rear wall C4112.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340, one end side (insertion part C4181a and insertion part C4182a side) of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 is inserted into the opening C4131a, and the lower base member C4100 ( It is led out to the rear side of the vertical part C4121). Further, the insertion portion C4181a of the first wiring member C4181 and the insertion portion C4182a of the second wiring member C4182 are inserted into the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162 of the first board C4160.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340, one end side (insertion part C4183a side) of the third wiring member C4183 of the bundled wiring member C4180 on the upper side of the guide part C4320 is connected to the lower base member C4100 (vertical part C4121). It is inserted into the opening C4121a and led out to the rear side of the vertical part C4121. Further, the insertion portion C4183a of the third wiring member C4183 is inserted into the third connector C4171 of the second board C4170.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, the game ball passage C4230 is attached to the first recess C4151. In this state, the wiring guide member C4300 and the game ball passage C4230 are close to each other.

According to the base door C4000 as described above, the wiring guide member C4300 (guiding portion C4320) guides the passage direction of the wiring bundle C4180, so that the wiring bundle C4180 can be suitably wired.

That is, the guiding portion C4320 (upper converting portion C4322) guides the forward passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 downward. Thereby, interference with the game ball passage C4230 arranged close to the upper part of the wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320) can be suppressed.

Further, the guiding portion C4320 (lower converting portion C4323) guides the downward passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 forward. Thereby, the wiring guide member C4300 can be suitably wired toward the substrate provided on the glass door 4 side.

Moreover, according to the wiring guide member C4300 (guiding part C4320), the bundled wiring member C4180 consisting of three wiring members can be guided all at once. This facilitates the management and work of each wiring member, unlike the case where the passing direction of each wiring member is changed individually. Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the guide part C4320 and the cover part C4330 are provided so as to be swingable with respect to the guide case part C4310. As a result, for example, when the glass door 4 is opened with respect to the base door C4000 with the bundle wiring member C4180 connected to the board provided on the glass door 4 side, a disconnection due to the bundle wiring member C4180 being pulled. etc. can be suppressed.

Below, the board unit 9 provided in the base door C4000 will be explained using FIGS. 348 to 350. The board unit 9 is arranged on the back (rear) side of the base door C4000. The board unit 9 is covered with a back cover C4190. The board unit 9 mainly includes a main control board 91, a sub-control board 92, a main board case 95, and a sub-board case 98.

The main control board 91 shown in FIG. 348 is a board on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) is mounted.

The sub-control board 92 is a board on which the sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6) is mounted.

A main board case 95 shown in FIG. 348 covers the main control board 91. The main board case 95 includes a first case 96 and a second case 97.

The first case 96 houses the main control board 91. The first case 96 is provided on the game board unit 10 side. The first case 96 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The first case 96 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens rearward. The first case 96 is provided with a main control board 91 on the rear surface (inside the first case 96). The first case 96 has a stamp 96a.

The stamp 96a is an indication of characters or symbols applied to the first case 96. The stamp 96a is provided at the left end of the first case 96 along the vertical direction. The characters and symbols displayed as the stamp 96a are not limited to those shown in the illustration, and can be set as appropriate. The marking 96a is made using, for example, a laser or the like.

The second case 97 covers the main control board 91 housed in the first case 96 from the rear. The second case 97 is fixed to the first case 96. The second case 97 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The left and right dimensions of the second case 97 are smaller than the left and right dimensions of the first case 96. The left end portion of the second case 97 is located to the right of the marking 96a on the first case 96. If the second case 97 fixed to the first case 96 is removed from the first case 96, the portion fixed to the first case 96 will be damaged. Therefore, once removed, the second case 97 cannot be attached to the first case 96 again. The second case 97 has a stamp 97a.

The stamp 97a is a display made on the second case 97 using the same characters and symbols as those on the first case 96. The stamp 97a is provided at the left end of the second case 97 along the vertical direction. The stamp 97a is provided to the right of the stamp 96a on the first case 96.

By providing the stamp 97a and the stamp 97a as described above, it is possible to confirm that a fraudulent act such as a cheating act has been carried out. In other words, if someone forcibly opens the second case 97 in order to illegally replace the main control board 91, a portion of the second case 97 will be damaged as described above, and the second case 97 may be damaged, so the second case 97 may be damaged. It cannot be attached to case 96 of No. 1. Therefore, if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is committed, it is conceivable that after replacing the main control board 91, another case is attached to the first case 96 in place of the damaged second case 97. In such a case, since the stamps 97a and 97a do not match, it is known that fraudulent activity has been committed.

The sub-board case 98 shown in FIGS. 348 to 350 covers the sub-control board 92 from the rear. The sub-control board 92 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens toward the front. The sub-control board 92 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The sub-board case 98 includes a hole 98a.

The hole 98a penetrates the sub-board case 98 in the front-back direction. The hole 98a allows exhaust air from a fan provided in the sub-control board 92 to pass therethrough. The hole 98a is formed in an arc shape. A plurality of holes 98a are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction and arranged in a circular shape. Further, a plurality of holes 98a are formed in the radial direction so as to be arranged in a plurality of concentric circles. The hole 98a is formed at a position overlapping the second hole C4192 of the back cover C4190 when viewed from the rear.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 350, the portion of the sub-board case 98 that defines the hole 98a is inclined radially outward toward the rear. That is, the above portion is formed into a louver shape. By doing so, the hole 98a is formed so that the inside of the sub-board case 98 can be seen from the rear side when viewed diagonally along the above-mentioned slope, but the inside of the sub-board case 98 cannot be seen from the back side. Ru. In this way, by making the inside of the sub-board case 98 invisible from the back side, it is possible to make it difficult for people to steal.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a base member (lower base member C4100), a storage member (storage tank C4210) capable of storing game media, and a first connector C4161 connectable to the first connector C4161. It includes a wiring member C4181, a second wiring member C4182 connectable to a second connector C4162, and a third wiring member C4183 connectable to a third connector C4171.

With such a configuration, the game machine can be suitably operated using each connector and each wiring member connectable to each connector, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the base member (lower base member C4100) includes a first substrate C4160 and a second substrate C4170 different from the first substrate C4160,
The first board C4160 includes the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162,
The second board C4170 is characterized by including the third connector C4171.

With such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably operated using the first board C4160 including the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162, and the second board C4170 including the third connector C4171. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first wiring member C4181 and the third wiring member C4183 are wiring members having different lengths.

With such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably operated using wiring members having different lengths, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It also includes a game medium passageway (ball passage C4220) through which game media stored in the storage member (storage tank C4210) can pass,
The storage member (storage tank C4210) includes an alignment part C4212 that can align the game media flowing down into the game medium passageway (ball path C4220),
The alignment part C4212 includes a cover part C4212b that can cover at least a part of the storage member (storage tank C4210),
The cover part C4212b includes a contact part (contact surface C4212c) that can come into contact with the game media flowing down the alignment part C4212,
By bringing the game media into contact with the contact portion (contact surface C4212c), the game media can be aligned in the alignment portion C4212.

With such a configuration, by arranging the game media in the alignment part C4212, the game media stored in the storage member (storage tank C4210) can be suitably flowed down to the game media passageway (ball path C4220). .

Further, a predetermined member (binding member C4184) capable of binding each wiring member of the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182, and the third wiring member C4183 is provided,
The predetermined member (binding member C4184) can form a bundled wiring member C4180 by binding the respective wiring members.

With such a configuration, each wiring member can be easily managed by binding each wiring member with a predetermined member (binding member C4184). Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Further, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are provided so as to pass through a predetermined passage portion (rear wall portion C4112) in the base member (lower base member C4100).

With such a configuration, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are preferably provided so as to pass through a predetermined passage portion (rear wall portion C4112) of the base member (lower base member C4100). can be wired to.

Further, the predetermined passage portion (rear wall portion C4112) includes a locking portion C4112a capable of locking at least one of the wirings of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182. It is.

With this configuration, the locking portion C4112a locks the wiring of at least one of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182, so that each wiring member can connect to the passage portion (rear wall portion). C4112).

Further, a guide portion C4320 capable of guiding the passage direction of each wiring member of the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182, and the third wiring member C4183 is provided,
The guide portion C4320 is capable of guiding each of the wiring members guided from the first passage direction (downward) to the guide portion C4320 in the second passage direction (forward).

With this configuration, the guide portion C4320 guides each wiring member from the first passage direction (downward) to the second passage direction (forward), thereby guiding each wiring member from the first passage direction (downward) to the second passage direction (forward). Wiring can be done appropriately. Moreover, the guide portion C4320 can guide each wiring member at once. This facilitates the management and work of each wiring member, unlike the case where the passing direction of each wiring member is changed individually. Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Further, the guide section C4320 includes a converting section (lower converting section C4323) capable of converting the passing direction of each wiring member,
The passage direction of each of the wiring members can be changed when a part of each wiring member comes into contact with or comes close to the conversion part (lower conversion part C4323).

With such a configuration, each wiring member can be suitably wired by converting the passing direction of each wiring member using the converter (lower converter C4323).

Further, a predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230) through which the game medium can pass when a predetermined condition (for example, the condition that the upper tray 51 is full) is satisfied,
The predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway C4230) is provided near the guide portion C4320,
The guide section C4320 includes a specific section (third wall section C4326) that can prevent each of the wiring members guided by the guide section C4320 from coming into contact with the predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway C4230). ).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress interference (abutment) between each wiring member and the predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway C4230) provided in the vicinity of the guide portion C4320. Thereby, the predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway C4230), which is a member through which game media can pass, can be placed at a suitable position near the guide portion C4320.

Further, the base member (lower base member C4100) includes a predetermined space (accommodation space C4150) formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front,
At least one of the guide portion C4320 and a part of the predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway C4230) is arranged in the predetermined space (accommodation space C4150).

With such a configuration, the guide portion C4320 and the predetermined game medium passageway (game ball passageway) are provided in a predetermined space of the base member (lower base member C4100) through which the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 pass. C4230), each member can be suitably arranged.

Further, a plurality of the locking portions C4112a are provided in the predetermined passage portion (rear wall portion C4112).

With such a configuration, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 can be more effectively locked by the plurality of locking portions C4112a.

Further, the converting section includes:
a first conversion unit (upper conversion unit C4322) capable of converting the passage direction of each wiring member from the third passage direction (front) to the first passage direction (downward);
a second converting unit (lower converting unit C4323) capable of converting the passing direction of each wiring member from the first passing direction (downward) to the second passing direction (forward);
It is equipped with the following.

With this configuration, the first converter (upper converter C4322) and the second converter (lower converter C4323) can convert the passing direction of each wiring member in two stages, Each wiring member can be wired more suitably.

Note that the lower base member C4100 is one form of a base member.
Further, the rear wall portion C4112 is one form of a passage portion.
Moreover, the binding member C4184 is one form of a predetermined member.
Moreover, the accommodation space C4150 is one form of a predetermined space.
Moreover, the storage tank C4210 is one form of a storage member.
Further, the contact surface C4212c is one form of a contact portion.
Further, the ball passage C4220 is one form of a game medium passageway.
Further, the game ball passage C4230 is one form of a predetermined game medium passage.
Further, the upper converter C4322 is one form of a converter, a first converter.
Further, the lower converter C4323 is one form of a converter or a second converter.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the guide part C4320 and the cover part C4330 were provided so as to be swingable with respect to the guide case part C4310, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the guide part C4320 and the cover part C4330 may be provided so as not to be able to swing relative to the guide case part C4310.

In addition, in this embodiment, a binding wiring member C4180 that connects the substrates (first substrate C4160 and second substrate C4170) provided on the lower base member C4100 of the base door C4000 and the substrate on the glass door 4 side, Although an example in which guidance is provided by the wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320) has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320) can guide the bundled wiring member C4180 that connects various boards.

Further, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the wire bundle member C4180 is guided by the wire guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, each wiring that is not bound by the binding member C4184 may be guided by the wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320).

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the guide section C4320 is provided with an upper converting section C4322 and a lower converting section C4323 as converting sections, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the lower conversion section C4323 may be provided as the conversion section.

Further, the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 (each wiring member) shown in this embodiment is an example, and the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 (each wiring member) is limited to that shown in this embodiment. do not have.

Further, the shape of the guide portion C4320 shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and the shape of the guide portion C4320 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment.

Further, in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration of the upper unit C4400 is significantly different from the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines. The upper unit C4400 will be described below using FIGS. 351 to 363.

The upper unit C4400 shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 constitutes the decoration of the gaming machine. The upper unit C4400 emits light by executing predetermined light emission control, and can perform a predetermined light emission effect for the player. Further, the upper unit C4400 can generate sound by executing control regarding predetermined sound.

The upper unit C4400 is provided above the glass door 4 that constitutes the front part of the gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 351. The upper unit C4400 is arranged so as to protrude toward the front side of the glass door 4 (gaming machine). The upper unit C4400 includes a speaker section C4410, a top cover C4420, a side cover C4430, a lower cover C4440, an upper decorative section C4450, and a decorative unit C4500.

The speaker section C4410 shown in FIG. 352 generates sound when control regarding predetermined sound is performed. The speaker unit C4410 can perform, for example, audio announcements, presentations, error notifications, and the like. The speaker section C4410 is provided at the top of the glass door 4.

The top cover C4420 covers the speaker section C4410 and the rear part of the decoration unit C4500, which will be described later, from above.

The side cover C4430 shown in FIGS. 351 to 354 covers the speaker section C4410 and the rear part of a decoration unit C4500 (described later) from the side (see FIG. 354). The side covers C4430 are provided on both left and right sides. By emitting light through predetermined light emission control, the side cover C4430 can perform, for example, an announcement or presentation using light. The side cover C4430 includes a light emitting substrate having an appropriate light emitting means and a lens that can transmit light from the light emitting means.

A lower cover C4440 shown in FIG. 353 covers the speaker section C4410 and the rear part of a decoration unit C4500, which will be described later, from below. The lower cover C4440 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes forward. The lower cover C4440 includes an attention display section C4441.

The warning display section C4441 is for prompting a predetermined warning to the player. The attention display section C4441 is provided at a position that is visible to the player. Specifically, the attention display portion C4441 is provided at the lower end of the center portion in the left-right direction of the lower cover C4440. In the attention display section C4441, a predetermined attention display is written on the surface facing diagonally downward. As the warning display, for example, a warning such as "Be careful above your head" may be used to warn against the player hitting his head on the upper unit C4400 protruding to the front side. Note that the display for calling attention is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and various kinds of calling attention can be adopted.

The upper decoration part C4450 shown in FIGS. 351 and 352 constitutes the decoration of the upper part of the upper unit C4400. The upper decorative portion C4450 is provided in front of the top cover C4420. The upper decoration part C4450 can perform, for example, an announcement using light or an effect by emitting light according to predetermined light emission control. The upper decorative portion C4450 includes a light emitting substrate (second substrate C4530 described later) having an appropriate light emitting means and a lens capable of transmitting light from the light emitting means. The upper decoration part C4450 includes a first character decoration part C4451, a second character decoration part C4452, and a center decoration part C4453.

The first character decoration part C4451 is decorated to resemble a predetermined character. The first character decoration part C4451 constitutes the left part of the upper decoration part C4450.

The second character decoration part C4452 is decorated to resemble a predetermined character different from the first character decoration part C4451. The second character decoration part C4452 constitutes the right part of the upper decoration part C4450.

The central decoration part C4453 is arranged between the first character decoration part C4451 and the second character decoration part C4452. The central decoration part C4453 is decorated with information (for example, text information) associated with the decoration of the first character decoration part C4451 and the decoration of the second character decoration part C4452.

The decoration unit C4500 shown in FIGS. 351, 352, 356, and 357 is capable of performing a predetermined light-emitting effect for the player. The decoration unit C4500 can emit a decoration imitating a predetermined logo (hereinafter referred to as "logo decoration"). As the above-mentioned logo, it is possible to adopt a logo indicating a title or the like related to the performance. The decoration unit C4500 emits light according to predetermined light emission control, thereby making it possible to perform, for example, an announcement using light or an effect. The decoration unit C4500 is formed in a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 351, the decoration unit C4500 is arranged at the center of the upper unit C4400 (below the upper decoration part C4450) when viewed from the front. Decoration unit C4500 is arranged in front of speaker section C4410.

The decoration unit C4500 includes a frame member C4510, a first substrate C4520, a second substrate C4530, a reflection section C4540, a lower lamp section C4550, a diffusion section C4560, and a decoration section C4570.

The frame member C4510 shown in FIGS. 355, 357 to 360(a) constitutes the rear part of the decoration unit C4500. As shown in FIG. 358, the frame member C4510 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens toward the front. The frame member C4510 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the front. A first substrate C4520, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the frame member C4510 (see FIG. 359). The frame member C4510 includes an opening C4511, a wiring passage path C4512, a recess C4514, and an upper surface C4515.

The opening C4511 shown in FIGS. 355, 358 to 360(a) is into which a connector C4523 of a first board C4520, which will be described later, is inserted. The opening C4511 is formed to penetrate the front surface of the frame member C4510 in the front-rear direction.

A plurality of openings C4511 (six in the illustrated example) are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of connectors C4523, which will be described later. The plurality of openings C4511 include a first opening C4511a, a second opening C4511b, a third opening C4511c, a fourth opening C4511d, a fifth opening C4511e, and a sixth opening C4511f. included.

As shown in FIGS. 355 and 360(a), the first opening C4511a is provided at the upper right part of the frame member C4510. The second opening C4511b is provided at the upper left part of the frame member C4510. The third opening C4511c is provided at the lower right portion of the frame member C4510. The fourth opening C4511d is provided in the lower part of the frame member C4510 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. The fifth opening C4511e is provided at the lower left portion of the frame member C4510. The sixth opening C4511f is provided to the right of the fifth opening C4511e in the lower part of the frame member C4510.

A wiring passage path C4512 shown in FIG. 355 is an area (route) through which a wiring member C4524, which will be described later, is connected to a connector C4523 inserted into an opening C4511. The wiring passage path C4512 is provided on the rear surface of the frame member C4510. A plurality of wiring passage paths C4512 are provided in the opening C4511 at positions corresponding to the first opening C4511a to the fifth opening C4511e (five in the illustrated example). The wire passing route C4512 includes a first wire passing route C4512a, a second wire passing route C4512b, a third wire passing route C4512c, a fourth wire passing route C4512d, and a fifth wire passing route C4512e.

The first wiring passage path C4512a is provided to the left of the first opening C4511a. The second wiring passage path C4512b is provided to the right of the second opening C4511b. The third wiring passage path C4512c is provided to the left of the third opening C4511c. The fourth wiring passage path C4512d is provided to the left of the fourth opening C4511d. The fifth wiring passage path C4512e is provided to the right of the fifth opening C4511e. The wiring passage path C4512 includes a locking portion C4513.

The locking portion C4513 shown in FIGS. 354, 355, and 359 locks the wiring member C4524. The locking portion C4513 is formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the frame member C4510. The locking portion C4513 is formed in a hook shape that opens in the left-right direction and upward. The locking portions C4513 are provided at intermediate portions in the left-right direction of the first wiring passage route C4512a to the fifth wiring passage route C4512e, respectively. As shown in FIG. 355, by hooking (sandwiching) the wiring member C4524 passing in the left-right direction on the locking portion C4513, the wiring member C4524 can be locked.

A recessed portion C4514 shown in FIG. 360(a) is a portion recessed rearward on the front surface of the frame member C4510. A tip portion (rear end portion) of a protruding portion C4541c of a reflecting portion C4540, which will be described later, is inserted into the recessed portion C4514. A hole is formed at the rear end of the concave portion C4514, into which a suitable screw used for fixing the frame member C4510 and the reflective portion C4540 is inserted. A plurality of recesses C4514 (four in the illustrated example) are formed at intervals in the left-right direction in the middle of the frame member C4510 in the vertical direction.

The upper surface portion C4515 shown in FIGS. 356 and 358 is a portion that constitutes the upper surface of the frame member C4510. A second substrate C4530, which will be described later, is provided on the upper surface portion C4515. The upper surface portion C4515 includes a first claw portion C4515a and a second claw portion C4515b.

The first claw portion C4515a locks the front end portion of the second board C4530. The first claw portion C4515a is formed to protrude upward from the front end portion of the upper surface portion C4515. The first claw portion C4515a is formed in a shape recessed forward so as to be able to lock the front end portion of the second substrate C4530. A plurality of first claw portions C4515a (four in the illustrated example) are formed in the left-right direction.

The second claw portion C4515b locks the rear end portion of the second board C4530. The second claw portion C4515b is formed to protrude upward from the rear end portion of the upper surface portion C4515. The second claw portion C4515b is formed in a shape concave toward the rear so as to be able to lock the rear end portion of the second substrate C4530. A plurality of first claw portions C4515a (two in the illustrated example) are formed in the left-right direction.

The first substrate C4520 shown in FIGS. 359 and 360(b) is a substrate used for light emission of the decoration unit C4500. Predetermined electronic components (for example, a light emitting element C4521, etc.) are mounted on the first substrate C4520. The first substrate C4520 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The first substrate C4520 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 359, the first substrate C4520 is attached to the frame member C4510 and the reflective section C4540, so as to be sandwiched between the frame member C4510 and the reflective section C4540, which will be described later. The first board C4520 includes a light emitting element C4521, an insertion hole C4522, a connector C4523, and a wiring member C4524.

The light emitting element C4521 shown in FIG. 360(b) emits light as a light source. The light emitting element C4521 is provided on the front surface of the first substrate C4520. A plurality of light emitting elements C4521 are provided at positions corresponding to the logo decoration of the decoration unit C4500. As the light emitting element C4521, for example, an LED or the like can be used.

The insertion hole portion C4522 is a hole (hole) that penetrates the first substrate C4520 in the thickness direction (front-back direction). A protruding portion C4541c of a reflecting portion C4540, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole C4522. A plurality of insertion holes C4522 (four in the illustrated example) are formed at intervals in the left-right direction in the middle of the first substrate C4520 in the vertical direction.

The connector C4523 shown in FIGS. 355 and 359 connects the first board C4520 and the wiring member C4524. The connector C4523 is provided on the rear surface of the first board C4520. A plurality of connectors C4523 (six in the illustrated example) are provided. As shown in FIG. 355, with the first board C4520 attached to the frame member C4510, the plurality of connectors C4523 are inserted into the opening C4511. The plurality of connectors C4523 include a first connector C4523a, a second connector C4523b, a third connector C4523c, a fourth connector C4523d, a fifth connector C4523e, and a sixth connector C4523f.

The first connector C4523a is provided on the upper right side of the first board C4520. The second connector C4523b is provided at the upper left of the first board C4520. The third connector C4523c is provided at the lower right portion of the first board C4520. The fourth connector C4523d is provided at approximately the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the first board C4520. The fifth connector C4523e is provided at the lower left of the first board C4520. The sixth connector C4523f is provided to the right of the fifth connector C4523e at the bottom of the first board C4520.

A wiring member C4524 shown in FIG. 355 connects the first board C4520 (connector C4523) to another board. The wiring member C4524 is wired passing through the wiring passage path C4512 of the frame member C4510. A plurality of wiring members C4524 (six in the illustrated example) are provided. The plurality of wiring members C4524 include a first wiring member C4524a, a second wiring member C4524b, a third wiring member C4524c, a fourth wiring member C4524d, a fifth wiring member C4524e, and a sixth wiring member C4524f. included.

The first wiring member C4524a has one end connected to the first connector C4523a. The first wiring member C4524a passes through the first wiring passage route C4512a in the left-right direction. The first wiring member C4524a is locked by a locking portion C4513. The other end of the first wiring member C4524a is connected to the substrate of the upper decorative part C4450.

The second wiring member C4524b has one end connected to the second connector C4523b. The second wiring member C4524b passes through the second wiring passage route C4512b in the left-right direction. The second wiring member C4524b is locked by a locking portion C4513. The other end of the second wiring member C4524b is connected to a second board C4530 (connector C4532), which will be described later.

The third wiring member C4524c has one end connected to the third connector C4523c. The third wiring member C4524c passes through the third wiring passage route C4512c in the left-right direction. The third wiring member C4524c is locked by a locking portion C4513. The other end of the third wiring member C4524c is connected to a substrate (not shown) of the right side cover C4430.

The fourth wiring member C4524d has one end connected to the fourth connector C4523d. The fourth wiring member C4524d passes through the fourth wiring passage route C4512d in the left-right direction. The fourth wiring member C4524d is locked by a locking portion C4513. The other end of the fourth wiring member C4524d is connected to an appropriate relay board (not shown).

The fifth wiring member C4524e has one end connected to the fifth connector C4523e. The fifth wiring member C4524e passes through the fifth wiring passage route C4512e in the left-right direction. The fifth wiring member C4524e is locked by a locking portion C4513. The other end of the fifth wiring member C4524e is connected to a substrate (not shown) of the left side cover C4430.

The sixth wiring member C4524f has one end connected to the sixth connector C4523f. The other end of the sixth wiring member C4524f is connected to a substrate (not shown) of a lower lamp section C4550, which will be described later.

A second substrate C4530 shown in FIG. 358 is a substrate used for emitting light from the upper decorative portion C4450. Predetermined electronic components are mounted on the second board C4530. The second substrate C4530 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface generally facing in the vertical direction. The second substrate C4530 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from above. The second board C4530 is attached to the top surface C4515 by having its front end and rear end engaged with the first claw C4515a and the second claw C4515b. The second board C4530 includes a light emitting element C4531 and a connector C4532.

The light emitting element C4531 emits light as a light source. The light emitting element C4531 is provided on the upper surface of the second substrate C4530. For example, an LED or the like can be used as the light emitting element C4531.

The connector C4532 connects the second board C4530 and the wiring member C4524 (second wiring member C4524b). The connector C4532 is provided on the lower surface of the second board C4530. The connector C4532 is arranged so as to be located on the rear surface of the frame member C4510 with the second board C4530 attached to the upper surface portion C4515.

The reflecting section C4540 shown in FIGS. 358, 359, 360(c), and 361 is capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 of the first substrate C4520 toward the diffusion section C4560 (to be described later). It is something. The reflective section C4540 is arranged in front of the first substrate C4520 and the frame member C4510. The reflecting section C4540 includes a base section C4541, a first lens holding section C4542, and a second lens holding section C4549.

The base portion C4541 constitutes the rear portion of the reflective portion C4540. The base portion C4541 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The base portion C4541 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 359, a first board C4520 and a frame member C4510 are attached to the rear surface of the base part C4541. The base portion C4541 includes a first opening C4541a, a second opening C4541b, and a protrusion C4541c.

The first opening C4541a shown in FIG. 360(c) is for irradiating light from the light emitting element C4521 to a first lens holding part C4542, which will be described later. The first opening C4541a is formed to penetrate the base portion C4541 back and forth. The first opening C4541a is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of first openings C4541a are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of light emitting elements C4521 with the first substrate C4520 attached to the base portion C4541.

The second opening C4541b is for irradiating light from the light emitting element C4521 to a second lens holding part C4549, which will be described later. The second opening C4541b is formed to penetrate the base portion C4541 back and forth. The second opening C4541b is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The protruding portion C4541c shown in FIG. 359 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base portion C4541. The protruding portion C4541c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. A screw hole used for fixing the frame member C4510 and the reflecting portion C4540 is formed in the tip end surface of the protruding portion C4541c. A plurality of protrusions C4541c (four in the illustrated example) are formed at intervals in the left-right direction in the middle of the base part C4541 in the vertical direction.

The protrusion C4541c is inserted into the insertion hole C4522 of the first board C4520. Thereby, the first substrate C4520 can be positioned with respect to the base part C4541 (reflection part C4540). Further, the rear end portion of the protrusion C4541c is inserted into the recess C4514 of the frame member C4510.

The first lens holding part C4542 shown in FIGS. 360(c) and 361 holds a diffusing part C4560, which will be described later. The first lens holding portion C4542 is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the base portion C4541. The first lens holding portion C4542 is formed in a shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the first lens holding portion C4542 is formed so that the diffusing portion C4560 can be fitted therein. The first lens holding part C4542 has a wall that partitions a plurality of spaces (five in the illustrated example) that are generally arranged in the left-right direction. The number and shape of the plurality of spaces are set to correspond to the logo decoration of the decoration unit C4500.

Each space of the first lens holding portion C4542 is irradiated with light from the light emitting element C4521 through the first opening C4541a. The first lens holding portion C4542 includes a first portion C4543, a second portion C4544, a third portion C4545, a fourth portion C4546, a fifth portion C4547, and an insertion hole portion C4548.

The first portion C4543 partitions the leftmost space among the plurality of spaces. The first portion C4543 holds a first diffusion portion C4561, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the first portion C4543 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the shape of the first diffusion portion C4561 when viewed from the front.

The second portion C4544 partitions the space to the right of the first portion C4543. The second portion C4544 holds a second diffusion portion C4562, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the second portion C4544 is formed into a shape that corresponds to the shape of the second diffusion portion C4562 when viewed from the front.

The third portion C4545 partitions a space on the right side (center space) of the second portion C4544. The third portion C4545 holds a third diffusion portion C4563, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the third portion C4545 is formed into a shape that corresponds to the shape of the third diffusion portion C4563 when viewed from the front.

The fourth portion C4546 partitions the space to the right of the third portion C4545. The fourth portion C4546 holds a fourth diffusion portion C4564, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the fourth portion C4546 is formed into a shape that corresponds to the shape of the fourth diffusion portion C4564 when viewed from the front.

The fifth portion C4547 partitions the space to the right of the fourth portion C4546. The fifth portion C4547 holds a fifth diffusion portion C4565, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the fifth portion C4547 is formed into a shape that corresponds to the shape of the fifth diffusion portion C4565 when viewed from the front.

The insertion hole portion C4548 shown in FIG. 361 is into which the insertion portion C4567 of the diffusion portion C4560 described later is inserted. The insertion hole C4548 is formed to vertically penetrate the upper part of the front end (edge of the opening) of the first lens holding part C4542. The dimensions (front-back dimensions and left-right dimensions) of the insertion hole C4548 are formed to correspond to the dimensions of the insertion hole C4567.

In this embodiment, insertion hole portions C4548 are provided in the first portion C4543, the second portion C4544, and the third portion C4545, respectively. Note that the location where the insertion hole portion C4548 is provided is not limited to the example described above. For example, the insertion hole portion C4548 may be formed in all of the first portion C4543 to the fifth portion C4547.

The second lens holding part C4549 holds the upper decorative lens C4583 of the first decorative part C4580, which will be described later. The second lens holding part C4549 is provided on the front surface of the base part C4541, above and to the right of the first lens holding part C4542. The second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the second lens holding portion C4549 is formed so that an upper decorative lens C4583, which will be described later, can be fitted therein. The front end portion (edge of the opening) of the second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the shape of the upper decorative lens C4583 when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 357 and 360(c)). The space within the second lens holding portion C4549 is irradiated with light from the light emitting element C4521 through the second opening C4541b.

The lower lamp part C4550 shown in FIGS. 358 and 360(c) irradiates light to a lower decorative lens C4584 of a first decorative part C4580, which will be described later. The lower lamp section C4550 is provided below the reflection section C4540. The lower lamp section C4550 includes a light emitting board having appropriate light emitting means. The lower lamp portion C4550 is formed so as to be able to emit light through a substantially diamond-shaped opening opening toward the front. A plurality of openings (five in the illustrated example) are formed in the left-right direction.

The diffusion part C4560 shown in FIGS. 358, 360(d), and 361 is a part ( inner lens). The diffusion portion C4560 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The diffusing section C4560 is held by the front end of the first lens holding section C4542 of the reflecting section C4540. The diffusing section C4560 is divided into a plurality of (five) members (areas) corresponding to the first section C4543 to the fifth section C4547 of the first lens holding section C4542.

Diffusion part C4560 is formed of a material having translucency. Almost the entire diffusion section C4560 is processed to be able to diffuse the light from the light emitting element C4521 (enable to expand the light irradiation range). The diffusion portion C4560 is formed in a shape corresponding to the logo decoration (logo decoration lens portion C4581) of the decoration unit C4500. The diffusion section C4560 includes a first diffusion section C4561, a second diffusion section C4562, a third diffusion section C4563, a fourth diffusion section C4564, a fifth diffusion section C4565, a diffusion opening section C4566, and an insertion section C4567. Be equipped.

The first diffusing portion C4561 is a portion held at the front end portion of the first portion C4543 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The first diffusion section C4561 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the first portion C4543.

The second diffusing portion C4562 is a portion held at the front end portion of the second portion C4544 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The second diffusion section C4562 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the second section C4544.

The third diffusing portion C4563 is a portion held at the front end portion of the third portion C4545 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The third diffusion section C4563 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the third section C4545.

The fourth diffusing portion C4564 is a portion held at the front end of the fourth portion C4546 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The fourth diffusion section C4564 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the fourth section C4546.

The fifth diffusion part C4565 is a part held at the front end of the fifth part C4547 of the first lens holding part C4542. The fifth diffusion portion C4565 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the fifth portion C4547.

The diffusion opening C4566 penetrates the diffusion portion C4560 in the thickness direction (front-back direction). The diffusion opening C4566 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A rear end portion of a recess C4582a of a first decorative portion C4580, which will be described later, is inserted into the diffusion opening C4566. The diffusion portion C4560 is not processed to be able to diffuse the light from the light emitting element C4521 in the portion where the diffusion opening C4566 is formed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (six in the illustrated example) diffusion openings C4566 are provided in the first diffusion section C4561, the second diffusion section C4562, the fourth diffusion section C4564, and the fifth diffusion section C4565. There is. The diffusion openings C4566 are provided at different positions for each region.

More specifically, in the first diffusion section C4561, a diffusion opening C4566 is formed approximately at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the second diffusion section C4562, a diffusion opening C4566 is formed at an upper end portion at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction and a left end portion at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. In the fourth diffusion section C4564, diffusion openings C4566 are formed at both left and right ends of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. In the fifth diffusion portion C4565, a diffusion opening C4566 is formed at the lower portion of the substantially central portion in the left-right direction. Note that the location where the diffusion opening C4566 is provided is not limited to the example described above. For example, the diffusion opening C4566 may be formed in all of the first diffusion section C4561 to the fifth diffusion section C4565.

The insertion portion C4567 is a portion that is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole C4548 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The insertion portion C4567 projects upward at the upper end of the diffusion portion C4560. The insertion portion C4567 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. By inserting the insertion portion C4567 into the insertion hole C4548, the position of the diffusion portion C4560 relative to the first lens holding portion C4542 can be determined.

In this embodiment, the insertion portion C4567 is provided in each of the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, and the third diffusion portion C4563. Note that the location where the insertion portion C4567 is provided is not limited to the example described above. For example, the insertion portion C4567 may be provided in all of the first diffusion portion C4561 to the fifth diffusion portion C4565.

The decorative portion C4570 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363 allows the player to visually recognize the logo decoration. Decorative part C4570 is provided in front of diffusion part C4560. The decoration part C4570 covers other members constituting the decoration unit C4500 from the front. The decoration part C4570 is formed to be able to transmit the light diffused by the diffusion part C4560. The decorative portion C4570 includes a first decorative portion C4580, an upper decorative lens C4583, a lower decorative lens C4584, and a second decorative portion C4590.

The first decorative portion C4580 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(a) can transmit the light diffused by the diffusing portion C4560. The first decorative portion C4580 is made of a transparent material. The first decorative portion C4580 includes a logo decorative lens portion C4581 and a logo peripheral portion C4582.

The logo decoration lens portion C4581 is a lens shaped like a logo decoration. The logo decoration lens section C4581 transmits the light diffused by the diffusion section C4560. The logo decorative lens portion C4581 is formed to protrude forward from a logo peripheral portion C4582, which will be described later.

The logo peripheral portion C4582 is a portion around the logo decorative lens portion C4581. The logo peripheral portion C4582 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The logo peripheral portion C4582 is formed to extend in the vertical and horizontal directions from the rear end of the logo decorative lens portion C4581. The logo peripheral portion C4582 includes a recessed portion C4582a.

The concave portion C4582a shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(a) is a portion formed to be recessed rearward on the front surface of the logo peripheral portion C4582 and protrude rearward on the rear surface. The recessed portion C4582a is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of recesses C4582a (six in the illustrated example) are provided. A rear end portion of a protruding portion C4594 of a second decorative portion C4590, which will be described later, is inserted into the recessed portion C4582a. A hole is formed in the rear end of the recess C4582a, into which a suitable screw used for fixing the first decorative part C4580 and the second decorative part C4590 is inserted. Further, the rear end portion of the recess C4582a is inserted into the diffusion opening C4566 of the diffusion portion C4560.

The upper decorative lens C4583 can transmit the light irradiated onto the second lens holding portion C4549. The upper decorative lens C4583 is held at the front end of the second lens holding part C4549. The upper decorative lens C4583 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The lower decorative lens C4584 can transmit the light emitted from the lower lamp part C4550. The lower decorative lens C4584 is held at the front end of the lower lamp part C4550. The lower decorative lens C4584 is formed in a shape in which a plurality of substantially diamond-shaped members (five in the illustrated example) are arranged in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

The second decorative portion C4590 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(b) is a portion of the decorative unit C4500 that transmits light toward the player (a logo decorative lens portion C4581, an upper decorative lens C4583, and a lower decorative lens C4584). ) is exposed and covers other members from the front.

The second decorative part C4590 is arranged in front of the first decorative part C4580. The second decorative portion C4590 is formed from a material that does not have translucency. In this way, by making the second decorative portion C4590 non-transparent, it is possible to emit light so as to highlight the shapes of the logo decorative lens portion C4581, the upper decorative lens C4583, and the lower decorative lens C4584. can. The second decorative part C4590 is fixed to the front end of the reflective part C4540 using appropriate screws (see FIG. 357). The second decorative portion C4590 includes a logo opening C4591, an upper decorative opening C4592, a lower decorative opening C4593, and a protrusion C4594.

The logo opening C4591 is a portion that exposes the logo decorative lens portion C4581. The logo opening C4591 opens the second decorative portion C4590 in the front-rear direction. The logo opening C4591 is formed in a shape corresponding to the logo decoration lens portion C4581 (logo decoration).

The upper decorative opening C4592 is a portion that exposes the upper decorative lens C4583. The upper decoration opening C4592 opens the second decoration part C4590 in the front-rear direction. The upper decoration opening C4592 is provided above the logo opening C4591. The upper decorative opening C4592 is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper decorative lens C4583.

The lower decorative opening C4593 is a portion that exposes the lower decorative lens C4584. The lower decoration opening C4593 opens the second decoration part C4590 in the front-rear direction. The lower decorative opening C4593 is provided below the logo opening C4591. The upper decorative opening C4592 is formed in a shape corresponding to the lower decorative lens C4584.

The protruding portion C4594 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the second decorative portion C4590. The protrusion C4594 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. A plurality of (six in the illustrated example) protrusions C4594 are provided. A screw hole used for fixing to the first decorative part C4580 is formed in the rear end surface of the protruding part C4594. The rear end of the protruding portion C4594 is inserted into the recess C4582a of the first decorative portion C4580 (logo peripheral portion C4582). Thereby, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be positioned.

In this way, instead of the logo decorative lens part C4581, which is the part that transmits light toward the player, the logo peripheral part C4582 and the second decorative part C4590 are fixed and each member is assembled. By doing so, it is possible to avoid spoiling the decorativeness by providing the fixing part in the first decorative part C4580. Thereby, the first decoration part C4580 and the second decoration part C4590 can be fixed to each other without impairing the decorativeness.

Below, a method of assembling the decoration unit C4500 as described above will be explained.

First, as shown in FIG. 359, the protruding portion C4541c of the reflecting portion C4540 is inserted into the insertion hole C4522 of the first substrate C4520. Thereby, the placement position of the first substrate C4520 with respect to the reflection section C4540 can be determined.

Next, the rear end portion of the protruding portion C4541c of the reflecting portion C4540 is inserted into the recessed portion C4514 of the frame member C4510. In this state, the frame member C4510, the first substrate C4520, and the reflective part C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using the hole provided in the recess C4514 and the screw hole in the protrusion C4541c. Further, in this state, as shown in FIG. 355, the connector C4523 of the first board C4520 is exposed on the rear surface of the frame member C4510 through the opening C4511 of the frame member C4510. This allows wiring using the wiring member C4524 on the rear surface of the frame member C4510.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361, a diffusing section C4560 is attached to the front end of the first lens holding section C4542 of the reflecting section C4540. At this time, the insertion part C4567 of the diffusing part C4560 (first diffusing part C4561, second diffusing part C4562, and third diffusing part C4563) is inserted into the first lens holding part C4542 (first part C4543). , the second portion C4544, and the third portion C4545), the diffusion portion C4560 is attached by being inserted into (engaged with) the insertion hole portion C4548. Thereby, the arrangement position of the diffusing section C4560 can be determined with respect to the reflecting section C4540 (first lens holding section C4542). In this state, the diffusion section C4560 and the reflection section C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using appropriate screws.

According to this embodiment, the frame member C4510, the first substrate C4520, the reflection section C4540, and the diffusion section C4560 can be positioned and fixed in this manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 358, by locking the second board C4530 to the first claw part C4515a and the second claw part C4515b of the frame member C4510, the second board C4530 is attached to the upper surface part C4515 of the frame member C4510. Attach the second board C4530.

Next, as shown in FIG. 357, the upper decorative lens C4583 is attached to the second lens holding part C4549 of the reflecting part C4540. Further, a lower decorative lens C4584 is attached to the lower lamp part C4550.

Next, as shown in FIG. 362, the protrusion C4594 of the second decorative part C4590 is inserted into the recess C4582a of the first decorative part C4580 (logo peripheral part C4582). Thereby, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be positioned. In this state, the first decorative part C4580 and the second decorative part C4590 can be fixed to each other by screwing using the hole provided in the recessed part C4582a and the screw hole of the protruding part C4594.

Next, the rear end portion of the recess C4582a of the first decorative portion C4580 is inserted into the diffusion opening C4566 of the diffusion portion C4560. Thereby, the arrangement positions of the diffuser C4560 (reflector C4540) and the first decorative part C4580 (decorative part C4570) can be determined. In this state, the second decorative portion C4590 and the reflective portion C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using appropriate screws (see FIG. 357).

In this way, the decoration unit C4500 as described above can be assembled.

According to the decoration unit C4500 as described above, it is possible to perform a predetermined light emitting effect for the player by causing the logo decoration lens portion C4581 to emit light. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Moreover, according to the decoration unit C4500, the light irradiated into each space of the first lens holding part C4542 of the reflection part C4540 is diffused by the diffusion part C4560. This allows the logo decoration lens portion C4581 to emit light evenly.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 360(d), the diffusion opening C4566 is connected to each region of the diffusion section C4560 (first diffusion section C4561, second diffusion section C4562, fourth diffusion section C4564). and fifth diffusion portion C4565) are provided at different positions. Thereby, the diffusion opening C4566 can be provided at a position corresponding to the shape of the logo decorative lens portion C4581.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a decoration unit C4500 that is visible to the player and can perform a predetermined light emitting effect for the player,
The decoration unit C4500 is
a light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) having a light emitting element C4521 capable of emitting light;
a diffusion section C4560 capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521;
a reflecting portion C4540 capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521;
A decorative portion C4570 that is visible to the player;
The present invention is characterized by comprising a specific member (frame member C4510) provided on the rear side of the light emitting board (first board C4520).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed for the player to cause the decorative part C4570 to emit light using the light emitting board (first board C4520), the diffusion part C4560, the reflective part C4540, the decorative part C4570, and the specific member (frame member C4510). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the decorative portion C4570 includes a decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) that can transmit the light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560.

With such a configuration, the light diffused by the diffusion part C4560 is transmitted through the decorative transparent part (logo decorative lens part C4581), and the light is emitted through the decorative transparent part (logo decorative lens part C4581). By making the decorative portion C4570 visible to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the decoration unit C4500 includes the reflection section C4540 on the front side of the light emitting element C4521, and the diffusion section C4560 on the front side of the reflection section C4540, and further includes the reflection section C4560 on the front side of the diffusion section C4560. It is provided with a decorative portion C4570.

With such a configuration, the light irradiated from the light emitting element C4521 is reflected by the reflection part C4540, the reflected light is diffused by the diffusion part C4560, and the decorative part C4570 is made easy to emit light by the diffused light. I can do it.

Further, the reflecting section C4540 includes a diffusing section positioning means (insertion hole section C4548) for determining the arrangement position of the diffusing section C4560 when attaching the diffusing section C4560 to the reflecting section C4540,
The diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548) is configured such that a predetermined portion (insertion portion C4567) of the diffusion portion C4560 is engaged with the diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548). The location of the C4560 can be determined.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve workability when attaching the diffusing section C4560 to the reflecting section C4540. The predetermined portion (insertion portion C4567) of the diffusion portion C4560 and the diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548) allow the positioning of the diffusion portion C4560 with respect to the reflection portion C4540 to be determined. Thereby, it is possible to improve workability when attaching the diffusing section C4560 to the reflecting section C4540.

Further, one of the reflective portion C4540 and the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) (in this embodiment, the reflective portion C4540) includes a predetermined protruding portion C4541c that protrudes toward the other side,
The other of the reflective portion C4540 and the light emitting board (first board C4520) (in this embodiment, the light emitting board (first board C4520)) has a predetermined hole (insertion hole C4522) penetrating on one side. ),
When the predetermined protruding portion C4541c is inserted into the predetermined hole portion (insertion hole portion C4522), one of the reflective portion C4540 and the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) (in this embodiment, It is possible to determine the placement position of the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520).

With such a configuration, workability when attaching the light emitting board (first board C4520) can be further improved. That is, since the position of the light emitting board (first board C4520) can be determined by the reflective part C4540, the workability when attaching the light emitting board (first board C4520) can be further improved. can.

Further, the decorative portion C4570 includes a first decorative portion C4580 and a second decorative portion C4590 different from the first decorative portion C4580,
The first decorative part C4580 includes a decorative transparent part (logo decorative lens part C4581) that can transmit the light diffused by the diffusing part C4560,
The second decorative portion C4590 does not include the decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581).

With such a configuration, the decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) can be suitably attached. That is, for example, it is possible to form a part fixed to another member in the second decorative part C4590 that does not include the decorative transparent part (logo decorative lens part C4581), and the decorative transparent part (logo decorative lens part C4581) can be fixed. The decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) can be attached without impairing the decorativeness of the first decorative portion C4580 provided with the logo decoration lens portion C4581).

Further, the light emitting board (first board C4520) includes a connector C4523 to which a wiring member C4524 can be connected,
The specific member (frame member C4510) is provided with a specific opening C4511 at a position corresponding to the connector C4523.

With such a configuration, the light emitting board (first board C4520) and the wiring member C4524 can be suitably connected using the connector C4523.

Further, the diffusion section C4560 includes a first region (first diffusion section C4561, second diffusion section C4562, third diffusion section C4563, fourth diffusion section C4564, fifth diffusion section C4565), a second region different from the first region (first diffusion section C4561, second diffusion section C4562, third diffusion section C4563, fourth diffusion section C4564, fifth diffusion section C4565); including at least
The first region and the second region include a diffusion opening C4566 that is not subjected to a predetermined processing,
The diffusion opening C4566 is provided at different positions in the first region and the second region.

With such a configuration, the diffusion section C4560 can be suitably attached. That is, for example, the diffusion opening C4566 can be used to position the diffusion part C4560 with respect to the decorative part C4570. Furthermore, by providing the diffusion portion C4560 at different positions in the first region and the second region, for example, in the decorative portion C4570, a portion irradiated with light diffused from the first region and a portion irradiated with light diffused from the first region and Even if the shape of the portion to which the light diffused by the second region is irradiated differs, the diffusion opening C4566 can be provided at a position corresponding to each portion of the decorative portion C4570.

Further, the specific member (frame member C4510) has a surface (upper surface portion C4515) different from the surface to which the light emitting board (first board C4520) is attached, which is different from the light emitting board (first board C4520). A board (second board C4530) is attached thereto.

With such a configuration, the specific member (frame member C4510) can be used for attaching another board different from the light emitting board (first board C4520) of the decoration unit C4500.

Further, the predetermined wiring member C4524 is configured to be wired by passing through a predetermined wiring passage route C4512 in the specific member (frame member C4510),
The predetermined wiring passage path C4512 includes a locking portion C4513 that can lock the predetermined wiring member C4524.

With such a configuration, the wiring member C4524 can be suitably wired to the specific member (frame member C4510).

Further, the decoration unit C4500 is arranged so as to protrude toward the front side of the gaming machine, and has a warning display (warning display section C4441) that calls for a predetermined warning at a position that is visible to the player. It is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player to be careful about hitting his or her head on the decoration unit C4500 that protrudes forward.

Note that the frame member C4510 is one form of a specific member.
Further, the first substrate C4520 is one form of a light emitting substrate.
Further, the insertion hole portion C4548 is a form of diffusion portion positioning means.
Moreover, the insertion part C4567 is one form of a predetermined part.
Further, the insertion hole C4522 is one form of a hole.
Further, the second substrate C4530 is a type of substrate different from the light emitting substrate.
Further, the attention display section C4441 is a form of attention display.
Further, the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, the third diffusion portion C4563, the fourth diffusion portion C4564, and the fifth diffusion portion C4565 are one form of the first region and the second region. It is.
Further, the logo decorative lens portion C4581 is one form of a decorative transparent portion.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the diffusion section C4560 is divided into a plurality of (5 Although the present invention is divided into two members and each member is a different region (one form of the first region and the second region), the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, as in a modification schematically shown in FIG. 364, one side in the left-right direction of the diffusion portion C4560 formed as one member may be a first region C4560A, and the other side may be a second region C4560B. In the illustrated example, the left side of the center line in the left-right direction of the diffusion portion C4560 is a first area C4560A, and the right side is a second area C4560B.

Also in the above modification, the diffusion openings C4566 are provided at different positions for each region. More specifically, in the first region C4560A, the diffusion opening C4566 is provided at the upper left, and in the second region C4560B, the diffusion opening C4566 is provided at the lower right.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reflection part C4540 (first lens holding part C4542) is provided with a diffusion part positioning means (insertion hole part C4548), and the diffusion part C4560 is provided with a predetermined part (insertion part C4567). However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the reflection section C4540 may be provided with an insertion section as a diffusion section positioning means, and the diffusion section C4560 may be provided with an insertion hole section as a predetermined section.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the second substrate C4530 is a light emitting substrate including a light emitting element C4531, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. As the second board C4530, various boards used in gaming machines can be employed. For example, the second board C4530 may be a relay board for wiring the second wiring member C4524b to the first board C4520. When a relay board is employed, the relay board can be placed closer to the first board C4520, so wiring of the wiring members can be performed more suitably.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific member on which the light emitting board (first board C4520) is provided is the frame member C4510 that constitutes the rear part of the decoration unit C4500, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. . As the specific member, various members on which a light emitting substrate can be provided can be employed.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the reflective part C4540 is provided with the protruding part C4541c and the first substrate C4520 is provided with a predetermined hole part (insertion hole part C4522), but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. . For example, a predetermined hole may be provided in the reflective portion C4540, and a protrusion may be provided in the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520). In this way, the structure is not such that the member on the side having the protruding portion (the reflective portion C4540) determines the arrangement position of the member on the side having the hole (the first substrate C4520), but the opposite relationship (i.e., the hole A configuration may also be adopted in which the member on the side having the protrusion determines the placement position of the member on the side having the protrusion. Further, the protruding portion and the hole portion may be included in each of the reflecting portion C4540 and the first substrate C4520.

Further, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the decoration unit C4500 was provided at the upper part of the gaming machine (upper unit C4400), but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The decoration unit C4500 can be installed at various positions in the gaming machine.

Further, in this embodiment, the decoration unit C4500 is provided in the upper part of the glass door 4 (upper unit C4400), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. The decoration unit C4500 includes decorations provided on the frame of the glass door 4 of the gaming machine, devices that allow operations related to production (performance button device), accessories installed on the game board (for example, movable accessories), etc. It can be used as a variety of decorations.

[10. 10th pachinko game machine]
Below, a tenth pachinko gaming machine of the present invention will be explained. It should be noted that the same or similar components as those related to the first to ninth pachinko gaming machines will be given the same names or the same symbols, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The tenth pachinko game machine differs greatly from the first to ninth pachinko game machines in that it has a glass door C4 that is different from the glass door 4 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Below, the configuration of the glass door C4 will be explained using FIGS. 365 to 374. Note that in the above drawings, illustrations of members are appropriately omitted for convenience of explanation. For example, in FIG. 372, illustration of the base portion C4610 is omitted.

The glass door C4 has a transparent protective glass (see FIG. 2) attached through a glass frame (not shown). The glass door C4 mainly includes a frame C4600, an upper unit C4700, a substrate unit C4750, a lock member C4760, and a movement restriction member C4770.

A frame C4600 shown in FIGS. 365 to 367 supports the glass frame and an upper unit C4700 described later. The frame C4600 includes a base portion C4610 and a unit portion C4620.

The base portion C4610 shown in FIGS. 366 and 367 is formed into a plate shape with an open center. The base portion C4610 is provided with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base portion C4610 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A base hole C4611 is formed in the base portion C4610.

The base hole C4611 shown in FIGS. 366, 370, and 371 is formed so as to penetrate the upper right portion of the base portion C4610 in the front and back directions.

The unit portion C4620 shown in FIGS. 365, 366, 368, etc. is formed in a substantially U-shape (U-shape) when viewed from the front with an open bottom. A member such as a speaker is mounted on the unit section C4620. The unit part C4620 is provided on the front side of the base part C4610 and fixed to the base part C4610.

An upper unit C4700, which will be described later, is attached to the upper part of the unit part C4620. The unit portion C4620 is formed with a recess C4621, a mounting hole C4622, a slide guide hole C4623, a wiring hole C4624, and a boss C4625 as a structure for attaching the upper unit C4700.

Note that, in the above configuration, the recess C4621, the attachment hole C4622, and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed at the upper right and upper left of the unit portion C4620, respectively. The following description will first focus on a recess C4621, a mounting hole C4622, and a slide guide hole C4623 formed in the upper right portion of the unit portion C4620.

A recess C4621 shown in FIGS. 368 and 370 to 372 is a portion that accommodates a locking member C4760, which will be described later. The recessed portion C4621 is formed such that the rear surface of the unit portion C4620 is recessed forward. The recessed portion C4621 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear with the longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The left and right side surfaces of the recess C4621 are formed to open to a size that allows a lock member C4760, which will be described later, to pass therethrough.

The attachment hole C4622 shown in FIGS. 368, 372, and 373 is a hole through which an upper unit C4700 (an attachment portion C4710 thereof), which will be described later, is inserted. The attachment hole C4622 is formed so that the bottom surface of the recess C4621 penetrates back and forth. The attachment hole C4622 is formed on the right side of the recess C4621. The right part of the mounting hole C4622 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear with the longitudinal direction facing the vertical direction, and the left part thereof is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear with a vertical width smaller than that of the right part (Fig. 373 reference).

A slide guide hole C4623 shown in FIGS. 368, 372, and 373 guides the sliding movement of a lock member C4760, which will be described later. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed so that the bottom surface of the recess C4621 penetrates back and forth. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed to extend leftward from the left end of the attachment hole C4622. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed so that its vertical width is smaller than that of the attachment hole C4622.

The wiring hole C4624 shown in FIGS. 368, 370 to 372 is a hole for passing a wiring (a harness C4752 described later) connected to an upper unit C4700 described later. The wiring hole C4624 is formed so as to penetrate the unit portion C4620 in the front and back directions. The wiring hole C4624 is formed above the recess C4621 (attachment hole C4622 and slide guide hole C4623).

The boss C4625 shown in FIGS. 368 and 372 is formed in a cylindrical shape that projects rearward from the unit portion C4620. The boss C4625 is formed between the recess C4621 and the wiring hole C4624 in the vertical direction. A female screw hole is formed in the center of the boss C4625.

The concave portion C4621, mounting hole C4622, slide guide hole C4623, wiring hole C4624, and boss C4625 formed in this way are formed so as to fit inside the base hole C4611 of the base portion C4610 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 370). ).

Further, as described above, the recess C4621, the attachment hole C4622, and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed at the upper right and upper left of the unit portion C4620, respectively (see FIG. 368). The recess C4621 (recess C4621L), the mounting hole C4622 (installation hole C4622L), and the slide guide hole C4623 (slide guide hole C4623L) formed in the upper left of the unit part C4620 are the recess C4621 (recess C4621L) formed in the upper right part of the unit part C4620. , the attachment hole C4622 and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed in a shape that is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

The upper unit C4700 shown in FIGS. 365 to 367, 369, etc. is for performing effects. The upper unit C4700 is decorated with appropriate decorations. The upper unit C4700 is provided on the upper front surface of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620). A mounting portion C4710 is formed in the upper unit C4700.

The attachment portion C4710 shown in FIGS. 369 to 372 is for fixing the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600. The attachment parts C4710 are formed on the right and left parts of the upper unit C4700, respectively (see FIG. 369). The following description will first focus on the mounting portion C4710 formed on the right side of the upper unit C4700.

The attachment portion C4710 is formed to protrude rearward from the upper unit C4700. The attachment portion C4710 is formed with an insertion hole C4711 that passes through the attachment portion C4710 from side to side (see FIG. 372). The attachment portion C4710 is inserted into the attachment hole C4622 of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620) from the front side.

On the other hand, the mounting part C4710 (mounting part C4710L) formed on the left side of the upper unit C4700 is formed in a shape that is like the mounting part C4710 formed on the right side of the upper unit C4700 rotated by 90 degrees when viewed from the rear. (See Figure 369).

Further, the upper unit C4700 is provided with a board C4720 to which a connector C4720a is attached (see FIG. 369). The board C4720 is fixed to the rear surface of the upper unit C4700. The board C4720 is provided above the mounting portion C4710. The board C4720 is provided so that the connector C4720a fits inside the wiring hole C4624 of the unit part C4620 when viewed from the rear (see FIGS. 370 and 371).

The board unit C4750 shown in FIGS. 366 and 367 is for operating a predetermined device provided in the glass door C4. The board unit C4750 includes a board C4751, a harness C4752, and a harness cover C4753.

A substrate C4751 shown in FIG. 367 is fixed to the lower part of the base portion C4610. A connector C4751a is provided on the board C4751.

A harness C4752 shown in FIGS. 370 and 371 is provided between the frame C4600 and the upper unit C4700. Specifically, one end of the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4751a of the board C4751. The other end of the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4720a of the board C4720 of the upper unit C4700 (see FIG. 375). Note that in FIG. 370, illustration of the other end of the harness C4752 (the portion connected to the connector C4720a) is omitted. Further, FIG. 371 shows a state in which the harness C4752 is not connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720).

The harness C4752 extends rightward from the connector C4751a to the right side of the base portion C4610, and is arranged so as to be bent upward from there (not shown). The harness C4752 is disposed so as to pass through the right side of the base portion C4610 and extend upward to the immediate right side of the locking member C4760 and the movement regulating member C4770. The harness C4752 extends from the immediate right side of the lock member C4760 and the movement restriction member C4770 to the board C4720 of the upper unit C4700, and is connected to the connector C4720a (see FIG. 375).

The harness cover C4753 shown in FIGS. 370 and 371 protects the harness C4752. The harness cover C4753 is formed in a substantially U-shape (U-shape) when viewed from the front with an open front end. The harness cover C4753 is fixed to the right side of the base portion C4610 with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The harness cover C4753 is provided so as to cover the middle part (the part extending in the vertical direction) of the harness C4752 from the left and right and from the rear. The harness cover C4753 is provided so that its upper end (the outlet of the harness C4752) is located on the right side of the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720).

Here, the upper unit C4700 is fixed (locked) to the frame C4600 by screws, locking members C4760, etc. with the mounting portion C4710 inserted into the mounting hole C4622 of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620). The lock member C4760 will be described in detail below.

A locking member C4760 shown in FIGS. 367 and 370 to 374 locks (fixes) the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600. The lock members C4760 are provided on the right and left parts of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620), respectively (see FIG. 367). The following description will first focus on the locking member C4760 provided on the right side of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620).

The locking member C4760 includes a main body portion C4761, an insertion portion C4762, an operating portion C4763, and a locking member front portion C4764.

The main body portion C4761 shown in FIGS. 370 to 374 is a portion that constitutes the main structure of the locking member C4760. The main body portion C4761 is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction facing the left and right directions.

The insertion portion C4762 shown in FIGS. 370 to 372 and 374 is a portion inserted into the attachment portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. The insertion portion C4762 is formed to extend rightward from the right end of the main body portion C4761.

The operating portion C4763 shown in FIGS. 372 and 374 is a portion held by the operator when operating the locking member C4760. The operating portion C4763 is formed to extend rearward from the right end of the main body portion C4761.

A locking member front portion C4764 shown in FIGS. 373 and 374 is a portion that constitutes the front portion of the locking member C4760. The lock member front portion C4764 is formed to extend forward from the main body portion C4761. The front part of the lock member front part C4764 is formed to have a larger vertical width than the rear part of the lock member front part C4764.

The rear part of the lock member front part C4764 (the part connected to the main body part C4761) is inserted into the slide guide hole C4623. Further, the front part of the locking member front part C4764 is formed to have a larger vertical width than the slide guide hole C4623. This prevents the lock member C4760 from falling off from the slide guide hole C4623.

The locking member C4760 configured in this way is formed to be able to slide left and right (linearly) inside the recessed portion C4621 of the unit portion C4620 along the extending direction of the slide guide hole C4623. A movement restriction member C4770 is attached to the lock member C4760.

Furthermore, as described above, the locking members C4760 are provided on the right and left parts of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620), respectively (see FIG. 367). The lock member C4760 (lock member C4760L) provided on the left side of the frame body C4600 is formed in the same shape as the lock member C4760 provided on the right side of the frame body C4600. The lock member C4760L is arranged with the lock member C4760 provided on the right side of the frame C4600 rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the locking member C4760L is formed to be able to slide up and down inside the recessed portion C4621L of the unit portion C4620 along the extending direction of the slide guide hole C4623L (see FIG. 368).

The movement restriction member C4770 shown in FIGS. 370 to 372 restricts the movement range of the lock member C4760. The movement restriction member C4770 is provided for the right lock member C4760. The movement restriction member C4770 includes a main body portion C4771, a protection portion C4772, and a projection portion C4773.

The main body portion C4771 is a portion that constitutes the main structure of the movement restriction member C4770. The main body portion C4771 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A long hole C4771a is formed in the main body portion C4771.

The elongated hole C4771a is formed to penetrate the main body portion C4771 in the front and back directions. The elongated hole C4771a is formed with its longitudinal direction facing in the left-right direction. The boss C4625 of the unit portion C4620 is inserted into the elongated hole C4771a (see FIG. 372). A screw C4774 is inserted into the elongated hole C4771a from the rear side. The screw C4774 is screwed into the female threaded hole of the boss C4625 with an interval in the front-rear direction relative to the main body C4771.

Further, a warning sticker C4771b is attached to the main body C4771. The caution sticker C4771b includes a cautionary note, a mark, etc. urging the user to disconnect the harness C4752 from the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) when removing the upper unit C4700. This can prevent forgetting to pull out the harness C4752 when removing the upper unit C4700.

The protective portion C4772 is a portion that covers the operating portion C4763 of the lock member C4760. The protection portion C4772 is formed to extend downward from the left and right middle portions of the main body portion C4771. A recess with an open front is formed in the protection part C4772, and the operating part C4763 of the locking member C4760 is fitted into the recess. As a result, the movement regulating member C4770 is attached to the locking member C4760 and moves integrally with the locking member C4760. Furthermore, the protective portion C4772 can protect the operating portion C4763 by covering the operating portion C4763 of the lock member C4760.

The protrusion C4773 is formed to protrude upward from the right side of the main body C4771. The protrusion C4773 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. When the movement regulating member C4770 is in the position shown in FIG. 370, the projection C4773 is located between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (the exit of the harness C4752) and the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) in rear view. It is formed like this.

By attaching the movement restricting member C4770 configured in this way to the locking member C4760, the sliding movement range (movable range) of the locking member C4760 is restricted. Specifically, the movement range of the locking member C4760 (and movement regulating member C4770) is regulated by inserting the boss C4625 into the elongated hole C4771a.

As shown in FIG. 370, the lock member C4760 is at the rightmost position within the movable range (the boss C4625 is in contact with the left end of the elongated hole C4771a, or the protective part C4772 that covers the operating part C4763 is When the locking member C4760 is in contact with the mounting portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700, the insertion portion C4762 of the locking member C4760 is inserted into the mounting portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700 (insertion hole C4711 shown in FIG. 372). As a result, the upper unit C4700 (attachment section C4710) becomes unable to be pulled out forward from the attachment hole C4622 of the unit section C4620. In this way, the lock member C4760 fixes (locks) the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600.

On the other hand, FIG. 371 shows a state in which the lock member C4760 is at the leftmost position within the movable range (the boss C4625 is in contact with the right end of the elongated hole C4771a). Note that, as described above, in FIG. 371, it is assumed that the harness C4752 is not connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720). As shown in FIG. 371, the locking member C4760 slides to the left from the position shown in FIG. 370 and moves to a position where it overlaps with the connector C4720a (the leftmost position within the movable range) when viewed from the rear. be able to. At this time, the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is located to the left of the attachment portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. That is, the insertion portion C4762 is not inserted into the attachment portion C4710 (the insertion hole C4711 shown in FIG. 372). As a result, the upper unit C4700 (attachment section C4710) can be pulled out forward from the attachment hole C4622 of the unit section C4620. In this way, the lock member C4760 releases the fixation (lock) between the upper unit C4700 and the frame C4600. Therefore, the upper unit C4700 can be removed from the frame C4600.

In this way, the lock member C4760 has two positions, one in which the insertion part C4762 of the lock member C4760 is inserted into the mounting part C4710 (insertion hole C4711) of the upper unit C4700 (locked position, see FIG. 370), and the other in the insertion part of the lock member C4760. C4762 can be slid between the position where it is removed from the mounting portion C4710 (insertion hole C4711) of the upper unit C4700 (unlocked position, see FIG. 371). Thereby, the lock member C4760 can switch between fixing and releasing the fixation of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600.

Here, if an attempt is made to remove the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected to the upper unit C4700 (connector C4720a of the board C4720), the harness C4752 may be pulled and disconnected. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the harness C4752 is connected to the upper unit C4700, the locking member C4760 is prevented from moving from the locking position (see FIG. 370) to the unlocking position (see FIG. 371) (making it difficult to move). I have to.

A method for regulating the movement of the locking member C4760 to the unlocked position (see FIG. 371) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 375 and 376.

As shown in FIG. 375, when the lock member C4760 is in the lock position, the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is inserted into the attachment portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. Thereby, the upper unit C4700 is fixed to the frame C4600. That is, the upper unit C4700 cannot be removed from the frame C4600. At this time, as described above, the projection C4773 of the movement regulating member C4770 is located between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (the exit of the harness C4752) and the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) in rear view. There is.

On the other hand, in order to move the locking member C4760 to the unlocked position, it is necessary to move the projection C4773 to a position where it overlaps with the connector C4720a in rear view (see FIG. 371). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 376, even if an attempt is made to slide the locking member C4760 to the left toward the unlocked position (see FIG. 371) in order to remove the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600, the protrusion C4773 comes into contact with the harness C4752. Therefore, the lock member C4760 cannot be moved to the unlock position (see FIG. 371).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper unit C4700 is not removed from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the harness C4752 from being pulled and disconnected.

On the other hand, when the harness C4752 is removed from the upper unit C4700 (connector C4720a of the board C4720), even if the locking member C4760 is slid leftward toward the unlocked position (see Figure 371), the protrusion of the movement regulating member C4770 The portion C4773 never comes into contact with the harness C4752. Therefore, it becomes possible to move the locking member C4760 to the unlocking position (see FIG. 371). Therefore, the upper unit C4700 can be removed from the frame C4600.

Further, the protruding portion C4773 of the movement regulating member C4770 is formed to move between the portions of the harness C4752 bent into a substantially semicircular shape. Specifically, the projection C4773 is formed to move between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (the exit of the harness C4752) and the portion of the harness C4752 that is connected to the upper unit C4700. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate space for moving the projection C4773, and space can be saved.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance. The movable performance accessory is fixed to the base member.

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A lock position (first position) where the upper unit C4700 (structure) is fixed to the frame C4600 (fixed part), and a lock release position (second position) where the upper unit C4700 is unlocked from the frame C4600. a locking member C4760 (first member) formed to be movable in the position);
a movement regulating member C4770 (second member) that makes it difficult for the locking member C4760 to move from the locking position to the unlocking position;
It is equipped with the following.

With such a configuration, a highly functional gaming machine can be provided.
Specifically, the movement restricting member C4770 can easily switch between fixing and releasing the fixing of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600 by the locking member C4760, which improves the workability of assembly and, in turn, improves functionality. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent performance.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
is formed to be slidable between the locked position and the unlocked position,
The movement restriction member C4770 is
By restricting the sliding of the locking member C4760, it is made difficult for the locking member C4760 to move from the locking position to the unlocking position.

With such a configuration, the locking member C4760 and the movement regulating member C4770 can have a simple configuration.

Further, the movement regulating member C4770 is
making it difficult for the locking member C4760 to move from the locking position to the unlocking position in a state where a harness C4752 (third member) different from the locking member C4760 and the movement restriction member C4770 is provided;
By moving or removing the harness C4752, the locking member C4760 can be moved from the locked position to the unlocked position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the work of removing the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is provided. Thereby, damage to the harness C4752 can be suppressed.

Further, the third member is
This is a harness C4752 (wiring) provided between the upper unit C4700 and the frame C4600.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the work of removing the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected. Thereby, disconnection of the harness C4752 can be suppressed.

It also includes a connector C4751a (wiring connection part) to which the harness C4752 from the upper unit C4700 is connected,
Both the lock member C4760 and the connector C4751a are provided on the frame C4600.

With such a configuration, the positional relationship between the lock member C4760 and the connector C4751a can be easily set.

Further, the movement regulating member C4770 is
The protrusion C4773 is provided to make it difficult for the locking member C4760 to move from the locking position to the unlocking position by coming into contact with the harness C4752.

With such a configuration, the movement regulating member C4770 can have a simple configuration.

Further, the movement regulating member C4770 is
The projection C4773 is formed to move between a harness cover C4753 (wiring cover) that accommodates at least a portion of the harness C4752 and a portion of the harness C4752 that is connected to the upper unit C4700. It is something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to save space.

Further, the movement regulating member C4770 is
It is formed to move integrally with the lock member C4760.

With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for moving the movement restriction member C4770, and the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
Equipped with an operation part C4763 for moving the locking member C4760,
The movement restriction member C4770 is
It is provided so as to cover the operation section C4763.

With such a configuration, the operation portion C4763 of the locking member C4760 can be protected by the movement restricting member C4770.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
Equipped with an operation part C4763 for moving the locking member C4760,
The movement range of the locking member C4760 is restricted by the operation portion C4763 coming into contact with the upper unit C4700.

With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a configuration for regulating the movement range of the lock member C4760, and the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
It includes a plurality of lock members (left and right lock members C4760) that move in different directions.

With such a configuration, the upper unit C4700 can be firmly fixed to the frame C4600.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the fixed part of the present invention is the frame body C4600, and the structure of the present invention is the upper unit C4700, but the fixed part and the structure are not limited to these. Instead, it can be any member.

Further, in this embodiment, the first member of the present invention is the locking member C4760, but the first member is not limited to this and can be any member, for example, a screw. There may be.

Further, in this embodiment, the locking member C4760 is assumed to move linearly, but the moving direction of the locking member C4760 is not limited to this, and may be rotated, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movement regulating member C4770 (the protrusion C4773 thereof) comes into contact with the harness C4752, making it difficult for the locking member C4760 to move to the unlocked position. The configuration for making it difficult to move is not limited to this, and can be any configuration. For example, the member that the movement restriction member C4770 comes into contact with is not limited to the harness C4752, and may be any member. Moreover, the movement regulating member C4770 can also be made into any shape (member).

[11. 11th pachinko game machine]
Below, the eleventh pachinko game machine of the present invention will be explained. It should be noted that the same or similar components as those related to the first to tenth pachinko gaming machines will be given the same names or the same symbols, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The eleventh pachinko game machine differs greatly from the first to tenth pachinko game machines in that static electricity is eliminated using the decorative member C4890 of the dish unit C4800. Below, the dish unit C4800 will be explained using FIGS. 377 to 389.

The plate unit C4800 is a unit in which an upper plate C4820, a lower plate C4830, etc. are fixed to each other. The pan unit C4800 is arranged below the glass door 4 shown in FIG. 377. As shown in FIGS. 378, 379, and 381, the plate unit C4800 includes a base member C4810, an upper plate C4820, a lower plate C4830, a production button device C4840, a mounting member C4850, a line cover C4860, a first decorative part C4870, 2 decoration part C4880, decoration member C4890, and ground wire C4900.

The base member C4810 is a member to which the upper plate C4820, the lower plate C4830, etc. are fixed. The base member C4810 is formed into a substantially flat plate shape (see FIG. 381) with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction.

The upper tray C4820 and the lower tray C4830 are storage trays for storing game balls. The upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 are fixed to the left front part of the base member C4810. The upper tray C4820 stores, for example, lent game balls, game balls paid out as prize balls, and the like. The game balls stored in the upper tray C4820 are fired toward a game area (not shown) by operating the firing device 6. The lower plate C4830 is fixed to the base member C4810 and is arranged below the upper plate C4820. The game balls stored in the upper tray C4820 (for example, game balls overflowing from the upper tray C4820) are paid out to the lower tray C4830.

The performance button device C4840 allows operations related to performances performed on the gaming machine. The performance button device C4840 is connected to the sub-control circuit 300, for example, similar to the performance button 54 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. The performance button device C4840 is used for operations such as generating an appropriate performance performed on the gaming machine, switching performances that are already being executed, and the like. Furthermore, the production button device C4840 has a production function that operates based on the results of the hit determination process and the like. The performance button device C4840 is fixed to the base member C4810, and is arranged on the right side of the upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 (approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit C4800). The performance button device C4840 may be configured in the same manner as the performance button 54 related to the first pachinko gaming machine, for example, but its configuration is not particularly limited. The production button device C4840 according to this embodiment includes a cover portion C4841, a button portion C4842, and the like.

The cover portion C4841 is a member that covers the periphery of the button portion C4842 from above. The cover portion C4841 is a member (decorative member) that is appropriately decorated with decorative portions C4841a provided on the left and right outer sides. The button portion C4842 is provided on the cover portion C4841 so as to be exposed to the outside, and is configured to be pressable by the player.

A mounting member C4850 shown in FIGS. 381 to 383 is a member to which a first decorative portion C4870, etc., which will be described later, is attached. The mounting member C4850 is a member (decorative member) that is appropriately decorated with a first decorative portion C4870 and the like. The mounting member C4850 has a plate surface oriented substantially in the front-back direction and is formed in a substantially arc shape in plan view. The attachment member C4850 is formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the dish unit C4800 when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 378 and 382). The attachment member C4850 is fixed to the base member C4810 and is provided so as to cover the performance button device C4840 and the like from the front. The mounting member C4850 includes a central mounting portion C4851 and a through hole C4852.

As shown in FIGS. 382 and 383, the central attachment portion C4851 is a portion to which the first decorative portion C4870 is attached. The central attachment portion C4851 is formed approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the attachment member C4850. The central attachment portion C4851 is formed in a concave shape, such as by recessing the front side surface of the attachment member C4850 rearward.

The through hole C4852 is a hole that penetrates the mounting member C4850 in the front and back. A pair of left and right through holes C4852 are provided. The left and right through holes C4852 are formed to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The left and right through holes C4852 are formed at the upper part of the mounting member C4850 and on the left and right outer sides of the central mounting portion C4851.

The line cover C4860 shown in FIGS. 380 to 382 is a member attached to the upper end of the attachment member C4850. Note that FIG. 380 is a cross-sectional view (cross-sectional view taken along arrow C4801-C4801 shown in FIG. 378) of the dish unit C4800 taken halfway between the left and right sides. A pair of left and right line covers C4860 are provided on the mounting member C4850. The left and right line covers C4860 are formed to extend substantially in the left-right direction along the attachment member C4850. The cross-sectional shape (cross-sectional shape in FIG. 380) of the left and right line covers C4860 is formed in a substantially V-shape with the opening facing rearward (see FIG. 380). The left and right line covers C4860 are attached to the mounting member C4850 with fastening members such as screws, and are provided so as to extend from the left and right outer ends of the mounting member C4850 to the immediate side of the central mounting portion C4851. Furthermore, the left and right line covers C4860 are provided so as to pass directly above the through hole C4852 (see FIG. 382).

The first decorative portion C4870 shown in FIGS. 382 and 383 is a decorated portion that is attached to the central attachment portion C4851 of the attachment member C4850. The first decorative portion C4870 includes an illuminated board C4871, a metal plate C4872, and a lens member C4873.

As shown in FIGS. 383 and 384, the illumination board C4871 is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The illumination board C4871 is provided so as to face the front side surface of the central mounting portion C4851. Electronic components such as a plurality of LEDCs 4871a are provided on the front side of the illumination board C4871.

Sheet metal C4872 is a flat metal member. The sheet metal C4872 of this embodiment is a flat member made of a metal material that is relatively easily charged. The sheet metal C4872 is formed into a substantially rectangular annular shape when viewed from the front. The sheet metal C4872 is provided so as to surround the outer edge (periphery) of the illumination board C4871. The sheet metal C4872 is arranged with a slight distance from the illumination board C4871 (so as not to come into contact with it). Further, the sheet metal C4872 is provided so as to face the front side surface of the central mounting portion C4851, except for a portion (a connecting portion C4872a to be described later). The sheet metal C4872 includes a connecting portion C4872a.

The connecting portion C4872a is a portion connected to a decorative member C4890 described later. The connecting portion C4872a is formed to protrude rightward from the upper right portion of the sheet metal C4872. The right side of the connecting portion C4872a passes through a notch formed in the mounting member C4850 and is disposed on the rear side of the mounting member C4850 (see FIG. 382).

The lens member C4873 is a member that can transmit light. The lens member C4873 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens) that is appropriately decorated. The lens member C4873 is formed into a substantially cup shape with the opening facing rearward. The lens member C4873 accommodates an illumination board C4871 and a sheet metal C4872 (see FIG. 383). The lens member C4873 is fixed to the central mounting portion C4851 of the mounting member C4850 by a fastening member. Note that in FIG. 382, for convenience of explanation, the lens member C4873 is not shown.

The first decorative portion C4870 configured as described above can emit light to the front of the illuminated board C4871 by causing the LEDC 4871a of the illuminated board C4871 to emit light. The light is emitted to the outside of the first decorative portion C4870 via the lens member C4873. In this way, the first decorative portion C4870 can cause the lens member C4873 to emit light using the light.

As shown in FIG. 382, the second decorative portion C4880 is a decorated portion provided on the left and right outer sides of the first decorative portion C4870. A pair of left and right second decorative parts C4880 are provided. The left and right second decorative portions C4880 are provided substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. Below, of the left and right second decorative parts C4880, the configuration of the right second decorative part C4880 will be explained, and the description of the configuration of the left second decorative part C4880 will be omitted.

The second decorative portion C4880 on the right side is provided above the line cover C4860 on the right side. The second decorative portion C4880 on the right side is formed to extend from the left and right outer ends of the attachment member C4850 to the immediate side of the central attachment portion C4851. As shown in FIGS. 382, 383, and 386, the second decorative portion C4880 includes a support member C4881, an illumination board C4882, an inner lens C4883, an outer lens C4884, and a speaker C4885.

The support member C4881 is a member that supports the illumination board C4882. The support member C4881 is formed in the shape of a thin case with an open top (the outer edge extends slightly upward). The support member C4881 is formed to extend substantially along the left-right direction. The support member C4881 is provided so as to be inclined upward to the right (see FIG. 386).

The illumination board C4882 is formed so that its plate surface is oriented vertically and extends substantially in the left-right direction. The illumination board C4882 is placed on the support member C4881. Electronic components such as a plurality of LEDCs 4882a are provided on the upper surface of the illumination board C4882.

The inner lens C4883 is a member that can transmit light. The inner lens C4883 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens). The inner lens C4883 is formed in the shape of a thin case with an open bottom (the outer edge extends slightly downward). The inner lens C4883 is arranged to face the support member C4881 with the illumination board C4882 in between (see FIG. 380).

The outer lens C4884 shown in FIGS. 383, 386, and 387 is a member that can transmit light. Note that FIG. 387 is a diagram of the outer lens C4884 viewed from arrow C4803 shown in FIG. 386. The outer lens C4884 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens) that is appropriately decorated. The outer lens C4884 of this embodiment is an insulating member made of a transparent resin material. The outer lens C4884 is formed to extend substantially along the left-right direction. Further, the outer lens C4884 is formed in a shape that is one size larger than the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, and the inner lens C4883. As shown in FIG. 380, the cross-sectional shape (cross-sectional shape in FIG. 380) of the outer lens C4884 is formed into a substantially inverted U-shape. The outer lens C4884 accommodates the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, and the inner lens C4883. In this way, the outer lens C4884 is formed to cover the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, and the inner lens C4883 from above. The outer lens C4884 includes a top C4884a, a recess C4884b, a front extension C4884c, and a rear extension C4884d.

The top C4884a is the upper part of the outer lens C4884. The top portion C4884a is formed at a distance above the inner lens C4883.

The recessed portion C4884b is a downwardly recessed portion. The recessed portion C4884b is formed so as to be able to engage with the production button device C4840 (decoration portion C4841a of the cover portion C4841). The recess C4884b is formed at the rear of the top C4884a.

The front extending portion C4884c is a portion that extends substantially downward from the front end (the side closer to the player (front side)) of the top portion C4884a. The front extending portion C4884c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front. The lower end portion of the front side extension portion C4884c is located on the front side of the illumination board C4882 and at approximately the same height position as the illumination board C4882. In FIG. 380, as an example of substantially the same height, a state is shown in which the lower end surface of the front side extension part C4884c and the upper surface of the illumination board C4882 are located on substantially the same horizontal plane. In this way, the front side extension portion C4884c is formed to extend from a position higher than the illumination board C4882 to a position approximately at the same height as the illumination board C4882. Note that the position at substantially the same height as the illumination board C4882 refers to a position close to the extent that the lower end of the front extension portion C4884c and the illumination board C4882 overlap each other when viewed from the front.

The rear extending portion C4884d is a portion extending downward from the rear end (the side farthest from the player (back side)) of the top portion C4884a. The rear extending portion C4884d is formed to extend vertically downward from the recess C4884b formed at the rear of the top portion C4884a. The rear extension portion C4884d is located on the rear side of the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, and the inner lens C4883. Further, the lower end portion of the rear extension portion C4884d is located at a lower position than the illumination board C4882. In this way, the rear extension portion C4884d is formed to extend from a position higher than the illumination board C4882 to a position lower than the illumination board C4882. In FIG. 380, as an example of a position lower than the illumination board C4882, the lower end of the rear side extension part C4884d is located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the support member C4881 on which the illumination board C4882 is placed. It shows the position. Note that the position at approximately the same height as the lower end of the support member C4881 refers to a position close to the extent that the lower end of the rear extension portion C4884d and the lower end of the support member C4881 overlap each other when viewed from the front. .

Speakers C4885 shown in FIG. 382 are provided on the left and right outer sides of the outer lens C4884.

In the second decorative portion C4880 configured as described above, the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, the inner lens C4883, the outer lens C4884, and the speaker C4885 are fixed to each other by the fastening member. Further, the second decorative portion C4880 is fixed to the upper end portion of the mounting member C4850. The front side extension part C4884c of the second decorative part C4880 is arranged above the line cover C4860, as shown in FIG. 380. Further, the decorative portion C4841a of the production button device C4840 is engaged with the recessed portion C4884b. In this way, the outer lens C4884 is provided so as to extend between the production button device C4840, the line cover C4860, the illumination board C4882, etc. in cross-sectional view. The second decorative portion C4880 can irradiate light substantially upward of the illuminated board C4882 by causing the LEDC 4882a of the illuminated board C4882 to emit light. The light is emitted to the outside of the second decorative portion C4880 via the inner lens C4883 and the outer lens C4884. In this way, the second decorative portion C4880 can cause the outer lens C4884 to emit light using the light.

A decorative member C4890 shown in FIGS. 382 and 383 is a member to which decoration is applied. A pair of left and right decorative members C4890 are provided. First, the configuration of the right decorative member C4890 will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 384 and 388, the right decorative member C4890 is formed into a thin plate shape. The decorative member C4890 is plated to enhance its decorative effect. Furthermore, the decorative member C4890 is a member that is relatively easily charged (than a member that is not plated) and is an example of the specific decorative part of the present application. The decorative member C4890 is formed to extend substantially along the left-right direction. The decorative member C4890 is formed in a tapered shape such that the height (width in the vertical direction) decreases toward the right (lateral left and right) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 384). Further, the width of the decorative member C4890 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the through-hole C4852 (see FIG. 382) of the mounting member C4850 in the left-right direction. The decorative member C4890 includes an exposed portion C4891, a facing portion C4892, a first connecting portion C4893, and a second connecting portion C4894.

The exposed portion C4891 is a portion exposed to the front side from the mounting member C4850. The exposed portion C4891 is formed to protrude substantially forward. The exposed portion C4891 is formed to extend from the left end portion of the decorative member C4890 to the middle portion on the left and right sides. The exposed portion C4891 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the through hole C4852 of the mounting member C4850 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 382).

The opposing portion C4892 is a portion that faces the mounting member C4850 and the line cover C4860. The opposing portion C4892 is formed around the exposed portion C4891. The opposing portion C4892 is formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the decorative member C4890.

The first connection portion C4893 is a portion connected to a ground wire C4900, which will be described later. The first connecting portion C4893 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom that projects rearward from the decorative member C4890. The first connecting portion C4893 is formed on the left side of the decorative member C4890.

The second connecting portion C4894 is a portion connected to the mounting member C4850 and the sheet metal C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870. As shown in FIGS. 384, 385, and 388, the second connecting portion C4894 is formed in a concave shape in which the front surface of the decorative member C4890 is concave toward the rear. Note that FIG. 385 is a sectional view taken along arrow C4802-C4802 shown in FIG. 384(b). A hole that penetrates the decorative member C4890 back and forth is formed in the center of the second connecting portion C4894. The second connecting portion C4894 is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front. The second connecting portion C4894 is formed at the left end portion of the decorative member C4890 (substantially to the left of the first connecting portion C4893).

As shown in FIGS. 382 and 383, the right decorative member C4890 configured as described above is fixed to the mounting member C4850 by having the exposed portion C4891 fitted into the through hole C4852 of the mounting member C4850 from the rear. The decorative member C4890 is fixed to the base member C4810 via the attachment member C4850, and is fixed (unitized) with the upper plate C4820, the lower plate C4830 (storage plate), the production button device C4840, etc. (see FIG. 381). Further, the exposed portion C4891 is disposed below the line cover C4860 when viewed from the front, and is provided so as to be visible to the player from the outside.

Further, as shown in FIG. 380, the front and back position of the upper end of the opposing portion C4892 is on the front side of the support member C4881 and the illumination board C4882. Further, the front-rear position of the upper end of the opposing portion C4892 is on the rear side of the mounting member C4850, the line cover C4860, and the front extension portion C4884c (lower end). In this way, the upper end portion of the opposing portion C4892 is arranged between the illumination board C4882 and the like and the front extension portion C4884c and the like. The upper end of the opposing portion C4892 is located at approximately the same height as the illumination board C4882. Further, the lower end of the decorative member C4890 is located below the illumination board C4882, specifically at a slightly lower position than the lower end of the through hole C4852. In this way, the decorative member C4890 is formed to extend from a position approximately at the same height as the illumination board C4882 to a position lower than the illumination board C4882. Further, the front and rear positions of the lower end of the decorative member C4890 are located at the rear of the illumination board C4882. In this way, the decorative member C4890 is provided to cover the illumination board C4882 from below.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 384 and 385, the second connecting portion C4894 is arranged so as to overlap the connecting portion C4872a of the sheet metal C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 when viewed from the front, and is attached together with the connecting portion C4872a by a screw C4894a. It is fixed to member C4850. In this way, the metal plate C4872 and the decorative member C4890 on the right side are connected to each other so that electricity can flow (electrically).

The decoration member C4890 on the left side shown in FIG. 382 is provided so as to be substantially symmetrical with the decoration member C4890 on the right side, except that it is not electrically connected to the metal plate C4872.

The ground wire C4900 shown in FIG. 381 and FIGS. 383 to 385 is for grounding the left and right decorative members C4890. A pair of ground wires C4900 are provided on the left and right sides. One end of the right ground wire C4900 (the ground wire C4900 shown in FIGS. 383 to 385) is connected to the first connection portion C4893 of the right decorative member C4890 via a terminal C4901 and a screw C4902. The right ground wire C4900 is provided so as to extend approximately to the right from the terminal C4901 to the right side of the performance button device C4840 (see FIG. 381), and the extended portion further extends rearward. In this way, the ground wire C4900 on the right side is provided so as to avoid the production button device C4840 (see FIG. 381). The rear end (other end) of the ground wire C4900 is connected to a predetermined grounded member. In this way, the right ground wire C4900 grounds the right decorative member C4890. Further, the right earth wire C4900 also grounds the sheet metal C4872 via the right decorative member C4890. The left ground wire C4900 (the ground wire C4900 shown in FIG. 381) grounds the left decorative member C4890 similarly to the right ground wire C4900.

In the tray unit C4800 configured as described above, static electricity may be generated during games or the like. For example, static electricity may be generated due to friction when a player presses the button portion C4842 of the production button device C4840 or due to collision of game balls stored in the tray unit C4800. Further, static electricity may be generated when a player touches a member provided to be exposed to the outside from the tray unit C4800 (for example, a line cover C4860, an outer lens C4884, etc.). The static electricity may move on the surface of the member where the static electricity is generated and flow to other members. The left and right decorative members C4890 prevent static electricity flowing to other members from affecting the illumination boards C4871 and C4882. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 389 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing how static electricity generated in the dish unit C4800 flows. The arrow shown by a broken line in FIG. 389 shows how static electricity generated when a player touches the right line cover C4860 flows toward the front side of the illumination board C4882. The arrow shown in white in FIG. 389 shows how static electricity generated in the production button device C4840 (for example, button part C4842, etc.) flows toward the rear side of the illumination board C4882. The flow of static electricity will be explained below.

First, the flow of static electricity toward the front side of the illuminated board C4882 will be explained. When static electricity is generated in the line cover C4860 or the like, the static electricity may flow backward and upward on the surface of the line cover C4860, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 389. The static electricity flows backward through the rear part of the line cover C4860 and passes between the line cover C4860 and the front extension C4884c. The static electricity reaches the opposing portion C4892 that faces the line cover C4860, that is, the decorative member C4890. The static electricity that has reached the decorative member C4890 in this way flows into the ground wire C4900 (see FIG. 380) connected to the decorative member C4890.

In this way, the decorative member C4890 is provided with a member for grounding (earth member). Specifically, since the ground wire C4900 is connected to the decorative member C4890, static electricity generated around the illumination board C4882, such as the line cover C4860, can be eliminated. This can prevent static electricity from reaching the illumination board C4882, and can prevent problems (for example, breakdowns, malfunctions, etc.) from occurring in the illumination board C4882 due to static electricity. In this way, the decorative member C4890 can operate the gaming machine stably and improve the functionality of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the number of parts can be reduced because the decorative member C4890, which is visible from the outside, also serves to eliminate static electricity.

Next, the flow of static electricity toward the rear side of the illuminated board C4882 will be explained. The static electricity generated in the effect button device C4840 (button part C4842, etc.) flows forward and downward on the surface of the effect button device C4840, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. It may reach the outer lens C4884. The static electricity may flow on the surface of the recessed portion C4884b and flow downward on the rear side surface of the rear extension portion C4884d.

The static electricity flows forward from the lower end of the rear surface of the rear extension C4884d. The static electricity flows upward on the front side surface of the rear extension C4884d, passes between the support member C4881 and the rear extension C4884d, and reaches the illumination board C4882.

In this way, the second decorative portion C4880 of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is configured such that static electricity does not reach the rear side of the illumination board C4882 unless the static electricity flows around the rear side extension portion C4884d from below. The structure is as follows. In other words, the outer lens C4884 including the rear extension portion C4884d prevents static electricity from flowing on the surface of the dish unit C4800 from the portion where static electricity is generated (for example, the button portion C4842, etc.) to the illuminated board C4882 (LEDC4882a). The distance (creepage distance) can be increased. This can lower the voltage of static electricity and prevent problems from occurring in the illumination board C4882.

Further, for example, if a player touches the top C4884a of the outer lens C4884 and static electricity is generated, the static electricity may flow forward through the top C4884a. The static electricity cannot reach the illumination substrate C4882 unless it flows along the outer edge of the front extension portion C4884c to the front side of the illumination substrate C4882 and then flows toward the rear side. In this manner, the front side extension portion C4884c can increase the creepage distance from the portion where static electricity is generated (for example, the top portion C4884a, etc.) until the static electricity reaches the front side of the illumination board C4882. Therefore, even if the decorative member C4890 is unable to eliminate static electricity, it is possible to reduce the voltage of the static electricity that has reached the front side of the illuminated board C4882, thereby preventing any malfunction of the illuminated board C4882.

Further, as described above, the metal plate C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 is electrically connected to the decorative member C4890 (see FIG. 384). Thereby, static electricity that has reached the sheet metal C4872 can be eliminated without separately connecting a ground wire to the sheet metal C4872. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to prevent malfunctions of the illumination board C4871 caused by static electricity. In particular, since the sheet metal C4872 is formed to surround the illuminated substrate C4871, it is possible to effectively prevent static electricity from reaching the outer edge of the illuminated substrate C4871.

Further, as shown in FIG. 385, the second connecting portion C4894 and screw C4894a for connecting the sheet metal C4872 and the decorative member C4890 also serve to fix the mounting member C4850 and the decorative member C4890. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.
Note that only a portion of the decorative member C4890 may be covered with plating, or a portion may be formed of a metal member.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine that includes an LED board disposed on the back side of a reflector (reflective member).

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A specific decorative part (in this embodiment, a button part C4842, a sheet metal C4872, and a decorative member C4890) that is provided on a decorative member (cover part C4841 and attachment member C4850) and at least a part of which is visible from the outside;
a board (illumination board C4882) disposed on the back side (back side (rear side) of the pachinko gaming machine) of the specific decorative part (decoration member C4890);
Equipped with
At least a part of the specific decorative part is composed of a chargeable member (a member that generates static electricity during a game or is charged with static electricity due to the flow of static electricity from other members),
The specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is provided with a grounding member (grounding wire C4900) for grounding.

With this configuration, the grounding member (grounding wire C4900) provided on the specific decorative part (decorative member C4890) eliminates static electricity, and prevents problems (e.g. failures, malfunctions, etc.) from occurring on the board (illuminated board C4882). This can be prevented from occurring. Thereby, the functionality of the gaming machine can be improved.

Moreover, between the specific decorative part (button part C4842) and the electronic component (LEDC4882a) provided on the board (illumination board C4882), there is a gap between the specific decorative part (button part C4842) and the electronic component ( An insulating member (outer lens C4884) is arranged to provide a creepage distance up to the LEDC4882a).

With this configuration, the creepage distance is increased by the insulating member (outer lens C4884) to prevent malfunctions of the board (illuminated board C4882) caused by static electricity (for example, static electricity generated in specific decorative parts). Therefore, the operation of the gaming machine can be stabilized.

Further, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is formed to cover the substrate (illumination board C4882) from above.

With this configuration, the creepage distance required for static electricity to reach the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882) from above the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is increased (see the white arrow in FIG. 389), It is possible to effectively prevent malfunctions of the board (illuminated board C4882) caused by static electricity.

The insulating member (outer lens C4884) is formed on the back side of the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882) from a position higher than the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882) to a lower position. It is provided with an insulating part (rear side extension part C4884d).

With this configuration, the creepage distance required for static electricity to reach the back side of the board (illuminated board C4882) is increased (see the white arrow in Figure 389), and the The occurrence of defects in the decorative board C4882) can be effectively prevented.

Further, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is inserted from a position higher than the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882) on the front side (front side (front side) of the pachinko gaming machine) of the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882). It is provided with a front side insulating part (front side extension part C4884c) formed so as to extend to approximately the same height position as the board (illuminated board C4882).

With this configuration, the front side insulating part (front side extension part C4884c) prevents static electricity (for example, static electricity above the insulating member (outer lens C4884)) from reaching the front side of the board (illuminated board C4882). By increasing the required creepage distance, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of defects in the board (illuminated board C4882) caused by static electricity.

Further, the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is arranged between the front side insulating portion (front side extension portion C4884c) and the substrate (illuminated board C4882).

Such a configuration can effectively prevent static electricity from reaching the front side of the board (illuminated board C4882).

Further, the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is formed to extend from a position approximately at the same height as the board (illuminated board C4882) to a position lower than the board (illuminated board C4882). It is.

With this configuration, the static electricity below the board (illuminated board C4882) is eliminated by the specific decorative part (decorative member C4890) provided with the grounding member (ground wire C4900), and the static electricity is removed from the bottom of the board (illuminated board C4882). ) can be prevented from reaching.

Further, the specific decorative part electrically charges a plurality of charged members (members that are charged with static electricity due to static electricity being generated during a game or static electricity flowing from other members; in this embodiment, a sheet metal C4872 and a decorative member C4890). It is configured by connecting to.

With this configuration, static electricity from a plurality of charging members (sheet metal C4872 and decorative member C4890) can be eliminated using one ground member (ground wire C4900), and the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, at least one of the plurality of charging members (sheet metal C4872) is provided along at least a part of the periphery of a substrate (illuminated substrate C4871) that is different from the substrate (illuminated substrate C4882). .

Such a configuration can prevent static electricity from reaching the periphery of the board (illuminated board C4871).

Further, the specific decorative portion (sheet metal C4872 and decorative member C4890) is unitized with a storage tray (upper tray C4820 and lower tray C4830) for storing game balls.

With such a configuration, the specific decorative portion (sheet metal C4872 and decorative member C4890) can be easily provided on the plate unit C4800, which is easily charged.

Note that the cover portion C4841 and the attachment member C4850 are one embodiment of a decorative member.
Moreover, the button part C4842, the sheet metal C4872, and the decorative member C4890 are one embodiment of the specific decorative part.
Further, the illuminated board C4882 is an embodiment of the board.
Further, the LEDC 4882a is an embodiment of an electronic component.
Further, the outer lens C4884 is an embodiment of an insulating member.
Further, the rear side extension portion C4884d is an embodiment of the rear side insulating portion.
Further, the front side extension portion C4884c is an embodiment of the front side insulating portion.
Further, the sheet metal C4872 and the decorative member C4890 are an embodiment of a plurality of charging members that are electrically connected.
Further, the upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 are one embodiment of a storage plate.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the outer lens C4884 of the second decorative portion C4880 has a substantially inverted U-shaped cross-section (see FIG. 389), but the cross-sectional shape of the outer lens C4884 is not particularly limited.

Furthermore, although the lower end of the front side extension C4884c of the outer lens C4884 is located at approximately the same height as the illumination board C4882 (see Figure 389), the height of the front side extension C4884c and the illumination board C4882 is The relationship between the positions is not particularly limited.

In addition, although the lower end of the rear side extension C4884d of the outer lens C4884 was located at a lower position than the illumination board C4882 (see Figure 389), the height of the rear side extension C4884d and the illumination board C4882 The positional relationship is not particularly limited.

Moreover, although the metal sheet C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 was formed so as to surround the illumination board C4871 (see FIG. 384), the shape of the metal sheet C4872 is not particularly limited. The sheet metal C4872 may be formed, for example, in a substantially linear shape along at least a portion of the outer edge (for example, the upper end, etc.) of the illumination board C4871.

Further, in this embodiment, the right side decorative member C4890 is connected to the metal plate C4872 of the first decorative part C4870 (see FIG. 384), but the decorative member C4890 connected to the metal plate C4872 is not particularly limited. For example, the decoration member C4890 on the left side may be connected to the metal plate C4872.

Further, the decorative member C4890 does not necessarily need to be connected to the metal plate C4872. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which static electricity can be removed by the C4872 sheet metal by appropriately connecting the C4872 sheet metal to a ground wire.

In addition, although the decorative member C4890 has been made into a unit with the upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 (see FIG. 381), the relationship between the decorative member C4890 and the upper plate C4820 etc. is not particularly limited; for example, the upper plate It may be separate from C4820 or the like.

Furthermore, although the decorative member C4890 is disposed between the front extension C4884c and the illumination board C4882 (see FIG. 389), the positional relationship between the front extension C4884c and the illumination board C4882 is particularly limited. It's not a thing.

[12. 12th pachinko machine]
Below, a twelfth pachinko game machine of the present invention will be explained with reference to FIGS. 390 to 410. It should be noted that the same or similar components as those related to the first to eleventh pachinko gaming machines will be given the same names or the same symbols, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 390 is an example of an overall front view of the twelfth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 391 is an example of a perspective view of the entire twelfth pachinko gaming machine viewed from diagonally above and from the front right side. As shown in FIGS. 390 and 391, the twelfth pachinko gaming machine has a glass door D4 that is different from the glass door 4 shown in FIG. 2 and the glass door C4 shown in FIGS. 365 to 374, for example. , is significantly different from the first to eleventh pachinko gaming machines. The configuration of the glass door D4 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 392 to 410.

[Glass door]
FIG. 392 is an example of a front view showing a part of the glass door D4. FIG. 393 is an example of an exploded perspective view of a part of the glass door D4 viewed diagonally from above on the front right side. The glass door D4 has transparent protective glass (for example, a front glass D4962 and a rear glass D4964 shown in FIG. 410 described later) attached through a glass unit D4950 (see FIG. 408 described later). The glass door D4 mainly includes a frame D4600, an upper unit D4700, a side lens unit D4800 arranged along the vertical direction on the right side in front view, a substrate unit D4900 (see FIG. 393), lock members D4760, D4760L ( (see FIG. 395). Note that in FIG. 392, illustration of the side lens unit D4800 is omitted for convenience of explanation. Furthermore, an engagement hole D4650, which will be described later, is formed in the frame D4600.

(Frame)
The frame D4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 393, 394, and 395. FIG. 394 is an example of a front view of the frame D4600 (unit portion D4620). FIG. 395 is an example of an enlarged view of section Y shown in FIG. 394. In addition, in FIG. 394, not only the frame body D4600 but also the dish unit D5 is illustrated for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 393, the frame D4600 has a base portion D4610 and a unit portion D4620. The base portion D4610 supports, for example, a unit portion D4620, a substrate unit D4900, a glass unit D4950 (see FIG. 408 described later), and the like. Further, the base portion D4610 supports the upper unit D4700, the side lens unit D4800, etc. via the unit portion D4620.

The twelfth pachinko game machine differs from the tenth pachinko game machine, for example, in the configuration of the frame body D4600 and the configuration of the side lens unit D4800.

The base portion D4610 is formed into a plate shape with an open center. The base portion D4610 is provided with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base portion D4610 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The unit portion D4620 is formed in a substantially inverted U-shape (U-shape) when viewed from the front with an open bottom. A member such as a speaker is mounted on the unit portion D4620. The unit part D4620 is provided on the front side of the base part D4610 and fixed to the base part D4610. Moreover, an upper unit D4700 is attached to the upper part of the unit part D4620.

As shown in FIG. 394, the unit portion D4620 is formed with an engagement hole D4650 that engages with an engagement portion D4822 (described later) included in the side lens unit D4800 (see FIG. 397 described later). Note that a communication hole corresponding to the engagement hole D4650 is also formed in the base portion D4610. In the following, the engagement hole D4650 formed in the unit part D4620 and the hole formed in the base part D4610 corresponding to this engagement hole D4650 will be combined with the engagement hole D4650 formed in the frame body D4600. Sometimes referred to as

As shown in FIG. 395, the unit part D4620 includes recesses D4621, D4621L, mounting holes D4622, D4621L, a slide guide hole (no reference numeral), and a wiring hole D4624 as a structure for attaching the upper unit D4700. , D4624L, boss (no reference numeral), etc. are formed, but these configurations include the recess C4621, mounting hole C4622, slide guide hole C4623, wiring hole C4624, boss C4625, etc. explained in the 10th pachinko game machine. Since the configuration is similar to that, the explanation will be omitted.

The locking members D4760 and D4760L shown in FIG. 395 are capable of locking (fixing) the upper unit D4700 to the frame D4600 mainly by hand using tools or the like. The locking members D4760 and D4760L are provided on the right and left parts of the frame D4600 (unit portion D4620), respectively. The locking mechanism using the locking members D4760, D4760L, etc. is the same as the locking mechanism using the locking members C4760, C4760L, etc. explained in connection with the tenth pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted.

(upper unit, side lens unit)
FIG. 396 is an example of a front view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800. FIG. 397 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 viewed from diagonally above and behind on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 397, a hook-shaped metal engagement portion D4822 is formed at the rear of the side lens unit D4800. By hooking and engaging this engaging portion D4822 into the above-mentioned engaging hole D4650 (see FIG. 394) formed in the frame D4600, the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600 by its own weight. "Temporary mounting" as used herein refers to manually attaching the side lens unit D4800 to the frame by lifting the side lens unit D4800 and removing the engagement portion D4822 from the engagement hole D4650, without using tools or the like. Refers to attachment in a manner that allows easy movement from the attachment position to the detachment position attached to the body D4600. Note that the upper unit D4700 cannot be attached if the engaging part D4822 is not firmly seated in the engaging hole D4650, such as if the engaging part D4822 and the engaging hole D4650 are not fully engaged. When the engagement portion D4822 is firmly seated in the engagement hole D4650, the upper unit D4700 can be attached.

Further, at the rear of the right side of the upper unit D4700, there is a mounting portion D4710 in which an insertion hole D4711 is formed into which an insertion portion (not shown) of a locking member D4760 (see FIG. 408 described later) is inserted. Further, at the rear of the left side of the upper unit D4700, there is a mounting portion D4710L in which an insertion hole D4711L is formed into which an insertion portion (not shown) of a locking member D4760L (see FIG. 408 described later) is inserted. The mounting portion D4710L is obtained by rotating the mounting portion D4710 by 90 degrees.

Note that both FIGS. 396 and 397 are diagrams in which the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 are attached to each other. The procedure for attaching the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 to each other will be described later, but before attaching the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 to each other, the side lens unit D4800 is attached to the frame D4600.

FIG. 398 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 in a state of being separated from each other, viewed from diagonally below on the right rear side. FIG. 399 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 in a state of being separated from each other, viewed from diagonally above and rearward on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 398, an engagement portion D4720 is formed at the connection portion of the upper unit D4700 with the side lens unit D4800. This engaging portion D4720 is a longitudinal member that is long in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 399, an engagement groove D4830 is formed in the connecting portion of the side lens unit D4800 with the upper unit D4700. When the engaging portion D4720 is engaged, the engaging groove D4830 restricts the movement of the engaging portion D4720 in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

Slide the upper unit D4700 from the front to the rear with respect to the side lens unit D4800 while facing the connecting portion of the upper unit D4700 with the side lens unit D4800 and the connecting portion of the side lens unit D4800 with the upper unit D4700. By doing so, the engaging portion D4720 can be engaged with the engaging groove D4830. When the engaging portion D4720 and the engaging groove D4830 are engaged, the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 are connected.

FIG. 400 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 viewed from diagonally below on the right front, in which (A) the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 are separated; (B) It is a diagram in which an upper unit D4700 and a side lens unit D4800 are connected.

As shown in FIG. 400(A), on the front surface of the side lens unit D4800, a first accessory piece S1 is formed at the connection portion with the upper unit D4700. Further, on the front surface of the upper unit D4700, a second accessory piece S2 is formed at a connection portion with the side lens unit D4800. The first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2 are both part of a complete accessory S, and are incomplete in shape when used alone. When the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are connected, the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2 are combined, and when they are placed adjacent to each other, one accessory piece is completed. A body S is formed.

In this embodiment, the completed body S formed when the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2 are combined is an abstract accessory item, but is not limited to this, for example, A part of the character's body is the first accessory piece S1, the rest of the character is the second accessory piece S2, and the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2 are combined, etc., so that they are adjacent to each other. The character's body may be completed when the characters are arranged as shown in FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the completed accessory S is formed by combining two accessory pieces such as the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2. The number of constituent accessory pieces is not limited to two, and may be three or more, for example.

Note that the complete body S when multiple pieces of accessories are combined does not mean a complete body such as the body of a character, but rather a complete body S such as a complete body of a character. It is sufficient if a cohesive shape is formed. For example, a part of the character's face is the first accessory piece S1, the rest of the character's face is the second accessory piece S2, the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2 are combined, etc. , the face, which is a part of the character's body, may be completed when both are placed adjacent to each other.

[Side lens unit]
Next, the characteristic configuration of the side lens unit D4800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 401(A), 401(B), and 402. FIG. 401 is an example of a perspective view of the side lens unit D4800 viewed diagonally from above on the left front, in which (A) the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 are housed, (B) the outer decorative sheet D4850 and It is a diagram in which a part of the inner decorative sheet D4870 is pulled upward. FIG. 402 is an example of a perspective view of the cross section taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 401, viewed diagonally from above on the left front side.

(lens)
As shown in FIG. 402, the side lens unit D4800 includes an outer lens D4854, which is, for example, colorless and transparent, which is disposed at the outermost side (that is, on the side opposite to the player), and an outer lens D4854, which is, for example, colorless and transparent, which is disposed at the innermost side (that is, on the player's side). It is equipped with a transparent inner lens D4874.

(decorative sheet)
As shown in FIG. 402, a space is formed inside the outer lens D4854 in which a colored transparent outer decorative sheet D4850 can be set, for example. In this space, the outer decorative sheet D4850 is set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. In addition, the outer decorative sheet D4850 has a protrusion D4850a (see FIGS. 401(A) and (B)), and by pulling the protrusion D4850a upward, it is set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. It is possible to pull out the outer decorative sheet D4850 upward. The protrusion D4850a is exposed unless the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, by pulling the projection D4850a upward while the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame body D4600, the outer decorative sheet D4850 can be replaced with another decorative sheet.

As shown in FIG. 402, a space is formed inside the inner lens D4874 in which a colored transparent inner decorative sheet D4870 can be set, for example. In this space, the inner decorative sheet D4870 is set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. In addition, the inner decorative sheet D4870 has a projection D4870a (see FIGS. 401(A) and (B)), and by pulling this projection D4870a upward, it is set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. It is possible to pull out the inner decorative sheet D4870 upward. The protrusion D4870a is exposed unless the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, by pulling the projection D4870a upward while the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the inner decorative sheet D4870 can be replaced with another decorative sheet.

Note that the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 may be decorative sheets of different colors, or may be decorative sheets of the same color.

As shown in FIG. 401(A), an outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4852 and an inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4872 are formed at the connecting portion of the side lens unit D4800 with the upper unit D4700. By inserting the outer decorative sheet D4850 from the outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4852, the outer decorative sheet D4850 can be set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. Further, by inserting the inner decorative sheet D4870 from the inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4872, the inner decorative sheet D4870 can be set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874.

In this way, by making the outer lens D4854 and the inner lens D4874 colorless and transparent, and by making the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 colored and transparent, the visibility of the outer lens D4854 and the inner lens D4874 is improved. You can change the color of the inner decorative sheet D4870. In this embodiment, by simply disconnecting the outer decorative sheet D4850 and/or the inner decorative sheet D4870 from the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800, you can easily replace it with another decorative sheet to change the appearance. This makes it possible to improve functionality.

(Light guide plate)
As shown in FIG. 402, on the inside side of the outer decorative sheet D4850, there is a base end (attached to the frame body D4600) so that the image can be viewed from the outside (i.e., the side opposite to the player) by surface emitting light. An outer light guide plate D4856 is disposed, which is processed so that light incident from the end face of the side edge) is reflected outward. The outer light guide plate D4856 is arranged such that the distance from the set outer decorative sheet D4850 is greatest at the base end and gradually decreases toward the distal end. However, this is not essential, and the outer light guide plate D4856 may be arranged parallel to the surface of the set outer decorative sheet D4850.

Further, on the inside side of the inner decorative sheet D4870, for example, light incident from the end surface on the proximal end side is reflected inward so that the image can be viewed from the inside (i.e., the player side) by surface emission. An inner light guide plate D4876 processed as shown in FIG. The inner light guide plate D4876 is arranged such that the distance from the set inner decorative sheet D4870 is greatest at the base end and gradually decreases toward the distal end. However, this is not essential, and the inner light guide plate D4876 may be arranged parallel to the surface of the set inner decorative sheet D4870.

Between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876, for example, light incident from the end surface on the proximal end side is directed outward and inward so that images can be viewed from both the outside and the inside due to surface emission. A central light guide plate D4862 processed to reflect light is arranged. The center light guide plate D4862 has a longer distance from the base end to the tip end than either the outer light guide plate D4856 or the inner light guide plate D4876. The central light guide plate D4862 is parallel to the inner light guide plate D4876, but not parallel to the outer light guide plate D4856, but is not limited thereto. For example, while the central light guide plate D4862 and the outer light guide plate D4856 are parallel, the inner light guide plate D4876 may not be parallel, or it may be parallel to both the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876. .

In this way, from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 (ie, the side opposite to the player), an image that is a composite of the image appearing on the central light guide plate D4862 and the image appearing on the inner light guide plate D4876 can be viewed. On the other hand, from inside the side lens unit D4800 (ie, from the player's side), an image that is a composite of the image appearing on the central light guide plate D4862 and the image appearing on the outer light guide plate D4856 can be viewed. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the image visible from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image visible from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 different images, and the functionality can be improved.

(LED board)
As shown in FIG. 402, an LED board D4880 is arranged at the base end of the side lens unit D4800. On the LED board D4880, three LED rows D4881, D4882, and D4883 are arranged in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in each row along the vertical direction. The three LED rows D4881, D4882, and D4883 correspond to the outer light guide plate D4856, the center light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876, respectively. That is, in the LED board D4880, three LED rows D4881, D4882, and D4883 are arranged on the end surface of the base end side of the outer light guide plate D4856, the end surface of the center light guide plate D4862 on the base end side, and the inner light guide plate. It is arranged so as to face the end surface on the proximal end side of D4876. When light enters from the end face on the base end side of each light guide plate D4856, D4862, D4876, each light guide plate D4856, D4862, D4876 emits surface light, and an image can be visually recognized.

Note that all the LEDs arranged on the LED board D4880 may be controlled to emit light or/and turn off, but instead of or in addition to this, the LEDs may be controlled to emit light or/and turn off independently for each column. By turning off the light, only one of the outer light guide plate D4856, the center light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876 may emit surface light. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to the above, by independently emitting and/or extinguishing only some LEDs in the vertical direction, only a certain surface of each light guide plate D4856, D4862, D4876 in the vertical direction can be may be surface-emitted. By doing so, images of various variations can be displayed so as to be visually recognized, and functionality can be improved.

(front lens)
As shown in FIGS. 401(A), (B), and FIG. 402, a front lens D4860 that can emit light by light emitted from the tip of the central light guide plate D4862 is arranged at the tip of the side lens unit D4800. There is.

As described above, in this embodiment, the central light guide plate D4862 is processed so that the light incident from the end surface on the base end side is reflected outward and inward. However, in order for more of the light incident from the end face on the proximal side of the central light guide plate D4862 to reach the front lens D4860, there may be no processing or only slight processing. good. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the amount of light at the front lens D4860. Even if the central light guide plate D4862 is not processed or only slightly processed, the outer light guide plate D4856 is processed so that the image can be viewed from the outside due to surface emission. , when the inner light guide plate D4876 is provided so that the image can be viewed from the inside by surface emission, the image that can be viewed from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image that can be viewed from the inside of the side lens unit D4800, It becomes possible to create different images, and functionality can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the front lens D4860 can emit light using the light emitted from the tip of the central light guide plate D4862, but is not limited to this. It may be possible to emit light by the emitted light, or it may be made to be able to emit light by the light emitted from the tips of all of the outer light guide plate D4856, the central light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876.

(Modified example of side lens unit)
In the above, the outer light guide plate D4856 is processed so that the light incident from the end face on the base end side is reflected outward, and the inner light guide plate D4876 is processed from the end face on the base end side. The central light guide plate D4862 is processed so that the incident light is reflected inward, and the central light guide plate D4862 is processed so that the light incident from the end face on the base end side is reflected outward and inward. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the outer light guide plate D4856 is one of the following light guide plates (A) to (E), the central light guide plate D4862 is one of the following light guide plates (A) to (E), The inner light guide plate D4876 may be one of the following light guide plates (A) to (E). By doing this, the image visible from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image visible from the inside can be different images, or the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 can be the same image. Alternatively, it is possible to make the image visible from either the outside or the inside of the side lens unit D4800, but not from the other side.
(a) A light guide plate with a process that reflects the light incident from the proximal end face toward the outside. (b) A light guide plate with a process that reflects the light incident from the proximal end face inward. (c) A light guide plate that is processed to reflect the light incident from the end face on the proximal end side toward both the outside and the inside (the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside are the same) (Processed to look like an image)
(d) A light guide plate that is processed to reflect the light incident from the end surface on the proximal end side toward both the outside and the inside (so that the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside are different) (processed)
(E) A light guide plate that is not processed or only slightly processed so that most of the light incident from the end face on the proximal side proceeds to the end face on the distal side.

Furthermore, the side lens unit D4800 is configured such that all or at least a portion of the outer light guide plate D4856, the inner light guide plate D4876, and the center light guide plate D4862 can be easily replaced with other light guide plates. It is preferable. By doing this, if you prepare multiple variations of the outer light guide plate and multiple variations of the inner light guide plate in advance, you can easily replace the outer light guide plate and/or the inner light guide plate by simply replacing the outer light guide plate and/or the inner light guide plate. It becomes possible to change the appearance image and improve functionality.

In the above, the central light guide plate D4862 is arranged between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876, but instead of or in addition to this, light is arranged between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876. A partition plate D4863 that can be blocked may be arranged. By doing this, light is blocked between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876, so the outer decorative sheet D4850 may not be visible or visible from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 (i.e., from the player's side). This is difficult, and the inner decorative sheet D4870 cannot be seen or is difficult to see from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 (ie, the side opposite to the player). Therefore, it is possible to make the visibility different when viewed from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 and when viewed from the outside, so that independent images appear both inside and outside the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, functionality can be improved.

[Upper unit]
Next, the characteristic configuration of the upper unit D4700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 403 to 406. FIG. 403 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 closed, viewed diagonally from below on the left front side. FIG. 404 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 semi-open, viewed diagonally from below on the left front side, in which the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 are housed. It is. FIG. 405 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 as seen diagonally from below on the left front side, with a portion of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 pulled out downward. In FIG. 405, illustration of the opening/closing door D4730 is omitted for convenience. FIG. 406 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 semi-opened, viewed from diagonally downward on the right rear side, in which the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 are housed. It is.

(upper lens)
The upper unit D4700 includes, for example, a colorless and transparent upper outer lens D4742 (see FIG. 406) disposed on the outermost side (that is, on the side opposite to the player), and a colorless and transparent upper lens that is disposed on the innermost side (that is, on the player side). and an inner lens D4744 (see FIGS. 403 to 405).

(opening/closing door)
As shown in FIG. 403, an opening/closing door D4730 is provided at the connection portion of the upper unit D4700 with the side lens unit D4800. This opening/closing door D4730 is provided with the above-mentioned engaging portion D4720 that engages with the engaging groove D4830 (see FIGS. 399 and 401(A)) of the side lens unit D4800.

The proximal end of the opening/closing door D4730 has a locked state in which the opening/closing door D4730 is locked to prevent it from opening with respect to the opening/closing door base D4735 (see FIG. 404), which will be described later, and a locked state in which the opening/closing door D4730 is unlocked. An opening/closing operation section D4722 is provided that can be switched to a released state. For example, turning this opening/closing operation part D4722 clockwise brings it into a locked state, and turning it counterclockwise brings it into a released state.

When the opening/closing operation part D4722 is turned counterclockwise, for example, to release the opening/closing operation part D47222, the opening/closing operation part D47222 can be rotated about one end D4732 of the opening/closing door D4730, and the opening/closing operation part D4722 can be rotated using the opening/closing door base D4735 (described later). (see FIG. 404), the opening/closing operation part D4722 can be opened. Therefore, the opening/closing door D4730 can be opened from the opening/closing door base D4735 manually by simply turning the opening/closing operation part D4722, without using tools or the like, and the functionality can be improved.

(Top decorative sheet)
As shown in FIG. 404, when the opening/closing operation part D4722 is opened, the opening/closing door base D4735 is exposed. This opening/closing door base D4735 is fixedly attached to the upper unit D4700 using, for example, screws.

An upper outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4752 (see FIGS. 404 and 406) and an upper inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4772 (see FIGS. 405 and 406) are formed in the opening/closing door base D4735. Then, by inserting, for example, a colored transparent upper outer decorative sheet D4750 from the upper outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4752, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 can be set parallel to the surface of the upper outer lens D4742. Further, by inserting, for example, a colored transparent upper inner decorative sheet D4770 from the upper inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4772, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. In this specification, the "upper decorative sheet" is a general concept that includes both the "upper outer decorative sheet D4750" and the "upper inner decorative sheet D4770."

Furthermore, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 may be decorative sheets of different colors, or may be decorative sheets of the same color. Further, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 may be decorative sheets of a different color from the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870, or may be decorative sheets of the same color.

As shown in FIG. 405, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 has a projection D4750a, and by pulling this projection D4750a downward, the upper outer decorative sheet is set parallel to the surface of the upper outer lens D4742. It is possible to pull out the D4750 downward. Similarly, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 has a protrusion D4770a, and by pulling the protrusion D4770a downward, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 set parallel to the surface of the upper inner lens D4744 is pulled downward. It is possible to pull it out. The protrusion D4750a and the protrusion D4770a are exposed unless the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, you can replace the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and/or the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 with another decorative sheet by simply pulling the protrusion D4750a and/or the protrusion D4770a downward, without using tools or the like. It becomes possible to change the appearance and improve functionality.

In this way, by making the upper outer lens D4742 and the upper inner lens D4744 colorless and transparent, and by making the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 colored and transparent, the visibility of the upper outer lens D4742 and the upper inner lens D4744 is improved. , the colors of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be changed. In this embodiment, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and/or the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be easily attached to other upper decorative sheets by simply opening the opening/closing door D4730 with respect to the opening/closing door base D4735 fixed to the upper unit D4700. It can be replaced and its functionality can be increased. Although FIG. 406 shows the opening/closing door D4730 being partially opened, replacing the decorative sheet will be easier if the opening/closing door D4730 is opened at an angle of 90 degrees or more relative to the surface of the opening/closing door base D4735 (see FIG. 404).

Although not shown in FIGS. 404 to 406, a light guide plate and a light emitting device are provided inside the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 so that the image can be viewed from the outside (i.e., from the side opposite the player) by surface emitting light. A source may also be provided. Similarly, a light guide plate and a light emitting source may be provided inside the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 so that the image can be viewed from the inside (ie, from the player side) using, for example, surface illumination.

[Frame, glass unit]
Next, the characteristic structure of the frame D4600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 407 to 410. FIG. 407 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950 in a state where the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, as viewed diagonally from above on the right rear side. FIG. 408 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950, which are separated from each other, as viewed diagonally from above on the right rear side. FIG. 409 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950, which are separated from each other, as viewed diagonally from above on the right side. FIG. 410 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the glass unit D4950 viewed from diagonally above and behind on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 408, hook portions D4612 are formed at two locations on the upper rear side of the frame D4600.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 408 and 409, engagement holes D4952 are formed at two locations on the top of the glass unit D4950. The two engagement holes D4952 correspond to the two hooks D4612, respectively. By engaging each of the two engagement holes D4952 with the corresponding hook portion D4612, the glass unit D4950 can be hooked and supported on the frame D4600. After the glass unit D4950 is supported on the frame D4600, the glass unit D4950 is fixed at the lower rear side of the frame D4600 using fixing members D4762 and D4762L (see FIG. 407) that can be simply slid left and right. In this way, the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame body D4600 manually by sliding the fixing members D4762 and D4762L left and right (in the "LOCK" direction shown in FIG. 408), especially using tools. It is possible to improve functionality.

As shown in FIG. 409, an opening D4614 is formed in the frame D4600 (more specifically, both the base part D4610 and the unit part D4620). Moreover, a projecting portion D4953 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the glass unit D4950. Then, insert the protrusion D4953 of the glass unit D4950 into the opening D4614 of the frame D4600, engage the two engagement holes D4952 with each of the two hooks D4612, and attach it to the base D4610. Support the glass unit D4950.

Note that the protruding portion D4953 formed on the front side of the glass unit D4950 is inclined so that the amount of protrusion toward the front side is largest at the upper portion, and the amount of protrusion toward the front side decreases toward the bottom.

By the way, in FIG. 409, the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 (see FIG. 393) are not attached to the frame D4600, but the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600. After that, the glass unit D4950 is supported on the base portion D4610.

As shown in FIG. 410, the glass unit D4950 includes a glass frame D4951 in which the above-described protrusion D4953 is formed, and a front glass D4962 and a rear glass D4964 supported by the glass frame D4951.

The glass frame D4951 has an opening D4954 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flange D4955 is formed at the peripheral edge of the frontmost surface of the opening D4954 (that is, the frontmost surface of the overhang D4953). Further, a rear glass insertion groove D4956 for gripping a rear glass D4964 is formed in the lower part of the rear side of the glass frame D4951.

The front glass D4962 is attached to the glass frame D4951 by bringing the front glass D4962 into contact with a flange D4955 formed at the peripheral edge of the opening D4954 of the glass frame D4951 and fixing it with a fixed cover D4966. The fixed cover D4966 is fixed to the glass frame D4951 with, for example, screws. In this way, the front glass D4962 is arranged so as to close the opening D4954 from the front side of the overhang D4953.

To obtain the rear glass D4964, insert the lower part of the rear glass D4964 into the rear glass insertion groove D4956 formed at the lower part of the rear side of the glass frame D4951, and attach the rear glass D4964 with the fasteners D4960 at the two upper parts of the left and right corners. Fix it. In this way, the rear glass D4964 is arranged so as to close the opening D4954 on the rear surface of the glass frame D4951.

In addition, in the said embodiment, although the front glass D4962, the overhang part D4953, and the glass frame D4951 are formed of separate members, they may be integrally formed, for example, with a light-transmitting synthetic resin.

[Installation procedure for upper unit, side lens unit, and glass unit]
Next, a procedure for attaching the upper unit D4700, side lens unit D4800, and glass unit D4950 to the frame body D4600 will be explained.

First, the side lens unit D4800 (see FIG. 393) is temporarily attached to the frame D4600 (see FIG. 393). By simply engaging the engaging portion D4822 (see FIG. 397) formed at the rear of the side lens unit D4800 with the engaging hole D4650 (see FIG. 394) formed in the frame D4600, the side lens can be attached to the frame D4600. Unit D4800 can be temporarily installed.

In the temporarily attached state where the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the hook-shaped engagement portion D4822 is simply hooked into the engagement hole D4650, so manual work such as lifting the side lens unit D4800 is required. Therefore, the side lens unit D4800 can be easily removed from the frame body D4600, and functionality can be improved. In addition, in the temporarily attached state where the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame body D4600, the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 (see FIGS. 399(A) and 399(B)) can be easily attached to other decorative sheets. It can be replaced with . Furthermore, if all or at least some of the outer light guide plate D4856, inner light guide plate D4876, and center light guide plate D4862 are configured to be easily replaceable with other light guide plates, these light guide plates may be replaced with other light guide plates. The light plate can also be easily replaced with another light guide plate in the temporarily attached state.

Next, in the temporarily attached state where the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the upper unit D4700 is slid from the front to the rear and attached to the side lens unit D4800, and then the locking member D4760 is attached. , D4760L (see FIG. 410), the upper unit D4700 can be manually fixed to the frame D4600 so that it cannot be easily removed. In this case, unless the engaging portion D4720 and the engaging groove D4830 are properly engaged, the locking mechanism using the locking members D4760 and D4760L (see FIG. 410) cannot lock.

Then, when the upper unit D4700 is attached or fixed to the frame D4600, the side lens unit D4800 changes from the temporarily attached state to the permanently attached state to the frame D4600. In the main attached state, movement of the side lens unit D4800 with respect to the frame D4600 is restricted, and a locked state occurs in which the side lens unit D4800 cannot be removed from the frame D4600. In addition, in the above-described fully installed state, the movement of the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 (see FIGS. 399(A) and (B)) with respect to the side lens unit D4800 is restricted, and they cannot be replaced with other decorative sheets. state. Furthermore, even if it is possible to easily replace all or at least part of the outer light guide plate D4856, inner light guide plate D4876, and center light guide plate D4862 with other light guide plates in the temporarily installed state, Then, the movement of these light guide plates with respect to the side lens unit D4800 is also restricted, and it becomes impossible to replace them with other light guide plates.

In addition, in the temporarily attached state where the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame body D4600, since the upper unit D4700 is not yet attached, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 (see FIG. 403) are attached. Can be easily replaced with other decorative sheets. However, in the main installation state where the upper unit D4700 is fixed to the frame body D4600, the movement of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 with respect to the upper unit D4700 is restricted, and they cannot be replaced with other decorative sheets. state.

Further, as described above, the glass unit D4950 is attached to the base portion D4610 after the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame body D4600. In this case, as shown in FIG. 408, the lock members D4760, D4760L for fixing the upper unit D4700 to the frame body D4600 are covered by the glass unit D4950, and the lock members D4760, D4760L cannot be operated. becomes.

By the way, after the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600, but before the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, the upper unit D4700 can be opened by operating the locking members D4760 and D4760L. It is possible to remove it from the frame D4600. However, if the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, the lock members D4760 and D4760L cannot be operated as described above, so unless the glass unit D4950 is removed from the frame D4600, the lock members D4760 and D4760L cannot be operated. Upper unit D4700 cannot be removed. Furthermore, by covering the locking members D4760 and D4760L with the glass unit D4950, it is possible to prevent the upper unit D4700 from being unlocked by the locking members D4760 and D4760L due to unintentional contact on the hole side, and it is possible to easily do it manually. Although each member can be assembled and disassembled, security can be improved.

Moreover, as described above with reference to FIG. 400, when the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are connected, the first accessory piece S1 formed on the front surface of the side lens unit D4800 and the front surface of the upper unit D4700 The formed second accessory piece S2 is combined to form the completed body S of the first accessory. In this embodiment, movement of both the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 relative to the frame D4600 can be restricted mainly manually using tools or the like. Therefore, it is only a simple assembly such as attaching the upper unit D4700 to the frame body D4600 and side lens unit D4800 that are in the temporarily attached state, without performing positioning etc. of the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2. Thus, it becomes possible to form a complete body S of one accessory. Moreover, the form of the completed body S of one accessory does not collapse unless the upper unit D4700 is removed from the frame body D4600 or the side lens unit D4800.

In this way, in this embodiment, while it is possible to easily replace the component parts etc. in the temporarily installed state, the components etc. are locked in the permanently installed state by simple manual assembly, and the components etc. By covering the member that locks the other parts with other members, it is possible not only to reduce the number of parts but also to improve functionality and security.

In this embodiment, the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame body D4600 as an example. The upper unit D4700 can be moved easily and freely by hand, and the movement of the side lens unit D4800 with respect to the frame D4600 is restricted by manually attaching the upper unit D4700 to the frame D4600 in the temporarily attached state. I explained that it can be done. However, this is just an example, and the frame body D4600, side lens unit D4800, and/or upper unit D4700 may be replaced with other members. As an example of application to other members, a movable accessory that operates according to the progress of a game such as the result of a lottery will be briefly explained. The above-mentioned movable accessory is composed of at least a base member, and a first member and a second member that are detachable from the base member, and the first member is attached to the base member at a first position (e.g., an attachment position). ) to a second position where it is separated from the base member (e.g., a removal position), and when the second member is attached with the first member attached to the base member in the first position, the second member is attached to the base member in the first position. By restricting the movement of one member and placing the first member in a locked state, the same effects as the present invention can be achieved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the decorative sheets D4850, D4870 and the light guide plates D4856, D4876, D4862 can be easily replaced in the temporarily attached state, and that their movement is restricted in the permanently attached state. Instead of or in addition to the decorative sheets D4850, D4870 and the light guide plates D4856, D4876, D4862, other members can be easily replaced in the temporarily installed state, and the movement of the other members is regulated in the permanently installed state. You can do it like this.

[13. 13th pachinko machine]
Below, a thirteenth pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained. It should be noted that the same or similar components as those related to the first to twelfth pachinko gaming machines will be given the same names or the same symbols, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The thirteenth pachinko game machine has a performance accessory unit 58E (see FIGS. 11, 12, etc. described later) in place of the performance accessory group 58, 1058, 2058 (see FIGS. 4, 69, 87, etc.). ), and the configuration of this performance accessory unit 58E is greatly different from the configuration of the performance accessory group 58, 1058, 2058 described above. The other configurations are basically the same as those of the first to twelfth pachinko gaming machines, so a description thereof will be omitted. Below, the performance accessories unit 58E will be explained using FIGS. 411 to 432.

The performance accessory unit 58E is controlled by, for example, a sub-control circuit (not shown here, but a control circuit similar to the above-described sub-control circuits 300, 1300, 2300, and 4300). At least one or more of the performance accessories in the performance accessory unit 58E or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory may be used during variable display of the special symbol or during variable display of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It functions as a performance accessory that can be activated when it stops.

FIG. 411 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10E included in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position. The standby position corresponds to the position when no game is being played or when no performance is being performed by the performance accessory unit 58E even if a game is being played.

FIG. 412 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10E included in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the performance position. The performance position corresponds to, for example, the position when the special symbol advances to the front of the display area of the display device 7E (see FIG. 411) under the control of the sub-control circuit based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The display device 7E, like the display devices 7, 1007, 2007, and 4007 described above, has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game.

In addition, on the front side of the game board unit 10E, similar to the first to twelfth pachinko game machines, there is a game area where the fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail, a center accessory, a first starting port, It includes a general prize opening, a passing gate unit, a special electric accessory unit, a second starting opening, a normal electric accessory unit, an LED unit, an out exit, a back unit, an LED unit, etc., but they are not described here including illustrations and reference numbers. The explanation will be omitted.

[11-1. Performance role unit]
As can be seen from FIGS. 411 and 412, the performance accessory unit 58E is located on the front side of the pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "front side" or "front side") when it is in the standby position and when it is in the performance position. (sometimes referred to as ``)''. Note that, as described above, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine is the forward direction. In addition, as mentioned above, the back side of the pachinko game machine is backward, the left side when looking at the pachinko game machine from the front side is the left side, and the right side when looking at the pachinko game machine from the front side is the right side. The top side of the pachinko machine is the top direction, and the bottom side of the pachinko game machine is the bottom direction.

Next, the change in appearance when the performance accessory unit 58E is moved from the standby position to the performance position will be described with reference to FIGS. 413 to 415.

FIG. 413 is an example of a perspective view of the performance accessory unit 58E viewed diagonally from above on the right front, in which (A) the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, (B) the performance accessory unit 58E is in the performance position. FIG. FIG. 414 is an example of a front view showing the performance accessory unit 58E, and shows (A) when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, and (B) when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the performance position. FIG. FIG. 415 is an example of a right side view showing the performance accessory unit 58E, in which (A) the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, (B) the performance accessory unit 58E is in the performance position, FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 413 to 415, the performance accessory unit 58E mainly includes a first performance accessory 59E, a second performance accessory 60E, and an accessory lifting unit 61E.

The first performance accessory 59E is arranged in front of the second performance accessory 60E, and is supported by the accessory lifting unit 61E via the second performance accessory 60E.

The second performance accessory 60E is arranged on the back side of the first performance accessory 59E, and is supported by the accessory lifting unit 61E.

The accessory lifting unit 61E includes a support member 612E that supports at least the second performance accessory 60E, and an elevator capable of vertically operating at least the second performance accessory 60E on the front side of the display area of the display device 7E. It includes a mechanism 614E and a motor (not shown) as a drive source.

In addition, since the first performance accessory 59E is attached to the second performance accessory 60E, it is supported by the support member 612E via the second performance accessory 60E, and the second performance accessory 59E is moved by the accessory lifting unit 61E. When the accessory 60E moves up and down, the first performance accessory 59E also moves up and down accordingly.

Further, the accessory lifting unit 61E can operate the first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E in the vertical direction, but instead of or in addition to this, it can operate the first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E. The second performance accessory 60E may be operable in left and right directions, diagonal directions, etc.

The first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E will be explained below. In addition, since the mechanism for moving the first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E up and down has a known configuration, a description of the accessory lifting unit 61E will be omitted.

[11-1-1. 1st performance role]
First, the first performance accessory 59E will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 413 to 415, the first performance accessory 59E mainly includes a first decoration part 591E and a front lens part 592E.

The first decorative part 591E is a plate-shaped member having a decorative part 5911E on the front surface with, for example, a logo or motif drawn thereon, and when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the first decorative part 591E is As shown in (A), the decorative portion 5911E on the front side of the first decorative portion 591E can be visually recognized from the front side.

Although the details will be described later, the front lens portion 592E is a plate-shaped performance accessory that can perform a light-emitting effect, and when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, as shown in FIG. 415(A). In addition, it is located on the back side of the first decorative part 591E, overlapping the first decorative part 591E in a substantially parallel manner. In this manner, when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the front lens portion 592E cannot be visually recognized from the front side, or it is difficult to visually recognize the front lens portion 592E. In addition, when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the front lens section 592E does not perform a light emission effect, but this is not essential, and it is possible to understand that the light is emitted behind the first decoration section 591E. A light-emitting effect may also be performed.

When the production accessories unit 58E operates from the standby position to the production position, as shown in FIGS. The first performance accessory actuating mechanism 62E (see FIG. 416, etc. described later) rotates approximately 90 degrees toward the front with the lower end as the base end. That is, in the standby position, the first decorative part 591E, which can be seen from the front side, is tilted so that the decorative part 5911E faces downward in the production position. Further, the front lens portion 592E is rotated approximately 90° toward the front side with respect to the first decorative portion 591E by a rotation mechanism 5923E (see FIGS. 421 and 424 described later), which will be described later. That is, in the standby position, the front lens part 592E, which was not visible from the front side because it was located on the back side of the first decorative part 591E, is at an angle of about 90 degrees with respect to the first decorative part 591E (for example, in the horizontal direction) in the production position. Stand up at an angle. Furthermore, a predetermined space separated in the front-back direction is created between the front lens part 592E and the second performance accessory 60E. The mechanism of this first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E will be explained with reference to FIGS. 416 to 420.

FIG. 416 is an example of a perspective view of the first performance accessory 59E, the second performance accessory 60E, and the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E, viewed diagonally from above on the right side. FIG. 417 is an example of a perspective view of the first performance accessory 59E and the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E viewed from diagonally above and behind the right side. FIG. 418 is an example of a plan view of the first performance accessory 59E, the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E, and the second performance accessory 60E. FIG. 419 is an example of a plan view of the first performance accessory 59E and the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E. FIG. 420 is an example of a right side view of the first performance accessory 59E, the second performance accessory 60E, and the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E at the performance position, viewed from the right side. In addition, in FIGS. 416 and 418, the second performance accessory 60E is illustrated so that the positional relationship with the second performance accessory 60E can be understood. On the other hand, in FIGS. 417 and 419, illustration of the second performance accessory 60E is omitted for convenience so that the structure of the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E can be easily understood.

The first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E includes a rotating shaft 626E, a plate member 630E, a cam 632E, and a link member 634E.

The rotating shaft 626E is a shaft member whose longitudinal direction is in the horizontal left-right direction at the lower rear of the second performance accessory 60E. This rotating shaft 626E is connected to the first decorative portion 591E via a cam 632E and a link member 634E. In addition, a rotation shaft side gear 628E is extrapolated to the left side of the rotation shaft 626E. Power from a motor (not shown) serving as a drive source is transmitted to the rotating shaft side gear 628E.

The plate member 630E is a longitudinal member, and is provided in a plate member accommodating portion 5912E formed on the rear surface of the first decorative portion 591E so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the first decorative portion 591E. It will be accommodated accordingly. The plate-like member 630E is arranged such that the vertical direction (approximately the vertical direction shown in FIG. 415(A), and the approximately front-rear direction shown in FIG. 415(B)) of the first decorative portion 591E is the longitudinal direction. It is accommodated in the accommodation section 5912E. The plate-like member 630E has a rack 6302E at one end in the longitudinal direction (hereinafter, one end of the plate-like member 630E in the longitudinal direction is referred to as "the tip of the plate-like member 630E"). This rack 6302E is threadedly engaged with a gear 59231E formed in a rotation mechanism 5923E provided at the lower end of the front lens portion 592E (lower end in the production position shown in FIG. 415(B)).

As shown in FIG. 418, a guide hole 6306E is formed in the plate member 630E along the longitudinal direction. This guide hole 6306E is slidably tightened by a screw with a washer 636E fixed to the back surface of the first decorative portion 591E, and the sliding range is regulated by the screw with a washer 636E. That is, the plate member 630E is movable between the front end side and the rear end side using the washer-equipped screw 636E as a starting point.

Note that two guide holes 6306E are formed in the front-rear direction on each of the left and right sides of the plate member 630E. This allows the plate member 630E to smoothly slide on the first decorative portion 591E.

As shown in FIG. 417, one end of the cam 632E is connected to the rotating shaft 626E, and when the rotating shaft 626E rotates, the cam 632E rotates coaxially with the rotating shaft 626E. A link member 634E is connected to the other end of the cam 632E.

One end of the link member 634E is connected to the cam 632E, and the other end is connected to the first decorative portion 591E.

In this specification, the connecting portion between the cam 632E and the link member 634E is referred to as a first connecting portion 6342E, and the connecting portion between the link member 634E and the first decorative portion 591E is referred to as a second connecting portion 6344E.

The first decorative portion 591E is connected to left and right rotation shafts 624E, and is rotatable about the rotation shafts 624E. Note that when the first decorative portion 591E rotates about the rotation axis 624E, the plate member 630E and the front lens portion 592E also rotate accordingly. That is, the rotation axis 624E functions as a rotation axis of the first performance accessory 59E.

For example, a spring 638 as an elastic member is provided on each of the left and right rotation shafts 624E, as shown in FIG. 418, for example. This spring 638 biases the rotating shaft 624E in a clockwise direction. The biasing force of the spring 638 can prevent the first performance accessory 59E from tilting forward when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 416, 418, and 420, side guides 610E are provided on both left and right sides of the second performance accessory 60E. This side guide 610E will be described later.

Next, the operation mode of the first performance accessory 59E by the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E will be briefly explained with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. FIG. 421 is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate member 630E and the front lens portion 592E in the standby position. FIG. 422 is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate-like member 630E and the front lens portion 592E at the presentation position. Note that in FIGS. 421 and 422, illustration of the first decorative portion 591E is omitted for convenience of explanation. Further, although the rotation shaft 624E is not illustrated in FIGS. 421 and 422, for convenience of explanation, the reference numeral of the rotation shaft 624E is attached to the position where the rotation shaft 624E originally exists.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 421 and 422, the side guide 610E is formed with a plate-shaped member guide groove 611E whose longitudinal direction is in the front-rear direction. Further, the plate member 630E has a rear end support portion 6304E formed at the rear end portion in the longitudinal direction. This rear end support portion 6304E is movable within the plate-like member guiding groove 611E. For example, the rear end support portion 6304E protrudes from the plate-like member 630E in a substantially L-shape, and a roller, for example, is provided at the protruding portion. This roller allows the plate-like member to move smoothly within the guide groove 611E. However, if the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate-like member 630E can move smoothly within the plate-like member guide groove 611E, the roller is not necessarily essential.

The plate-like member guiding groove 611E formed in the side guide 610E is formed in the front-rear direction, and the groove formed in the front-rear direction is formed obliquely upward as a whole from the front side to the rear side. has been done. A groove is formed upward at the rearmost end. In other words, the path has a gentle uphill slope and a steep rise at the end. This plate-like member guide groove 611E, in which the rear end support portion 6304E can move, is defined as a range in which the plate-like member 630E, which is slidable with respect to the first decorative portion 591E, can move.

Hereinafter, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, clockwise and counterclockwise refer to clockwise and counterclockwise in the right side view as shown in FIG. 420, for example.

(Operation mode of the first performance accessory E by the first performance accessory operation mechanism)
The operation mode of the first performance accessory 59E when the performance accessory unit 58E (for example, see FIG. 413) moves from the standby position toward the performance position by the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E is as follows.

At the presentation position, for example, as shown in FIG. 415(A), the front lens portion 592E is located on the back side of the first decorative portion 591E, overlapping the first decorative portion 591E in a substantially parallel manner.

Returning to FIG. 421, in the presentation position, when the rotating shaft 626E (for example, see FIG. 417) rotates counterclockwise by the drive of a motor (not shown), the cam 632E rotates counterclockwise coaxially with the rotating shaft 626E. When the cam 632E rotates counterclockwise, the first connecting portion 6342E rotates counterclockwise around the rotating shaft 626E (for example, see FIG. 417). Then, the second connecting part 6344E begins to move forward, and the first performance accessory 59E (first decoration part 591E, front lens part 592E) rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 624E. .

By the way, the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate-like member 630E is located at the front end of the plate-like member guide groove 611E in the presentation position. Further, the position of this rear end support portion 6304E in the production position is shifted from the rotation axis 624E in the vertical direction (specifically, below the rotation axis 624E). When the first decorative part 591E rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 624E, the plate member 630E also rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 624E as the first decoration part 591E rotates. Rotate to. When the plate member 630E starts rotating counterclockwise around the rotation axis 624E, the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate member 630E moves from the front end in the plate member guide groove 611E. Start moving toward the rear end.

The plate member 630E can rotate about the rotation axis 624E together with the first decoration part 591E while the rear end support part 6304E can freely move. When the movement of the plate-like member 630E in the front-rear direction is restricted, it becomes difficult for the plate-like member 630E to rotate about the rotation axis 624E together with the first decorative part 591E, and the plate-like member 630E becomes difficult to rotate with respect to the first decorative part 591E. The first decorative portion 591E slides and moves toward the rear end side relative to the first decorative portion 591E. While the plate member 630E is rotating together with the first decorative part 591E without sliding (or even if it does, it is only slightly sliding) with respect to the first decorative part 591E, The front lens portion 592E remains substantially parallel to the plate member 630E. Then, when the plate member 630E moves toward the rear end side relative to the first decorative portion 591E, the gear 59231E that is threadedly engaged with the rack 6302E rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 422. At this time, the front lens portion 592E stands up with respect to the plate member 630E, that is, the first decorative portion 591E.

In this way, when the first performance accessory 59E moves from the standby position to the performance position, even if such movement is started, the front lens portion 592E will remain in position for a while (only a moment in time). rotates counterclockwise together with the first decorative part 591E in a folded state without standing up, and starts to raise the front lens part 592E depending on the distance between the rotation shaft 624E and the rear end support part 6304E. can do. That is, it is possible to delay the start of the rotation of the first performance accessory 59E toward the front side and operate the front lens portion 592E in the direction of standing up. Therefore, the front lens part 592E is not operated until a sufficient space is secured between the front lens part 592E and the second performance accessory 60E in the front-rear direction, so the front lens part 592E interferes with the second performance accessory 60E. You can prevent it from happening.

The operating mode of the first performance accessory 59E when the performance accessory unit 58E (for example, see FIG. 413) moves from the standby position toward the performance position by the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E is the same as the operation mode described above. The operation mode is the opposite.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first performance accessory 59E moves from the standby position to the performance position, the plate member 630E is moved toward the rear end side with respect to the first decoration part 591E. Although the front lens portion 592E is made to stand up in the presentation position, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front lens part 592E may be made to stand up at the presentation position by moving the first decorative part 591E toward the distal end side with respect to the plate-like member 630E. Furthermore, by moving the plate-like member 630E toward the rear end side relative to the first decorative portion 591E, and moving the first decorative portion 591E toward the distal end side relative to the plate-like member 630E, the production position can be adjusted. The front lens portion 592E may be made to stand up.

By the way, when the performance accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position to the performance position, the second performance accessory unit 58E, which was not visible from the front side because it was located on the back side of the first decoration part 591E and the front lens part 592E in the standby position, is removed. The front side of the object 60E is exposed. As a result, at the performance position, as shown in FIGS. 413(B) and 414(B), the front surface of the second performance accessory 60E (more specifically, the decoration of the second decorative member 605E shown in FIG. 429 described later) The area 6051E) is now visible from the front side.

In this way, when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the decoration part 5911E of the first decoration part 591E can be seen from the front side, and when the first performance accessory unit 59E is in the performance position, the decoration part 5911E of the first decoration part 591E can be seen from the front side. The portion 592E can be visually recognized from the front side. Note that when the performance accessories unit 58E is in the standby position, the front lens portion 592E is not visible or difficult to see from the front side. Further, when the first performance accessory 59E is in the performance position, the decoration part 5911E of the first decoration part 591E cannot be seen from the front side or is difficult to see.

Here, details of the front lens portion 592E will be explained. FIG. 423 is an example of a perspective view of the front lens portion 592E viewed diagonally from above on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 423, a first lens 5925E is provided on the front side of the front lens section 592E. This first lens 5925E is configured so that the front side emits light by a first front LED 5927E and a second front LED 5928E (both of which will be described later, see FIG. 424).

Further, a second lens 5921E is provided on the back side of the front lens portion 592E. The details of this second lens 5921E will be described later, but the traveling direction of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E, which will be described later, is the same as that of the front side first LED 5927E and the front side second LED 5928E (both described later, see FIG. 424). The direction is changed toward the front side, and the front end surface 59216E of the upright portion 59212E (that is, the outer periphery of the front lens portion 592E), which will be described later, is made to function as an edge light emitting effect. In this way, by emitting edge light at the outer periphery of the front lens portion 592E, it is possible to create a light emitting effect that highlights the outline of the front lens portion 592E, which emits light from the surface, even though the space in which LEDs can be placed is limited. , it becomes possible to increase interest. In particular, when the front lens portion 592E has the shape of a specific character, for example, the outline of the specific character can be highlighted.

FIG. 424 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the front lens portion 592E viewed diagonally from above on the front right side.

As shown in FIG. 424, the front lens section 592E mainly includes a first lens 5925E, a second lens 5921E, an LED board 5922E, a lens holder 5924E, a third lens 5926E, and a rotation mechanism 5923E. Be prepared.

The first lens 5925E, the second lens 5921E, the LED board 5922E, the lens holder 5924E, and the third lens 5926E (more specifically, the flat plate portion 59211E of the third lens 5926E) are arranged substantially parallel to each other.

The rotation mechanism 5923E has a gear 59231E formed on the outer periphery, and when the first performance accessory 59E is tilted, the rotation mechanism 5923E is installed at the tip of, for example, a plate-shaped member (not shown) fixedly connected to the second performance accessory 60E. The front lens part 592E can be rotated in accordance with the tilting movement of the first performance accessory 59E. Thereby, as described above, when the performance accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position to the performance position, the front lens part 592E can be erected forward with respect to the first decorative part 591E. .

The first lens 5925E is a plate-shaped member that is disposed closest to the front side among the members constituting the front lens portion 592E and is capable of transmitting light. The second lens 5921E is a plate-shaped member that is disposed closest to the back side among the members constituting the front lens portion 592E and is capable of transmitting light. An LED board 5922E is arranged between the first lens 5925E and the second lens 5921E. A third lens 5926E and a lens holder 5924E are arranged between the first lens 5925E and the LED board 5922E so that the plate-shaped third lens 5926E that can transmit light is on the front side.

The second lens 5921E mainly includes a flat plate portion 59211E that can transmit light and an upright portion 59212E that can transmit light. The flat plate portion 59211E and the upright portion 59212E are connected such that the radially outer end of the flat plate portion 59211E and the end (rear end) of the upright portion 59212E are substantially orthogonal. That is, the second lens 5921E is a tray-shaped member. A plurality of holes 59214E are formed in the flat plate portion 59211E, which will be described later. The upright portion 59212E stands along the periphery of the flat plate portion 59211E toward the front side at an angle of approximately 90° with respect to the flat plate portion 59211E. In this embodiment, the flat plate part 59211E and the upright part 59212E are made of one member, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be something.

The first lens 5925E is rotated by a rotating mechanism when the LED board 5922E, the third lens 5926E, and the lens holder 5924E are housed in the second lens 5921E (that is, arranged radially inside the upright portion 59212E). It is fitted into the second lens 5921E together with a part of the lens 5923E, and attached to the second lens 5921E with a screw 594 (for example, see FIG. 427 described later). At this time, the standing portion 59212E of the second lens 5921E covers the LED board 5922E, the third lens 5926E, the lens holder 5924E, and the first lens 5925E from the outer periphery. That is, the upright portion 59212E covers the thickness of the front lens portion 592E, and extends from the flat plate portion 59211E toward the front so that the front end surface 59216E is approximately flush with the front surface of the first lens 5925E. It has been extended.

Note that, on the inner surface side of the upright portion 59212E, a cut portion 59215E that is linear in the front-rear direction is formed over the circumferential direction. By doing so, light can be focused on the cut portion 59215E. Furthermore, the LED board 5922E, the third lens 5926E, and the lens holder 5924E housed inside the upright portion 59212E (that is, the concave portion of the second lens 5921E) are removed from the outside (more specifically, from the outer peripheral surface of the upright portion 59212E). It can also be made difficult to see.

The LED board 5922E has a large number of front side first LEDs 5927E and a large number of front side second LEDs 5928E arranged on the front side surface. However, in FIG. 424, for convenience, only some of the front-side first LEDs 5927E and some of the front-side second LEDs 5928E are labeled. The front side first LED 5927E and the front side second LED 5928E are both point-emitting LEDs that can emit light toward the front side. Note that, for example, the first LED 5927E on the front side is a full-color LED, and the second LED 5928E on the front side is a white LED.

The first lens 5925E has a first light emitting section 59251E and a second light emitting section 59252E. The first light emitting section 59251E is an area where the light emitting effect by the first LED 5927E on the front side can be visually recognized, and is made of a material or color (for example, a transparent or white light-transmitting member) that corresponds to the full color light emitting effect. . The second light emitting section 59252E is an area where the light emitting effect by the second LED 5928E on the front side can be visually recognized, and is made of a member or color (for example, a colored light-transmitting member) that corresponds to the white light emitting effect. The third lens 5926E is arranged on the back side of the first light emitting section 59251E, and is made of materials, colors, etc. that correspond to a full color light emission effect.

FIG. 425 is an example of a partially exploded perspective view of the front lens portion 592E in which the LED board 5922E is attached to the second lens 5921E, as viewed diagonally from above on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 425, the LED board 5922E is housed in the second lens 5921E so as to come into contact with the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E (see FIG. 424, FIG. 426(B) described later, etc.). . The LED board 5922E accommodated in the second lens 5921E is held down by a lens presser 5924E.

Lens holder 5924E is a frame-shaped member disposed between LED board 5922E and third lens 5926E. The lens holder 5924E partitions an area emitted by the first LED 5927E on the front side (ie, the first light emitting section 59251E) from an area emitted by the second LED 5928E on the front side (ie, the second light emitting section 59252E). The lens holder 5924E also functions as a base for attaching the third lens 5926E.

Further, the lens holder 5924E has a thickness that allows a predetermined space to be provided between the first front LED 5927E and the second front LED 5928E (that is, the front surface of the LED board 5922E) and the third lens 5926E. . In this way, by providing a predetermined space between the first front LED 5927E and the second front LED 5928E and the third lens 5926E, the light emitted from the first front LED 5927E and the second front LED 5928E toward the front side can be transferred to the front lens section. Surface emission can be performed on the front side of the lens 592E (more specifically, on the front side of the first lens 5925E).

FIG. 426 is a diagram showing an example of the front lens part 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E, in which (A) a front view, (B) a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in the front view, It is. FIG. 427 is an example of a perspective view of the front lens portion 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E, viewed diagonally from above on the left rear side. FIG. 428 is an example of a rear view of the front lens section 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E.

As shown in FIGS. 426 to 428, a plurality (for example, six in FIGS. 426 to 428) of back side LEDs 5929E (see FIG. 426 described later) are arranged on the back side surface of the LED board 5922E. The back side LED 5929E is, for example, a directional, side-emitting, full-color LED that is made of a thin wall and emits light toward one side.

Further, as described above, a plurality of holes 59214E are formed in the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E. A back side LED 5929E placed on the back side of the LED board 5922E is placed in this hole 59214E. The backside LED 5929E emits light in the direction toward the upright portion 59212E of the end surface forming the hole 59214E. The light emitted from the backside LED 5929E toward the end surface forming the hole 59214E travels toward the side, that is, toward the upright portion 59212E. Further, as shown in FIG. 426(B), the thickness of the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E is set so that the light emitted from the rear side LED 5929E travels inside the flat plate portion 59211E without leaking outside. The thickness is such that the LED5929E does not protrude to the back side. In addition, by placing the back side LED 5929E in the hole 59214E formed in the flat plate part 59211E of the second lens 5921E, the thickness of the back side LED 5929E can be absorbed by the thickness of the flat plate part 59211E, which corresponds to the thickness of the back side LED 5929E. There is no need to provide an extra thickness, and the second lens 5921E can be made compact.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 426(B), a sloped portion 59213E is formed at the corner of the second lens 5921E (more specifically, the portion where the flat plate portion 59211E and the upright portion 59212E are connected). . Specifically, the inclined portion 59213E is inclined such that its diameter increases from the outer peripheral edge 59211aE on the back side of the flat plate portion 59211E toward the outer peripheral edge 59212aE of the upright portion 59212E. In this embodiment, the inclined portion 59213E is inclined at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the flat plate portion 59211E. As shown in FIG. 427, the inclined part 59213E is cut substantially linearly in the inclined direction over the entire outer circumference of the upright part 59212E, so that the light emitted from the backside LED 5929E is easily collected. There is. The above-mentioned "cut substantially linearly in an inclined direction" is used because a small step is formed in the middle from the outer peripheral edge 59211aE to the outer peripheral edge 59212aE. Note that the light emitted from the backside LED 5929E tends to gather on this step. Further, it is not essential that the inclination angle of the inclination part 59213E be approximately 45 degrees with respect to the flat plate part 59211E, but as long as the angle allows the light focused on the inclination part 59213 to proceed forward. good.

In this way, by providing the inclined portion 59213E cut linearly in the inclined direction at the corner of the second lens 5921E, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E (that is, the inside of the flat plate portion 59211E is (light traveling toward the outside in the radial direction) can be reflected by the inclined portion 6921E to change the traveling direction. Although some of the light that has traveled inside the flat plate portion 59211E toward the upright portion 59212E passes through the inclined portion 6921E, it tends to gather on the inclined portion 59213E. Then, the light gathered on the inclined part 59213E changes the traveling direction from the light emitted from the backside LED 5929E and travels inside the upright part 59212E toward the front side (see the enlarged view of FIG. 426(B)). ), the front end surface 59216E of the front lens portion 592E emits edge light.

That is, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E arranged on the back side of the LED board 5922E gathers on the inclined part 59213E and then travels toward the front side, making it possible to cause the front side of the front lens part 592E to emit edge light. can. Moreover, the light emitted from the front side first LED 5927E and the front side second LED 5928E arranged on the front surface of the LED board 5922E can cause the front side of the front lens part 592E to emit light from the front side. Therefore, both the light emitted from the front side first LED 5927E and the front side second LED 5928E arranged on the front side of the LED board 5922E, and the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E arranged on the back side of the LED board 5922E, cause the front lens to It becomes possible to cause the front side of the portion 592E to emit light.

When developing a gaming machine, it is necessary to arrange each LED 5927E, 59278E, and 59279E in a limited space, but by placing the LEDs on different surfaces such as the front side and the back side of the LED board 5922E, it is possible to emit light from either LED. Even if the light is different, it can be emitted from the same side (for example, the front side), so it is possible to perform a light emission effect with a large amount of light while effectively utilizing a narrow area. In particular, since the front end surface 59216E extends forward from the flat plate portion 59211E so that it is substantially flush with the front surface of the first lens 5925E, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E, which will be described later, is Since it is possible to guide the light to the front surface of the lens 5925E, it is possible to enhance the interest.

In addition, by arranging the LEDs on different surfaces such as the front side and the back side of the LED board 5922E, the light emitted from either LED can be emitted from the same side (for example, the front side). , the thickness of the front lens portion 592E can be suppressed while performing various light emitting effects such as surface light emission from the front surface of the front lens portion 592E (more specifically, the front surface of the first lens 5925E) and edge light emission from the front lens portion 592E. It becomes possible. In this way, by suppressing the thickness of the front lens part 592E, the above-mentioned configuration, that is, the first performance accessory 59E is arranged in front of the second performance accessory 60E, and the first decoration part 591E is placed in the standby position. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the front lens part 592E and the front lens part 592E are overlapped in substantially parallel (see FIG. 415(A)), and furthermore, by tilting the first decorative part 591E forward in the presentation position, the front lens part 592E and the second A predetermined space is formed between the front lens part 592E and the performance accessory 60E, so that the front lens part 592E can be made to protrude forward.

Note that in this embodiment, the first lens 5925E has an upright portion 59212E, but the first lens 5925E has an upright portion, and this upright portion extends to the rear end surface of the second lens 5921E. It is also possible to extend it toward the rear side and form a shape similar to the inclined part 59213E at the rear end part.

Further, the first lens 5925E and the second lens 5921E may form an upright portion. For example, the rear end face of the first upright portion extending rearward from the first lens 5925E and the same shape as the inclined portion 59213E extending frontward from the second lens 5921E are formed at the rear end. The front end surface of the second erected portion may be brought into contact with the front end surface of the second erected portion, so that the first erected portion and the second erected portion cover the thickness of the front lens portion 592E.

By the way, the back side LED 5929E causes the outer peripheral edge of the front lens part 592E to emit light as described above, but it is not arranged in the circumferential direction along the upright part 59212E, but in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 427 and 428, it is disposed along the flat plate portion 59211E at a predetermined distance from the upright portion 59212E, that is, at a predetermined distance inside the upright portion 59212E in the radial direction.

Here, with reference to FIG. 428, the irradiation range of light emitted from each rear side LED 5929E will be described. Note that, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 428, each of the plurality of back side LEDs 5929E is referred to as back side LED 5929aE to back side LED 5929fE.

The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929aE to the back side LED 5929fE is as follows. That is, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the backside LED 5929aE is within the range of A to C (clockwise on the page). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the backside LED 5929bE is within the range from N to F (clockwise on the page). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the rear side LED 5929cE is within the range of Ro to Ho (clockwise on the page). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the rear LED 5929dE is within the range of chill (clockwise on the paper). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the rear side LED 5929eE is within the range of 1 to 3 (clockwise on the page). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the rear side LED 5929fE is within the range of 2 to 2 (clockwise on the page). In this way, the light emitted from the rear side LED 5929E moves forward inside the upright portion 59212E in the ranges A to F (clockwise in the paper) and To to Wo (clockwise in the paper) of the upright portion 59212E. When viewed from the front side, the front end surface 59216E of the upright portion 59212E (that is, the outer peripheral portion of the front lens portion 592E) emits light.

It should be noted that the ranges of the upright portion 59212E between H and W (both clockwise on the paper) are not the irradiation range of the back side LED 5929E. Although details will be described later, a range from 1 to 3 in the upright portion 59212E is a range where a decorative region 6051E of a second decorative member 605E, which will be described later, is located on the back side (see FIG. 414(B)). Further, the range from wo to a is a range located on the back side of the first light emitting portion 59251E of the first lens 5925E (see FIG. 414(B) and FIG. 424).

Further, as described above, by emitting light from the back side LED 5929E toward the upright portion 59212E from a radially inner position a predetermined distance away from the upright portion 59212E, the back side LED 5929E is arranged at a position close to the upright portion 59212E. It is possible to widen the irradiation range of the rear LED 5929E compared to the case where the LED 5929E is illuminated. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently produce light emission over a wider range with a smaller number of back side LEDs 5929E without unnecessarily increasing the number of back side LEDs 5929E.

That is, from the perspective of aiming to cause the outer peripheral part of the front lens part 592E to emit edge light, it is usually considered to arrange an LED that can emit point light or surface light on the back surface of the upright part 59212E. . However, if the LEDs are arranged in this way, the thickness in the front-rear direction will increase. Therefore, in order to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction, the back side LED 5929E is an LED that can emit side light, and in order to suppress the number of back side LEDs 5929E, the back side LED 5929E is arranged at a position that can supplement the range of edge light emission. However, if the backside LED 5929E is placed away from the standing portion 59212E, the amount of light will be attenuated, so taking this into consideration, a cut portion 59215E is formed on the inner surface of the standing portion 59212E, and a cut portion 59215E is formed on the outer periphery of the standing portion 59212E. The cut section makes it easier to collect light.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 427 and 428, for example, a connector 5930E connected to the LED board 5922E (i.e., a connector that supplies power to the front first LED 5927E, the front second LED 5928E, and the back LED 5929E), and A cover 5931E placed on the rear side of the connector 5930E is placed on the back side of the LED board 5922E. A hole 59215E for arranging a connector 5930E is formed in the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E. In this way, by placing the connector 5930E in the hole 59215E, the thickness of the connector 5930E can be absorbed by the thickness of the flat plate part 59211E, so there is no need to provide an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of the connector 5930E. , it becomes possible to make the second lens 5921E more compact.

Note that in this embodiment, the connector 5930E is arranged on the back side of the LED board 5922E, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, the connector 5930E may be placed on the front side of the LED board 5922E. In this case, by arranging the connector 5930E in the space between the third lens 5926E and the LED board 5922E, which is provided to cause the front side of the first lens 5925E to emit surface light, the empty space can be effectively utilized. In this way, even if the space between the LED board 5922E and the third lens 5926E is effectively utilized and the connector 5930E is placed on the front side of the LED board 5922E, an extra thickness equivalent to the thickness of the connector 5930E can be made. There is no need to provide a second lens 5921E, and it is possible to make the second lens 5921E more compact.

[11-1-2. Second production role]
Next, the second performance accessory 60E will be explained. FIG. 429 is an example of a perspective view of the second performance accessory 60E and the accessory lifting unit 61E viewed diagonally from above on the right side, and is a diagram showing the second performance accessory 60E as an exploded perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 429, the second performance accessory 60E mainly includes a main body part 601E and a rear lens part 602E.

The main body part 601E is a substantially circular member in a front view, with members (for example, an LED board 603E and a rear lens 604E) constituting the rear lens part 602E disposed on the front side.

The rear lens section 602E mainly includes an LED board 603E, a rear lens 604E arranged on the front side of the LED board 603E, and a second decorative member 605E arranged on the front side of the rear lens 604E.

The LED board 603E is a substantially disk-shaped member, and a large number of LEDs 606E, 607E, and 608E are arranged on the front surface. These LEDs 606E, 607E, and 608E will be described later. The rear lens 604E is a substantially disk-shaped member made of a material that can transmit light, and is cut linearly in the radial direction over the entire circumference of the outer peripheral portion 6045E. The second decorative member 605E has, for example, a decorative area 6051E on which a motif or the like is drawn, a logo area 6052E on which letters or the like (for example, a logo) are drawn, and an outer peripheral part 6053 capable of emitting light, on the front side. It is made of a material that can transmit light.

Here, the configurations of the LED board 603E (more specifically, the arrangement of the LEDs 606E and 607E) and the rear lens 604E will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 430 to 432. FIG. 430 is an example of a perspective view of the rear lens 604E with the LED board 603E stacked on the back side, viewed from the front and slightly to the right. FIG. 431 is an example of a sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 430. FIG. 432 is an example of a rear view of the rear lens 604E. However, for convenience of explanation, the LED 606 is also illustrated in FIG. 432 (the LED board 603E is not illustrated).

As shown in FIGS. 430 and 431, the rear lens 604E has a rearwardly recessed recess 6041E formed approximately at the center of the front side. The shape of this recessed portion 6041E corresponds to, for example, the shape of the decorative area 6051E (see FIG. 429) of the second decorative member 605E. A hole 6042E is further formed in this recess 6041E.

The holes 6042E are formed at a plurality of positions along the circumference of the recess 6041E and at positions radially inside the recess 6041E. An LED 606E placed on the front side of the LED board 603E is placed in the hole 6042E. The LED 606E is, for example, a directional, side-emitting, full-color LED that is made of a thin wall and emits light toward one side. The LED 606E arranged in the hole 6042E formed at a plurality of positions along the circumference of the recess 6041E emits light laterally, more specifically, in a direction toward the radial inside of the end surface forming the hole 6042E. . The LED 606E disposed in the hole 6042E formed at the radially inner position of the recess 6041E emits light laterally, more specifically, in a direction toward the radially outer side of the end surface forming the hole 6042E. In this way, by the LED 606E emitting light toward the end surface forming the hole 6042E, the light can be focused on the outer periphery of the recess 6041E. In addition, as shown in FIG. 431, the thickness of the rear lens 604E at the recess 6041E is set to such an extent that the LED 606E does not protrude to the front side so that the light emitted from the LED 606E travels inside the recess 6041E without leaking outside. The thickness is said to be . Furthermore, by arranging the LED 606E in the hole 6042E formed in the rear lens 604E, the thickness of the LED 606E can be absorbed by the thickness of the rear lens 604E (more specifically, the recess 6041E), which corresponds to the thickness of the LED 607. There is no need to provide extra thickness, and the rear lens 604E can be made more compact.

The thickness of the hole 6042 (that is, the thickness at the recess 6041E of the rear lens 604E) is set to such an extent that the LED 606E does not protrude from the hole 6042 so that the light emitted from the LED 606E travels inside the recess 6041E without leaking outside. It is said to be thick. Furthermore, by arranging the LED 606 in the hole 6042E formed in the recess 6041E of the rear lens 604E, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

On the front side of the rear lens 604E, a plurality of recesses 6043E are formed below the recess 6041E. Further, a plurality of recesses 6044E are formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral portion on the front side of the rear lens 604E.

As shown in FIG. 431, an LED 607E placed on the front side of the LED board 603E is placed on the back side of the position where the recess 6043E is formed, facing the back side of the rear lens 604E. Further, on the back side of the position where the recessed portion 6044E is formed, an LED 608E (see FIG. 429) placed on the front side of the LED board 603E is placed facing the back side of the rear lens 604E. These LEDs 607E and 608E emit light toward the front.

Note that the rear lens 604E has a logo corresponding area 6046E corresponding to the logo decoration part 6052E of the second decoration part 605E. The LED 607E is a point-emitting LED arranged corresponding to the logo corresponding area 6046E, and can cause the logo decoration part 6052E to emit surface light. A gap 6047E is formed between the logo corresponding area 6046E and another area (for example, the recess 6041E) of the rear lens 604E. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the LED 607E from penetrating other light emitting areas other than the logo corresponding area 6045, and to efficiently cause the logo decoration part 6052E to emit surface light.

Further, the LED 608E is a point-emitting LED arranged along the outer circumferential portion 6045E of the rear lens 604E, and is an LED that causes the outer circumferential portion 6053E of the second decorative portion 605E to emit edge light. As described above, the rear lens 604E is cut linearly in the radial direction over the entire circumference of the outer peripheral portion 6045E. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 608E can be collected on the outer peripheral part 6045E of the rear lens 604E, and it becomes possible to cause the outer peripheral part 6053E of the second decorative part 605E to emit edge light efficiently.

Further, as shown in FIG. 432, the back side of the rear lens 604E is cut in correspondence with each LED 606E so that the light emitted from each LED 606E, 607E, 608E spreads radially. In this way, the front surface of the second decorative member 605E is illuminated by the light emitted from the LED 606E. However, as described above, since the LED 606E is a directional side-emitting LED, the way the light spreads due to lens cutting is different from the point-emitting LEDs 607E and 608E.

Note that, as described above, the range (see FIG. 428) of the upright portion 59212E is located at the front side position corresponding to the decorative area 6051E of the second decorative member 605E. The range shown above is not the irradiation range by the rear LED 5929E. Therefore, the second decorative portion 605E that emits light from the surface can be highlighted and drawn to the attention of the player, thereby increasing interest. In particular, the performance accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position to the performance position when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as variable display of a special symbol that is highly expected to lead to a jackpot symbol. It becomes possible to further increase interest.

Furthermore, when the performance accessory unit 58E advances from the standby position to the performance position, the first performance accessory 59E (more specifically, the first decoration part 591E) tilts forward, and in the standby position, it is visible from the front side. The front lens portion 592E, which could not be formed, stands up. At this time, a predetermined space apart in the front-back direction is created between the front lens part 592E and the second performance accessory 60E (see FIG. 415(B)). In this way, it is possible to give the player the impact of the first performance accessory 59E protruding toward the player using the depth direction. Moreover, although both the first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E emit light toward the front, the parts that overlap in front view (as described above, the area of For part or all of (see)), the second performance accessory 60E is made to emit light, and the first performance accessory 59E is not emitted. Therefore, the visibility of the second performance accessory 60E that emits light on the back side of the first performance accessory 59E can be highlighted, and the first performance accessory 59E and the second performance accessory 60E are simply placed one behind the other. It becomes possible to produce a visual effect that cannot be produced by just doing so, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

Note that, as described above, since the concave portion 6041E is formed in the rear lens 604E, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the LED 608 from traveling inward in the radial direction from the concave portion 6041E. Therefore, interference between the light emitted from the LED 608 and the light emitted from the LED 606 can be suppressed, and the light emitted from the LED 606 and the light emitted from the LED 606 can be efficiently used for lighting production. Can be used.

Furthermore, as described above, the light emitted from the LED 607E can be collected on the outer periphery of the concave portion 6041E, but when the brightness of the LED 607E is changed, the light emitted from the LED 607E can be collected at the outer periphery of the concave portion 6041E. It is also possible to create a light-emitting effect in which the motifs drawn in the decorative area 6051 of the decorative member 605E appear to be swaying, thereby increasing interest.

[14. Expansion example]
Expansion examples common to the first to thirteenth pachinko gaming machines described above will be described below. Note that since the numbers assigned to each component differ depending on the first to thirteenth pachinko gaming machines, in the following explanation, specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine) will be used. Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[14-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, the fourth pachinko game machine, and the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot It is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag to on according to the above, and the number of probability variations is determined when the probability variation flag is set to on, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is in the open state, the specific area is also in the open state, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short period of time and for a predetermined period after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short period of time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area where it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot), the first special symbol and the second special symbol The special symbol selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the selection symbol command is such that, for example, "z0" is selected with a 40% selection rate, and "z1" is selected with a 10% selection rate. , "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the selection symbol command is such that, for example, "z3" is selected with a 15% selection rate, and "z4" is selected with a 50% selection rate. , "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%. In addition, since FIG. 105 is a diagram that only shows an example of expansion of variable probability control, the judgment value data does not include "judgment value data for time saving"; however, "judgment value data for saving time" is included in the judgment value data. It may be included.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the second opening mode (10R probability variable jackpot C). As mentioned above, since the judgment value data shown in FIG. 105 does not include the "judgment value data for time saving", the type of "time saving per" is not shown in FIG. 106, but the judgment value data If "time saving hit determination value data" is included, one of a plurality of types of time saving hits may be determined.

According to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and with a selection rate of 10%. With a selection rate of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R normal jackpot A, and with a selection rate of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, the opening may be opened in response to the winning of a game ball into the grand prize opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be opened only once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may also be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is executed alternately and repeatedly until the limit is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are described. , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective when the machine is a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[14-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine to the thirteenth pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the C time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, the lottery for the "time saving win" is not limited to being performed in the special symbol hit determination process.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole, a specific random number different from the random number for determining a special symbol hit (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit, a special symbol Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time-saving win/loss determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time-saving control may be performed using a random number value, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is a specific symbol. If it is a random value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

Furthermore, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed prior to the special symbol hit/loss determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, in which a stop display mode indicating a jackpot is derived when the final display is performed. is executed, and the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win." In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU instructs the game ball to be hit right, for example, as a normal game mode in the jackpot game state. A display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is controlled to display an effect image showing the following. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU will control the time-saving control when the time-saving control is executed. For example, the display device is controlled to display an effect image showing a right-handed instruction as a game ball firing method which is a regular game mode. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the display device will always display an effect image showing the game ball firing method, which is a legal game mode when the time-saving control is executed. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will be able to perform ), control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting gate, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball enters the passing gate, which is the trigger for the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", the special symbol hit determination process (for example, see S2023 in FIG. 95) If the result is the opening of the accessory and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opened it passes through the V winning opening 2155, the time will be shortened depending on the type of opening of the accessory. It is preferable to determine whether or not to execute the control and the number of time reductions. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of time-savings based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, a game that enters the V winning device 2150 when the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the accessory opening, and the V attacker 2152 opens it. If the ball does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only special figure shortening control is performed out of special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, for example, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol confirmation time in which the special symbol is confirmed. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being "time-saving win" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving win/loss determination process is the special symbol hit determination process in the same frame. Even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" will be invalidated ("time-saving win"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on based on the jackpot (the time saving flag is not set on based on the jackpot) and the time saving flag is set on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on based on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. It's okay. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed). , It is preferable that the time saving control based on the jackpot is started based on the end of this jackpot game control. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, when the V attacker 2152 opens the opening based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is that the accessory is opened. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU will perform a "time saving win" based on the fact that the opening/closing winning opening 2151 has been closed. It is advisable to start time saving control.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit" etc.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue even after the small winning game control process ends. executed.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit of opening the accessory is derived. Although the V attacker 2152 operates and the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 controls the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Even after 2151 is closed, time saving control is continued.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit determination process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss determination process, or it may be set at various timings. Can be set. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time-saving probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process. The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Furthermore, in the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when the accessory is released, and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released. , the main CPU 2201 uses the interval time after the end of the operation related to opening the accessory when the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" to the above interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". The interval time may be longer than the interval time, or may be the same or approximately the same time.

[14-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first to thirteenth pachinko gaming machines described in this specification play games using game media, and receive benefits (for example, prize balls, prize data, etc.) based on the results of the games. It can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media held by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). or the payout operation of game media in the event that a win is won (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of game media (i.e., payout of game media to the player on the line, and payout of the necessary game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below like in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[14-4. Status display indicating that it is in a time-saving gaming state]
When the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is controlled, a time-saving state display section may be provided to indicate the time-saving game state. The time-saving state display section is preferably provided in an LED display group that includes a special symbol display section and the like, and is controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, when providing a time-saving state display section indicating that the time-saving gaming state is in effect, a time-saving state display section A indicating that the time-saving gaming state is in effect; A time saving state display section C indicating that the time saving game state is in effect may be provided. In this case, if the main CPU is in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU controls the A-time saving state display section so that a specific aspect that allows the user to visually understand that the A-time saving gaming state is in the A-time saving gaming state, and if it is in the B-time saving gaming state, , B controls the time-saving state display section so that a specific aspect that allows the user to visually identify that the person is in the time-saving gaming state is displayed; It is preferable to control the C time saving state display section so that the mode is displayed. Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display sections that are being executed in an overlapping manner.

Furthermore, without providing the A time saving state display section, the B time saving state display section, and the C time saving state display section, for example, a common time saving state display section may be used for the time saving game states having the same time saving performance. For example, if the time-saving performance of the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving performance of the C-time-saving gaming state are the same, and these time-saving performances are different from the time-saving performance of the A-time-saving gaming state, A, which represents the A time-saving gaming state. It is preferable that a time saving state display section and a BC common time saving state display section indicating the B time saving gaming state or the C working time saving gaming state are provided and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, the sub-CPU displays, for example, on the display area of a liquid crystal display device, the fact that it is in a time-saving gaming state, and if it is in a time-saving gaming state, the type of time-saving gaming state, and/or the number of time-savings (including the remaining number of time-savings). You may also do so.

[14-5. Outer end signal regarding time-saving gaming state]
When the main CPU is controlled to be in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state, the main CPU transmits a time saving signal representing the time saving gaming state from the external terminal board 4184 to an external device (for example, an island computer). In this case, a time-saving signal that does not distinguish the type of time-saving gaming state may be transmitted, or a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled, that is, a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled. It may be transmitted by distinguishing the types. When transmitting a time-saving signal by distinguishing between the types of time-saving gaming states, the main CPU, for example, transmits the A-time-saving signal if it is in the A-time-saving gaming state, and transmits the B-time-saving signal if it is in the B-time-saving gaming state. If the game is in the C time saving game state, a C time saving signal is sent. In addition, when a plurality of time-saving game states are being executed one after the other, the main CPU is preferably configured to transmit a plurality of time-saving signals that are being executed.

Furthermore, for time-saving game states with the same time-saving performance, a common time-saving signal may be transmitted. For example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU is in the A time saving gaming state. In this case, it is preferable to transmit the A time-saving signal, and in the case of the B-time-saving gaming state or the C-time-saving gaming state, to transmit the BC common time-saving signal.

[14-6. Interval in case of “time saving”]
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time. In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU, after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be set to be longer than that in the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the opening of the accessory, or the interval time may be the same or approximately the same. It may be the same time.

[15. Additional notes]
[15-1. Appendix 1]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which symbols are displayed variably when a predetermined condition is met, and when a special result is derived, the game machine is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, a variable display of a specified number of times is performed in the high probability time reduction state even if no special result is derived. A gaming machine that is configured to shift to a high probability non-time saving state has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800 has a new gaming feature in which a high probability time reduction state is shifted to a high probability non-time reduction state to create a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, in recent years, there has been a desire for gaming machines with even newer gaming features.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 1 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state, which is a period during which the special symbols can be displayed variably;
a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is a period in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed and is more advantageous than the normal gaming state;
It is a period during which the special symbols can be displayed variably, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The special symbol control means is
a special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the special gaming state is to be entered;
a loss stop mode (for example, a loss display mode) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to derive any one of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a time saving per display mode) indicating that the specific gaming state is to be entered.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a specific gaming state is provided separately from the special gaming state as a gaming state advantageous to the player during a period in which a variable display of special symbols can be performed, and a specific stopping mode is derived. It becomes possible to provide new gaming features that have never been seen before, such as shifting to a specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the special gaming state, and after the special gaming state ends, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when a specific stopping mode is derived, the system shifts to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state. It becomes possible to provide gameplay.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the loss stop mode is derived, a game state continuation control means that can continue the game state when the loss stop mode was derived (for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the special symbol A main CPU 201) that does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag in the game end process;
Even when the loss stop mode is derived, if a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. , a specific gaming state transition control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs B time saving control mode determination processing) capable of shifting to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, even if a loss stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state if a predetermined condition is satisfied, which provides a new and unprecedented gaming feature. becomes possible. Incidentally, even if the loss stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied corresponds to, for example, when a specific special game state among a plurality of types of special game states ends.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific stop mode includes:
A first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selection symbol command "z0"),
At least a second specific stop mode (for example, a mode of selection symbol command "z1") different from the first specific stop mode is included,
The gaming state control means includes:
It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of time savings) depending on when the first specific stopping mode is derived and when the second specific stopping mode is derived. do.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, the range of gameplay can be expanded by providing variations, and it is possible to provide interesting gameplay while suppressing gambling elements.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area provided in the gaming area (for example, the passage gate 126), and a normal symbol lottery means (for example, a normal symbol variable display start process (S293 ), a main CPU 201) that performs
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls the result of the normal symbol lottery to be derived; ,
When the normal symbol winning stop mode indicating a normal symbol winning is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitation means (for example, the normal A main CPU 201) that performs electric accessories release processing (S296);
A normal symbol probability control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the time saving setting process (S238)) that can change the normal symbol probability from which the normal symbol hit is derived;
Furthermore,
The normal symbol probability control means is
When the specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is entered as a result of the specific stopping mode being derived, the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the normal symbol probability is changed by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table). Main CPU 201) that performs symbol hit determination processing;
When the special stopping mode is derived and the special gaming state is transitioned to the specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, when the normal symbol Main CPU 201 that performs hit determination processing for normal symbols by referring to the hit determination table
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the transition is made to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) even after the special gaming state ends, and the transition to the specific gaming state is made when the specific stopping mode is derived. If so, the normal symbol probability is not changed, and if the special gaming state is transitioned to a specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the normal symbol probability is changed. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states with different transition triggers and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability depending on the transition trigger, it is possible to widen the range of gameplay and provide interesting gameplay. becomes possible.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stopping mode is derived, after the special gaming state ends, it is possible to shift to a high-precision gaming state in which the special stopping mode is more likely to be derived compared to the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state,
The special symbol control means is
In the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, when S221 is YES), at least the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode can be derived,
In the high certainty gaming state (for example, when the determination is NO in S221), at least the special stopping mode can be derived.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, it is possible to derive both the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the player's interest tends to decrease. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the gaming state.

In addition, in a high-precision gaming state, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a result corresponding to a specific stopping mode (for example, a time-saving win), a mode that derives the specific stopping mode but does not shift to the specific gaming state and a special symbol. A mode in which the specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery is a result corresponding to a specific stop mode, and a mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. It may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined conditions include a first condition and a second condition,
The special symbol lottery means is
a first special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S81 and S82) that performs a first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition;
and a second special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S78 and S79) that performs a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition,
The special symbol control means is
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variably displayed;
The invention is characterized in that the derivation ratio of the specific stopping mode can be different depending on whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or when the second special symbol is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or the second special symbol is variably displayed, so that the gameplay is improved. It is possible to expand the range and provide interesting gameplay.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the gaming state being controlled is the normal gaming state, when the specific stopping mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state in a mode corresponding to the specific stopping mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed) On the other hand,
When the gaming state being controlled is the specific gaming state, even if the specific stopping mode is derived, the specific gaming state being controlled is not controlled to the specific gaming state in a mode corresponding to the specific stopping mode. It is characterized in that the mode depending on the state can be continued (for example, the process of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when a specific stopping mode is derived while being controlled to a specific gaming state, the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state being controlled continues. In other words, even if a specific stopping mode is derived in a specific gaming state, it does not become invalid, but for the player, it can provide the same effect as if the specific gaming state being controlled is extended, increasing the interest. It becomes possible to increase the

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game machine includes a random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392 or S399) that acquires multiple types of random numbers (for example, random numbers for special symbol hit determination and special symbol random numbers);
The special symbol lottery means is
The stopping mode derived by the special symbol control means using a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers is the special stopping mode, the losing stopping mode, and the specific stopping mode. It is possible to determine which of a plurality of stopping modes including the stopping mode,
Among the plurality of types of random numbers, a predetermined random number (for example, a symbol random number) different from the specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) is used to determine the type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode. It is characterized by being decidable.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) is used to determine the derived stop mode, that is, a lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, The type of special stopping mode or the type of specific stopping mode can be determined using the symbol random number). Therefore, it is possible to improve the security compared to the case where not only the derived stop mode but also the types of special stop mode and specific stop mode are determined using only specific random numbers.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. A time-saving gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. C time-saving gaming state). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the expected value of the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled to be smaller than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, compared to the case where the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is made due to the specific stopping mode being derived, the specific gaming state is It is possible to give an advantage when shifting to a state (for example, A time-saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling nature in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. A time-saving gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived and the state shifts to the specific gaming state (e.g. C time-saving gaming state). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the expected value of the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled to be larger than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, compared to the case where the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) is made due to the derivation of the special stopping aspect, the specific gaming state is It is possible to give an advantage when shifting to a state (for example, C time-saving gaming state). In such a case, it is possible to enhance the gameplay in the normal game state and the specific game state, where interest tends to decrease, and it becomes possible to increase the interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features.

[15-2. Appendix 2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball launched toward the game area passes through the special symbol starting area (for example, the starting port switch 121, 141A, 141B), a random number acquisition means (for example, the process of S392 or S399) that acquires a random number related to the special symbol is activated. A main CPU 201) that performs
A special symbol lottery means (for example, a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means main CPU 201) that performs
A symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When the special symbol is variablely displayed and a special stop mode indicating the special result (e.g. jackpot display mode) is derived, a special gaming state (e.g. jackpot game state) in which the special symbol is not variably displayed is derived. ) (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145);
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
A specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, C time-saving gaming state) can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states,
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol commands "0" to "2" in FIG. 112), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result regarding the control of the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than the result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "4" in FIG. 112).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result, it is advantageous in terms of control of the specific gaming state compared to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a special result. It is possible to make the game state more interesting, and it is possible to provide new and unprecedented gameplay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the symbol control means derives the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for the time-saving hit) and controls the specific game state (for example, the C-time save game state), the end condition of the specific game state is set as described above. It is characterized in that it can be determined based on random numbers obtained by a random number obtaining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived and the specific gaming state is controlled, the ending condition of the specific gaming state is determined based on the value of the obtained random number. The end timing of a state may differ each time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide range of gameplay, and it is possible to provide interesting gameplay.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A special display effect indicating that the special stopping mode may be derived (e.g., jackpot type reach), and a specific display effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (e.g., time-saving hit). The present invention is characterized in that it further includes a suggestive effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing any one of a plurality of display effects including (system reach).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only a special display effect indicating that a special stop mode may be derived, but also a specific display effect indicating that a specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay that has never existed before.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the special symbol lottery is set to one of the plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1) and when it is set to another setting value (for example, setting 6), the above-mentioned It is characterized in that the derivation probabilities of the special stop modes are different, while the derivation probabilities of the specific stop modes are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, by varying the derivation probability of the special stop mode depending on the setting value and making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same, the case where the set value is low. Even so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the probability of deriving the specific stop mode is the same when it is set to one of the plurality of set values and when it is set to another set value, the specific stop mode is not derived. It is possible to vary the end conditions of the specific gaming state that is controlled when the game is played (for example, the number of time reductions is 50 times in the case of setting 1, and 100 times in the case of setting 6).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the probability of transitioning to a specific gaming state is the same whether it is set to one setting value or another setting value, thereby increasing the interest. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the ending conditions while suppressing the decline.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
It is possible to perform the special symbol lottery with either a low probability where the probability that the special stop mode will be derived is relatively low or a high probability where the probability that the special stop mode will be derived is relatively high. In addition,
The probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability (for example, 1/201 as shown in FIG. 110) and when the special symbol lottery is performed with the high probability The specific stop mode has a relatively higher probability (for example, 1/6 as shown in FIG. 110) than the probability that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/200 as shown in FIG. 110). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform the special symbol lottery so that the mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, the specific stopping pattern is derived with a higher probability than either the case where the special stopping pattern is derived with a low probability or the case with a high probability, so it is possible to play an unprecedented new game. It is possible to provide sex and suppress a decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number acquisition means is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392) that acquires a random number related to the first special symbol;
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S399) that acquires the random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
A first special symbol lottery means (for example, a first special symbol variable display start a main CPU 201) that performs processing (S93);
A second special symbol lottery means that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S93) It has a main CPU 201) that performs
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. and,
A second symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. and,
If the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8"), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8") This is more advantageous than the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, a short hit of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2"). It is characterized by being configured to:

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result. Since this is more advantageous than any other case, it is possible to increase the player's interest in a game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number acquisition means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that processes S392) that acquires a random number related to the first special symbol;
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the process of S399) that acquires the random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
A first special symbol lottery means (for example, a first special symbol variable display start A main CPU 2201) that performs processing (S2013);
A second special symbol lottery means that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S2013)) a main CPU 2201) that performs
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. and,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. and,
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include a special result (e.g., a hit in the release of an accessory);
The gaming machine is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode for opening a role object) indicating the special result is derived, a predetermined area (for example, , V winning device 2150), an entry control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that controls the entry of the game ball into the game ball to be possible or easy;
a special area (for example, V prize opening 2155) through which the game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass;
Furthermore,
The special game state control means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state via a second route) in which a variable display of special symbols is not performed,
The first special symbol lottery means is
The probability (for example, 0) that the first special symbol is displayed variably and the special stop mode is derived, and the probability that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (0). For example, it is possible to perform the first special symbol lottery so that the winning number is different from 1/17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, a new gaming feature is provided in which the special symbol lottery result is controlled to a specific gaming state when the result is a specific result, and when the special stop mode is derived, the game is controlled to a predetermined area. It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the predetermined area, and when the game ball enters the special area, it can be applied to a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine that shifts to a special game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a new type of gaming experience that has never been seen before even in the case of a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state includes:
It includes a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state,
The end conditions for each of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state include:
A first ending condition for ending the specific gaming state when the sum of the variable number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the number of variable times the second special symbol is displayed becomes a first predetermined number (for example, the time saving condition shown in FIG. 91 A second termination condition (for example, the time-saving termination condition M in FIG. 91) that terminates the specific gaming state when the variable display frequency of the second special symbol reaches a second predetermined number. , a third termination condition (for example, the time-saving termination condition N in FIG. 91) for terminating the specific gaming state when the number of derivations of the special stop mode reaches a third predetermined number;
At least one of the first ending condition, the second ending condition, and the third ending condition is one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state. It is characterized by being different in at least one specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, by providing variations in the end conditions of a specific gaming state, it is possible to provide a range of gameplay and increase interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
including at least two specific gaming states of a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state;
The end conditions for each of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state include a variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (for example, a time saving number),
The gaming state control means includes:
In any one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state), another specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) If the conditions for transition to state) are met,
The variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the end condition for the one specific gaming state is met, and the number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the ending condition for the other specific gaming state is met. Until the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol, it can be controlled in the same manner as the one specific game state regardless of the degree of advantage (for example, in S243). processing).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, by ensuring that the end conditions of a specific gaming state are not disadvantageous to the player, and ensuring that the ending conditions of the specific gaming state are played in the same manner as one specific gaming state, It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
the normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state);
a high probability non-specific gaming state (for example, a high probability low base state) in which the probability of the special stop mode being derived is higher than the normal gaming state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state;
A low probability specific gaming state (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same as the normal gaming state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal gaming state. ,
Controllable to either a high-precision specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision, high-base state) in which both the probability of deriving the special stop mode and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery are higher than the normal gaming state. and
The gaming machine is
The present invention is characterized by comprising a display performance control means capable of controlling the display performance in such a manner that it is difficult to grasp the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, display performance is performed in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the appearance in the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, thereby adding interest to the game. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The gaming machine is
A first mode (for example, left-handed hitting) in which a game ball is fired toward a first area (for example, left side area 106) of the game area;
a second mode (for example, right-handed hitting) in which a game ball is fired toward a second area (for example, right side area 107) of the game area;
It is possible to play the game in any of a plurality of modes including the following, and the game is configured to be played in the first mode or the second mode depending on the gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, the low-probability specific gaming state, and the high-probability specific gaming state, the game is played in the first mode,
The present invention is characterized in that the game is configured to be played in the second mode in the high-precision non-specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is played in the first mode in the normal gaming state, the low-probability specific gaming state, and the high-probability specific gaming state, while the game is played in the second mode in the high-probability non-specific gaming state. Since the game is played in , it is possible for the player to understand that the highly accurate non-specific gaming state is a special gaming state that is different from other gaming states.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
Further comprising a payout means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 400) that pays out prize balls or prize data based on the game ball fired towards the game area passing through a predetermined winning area,
In the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1,
The high-precision non-specific gaming state is characterized in that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, it is possible to increase interest by making the highly certain non-specific gaming state more advantageous than other gaming states.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (11) to (13) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stopping mode (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z3") is derived in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability low base state), after the special gaming state ends, the high probability specific gaming state The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the high-precision non-specific gaming state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the high-precision non-specific gaming state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

[15-3. Appendix 3]
The gaming machine in Appendix 3 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (for example, sub control circuit 300) that performs control related to the performance,
Equipped with
The main control means includes:
A startup information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S392 or S399) that acquires startup information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means is used to draw a lottery that includes at least a special result (for example, a jackpot), a specific result (for example, a time-saving win), and a loss. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start process (S93)),
When the variation start condition is satisfied, a symbol control means (for example, a main unit that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94) CPU201) and
A gaming state control means that controls the gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a pre-read determination process (S396)) is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
an information transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the production control means;
has
The gaming state control means includes:
When the special stop mode indicating the special result (for example, jackpot display mode) is derived, a special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed;
When a specific stopping mode (for example, a display mode for time saving) indicating the specific result is derived, a specific gaming state (for example, (C time-saving gaming state);
The performance control means is
controllable so that information transmitted from the information transmitting means is received and a performance based on the information is displayed in a predetermined performance display area;
When information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is received, the production control means (for example, the sub CPU 301 )and,
Upon receiving information indicating the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means, advance effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) controls so that advance effect (for example, look-ahead effect) is performed prior to the variable display of the symbols; It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the corresponding performance and preceding performance are performed in the gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state, which is an unprecedented new game. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with the following features.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding performance control means is
A first advance effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301 )and,
A second advance effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second advance effect (for example, display of a jackpot type look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that the special stop mode may be derived. and,
a third precedent effect that controls so that a third precedent effect (for example, a display of a common system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived is performed; It is characterized by having a production control means.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, as a preceding performance, it is possible to not only perform a performance in which a special stop mode may be derived (second advance performance), but also a performance in which a specific stop mode may be derived. Since the first advance performance that can be suggested is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming characteristics. Furthermore, if the third advance performance is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so it is possible to increase the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third advance effect control means is
The third preceding effect (for example, The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a display of a common system look-ahead presentation form is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, the third precedent effect is performed in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish visually whether the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived, which is a new effect never seen before. By doing so, you can increase your interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The third advance effect control means is
a first aspect (e.g., a blue square);
a second aspect (for example, a yellow pentagon) that can be changed from the first aspect and has a higher expected value for the lottery result than the first aspect;
a third aspect (for example, a rainbow triangle) that is a mode that can be changed from the first mode or the second mode and has a higher expected value for the lottery result than the second mode;
controllable so that the third preceding performance is performed in one or more of a plurality of modes including;
In the first aspect and the second aspect, it is difficult to distinguish visually whether the expected value for the lottery result is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The third aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish from the appearance that it is an expected value for the special result.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the third advance performance is performed, in the first aspect or the second aspect, it is indicated by the appearance whether the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result is higher. Although it is difficult to distinguish, it is easy to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high when changing to the third mode. Therefore, when the third advance performance is performed, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
The first advance effect control means is
A fourth aspect (for example, a dedicated common system look-ahead presentation form);
a fifth aspect (for example, a white circle) that is an aspect that can be changed from the fourth aspect and has a larger expected value for the specific result than the fourth aspect;
controllable so that the first preceding performance is performed in one or more of a plurality of modes including;
The fourth aspect is such that it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether the expected value is for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The fifth aspect is characterized in that it is easy to visually distinguish that it is an expected value for the specific result.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth aspect, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result is higher, but in the fifth aspect, the expected value for the specific result is A high value makes it easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first advance performance, by performing a performance in which the expected value for a specific result is high while eliminating the expected value for a special result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling quality.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (5) above,
The present invention is characterized in that the ratio of the first advance performance performed by the first advance performance control means and the ratio of the second advance performance performed by the second advance performance control means are configured to be different.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding performance different from the ratio of the second preceding performance, it is possible to give a variety to the performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. becomes.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (6) above,
The symbol control means is
It is possible to derive the specific stopping mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state,
The first advance effect control means is
It is characterized in that it is controllable so that the first preceding performance is performed in the normal gaming state, and that it is controllable so that the first preceding performance is not performed in the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state. In other words, it is more interesting for the player when a specific result is derived in a normal gaming state than when a specific result is derived in a specific gaming state. Therefore, by allowing the first advance performance to be performed in the normal game state and preventing the first advance performance from being performed in the specific game state, it becomes possible to effectively perform the first advance performance.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The said performance control means,
A first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (for example, jackpot type reach);
A third effect control means (for example, A sub-CPU 301).

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (7) above,
The said performance control means,
A first effect control means (for example, sub CPU301) and
a second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second effect indicating that the specific stopping mode may be derived (for example, jackpot type reach);
A third performance control means (for example, A sub-CPU 301).

According to the gaming machines of (8) and (9) above, as the performance. Not only is there a performance that may lead to a special stop mode (the second relevant performance), but also a first performance that can suggest that a specific stop state may be derived. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features that have never existed before. Moreover, when the third performance is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so it is possible to increase the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The second effect control means is
If the second preceding performance (e.g., display of a jackpot type look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (e.g., display of a common type look-ahead effect type) is performed, the second related effect (e.g., jackpot type reach) is performed. While it is possible to control the
The present invention is characterized in that when the first advance performance (for example, display of a time-saving win-type look-ahead performance format) is performed, control is possible so that the second relevant performance (for example, a jackpot-type reach) is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second performance is performed when the second preceding performance or the third preceding performance is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding performance is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preliminary performance, it is possible to perform a performance that increases interest by performing a preliminary performance that has a high expected value for a special result while avoiding giving an expected value for a specific result in vain.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
The first effect control means is
If the first preceding performance (for example, displaying a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form) or the third preceding performance (for example, displaying a common type looking-ahead performance form) is performed, the first relevant effect (for example, displaying a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form) is performed. Reach) can be controlled to occur;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control such that the first performance (for example, time-saving hit type reach) is not performed when the second preceding performance (for example, display of a jackpot type pre-reading performance form) is performed.
According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first performance is performed when the first preceding performance or the third preceding performance is performed, but is not performed when the second preceding performance is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of advance performance, by eliminating the needless provision of expected values for special results and performing advance performances with high expected values for specific results, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing the gambling quality. becomes possible.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (9) to (11) above,
The third effect control means is
The first preceding performance (e.g., displaying a time-saving win-type look-ahead performance form), the second preceding performance (e.g., displaying a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form), and the third preceding performance (for example, displaying a common type look-ahead performance form) The present invention is characterized in that control is possible so that the third performance (for example, common reach) is performed regardless of whether any of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the third effect, it is difficult to determine whether the expected value is high for the special result or the expected value for the specific result. It becomes possible to attach it.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (9) to (12) above,
The said performance control means,
In the variable display of the specific symbol (for example, target variation) in the case where the preceding performance is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol,
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third effect is performed, the first effect (for example, time-saving reach C) or the second effect (for example, time-saving reach C) is started. For example, while it is possible to transfer to jackpot type reach C),
If the third effect (for example, common reach C) is not started, either the first effect (for example, time-saving reach C) or the second effect (for example, jackpot reach C) It is characterized by being configured so that it does not migrate.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, when a preceding performance is performed prior to the variable display of a specific symbol, the third performance is started in the variable display of the specific symbol on which the preceding performance has been performed. If you do so, you can increase your interest. On the other hand, since neither the first performance nor the second performance will proceed unless the third performance is started, it is possible to prevent players from unnecessarily stirring up their gambling desires.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features.

[15-4. Appendix 4]
The gaming machine in Appendix 4 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
a holding unit (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S395 or S402) capable of acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and holding the acquired starting information (for example, various random numbers) up to a predetermined number;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the start information held by the holding means is used to perform a lottery including a special result (for example, a jackpot), a specific result (for example, a time-saving win), and a loss in the lottery result. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)),
When the variation start condition is satisfied, a symbol control means (for example, special A main CPU 201) that performs a pattern variable display termination process (S94);
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed is derived. special game state control means that can shift to;
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for time saving) indicating the specific result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbols is performed is higher than the normal gaming state. A specific gaming state control means that can shift to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the production to be performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined production area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7);
Prior to the lottery performed by the lottery means, advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a pre-read determination process (S396)) is capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means, advance performance control means (for example, a sub CPU301) and
Equipped with
The preceding performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that the preceding effect can be performed when there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode will be derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the corresponding performance and preceding performance are performed in the gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state, which is an unprecedented new game. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with the following features.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding performance control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saving) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saver) can be derived. While it is possible to perform a specific advance effect (for example, display of a time-saving look-alike effect type) that suggests that a certain type of effect may be derived,
Even if the specific starting information is included in the starting information held by the holding means, the special stopping mode (for example, jackpot If special start information from which the specific start information can be derived (display mode) is included, it is possible to control so that a preliminary effect (for example, a look-ahead effect) regarding the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which a specific stop mode can be derived is held, if the special start information from which a special stop mode can be derived is first held, Advance performance regarding specific starting information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a drop in interest by performing effective advance performances while eliminating advance performances that may become unnecessary as much as possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The preceding performance control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, there is a possibility that the special stopping mode (for example, jackpot display mode) can be derived. It is possible to control so that a special advance effect (for example, display of a jackpot type advance effect type) that suggests that
Even if the special start information is not included in the start information held by the hold means, the special advance performance can be controlled to be performed;
When the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not included in the start information held by the hold means, the specific stop mode is included in the start information held by the hold means. Even if the specific starting information that can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the preceding performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, if a special advance performance is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, even if the specific start information is suspended, the advance performance regarding this specific start information Since this is not done, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. That is, if the special advance performance is performed even though the special start information is not held, the player may be disappointed when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific starting information is withheld, by not performing a preliminary performance regarding this specific starting information, the specific stopping mode will be derived after the player is once disappointed. It is possible to increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The preceding performance control means is
During the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start The feature is that it can be controlled so that advance presentation of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, even if the specific starting information is withheld, the preceding performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stopping mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to avoid performing advance performances that may become unnecessary as much as possible. That is, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the player's interest is attracted to the effect being displayed, so even if a preliminary effect regarding the specific start information is performed, it may become a useless effect. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the advance effect regarding the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific gaming state includes:
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) in which a first specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state) can be executed;
A second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) in which a second specific control different from the first specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in C-time-saving gaming state) can be executed. Ori,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state),
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special stop mode ends, the When the state is shifted to the first specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived due to the fulfillment of the variation start condition regarding the specific start information, the second specific control is not executed and the first It is characterized by the ability to execute specific control.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the specific start information is transferred to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, Even if a variable display is performed and a specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage that the player can obtain from deriving the special stop mode from being lost.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends,
The preceding performance control means is
When the special stopping mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, and after the special gaming state ends, the specific starting information is When the game mode is controlled to be in a gaming state, it is possible to control so that the advance performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed.

In the above gaming machine (6), even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the specific gaming state is controlled after the special gaming state ends, the specific start information will be suspended. This is so that no advance performance is performed. This makes it possible to suppress necessary advance performance from being performed.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, the It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to shift to the specific gaming state based on specific starting information.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, after the special game state ends, the game is not shifted to the specific game state based on the specific start information. Therefore, for example, when the special gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stop mode, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The preceding performance control means is
When the special stopping mode is derived, even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, after the special gaming state ends, the The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control so that advance performance regarding specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, it is possible to avoid performing a preliminary performance that may become unnecessary after the special gaming state ends. It can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived when the special stopping mode is derived, after the special gaming state ends, When the special stopping mode is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state with a high expected value (for example, a high probability gaming state), the specific stopping mode is derived when the fluctuation start condition for the specific starting information is satisfied. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the game so that the game does not shift to the specific gaming state even if the game is played.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, after the special gaming state ends, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state) with a high expected value from which a special stop mode is derived is prioritized over a specific gaming state. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
further comprising a counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the variable number of times the symbol is displayed;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches a specified number (e.g. ceiling value), it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (e.g. C time saving gaming state);
The preceding performance control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived, the above-mentioned If the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches the predetermined number of times, it is possible to control so that the advance performance regarding the specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific starting information is withheld, the number of variable display times of the symbol counted by the counting means is determined before the variable start condition for the specific starting information is satisfied. When reaches a specified number of times, a transition is made to a specific gaming state before a specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if a preliminary performance is performed regarding the specific start information, such preliminary performance may become an unnecessary preliminary performance. Therefore, by not performing such advance performances that may become unnecessary, the decrease in interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The lottery results further include special results (for example, a small win), and
A special game in which when the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a small winning display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a transition can be made to a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising state control means;
The preceding performance control means is
The starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived and special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, and the starting information about the specific starting information includes: Even if the variation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the variation start condition is satisfied, the control is performed so that a preliminary effect regarding the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the above gaming machine (11), the specific start information and the special start information are held, and the variation start condition for the special start information is satisfied before the variation start condition for the specific start information. This makes it possible to perform a preliminary presentation of specific starting information even when the system is running. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The lottery results further include special results (for example, a small win), and
A special game state in which when the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode indicating the special result is derived, a transition can be made to a special game state (for example, a small winning game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising a control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The preceding performance control means is
During the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a preliminary performance is performed.

The gaming machine described in (12) above is configured such that, if specific starting information is suspended during the variable display of symbols from which a special stopping mode is derived, a preliminary effect regarding this specific starting information is performed. . This makes it possible to increase interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

[15-5. Appendix 5]
The gaming machine in Appendix 5 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol lottery (for example, a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a special starting area (for example, the starter switch 121, 141A, 141B) )and,
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (e.g., jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, special game state control is possible to control the special gaming state (e.g., jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145);
A game state in which the special symbol is displayed variably, and a specific game that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than a normal game state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing),
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) for normal symbols) that performs a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a normal starting area (for example, the passing gate switch 127);
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls the result of the normal symbol lottery to be derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating a normal symbol win is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol drawing facilitation means (for example, the normal electric accessory opening) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special starting area a main CPU 201) that performs processing (S296);
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is
At least one of the probability that the stop mode per normal symbol is derived, the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area, and the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed is determined according to the normal pattern. A gaming state in which specific control different from the gaming state is executed,
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) that is controllable until the first ending condition is satisfied, with transition conditions being that the special stop mode is derived and the special gaming state ends;
The transition condition is that a specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for each time saving) is derived by the symbol control means, and a second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) that can be controlled until the second end condition is satisfied. )and,
At least two specific games of a third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) in which the transition condition is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and the control is possible until the third ending condition is satisfied. It is characterized by including the state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state where the transition condition is that the specific stopping mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbol being performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific gaming states are prepared among the third specific gaming states that serve as transition conditions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming properties.

Note that the specific control may be the same in the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state, or may be different in the specific control mode. Further, among the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state, the specific control mode in two specific gaming states is the same, and the specific control mode in the remaining one specific gaming state is the same. The mode of specific control in the above two specific gaming states may be different.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B working time saving gaming state) are:
The present invention is characterized in that the derivation probabilities of the stopping modes per normal symbol are the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine (2) above, the probability of deriving the stop mode per normal symbol is the same or approximately the same in the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the second specific gaming state (e.g., C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (e.g., B-time-saving gaming state), there are a plurality of states in which the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area is different. Ease of passage patterns (for example, opening patterns for ordinary electric accessories) are prepared,
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are:
At least some of the plurality of passage ease patterns are configured such that the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special starting area is the same or substantially the same. .

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are such that the game ball passes through the special starting area in at least some of the passing ease patterns among the plurality of passing ease patterns. are constructed so that the degree of ease is the same or approximately the same. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B-time saving gaming state), there are a plurality of time patterns in which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed at different times. It is prepared and
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are:
The present invention is characterized in that in at least some of the plurality of time patterns, the times during which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed are the same or approximately the same.

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state have the same or approximately the same time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in at least some of the plurality of time patterns. They are configured to be the same. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest regardless of whether the game is controlled in the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time saving) is derived in the first specific gaming state, the first specific control corresponding to the first specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) ) can be maintained.

The gaming machine of (5) above does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific gaming state, but instead corresponds to the first specific gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain the first specific control.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the specific stop mode (for example, display mode per time saver) is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saver final variation) in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saver game state), after the specific timing (For example, the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control in the next variation after the final time saving variation).

The gaming machine described in (6) above is capable of changing from the first specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific gaming state. be.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the final time saving variation) in the first specific gaming state, the first specific stop mode is derived after the specific timing (for example, the next variation after the final time saving variation). Both the first specific control corresponding to the gaming state (for example, time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state) are performed. It is characterized by the fact that it can be controlled so that it does not occur.

The gaming machine of (7) above is configured such that when a specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific gaming state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. This allows for control. Possible to control so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, control such that the first specific control is ended and the second specific control is not started.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, the third specific control is not changed to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state). The third specific control corresponding to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be maintained.

The gaming machine of (8) above does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, but instead corresponds to the third specific gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain the third specific control.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (for example, the next time saving final variation) variation), the third specific control (for example, time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be changed to the second specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (9) above is capable of changing from the third specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the third specific gaming state. be.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The mode of the specific control may be different between the second specific gaming state (eg, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (eg, B working time saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine (10) above, the mode of specific control is different between the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. This increases the variety of games and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the first specific gaming state If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in,
The number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the first termination condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the second termination condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state overlap, the variable number of displays of the special symbol that can be executed until the first ending condition is satisfied, and the second ending condition are It is possible to control the specific game state until the special symbol is variably displayed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the special symbol is realized.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the third specific gaming state If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in,
The number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the second termination condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the third termination condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state overlap, the variable number of times the special symbol can be displayed until the second ending condition is satisfied, and the third ending condition are It is possible to control the specific game state until the special symbol is variably displayed for the greater number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the special symbol is realized.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed;
The counting means includes:
If a condition for transition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one of the at least two specific gaming states, or a condition for transitioning to the one specific gaming state and the other specific gaming state. If the transition conditions are met,
a variable number of display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the one specific gaming state is met; a variable number of times that the special symbol can be displayed that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific gaming state is met; It is characterized by being able to count both.

The gaming machine described in (13) above can be used when a transition condition to another specific gaming state is satisfied in any one specific gaming state, or when a transition condition to one specific gaming state and a transition to another specific gaming state are established. If the conditions are met, the number of display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of one specific gaming state is met, and the variable number of special symbols that can be displayed until the ending condition of the other specific gaming state is met. It is possible to count both the number of times the page is displayed and the number of times it is displayed.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (13) above,
When the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, an ending condition setting means (for example, performs the processing of S235, S237, S238 Main CPU201)
The termination condition setting means includes:
In the case where the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is satisfied and the case where the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) is satisfied, the above-mentioned It is characterized in that a different number of times can be set as the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (for example, the number of time-saving times).

The gaming machine of (14) above sets a different number of times as the variable display number of special symbols depending on whether the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied or the case where the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (14) above,
In the first specific gaming state,
The derivation probability of the normal symbol per stop mode is higher than either of the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine of (15) above, the probability of deriving the stop mode per normal symbol is higher in the first specific gaming state than in either the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state. Thereby, the first specific gaming state can be positioned as a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means is
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied, the third specific gaming state It is characterized by being controllable.

The gaming machine of (16) above can be controlled to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means includes:
If the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are met, the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible even if the conditions for shifting to the third specific gaming state are met.

The gaming machine described in (17) above allows transition to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is something.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means includes:
In the variable display of the special symbol for which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol for the ceiling number), the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied ( For example, if a specific stopping mode has not been derived, the game can transition to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are not satisfied. do.

In the gaming machine of (18) above, when the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the second specific gaming state. It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition of is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
comprising a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time-saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped;
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol for which the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol for the ceiling number), the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied ( For example, if a specific stopping mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state after confirming that the conditions for shifting to the second specific gaming state are not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of (19) above shifts to the second specific gaming state when the condition for shifting to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the condition for shifting to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. After confirming that the transition condition is not satisfied, it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above,
If a condition for transitioning to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving) or a transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving) is satisfied, a transition to establish a transition flag to the specific gaming state. Equipped with a flag establishment means,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of (20) above shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition conditions for the second specific gaming state are met, and shifts to the third specific gaming state when the shifting conditions for the third specific gaming state are met. It was designed to be migrated.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means includes:
If the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established, and if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established. This establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means includes:
If the second transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the second specific gaming state, and when the third transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of (21) above establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. In other words, a separate flag is set to be established.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S203 in FIG. 38 is determined as YES), it is possible to transition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state). It is characterized by certain things.

In the gaming machine (22) above, when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established, priority is given to transition to the third specific gaming state.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
If both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established, it is possible to transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state).

The gaming machine (23) above is configured to give priority to the transition to the second specific gaming state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means includes:
Used when the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) are met and when the transition conditions to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) are satisfied. It is characterized in that it establishes a common transition flag (for example, a time-saving transition flag).

The gaming machine of (24) above is configured to establish a common transition flag that is commonly used when the transition condition for the second specific gaming state and the transition condition for the third specific gaming state are satisfied. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the third specific gaming state It is characterized by being able to migrate to

In the gaming machine (25) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the third specific gaming state rather than to the second specific gaming state. The system is designed to give priority to the migration of

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
comprising a counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started;
The specific game state control means includes:
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, even if the condition for transition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the second specific gaming state It is characterized by being able to migrate to

In the gaming machine (26) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied, the gaming machine shifts to the second specific gaming state rather than shifting to the third specific gaming state. The system is designed to give priority to the migration of

According to the gaming machine of appendix 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

[15-6. Appendix 6]
The gaming machine in Appendix 6 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions;
A special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived;
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145) capable of controlling the special game state to a special game state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed;
a counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a ceiling counter updating process) capable of counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed when the special game state is not in the special game state;
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) having
The gaming state control means includes:
As a game state in which the special symbol is displayed variably,
Normal gaming state and
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) which can be controlled with the transition condition being that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times, and which is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being controllable to any one of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special gaming state, it is possible to control the specific gaming state by counting the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed and setting the transition condition as the counted number of times reaches a specified number of times. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new gaming features.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means include:
A game state in which the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed is counted by the counting means (e.g., a game state in which the variable probability flag is off), and a game state in which the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed is not counted by the counting means (e.g., a game state in which the variable probability flag is off). (a gaming state in which the flag is on);

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, there are gaming states that are counted by the counting means and gaming states that are not counted. This expands the range of games and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means include:
The probability that the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state), and the special stop mode are derived as the game states in which the variable display number of the special symbols is counted by the counting means is a normal gaming state and a higher advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state),
The gaming state control means includes:
When the advantageous gaming state is not controlled, when the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, the specific gaming state can be controlled;
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, even if the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, it is possible not to control to the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the counting means counts whether the game is in a normal game state, a specific game state, or an advantageous game state. However, if it is not controlled to an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to control to a specific gaming state when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, but if it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times. This makes it possible to not control to a specific gaming state even if the

The above-mentioned "case where control is not performed to the advantageous gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a case where the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches a specified number without being controlled to the advantageous gaming state even once. Furthermore, the above-mentioned "case where the game is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state" refers to, for example, a case where the game is controlled to the normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state has ended in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability-variable falling lottery. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) capable of storing information including information on the number of times counted by the counting means as information related to the progress of the game;
information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used to erase information stored in the storage means;
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means, separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. Counting initialization operation means that can initialize information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch different from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.);
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of (4) above initializes information on the number of times counted by the counting means, separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. The present invention is equipped with a count initialization operation means that can be used to perform initialization operations.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the counting initialization operation means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing settings) is operated, the information erasing means (for example, the main It is characterized by having a CPU 201).

In the gaming machine (5) above, when the count initialization operation means is operated, the information stored in the storage means can be erased.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (e.g. small win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (e.g. , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can control
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect to be performed in a predetermined effect area;
Equipped with
The performance control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the conditions for transition to the specific gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed rather than the special performance that suggests that the special stop mode is derived. The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a transition effect indicating that the transition condition has been satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of a special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to a specific gaming state, rather than a special effect that suggests that a special stop mode is derived, Control is performed so that a transition performance indicating that a transition condition to a specific gaming state has been satisfied is performed with priority.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (e.g. small win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (e.g. , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can control
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect to be performed in a predetermined effect area;
Equipped with
The performance control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the condition for transition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the special stop mode is The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so that a special effect suggesting that a stopping mode is derived is given priority.

In the above gaming machine (7), when a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of a special symbol in which the conditions for transition to a specific gaming state are satisfied, a transition effect that suggests that the conditions for transition to the specific gaming state are satisfied. Control is performed so that a special effect that suggests that a special stopping mode is derived is performed with priority.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The counting means is capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol when variable display of the special symbol is started;
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol,
The lottery means is
a first special symbol lottery means that performs a first special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a first special starting area (for example, first starting port switch 121);
a second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a second special starting area (for example, second starting port switches 141A, 141B);
has
The special symbol control means is
A first special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived; )and,
A second special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived; )and,
The first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time and the unit time The expected value of one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per hit is configured to be larger than the other expected value,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, ceiling value), when the variable display of the special symbol starts when the specified number of times is reached, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. It is characterized by certain things.

The gaming machine of (8) above is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time; In a gaming machine configured such that one of the expected values of the number of changes of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the other, the counted number of times reaches a specified number of times. In this case, when the variable display of special symbols is started when the specified number of times is reached, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the timing of transition to a specific gaming state from being delayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (e.g. small win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state (e.g. , a small winning game state), a special game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145),
The gaming state control means includes:
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (e.g. ceiling value), from when the variable display of the special symbol starts when the specified number of times is reached until the result of the lottery is derived. While it is possible to transition to the specific gaming state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol when reaching the specified number of times, after the special game state ends. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (9) above is capable of shifting to a specific gaming state by the time the lottery result is derived when the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When a special stop mode is derived in the variable display of special symbols at the time, it is possible to shift to a specific game state after the special game state ends.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The game state in which the special symbol is variably displayed is an advantageous game in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol is variably displayed is higher than in the normal game state and the specific game state. The state (for example, high-precision gaming state) is controllable, and
The gaming machine is
In the advantageous gaming state, it is equipped with a falling lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of performing a falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the advantageous gaming state,
The counting means includes:
If the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the falling lottery without counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to start counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol. It is characterized by

The gaming machine described in (10) above does not count the number of variable display times of special symbols in an advantageous gaming state, but starts counting the number of variable display times of special symbols when the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of a falling lottery. This made it possible.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the lottery is conducted so that the special stop mode is derived at
The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability by a specified value within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the probability,
The predetermined value is different depending on the preset value so that the predetermined number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which preset value is set among the plurality of preset values. do.

The gaming machine of (11) above can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities for deriving the special stop mode, and the special stop mode is derived with the probability corresponding to the set setting value. This is a gaming machine where a lottery is held. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived by a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived. The specified value differs depending on the setting value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which setting value is set among the plurality of setting values. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discover the set value based on the specified number of times which is a condition for transition to a specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

[15-7. Appendix 7]
The gaming machine in Appendix 7 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When a predetermined condition is established, a special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that can perform a special symbol lottery;
A special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (e.g., jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, special game state control is possible to control the special gaming state (e.g., jackpot game state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S145);
a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a gaming state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A performance control means (for example, a sub CPU 301 that performs a performance mode determination process (S504)) capable of controlling display performance to be performed in a predetermined display performance area;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
Normal gaming state and
A plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state and has a transition condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. It is possible to control either of the following;
The performance control means is
In the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the final change of the ceiling), the game progress effects related to the progress of the game (for example, the shutter closing effect, the right-handed navigation effect, the night mode display effect) are It is characterized by being controllable so that it is started.

The gaming machine described in (1) above has an unprecedented new gameplay feature in which a game progress effect related to the progress of the game is performed in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with

In addition, "a game progress effect related to the progress of the game is started in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times" means the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times. This includes not only a game progress performance performed at the time, but also a game progress performance performed thereafter (for example, variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbols include one special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) and another special symbol (for example, a second special symbol),
The special symbol lottery means is
One special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a hit determination process (S104) for the first special symbol) that performs a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol, and a special symbol lottery for the other special symbol. and other special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the second special symbol hit determination process (S104)),
The special symbol control means is
one special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the first special symbol) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived; ,
Other special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the second special symbol) that performs variable display of the other special symbol and controls so that the result of the other special symbol lottery is derived; ,
and, even if either one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed;
The gaming machine is
When another condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied, a normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) of the normal symbol) performs a normal symbol lottery;
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display end process (S294)) that performs variable display of the normal symbol and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived;
When the normal symbol winning stop mode indicating a normal symbol winning is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol drawing facilitation means (for example, a normal electric winning combination) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol drawing a main CPU 201) that performs object release processing (S296);
Furthermore,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol or a second display effect accompanying the variable display of the other special symbol,
Prior to the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display performance is given priority over the second display performance, while
After the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect can be performed so as to be performed less frequently than before the transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (2) above is a gaming machine that can variably display one special symbol and another special symbol in parallel, and before transitioning to a specific gaming state, that is, the special symbol is variably displayed a specified number of times. Up until now, the first display performance was displayed along with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific game state, the frequency of display of the first display performance was reduced.

Furthermore, after the transition to the specific gaming state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, the night mode display effect) accompanying the variable display of other special symbols is displayed with priority over the first display effect.

Furthermore, "performing the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific gaming state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is lower than before the transition to the specific gaming state. This is intended to include not only a case where the first display performance is low, but also a case where the first display performance is not displayed at all after transitioning to a specific gaming state.

In addition, the special symbol lottery facilitation means makes it possible to increase the frequency of execution of other special symbol lottery, but it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of other special symbol lottery by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing other special symbol lottery (for example, by setting a second starting opening). A plurality of such symbols may be provided), and only one of them may be used to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery by the special symbol lottery facilitation means.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of special symbols after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to perform the first display effect until the second display effect is started. (For example, second normal pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (3) above performs the first display performance until the second display performance starts when the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of one special symbol. This is what made it possible.

An example of a mode in which the first display effect is performed until the second display effect is started is a mode in which the first display effect is displayed in a loop.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect that displays the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state) It is possible to do
If the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display ends or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect that displays the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state) It is possible to do
If the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display ends or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

The gaming machines described in (4) and (5) above are capable of performing a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific gaming state when the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is completed. This is what I did. In such a gaming machine, if the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent displays after transitioning to the specific gaming state A third display performance is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

Note that (4) above can also be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (1) above. Similarly, (5) above can be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above.
The gaming state control means includes:
The specific gaming state can be controlled until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
The performance control means is
When the first variable display of the other special symbols after transitioning to the specific gaming state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined ending condition (for example, a count-up displaying the number of time-savings in the B-time-saving gaming state) It is possible to perform
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In this case, or when the variable display of the other special symbol is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbol after the variable display of the other special symbol is completed, or the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. The third display effect may be performed when the third display effect is not displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (2), (3) or (5) above,
The performance control means is
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol is performed before the variable display of the other special symbol. If the variable display of the one special symbol ends during the process, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other variable display executed before the variable display of the other special symbol is When the variable display of one special symbol ends during the variable display of the special symbols, the first display performance can be performed when the variable display of one special symbol ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The performance control means is
The game progress performance can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbol that is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state. (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (7) above, when the variable display of another special symbol that is executed before the variable display of another special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state, starts the game. It is possible to display progress effects.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The performance control means is
The variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the variable display of the other special symbol that is executed before the variable display of the other special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state. Even if a reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, right hit small navigation effect) can be displayed (e.g. , first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (8) above, one special symbol is displayed during the variable display of another special symbol that is executed before the variable display of another special symbol that is the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state. When a variable display of symbols is performed and a ready-to-reach performance is performed as a first display performance accompanying the variable display of one special symbol, a game progress performance (for example, a right-handed small navigation performance) can be displayed.

Furthermore, "the game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effects described in (1) above, but only a part of the game progress effect described in (1) above. Including those that are displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (2) or 3 above,
The performance control means is
The first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol is performed before the variable display of the other special symbol. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the game, a part of the game progress performance is not performed (for example, the third irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to a specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other variable display executed before the variable display of the other special symbol is When the variable display of one special symbol is not performed during the variable display of the special symbols, the second display performance is performed without performing the first display performance.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above,
The normal symbol control means is
The variable display of the normal symbol is performed in a short and regular pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern “02H” in FIG. 231). , a long and short pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times the normal pattern is displayed per unit time is relatively small (for example, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern "05H" in FIG. 231). It is possible to perform this in any of the diagram variable display modes,
Before the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 231), the variable display of the normal symbol in the long and short pattern variable display mode is changed after the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, , the time saving flag=1) shown in FIG. 231 can be performed at a different frequency.

The gaming machine described in (10) above makes it possible to perform variable display of normal symbols in the long and short symbol variable display mode at a frequency different from that after shifting to the specific gaming state before shifting to the specific gaming state. It is something.

``Frequency different from after transition to a specific gaming state'' may be set to be higher frequency than after transition to a specific gaming state, or lower frequency (probability) than after transition to a specific gaming state. (including 0).

In addition, "before the transition to the specific gaming state, the variable display of normal symbols in the long and short pattern variable display mode is performed at a frequency different from that after the transition to the specific gaming state" means that before the transition to the specific gaming state This also includes a mode in which the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed at all in the variable display mode of the long and common symbol. Here, "not performing at all" may mean either a case where a lottery is conducted but the probability is 0, or a case where a lottery is conducted but the lottery result is discarded.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above,
The other special symbol control means is
The variable display of the other special symbol is performed in a short special symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable displays of the other special symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, variation of the special symbol for a high start). pattern), and a feature pattern variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively small (for example, a variation pattern of special symbols for a low start). It is possible to perform in any of a plurality of special figure variable display modes including,
Although the probability that the special stop mode (for example, jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, It is possible to perform the variable display of the other special symbols in the characteristic feature variable display mode more frequently than after the transition (for example, the second irregular pattern).
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine described in (11) above, although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, before the transition to the specific gaming state This makes it possible to display other special symbols in a variable display manner more frequently than before.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a normal performance that can be displayed in the normal gaming state and a specific performance that can be displayed in the specific gaming state, and
It has a count performance control means that can perform a count performance that can grasp the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance,
The count performance control means is
When shifting from the normal game state to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance.

The game machine of (12) above is capable of resetting and displaying the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed before switching from the normal performance to the specific performance when the normal game state is transferred to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features.

[15-8. Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a system is provided in which the game shifts to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of intensively studying the various performances performed in gaming machines, came up with the idea that the interest of the game could be improved by devising ways to develop the performances.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(A-1) A performance execution means capable of performing a performance,
an icon display means capable of displaying an icon (a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, etc.) in the performance executed by the performance execution means;
The icon display means is configured to display icons of the same system when the first performance (first preview performance) is being executed by the performance execution means and when the second performance (second preview performance) is being executed by the performance execution means. It is possible to display an icon (the "bell" icon),
The effect execution means may be arranged to perform different operations after the icons are displayed in a case where the icons of the same type are displayed in the first effect and a case where the icons of the same type are displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first performance (first preview performance) is being executed and when the second performance (second preview performance) is being executed, icons of the same type are mutually displayed. (“bell” icon). Then, if an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), and an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). ) is displayed, and after the icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. This allows for variation in the effects that occur before and after the icon is displayed, while also making it easier for players to visually understand the development of the effect by making the icons that are displayed between those effects the same type. can do. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

As explained in connection with the fifth pachinko game machine, as the icon in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately employ an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. "Icons of the same type" refers to one icon and another icon having at least some of the same characters, figures, symbols, and colors. For example, when adopting the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 (see FIG. 162(b)) as an icon, if the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed and the second effect (second preview effect) is ) is being executed, the exact same "X" icon confirmed image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed, the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 may be displayed. If the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 in which the character "X" is the first color (for example, blue) is displayed, and the second effect (second preview effect) is being executed, the "X" character is the first color (for example, blue). An “X” icon confirmed image 9051 of a second color (for example, red) may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first preview effect) is being executed, an “X” icon confirmed image 9051 in which the letter “X” is in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed, and the second When the effect (second preview effect) is being executed, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052 (FIG. 162 ( c)) may be displayed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the various icons (the "bell" icon, the "watermelon" icon, the "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon) are In the jackpot preview performances (the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance), they are displayed as "icons of the same type". For example, various icons (a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, and a second specific icon) displayed in the first production (first preview production) are as follows: It is "same type" as the various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). be.

(A-2) The gaming machine according to (A-1) above,
The effect execution means executes a common effect (as shown in FIG. 144) in the case where the icon of the same type is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same type is displayed in the second effect. After the icon corresponding to the presentation number "91" or "92" is executed (notice after stopping the icon), it is possible to execute the mutually different effects,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), the same icon is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). It is now possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in Figure 144 stops) when the system icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. It is composed of This makes it easier for players to grasp the progress of the performance through a common performance (notification after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144 stops). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, data for the first performance (first preview performance) and second performance (second preview performance) are included as data for the performance performed when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the game, the performance control can be simplified.

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2) above,
The effect execution means may display a first icon (a "bell" icon) as the same type of icon, and a second icon (a "watermelon" icon) different from the first icon. It is possible to execute a common effect (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) in both cases.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed as an icon of the same type, and when the second icon (the "bell" icon) different from the first icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed, ``Watermelon'' icon) is displayed, a common effect (a notice after the icon corresponding to the effect number ``91'' or ``92'' shown in FIG. 144 is stopped) can be executed. There is. This makes it easier for players to grasp the progress of the performance through a common performance (notification after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144 stops). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, as data for the effect performed when the icon is displayed, both data for the first icon (the "bell" icon) and data for the second icon (the "watermelon" icon) are stored. Since there is no need to keep it in place, production control can be simplified.

Note that "common" is a concept that can also be translated as "same type", similar to the above-mentioned "same system", and one performance does not have to be exactly the same as another performance. If one performance and another performance contain at least some of the same elements, these performances can be said to be a common performance. For example, if the basic scenery is the same in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in another effect, even if some parts of the scenery are slightly different, these background images may be considered "common".

(A-4) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-3) above,
a movable member;
An advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The effect executing means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 160) determines the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest that
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) is displayed, it suggests the level of expectation that the control will be advantageous to the player through the operating time of the movable member. It is configured in such a way that it is possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of icons of the same type (the "bell" icon), and to change the behavior of the movable member from the display of the icons of the same type (the "bell" icon). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance.

(A-5) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-4) above,
a movable member;
An advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The performance execution means is
The first specific effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) that is performed when the first icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed as the icon of the same type. ), a third icon (a "cherry" icon) different from the first icon can suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operation time of the movable member. In the second specific performance (the preview after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "93" shown in FIG. 144) that is performed when is displayed, the movable member is not controlled to operate.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first specific performance (performance number "91" or " 92), the player is configured to be able to indicate his or her expectation that control will be advantageous to the player through the operating time of the movable member. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of icons of the same type (the "bell" icon), and to change the behavior of the movable member from the display of the icons of the same type (the "bell" icon). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance. On the other hand, a second specific performance (corresponding to performance number "93" shown in FIG. 144) is performed when a third icon ("cherry" icon) different from the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. The system is configured so that the control to operate the movable member is not performed during the icon (post-stop notice). In this way, by varying the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member depending on the type of icon to be displayed, it is possible to associate the type of icon to be displayed with the performance mode after the icon is displayed. The development of the performance after the icon is displayed can be made easier to understand.

Note that the movement of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) is finished, or while the movement of the movable member is being performed, the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) may be started. The "bell" icon) may continue to be displayed.

(A-6) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The performance execution means is
When the icon of the same type is displayed in the first performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a notice after the icon corresponding to the performance number “91” or “92” shown in FIG. 144 is stopped); , it is possible to execute the specific performance even when the same type of icon is displayed in the second performance;
In the second effect, before the icon of the same type is displayed, a preliminary effect indicating that the icon of the same type will be displayed (in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135) Display of icon-suggesting items)
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), a specific performance (performance number "91" shown in FIG. 144 or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (after the icon stops), it is also possible to specify when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second preview effect). It is configured to be able to execute the effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the performance through a specific performance (notice after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144 has stopped), so that the development of the performance can be further It can be made easier to understand. Also, in the second performance (second preview performance), it is suggested that the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed before the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured such that it is possible to execute a preliminary effect (display of an icon suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135). As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the performance ahead of time.

(A-7) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-6) above,
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The performance execution means is
When the icon of the same type is displayed in the first performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a notice after the icon corresponding to the performance number “91” or “92” shown in FIG. 144 is stopped); , it is possible to execute the specific performance even when the same type of icon is displayed in the second performance;
In the second performance, a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (roulette performance) is provided,
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first suggestion means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same type is displayed;
a second suggestion means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect corresponding to the effect number "15" shown in FIG. 135) capable of indicating the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed;
The performance execution means is
When it is suggested by the first suggestion means in the second performance that the icon of the same type is displayed, it is possible to execute the specific performance after the icon of the same type is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation level is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second performance, the specific performance is not executed;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), a specific performance (performance number "91" shown in FIG. 144 or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (after the icon stops), it is also possible to specify when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second preview effect). It is configured to be able to execute the effect (notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the performance through a specific performance (notice after the icon corresponding to performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144 has stopped), so that the development of the performance can be further It can be made easier to understand. In addition, in the second performance (second preview performance), it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (roulette performance), and in the predetermined performance (roulette performance), the same type of icon ("bell" icon) In some cases, it is suggested that the control will be displayed, and in other cases, it is suggested that the player expects control to be performed that is advantageous to the player. Then, if it is suggested that an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) will be displayed in the second performance (second preview performance), an icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed. After that, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144), while in the second performance (second preview performance) the above expectation level If this is suggested, the specific effect (notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) will be displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the performance ahead of time. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned level of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a sense of expectation among the players even without the development of the relevant performance, so it is possible to improve the appeal of the second performance (second preview performance). Can be done.

(A-8) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-7) above,
The performance execution means is
A common specific performance (first transition performance (common)) in the case where the icon of the same type is displayed in the first performance and the case where the icon of the same type is displayed in the second performance. ), it is possible to perform the mutually different effects,
If the icon of the same type is displayed in a third performance (third preview performance) different from the first performance and the second performance, a specific performance (third preview performance) different from the common specific performance is displayed. It is possible to perform the 1st connection performance (dedicated)),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the first performance (first preview performance), the same icon is displayed in the second performance (second preview performance). The configuration is such that a common specific performance (first connecting performance (common)) can be executed when a system icon (a "bell" icon) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the performance through the common specific performance (first connecting performance (common)), making it easier to understand the development of the performance. In addition, data for the first performance (first preview performance) and second performance (second preview performance) are included as data for the performance performed when the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the game, the performance control can be simplified. Furthermore, if the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the third performance (third preview performance), a specific performance different from the above-mentioned common specific performance (first transition performance (common)) will be displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a performance (first transition performance (dedicated)). Thereby, an appropriate specific performance can be realized according to the content of the third performance (third preview performance) that is different from the first performance (first preview performance) and the second performance (second preview performance). I can do it.

In the present invention, for a specific production that is different from the above-mentioned common specific production (first connecting production (common)), an icon of the same type (a "bell" icon) is displayed in the third production (third preview production). It may be something that can only appear when the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in a performance other than the third performance (third preview performance). It may be. In addition, in the present invention, even if the same type of icon (the "bell" icon) is displayed in the third performance (third preview performance), the above-mentioned common specific performance (first transition performance (common)) ) may be performed.

(A-9) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-8) above,
Equipped with operation means (performance button 54) that can accept operations by the player,
The icon display means includes:
a first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the production button 54 is operated in the production corresponding to production numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 138); and,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated (when the production button 54 is not operated in the production corresponding to production numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 138). Display means;
The performance execution means executes a specific performance (continuation performance) in both cases when an icon is displayed by the first icon display means and when an icon is displayed by the second icon display means. is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, there are cases where the icon is displayed when the operating means (presentation button 54) is operated, and cases where the icon is displayed even when the operating means (presentation button 54) is not operated. There is. The configuration is such that a specific effect (continuation effect) can be executed in any situation in which the icon is displayed. As a result, a situation in which a specific effect (connection effect) is executed when the operating means (presentation button 54) is operated, and a situation in which a specific effect (connection effect) is executed even when the operating means (presentation button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create a situation in which the performance is different, and through such a situation, it is possible to create variations in the development of the performance.

Note that there are two types of performance: a specific performance (connection performance) that is executed when the operation means (performance button 54) is operated, and a specific performance (connection performance) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is not operated. may be a common effect (a partially different effect) or may be the exact same effect.

(A-10) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The performance execution means is
A symbol production execution means capable of executing a symbol production in which a symbol is displayed;
When a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol presentation performed in the first presentation state (the state in which the background is normally displayed), the second presentation state is changed from the first presentation state to and a presentation state switching means capable of switching to the presentation state No. 2 (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai),
The icon display means includes:
When the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol presentation performed in the first presentation state, it is possible to display a first icon (a “bell” icon) as the icon of the same type;
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol presentation after being switched to the second presentation state by the presentation state switching means, a second icon ("watermelon") different from the first icon is displayed. icon).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol performance performed in the first performance state (normal background display state), , it is possible to switch from the first presentation state (the state in which the background is normally displayed) to the second presentation state (the state in which the background is displayed after the 4-symbol Tenpai is successful), and also the second presentation state as the same type of icon. It is possible to display one icon (the "bell" icon). Then, after switching to the second performance state (the state in which the background is displayed after the 4-symbol tenpai is successful), when a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) is performed in the symbol performance, The configuration is such that it is possible to display a second icon (a "watermelon" icon) that is different from the first icon (a "bell" icon). In this way, the first icon (the "bell" icon) and the second icon (the "watermelon" icon) are displayed in stages, and the specific symbol display (the image display related to the 4-symbol tenpai incitement) and the production state are displayed. By associating the switching, it is possible to create an attractive production development.

Note that the first performance state and the second performance state may be states in which different backgrounds are displayed, or the appearance frequency of a predetermined performance (for example, a performance in which a predetermined character is displayed) is They may be in different states. For example, in the first performance state, the probability that the first performance will be performed is higher than the second performance, while in the second performance state, the probability that the second performance will be performed is higher than the first performance. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, in the first presentation state, the first character has a higher probability of appearing than the second character, while in the second presentation state, the second character has a higher probability of appearing than the first character. It may be configured as follows.

(A-11) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-10) above,
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying a variable symbol and a static display,
The symbol display means is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect execution means executes a pattern when the icon of the same type is displayed in a first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") after the start of variable display of the symbols until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute the mutually different effects in a second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of is resumed;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the variable display of symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the icons of the same type ("bell" icon ) is displayed, the above-mentioned mutually different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of symbols is restarted. As a result, it is possible to transition from the first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("Pseudo 2") using the display of the same type of icon ("bell" icon) as a landmark. Therefore, the development of the performance can be made easier to understand.

In the present invention, the period from the start of the variable display of symbols until the final stop display of the symbols is constituted as one unit game (special symbol variation game). One unit game (special symbol variation game) corresponds to one special symbol starting winning (one reserved ball), and the number of reserved balls does not decrease even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure it as follows.

[15-9. Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a system is provided in which the game shifts to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of intensively studying the various performances performed in gaming machines, came up with the idea that the interest of the game could be improved by devising ways to develop the performances.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(B-1) Equipped with a production mode control means capable of controlling any production mode among a plurality of production modes (a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage),
In the plurality of production modes, the occurrence rate of each production is different from each other,
The production mode control means sets the production mode to the first production mode when a specific condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) It is possible to transition from to other production modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the plurality of performance modes (first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage), the occurrence rate of each performance is different from each other, and under certain conditions ( When the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20 times), the transition from the first production mode (production stage) to the other production mode (production stage). As a result, as the game progresses, you can gradually transition between production modes (production stages) with different production trends, so that you can determine which production mode (production stage) you are currently in and which production mode (production stage) you will move to next. It is possible to arouse the player's interest in whether the game will move to the next stage. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting development, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in each of the plurality of performance modes (first performance stage, second performance stage, and third performance stage), a lottery is performed based on random numbers, and a lottery is performed based on the performance lottery table. , the content of the performance to be generated is determined. In each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), different production lottery tables are used. In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production is selected. Some parts are different. As a result, when a predetermined performance that can occur in any production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) is provided, the production mode (first production stage, third production stage) The probability of occurrence (frequency) of the production may be different for each production mode (for example, the 1st production stage), or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the 1st production stage) may be different for each production mode (for example, the 1st production stage). , the second presentation stage, and the third presentation stage). That is, in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the tendency (system) of production is different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, pseudo-continuous production is more likely to occur compared to the second production stage and the third production stage. Further, the time stock preview can only occur in the second performance stage. Further, the meter UP notice can only occur at the third production stage.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the destination performance mode (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is determined by lottery. It was explained as something that would be done. In the present invention, the method of determining the destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the production mode (first production stage , the second production stage, or the third production stage). In addition, there is a mode (random mode) in which the destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a mode in which the production mode (first production stage) is determined in a predetermined order. The player is configured to be able to select one of the modes (order mode) to which the stage, second production stage, or third production stage) moves by operating a button or the like. You may. Furthermore, the player can select to play the game in any one production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) by operating a button, etc. It may be configured as follows. For example, random mode, sequential mode, first production stage fixed mode (mode where the game is played only on the first production stage), second production stage fixed mode (mode where the game is played only on the second production stage), and third production stage. It may be configured such that the player can select one of the fixed modes (a mode in which the game is played only on the third production stage) by operating a button or the like. At this time, even if the first production stage fixed mode, the second production stage fixed mode, or the third production stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, A stage change preview performance may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is that the number of special symbol changes counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). An example has been described in which the condition that the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected is adopted. The specific conditions (conditions for stage change occurrence) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and any conditions can be adopted as appropriate. For example, the predetermined number of times may not be a predetermined numerical value, but may be a numerical value selected by lottery from among a plurality of numerical values (for example, 0 to 99). For example, at the start of a special symbol variation of 1 (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 178), a numerical value of 1 is selected by lottery, and a special symbol variation is performed the number of times corresponding to the selected numerical value. (a specific condition according to the lottery result is satisfied), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed. At this time, if 0 is selected by lottery, after once transitioning the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) in one special symbol variation, the special symbol In the variation, the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed again. Alternatively, when a specific condition is satisfied in response to a predetermined winning (for example, winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120), the performance mode (first performance stage, second performance stage, or third performance stage) is set. It is also possible to change the stage).

In addition, when RAM clearing is executed, it may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). Furthermore, at this time, the post-stage change variation counter (see step S9261 in FIG. 180) may be set to "0". RAM clearing is a process for clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203, as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a process for clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203. This process clears the information that exists. When the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed is transmitted as a command from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. By receiving this command, the sub control circuit 300 can recognize that RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed. As explained in the first pachinko gaming machine, when clearing the RAM (backup clearing process), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is, in principle, cleared. Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the production stage managed by the sub-control circuit 300 may be kept in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). As a result, regardless of the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the performance mode (for example, the first performance stage). Furthermore, at this time, the post-stage change variation counter may be set to "0".

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state and a variable probability gaming state (high probability gaming state) are provided as gaming states managed by the main control circuit 200, and in the variable probability gaming state, special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times ( 50 times), the game state shifts from the variable probability game state to the normal game state. Here, when transitioning from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, it may be possible to pass through another gaming state (intervening gaming state). For example, when special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the variable probability gaming state, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the intervening gaming state occurs, and in the intervening gaming state, the special symbol variation occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times). When executed, the intervening gaming state can be configured to transition to the normal gaming state. In the intervening gaming state, a lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables used in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table).

Further, as the performance mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300, a performance mode (intervention mode) corresponding to the intervening gaming state may be provided. For example, when special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) in the variable probability mode, the transition from the variable probability mode to the intervening mode occurs, and when the special symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times) in the intervening mode, It may be configured to transition from intervention mode to normal mode. For example, when the fixed variable mode ends, it is possible to display a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after entering the first winning mode). It is conceivable that the result screen may continue to be displayed even in the intervention mode.

When transitioning from such intervention mode to normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to a performance stage determined by lottery). In addition, when an irregularity (power outage, etc.) occurs or RAM clear is executed, the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200 is an intervening gaming state, while the production mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300 It may be configured such that a situation such as that is a predetermined production mode (for example, an image corresponding to the first production stage is displayed) may occur. In this case, it may be possible to stay in the predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage) until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (20 times).

(B-2)
The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
a game control means capable of controlling execution of the game based on one setting value among the plurality of setting values;
Setting value suggestion means capable of suggesting the setting value,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
The production mode control means is capable of transitioning from the first production mode to the second production mode when the specific condition is satisfied,
The set value suggestion means is capable of suggesting the set value by a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first presentation stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), the pachinko game machine It is possible to transition from a first production mode (first production stage) to a second production mode (second production stage), and a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) The configuration is such that it is possible to suggest setting values by. In this way, since a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) is performed, the transition from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) is performed. It is possible to arouse the player's interest in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, since it is possible to make the player predict the set value through the display (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs), it is possible to increase the player's interest in the condition.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the image indicating the name of the production mode (production stage) after transition is displayed, the content of the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) is displayed. This was explained as being reset (recovered). In this way, in the present invention, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is met, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is supported. It is possible to configure so that a display indicating a specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) is changed while an image (background, name, etc.) is being displayed.

In the present invention, it is possible to employ the display of a counter image when a stage change occurs as a display indicating a specific condition. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in a stage change game (a special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed), or a counter image displayed in a game before the stage change game (for example, one of the special symbol variations in which a stage change is performed). It may also be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, it may be configured such that an effect such as changing the color of the counter image to a color corresponding to a set value can be performed in a special symbol variation immediately before a special symbol variation in which a stage change is performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is
The first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “101” to “103” shown in FIG. 166) and the second performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “104” and “106” shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to execute a specific performance (sixth preview performance) in any one of a plurality of performance modes including
It is possible to display symbols in mutually different patterns when the specific production is executed in the first production mode and when the specific production is executed in the second production mode. be,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to execute a specific production (sixth preview production) in any one of a plurality of production modes including the production modes corresponding to "106", and the specific production (sixth preview production) In some cases, a specific performance (the 6th preview performance) is executed in the first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166). It is configured such that the symbols can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (effect modes corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166). Thereby, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern according to the production mode, and it is possible to realize a production in which the production mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-3) above,
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of displaying identification information in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
Among the plurality of performance modes, first performances (a first preview performance, a second preview performance, a third preview performance, and a fourth preview performance) are provided as performances that can be executed only in the first performance mode. has been
A second performance (eighth preview performance) is provided as a performance that can be executed only in the second performance mode among the plurality of performance modes,
A third performance (sixth preview performance) is provided as a performance that can be executed in both the first performance mode and the second performance mode,
The performance execution means is
The first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “101” to “103” shown in FIG. 166) and the second performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers “104” and “106” shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to perform the third performance in any one of a plurality of performance modes including;
In the case where the third effect is executed in the first effect mode and in the case where the third effect is executed in the second effect mode, the identification information is changed after starting the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to display the identification information in mutually different fluctuation patterns as the fluctuation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second performance mode (performance modes corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to execute the third performance (sixth preview performance) in any one of a plurality of performance modes including the performance mode corresponding to "106"), and the third performance (sixth preview performance) In the case where the third performance (sixth preview performance) is executed in the first performance mode (the performance mode corresponding to the performance numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166), and when the third performance (sixth preview performance) 2 (the performance modes corresponding to the performance numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166), the identification from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information. The configuration is such that the identification information can be displayed in mutually different variation patterns as information variation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to display the identification information in a variable pattern according to the performance mode, and it is possible to realize a performance in which the performance mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first performance (the first preview performance, the second preview performance, the third preview performance, and the fourth preview performance) and the second performance (the eighth preview performance) are respectively in the first performance mode (the first preview performance). The third performance (sixth preview performance) is only possible in the first production mode (first production stage). This is a performance that can be executed in both the second performance mode (second performance stage) and the second performance mode (second performance stage). Therefore, if a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, for example, if a transition is made from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage), , while the first performance (first preview performance, second preview performance, third preview performance, and fourth preview performance) will no longer be performed, the second performance (eighth preview performance) will be performed. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the third performance (sixth preview performance) continues to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's interest in each performance mode (performance stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "104" to "106" are performed, the decorative patterns are varied in a dedicated variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c). This was explained as a way of letting people know. On the other hand, when performances corresponding to performance numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default variation pattern as shown in FIG. 163(d) (FIGS. 168(a) to (c)) It is possible to vary the decorative pattern using a variation pattern in which the timing of the decorative pattern stopping is earlier than that shown in the variation pattern shown in FIG.

(B-5)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-4) above,
The above-mentioned specific condition can be established in response to a variable display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), but cannot be established in response to a variable display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation). ,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) can be established depending on the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), while the It is configured such that it cannot be realized depending on the display (second special symbol variation). As a result, in a situation where a variable display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation) is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) does not occur, but a variable display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation) In a situation where this is performed, a transition of production mode (production stage) will occur. As a result, the production mode (production stage ) can be characterized as a situation in which a transition occurs, and it is possible to make the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed more interesting.

(B-6)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-5) above,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 163) capable of displaying identification information in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) when a predetermined condition (a game ball enters the first starting port 120) is satisfied;
Display control means capable of causing the identification information display means to display the identification information in a variable manner and then to stop displaying the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means;
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading performance) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery,
The suggesting means is
In the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times, the display control may cause the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner based on one predetermined condition being satisfied (the held ball in the stage change section) among the plurality of predetermined conditions being satisfied. When the production mode is transitioned by the production mode control means in response to the transition of the production mode by the production mode control means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. Regarding the predetermined lottery conducted in accordance with the above, while it is possible to give a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. Regarding the prescribed lottery conducted in response to the said lottery, no suggestion can be made regarding the result of said lottery.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) is satisfied multiple times, the predetermined condition (the first starting port 120) is satisfied multiple times. When the production mode (production stage) is transitioned in response to the fluctuating display of identification information based on the fulfillment of one of the predetermined conditions (the corresponding held ball in the stage change section) , in response to a predetermined condition (the game ball being placed in the first starting port 120) being met after the variable display of the identification information based on the first predetermined condition being met (the held ball in the stage change section). Regarding the predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that has been held, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the result of the lottery (pre-reading performance), and to change the identification information based on the fulfillment of the one predetermined condition (the relevant reserved ball in the stage change section). For a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that is held in response to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) before the display starts, suggestions regarding the result of the lottery ( The system is configured in such a way that it is not possible to perform a look-ahead performance. As a result, depending on the relationship between the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 120) and the timing of the variable display at which the transition of the production mode (production stage) will be performed, The number of predetermined lotteries (big hit determinations) in which suggestions regarding the results (pre-read effects) can be made will change. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which no suggestion regarding the result (pre-reading effect) can be made is predetermined, the number of predetermined lotteries in which such suggestion (pre-reading effect) can be made is predetermined. (Jackpot determination) may be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to receive suggestions regarding the results of a predetermined lottery (pre-read performance).

(B-7)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-6) above,
A lottery means capable of conducting a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading performance) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery;
A transition destination production mode determining means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9203 in FIG. 178) capable of determining a transition destination production mode,
The performance mode control means is capable of transitioning from one performance mode to a transition destination performance mode determined by the transition destination performance mode determination means when the specific condition is satisfied,
The suggesting means is
In the case where the predetermined lottery is held a plurality of times, for the predetermined lottery held after the transition destination performance mode has been determined by the transition destination performance mode determining means among the plurality of predetermined lottery draws. , it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery, and it is not possible to make a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery for the predetermined lottery that was held before the transition destination performance mode is determined by the transition destination performance mode determining means. do not have,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed multiple times, the transition destination production mode (production stage) among the plurality of predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is For a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) that is held after the lottery has been decided, suggestions regarding the result of the lottery (pre-reading performance) can be made. Regarding a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination), it is configured such that no suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be made. As a result, depending on the context between the timing when each predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed and the timing when the transition destination production mode (production stage) is determined, a predetermined suggestion regarding the result (pre-read production) can be made. The number of drawings (jackpot determination) will change. Therefore, compared to a case where the number of predetermined drawings (jackpot determination) in which a suggestion regarding the result (pre-reading effect) cannot be made is predetermined, the number of predetermined drawings (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (pre-reading effect) can be made is Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of decisions (judgments), and it is possible to provide players with many opportunities to receive suggestions (pre-read effects) regarding the results of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-7) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The production mode control means is configured to control the production mode when a first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) is satisfied as the specific condition. In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The performance execution means is
When the performance mode is transitioned by the performance mode control means in response to the first condition being satisfied, a fourth performance (the performance corresponding to performance number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. a first performance execution means capable of
a second performance execution means capable of executing a fifth performance different from the fourth performance (performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169),
The effect mode control means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 181) executes the second condition regarding the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 169) even if the first condition is not satisfied. If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after transitioning to the first production stage) is When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to reaching a predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (production corresponding to production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) ) is possible. In addition, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), the fourth production (figure The second condition (the performance shown in FIG. 169) regarding the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) that is different from the performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 170) If the main variation pattern corresponding to number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). configured so that it is possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (the production number " 121" or "122"), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) and the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 169) Regarding the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122"), it is possible to arouse the player's interest in which conditions are satisfied and which performance occurs. As a result, the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (production stage) can be made even more interesting.

(B-9)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-8) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A performance selection means capable of selecting a performance to be executed by the performance execution means,
The performance mode control means changes from one performance mode to another when a predetermined performance (performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is selected by the performance selection means. It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect execution means executes the performance at any one of a plurality of timings including a first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)) and a second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)). , it is possible to execute the predetermined performance,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is selected, the first performance mode (performance stage) is selected. It is possible to transition from to another production mode (production stage), and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)) The predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings including ing. As a result, the predetermined performance related to the conditions for transitioning the performance mode (performance stage) (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is set to the first timing (FIG. 169 Because it occurs at timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)), there are many variations in relation to the transition of the production mode (production stage). It is possible to create the development of a performance.

Note that the execution timing of the predetermined performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)) and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)). In addition to the timing 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)), one or more timings may be provided. For example, while the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)) is set to be a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)), At a third timing that is a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)), a predetermined effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to "."

(B-10)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-9) above,
A lottery means capable of conducting a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
performance pattern selection means capable of selecting a performance pattern (sub variation pattern) according to the performance executed by the performance execution means;
A performance pattern replacement means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178) capable of replacing the performance pattern selected by the performance pattern selection means with another performance pattern,
The effect execution means includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of performing a suggestion effect (pre-reading effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery,
The effect pattern replacement means is configured to select a first effect pattern (sub variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 182) by the effect pattern selection means when the suggestive effect is performed by the suggestive effect execution means. is selected, the effect pattern is replaced, while when the second effect pattern (sub variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 182) is selected by the effect pattern selection means, does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) that can suggest the result of a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed, the first performance pattern (sub variation pattern "1" shown in FIG. 182) is performed. ” to “20”) is selected, the production pattern (sub variation pattern) is replaced, while the second production pattern (sub variation pattern “21” to “30” shown in FIG. 182) is selected. If so, the production pattern (sub variation pattern) is configured not to be replaced. In this way, as the first step in determining a performance pattern (sub-variation pattern), one performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) will be performed. Then, as a second step, when a suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) is performed, an appropriate performance pattern is created according to the suggestive performance (pre-reading performance) by replacing the performance pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) as necessary. In determining the (sub-variation pattern), it is possible to improve the efficiency of processing.

(B-11)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-10) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The production mode control means is
If the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) is met as the specific condition, the first production mode is changed. A first performance mode control means capable of transitioning to another performance mode;
When the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, the transition from one performance mode to another performance mode is established. a second production mode control means capable of transitioning to;
The performance execution means is
When the first performance mode control means changes the performance mode in response to the first condition being satisfied, the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. a first performance execution means capable of executing;
When the transition of the performance mode is performed by the second performance mode control means in response to the fulfillment of the second condition, the fifth performance (corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) a second performance execution means capable of executing a performance);
If both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the first effect execution means does not execute the fourth effect, and the second effect execution means executes the fourth effect. It is possible to carry out the performance of 5.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)), It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after transitioning to the first production stage) is When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to reaching a predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (production corresponding to production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) ) is possible. In addition, when the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied, the first production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied. When the production mode (production stage) is changed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth production (the production corresponding to production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches a predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (production number "121" shown in FIG. 169) ” or the main variation pattern corresponding to “122” is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170) is not executed. The configuration is such that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) can be executed without the need to perform the fifth effect. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after moving to the first production stage reaches the predetermined number (20)) and the second condition (the production number shown in FIG. 169) If the main variation pattern corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected), than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) By preferentially executing the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169), the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. ) does not occur, giving the player a sense of surprise, and increasing the player's interest in the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the fifth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) is better than the fourth performance (the performance corresponding to the performance number "131" shown in FIG. 170). It has been explained that the performance (direction) can be executed preferentially. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 170) is more effective than the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be configured to be executed preferentially. The predetermined performance includes a performance performed when a special symbol change starts (for example, a symbol action preview performance). The symbol action preview performance is a performance that generates a predetermined effect on the decorative design at the start of special symbol variation. Even if it is decided to generate a symbol action preview performance at the start of one special symbol variation, if a stage change is performed in the special symbol variation, the symbol action preview performance is not performed. It is possible to do so.

(B-12)
Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-11) above,
A symbol display means capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner and in a stopped manner;
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in one of a plurality of performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to performance numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 186);
performance pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of performance patterns as a performance pattern to be executed by the performance execution means;
The symbol display means is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed,
The performance execution means executes one of the performance patterns among the plurality of performance patterns in a first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the fluctuating display of the symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After performing the performance, in the second pseudo game (``pseudo 2'') after the fluctuating display of symbols is restarted, it is possible to execute the performance with one of the performance patterns among the plurality of performance patterns. can be,
The effect pattern selection means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9363 in FIG. 190 and the process of step S9473 in FIG. 194) selects the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game, and then selects the effect pattern based on the pattern. , it is possible to select a pattern of performance performed in the first pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") after the fluctuating display of symbols starts until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a plurality of performance patterns (as shown in FIG. 186) are performed. A second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the fluctuating display of symbols is resumed after the performance is executed with one of the performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to the performance numbers “161” to “163”) shown in FIG. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance using one of a plurality of performance patterns (performance patterns corresponding to performance numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 186). After selecting the pattern of the performance to be performed in the second pseudo game ("Pseudo 2"), based on the selected pattern, the pattern of the performance to be performed in the first pseudo game ("Pseudo 1") is selected. configured so that it is possible. Thereby, it is possible to easily design the development of the effects performed from the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2").

[15-10. Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), there is a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-110576).

In the process of intensively studying the above-mentioned gaming machines, the present inventor came up with the idea that it would be possible to improve the interest in gaming by devising a change time for identification information. .

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(C-1) A first lottery means capable of conducting a first lottery (normal lottery);
a second lottery means capable of conducting a second lottery (second special lottery);
a first display means (normal symbol display section 161) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means;
a second display means (second special symbol display section 164) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means; Prepare,
The first display means is capable of variably displaying the identification information over a first time (500 ms) when the first lottery result is a first result (normal symbol win). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is a second result (usually a loss), the identification information is displayed in a fluctuating manner over a second time (600,000 ms) that is longer than the first time. is possible,
The second display means variably displays the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time when the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small win). It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol winning), the identification information is changed over the first time (500ms). On the other hand, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a second time (600000ms) longer than the first time (500ms) is displayed. ) It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner. In addition, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win), the identification information is stored for a third time (1000ms) shorter than the second time (600000ms). It is configured so that it can be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, while the fluctuating display (first fluctuating display) of the identification information is being performed when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the second lottery It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win). Therefore, it is possible to create novel gameplay using the time from when the second variable display ends until the first variable display ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1) above,
A first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) into which game balls can enter;
A second prize winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winnings) into which game balls can enter;
a first prize-winning means capable of controlling the first prize-winning means so that when the result of the first lottery is the first result, the game ball enters the first prize-winning means more easily; 1 control means;
When the identification information is displayed variably over at least the second time period by the first display means, if the result of the second lottery is the specific result, the second prize winning means a second control means capable of controlling the second winning means so that the game ball enters easily;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per winning), the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) receives the game. It is possible to control the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball enters easily, and at least the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can control the second winning means (normal symbol display section 161). When the identification information is displayed variably over a period of time (600,000 ms), if the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win), the second winning means (small win) is displayed. It is configured to be able to control the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winnings) so that game balls can easily enter the large winning opening 151). As a result, a second result (normally per symbol) different from the first result (per normal symbol) is triggered to perform control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (normally electric accessory unit 145). If a loss (loss) occurs, while the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the identification information based on the second result (normal loss) occurs, the second winning means (large prize opening for small winnings) 151), it is possible to perform control to make it easier for game balls to enter the ball, and by using the time until the first variable display ends, the second winning means (big winning opening 151 for small winnings) It is possible to create a situation where it is easy for game balls to enter the ball.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the identification information fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) based on the second result (normal loss) is being performed, the second winning means (large winning opening for small winnings) is displayed. 151) was explained as creating a situation in which it is easy for game balls to enter the ball. The second result in the present invention is not limited to a loss (ordinary loss), but may be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). Note that the second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10,000 times, 500 to 5,000 times, 1,000 to 2,000 times, etc.) the first time. The time can be approximately 5 to 10,000 times (or 100 to 5,000 times, 500 to 1,000 times, etc.) the third time. In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 to 1 times) the first time. 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the second winning means (big winning opening 151 for small winnings) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 times) the third time. 50 times, 2 times to 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2) above,
A pattern display means (display device 7) capable of displaying a pattern;
A symbol performance execution means capable of executing a symbol performance (drum variation performance) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed on the symbol display means,
The symbol performance execution means is configured to cause one symbol among the plurality of symbols to be different from at least one symbol among the remaining symbols when the result of the first lottery is the first result. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the symbol presentation is executed so that the plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per winning), one symbol among the plurality of symbols is the same as the remaining symbols. While it is possible to perform a symbol performance (drum variation performance) that is different from at least one of the symbols, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), is configured to be able to execute a pattern effect (drum variation effect) so that all the plurality of patterns become the same pattern. This allows the player to understand that the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)) by displaying all the same symbols as multiple symbols. I can do it.

(C-4) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-3) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means;
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (variable variable mode),
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, the image display control means displays predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and , right drum symbol 9202R) on the image display means, while not displaying the predetermined image on the image display means when controlled in the first state.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the machine is controlled in the second state (variable probability mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) is displayed. (Left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R), while being controlled to the first state (normal mode), the predetermined image ( The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) are configured not to be displayed. As a result, compared to the first state (normal mode), the second state (probable variable mode) is changed to an effect (predetermined image It is possible to make the player aware of the state in which (production using the left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-4) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (variable variable mode),
The state control means is capable of ending the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (drum play based on a winning pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases in which a variable effect) is executed and cases in which the predetermined effect is not executed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state (variable probability mode), it is possible to end the second state (variable probability mode). be. In addition, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a predetermined performance is performed according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode). The system is configured such that there are cases in which the predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is executed and cases in which the predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is not executed. In this regard, if the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is In a situation where the identification information fluctuation display time is relatively short compared to the second time (600000ms) when the result of the lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss) In this case, the significance of the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becoming the second result (normal lottery) may be diminished. According to the invention (5), it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance (drum fluctuation performance based on the winning pattern) from occurring in such a case, so that the performance can be appropriately realized according to the game situation. I can do it.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first lottery. It has been explained that a predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the winning pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (normal symbol loss length variation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), multiple variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, , 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be varied depending on the determined variable time. For example, in a variable probability gaming state, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a loss, the identification information fluctuation display time is 5 seconds, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is 5 seconds. It is assumed that the total time of the variable display time of the identification information and the opening time of the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winning) in the case of a small winning is 5 seconds. In such a form, if 60 seconds is determined as the variation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12. If it is more than twice, the variable display can be almost completed during the second state (variable probability mode). In this case, the specific number of times can be set to 12 times. In this way, the value obtained by dividing the determined normal symbol fluctuation time by the expected value of the special symbol fluctuation time (for small winnings, the total time of the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the small winning winning opening) The number of times corresponding to the above may be determined as the specific number of times.

Furthermore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the determination as to whether the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is equal to or greater than a specific number (10) in the second state (variable probability mode) It has been explained that this is done when the passage through the gate that triggered the 1st lottery (normal lottery) occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to passing through the gate starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the gate passage occurs is more than the specified number (10 times), the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation starts is If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined performance (drum fluctuation performance based on the winning pattern) may not be performed.

As explained in the fifth pachinko game machine, the predetermined images based on the winning pattern (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are identification information based on the second result (normal loss). It is possible to configure the display so that it is stopped and displayed before the variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) starts. After the stop display of the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) ends, a winning notification effect (see FIG. 199(k)) is performed. It is preferable that the winning notification performance ends at the same time as the normal symbol loss length variation starts. As a result, the performance mode can be divided such that while the winning notification performance is being performed, the mode is variable probability mode, while after the winning notification performance is being performed, the mode is the first bonus mode. In the variable probability mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 210 to 213 are performed. In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a jackpot (for example, 10R jackpot) on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164) while the winning notification performance is being performed (jackpot game If the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. This causes the game to shift to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot performance can be the same performance as the performance that is performed when the start conditions for the jackpot game state are met at other timings during the variable probability mode (when the winning announcement performance is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the start condition for the jackpot game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, a performance different from the predetermined jackpot performance may be performed.

(C-6) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-5) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
an image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means displays, in the image display means, a display according to a variation time of the identification information on the first display means, and changes the mode of the display over time so that the display becomes gradually lighter. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) displays the identification information in accordance with the variation time, and the mode of the display is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. It is configured so that it can be changed to Thereby, the fluctuation time of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can be burned into the player's mind, making the player strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-6) above,
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
an image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means includes:
A first image that allows the image display means to display a predetermined image (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of identification information on the first display means. Display control means;
a second image display control means capable of displaying a time in accordance with the variation time of the identification information in the first display means (displaying a normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) on the image display means;
The first image display control means does not display the predetermined image on the image display means when the time display is being performed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) are displayed. ), and it is also possible to display the time (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) according to the variation time of the identification information on the first display means (normal symbol display section 161). It is possible. Then, when the time display (display of normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) is being performed, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image) is This has been described as being performed (see FIG. 202). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at the time when one normal symbol loss length variation starts (i.e., the variation time itself of the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol loss length variation). , it may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation at a point in time when one normal symbol loss length variation is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (the display of the normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (regular lottery) is the first result (normal symbol per). In some cases, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (loss or jackpot), a time display (display of normal symbol loss length variable remaining time image) may be performed. good. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all the pending variation patterns of normal symbol variations correspond to the first result (per normal symbol). A configuration in which a time display (display of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed when the pattern is a fluctuation pattern, or when the result of jackpot determination regarding all pending special symbol fluctuations is a loss. It is possible to adopt Thereby, the player can be made aware that the remaining time for normal symbol loss length variation is getting shorter.

(C-8) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-7) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode),
When the specific state ends and part or all of the second time period has elapsed, the performance execution means determines the remaining time of the second time period (normal symbol loss length fluctuation). It is possible to perform performances according to the remaining time).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a part or all of the second time (600000ms) has elapsed when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the second It is configured so that it is possible to execute a performance according to the remaining time (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the fluctuating display of the identification information (first fluctuating display) and the specific state (second bonus mode) are different. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the content of the performance is varied depending on how much time of the variable display (second time) remains at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode). be able to. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the remaining time of the second period (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the remaining time of the second time ( It was explained that the performance is performed according to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may end at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0); Different effects may be performed depending on when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0).

If the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode), the first lottery display (normal symbol loss length variation) in the second state (probable variation mode) The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs. While the normal symbol loss length variation) is being performed, it moves to a specific state (second bonus mode), and even when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variation display (normal If symbol loss length fluctuation) continues, and in certain conditions (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the result of the first lottery The first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs, and at the time the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) It is possible to assume that the situation continues. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal lottery), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) If the display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss) in the second state (variable probability mode), and the result of the first lottery A performance (special performance) different from the performance performed when the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-8) above,
A performance execution means capable of executing the performance,
A state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode),
The state control means is capable of ending the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The performance execution means executes a performance according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number) when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over the second time period. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is activated. It is possible to terminate it. In addition, when the identification information is displayed variably over the second time period (600000ms), the number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is changed according to the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number). It is configured such that it is possible to execute a performance. As a result, if the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is large (a situation where the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) continues for the time being) ), or when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching (situations such as this), it is possible to appropriately realize effects according to the gaming situation.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (5 times), ), the content of the performance may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, it is possible to divide the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) into a plurality of periods, and to vary the contents of the effects performed in each period. The plurality of periods include, for example, a period in which the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). (first period), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is greater than or equal to the second predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more than the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the remaining number of unit games that can be performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (remaining ST number) is a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). In the period (third period) in which the number of times is less than the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the fourth The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during a period (fourth period) that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) and less than a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It is possible to set a period (fifth period) in which (remaining number of STs) is a fifth predetermined number of times (for example, one time).

(C-10)
Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-9) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a suggestive effect (pre-reading of ordinary symbols) that may suggest that the result of the first lottery has become the second result while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means. It is possible to perform
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is changed to the second result. The structure is such that it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (ordinary map pre-reading effect) that can suggest that the game has ended in a loss (ordinary loss). As a result, the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) through the suggestion performance (normal symbol pre-reading performance) performed while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the second display means (second special symbol display section 164). The player can expect that the identification information will be displayed in a variable manner over a relatively long period of time (second period (600,000 ms)).

[15-11. Appendix 11]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a gaming machine of this kind, a gaming machine that notifies right-handed hitting instructions in the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, and time-saving state, and notifies left-handed hitting instructions in the normal gaming state is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-104167 ( In particular, see paragraph 0338).

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-104167, interest is increased in gaming states in which the player is hit to the right, such as a jackpot game, a small winning game state, and a time-saving state, while interest is decreased in a normal gaming state in which the player is played to the left. There is a risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 11 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area can pass, and when the game medium passes, a variable display of a first special symbol is performed to display the result of the first special symbol lottery. A first special symbol starting area (for example, first starting port 5120) that becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game where is derived;
A game medium fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area can pass, and when the game medium passes, a variable display of a second special symbol is performed to determine the result of the second special symbol lottery. A second special symbol starting area (for example, second starting port 2140) that is the trigger for executing the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol game is derived;
When the game medium fired toward the game area passes, the normal symbol starting area (for example, the passing gate 2126 , 5125A, 5125B) and
A first variable prize winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot, a prize opening hit) is derived in a special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. For example, the big prize opening 2131, the V prize opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (e.g., normal long open hit) is derived in the normal symbol game, the game medium can be easily passed through the second special symbol starting area (e.g., second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 2146) capable of
Multiple game modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining balance mode) A gaming machine that can play games in any of the modes,
When the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed, the expected value for deriving an advantageous result for the player is higher (for example, when the first special symbol game The expected value of winning per accessory release is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when executed.
The plurality of game modes are
A normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly played by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false) )and,
an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly played by playing the game in the specific manner;
The normal game mode is
a first normal game mode (for example, normal mode);
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a second normal game mode (for example, high-precision mode A) that is more advantageous for the player than the first normal game mode.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the normal game mode in which the game is played in the normal mode (for example, left-handed play) is not only the first normal game mode (for example, the normal mode) but also the first normal game mode. Also includes a second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the game is played in the normal game mode in which the game is played in a normal mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the "first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game", "advantageous to the player" ``A result that is advantageous to the player'' and ``The expected value that a result advantageous to the player will be derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed.'' The "results advantageous to the player" may be the same result (for example, both the former and the latter are jackpots, the former and the latter are both jackpots, and the opening of an accessory, etc.), or they may be different results. Good too. When the results are different, for example, the former is a jackpot and the latter is a jackpot, the latter is a probability change hit, the former is a jackpot and the latter is a time-saving hit, etc.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
If a specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived in at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game performed during the first normal game mode, the second It is characterized in that it is configured to shift to a normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the game machine is in the first normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode), when a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived, the game shifts to the second normal gaming mode. . Therefore, even in the first normal game mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the first special symbol game is performed in the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode), the probability that a specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived is a result that is advantageous to the player (for example, It is preferable that the probability is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot or opening an accessory. By doing so, it becomes possible to further suppress a decrease in interest in the first normal game mode.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) and the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) are the probability that a result advantageous to the player will be derived in the first special symbol game and the The second special symbol game is characterized in that the probabilities of a result advantageous to the player being derived are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the probability that a result advantageous to the player will be derived in the first special symbol game and the probability that a result advantageous to the player will be derived in the second special symbol game are the first. This is the same in the normal game mode (for example, normal mode) and the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). In this way, even though the probability that a result advantageous to the player will be derived in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode is the same, the first normal game mode is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode. 2. It becomes possible to realize a normal game mode, and it becomes possible to provide a new game machine that has never existed before.

Note that the "probability that a result advantageous to the player will be derived" includes a probability of 0. Further, the probability 0 corresponds not only to the case where a lottery is conducted in which the probability of deriving a result favorable to the player is 0, but also to the case where a lottery related to deriving a result advantageous to the player is not performed. For example, even if a lottery is held in which lottery result A is an advantageous result for the player and only lottery results B and C are included in the lottery result (that is, lottery result A is not included in the lottery result), The probability that result A is derived is zero.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is expected that the predetermined result (for example, a hit on the open long electric power line) will be derived compared to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode). It is characterized by a high value.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the predetermined result (for example, Fuden Long Since the expected value derived (per opening) is high, the second special symbol game is likely to be executed. Further, when the second special symbol game is executed, the expected value of the result being advantageous to the player is higher than when the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the second normal game mode.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the second normal game mode (for example, high-precision mode A), it is possible to shift to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode),
The predetermined termination condition is:
A first condition related to the operation of the second variable prize winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146) (for example, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is operated 12 times);
A second condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol and/or the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 20 times, and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 time). and, including at least
If the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A), the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) is changed to the first normal gaming mode. (e.g., normal mode).

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A), the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) is established. Then, the game mode shifts to the first normal game mode. Here, the first condition is a condition related to the operation of the second variable winning device (for example, the normal electric accessory 2146), and for example, the number of times the second variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146) is operated is This corresponds to the fact that a predetermined number of times has been reached (for example, the number of openings of the general electric short circuit is 12 times (that is, the number of winnings per general electric short circuit is 12 times), etc.). In addition, the second condition is a condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol and/or the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol and/or the variable display number of the second special symbol. This corresponds to the fact that the number of times of display has reached a predetermined number (for example, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is 20 times, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, etc.). In this way, in the second normal game mode, until the transition to the first normal game mode, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined result (for example, per long electric power release) is derived in the normal symbol game. It becomes possible to make it interesting and increase interest.

In addition, in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is preferable that the first condition is more easily met than the second condition. Compared to the case where the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition, it is possible to increase the possibility of a predetermined result (for example, hitting the open long electric field) in a normal symbol game and increase the interest. This is because. The first condition is more likely to be met than the second condition, for example, by making the expected value of the number of executions of normal symbol games per unit time larger than the expected value of the number of executions of special symbol games per unit time. or make it easier for the gaming medium to pass through the normal symbol starting area (for example, the passage gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B) than the special symbol starting area (for example, the first starting opening 5120, the second starting opening 2140), This can be realized by increasing the number of times the second variable prize winning device is activated as the first condition than the number of variable display times of the special symbol as the second condition, or by combining these.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a result advantageous to the player is derived, it is possible to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (for example, 3R) that have different degrees of advantage to the player. Jackpot, 10R jackpot) are included,
If a result advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot, opening of a role object) is derived in the special symbol game played during the second normal game mode (e.g., high-accuracy mode A), the first normal Compared to a case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game played during the game mode (for example, normal mode), a transition is made to a special game state (for example, 10R jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. It is characterized by a high expected value.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) is more advantageous than the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode). When a result advantageous to the player is derived in , the expected value of transitioning to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, 10R jackpot) is higher. In this way, although both the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode are played in a normal manner, it is possible to make the game more interesting in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode. This makes it possible to increase interest.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
If the predetermined result (e.g., a hit on the long opening) is derived in the normal symbol game played during the second normal game mode (e.g., high-accuracy mode A), the second normal game mode (e.g., high probability mode A) For example, the player is configured to shift to a specific mode (e.g., second challenge mode) that is more advantageous to the player than high-precision mode A) and is different from the advantageous gaming mode (e.g., special mode). do.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the specific mode (for example, It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not to shift to the second challenge mode high accuracy mode A). In particular, if the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) is included, the gameplay that shifts between multiple modes with different degrees of advantage for the player, such as the first normal game mode, the second normal game mode, and the specific mode, will be improved. This can be realized and the interest can be increased.

In addition, in a specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode), for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the second special symbol game compared to the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to do so.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
When the predetermined result (e.g., a hit on the open long electric current) is derived in the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (e.g., high accuracy mode A),
A chance to show that there is a high expectation that a special performance (for example, a right-handed hitting instruction performance, a zone performance) related to the transition to a specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game mode will be performed. While the performance) was being held,
If the game medium does not pass through the second special symbol starting area even though it has become easier for the gaming medium to pass through the second special symbol starting area, the second special symbol game may not be executed in the specific mode. It is characterized in that it is configured to end the specific mode without being executed.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, a predetermined result (for example, a hit on the open long electric wire) is derived in the normal symbol game played during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). If the player is unable to pass the game medium to the second special symbol starting area even though it has become easier to pass the gaming medium to the second special symbol starting area, the second special symbol game A specific mode ends without being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase interest in the second normal game mode.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
The normal game mode is
In addition to the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode) and the second normal game mode (e.g., high-accuracy mode A), there is a mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode). further including a third normal game mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)),
When the conditions for transitioning to the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) are satisfied (for example, when winning C time saving in the normal mode), the transition to the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) is established. ),
The conditions for transition to the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) are different from the conditions for transitioning to the third normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)). ) is met (for example, if you win C time saving in the remaining pending mode, or if all the results of the special symbol game in the remaining pending mode are losses and the predetermined performance conditions are met) , transition to the third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)),
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is
The expected value from which the predetermined result (e.g., per long opening of public electricity) is derived is the same as the expected value from which the predetermined result is derived in the second normal game mode (e.g., high certainty mode A). It is characterized by being configured in such a way that there are certain cases.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, the conditions for transition to the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) and the third normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B Although the conditions for transition to (false)) are different, the expected value at which a predetermined result is derived in the second normal game mode and the expected value at which a predetermined result is derived in the third normal game mode are the same. There are cases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the games in the second normal game mode and the third normal game mode.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
After the advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode) ends, it is possible to shift to a special mode (e.g., remaining reservation mode) which is a game mode different from the advantageous game mode and in which the second special symbol game can be mainly played. With,
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol starting area, the starting information of the second special symbol is suspended up to a predetermined number, and the second special symbol game is executed using the suspended second special symbol. is configured to
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is a mode that can be transitioned to if a specific transition condition is satisfied when the special mode ends. and
The specific transition conditions are:
A first transition condition that can be transitioned when the start information of the suspended second special symbol includes startup information from which a specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived;
Although the starting information of the suspended second special symbol does not include the starting information from which the specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived, if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, in the remaining pending mode) a second transition condition that can be transitioned to (when all the results of the special symbol game are losses and a predetermined production condition is satisfied),
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) to which the first transition condition is satisfied is the third normal game mode to which the second transition condition is satisfied. This mode is characterized by being more advantageous to the player than other modes (for example, high-accuracy mode B (false)).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, both when the first transition condition is satisfied and when the second transition condition is satisfied, the third normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)), but the third normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true)), which is transitioned to when the first transition condition is met, is transitioned to when the second transition condition is met. This mode is more advantageous to the player than the third normal game mode (for example, high certainty mode B (false)). In this way, even if either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition destination is the same third normal game mode, but the third normal game mode to which the first transition condition was satisfied and the transition destination is the same. By making the degree of advantage for the player different between the game mode and the third normal game mode to which the second transition condition has been established, it is possible to increase interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The predetermined termination condition is
further including a third condition related to the result of the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A),
In the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), not only when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, but also when the third condition is satisfied, the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode).

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, even if the third condition is satisfied during the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A), the game machine starts from the second normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A). Shift to the first normal game mode. Here, the third condition is a condition related to the result of the normal symbol game, and corresponds to, for example, that a predetermined result (for example, per normal electric long release) has been derived a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In this way, when any one of the plurality of conditions such as the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition is satisfied, the second normal game mode is shifted to the first normal game mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting, such as deriving a predetermined result (for example, winning a general electric long open hit) in a normal symbol game before shifting to the mode, and to increase the interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

[15-12. Appendix 12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a gaming machine of this kind, a gaming machine that notifies right-handed hitting instructions in the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, and time-saving state, and notifies left-handed hitting instructions in the normal gaming state is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-104167 ( In particular, see paragraph 0338).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-104167, the interest is increased in the right-handed game states such as the jackpot game, the small-win game state, and the time-saving state, but once the right-handed game ends, There is a risk that interest in the game will drop significantly.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of appendix 12 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area can pass, and when the game medium passes, a variable display of a first special symbol is performed to display the result of the first special symbol lottery. A first special symbol starting area (for example, first starting port 5120) that becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game where is derived;
A game medium fired in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area can pass, and when the game medium passes, a variable display of a second special symbol is performed to determine the result of the second special symbol lottery. A second special symbol starting area (for example, second starting port 2140) that is the trigger for executing the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol game is derived;
When the game medium fired toward the game area passes, the normal symbol starting area (for example, the passing gate 2126 , 5125A, 5125B) and
A first variable winning device that can be opened in a special game state that can be transitioned to when a special result (for example, jackpot, per opening of a role object) is derived in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game (for example, , large prize opening 2131, V prize opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (e.g., normal long open hit) is derived in the normal symbol game, the game medium can be easily passed through the second special symbol starting area (e.g., second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 2146) capable of
Multiple game modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining balance mode) A gaming machine that can play games in any of the modes,
The expected value of an advantageous result for the player is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed (for example, when the first special symbol game is executed The expected value of winning per accessory opening is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the second special symbol game is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
A normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly played by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false) )and,
an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly played by playing the game in the specific manner;
The second special symbol game is mainly played, and includes a special mode (for example, a remaining reservation mode) different from the advantageous game mode,
The present invention is characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous game mode, the advantageous game mode can be shifted to the special mode (for example, the balance reservation mode).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the advantageous gaming mode (for example, special mode) is a mode in which the second special symbol game can mainly be played by playing the game in a specific manner. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in such an advantageous game mode, the advantageous game mode ends, but the second special symbol is mainly played, and a transition is made to a special mode different from the advantageous game mode (for example, remaining reservation mode). Therefore, even if the advantageous gaming mode in which the game is played in a specific manner (for example, right-handed play) ends, the interest is reduced by shifting to the special mode instead of immediately shifting to the normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode). It becomes possible to suppress the

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The advantageous gaming mode (for example, special mode) is characterized in that the game is played over a longer period than the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to give an advantageous gaming mode (e.g., special mode) an advantage over a special mode (e.g., remaining balance mode), and even if the advantageous gaming mode ends, The special mode can be provided with a function that prevents the game from immediately switching to the normal game mode (for example, the normal mode), making it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the second special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) in the special mode (for example, balance reservation mode), the game mode is changed to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode B (true)). It is characterized by being configured in such a way that it can be migrated.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the transition to the normal gaming mode (eg, normal mode) does not occur until the second special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (eg, 4 times) in the special mode (eg, remaining hold mode). . In addition, by shifting the game mode in stages, such as when the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends, the game mode changes to the special mode, and when the special mode ends, the game mode changes to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode). , it becomes possible to make the game more interesting.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol starting area (for example, second starting port 2140), the starting information of the second special symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces), and the held The second special symbol game can be executed using the start information of the second special symbol, and
When a specific condition is satisfied in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) (for example, when the start information of the second special symbol is not held when the last second special symbol game in the advantageous game mode is finished, or (e.g., in the case where the game player wins a prize when opening an accessory but does not win a V prize, etc.), the game mode is configured to be able to shift to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode) without shifting to the special mode (for example, remaining balance mode). It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, after the advantageous gaming mode (for example, special mode) ends, the transition to the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) does not necessarily occur; Only when the start information of the second special symbol is suspended when the special symbol game ends, a transition is made to a special mode (for example, remaining suspension mode). Therefore, the player is required to pass the gaming medium through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140) just before the end of the advantageous gaming mode, giving a sense of tension to the advantageous gaming mode. It is possible to increase interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The plurality of game modes are
In the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)), a predetermined transition condition (for example, the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game) further includes a specific mode (for example, challenge mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly played, which can be transferred when a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is established;
The special mode is
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time saving hit), it will not be transferred, but it can be transferred if it is the special result (for example, 3R jackpot). On the other hand,
The specific mode is
Transfer is possible not only when the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is the special result (for example, 3R jackpot) but also when the result is the specific result (for example, C time-saving hit). It is characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)), the first special symbol game or the first 2. Regardless of whether the result of the special symbol game is a special result (for example, 3R jackpot) or a specific result (for example, C time saving win), the game can shift to a specific mode (for example, challenge mode). Therefore, in the normal game mode, even if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is not a special result, if it is a specific result, it can be shifted to the specific mode, which increases the interest in the normal game mode. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special result includes a first special result (e.g., jackpot) and an opening time of the first variable winning device (e.g., big winning opening, V winning device) than the first special result (e.g., jackpot). A relatively short second special result (for example, per opening of a role item) is included,
The expected value (e.g., jackpot probability) from which the first special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived is the normal game mode (e.g., normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)) and the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) are the same,
The expected value from which the second special result (e.g., role item opening) is derived is the normal game mode (e.g., normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)). )) The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is larger than the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the expected value (e.g., jackpot probability) from which the first special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived is the normal game mode (e.g., normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) and the advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode), the expected value from which the second special result (e.g., role item opening) is derived is usually Since the advantageous game mode is higher than the game mode, it is possible to give the advantageous game mode an advantage over the normal game mode without unnecessarily stimulating the gambling spirit. In addition, "the expected value for deriving the second special result (for example, opening a role item) is higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode" means, for example, that the probability that the second special result is derived is Although the normal game mode and the advantageous game mode are the same, the probability that the second special result will be derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. In addition, the advantageous game mode includes a mode in which the second special symbol game is more easily executed than in the normal game mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the second special result is derived may be higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The results of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game include a specific result (for example, C time-saving hit) that is more advantageous to the player than a loss but is more disadvantageous than the special result (for example, a jackpot). Contains
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is the specific result (for example, C time-saving hit), other games from the advantageous game mode mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true)),
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) is the specific result (for example, C time saving hit), other games from the special mode It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to at least one mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) among the modes.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is a specific result (for example, C time saving hit). Even so, the advantageous game mode in which the second special symbol game is mainly played continues without shifting to another mode, so that the interest can be maintained. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) is a specific result, the special mode can be changed by shifting from the special mode to another mode. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the end of the game.

In addition, "If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode is the specific result, it is possible to shift from the special mode to another mode" means If the result of the symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time saving hit), even if the special mode (for example, remaining hold mode) is in the middle, the second special symbol game will be started immediately (i.e., the second special symbol will start). Even if there is information remaining on hold, the second special symbol game may not be executed and the mode may be shifted to another mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)), or the special mode (for example, remaining information on hold mode is not executed). ) may be executed to the end (that is, if there is any remaining start information of the second special symbol, after all the second special symbol games regarding this remaining reserve are completed), the mode may be shifted to another mode.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4), (6), and (7) above,
The plurality of game modes are
In the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true), high-accuracy mode B (false)), a predetermined transition condition (for example, the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game) The result is a specific result (for example, winning C time saving)) is established (for example, winning C time saving), it is possible to shift to a specific mode (for example, winning C time saving), and in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed ( For example, challenge mode) as well as
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
a first specific mode (for example, a first challenge mode) that can be transitioned to when a first condition is met;
a second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be transitioned to when a second condition is met;
The second specific mode is
The present invention is characterized in that the second special symbol game may end without being played even though the second condition has been met and the game has shifted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
a first specific mode (for example, a first challenge mode) that can be transitioned to when a first condition is met;
a second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be transitioned to when a second condition is met;
The second specific mode is
The present invention is characterized in that the second special symbol game may end without being played even though the second condition has been met and the game has shifted.

According to the gaming machines of (8) and (9) above, when the first condition is met, the mode shifts to the first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode), and when the second condition is met, the mode shifts to the second specific mode. mode (for example, second challenge mode). When shifting to the first specific mode, the second special symbol game is always played, but when shifting to the second specific mode, the second specific mode may end without the second special symbol game being played. This increases the variety of games and makes it more interesting.

Note that the first condition corresponds to, for example, the completion of a special gaming state (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state). Further, the second condition corresponds to, for example, that a predetermined result (for example, a common electric long open hit) is derived in a normal symbol game.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) or (9) above,
The first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode) can continue until the second special symbol game is executed at least once,
The second specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode) is characterized in that it is configured such that the second special symbol game can be ended without being executed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second special symbol game is always executed at least once in the first specific mode, whereas the second specific mode ends without the second special symbol game being executed. By providing superiority and inferiority between the first specific mode and the second specific mode in this way, it is possible to increase interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in a specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is a specific result (for example, C time saving hit), the game is changed from the specific mode to the first mode (for example, , while it is possible to shift to high accuracy mode A),
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) is the specific result (for example, C time saving hit), the game is started from the special mode. Although the degree of advantage for the player is the same as the first mode (for example, the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, and the probability of hitting the public power long open are all the same as the high probability mode A), it is different from the first mode. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to a second mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) in which control (for example, production control) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) and the second mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true)) are controlled even though the degree of advantage of the advantageous person is common. By varying the performance control (for example, performance control), it is possible to increase the variety of games without unnecessarily increasing the control load, and it is possible to increase interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
In the specific mode (for example, challenge mode),
A specific performance (for example, zone performance) related to the second special symbol game can be executed until the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times),
The specific performance is
While the second special symbol game is executable until the specified number of times (for example, 5 times) is played,
Even though the second special symbol game has been played the prescribed number of times (for example, five times), if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the specific performance is configured not to be executed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the specific mode (for example, challenge mode), the common specific performance is executed until the second special symbol game is played a prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times); 2. If the special symbol game is played more than the specified number of times (for example, 5 times), the above-mentioned specific performance is not executed. In this case, it is preferable to separately conduct a separate performance lottery and perform a performance based on the result of this single performance lottery.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (12) above,
When the number of executions of the first special symbol game and/or the number of executions of the second special symbol game reaches a specific number (for example, 1000 times) without transitioning to the special game state (for example, reaching a ceiling counter) The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to a super advantageous game mode (for example, a bliss mode) that can be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode).

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, even if the game does not shift to the special gaming state for a long period of time, the number of executions of the first special symbol game and/or the number of executions of the second special symbol game is a specific number of times. (for example, 1000 times), it is possible to shift to a super advantageous game mode (for example, bliss mode), so it is possible to reduce the decrease in the desire to play and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, "the number of executions of the first special symbol game and/or the number of executions of the second special symbol game becomes a specific number" means that the number of executions of the first special symbol becomes a specific number (for example, 1000 times), The number of executions of the second special symbol may be a specific number of times, or the sum of the number of executions of the first special symbol and the number of executions of the second special symbol may be a specific number of times.

In addition, "a super advantageous game mode that can be more advantageous to the player than an advantageous game mode" means that a super advantageous game mode (e.g., bliss mode) is better than an advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode) in all aspects. The advantageous game mode is not limited to being advantageous to the player, but when viewed from one aspect, the advantageous game mode is more advantageous to the player than the super advantageous game mode (for example, the advantageous game mode does not have a puncture, but the super advantageous game mode, there may be a puncture, etc.).

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (13) above,
The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is
When any one of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the advantageous gaming mode to another mode (for example, remaining balance mode),
The plurality of termination conditions are:
a first end condition that the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game has been executed a first predetermined number of times (for example, the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 12 times);
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a second termination condition (for example, the number of operations of the normal electric accessory 2146 is 10,000 times), which is a condition that the second variable prize winning device has been operated a second predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, the first end condition (for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 12 times) and the second end condition (for example, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated is 10,000 times). When any one of them is established, the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends. In this way, by providing a plurality of conditions for ending the advantageous game mode, it is possible to increase the interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 12, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

[15-13. Appendix 13]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine in which, after a special game is executed, a performance is performed in one of a plurality of performance modes on a liquid crystal display, for example, is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-67682.

However, in a gaming machine in which a performance is performed in one of a plurality of performance modes after a special game is executed, there is room for further improvement in order to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of appendix 13 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Variable display execution means (for example, main CPU 2201 that executes the process of S2013) that can variably display identification information depending on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
A gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that executes processing related to the A1 time saving flag and the B time saving flag) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of gaming states;
If the result of the variable display of the identification information is a special result (e.g., winning the opening of an accessory, a jackpot), a special gaming state that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state of opening the accessory, a jackpot gaming state) A control means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the processing of S2017 and S2019),
Production mode control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of controlling one of a plurality of production modes;
Equipped with
The identification information includes first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) different from the first identification information,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state (e.g., normal gaming state) in which the first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) is mainly displayed variably, and a first gaming state (e.g., normal gaming state) in which the first identification information (e.g., second special symbol) is mainly variably displayed. can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state (for example, an A time-saving gaming state including an A1 working-time saving gaming state, an A2 working-time saving gaming state, and an A3 working-time saving gaming state),
The special results include a first special result (e.g., winning an accessory) and a second special result (e.g., winning a jackpot) in which the expected value of the game media provided is relatively larger than the first special result. contains,
The special game state control means includes:
When the first special result is derived, control is performed to a first special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot opening game state), and when the second special result is derived, the control is controlled to a second special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot winning game state). (playing state),
The production mode control means is
A first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode), a second presentation mode (e.g., special mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first presentation mode, and either the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. The present invention is also characterized in that it can be controlled to any one of a plurality of performance modes including a third performance mode (for example, a super special mode) that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the first presentation mode (for example, normal mode) and the second presentation mode (for example, special mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first presentation mode, but also the first presentation mode, Since it is possible to control to a third presentation mode (for example, a super special mode) that is more advantageous to the player than both the mode and the second presentation mode, variations in presentation modes are increased and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest. Become.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production mode control means (for example, sub CPU 2301)
When controlled by the gaming state control means to the first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state), it is possible to control to the first production mode (for example, normal mode);
When controlled by the gaming state control means to the second gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state), the second presentation mode (for example, special mode) and the third presentation mode (for example, super special mode) It is characterized in that it can be controlled to any one of a plurality of production modes including.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state), the second performance mode (for example, special mode) and the third performance mode (for example, , super special mode), it is possible to increase the interest in the second gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The expected value from which the first special result (for example, per opening of an accessory) is derived (for example, the probability of opening an accessory) is higher than when the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is also higher when the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) is variably displayed than when the first identification information (e.g., the first special symbol) is variably displayed. In this case, the expected value (for example, the probability of winning the accessory object) from which the first special result (for example, per opening the accessory object) is derived is higher. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) in which the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is mainly variably displayed.

In addition, "the expected value (e.g., probability of per-accessory object release) from which the first special result (e.g., per release of an accessory object) is derived is based on the fact that the first identification information (e.g., the first special symbol) is variably displayed. "It is higher when the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed than when the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed" means that when the first identification information is variably displayed, the first special result is derived. This includes cases where the probability of occurrence is 0. "The probability of deriving the first special result is 0" means that the lottery for deriving the first special result is performed but the probability is 0, and the lottery itself for deriving the first special result is not performed. Including both cases.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The production mode control means is
When the variable display of the identification information is performed a first prescribed number of times (for example, 26 times) in the second presentation mode (for example, special mode), the transition from the second presentation mode to the first presentation mode (for example, normal mode) can be controlled to
When the variable display of the identification information is performed a second prescribed number of times (for example, 296 times) which is greater than the first prescribed number of times in the third production mode (for example, super special mode), the display of the identification information is performed from the third production mode to the third production mode. It is characterized by being controllable in one production mode.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, the third performance mode (e.g., super special mode) is more controlled than the second performance mode (e.g., special mode) than the first performance mode (e.g., normal mode). Since it is possible to variably display more identification information until the game is displayed, it is possible to widen the scope of the game and increase the interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
It is possible to accept game media fired toward the game area, and at least one of the first special result (e.g., winning the opening of an accessory) or the second special result (e.g., winning the jackpot) has been derived. Based on this, a displacement member (e.g., V attacker 2152, special electric shutter 2134) capable of displacing the game medium from a state in which it cannot accept or is difficult to accept to a state in which it can accept or easily accepts the game medium is provided. More prepared,
The special game state control means includes:
When the first special result (e.g., per opening of an accessory) is derived and the game medium passes through a specific area (e.g., V prize opening 2155) of the displacement member, the first special game state (e.g., The second special game state (for example, the jackpot game state) can be controlled after the end of the game state (the game state where the winning object is released).

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, when the first special result (for example, per opening of the accessory) is derived and the game medium passes through the specific area of the displacement member (for example, the V prize opening 2155), the first After the special game state (for example, a game state in which an accessory is released) ends, the second special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) can be controlled. In other words, the second special gaming state can be controlled not only when the second special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, but also when the first special result is derived, making it possible to increase interest. Become.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The first special result (for example, per opening of an accessory) includes a predetermined first special result (for example, per opening of an accessory corresponding to 3R) and a specific first special result different from the predetermined first special result. Results (for example, per opening of a role object compatible with 10R) are included,
The special game state control means includes:
When the predetermined first special result (for example, a 3R compatible accessory is released), the control is performed to a predetermined first special game state (for example, a 3R compatible accessory is released), and the specified When the first special result (for example, per opening of the accessory corresponding to 10R) is derived, it is possible to control to a specific first special game state (for example, the game state per opening of the accessory corresponding to 10R). shall be.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, a predetermined first special game state (for example, a game state corresponding to 3Rs when an accessory is released) or a specific first special game state (for example, a game when an accessory is released corresponding to 10R). Since it is possible to control the state), it is possible to expand the range of gameplay and increase interest.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
When the game state control means controls the second game state (for example, the A time-saving game state), and the performance mode control means controls the third performance mode (for example, the super special mode); When the predetermined first special result (e.g., 3R-compatible accessory object is released) is derived, the predetermined first special gaming state (for example, 3R-compatible accessory object release game state) is controlled. The present invention is characterized in that the second gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) is terminated accordingly.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the third presentation mode (for example, super special mode) is more advantageous to the player than either the first presentation mode (for example, normal mode) or the second presentation mode (for example, special mode). mode), the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) ends when it is controlled to the predetermined first special game state (for example, the 3R-compatible accessory opening game state). , it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the third performance mode, and it is possible to increase interest.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
When the game state control means controls the second game state (for example, the A time-saving game state), and the performance mode control means controls the third performance mode (for example, the super special mode); When the specific first special result (e.g., per opening of an accessory corresponding to 10R) is derived, and when the control is controlled to the specific first special gaming state (for example, a gaming state per opening of an accessory corresponding to 10R). Even if the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) can be continued,
After the game medium passes through at least the specific area (for example, V prize opening) in the first special game state (for example, the 10R compatible role opening per game state), the second game state (for example, The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that the time-saving gaming state (A) ends.

When the gaming machine of (8) above is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state) and is controlled to the third performance mode (for example, the super special mode), the gaming machine in the first special Even if the game state is controlled to be the game state (for example, the game state for opening a role object corresponding to 10R), the second game state (for example, the A time-saving game state) can be continued, and at least the specific area (for example, the V prize opening) can be continued. The second gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) continues until the gaming medium passes through. Therefore, for example, by determining the gaming state after the end of a specific first special gaming state based on the gaming state when the gaming medium passes through a specific area (for example, the V winning hole), It becomes possible to make the determination of the gaming state after the end of the specific first special gaming state advantageous to the player, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (8) above,
When the game state control means controls the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state), and the performance mode control means controls the second performance mode (for example, special mode), the When a predetermined first special result (for example, when a 3R compatible accessory is released) or the specific first special result (for example, when a 10R compatible accessory is released) is derived, the predetermined first special game state (For example, a game state corresponding to 3R when a role object is released) or the specific first special game state (For example, a game state when a role object is opened corresponding to 10R), and the second game state (for example, The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that the time-saving gaming state (A) ends.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, when the gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) and is controlled to the second performance mode (for example, the special mode), the predetermined first A second game state (for example, a special game state corresponding to 3R) or a specific first special game state (for example, a game state corresponding to 10R when a prize is released) , A time-saving gaming state) is terminated.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (9) above,
When the first special result (for example, per opening of a role object) is derived when the second performance mode (for example, special mode) is controlled by the performance mode control means, the first special game state ( For example, after the end of the game state (game state per role release), it is configured to be controlled to the second performance mode (for example, special mode);
If the second special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived while being controlled to the second effect mode (e.g., special mode) by the effect mode control means, the second special gaming state (e.g., jackpot) is derived. After the end of the gaming state), the third performance mode (for example, super special mode) can be controlled.

In the gaming machine of (10) above, when the first special result (e.g., per release of an accessory) is derived in the second performance mode (e.g., special mode), the game machine enters a first special gaming state (e.g., per release of an accessory). After the end of the gaming state), the second performance mode (e.g., special mode) is controlled again, and when a second special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived in the second performance mode (e.g., special mode), After the second special game state (for example, jackpot game state) ends, the third production mode (for example, super special mode) can be controlled. Therefore, in the second production mode, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state may change depending on whether the first special result is derived or the second special result is derived. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the second performance mode.

Note that "after the first special game state (for example, the game state for opening a role object) is controlled to the second production mode (for example, the special mode)" means that after the first special game state ends. , it is not limited to being immediately controlled to the second presentation mode. For example, if the game medium passes through a specific area (e.g., V-winning hole) in the first special game state, the control will be changed to the second performance mode after the second special game state (e.g., jackpot game state) ends. include. In addition, if the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the first special game state, the second performance mode may be controlled after the first special game state ends.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (10) above,
The second special result (for example, jackpot) includes a predetermined second special result (for example, 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5")) and a specific second special result different from the predetermined second special result. Results (for example, 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z4”)) are included,
When the second special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived by variable display of the second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), when the second special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived, the specific second special result (e.g., 10R jackpot (selection It is characterized in that the expected value derived from the predetermined second special result (for example, 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5")) is higher than that of the symbol command "z4").

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when a second special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived by variable display of the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol), a specific second special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived. For example, the expected value derived is higher for a predetermined second special result (for example, 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5")) than for a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4")) It is.

(12) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A variable display capable of variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) or second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) different from the first identification information, depending on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Execution means (for example, main CPU 2201 that executes the process of S2013),
A normal game state (e.g., variable pattern selection state 1) in which the first identification information (e.g., the first special symbol) is mainly displayed variably, and a specific game state (e.g., variable pattern selection state 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states (for example, variable pattern selection state 1, variable pattern selection state 2, variable pattern selection state 3) including pattern selection state 2) and,
If the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a special result (e.g., winning the opening of an accessory, jackpot), a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state of opening the accessory, a jackpot gaming state) ) (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the processing of S2017 and S2019),
Production mode control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, state 1 production mode, state 2 production mode, state 3 production mode, jackpot production mode),
If the game medium fired toward the game area can be accepted, and the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a special result (for example, a hit to open an accessory, a jackpot), a displacement member (e.g., V attacker 2152, special electric shutter 2134) capable of displacing from a state where the game medium cannot be accepted or is difficult to accept to a state where the game medium can be accepted or easily accepted;
Equipped with
The special results include a first special result (e.g., winning an accessory) and a second special result (e.g., winning a jackpot) in which the expected value of the game media provided is relatively larger than the first special result. contains,
The special game state control means includes:
When the first special result is derived, control is performed to a first special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot opening game state), and when the second special result is derived, the control is controlled to a second special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot winning game state). (gaming state),
Even when the first special result (e.g., per opening of an accessory) is derived and the game medium passes through a specific area (e.g., V winning hole 2155) of the displacement member, the first special game state (e.g., , after the termination of the accessory release winning game state), the second special game state (e.g., jackpot game state) can be controlled;
The variable display execution means includes:
A first table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table referred to in variation pattern selection state 1) and a second table more advantageous to the player than the first table (for example, a special symbol variation table referred to in variation pattern selection state 2). The first identification information or the second identification information can be displayed variably with a variable display pattern determined by referring to any one of a plurality of tables including a symbol variation pattern table), and
In the normal gaming state (for example, variable pattern selection state 1), the first identification information can be variably displayed by referring to the first table, and in the specific gaming state (for example, variable pattern selection state 2) Then, the second identification information can be displayed variably by referring to the second table,
The gaming state control means includes:
The second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state (e.g., variable pattern selection state 2), and the first special result (e.g., winning the opening of an accessory) or the second special result (e.g., winning the jackpot) is derived. , a predetermined specific gaming state (for example, a predetermined specific gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, and in which the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is mainly displayed variably. For example, the variable pattern selection state 3) can be controlled.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the normal gaming state (for example, variable pattern selection state 1), variable display of the first identification information is executed with reference to the first table, and in the specific gaming state (for example, variable pattern selection state 1) In selection state 2), variable display of the second identification information is executed with reference to the second table that is more advantageous to the player. Then, the second identification information is variably displayed in a specific gaming state (e.g., variable pattern selection state 2), and a first special result (e.g., winning the opening of an accessory) or a second special result (e.g., winning the jackpot) is derived. In this case, control may be performed to a predetermined specific gaming state (for example, variable pattern selection state 3) that is more advantageous to the player than either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state. In this way, it is possible to control not only the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, but also a predetermined specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than both the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. This increases the variety of games, making it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 13, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

[15-14. Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As a gaming machine of this kind, the variable display result is "Jackpot", the jackpot type is controlled to a probability change state (high probability low base state) based on the jackpot type of "Suddenly certain", and the jackpot type is "Suddenly shortened time". A gaming machine that enters a normal state (low probability low base state) based on the above is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-094511 (see especially paragraph [0284]).

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to maintain the expectations of players by providing new game features, but in recent years, even new game features have been required, which has further increased interest. It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can do this.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 14 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of performing a symbol game in which a predetermined lottery result is derived by displaying symbols in a variable manner on the display means;
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling the gaming state;
Effect display means (for example, display device 7) on which a predetermined display effect is performed;
performance control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing a display performance showing the predetermined lottery result on the performance display means;
Equipped with
The symbol control means is configured to control a predetermined result (for example, a loss), a specific result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined result (for example, winning C time), and a special result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined result (for example, , jackpot), it is possible to derive any of the lottery results including
The gaming state control means includes:
A specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) when the specific result (for example, C time saving winning) is derived on the display means;
special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) when the special result is derived to the display means;
has
The specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) includes multiple types of specific gaming states (for example, C1 working time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state, C5 working time saving gaming state). Contains
The specific game state control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control to any one of the plurality of types of specific gaming states.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived, it is possible to control to a specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state), and furthermore, it is possible to control to a specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state). includes multiple types of specific gaming states, and can be controlled to any one of the multiple types of specific gaming states. Therefore, the variety of games increases, it becomes possible to provide new game characteristics never seen before, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
Even if the specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived on the display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164) under the control of the symbol control means, the predetermined The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to display a display effect that makes it impossible or difficult to recognize that the lottery result is the specific result.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above, even if a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived on the display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164), the lottery This makes it difficult to understand from the display effects that the result is a specific result. By doing this, when a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived, if the control is not made to a specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) or it is not immediately controlled to a specific gaming state. Even so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The specific results include a first specific result (for example, C1 time saving) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, C2 time saving),
The plurality of types of specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (for example, C1 time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (for example, C2 time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state. and
The specific game state control means includes:
When the first specific result (for example, C1 time saving per) is derived, control is possible to the first specific gaming state (for example, C1 time saving gaming state),
When the second specific result (for example, C2 time saving win) is derived, it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state (for example, C2 time saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (3) above can be controlled to the first specific gaming state (for example, C1 time saving gaming state) when the first specific result (for example, C1 time saving per) is derived, and the second specific When a result (for example, C2 time saving win) is derived, it is possible to control to a second specific gaming state (for example, C2 time saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to widen the range of game properties and increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance control means derives the specific result (for example, C time saving hit) to the display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164) under the control of the symbol control means. It is possible to perform a performance suggesting a specific result that suggests that there is a possibility (for example, a performance suggesting a shift to C time reduction),
The specific result suggestion performance includes a first specific result suggestion performance that can be performed in the normal gaming state (for example, the first C time saving transition suggestion performance), and a second specific performance that can be performed in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it includes a result-suggesting performance (for example, the second C time-saving shift suggestion performance).

The gaming machine described in (4) above has a first specific result suggesting effect (for example, a first C It is possible to carry out a second specific result suggestion presentation (for example, a second This clarifies that it is possible to carry out the C time-saving transition suggestion performance). By performing such a presentation suggesting specific results, it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, even if a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived, if it is difficult to understand that the predetermined lottery result is a specific result, or if a display effect is performed that makes it difficult to understand, the specific result (for example, It is preferable not to perform a performance suggesting a specific result (for example, a performance suggesting a shift to C time saving) that suggests that there is a possibility that a result (C time saving per , C time saving hit) may be derived.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
The recording control means is
This can be carried out when the specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived to the display means in the normal gaming state, and when the specific result is derived to the display means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to perform the first specific result suggestion performance (for example, the first C time saving transition performance) at a higher rate than the second specific result suggestion performance (for example, the second C time saving transition suggestion performance). It is characterized by

In the gaming machine described in (5) above, when a specific result (for example, winning C time reduction) is derived in the normal gaming state, the first specific result suggestion performance (for example, the first C time reduction shift suggestion performance) is performed. If a specific result is derived in a specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state), a second specific result suggestion performance (for example, a second C time-saving transition suggestion performance) is performed. However, it is made clear that the first specific result suggestion performance is performed at a higher rate than the second specific result suggestion performance. That is, in the normal gaming state, the specific result suggesting performance is performed at a higher rate than in the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (4) or (5) above,
The performance control means is
When the specified result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived in a manner that is controlled to any one of the plurality of types of specified game states and does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the specified result is In a symbol game where the specified result is derived, it is possible to perform a performance in which it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific result may be derived.

The gaming machine described in (6) above meets predetermined conditions in any one of the specific gaming states (for example, C1 time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state, C5 working time saving gaming state). If a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived in a manner that does not satisfy the following, it is possible to not perform the second specific result suggesting performance (for example, the second C time saving shift suggestion performance). .

Note that "a performance in which it is difficult or impossible to grasp that there is a possibility that the first specific result may be derived" is, for example, a performance that is the same as or almost the same as a performance that leads to a predetermined result (e.g., a loss). etc. are equivalent.

In addition, "an aspect that does not satisfy a predetermined condition" is, for example, a case where, even though a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, a specific gaming state is not controlled based on this specific result (for example, , the case where the number of repeated time reductions based on the C5 time reduction is smaller than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction gaming state) is equivalent. Specifically, control based on a specific result (for example, per C5 time reduction) rather than the remaining period controlled by one specific gaming state (for example, the number of remaining time reductions in one time reduction gaming state) (for example, C5 time reduction) This corresponds to the case where the control period (for example, the number of overlapping time reductions of C5 time reduction) is shorter. If the control period based on a specific result is shorter than the remaining period in which one specific gaming state is controlled, a new specific gaming state will not be controlled based on the derivation of a specific result after one specific gaming state ends. In such a case, the second specific result suggestion effect is not performed or the rate at which it is performed is made relatively low.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (4) to (6) above,
The performance control means is
When the specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in a manner that is controlled to any one of the plurality of specific gaming states and satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific result is derived. In the symbol game to be played, it is possible to carry out the second specific result suggestion performance (for example, the second C time saving transition suggestion performance).

The gaming machine described in (7) above meets predetermined conditions in any one specific gaming state (for example, C1 time saving gaming state, C2 working time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state, C4 working time saving gaming state, C5 working time saving gaming state). When a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived in a manner that satisfies the above conditions, a second specific result suggesting effect (for example, a second C time saving transition suggestion effect) is performed.

In addition, "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" is, for example, a case where, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, a specific gaming state can be controlled based on this specific result (for example, one time saving hit). This corresponds to a case where the number of repeated time reductions based on the C5 time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the gaming state. Specifically, control based on a specific result (for example, per C5 time reduction) rather than the remaining period controlled by one specific gaming state (for example, the number of remaining time reductions in one time reduction gaming state) (for example, C5 time reduction) This corresponds to the case where the control period (for example, the number of overlapping time reductions of C5 time reduction) is longer. If the control period based on a specific result is shorter than the remaining period controlled to one specific gaming state, the control to a new specific gaming state will not be performed based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific gaming state. Therefore, after the end of one specific gaming state, when a new specific gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of a specific result, the second specific result suggesting performance (for example, the second C time-saving shift suggesting performance (C5 This makes it possible to perform a time-saving transition suggestion ()).

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (4) to (7) above,
The performance control means is
When the specific game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of types of specific game states and the specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in a manner that satisfies a predetermined condition, the one specific game When a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state) is controlled based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the state, in the symbol game from which the specific result is derived, the second specific result suggestion production (For example, the second C time-saving transition suggesting performance) is not performed, and the second specific result suggesting performance can be performed before the new specific gaming state is controlled.

In the gaming machine described in (8) above, even if a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one specific gaming state, a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state), but instead of controlling to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of a specific result after the end of one specific gaming state, the specific result (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state) ) is derived so that the second specific result suggestion performance (for example, the second C time saving transition suggestion performance (C5 time saving transition suggestion performance)) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a specific result has been derived, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to not being immediately controlled to a specific gaming state. Then, after the specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived, by performing the second specific result suggesting performance before being controlled to a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time saving gaming state), the interest is increased. It becomes possible to increase the

In addition, "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" is similar to the explanation in (7) above, for example, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, control is performed to a specific gaming state based on this specific result. This corresponds to a case where it is possible to do so (for example, when the number of repeated time reductions based on the C5 time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in one time-saving game state).

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (4) to (8) above,
The performance control means is
When the specific game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of types of specific game states and the specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in a manner that satisfies a predetermined condition, the one specific game When a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state) is controlled based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the state, in the symbol game from which the specific result is derived, the second specific result suggestion production The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the lottery result is the predetermined result (for example, a loss) or that there is a possibility that the lottery result is the predetermined result.

In the gaming machine described in (9) above, even if a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one specific gaming state, a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state), but instead of controlling to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of a specific result after the end of one specific gaming state, the specific result (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state) ) is derived, the second specific result suggestion performance (e.g., second C time-saving transition suggestion performance (C5 time-saving transition suggestion performance)) is not performed, and the lottery result is a predetermined result (for example, a loss). The system is designed to provide an effect that indicates that there is a possibility of a certain result or a predetermined result. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a specific result (for example, C5 time saving winning) has been derived, and it is possible to prevent the player from immediately being controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, C5 time saving gaming state). This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to this. Moreover, since the control is performed to a new specific gaming state (for example, the C5 time-saving gaming state) based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific gaming state, the interest is increased when controlled to this new specific gaming state. becomes possible.

In addition, "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" is similar to the explanation in (8) above, for example, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, control is made to a specific gaming state based on this specific result. This corresponds to a case where it is possible to do so (for example, when the number of repeated time reductions based on the C5 time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in one time-saving game state).

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (4) to (9) above,
The performance control means is
When the specific gaming state is controlled to one of the plurality of specific gaming states and the specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived in the one specific gaming state, after the one specific gaming state ends. When controlled to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of the specific result, the symbol game before the symbol game controlled to the new specific gaming state (before the end condition of the time-saving gaming state is satisfied) In the previous symbol game), it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the specific game state is controlled or that there is a possibility of being controlled to the specific game state.

In the gaming machine described in (10) above, even if a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one specific gaming state, a new specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state), but instead of controlling to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of a specific result after the end of one specific gaming state, the control is to this new specific gaming state. In the symbol game until the game is played, an effect is performed to show that the game is controlled to a specific game state or that there is a possibility of being controlled to the specific game state. By doing this, it is possible not only to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur when one specific gaming state ends, but also to increase interest by indicating that there is a possibility of being controlled to a new specific gaming state. becomes possible.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
A holding means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of storing starting information related to special symbols;
Prefetch effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing a prefetch effect on the starting information stored by the holding means;
Equipped with
The prefetch performance control means is
If specific starting information from which the specific result (for example, C1 time reduction, C2 time reduction, C3 time reduction, C4 time reduction, C5 time reduction) is stored by the holding means, A specific look-ahead that suggests that the specific starting information is or may be stored by the holding means before a symbol game from which a specific result is derived is played. It is characterized by the ability to perform performances.

In the gaming machine described in (11) above, specific starting information from which a specific result (for example, C1 time reduction, C2 time reduction, C3 time reduction, C4 time reduction, C5 time reduction) may be derived is pending. If the specific starting information is stored or held by the means, it is possible to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests that the specific starting information may be held. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of anticipation for the derivation of a specific result before the symbol game in which the specific result is derived is performed, and it is possible to increase interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one of the plurality of specific gaming states, a new result based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the one specific gaming state. can be controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, C5 time-saving gaming state),
The prefetch performance control means is
If the specific starting information is stored by the holding means and a specific condition is satisfied, the specific pre-reading effect can be performed.

In the gaming machine described in (12) above, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one specific gaming state, a new result based on the derivation of the specific result is generated after the one specific gaming state ends. If it is possible to control to a specific gaming state (for example, C5 time saving gaming state), not only is specific starting information from which a specific result (for example, C5 time saving winning) may be derived, but also specific When the following conditions are met, a specific look-ahead effect is performed. By doing this, even though a specific look-ahead effect has been performed, a decrease in interest that may occur when control is not performed to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of a specific result after the end of one specific gaming state can be avoided. It becomes possible to suppress this.

In addition, "specific conditions" means, for example, a specific result (for example, per C5 time saving) rather than the remaining period controlled by one specific gaming state (for example, the number of remaining time reductions in the current time saving gaming state). This corresponds to the fact that the period (for example, the number of time-savings in the C5 time-saving game state) controlled by the specific game state (for example, the C5 time-saving game state) that is operated based on the game is longer. In other words, if the period in which the specific gaming state that operates based on the specific result is controlled is shorter than the remaining period in which the specific gaming state is controlled, it is difficult to derive the specific result after the end of one specific gaming state. The game is not controlled to a new specific gaming state based on the game. Therefore, after the end of one specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a specific look-ahead effect when a new specific gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of a specific result, and a new specific gaming state is created based on the derivation of a specific result. When the game state is not controlled, a specific pre-read performance is not performed or the ratio of performance is made relatively low.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
The prefetch performance control means is
Even if the specific starting information is stored by the holding means, the specific pre-reading effect is not performed, and the effect is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific starting information is stored by the holding means. It is characterized by being able to perform the following.

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) is derived in one specific gaming state, a new specific game based on the derivation of the specific result is performed after the end of the one specific gaming state. If the state (for example, C5 time saving game state) is controllable, even if specific starting information from which a specific result (for example, C5 time saving win) may be derived is withheld, specific conditions may not be met. If not, the specific look-ahead effect is not performed, and the effect is such that it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific start information is being held. By doing this, even though a specific look-ahead effect has been performed, a decrease in interest that may occur when control is not performed to a new specific gaming state based on the derivation of a specific result after the end of one specific gaming state can be avoided. It becomes possible to suppress this.

In addition, when making the gaming machine described in (13) above subordinate to (12) above,
The prefetch performance control means is
Even if the specific starting information is stored by the holding means, if the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, the number of time savings in a new specific gaming state is smaller than the remaining number of time savings in one specific gaming state) (case), it is preferable that it is possible to perform an effect in which it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific start information is stored by the holding means, without performing the specific pre-read effect.

In addition, the above-mentioned "effects in which it is difficult or impossible to understand that specific starting information is on hold" refers to, for example, when the lottery result is only pending and the result is a loss. This corresponds to a performance that is performed when information is not held and a look-ahead performance is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 14, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

[15-15. Appendix 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As a gaming machine of this kind, the variable display result is "Jackpot", the jackpot type is controlled to a probability change state (high probability low base state) based on the jackpot type of "Suddenly certain", and the jackpot type is "Suddenly shortened time". A gaming machine that enters a normal state (low probability low base state) based on the above is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-094511 (see especially paragraph [0284]).

For example, new game features related to time saving have been disclosed in recent years, such as the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2013-094511. Although gaming machines with such new game features related to time-saving can increase interest, in some cases they may end up putting players at a disadvantage, and may even reduce interest. .

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suppress the decline in interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 15 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A normal gaming state, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and can provide a predetermined gaming value. a gaming state control means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of controlling any gaming state including a gaming state (e.g., jackpot gaming state);
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) that can be controlled based on the first condition being satisfied (for example, the jackpot gaming state has ended), and a second condition being satisfied. A second specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) that can be controlled based on the fact that the game has reached the ceiling (for example, reaching the ceiling) and the third condition is satisfied (for example, the time-saving hit has been derived). The present invention is characterized in that at least two or more specific gaming states are included among the third specific gaming states (for example, C time-saving gaming state) that can be controlled by the user.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, not only is it possible to control to a specific gaming state no matter which condition is met, but also the specific gaming state to be controlled is different depending on the condition that is met. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide new game characteristics that have never existed before, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

Note that "two or more specific gaming states" refers to gaming machines that are equipped with the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state without being equipped with the third specific gaming state, and gaming machines that are not equipped with the second specific gaming state. A gaming machine equipped with a first specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state, a gaming machine equipped with a second specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state without being equipped with the first specific gaming state, and a gaming machine equipped with a second specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state, and a first specific gaming state. It may be any gaming machine equipped with a specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a symbol control means (for example, a main CPU) capable of performing a symbol game in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner when a predetermined condition is met and a predetermined lottery result is derived,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling the special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) when a special result (for example, jackpot) is derived as the predetermined lottery result,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the special gaming state ends,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times at least in the normal gaming state,
The third condition is characterized in that it is a condition that is satisfied when a specific result (for example, C time saving win) is derived as the predetermined lottery result.

The gaming machine described in (2) above defines the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition, and by defining the first condition, second condition, and third condition in this way, this It becomes clear that new game features that have never been seen before can be provided, and it becomes possible to increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The third condition includes a predetermined third condition (for example, that the C4 time saving rate is derived) and a specific third condition different from the predetermined third condition (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time saving terms). is derived), and
The gaming state control means includes:
When the predetermined third condition is satisfied, control is possible to a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, C4 time saving gaming state),
It is characterized in that when the specific third condition is satisfied, control is possible to a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states).

The gaming machine described in (3) above makes it clear that the game machine is controlled to a specific gaming state that is different depending on whether a predetermined third condition is met or a specific third condition is met. In this way, by setting a plurality of third conditions and allowing the specific game state to be controlled to be different depending on the third condition that is satisfied, it is possible to provide a new game experience that has never been seen before. This makes it possible to increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
The predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the C4 time-saving gaming state) and the specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states) have different degrees of advantage for the player ( For example, the number of time reductions differs).

The gaming machine described in (4) above has a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, a C4 time-saving gaming state) that can be controlled when a predetermined third condition (for example, that a C4 time-saving win is derived) is satisfied. ), a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states that can be controlled when a specific third condition is satisfied (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states is derived)). ), the degree of advantage for the player differs, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, "the degree of advantage for the player is different" means, for example, the period during which control is performed in a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions in the C4 time saving gaming state) and the period during which control is performed in a specific third specific gaming state. (for example, the number of time-saving gaming states of any of the time-saving gaming states C1 to C3) or when the specific gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, a predetermined third specific gaming state ( For example, this corresponds to a case where the time-saving performance in the C4 time-saving gaming state) is different from the time-saving performance in a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states).

(5) In the gaming machine described in (3) or (4) above,
The predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the C4 time-saving gaming state) and the specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states) meet at least some of their respective end conditions. It is characterized by different .

The gaming machine described in (5) above is configured to meet at least part of the termination conditions of a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, C4 time-saving gaming state) and a specific third specific gaming state (for example, C1 to C3). Since at least some of the termination conditions for the time-saving gaming states are different from each other, it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, "at least a part of the termination conditions of a predetermined third specific gaming state and at least a portion of the termination conditions of a specific third specific gaming state are different" means, for example, One of the end conditions for a specific game state (for example, C4 time-saving game state) is that the symbol game is played 50 times, and for a specific third specific game state (for example, C1 time-saving game state), the symbol game is played 50 times. This corresponds to a case where one of the termination conditions is that the process be repeated 100 times.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (3) to (5) above,
When the third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C time-saving win is derived) when the game state control means is controlled to the first specific game state (for example, the A time-saving game state), the first It is characterized in that it is possible to perform processing (for example, processing when a C time saving win is derived in the A time saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine described in (6) above, when the third condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state), the first processing (for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, the C time-saving win is derived). This clarifies that it is possible to carry out (processing of cases).

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
In performing the first process (for example, the process when the C time saving win is derived in the A time saving gaming state), the gaming state control means changes the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) to the above. It is characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (7) above performs the first processing ( For example, as a process when C time saving winning is derived in A time saving gaming state, it is possible to switch from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state, that is, to end the first specific gaming state and start the third specific gaming state. This makes it possible to control the state.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
When the predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C4 time saver hit is derived in the A time saver game state), the game state control means performs the first process (for example, the process when the C time saver hit is derived in the A time saver game state). is derived), the first specific gaming state (e.g., time-saving gaming state A) may not be switched to the third specific gaming state (e.g., time-saving gaming state C); If the condition is satisfied (for example, when any of C1 to C3 time saving is derived), the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) to the third specific gaming state (for example, C1 to C3 is derived). The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to any of the C3 time-saving gaming states.

In the gaming machine described in (8) above, when the third condition is satisfied while being controlled to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) (for example, when C time saving winning is derived), The first process (for example, the process when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving gaming state) is performed. In this first process, when a predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when C4 time saving winning is derived), the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) is changed to the third specific gaming state (for example, , C time saving gaming state), but if a specific third condition is satisfied (for example, when any of C1 to C3 time saving is derived), the first specific gaming state (e.g. , A time-saving game state) to a third specific game state (for example, C1 time-saving game state). In this way, even if the third condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, it may not be possible to switch to the third specific gaming state. Since it is possible to switch when a winning result is derived, it is possible to increase the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (8) above,
When the third condition is satisfied (for example, when C time-saving winning is derived) while being controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state), the gaming state control means controls the second specific gaming state (for example, when C time-saving winning is derived). It is characterized in that it is possible to perform processing (for example, processing when a C time saving win is derived in the B time saving game state).

The gaming machine described in (9) above performs the second process (for example, when the third condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) (for example, when C time saving winning is derived). For example, it is made clear that it is possible to perform the process in the case where C time saving winning is derived in B time saving gaming state.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
In performing the second process (for example, the process when the C time saving winning is derived in the B time saving gaming state), the gaming state control means is configured to change the above from the second specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (10) above performs the second processing ( For example, as a process when the C time saving win is derived in the B time saving gaming state, it is possible to switch from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state, that is, the second specific gaming state is ended and the third specific gaming state is This makes it possible to control the state.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
When the predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C4 time saver hit is derived in the B time saver game state), the game state control means performs the second process (for example, the process when the C time saver hit is derived in the B time saver game state). is derived), the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) may not be switched to the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state); If the condition is satisfied (for example, when any one of C1 to C3 time saving is derived), the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) to the third specific gaming state (for example, C1 to C3 is derived). The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to any of the time-saving game states (C3 time-saving game states).

When the gaming machine described in (11) above is controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state), when the third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C time-saving winning is derived), The second process (for example, the process when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving gaming state) is performed. In this second process, if a predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when C4 time saving winning is derived), the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) is changed to the third specific gaming state (for example, , C time saving gaming state), but if a specific third condition is satisfied (for example, when any of C1 to C3 time saving is derived), the second specific gaming state (e.g. , B time-saving gaming state) to the third specific gaming state (for example, any of the time-saving gaming states C1 to C3). In this way, even if the third condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state, it may not be possible to switch to the third specific gaming state.If the specific third condition is satisfied (for example, C1 to C3 time reduction Since it is possible to switch when a winning result is derived, it is possible to increase the interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (3) to (11) above,
When the game state control means is controlled to the predetermined third specific game state (for example, the C4 time-saving game state), when the specific third condition is satisfied (for example, one of the C1 to C3 time-saving game states). is derived), it is possible to perform the third process (for example, the process when any of the C1 to C3 time savers is derived in the C time saver gaming state).

In the gaming machine described in (12) above, a specific third condition is satisfied in a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the C4 time-saving gaming state) (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time-saving is derived). ), it is made clear that it is possible to perform the third process (for example, the process when any of the C1 to C3 time savers is derived in the C time saver gaming state).

(13) In the gaming machine described in (12) above,
In performing the third process, the gaming state control means changes from the predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the C4 time saving gaming state) to the specific third specific gaming state (for example, the C1 to C3 time saving gaming states). It is characterized by being configured so that it can be switched to either

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, a specific third condition is satisfied in a predetermined third specific gaming state (for example, the C4 time-saving gaming state) (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time-saving is derived). ), as a third process (for example, a process when any of the C1 to C3 time savings is derived in the C time saving gaming state), a predetermined third specific gaming state is switched to a specific third specific gaming state. In other words, it is possible to end the predetermined third specific gaming state and control to a specific third specific gaming state.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (3) to (13) above,
When the game state control means is controlled to the specific third specific game state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving game states), when the predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, the C4 time-saving game state). is derived), it is possible to perform the fourth process (for example, the process when the C4 time saving win is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time saving game states).

In the gaming machine described in (14) above, a predetermined third condition is satisfied in a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states) (for example, when a C4 time-saving hit is derived). ), it is clarified that it is possible to perform the fourth process (for example, the process when any one of the C4 time saving hits is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time saving game states).

(15) In the gaming machine described in (14) above,
The game state control means performs the fourth process (for example, the process when any one of the C4 time savers is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time saver game states), when the predetermined third condition is satisfied. (For example, even if the C4 time saving winning is derived), the third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time saving gaming states) can be continued. Features.

In the gaming machine described in (15) above, the predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, C4 This clarifies that it is possible to continue a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of the C1 to C3 time-saving gaming states) even if a time-saving win is derived.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 15, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[15-16. Appendix 16]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a variable display of symbols is performed when a predetermined condition is met, and when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As a gaming machine of this kind, the variable display result is "Jackpot", the jackpot type is controlled to a probability change state (high probability low base state) based on the jackpot type of "Suddenly certain", and the jackpot type is "Suddenly shortened time". A gaming machine that enters a normal state (low probability low base state) based on the above is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-094511 (see especially paragraph [0284]).

For example, new game features related to time saving have been disclosed in recent years, such as the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2013-094511. In a gaming machine that has new game features related to time saving, for example, by making improvements to the fluctuation patterns, it is possible to further expand the range of game features and increase interest.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 16 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, display device 7) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A lottery result including a specific result (e.g., C time saving win) and a special result (e.g., jackpot) with a higher gaming value given to the player than the specific result, by displaying a variable symbol on the display means. A symbol control means (for example, a main CPU, a sub CPU) that can perform a symbol game that can derive any one of the symbols;
A gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU) capable of controlling the gaming state;
Equipped with
The game state control means sets a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) as a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a special game that can be controlled when the special result is derived in the symbol game. state (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (e.g., A time-saving gaming state), a second specific gaming state (e.g., B-time-saving gaming state), and a third specific gaming state (e.g., C-time-saving gaming state). At least two or more gaming states are included,
The symbol control means is
When the specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state), in the first specific gaming state, the first variation pattern (for example, from variation pattern table A or variation pattern table A) is selected. selected fluctuation pattern) can be selected,
When the specific gaming state includes the second specific gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state), the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or these) is included in the second specific gaming state. A variation pattern selected from one of the variation pattern tables of the variation pattern tables) can be selected.
When the specific gaming state includes the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state), the third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or these) is included in the third specific gaming state. The present invention is characterized in that a variation pattern selected from any of the variation pattern tables among the variation pattern tables can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (e.g., A time-saving gaming state), a second specific gaming state (e.g., B-time-saving gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (e.g., B time-saving gaming state). At least two or more gaming states are included among the three specific gaming states (for example, C time-saving gaming state). Then, when the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, time-saving gaming state A), a first variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table A or variation pattern table A). can be selected. Furthermore, if the specific gaming state includes a second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state), the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or one of these variation pattern tables) A variation pattern selected from any of the variation pattern tables can be selected. In addition, if the constant gaming state includes a third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state), a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or one of these variation pattern tables) A variation pattern selected from any of the variation pattern tables can be selected. By doing this, it becomes possible to display the fluctuating symbols in different fluctuating patterns depending on the type of specific gaming state, making it possible to provide a new game experience that has never existed before, and making it more interesting. It becomes possible to increase the

Note that "two or more specific gaming states" refers to gaming machines that are equipped with the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state without being equipped with the third specific gaming state, and gaming machines that are not equipped with the second specific gaming state. A gaming machine equipped with a first specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state, a gaming machine equipped with a second specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state without being equipped with the first specific gaming state, and a gaming machine equipped with a second specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state, and a first specific gaming state. It may be any gaming machine equipped with a specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

Furthermore, the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern may be the same variation pattern or may be different variation patterns. Similarly, the first variation pattern and the third variation pattern may be the same variation pattern, or may be different variation patterns. Further, the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern may be the same variation pattern, or may be different variation patterns.

Note that the "first variation pattern" described in (1) above corresponds to the "variation pattern table A" described in the specification, or the "variation pattern" selected from the variation pattern table A, for example. . Similarly, the "second variation pattern" described in (1) above is any variation pattern table from "variation pattern table B-1" to "variation pattern table B-3" described in the specification, or , for example, corresponds to a "variation pattern" selected from one of the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3. Further, the "third variation pattern" described in (1) above is any variation pattern table from "variation pattern table C-1" to "variation pattern table C-4" described in the specification, or For example, it corresponds to a "variation pattern" selected from one of the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling the first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) ends;
The first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A) is a variation pattern that can be selected in the first specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends. It is characterized by certain things.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A) ends when the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) ends. It is made clear that this is a selectable variation pattern in the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state) after the above.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table B-2 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-2) is a variation pattern of the symbol game in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a gaming state where the variable probability flag is off). When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the ceiling is reached), the variation pattern is selectable in the subsequent game state (for example, B time saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in (3) above, when the number of symbol games in a predetermined gaming state (for example, the game state with variable probability flag off) reaches a predetermined number, in the subsequent gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state), This clarifies that the selectable variation pattern is the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B-2 or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-2).

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The third variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or any one of these variation pattern tables) is selected from the specified pattern by the symbol control means. When a result (for example, time saving win) is derived, it is a variation pattern that can be selected in a subsequent gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (3) above uses a third variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or any one of these variation pattern tables). ) is a variation pattern that can be selected in the subsequent game state (for example, C time-saving game state) when a specific result (for example, time-saving win) is derived.

Note that, as described above, the third variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or any of these variation pattern tables) is used as the second variation pattern. It may be the same as the variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or any of these variation pattern tables), or it may be different. good.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific result (for example, time saving win) includes a first specific result (for example, C2 time saving win), and a second specific result (for example, C1 time saving win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific result. contains at least
The symbol control means is
After the first specific result (for example, C2 time saving) is derived, a predetermined third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1, C-2, or any one of these variation pattern tables) is derived. It is possible to perform a variable display of the symbol using a variable pattern selected from a variable pattern table,
After the second specific result (for example, C1 time saving) is derived, a specific third variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern tables C-3, C-4, or any one of these variation pattern tables) is derived. The above-mentioned symbol can be displayed in a variable manner using a variable pattern selected from a variable pattern table.

The gaming machine described in (5) above displays the symbol variation display after the first specific result (for example, C2 time saving hit) is derived (for example, C2 time saving gaming state) and after the second specific result (for example, C2 time saving game state). This clarifies that the symbol fluctuation display can be performed in different fluctuation patterns after the C1 time saving win) is derived (for example, in the C1 time saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the speed of progress of the game depending on the type of specific game state.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The symbol control means controls the third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table) after the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) in the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state). C-3) It is possible to perform a variable display of the symbol with a different variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern table C-4 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-4). shall be.

The gaming machine described in (6) above changes the fluctuation pattern after the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) in the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state). It is. In this way, by changing the fluctuation pattern according to the progress of the game, it is possible to change the progress of the game and suppress a drop in interest. In addition, the above-mentioned "after the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" corresponds to, for example, the third specific game state. However, this is not limited to this, and the meaning of "after the symbol game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" includes the gaming state after the third specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). It may be included.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The symbol control means controls the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table) after the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) in the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state). A variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-2 or variation pattern table B-2) that is different from the variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-1 or variation pattern table B-1). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner.

The gaming machine described in (7) above changes the fluctuation pattern after the symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) in the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state). It is. In this way, by changing the fluctuation pattern according to the progress of the game, it is possible to change the progress of the game and suppress a drop in interest. Note that "after the symbol game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" corresponds to, for example, a second specific game state. However, this is not limited to this, and the meaning of "after the recorded symbol game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" includes the gaming state after the second specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). It may be included.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The symbol control means is
After the specific result (for example, C2 time saving per, C3 time saving per) is derived in the normal gaming state (for example, C2 time saving gaming state, C3 working time saving gaming state), the third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C -1 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-1), while it is possible to perform a variation display of the symbol,
( For example, C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 time-saving gaming state), the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner using the third fluctuating pattern (for example, fluctuating pattern table C-2 or a fluctuating pattern selected from fluctuating pattern table C-2). It is characterized by the fact that it can be carried out.

The gaming machine described in (8) above is configured to operate after a specific result (e.g., C2 time saving, C3 time saving) is derived in the normal gaming state, and in the first specific gaming state (e.g., A time saving gaming state) or in the first specific gaming state (e.g., A time saving gaming state). This clarifies that the fluctuation pattern may be different after a specific result (for example, C2 time saving win, C3 time saving win) is derived in 2 specific gaming states (for example, B time saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the speed of progress of the game depending on the type of specific game state.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
The symbol control means is
After the condition for controlling to the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) in the normal gaming state is satisfied (for example, reaching the ceiling), the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B- 1 or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-1).
A condition under which the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) or the third specific gaming state (for example, C working time saving gaming state) is controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) is After the symbol is established (for example, the ceiling has been reached), the symbol is moved with a variation pattern different from the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B-3 or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-3). It is characterized by being able to display fluctuations in

The gaming machine described in (9) above can be controlled in the second specific gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state) after the condition for controlling is established (for example, the ceiling has been reached) and in the first specific gaming state (for example, After the conditions for controlling the second specific gaming state (e.g., B time-saving gaming state) in the A time-saving gaming state) or the third specific gaming state (e.g., C working-time-saving gaming state) are satisfied (e.g., the ceiling has been reached). This clarifies that the fluctuation patterns can be different. By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the speed of progress of the game depending on the gaming state when the conditions for controlling to the second specific gaming state are satisfied.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The symbol control means is
The symbol in which the conditions under which the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) is controlled in the normal gaming state and the conditions under which the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) is controlled are the same. After it is established in the game, it is possible to perform a variable display of the symbol using the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B-1 or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-1). It is characterized by

The gaming machine described in (10) above has a condition for controlling to a second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) and a third specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) in the same symbol game in the normal gaming state. After the condition to be controlled by the state) is satisfied, the symbol is displayed fluctuating in a second fluctuating pattern (for example, fluctuating pattern table B-1 or a fluctuating pattern selected from fluctuating pattern table B-1). This clearly shows that it is possible to do so. In addition, "after the conditions for controlling to the second specific gaming state and the conditions for controlling to the third specific gaming state in the normal gaming state are established in the same symbol game", the second variation pattern ( For example, since this is a gaming state in which symbols are displayed fluctuating in the fluctuating pattern table B-1 or a fluctuating pattern selected from the fluctuating pattern table B-1, the second specific gaming state (e.g. , B time-saving gaming state), but is not limited to this.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
The symbol control means is
Conditions (e.g. reaching the ceiling) under which the normal gaming state is controlled to the second specific gaming state (e.g. B time-saving gaming state) and conditions under which the third specific gaming state (e.g. C time-saving gaming state) is controlled (For example, C3 time saving hit) is established in the same symbol game, the third fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table C-1 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table C-1) The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner.

The gaming machine described in (11) above has a condition (for example, reaching the ceiling) that is controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state) and a third specific gaming state in the same symbol game in the normal gaming state. (For example, C time saving game state) After the condition (for example, C3 time saving hit) is established, the third variation pattern (for example, from variation pattern table C-1 or variation pattern table C-1) is established. This clarifies that it is possible to display symbols in a variable manner (selected variation pattern). In addition, "after the conditions to be controlled to the second specific gaming state and the conditions to be controlled to the third specific gaming state in the normal gaming state are established in the same symbol game", the third variation pattern ( For example, since this is a gaming state in which symbols are displayed fluctuating in the fluctuating pattern table C-1 or a fluctuating pattern selected from the fluctuating pattern table C-1, it can be interpreted normally as a third specific gaming state (e.g. , C3 time-saving gaming state), but is not limited to this.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
The special results include a first special result (for example, a jackpot for the selected symbol command "z4") and a second special result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special result (for example, a jackpot for the selected symbol command "z4"). z5” jackpot) and are included.
The symbol control means is
When the special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the derivation of the first special result (for example, jackpot of selected symbol command "z4"), the special gaming state has ended. In a subsequent gaming state (for example, time saving gaming state A), the symbols may be displayed in a variable manner using the first variable pattern (for example, variable pattern table A or a variable pattern selected from variable pattern table A). While possible,
When the special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the second special result (for example, jackpot of selected symbol command "z5") being derived, the special gaming state has ended. In a subsequent gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the symbol is displayed in a special variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern table D or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D) that is different from the first variation pattern. It is possible to display fluctuations in
The special fluctuation patterns include a first special fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern table D-1 or a fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-1) and a second special fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern table D-2 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2).

The gaming machine described in (12) above is applicable when a first special result (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4") is derived, and when a second special result (for example, a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5") is derived. This clarifies that the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) after the special gaming state ends may be different depending on when a jackpot (big hit) is derived. Furthermore, if a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the derivation of a second special result (for example, a jackpot for the selected symbol command "z5"), after this special gaming state ends, The variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table D or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D) includes the first special variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern in the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern table D-1). (a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2) and a second special variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2 or the variation pattern table D-2). It is something.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (12) above,
The symbols include a first symbol (for example, a first special symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a second special symbol) different from the first symbol,
The symbol control means is
a first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU) capable of performing a first symbol game in which the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a lottery result for the first symbol is derived;
a second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU) capable of performing a second symbol game in which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a lottery result for the second symbol is derived;
The first special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-1 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-1) has an expected value of the number of fluctuation display times of the first symbol per unit time. In a fluctuation pattern that is higher than the expected value of the number of fluctuation displays of the second symbol per unit time (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol). can be,
The second special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-2 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-2) has an expected value of the number of fluctuation display times of the first symbol per unit time. In a fluctuation pattern that is lower than the expected value of the number of fluctuation displays of the second symbol per unit time (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol). It is characterized by certain things.

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, the first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern D-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-1) is, for example, the variation time of the first special symbol. is a variation pattern in which the average of the variation times of the second special symbols is shorter than the average variation time of the second special symbol, and the second special variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2 or the variation pattern table D-2). For example, this clarifies that the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

(14) In the gaming machine described in (13) or (12) above,
The first special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-1 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-1) is the special result (for example, the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-1) when the first fluctuation pattern is selected. , jackpot) is derived (that is, when a jackpot is derived as a result of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, it is selectable after the jackpot gaming state ends),
The second special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-2 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-2) is the special result (for example, the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-2) when the first special fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, it is a variation pattern that can be selected when a jackpot (for example, a jackpot) is derived (that is, when a jackpot is derived as a result of the second special symbol in a time-saving gaming state, it can be selected after the jackpot gaming state ends). shall be.

According to the gaming machine described in (14) above, the first special variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-1) is the first variation pattern. When selected, a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, and it is a variation pattern that can be selected in a game state after the special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on this special result ends. That is, a special result (eg, jackpot) is derived in the normal gaming state, and it is a variation pattern that can be selected in the gaming state after the special gaming state (eg, jackpot gaming state) based on this special result ends. Further, the second special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-2 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-2) is the first special fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table D-1 or the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table D-2). A special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived when a variation pattern (selected from pattern table D-1) is selected, and a special gaming state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) based on this special result ends. This is a variable pattern that can be selected in a later game state. That is, a special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived in a specific gaming state (e.g., time-saving gaming state), and selectable variations are made in the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) based on this special result. It's a pattern.

(15) In the gaming machine described in any one of (12) to (14) above,
The symbol control means is
In the symbol game when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) is satisfied (for example, reaching the ceiling) in the third specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state), the predetermined a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1, C-2, or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-1 or C-2) and the specific third variation pattern (for example, A plurality of the third variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table C-1) including variation pattern tables C-3, C-4, or a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-3 or C-4) - C-4 or a variation pattern selected from any of variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4), a specific third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C-4 or variation pattern selected from any of variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4) The variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-4) can be selected.

The gaming machine described in (15) above satisfies the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) in the third specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) (for example, reaching the ceiling). ), the symbol game when transitioning to the second specific gaming state (for example, the last symbol game before reaching the ceiling) is changed to a specific third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C-4 or variation pattern This clarifies that the variation pattern selected from Table C-4 can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 16, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

[15-17. Appendix 17]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-164365).

JP 2017-164365A discloses a gaming machine in which a door frame top unit is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit above the door frame left side unit and the door frame right side unit.

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 17 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A base member (for example, frame D4600),
a first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) and a second member (for example, upper unit D4700) that are detachable from the base member;
Equipped with
The first member is movable from a first position (e.g., an attachment position) where the first member is attached to the base member to a second position (e.g., a removal position) where the first member is separated from the base member;
When the second member is attached with the first member attached to the base member at the first position, movement of the first member can be restricted.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) is in the first position (for example, when the second member (for example, upper unit D4700) is not attached). movement from the first position to the second position (for example, the removal position) is not restricted, and movement from the first position to the second position can be restricted by attaching the second member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and provide a highly functional gaming machine. Furthermore, it is more preferable to place the first member in a locked state after the movement of the first member is restricted.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a first decorative part (e.g., first accessory piece S1), and the second member (e.g., upper unit D4700) has a second decorative part (e.g., When the first member and the second member are arranged adjacent to each other, the first decorative part and the second decorative part form one decorative part (for example, It is characterized by being configured to be able to form a complete accessory S).

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the first decorative part (e.g., the first accessory piece S1) and the second decorative part (e.g., the second accessory piece S1), neither of which forms a single decorative part by themselves, It becomes possible to form one accessory by simple assembly of the pieces S2). In particular, by simply attaching the second member (for example, the upper unit D4700) while the first member (for example, the side lens unit D4800) is attached at the first position (for example, the mounting position), the first decoration It is now possible to form one accessory without aligning the decorative part (for example, the first accessory piece S1) and the second decoration part (for example, the second accessory piece S2), which improves functionality. It becomes possible to provide high quality gaming machines.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) that can be housed inside the first member,
Even when the first member is attached to the base member (for example, the frame D4600), the third decorative portion is configured to be movable.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, even if the first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) is attached to the base member (for example, frame body D4600), the second member (for example, upper unit D4700) ) is not attached to the first member or the base member, the third decoration part is movable in the first position (for example, the attachment position). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily replace the third decorative part, and it becomes possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
When the second member (e.g., upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member (e.g., frame body D4600), movement of the third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) can be restricted. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, it is possible to restrict the movement of the third decorative part (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) with a simple configuration with a reduced number of parts, and it is highly functional. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (3) or (4) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a first light-transmitting portion (e.g., outer light guide plate D4856), and the third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet) is inserted through the first light-transmitting portion. D4850) is configured to be visible from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, the third decorative part (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) is visible from the outside via the first light-transmitting part (for example, the outer light guide plate D4856); It becomes possible to change the appearance simply by replacing the third decorative part, and it becomes possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (3) to (5) above,
The first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) has a fourth decorative portion (for example, inner decorative sheet D4870) that can be accommodated inside the first member,
Even if the first member is attached to the base member (for example, the frame D4600), the fourth decorative part is configured to be movable.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, in addition to the third decorative part (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850), the fourth decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) also has the second member (for example, As long as the upper unit D4700) is not attached to the first member or the base member, the third decorative portion is movable in the first position (for example, the attachment position). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily replace the fourth decorative part in addition to the third decorative part, and it becomes possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
When the second member (e.g., upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member (e.g., frame body D4600), movement of the fourth decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) can be restricted. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, the number of parts is reduced and the configuration is simple, and not only the third decorative part (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) but also the fourth decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) ), it becomes possible to restrict the movement of players, and it becomes possible to provide highly functional gaming machines.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
The first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) has a second light-transmitting part (for example, inner light guide plate D4876), and the fourth decorative part (for example, inner decorative sheet) is inserted through the second light-transmitting part. D4870) is configured to be visible from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, since the fourth decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) is visible from the outside via the second transparent part (for example, the inner light guide plate D4876), It is possible to change the appearance simply by replacing the fourth decorative part. Furthermore, a third decorative part (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) that can be visually recognized from the outside via the first light-transmitting part (e.g., outer light-guiding plate D4856) and a second light-transmitting part (e.g., inner light-guiding plate D4876) are provided. Since both the fourth decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) that can be seen from the outside through the fourth decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) can be seen, it is possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (8) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a non-light-transmitting part (e.g., inner decorative sheet D4870) between the third decorative part (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) and the fourth decorative part (e.g., inner decorative sheet D4870). For example, the fourth decorative part (e.g., the outer decorative sheet) is not visible or difficult to see from the first side (e.g., the inner side), and the fourth decorative part (e.g., the outer decorative sheet) is not visible or difficult to see from the first side (e.g., the inner side), and the fourth decorative part (e.g., the outer decorative sheet) is ) The third decorative part (for example, the inner decorative sheet) is configured to be invisible or difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, visibility is made different when viewed from the first side and when viewed from the second side, and Since an independent image can also be displayed on the screen, it is possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (8) above,
The first light-transmitting part and the second light-transmitting part are a first light guide plate (for example, outer light guide plate D4856) and a second light guide plate (for example, inner light guide plate D4876), respectively,
The first member (for example, side lens unit D4800) has a light emitting part (for example, LED array D4881, D4883) capable of emitting light at the end of the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate,
A first image appearing on the first light guide plate and a second image appearing on the second light guide plate are configured to be visible.

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, it becomes possible to visually recognize a composite image obtained by combining the first image and the second image, and it becomes possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
A locking means (for example, a locking member D4760) operable between a locked state in which the second member (for example, the upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member and an unlocked state in which the second member can be separated from the base member; , D4760L) and
a third member (for example, a glass unit) that covers the locking means;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, the locking means (for example, lock members D4760, D4760L) are covered by the third member (for example, a glass unit), so that the locking means can be easily touched by the operation section from the outside. I can't. Therefore, while it is possible to easily attach and detach the second member (for example, the upper unit D4700), it is possible to improve security.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 17, it is possible to further improve functionality.

[15-18. Appendix 18]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines have been known.

JP 2019-107322A discloses that the lens member is placed at a position that covers the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the board, outside of at least one end of the board, and on the back side of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the board. is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, is located outside of at least one edge of the board, and is located beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the board. discloses a game machine in which a base member is provided at a position where light emitted from an end of a lens member can be reflected.

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-107322, it is possible to suppress unevenness in irradiation through the lens member and increase interest.

However, gaming machines have a limited space for arranging light emitting means and the like. Even under such circumstances, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can perform a light-emitting effect to further enhance interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Appendix 18 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decorative device (for example, a first performance accessory 59E) that can perform a performance that is visible to the player,
The predetermined decorative device is
A substrate (for example, an LED board 5922E) on which a light emitting means (for example, a first front LED 5927E, a second front LED 5928E, a back LED 5929E) is arranged;
The light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, the first LED 5927E on the front side, the second LED 5928E on the front side, and the rear LED 5929E) can be incident, and the incident light is allowed to travel in a predetermined direction (for example, forward) so that the player can visually recognize it. A lens section (for example, a first lens 5925E, a second lens) that can cause a production section (for example, a first light emitting section 59251E, a second light emitting section 59252E, a front end surface 59216E of an upright section 59212E) to emit light. 5921E's flat plate part 59211E, second lens 5921E's upright part 59212E, third lens 5926E),
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, the first LED 5927E on the front side, the second LED 5928E on the front side, and the LED 5929E on the back side) is transmitted to the lens portion (for example, the first lens 5925E, the second lens 5921E). The flat plate part 59211E, the standing part 59212E of the second lens 5921E, and the third lens 5926E) make it possible for the player to see the presentation part (for example, the front of the first light emitting part 59251E, the second light emitting part 59252E, and the standing part 59212E). Since it is possible to cause the side end surface 59216E to emit light, it is possible to increase interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The light emitting means has a first light emitting means (for example, a first front LED 5927E, a second front LED 5928E) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a back LED 5929E),
The substrate (e.g., LED board 5922E) has a first light emitting means (e.g., first LED 5927E on the front side, second LED 5928E on the front side) arranged on a first surface (e.g., front side surface), and a second surface (e.g., A second light emitting means (for example, a back side LED5929E) is arranged on the back side surface),
The lens portion is
The light emitted from the first light emitting means (for example, the first LED 5927E on the front side, the second LED on the front side 5928E) is caused to travel in the predetermined direction (for example, forward), and the first effect section (for example, the first A first lens section (for example, a first lens 5925E, a third lens 5926E) that can cause the light emitting section 59251E and the second light emitting section 59252E to emit light;
The second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) disposed on the second surface (e.g., back side surface) that is a different surface from the first light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E). The light emitted from the second effect section (for example, the front side of the standing section 59212E) is made to travel in substantially the same direction (for example, forward) as the predetermined direction (for example, forward), and is visible to the player. It is preferable to have a second lens portion (for example, an upright portion 59212E) that can cause the end surface 59216E of the lens to emit light.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the second light emitting means (for example, , rear side LED 5929E) are arranged, the light emitted from the second light emitting means (for example, the rear side LED 5929E) is emitted in the same direction as the first light emitting means (for example, the front side first LED 5927E, the front side second LED 5928E). Since the second effect section (for example, the front end surface 59216E of the upright section 59212E) can be caused to emit light by moving in a certain predetermined direction (for example, forward), it can be used even when there is a limited space in which the light emitting means can be arranged. It becomes possible to perform performances that increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The lens portion is
a third lens section (for example, a flat plate section 59211E) that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting means (for example, the backside LED 5929E) to travel in a specific direction (for example, to the side) different from the predetermined direction (for example, the front); ),
The second lens portion (for example, the upright portion 59212E) is
It is preferable that the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) allows the light that has traveled in the specific direction (e.g., sideways) to travel in the predetermined direction (e.g., forward). .

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, the traveling direction of the light traveling in a specific direction (for example, side) by the third lens part (for example, flat plate part 59211E) is changed to a predetermined direction (for example, forward). This makes it possible to create an interesting performance even when there is a limit to the space in which the light emitting means can be placed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The second lens part (for example, the upright part 59212E) and the third lens part (for example, the flat plate part 59211E) are connected to each other so as to be substantially orthogonal to each other, and the second lens part (for example, the upright part 59212E) A connecting portion (for example, a corner of the second lens 5921E) in which the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E) is connected allows the light traveling in the specific direction (for example, to the side) to be connected to the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E). It is preferable to have a sloped portion (for example, sloped portion 59213E) that can be advanced in a predetermined direction (for example, forward).

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, the light traveling in a specific direction (e.g., to the side) is reflected by the inclined portion (e.g., the inclined portion 59213E) and directed in a predetermined direction (e.g., forward). Therefore, the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is attached to a second surface (for example, the back side surface) that is different from the predetermined direction (for example, the front side) of the board (for example, the LED board 5922E). Even if there is a limited space in which the light emitting means can be placed, it is possible to perform a performance that increases interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
At least the substrate (for example, LED board 5922E) is disposed between the first lens section (for example, first lens 5925E) and the third lens section (for example, flat plate section 59211E),
The second lens portion (for example, the upright portion 59212E) is
The lens is cut along the circumferential direction, and the substrate (for example, the LED board 5922E) is cut between the first lens section (for example, the first lens 5925E) and the third lens section (for example, the flat plate section 59211E). It is preferable to arrange it radially outward.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, since the second lens portion (for example, the upright portion 59212E) is lens-cut along the circumferential direction, light cannot be focused on the lens-cut portion. can. Further, due to the lens cut, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the radially inner side of the second lens portion (for example, the upright portion 59212E) from the outside (for example, the player), and ) It is possible to prevent the interest from being unnecessarily lost due to the board (for example, the LED board 5922E) placed on the radially inner side being visible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first effect section (for example, first light emitting section 59251E, second light emitting section 59252E) emitted by the first lens section (for example, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) can emit surface light. can be,
The second effect part (for example, the front end surface of the upright part 59212E) emitted by the second lens part (for example, the upright part 59212E) is different from the first effect part (for example, the first light emitting part 59251E). , the second light emitting section 59252E) is preferably able to emit edge light on the radially outer side.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, the second presentation section (for example, the front end surface of the standing section 59212E) is the first presentation section (for example, the first light emission section 59251E, the second light emission section 59252E). Since edge light is emitted at the outer periphery, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that highlights the outline of the first effect part (for example, the first light emitting part 59251E, the second light emitting part 59252E), making it possible to increase interest. .

(7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A predetermined hole (e.g., hole 59215E) is formed in the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E), and a connector (e.g., connector 5930E) connected to the substrate (e.g., LED board 5922E) is formed in the predetermined hole. Preferably, it is located in a hole (for example, hole 59215E).

According to the game machine described in (7) above, since the thickness of the connector (for example, connector 5930E) can be absorbed by the thickness of the third lens part (for example, flat plate part 59211E), ) There is no need to provide an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of , and it is possible to make the device more compact.

(8) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first lens section (for example, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the substrate (for example, LED board 5922E) are arranged so that the first lens section (for example, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the It is arranged with a predetermined space (e.g., a predetermined space) between it and the board (e.g., LED board 5922E),
It is preferable that a connector (eg, connector 5930E) connected to the board (eg, LED board 5922E) be arranged in the predetermined space.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, a predetermined space (e.g., a predetermined space) is provided between the first lens portion (e.g., first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the board (e.g., LED board 5922E). space), the front side of the first lens portion (for example, the first lens 5925E and the third lens 5926E) can emit surface light. Furthermore, a connector (e.g., connector 5930E) connected to the board (e.g., LED board 5922E) is connected to the first lens portion (e.g., first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the board (e.g., LED board 5922E). By arranging it in a predetermined space (for example, a predetermined space) between the connectors, the predetermined space can be effectively utilized, and there is no need to provide an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of the connector (for example, connector 5930E). This makes it possible to make it more compact.

(9) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is preferable that the second lens part (for example, the upright part 59212E) is configured to cover a radially outer end of the first lens part (for example, the first lens 5925E).

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, the second lens portion (for example, the upright portion 59212E) is configured to cover the radially outer end of the first lens portion (for example, the first lens 5925E). Therefore, the light emitted from the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) disposed on the second surface (for example, the back side surface) of the substrate (for example, the LED board 5922E) is transmitted to the first lens. (for example, the first lens 5925E), it is possible to create an interesting performance even when there is a limited space for arranging the light emitting means.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A specific hole (for example, a hole 59214E) is formed at a predetermined portion on the radially inner side of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E), and the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is formed in the specific hole. (for example, hole 59214E).

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, the second light emitting means (for example, the back side Since the LED 5929E) is arranged, light can be emitted in a wide range from the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) toward the outer circumference of the third lens section (for example, the flat plate section 59211E). For example, when the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is arranged along the outer periphery of the third lens section (for example, the flat plate section 59211E), the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E)
The number of light emitting means (for example, back side LED5929E) becomes relatively large. In this regard, since the second light emitting means is arranged radially inside the third lens part (for example, the flat plate part 59211E), the second light emitting means is arranged along the outer peripheral part of the third lens part (for example, the flat plate part 59211E). It becomes possible to reduce the number of second light emitting means (for example, back side LEDs 5929E) compared to the case where the second light emitting means (for example, back side LEDs 5929E) are arranged.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E) is configured to cause the second light emitting means (for example, the backside LED 5929E) to be disposed in the specific hole (for example, the hole 59214E). It is preferable that the backside LED 5929E) has a thickness that does not protrude.

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, since the thickness of the second light emitting means (for example, the backside LED 5929E) can be absorbed by the thickness of the third lens part (for example, the flat plate part 59211E), the second There is no need to provide an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of the light emitting means (for example, the backside LED 5929E), and it is possible to make the device more compact.

(12) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Behind the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E), there is a specific decoration device different from the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) that can perform a performance that is visible to the player. Further comprising a decorative device (for example, a second performance accessory 60E),
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) are moved from the first position (for example, the standby position). configured to operate in a second position (e.g., a presentation position);
At the second position (for example, the performance position),
The predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) are arranged with a predetermined space,
While both the predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) can perform a light emission effect,
For a part or all of the area where the predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) overlap in front view, the predetermined decoration device It is preferable that it is possible to cause the specific decorative device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) to emit light without causing the first performance accessory 59E to emit light.

According to the gaming machine described in (12) above, in the second position (for example, the performance position), a predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and a specific decorative device (for example, the second performance Since the accessories 60E) are arranged with a predetermined space, it is possible to give an impact to the player. In addition, although both a predetermined decorative device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) and a specific decoration device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) can perform a luminous effect, they overlap when viewed from the front. In some or all of the parts, a specific decorative device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) is made to emit light without causing a predetermined decoration device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) to emit light. Therefore, the visibility of a specific decorative device (for example, the second performance accessory 60E) that emits light on the back side of a predetermined decoration device (for example, the first performance accessory 59E) can be highlighted, and the interest can be increased. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 18, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

201, 1201, 2201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 2301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120, 5120 1st starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 2nd starting port 2126, 5125A, 5125B Passage gate D4600 Frame D4800 Side lens unit D4700 Upper unit 59E 1st performance accessory 60E 2nd performance accessory 592E Front lens part 5927E Front side LED
5928E Backside LED
5922E LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decoration device capable of executing a performance that is visible to a player,
The predetermined decorative device is
a substrate on which a light emitting means is arranged;
a lens section capable of receiving light emitted from the light emitting means, allowing the entered light to travel in a predetermined direction, and causing a production section visible to the player to emit light;
Equipped with
The light emitting means has a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means,
The substrate has a first light emitting means arranged on a first surface, a second light emitting means arranged on a second surface,
The lens portion is
a first lens section capable of causing light emitted from the first light emitting means to travel in the predetermined direction to cause a first effect section visible to the player to emit light;
The light emitted from the second light emitting means disposed on the second surface, which is a different surface from the first light emitting means, is allowed to travel in substantially the same direction as the predetermined direction so that the player can visually recognize the light. a second lens section that can cause the second production section to emit light;
a third lens portion that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting means to travel in a specific direction different from the predetermined direction;
has
The second lens part is capable of causing the light that has traveled in the specific direction by the third lens part to travel in the predetermined direction,
The second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected, and the connecting portion where the second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected is configured to direct the light traveling in the specific direction to the predetermined direction. It is formed in a shape that allows it to advance toward the
The second light emitting means is
Consists of multiple light emitting means,
a first specific direction light emitting means capable of emitting light in a first specific direction among the specific directions; and a second specific direction capable of emitting light in a second specific direction different from the first specific direction among the specific directions. A light emitting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images